THE
AMERICAN NATURALIST,
An lustre WMagazine
OF
NATURAL HIS LORE
EDITED BY
EDWARD D. COPE AnD J. S. KINGSLEY.
ASSISTED BY
W. N. LOCKINGTON, W. S. BAYLEY, CHARLES E. BEssEY, F., S. LEE,
JOHN A. RYDER, CLARENCE M. WEED, THOMAS
WILSON, C. O. WHITMAN.
è
s VOLUME XXIV.
MISSOURI
BOTANICAL
GARDEN.
Philadelphia :
FERRIS BROS., PUBLISHERS,
SIXTH AND ARCH STREETS.
1890.
1891.] ii n ONMMTS: i iii
CONTENTS.
PAGE.
On Excavations Made by Sea-Urchins. J. WALTER FEWKES ......- z
Instances of the Effects of Musical Sounds on kabiak- Rogert E. C.
RUNG a a E as ee re me eee 22, 123, 236
The History of Garden Trone ~ L. Proma a a Oy LaS 313, 719
Remarks on the Brain of the Seals. E. C. Sprrzka........-+..
— of the Pr ae = a LL Seba erai PEPEE for the Year
Calon B REYES o a eA eh ee een E S 31
Autotomy in the nye 4 uk ) E. A. Arpkiw o oo +s. 138
On Certain shui! a in the Flora of the phar EA Islands. J.
W è PONE Oe ee aa a a ea a a e ee 215
The Teeth as Saints of Evolution. W.C. CANHA. 2 2% «ss - ee 224
Genesis 5 the Actinocrinidæ. (Zllustrated.) EFS mus B. Keyes. 2...
On the T san Character of the St. Louis reas (Titustrated. )
2H.
Pe ea ae? ate) F wae “cag? Samy wien a. Sigs Chet SE ert i, SoA SPN ARR I ee ia te peed
The Knees of ‘the fecola Mop pe Behe ue ae ) Roperr H. Lamporn 333
From Brute to Man. CHARLES MORBIS ..... +++ + + + +s + e
Record of American Tooker. I S. K . 351, 489, ad 811, 1037, 1157
The Homologies of the Fins of Fishes. “(Ulasirated) i E D. Cop ; 401
A Zoological Reconnoissance in Grand Mañan: TER B iee eee
Erosive Agents in the Arid Regions. RALPH 8. Tan Aes Cee er o’ 455
The Concrescence Theory of the Vertebrate. ‘Mabey: * (Ilustrated. ) CHARLEs-
S pm a a a eS 501, 702
The es of Plant ax Animal Life Under Changing Conditions of
nment. PRRsimon PAASER =. =i ee aa ee 517 -
On the Cl cee tion of the Tastedinaté: Groon BAUR SS. o es 530
The — e Evidence for the Transmission of paee Characters.
a a Fis a a aa
Henry F. Oss
Methods ee Models in Geographic Teaching. Witwam M. Davis... . 566
A New Cattle-Pest. (Tustrated. A GoW. Waonros re e ee riS 584
On a Few California Medusæ. (Ilustrated. ) H WALTER FEWKES. . . . . 591
Notes on the Habits of Some Amblystomas. 0O. P. Hay... .. - ee
The Extinct Sirenia. (Jilustrated.) E. D. Cope ..- +--+ +++ ==> 697
The Notes of Some of Our Birds. Jons Vance CHENEY... ..--.-
A Means of Preserving the Purity and Establishing a a ie for the Ameri-
n for the Future. Dr Soat S a Se eee 7
Origin of the Pla ne-Trees Luster F. Wamp. i) 05. ne ee
Newly Se Glacial Phenomenai in the as eave Valley. P. Max SOREA e
aad te Me i Se a A a e e E EE
The Distribution of Plants. E BPN o 632s ee a 19
The Mesoder sna the Ccclom of Varisli ien (Illustrated.) CHARLES-
abr wine 2 Sees, a ee Se 77
The hese of “Min nd. E. D. Cop BS eee ie eer oe eee "399, 1000
The est Spiders of North kaa ae meee): Capano M. WEED ma
A crc’ from Nova Scotia. (Jd/ustrated.) ae EWKES
Three Cases of Hypospadias in which ihe Sex s Undeterminable ‘until
Puberty. Des. L.H.and W.H.Luce . 2. + oe ts ees < 1016
ly The American Naturalist. [January,
Morphology of the Blood-Corpuscles. CHARLES- Sse Minor . - . « 1020
Probable Causes of Polygamy Among Birds. Samu mee o Ven geo sae 1024
The Naticoid Genus Strophostylus. (J/lustrated.) aR BE Key SeH
Contri he as on to the Knowledge of the Termites. qiiar i hiss
Ainii < of Pelecypoda, FR estate gon y Ropert Tracy Jackson ..... 1132
Annelid Des ns rigin 4 Metamerism and the Significance of the
Mesoderm. ‘ee ok Pee CCE eS Serge eo we ee ee 1143
EDITORIAL. PAN rte as to the Essential Nature of Organic Evolution ; Four
NABE cal Surveys in the South, 49—Exposition of Abuses Amo ong
Proposed Classes of the U. S. National Academy of sence ae
Á SA
iet;
Public, 747—The gorena set of A. A. A. 8.; The Committee
on ee Congress of Geologi s, 831—Limitation in Scientific
Work; Entomology at Vadtinkpelia Meeting of A. A. os he New York’s
Electric E od w, 918—Scientific Nomencla ‘Politics and
Geology ; Science-Teaching i in American — Botany oaks Pot,
047—The Tariff on Scientific Books Proposed Association of Mor
phologists ; ; The palra on of Amiens Agricultural Colleges nnd
Experiment Stations ; The Cardinal Vedalia . ......... 1160
Recent Books AND Pampuiets.—54y 162, 261, 552, 614, 649, 748, 833, 922,
DOE re eC eas ee ee ee 1173
pP re dite sg
Igarum ; Gremli’s Flora a Be
hy Lubbock’s ae. of “Antal 52—Challenger Voyage; W.
Siaden’s Asteroidea, 160—A Now Text-Book of animal ESS
New Hand- Books f Paleontology,
oy
q
©
zig,
23
oP
Ta
Q
3
4
est rticulatus
on Brolution; Geddes and Thompson on Evolution of ee 751—
amic Influences in Evolution; Poulton on the Colors of
patat Billet. on the Life-History of Bacteria ; and Coral
Islands, 924—G. H. Williams’s Elements of Crystallography ; ; Britton’s
Catalogue of New ae Plants; The West American Oaks; The Flora
i Physikalische Esjotaliceraphis: Catalogue ‘of Minerals ;
Ri Bite) en hia wg a aig ie e én ee ae a ae
L Nores.— Geography and Travel : Africa: Notes Concerning Stan-
ley; Wadai and Darfur; The Uban ngi and Ngala; Madagascar; Ger-
man East Africa; Mr. Arnot and Garen Asia: Ascents in the
Dis Not es from Prjevalsky’s Last Journey ; —— —America :
Dr. Nansen’ s Journey across Greenland. News: Ameri
y ; a, ica: Lake
The Bissougas ; Stanley’s Discoveries ; Seater ote he ; The Italian
Protectorate ; Lake Rudolph—Asia: "The Bahrein Islands; The Pre-
=
1891.) __ Contents. v
PAGE
jevalsky Expedition—Europe: Cyprus ; The Caucasus ; Arctic Regions
—Miscellaneous, 263—Col. Stanton’s Recent Descent of the Colorado
River, 463—Africa : The Ports of German East Africa ; The Boundaries
State—Asi i i 1
— Afri
hes Dauvergne’s Journeyings—Geographical News: rica; Asia
scellaneous Geographical News, 836—Honduras, 989... Headores
paeme 1060—Alaska: Mount St. Elias, ...... oe we «© 1198
Geology and Paleontology: Archean Characters of the See of the
Nucleal Ranges of the Antilles; The Tertiary and Cretaceous of Ala-
bama; A. Smith Woodward on Ccelorhynchus _Agassiz— Geckes ical
News: Paleozoic; Devonian; Mesozoic; Creta tacic; Jurassic ; iie-
Re: i ure, &
; M
way Guide; A Catalogue of British Fossil Vertebrata: The Čret
Saurians of New rA at Syracuse, New York—6
graphical News: Paleozoic ; ; Carbonic; Jurassic; ; Cen
rpms Plistocene, 946—On a New Dog ‘from the e Loup Fork SA
tra New nsi
Rock i in Fl Pe ea oe Pg ee oe 1182
Mineralogy and Petrography : Hadai News; New Minerals, 69—
Petrographical News iges eralogical News; Miscellaneous, 170—Pet-
aphical News; New inerals; Miscel llaneous, 860—Min neral
News ; neralogical
News; pene phical News; New Minerals ;
Miscellaneo Petrographical News ; Mineralogica 1 News ; Min-
eral Syntheses, 5 Lo70—Petrographical News ; Mineralogical News;
General; anit; New Books, sa. Se Se es
Botany: Uredinial Parasites ; The Lichens e Guinea Islands; The
Flora of Central Nebraska (Gontinaed) Bailey's Studies of Carex, 75—
Cell Characters in the Classifica of the Uredinex; Peculiar
ed ¢ ed); of Box ate merg Cheyenne Counties
Nebraska, 177—Memoirs of the Torrey Botanical Club;
i ; Ellis’s “North American Fungi” ; The New Gray’s
vi The American Naturalist. [January
PAGE
Manual, 276—Three Suggestions on Botanieal ae —
vision of the Se ene Sachs’s History of polair; Phot
graphs of Dr. Parry, 369—The j PESEE TA of Carbon by Green Plants
from Certain Organi ser mpounds; The on Weter aom
Atlas of French Plants: Tae. Characew of Germ any, 473— e Rea-
sons for Varieties Not Soo g Out e Causes = erste
Knees, 577; The Flora of peel pr Pia Note on a New Spe-
cies of Actinoceps B. and Br.; Note on the Cañon Flora of Northw a
Nebraska; Botanical News, 777—Botany at the In oe n
ings, 958—Notes on Rare East korenr Lichens; Bota the
British Museum; The- Word “ Herbarium” ; The nii dneni of
e
Sphagnum; The Species of aia " Fertilization of the Grape;
Ww
F
+
s uds and
unding Part orth American Species of Tylostoma; Watson’s
er w Aaa Botany ; New North American Fungi, . . . 1196
Zoology: The Zoological —— of Palawan; Bahaman Sea Anemi mones ;
The Siphonophores ; senteries in the Antipatiars The Eyes
of Limulus: Note on ss pane ng Habits of Cermatia forceps Raf ; The
Scottish Fishing Board’; Coluber obsoletus Say; Hesperiphona vesper-
tina; Note on the Seve nth Cervical Vertebra of the Cat—Zoological
News: Protozoa rusta ertebrata ;
shes; Birds, 79—The U. S. Fish Commissi on ; Anthozoa and Echino-
derm of Spongilla ; Cotan Marks in Seide. New anita in ‘the
mip mbryo; Abdomina.
Zoological News: General; i Worms ; Mollu Fishe es;
epti poda ; irds ;
ntera
oa — Birds; ; Mamma ls, 27 S Ja Actinian ; Ento-
ishes; A Two-Tailed Earthw Tortoises Sold in
the Markets of of Philadelphia Zoologica cal News: Nev mes; Arthropods ;
s
and Nephridia in Palæmon ; Fishes: Reptiles ; Mammalia, 581— Prof.
H. Gadow on the Homologies of the ye a “Ossi icles ; Prof. Lankester
on | ioxus; Notes on Ammocoetes branchialis (Linn .) —Zoological
seen et Nir: Detela of Mitlepora ; Rotifera ; Echinodermata; Mollusca;
ee Arthropoda ; Vertebrata, 636—Snakes ot High Places; Snakes in
ae md es, eliotropism in A
o he ogic: ewe: V
A 964—A New Phoronis ; The Arth uel oon: Mollusean Not The
ae. Pisce of Wertewstes SITENE Tampa Bay, 1083—Fresh-Water
1891.] Contents. vii
Sponges; Notes on Earthworms; Teredos in Telegraph een ; Scarcity
of Oysters; Hermaphroditic Anlage in Insects; Studies on the Wrist
and Ankle; Skull of Sharks; g> Saep nA: Stejneger on ars lenti-
ginosus ee ; Notes on the Clawed Frog, Xenopus ; Anat tomy of
Heloderma; Birds; The Name of an Kangaroo ; Possibl nee of
the Wolverine i in Ohio a Sa Se ee a ee a ee ey 1200 -
Embryology : A etait ae of Heredity and Variation, 85—
The Placentation of the Hedge-Hog and the Phylogeny of the Placenta,
3876—The Continuity of the Prim: g Matrix of the Scales and the Ac-
ee of Teleosts, 489—Prof. Weismann on the Tra saps oa of
Acquired be ilepsy , 586— —Homologues in Embryo Hemiptera of the
Appendages of the First Abdominal Segment of nas Insect Embryos ;
Denevsaichi on the Fanali of tba Ga NO oT a aa 644
rrent ; Effects of Ato on the Chorda irasra
ali t k
Functions of Mammalian Sympathetic keea ia, 193—Electrical Phe-
nomena in Beating rege Relation of Nerve-Fibres and Ganglion Cells ;
bs anar (ae Prize, 379—Heart-Sounds: Mechanism of Tricuspid
Valve ; Innervation 1 of Renal a Vessels; bade ges. of the Heart
a the ‘Snake, 648— —Temperatu rves ; Neuroke: ii rat te
ess of Joints; te th è Self Regulation of Tana , 1086—Ti
Relations of Menta Trae rs Text-Book of Pinki: ;
The Brain of Laura Peagwien: en “of Sensory Fibres Ar esa 1207
Entomology: Rectal Glands ia or 100— h (Zilus-
trated), 200—Recent Literature; A New Phalangium iceaebie ; Injur-
ies to Buffalo Tree Hopper latratd The Maple-Bark Louse, 782—
ng-legged Harv
er (Ilustrated); ner Plants of as
jover-Stem Borer ; pty i omic Entomol t Lite
re, 866Entome ogy et ra
70—An Outlet for Memoirs, Monographs, and Faunal Lists ;
Parasites, 1088—Meeting of Economie Entomologists
=
Worm; North American Phycitidæ; New Foot-Plant of Rheiobanas
13-punctatus (illustrated) ; Elm m ea eee 1211
Psychology: The American Society for Psychical Research, 284—The
Effect of Whistling on Seals, 382—Jastrow on a Writing Test. . 973
ie Microscopy : Certain Improvements in Born’s Method of Reconstructing
Objects from Serial Sections; Katschenko’s Apparatus, 98—Professor
Biitschli’s Sereinent ntal Imitation of Protoplasmic Movement, 492—
Methods for the Preservation of Marine Organisms Employed at ae
i —Dem vbromoso
i
Caryokinetic eure: Direct Division of the we: Spermatoge-
nesis in the Hermaphrodite Gland of Limar agr: ; Con, njugation in
: e Sooners 984—Lumbricus, Egg-Laying, mat p Preparstins of the
aes Embryos of Lumbricus, 1100- Diret pees Asemeni of the Nucleus in the
er Enteric Epithelin m of Rhabdonema ; Culture of the
Laryæ idians, Worms, Echinoderms, T. ; Preservation of
Siphonophora ; For T racing Nerve-Fibres in the Brain ; New Method
of Staining Nerves with Methylblue......-..-+.++-+- 1217
viii
The A Meritan Naturalist. [January,
siere and Ethnology : The Discovery Mi g~ Pool of Bethesda, Jeru
96—Congresses held in Paris duri e French Exposition of
1889; British Museum ; SSe Ta historic C Oocupation i n Cambodia
Shell-Heaps in Asia; Poli nts in ‘the Nat ical
m, 286— mgs rt akong Ohio iota, 383 —The Use of the
Pho maps ph in the Stu dy of the ea ga of the American Indians,
495 Classification of Arrows or Spe ds or Knives in the Na tional
Museum ; stole rcheological ote toning ; Archæo lo ogi or Archzeologi-
1?; Human and Animal Remains, 589—Aboriginal Remains near
Old chic sie, pria (Ilustrated), Se of the American
Association for f Scie at In viaii , 976—
Rigveda St cin gerer Seadion of Zuni "Songs and Rituals with
the I Phonograph; The Aryan Cradle-Land ............
PAGE
1092
PROCEEDINGS OF Sorawinsie Soctetiszs, 102, 289, 385, 497, 595, 869, 987, 11038, 1220
Screntiric News, 111, 304, 388, 498, 598, 786, 875, 993, 1108,
1225
1891.]
Index. ix
INDEX.
2 a t77:
violæ, 779.
eid:
African Travel, 836, 839, 840.
Alvarenga Prize, 696
Anoplonassa posos 700.
Arachnida, 356.
Archaster bairdi, 185.
Archæoceti, 601.
re copa Ppa 55.
Archeol ogie: cal Association of the Uni-
versity 0 of Pen na., 59.
oe Specimens from Totten-
kee eee of the Rocks of the
ax,
Arfvedsoni te, 74, 1
Ari. purpurea, 182.
Arius baronii, 771.
tarde
Arsenic a advil, 1076.
Arnot , 59.
piia ri 73.
re 1076, 1193.
Artemisia ee
Sethian antiqua, 132.
Arthur, J. C., Apparatus for Vegetable
ts $
Ascent of Mount Elbruz, 66.
Ascent of Finisterre Mountains, 65.
Ascent of Ixtaccihuatl, 763
Ascent of Man, F. H. Ba ker, 975.
Ascent of Nevada de Toluca, 764.
atide,
PEAS thelypteri is, 77.
Asp m filix-foemina, 77.
hk . C. Douls, 64.
Assimilation of Carbon by recs Plants
ertain Organic Compounds,
EAA of American Agricultural
Colleges and Experiment Stations,
1
Association. of American Anatomists,
212.
Association * Sci gee cai 1170.
Ast 85
Astrogonium
peta 573.
Astrophyton esar og 185.
oscopus anoplus, 375, 538.
Atlas of os Plants, 475.
Atriplex hor
petina etda of of Mesta in the Paris and
Hempstead Beds,
rving the Purity of
the pe erat Bison, 787.
Autotomy in the Crab, E. i Andrews,
138.
Avalanche i in onig ase
nana megaterium, 777.
, 983.
Bacterium jalani, 932, 933.
osteophilum, 932, 933.
iticum, 932.
‘termo, 958.
erpa ase Anemones, 80.
Bahrein Islands, 266.
Bailey’s Eron of Carex, Bessey, 78.
\
x The American Naturalist.
oe T a Ascent ‘of Man, 975.
Baleen
alanus convexus, 771.
Balistes aculeatus, 282.
Balticina ee 184.
Barbour on the Paleontological
aan of the U. S. Geologi-
cal Survey under Prof. Marsh,
888.
Barkevicite, 575, 1073.
Barnes, C. R., A Key to the Mosses,
1197:
sarysite, 776.
sasalts a 773.
saoo
Bathyactis coach 184.
inus, 254.
SS
satrachia, 539.
homyia, 192.
“SATS oy 489.
Jats in -> Wyandotte Cave, Indiana,
Pig R Er a woh
Col 89.
Baur, ie Clasitcation of the Testudi-
Gana of the Cheloniidz, 486.
Genera of the ce ar 482.
New aug a of Chelys, 957.
Note on the pate E i and
Miu s, 484.
Prof. Ma A on Hallopus and other
Din rs, 569.
Review of Charges Against the
Paleontological Department pe
_ the United States Geological Sur-
vey, and of the Defence Made by
Distribution
its, 768.
, Notes on Earthworms, |
1200.
see Prof., Preservation of ape
Pigg se 121 18.
Composition, 1191. a
gare’ :
[January,
Bessey, Bailey’ s Studies of Carex, 78.
Completion of Saccardo’s Sylloge
ungorum, 675.
Pesrhios of Gremli’s Flora of
Switzerland, 53.
sot cath fron De Toni’s Sylloge Al-
Pax’s slant Morphology 1082.
Forage the Plains, 959.
Note. on Meas ge North ANA
ungi,” Lad 3
Note on Missouri Botanical Garden,
sa a Sach’s History of Botany,
Not on “Seymour and Earle’s
Eco onomic Fungi,” 277.
Notice of Photographs of Dr. Parry,
372
Re — of Britton’s New Jersey
Plants, 1054.
ackel’s “ ee of
the Kmbieceroneas 370.
Review of Johnson’s ‘* How Crops
row,” 258.
Review of erred s West Ameri-
Perse „i ks, 1051
of the
aa, > 278.
Some Bad ea toa A 1197.
— Some Elementary Botanies, 673.
Watson’s Contributions to American
tany, Sgt
« New Gray’s
Bo
Wheat S 197.
Yellow Ha Crowtoot 475.
Beyrichia devonica,
Bibliograp phy of Ta Entomology,
Bibliographical Catalogue of the De-
scribed Transformations of the
American Lepidoptera,
782.
Billet, A., veasna of Bacteria, 932.
Binocular Microscope, 366.
Biological Results of the Plankton Ex-
pedition, 279.
Biological Bocieiy of Washington, 296,
5, 595, 691, 1103, 1220.
Birds, 1206.
Birds from New Guinea, 282.
Birds of Jan Mayen, 270.
americanus, 548.
alticornis, 393.
at Syracuse, New York, L. M.
Underwood, 953.
bonasus, 170.
ee 264. a
Bodil T 195
ily emperatare of Lesions, A
Bokhara, 61
_ Bra
1891.]
Bolley, L. H., The ony Scab, a Bac-
terial Disease,
Posto Se a 963.
ea tuedix,
= * oss i in ‘Asia, 841.
ete
eave’
Bos americanas 954.
s, 283
Boston paete of Natural Science, 205.
Bos gore: of Natural History, 294,
Botanical Con gress at Paris, 114.
Ras a a oe Studie es, 66.
Botan -177 , 869, 4738, 673,
196
m, 1079.
the a ge Meeting o
., C. E. Bessey, os
es
Boveri, pemali of Chromosomes,
Index.
Bovista cireumeissa Te.
Black Har st Spider, Weed, 6
Blastocyst of the Rabbit of os Days, |
Plastodermic Vesicle with Two Layers,
02
Blastodermic Vesicles with Primitive
4 reaks,
Blast ic Vesicles with Primitive
Streak and Head-Process, 707.
pea 713.
a Man
and a Chimpanzee
m amaret, . G. Wilder, 980.
Brain of Laura Br idgman 1208.
eee, pachyeephalus, 951.
S
Èe
Poy
A
A ANR =
: RoT S32
a ©
ss TA
sgis
ag
aes &
a,
>=
3 oo
=o
čo
©
œ
m
+ 9
American aes |
Breunerite, 173.
Brinachite, 1194.
Brissopsis lyrifera
British fai R
nt of Science, Haeting, 1889 ;
Advane
Assoc’ sane Meeting
Britton, N. ra v Cata _— of New cue
Plants
| Calciferous
| Valle
Calkins
|
z
Museum, Wilson, 199. |
os
General Distribution of North
American Plants, 961.
Note on Genus Rhynchospora in
North America, 962.
Notes on a Monograph of the Genus
Lechea, 962.
a State as adane Botany
n Nort a, 961.
Ru ae i a is
Brochure on Obere gars EIE
S paoa in Zoology in the
rsity at Chai pales Hi,
Brock, G., z Dimorphism i in Antipatharia,
Brookville pe Society of Natural His-
Brii nel z eating Apparatus, 1195.
Bucklandite,
Buchloë aa i T 181,279.
iginosus, 540.
Bunge von e eraai , 1108.
umpus, Sasy ate Professor of Zoology
t Brown University,
Burmeister’s Fossil Mammalia, 274.
Burri , Note on the Rotting of
58
toto, ‘
e Genus Bacterium,
New Species Salun-
r from Indiana, 966.
Butschli, fitis from, 492.
a a Tenitation of Proto-
c Movement, 492.
maia (Fossil), 957.
Cae Teeth as Evidence of Eyolu-
tio
Calamospiza melanocorys, 5 ;
Formation in $ Sra
z > :
Calciothorite, 75.
Calcite, 173.
Calendula pia 314.
Notes on Rare East
Ten a Lichens, 1078.
ra abnormi lobatum, 560.
caru.
PTA 560.
cycloides, 560.
aqueum,
re 560.
e, 560.
PE x tons nuttallii, T79.
Calvin, S., — Actinospherium
eichhornii, 964.
Calamine, 1193.
_ Xii
Comoliosaurus ee te 665.
culus, 327.
Campbell, D. H., Germination of the
Spores and the Prothallia of
unda.—Notes ven-
= Buds of Lye m.—Notes
n the Archegonia of Ferns, 963. |
Contributions to the Life- Bitor
of Isoé
Methods a Gr owth of the Pro-
thallia Filicinæ, 960.
Camptosaurus, 473.
Canidex, 119.
70.
aravan Route from Zeila to Anpebr,
Caravella maxima, 965.
Carbonic, 955.
Cardin Vedalia, hs
2, 767.
Catalogue of Building Stones, 366.
ogue of Fauna of North America,
=
Fossil Fishes in the
of the
ritish Museum, 169.
ze of the Fossil Cephalopoda,
69.
Catostomus labiatus, 255.
ET“ = aa English & Co.,
Catalogue of New Jersey Plants, N. L.
Britton, 1054.
The American Naturalist.
[January,
Drea sr 1194.
s, 170.
Coes Aint Cor e, 599.
Cetophis Pete roti, 605, 606.
Cetotherium capel i, 612.
B12.
“ Challenger’ aes ” Voyage. Sladen’s As-
160.
a,
teroidea
eta in the Scene, 464
76.
ara,
Characeæ of Sy; 475.
, 78.
hy we
Ch heranthu cheiri, 475.
Chelo
Chelopus insculptus, 874.
Chelydra serpentina, 374.
Chelys fimb "n Schneid, 967.
, 869.
Chale New f Species, G. Baur, 967.
Chenopodium quinoa, 320.
Cheney: Notes of Some of Our Birds,
745.
Chicago Academy of Sciences, 294, 5
Institute for Instruction in ea
d Religion, 295.
imera ro a, 412.
Accounts of the Mammoth,
Chlorite-gneiss, na
tura caudaca,
1891.]
Classification of the Testudinata, Baur,
Clathrocystis rosea-persica, 82.
ee E. sh , Plant Colonists at Ak-
o, 963.
Clea Ship’ = une rtz, 1191.
Clematis ligusticifolia, 78.
ochroleuca, 698.
Cleome in integrifo olia, 278.
ee Ea 273.
Patt 73.
pee donensis is, 273.
bei. i Chine of Cypress Knees,
cro Cope, 953.
Clupea vectensis, 169, 957.
Coan Range Rocks in California, Beck-
N A., Nematodes in Australia,
Oe ta
ilala aflii, 644.
seit <p
‘celom and Nepheidie i in Palemon, 585.
m bulbosum, 143.
hens
aes, 441.
olinus
Cobb,
SSSSsPes
agi, 543.
ollett, Rats i in the Wyandotte Cave,
Ind., 189.
Cons letiva of F Saccario's pt Fun-
ig
Composite.
Compound aren f Arthropods, 373.
Compound Spherulites, 1188.
Cone ny Fishes,503.
Elasmobranchs, 506.
Mam
Marsipobranche, Ganoids, and Ba-
astepaien 511.
cresce:
Congo Railway, 264.
Continuity of the Primary Matrix of
wledge o of the
naear e Fritz Mi eres. 1118.
Pasturage
Index.
xiii
Cope, E. D., The coe Sirenia, 607.
A New Bs Ze the Loup Fork
Mioc 1067..
A New Danis from Indiana,
r on Evolution, 751.
Homologics of the Fins of Fishes,
401.
On Two New Species of Mustelide
from the Loup Fork Miocene of
~ a 950.
Revi f New wberry’s Paleozoic
Fishes m North America, 844.
Review of Poulton on the Colors of
Animals,
on of the Fossil Rep-
Biti and Osborn on the Fauna of
*s Park Eocene, 470.
Snakes in Banana Bunches, 782.
he Cetacea,
The Evolution of Mind, 899, 1000.
Tortoises Sold in the Markets of
Philadelphia, 374.
Co;
Copiapit e, 362.
Copadeiaesy Marks in — 186.
Coral and Coral Islands, James Dana,
933.
Corallorhiza innata, 779.
multiflora,
Cordierite, 69.
from Calvarienberg, 774.
ordley, A. B., ;
eilein Connellite, 1075.
varia, 781.
‘ortico ‘ee "76.
orundum, 672, 1076, 1193.
otton Worm
oulter, ri í. ‘Distribution of the
North American Umbelliferæ,
ACACA 44
Forest Trees of Indiana, 959.
Geographical Distribution of North
American Corn
Course of Sensory Fibres, 1209.
Coville, F. V., A Serviceable Collecting
ife, 963.
Notice of a Descriptive List of the
Junci of Texas, 963, `
Report on the Botanical Exchange
Club, 963.
Work of the Botanical Division of
the Dept. of sae 961.
Crambe maritima, 644
Crampel’s Journey, 65.
Craters = Cimino and Lagodivico,
471.
xiv
eung Insects, 686.
Crayon Drawing for Photo-Engraving,
Freda Detmers, 972.
Creodonta, 470.
Cretaceous Echin Spain, 274.
Fora tiita of New dey, 172.
Formation in Dakot:
Plants from Martha’ i ape,
289.
News, 956.
of the Texas—-Arkansas Region,
956.
Voleano i in Texas, 1189.
Cribrella,
Crinoids. vom Indiana, Nevada, and
Towa, 790.
yithmum maritimum
“ates = emperature 3 ae 1191.
(
C
Crocu 633.
Crecidgite Optical Properties, 1192.
Crossaster, 4,
Cross, Hornblendes and Pyroxenes,
73.
Crustacea, 355, 488, 499.
Cryptoperthite, 57 4.
Cryptodisa, 530, 5
Crystalline Sehists of the Black Hills of
= a, 291.
Schi vn Hise, 1075.
reread fe eames of, G- B.
liams,
Ctenodiscus, 428.
discus crispatus, 4,
Cuboides Zone, 766.
and its Fauna,: 290.
Cucurbita, 318.
rites, 75.
Curtice, Dr., pete Puuna of Sheep,
terrae gic 587.
ealeeola, 488,
Cynomys arizonensis, 586
Cyprinus carpio, 538.
_ Cyprus,
tide, 169.
: “Ghana T.
a ; )ACTY LOPSILA pal rts
Dall, Wm, Dynamic Influences in Evo-
lution, 924. _
Damourite, 1194.
The American Naturalist.
[January,
Dana, a D., Coral and Coral Is-
s, 933.
Decapo' aoe Crustaia kit 281.
Dechen, Notice of Death, 114.
Delphinapterus orcinus, 610.
s, 610.
PE eiria prefers 167.
inidæ, 609.
Delphini
Delphinus ealvertensis, 606.
Demonstra of the Chromosomes,
Boveri, "984.
Dendræca virens, 543.
Dendragapus obscurus Son 008 545.
rophycus desorii B 1068.
a? 1105.
s Newb., J. S. Newberry,
ea 530.
Described Aranex of North America,
Ae
DeSaulesite, 71.
De Toni’s aA D Extract,
esse
Deyeuxia canadensis, 182.
Dewey 99
Diabase, 1072, 11
os from Nova Seotia, 773,
urnz, l
Dia ay ‘of David Lindsay, 267.
Die argent AN, "MeCook, 400.
Dimeriez
morphism i in Antipatharia, G. Brook,
Diniehihye er 167.
167.
ots 477.
vA
Dioplotherium, 69
Diopside ye eee 672.
Diorite, 1072.
Diorites i in saat oe 861.
Ss ese
Diplopoda nai, 666.
Dip we ne album, 7 oe
Dipodom. s chapmanii, 58
586.
Stent
Diptera, 454,
piers? of the Pool of Bethesda,
rusalem, Hen , 96.
mry Gillman
Dinichopiim gracile, 184.
Sonny $ 8G. Billet on the Life-History
3 ruscinensis,
| Dolomi te Crystals, 1074.
1891.]
Dophyphyllum simeoénse, 136.
Dorocidaris pap ge ta, 185.
Dorsalis Group,
Dorsal alle > Nudibranchs, 583
Doryeri 54,
Do sa Flowers in Wild Morning Glory,
963.
Diomotropism, 367.
Dryopithecus fontanii, 571.
Druce, G. C e Word Herbarium,
—
Dudgeonite, 72.
Dugong Placentat ion, 969.
Dumerilia madagascariensis, 482.
Duty on Scientific Books, 1169.
Dykes from Highland Co., Va., 774.
Dynamic Influences in Evolution, Dall,
Earthwork near Foster’s, Ohio, 983.
pen, Their Holes in the Rocks,
Behinocaris whidbornet, 1
Echinodermata of the pe
Echinoder rms, 853, 427, 499.
Echi
Editorial, 49, "168, ‘$65, 856, 460, 747,
831 , 918, 1047, 116
Effect of See on the Chords Tym-
i, Ma Johnson, 93.
Whistling o on Seals, F. F. Payat,
382. '
Egyptian Stone Age, 64.
gag 1072,
on Evolution, Cope, 757.
Eise spine r, 1075. °
Elæagnus paisa a
Elasmosaurus, Cope,
Electrical Execution rae W, , 9, 18.
Phenomena in Beating Hearts, 380.
Electrical go poate ie in Human Skin,
Hou bipinnulatus, 875, 538.
Eleme f Classification, 244.
Ellis’ noah American Fungi, Note on,
Besse: =
Ellis, J. B., | B. M. Everhart, New
North “American Vides see 1199.
Ellychnia Sorrwet t,
Ely
sey 183.
Emery, C., Studies on the Wrist and
Index.
XV
— 484.
iridis, 484.
Er Bria minimus, 543.
Enandropogoneæ, 370.
Enchytrædes marioni, 281
Endidymite, 57
Endoceratidæ, 169
dris marina, w
Entomological Club A: 8.696.
Entomology, ont 500, 633, 783, 866,
Entomophora eis 783.
echar sieg
of Mar ne Fishes, 373.
Bodiadema alee 167.
m egyptiacum, 700.
Epeira wert A a, 585.
Ephestia kuhnie iella, 200.
Sarasi "oe, agi 782.
Epidote
Epihippus EAIN:
Epilobium coloratum, 972.
Roose: anconeus, 976.
Equus andium, 27
Eragrostis tenuis, 11, 182.
Erdm 44,
ees. pee 545.
Errata, 1226.
a, e .
Erosive Agents in the Arid Regions, R
455.
. Tarr, 455.
— Gneisses, 1072.
Erymn ochelys, 483
Eryops owenii, 770. -
Etheridge’s Catalogue of Fossils, 166.
Etheostoma rex, 585.
Et agn meekii, 955.
Eukairite, 1192.
Eukotite tit paite | -
Eupemphiz trinitatis, 540.
ee sees Se Peace 475,
1109.
pram Glacial Epochs, 771.
yeti m Embryology and Rudi imentary
Organs, 231
from “Paleo ntology, 230.
Evolution of Mind, by E. D. Cope, 899,
1000.
of Sex, by Geddes and Thompson,
754.
xvi
pienso = Investigation of Strych-
Poisoning, Goff,
Excretory prety of Protozoa, ‘Griffith,
Expedition to the Cockscomb Moun-
Explorations in . West Australia, 66.
n New
Extinct Bisnis, ‘Cope, 697.
uadrumana, 57
Eyes of Limulus 81.
PaE candicans, 270.
amily Characeæ, 476.
Families of Ribbon- Fishes, Gill, 481.
arre, Alphonse, 1108.
Fauna in the Vicinity of Burlington,
Function of Mammalian Sympathetic
lia, 196.
Felide,
Fergusonite, 670.
Fernald, n Rectal Glands in Coleoptera,
Fernow, B. E., Notes on Nomenclature,
T J. W., Additional Studies of
ñi Songs and Rituals with the
, Phonograph, 1094.
A Pictograph from Nova Scotia,
On Cert ain Peculiarities in the
Flora of the Santa Barbara Is-
p2
yo Excavations Made in Rocks by
s, l.
Sea Urchin Wo at Guay-
, Mexico, 478.
Use of the Phonograph i in the mer
ofthe Languages of the Am
Flora ge Oii Nebraska, Webber,
oraof Central Nebraska, Arthur, 1057.
| Garnet from al, 173
at Marburg, | Gaskell, Origin of the Vertebrata, 1085.
Flora” to be Published at
The American Naturalist.
[January,
Forbes, American Terrestial Leech, 646.
te on an a n Species of
Phreoryctus, 4
Note on the aye Habits of Cer-
ns sar s, 81.
The i Grub: 1091.
oc. p the Middle Cretaceous,
Fornicata,
Fort Ancient, Ohio, Wilson, 383.
rehea
year isadi rai Samos, 169.
Plan nts, 170.
Tort 666.
Foster’ k Text-Book of Physiology, 1207.
Fouquéite, 73.
Four Geological Surveys, 51.
Fran neces, M., The Screw Worm, 1213.
Fragaria vesca, 76.
Frazer, id on “Archean Characters of
Rocks of the Nucleal Ranges
ot oes Antilles,”
A. B; Meeting of, 1890, 987.
Frater aad:
riedel, C. and G., sults Muscovite
Treated with Alkalies , 1077.
Fritillaria ats 779.
mace By M. J. R., Honduras, 939,
1060.
Frelichia ploridana, 78.
Frogs Eating Sn akes, Abbott, 188.
From Brute to Man, Morris, 341.
Fro een ore Instructor of Biology in
ersity at Nebraska, 786.
Bruits i in S Worth Carolina, 1103.
Fulmarus glacialis, 270.
Functions of Cent ral Nervous System
antonio: 682.
Fusispori rum, 950.
ABBROS, Greenstones,
Lizard, England, 773.
etc., from
Galena, 173.
e; B. T., Life-History of Unci-
a spir iralis B. and G.,
Notes send ea a Destructive Oat Dis-
Black-Rot of the Cape
Game Preserves, 255.
. Gamopetale,
O78.
Garman, = An American Frit Fly,
Arend
Geddes and Thompson on the Evolution
oa
Gedrite
Generic irn, 246.
Genera of the Cheloniidæ, Baur, 486.
Podocnemidi , 482,
1891.]
General Morphological Supe 245.
Generic Relationships
Genesis of the patenis ie OR.
Ke 43.
eyes
Genesis of the Aristidas 557.
Geographical New 2 843.
Geography a el, 57, 263, 463,
761, 836, 939, 1060, 1178.
Geological News, 166, 664, 768, 954.
Geologic Distribution of the Actinocrin-
hs piso
, 248.
Geologien and ai rE E ce
n Southern and West
10,
Nor way,
Geology and Paleontology, 67, 164, be
271, 467, 661, 766, 844,
a. l the ee Mountains, Mon-
a, 290
arated of Indre, 168.
King Sages $ s d, 270.
n iny Lake Region, 170.
ia, Geological Survey i in, 114.
ca, 59.
tectorage in Southeast Africa,
Geyser i in Yellowstone Park, 176.
Gilbert, Strength of the Earth’ s Crust,
4
Gillichthys. guaymasiz, 539,.
¥-cauda, 539.
Gillman, Discovery of the Pool of Be-
th em,
Gill, T., Cyelupterchden, 1103.
Families of Ribbon-Fishes, 481.
lacial Features of Parts of the Yukon
and Mackenzie Basins, 208.
Phenomena in ada, 771.
Phenomena i in ateei Valley, 816.
Glaciation of the Lind and Jhelam Val-
leys, 667.
Glass Inclusions, 672 a
mp
Glennie, 7 s. Sos The ge Cradle-
> 1098.
tal In nvestigation of
Kart a E 92.
Muscle Curre: t, 93.
xvii
ae ra aae, 1076.
, 169.
Sah hee tee 132.
pease 367,
paar 739.
seal e, 1190.
PASE ee , 429,
wear On the Brece ated Character of
e St. Louis Tineikoks, 305.
Duma arboreum, 1080.
barba — e 1080.
herbaceum, 1080
roiie L; 1081.
Göthite, 1193.
Gramma orrustus, 84.
Grammicolepis brachiusculus, 85.
Gramineæ
Gra nite sg iee of Morbihan, France,
Grasses of Box Butte and Cheyen
County, Nebraska, Smith, 181.
Gray's Manut, 780.
Great Cent tral Trade Route, Asia,
Greenstones i in Ireland, 773.
Gremli’s Flo ora of Switzerland, de-
y,5
Griffith, H. G., Keyes’ Synopsis of
American Carbonic Calyptra
dæ, 1185.
ndela squarrosa, 278.
Gronophilus porphyriticus, 966.
pe pi , 135.
; o L., 1206.
weni as Test of Minerals in German
Bis —* Africa, 1075.-
angium ‘lavarorme 780.
Gyrolite. Ceyeiale, 3
Gyrinophilus maculicdtine Cope, 967.
HS BENARIA bracteata, 779.
Habia ludoviciana, 542.
Hackel’s Fe of the Andropogone,
Review by Bessey, 370.
, 783.
H
Halitheriams, ee
- S., Mongol Invasion of
Indo-China, 841.
Halstead, B. Bae A Supposed Hybrid
betw porrifolius
and Ty , 963.
Peculiarities of the agen of Epi-
lobium palustre iganthum,
—
Some Varieties Not
for
Wearing Out Out, 577.
XViil
The American Naturalist.
[January,
Reserve Food oe in Buds | Sootna of the Fins of Fishes, E. D
1197. Co
The Migra
gaea major,
n, Dr, Acanthocephali, 966.
Ae TA 575.
Hancock, J. L., Brain-Weight of Birds,
Hargitt . Notes on Isopyrum bi-
aka Hing
Harvey, F. L.. n the Apple Maggot,
Heat-Cen 195.
ébert, Notice a Death, 498.
—: Colony, 842.
iaioa Remains, J. L.
rtman, 592.
Heights of Ca by
ountains in Guinea, 268,
Height of Khan Tengri, 6 “66.
opocatepetl, 761
Heliophytite, 775.
Helitropism in Animals, 964.
Helminthophage erysoptera, 544.
teueobronchialis, 544.
g
Honiatite, 6
Hemi sei fodiens, 699.
84
nae 968.
= oe Indian Origin. of
977.
Heteroceru ! í
Hexapoda, Note on, Kingsley, 84.
iy S,
Heymons, y Hermaphrodite Anlage
: i s, 1201.
) ' TIR.
History of ( en Vegetables, E. L.
i Sturtevant, s 30, 143, 313, 629.
a castilloi,
fee W ms Aboriginal al Stone Ta
plement of the Potomac Valley,
p inmana Blastocyst, 709.
Homilite,
Hondur ak Fritzgeertner,939, 1060.
Hopl pees cores 372, 476, 508.
Hordeum ju 2, 183.
Horn py Structure of, 282.
073.
Hornblend
Howell, J. K, amate of Uromyces
Poe
Hoyer, Prof, Division of
"Dire et the
in the Enteric Epithe-
me ‘of Rhabdoneura nigroveno-
sum
Hydr ring geaffroyana, 484.
gi oi
radiolata; ‘es
rufipes,
tuberosi, on
waglerii. 484.
Hydrocerussite, 670.
Hydromedusa, 485.
ps ETEO 73.
Hymenoptera, 444.
of Co saig do, 686.
Hypersthene, 119
Hypo spadias, Three Cases of, L. H. and
1016.
Hudson at a 955.
Hulst, G. D., North American Phycitide,
1215.
1a YA preiei 783.
iene An a 665.
ar
prey ‘S73, 665.
hollingtoniensis,
mantellit, 665.
Iguan nissagied ho
Immigran sayy gene
ndiana ieee of Scienee, 106, ped
Indigo Bird, 745.
a
pid, 465.
Infusoria Conjugation, Maupas, 986.
In Iceland, 282.
Injuries of Buffalo Tree Hopper, Weed,
ne Injurious to Young Trees, 783.
n Iceland,
d:
Stearns, 22, 123, 236.
1891.]
Interference Colors, 927.
Inte agt Relations
e Archean of Central ceonts,
International pie toe of Geologists at
ington, 461
T a ry Germ-Layers in Ro-
Invert ebrate Fossils -m Mexico, 768.
e, 358.
Investigators in
Iris pseudacoru 1081.
Iron Ores of Minnesota, 669.
arer Beach, 9
Ischæ
lioika 8, at i
Isomorphism of the Oxides of Metals
with ie Cabrébpeedl ng Sul-
phides, 1194.
fee depressa M. and W., 956.
ian Protectorate, 264.
aoe 530.
Izacanthus celospondylus, 604.
ACKSON, Review of Dall on
Daca ea ted of Evolution, —
924.
bie of A at 1132
ws
ing Test, 9738.
elations of Mental Phe--
nomena, 1207.
Johnson, zen of Atropin on the
Chord: 8
« How
Bessey, 258
Johnstrupite, 575.
Juglans rhamnoides, 564.
rugosa, :
Julin, Ch., Culture of the Larve of
Ascidians, Worms, Echinoderms,
ete., 1217.
Jurassic Beds of the Himalayas, 278.
Fossils, 167.
News, 956.
Pisolite from England, 362.
Formation (Africa), 664.
met).
Kellisott, "D. E, A ateti Moth, 971.
Kellogg, A.. The West Ame rican Oaks,
1056.
Kellogg, J. S., Kidney of Amblystoma,
969.
Keyes, Genesis of the Actinocrinide,
243. :
and Taxono of
Index.
157.
Knees of the Texodaim distichum,
333.
xix
Review of the Progress of Ameri-
can Invertebrate ee for
the Year 1889,
The Naticoid aans Strophostylus,
Kidney of Amblystoma, 969.
oe ire 1078.
enberg, Notice of Death, 114.
Kingsley, Note o
togen
439, 537, 1087, j
R.
H. Lamborn, ¢
meaa b e 362.
Kobellite, 670.
a. dubusii, Neg
ne,
| Kronfeld, M it ES of the Grape,
| Kuntz, Game in the U. S. Nat. Mus., 855.
|
oids and Other Prob- |
| [Ae CERTA muralis, 752.
Læm presi agp eres 1204.
Lake Bonnevi
Fsgouetimar) ry
Leopold, 660.
Rudolph, 265.
Tanganyika, 263.
eens Knees of the Taxodium dis-
, 333.
Lam Direka 476.
ba a 867.
Lankester, 1 E Ray,
Note
n Prof. Datos utschli’s Experi-
mien Imitation of Protoplasmic
, 492.
Lapparent’s Course in Mineralogy, 554.
Lat poly us, 77.
Latonia obtusata,
Lavatara, 220.
Lavenite, 573.
Laxicole, 76.
zenby, W. R., Crystals in Certain
Species of ‘the Arum Family, 962.
Two Forms of Ampe
lia,
Tupu
os
Lepida
olivacea, 487.
XX
Teto on = ies of Holding the In-
pein nal Congress of Geolo-
Leslie, i i M., Notes on the Clawed Frog,
Letter from O. Butschli, 492.
ts
Leucite, 10
Leucophane, 573.
Levis, 954.
pity s Sad att et Classification des
Roe aeiy 555.
PSS scr oreutt 541,
simplex,
Lichens from East Tennessee, N. W.
Pes kin
1078:
Pies ‘Guinea Islands, T. A. Wil-
js 76.
Liebisch, Th Ci Aegean Krystallo-
gra
Life-History of Bacteria, Alfred Billet,
of tes concavus, 972.
Lilium candidum, 475
Limitation in Scientific Work, 918.
Limothrips poaphagus, 970.
Liodon, 953.
Listronotus latiusculus, ots
Lithophysie
Lithostrotion canad e, 310.
Lithothamnion fæeizulatum, 5.
: lym m, 5.
Live-Oak Caterpiilar, 585.
Lixus conca
Locusts and I Grasshoppers, 110.
Löllingite, 5
ng, Paper on Staten Island Fireflies,
691.
haster furcifer, 185.
pansi b blattarum, 88.
Lubbock’s Senses of rece 54.
Luce, L. H. and W. H., Three — of
~ Hypospadias, ‘Toi,
er atra, 694.
cus, Peg-Laying, ete., 1100.
e pn tn 1100.
utrictis lycoptamicus Cope, 952.
Lychnothamnus, es
Fragile, 78.
Lygodesmia juncea, 75.
Lymnæa pa ,
AAS, ater Sponges, 1200.
M Maasen, Peter, 1108
The American
Naturalist. [January,
Macfarlane, American Railway Guide
Ma acgregor’ s Journey, 65.
ER Three Suggestions on Bo-
366
cal Terminology,
Macrau oes Bieta, 275.
patachonica, 275.
Macromerium sco sticum. 770.
Macropteryx oc 192.
agate alta,
ana Note on a New Species of
Act oane 777.
Madagascar 58,
Cr rial 1074, ans
Marmol hilgardian
, 267.
ra a ane
Mammalian Blastodermiec Vesicle, 677.
Primi ave Fives
Mammoth A ge e of the Arctic Ocean,
Manathae, 6
“oe natus americanus, 547.
Maple Sugar, H: W. Henshaw, 977.
Maple Bark Louse, 785.
ap of Bambu , 63.
entral Asia, 66.
n, 665.
Japan
Marine Biological Laboratory, 498, 993.
math a 1193.
h, Prof., on Hallopus and other
osaurs, George Baur, 569.
Two-Taile d orm, 37 3.
1109.
Marseul, S. A
Maselef® s has des Plantes de France
utiles, nuisables et ornamentales,
Mason, a T., The Arts of Modern Sav-
s as a Means of Interpreting
‘Atchioching’, 982.
wares: arena 276.
Hector, —
Preparat
for Sectionin
Microtome, 676. .
McCook, * Die Spinnen Amerikas,” 400.
M sin oe of Zine, 175.
n of Vegetable
the
men
Medicago ee
scutella’
on of Station Botanists, 102.
Megalosaurus dunkcri, 769.
1891.]
Melanopitta, 542.
se rege Ht Self- Regulation of Respi- |
ee
Melinopiane
Mem ee stad Botanical Club,
Mentha piperita, 151.
ium, 150.
,2
“es a ato violacea, 78.
e raen Per i 617.
Mer 0. H., Lava Beds in Idaho,
Mertensia lanceolata 780.
Mesenteries in sex ‘Antipatharia, ya Ie
Mesoplo aa bidens, 608.
pro s, 608.
Baa sce co 613.
ite, 74.
icaceous Schists from Morlaix, 172.
potted! bound 74, 11 n
Micrococcus prod:
igiosus
oseopy, 98, A peri 984, 1100,
ait.
Miles; M., Bi al Factors in the
Nutrition of rooting 958.
be seat Fishkill Limestone Belt, 770.
178, 572, 669,
n, 698.
Mineral ogical News,
1073, 1189.
7 118
Mineralogy and Pet E rere 69, 170,
360, 668, 772, 850, 1070, 1186.
Minerals in Michigan, £
i# New Jersey, 855
ral p Arang 1076
i p, 682.
Minot, Coneresee nee Theory of the Ver-
tebrate Embryo, 501, 617, 629.
hence and Coclom of Verte-
patee of he Blood C
Mo: hole of the orpus-
cles, 1030.
Missouri Botanical Garden, Note On,
Bessey,
Mivart, St. George, 1108.
Mniotilta varia, 1105.
paler 354,
of the Albatross ees, 582.
Index.
|
|
Monarda citriodora, 78.
Monocotyledons , 278.
oore, A Recent Find of Castoroides,
| Morgan, rý P., North ae Species
of Tylostoma, 1199
Morgan, H. A., the Screw ‘Worm, 1213.
Morgan, Bruce bn eng at Johns Hop-
ins University,
Mormolycoides ymin dll , 136. TTN
Morphological Physical Properties, 173.
Morph rll pi ithe Blood Corpuscles,
Min
pst Fron ies o Man, 841.
Mosses of rpi rotates 694.
Motacilla alba, 270.
Mountain of Orizaba, 762.
Müller, F., Priore to the Knowl-
f the Termites, 1118.
10 08.
eculiar Effects of One-
Occupations on the Anat-
gy, 98
u: .
Muscovite and Biotite, 672.
a, 712.
93.
pen
Mustelus canis,
Mustelidw from the eri Fork T
of Nebraska
Myriapoda, 357.
Myrm rmecephilous Coleoptera, 686.
Mysticete, 6
Mystropetalon thornéi, 1081.
ig ed of the og 1206.
ay ores Group, 769
Nanis
asena "s Dr., Journey Across Green-
62,
mere EA of i issue rat numbers
of th
xxii
Nature of m 198.
Naw. aschin, S., Microspores of
Sphagnum, "i080.
Nematoda, 354.
Neofiber allenii, 376, 556
Neotoma fuscipes, 376, 547.
-
5
+O ms, §
ms
Neurocerat’
Neuroptera, 4
New Acridide, 783
New Actinean,
ti 372.
New rchæological Discoveries, 591.
na Dendrophycus tri-
068.
a. ob pen in the United
New Food.Piant of Rhodobenus 13-
punctatus, 1
New Genus of Siliceous Sponges, 665.
New Glands in the Hemipterous Em-
Tyo,
New Gray’s Manual, Review, Bessey,
New Guinea, 657.
Newhall, a 5» Trees of Northeastern
Am FIIT.
New Faw Books of Paleontology, 259.
New Instrume TIT:
New Mandible pe Diversion: 666.
New Species of Ostrac
New York Academy of rte nce s, 294.
Next eae of ms Polctakipesl Geo-
logical Congress, 549.
Nitella, 476.
Nivenite, 670.
Nordenskjol rege 364, 573.
Norman, C. M., Revision of the
1084. °
780.
rthrop, Coluber pr ea Say, 82.
Note on the Seventh Cervical Ver-
bra of the Cat, 83. .
Noctilio leporinus, 84.
palite, 362.
No
Note on an American be aes of Phreo-
The American Tasas
Notes
y
[January,
Notes on the E Laboratory
of the United States Geological
Survey of the United sora
under Prof. Marsh, Barbou
Note on the Pre-Paleozoic Surface of
a A rehean Terranes of Can-
8.
| Note on ibe hae of Cumnoria, Willis-
Notes from Se E s Last Journey,
Cat, North
Notes or. fay of our Birds, J. V. Che-
45.
Note - the — oe Vertebra
rop, 83.
ene me Devonian Fishes, 273.
= on the Syracuse Serpentine, 211.
ar esst ena, 971.
ie
Nyctala pi wi 542.
Nymphæa lotus var. monstrosa, 1081.
AK bbe
Obituary Noles 1108.
Odontoceti, 601, 602.
(Œdiceridæ, 83.
T poeni 972.
Ho bccn of New Zea Zealand, £
of the Ser ae ae
. A. S., 1890-91, 972.
Oliver D. 11 ;
Olliff, The | Codlin Moth—The Corn
On a ‘Poeuliarities in the Flora of
ot Tg Barbara Islands,
a
On iai ‘Peculiar Structural Fea-
tures in the Foothill Region of
m Rocky Pme in Colo-
On ieioecitinns Made in Rocks by Sea
rchins, Fewkes, 1.
On Glacial Phenomena i in Canada, 207.
oe sensibilis, TT.
Ononis spinosa
781.
Gatogeay of Limulus, Kingsley, 678.
On the pik ghee ay teal oF the St.
On the Caudal Pa and Its Supports,
On the Nature a the Supports of the
; M
ins, 413.
On the Oa be Flora of Canada,
) 293.
On Pot-Holes North of Lake Superior
Unconnected with Existing
Streams, 292.
On mee Movements
in. the
ocky Mountain Region, 211.
1891.]
On the y Deposits of the Cape
r River Region, 289.
On the Use al the Phonograph Amon
i Indians, Fewkes, 687.
Oöphyta
Ophinemnthn, 4, Bapt
Cpt doli ian, in
Ophiogly 4
Ophisglypha tn aur rantiaea, 185.
a the , 185.
Ophiopholis, 429.
Ophiurans, 429.
Optical ppoe of Sodium Acetates
i
Original Tuvestigation on the Physi-
ology of Flight, 1207.
Origin of the Pelvis, 188.
Petroleum and Gas, Edward Orton,
River Names i in Indo-China, 66.
the Rock-Pressure of Natura
Gas in the Trenton Msi
of Ohio and Indiana, 292
’ the Sycamore, 766.
Ormerod. E. A., Manual of Tjere
nsects, it
Ornithorynchus, 283.
. Dr., Professor of Biology i in Tu-
lane University, 786.
Orthoclase, 1077-
rton, Origin’ i stig and Gas,
su lethopristis, 375, 589.
Ortho
rita sii cuspidata, 182.
suspidata, 182.
Osborn, H., Insects Producing Silver-
To op in Grass, 970.
Osecinus varabilis,, 1
Ostracoda Fossil,
Otoplana intebinnilias, 191.
Owen, Illness of, 498.
magus crenata,
Pe: 18 i greenoughi; 562.
m, 562.
, 561.
e ets. 1201.
Index.
xxiii
PAL MEGA mecoyi, 167.
Paleocetus heen gen 613.
sedgwickii, 613
Paleontology o of Westers Australia, 665.
Paleozoic Geol. News, 954.
sine ig
Pammel, S. H., On Pollination in the
Genus Æscu s, 96
Fungus Root mrenda 958.
Seed-Coats of the Genus Euphor-
ia,
Panicum capillar 182.
crus~ with 178, 183.
virgat
Papers Read Before the Anthropological
Soc ne! R Washington during
1
at ihe Meeting of Economic Ento-
= 8: Nat.
ences, Boston, 1890, 1106
Paramauricea borealis, 184.
Aaaa Fungi of Texas
Pargasite, 669.
Palered bombidens, 271.
Parker, W. Kitchen, 1108.
Parmelia olivacea, 78
Parting of Hornblende Crystals, 1074.
Partridge, 746.
Paspalum setaceum, 77.
astinaca sativa, 46.
= hie een 956.
Patte: , Origin of Vertebrates,
The Art said Eye, 1084.
Pax, era A New Work on Plant
Morpho! ology 1
Payne. Effect i Whistling on Seals, 382.
Peculiar Uredinexw, Webber, 178.
eors je —— 8.
Pelom
Pennatula ačulea, "184.
orealis, 184.
, 780.
Pentaeta frondosa a, 481.
Pentas æ, Structure of, 282.
ie 1200.
Peridia reat Characters in the Classi-
of the Uredinex, Web-
Diro pkih alios, 191.
Peripatus 84.
Perissodactyla, 470.
Perkins, G. m Insects, 1216.
Perlitic Structure, 366.
Peronospora fariki, 1081.
XXIV
Persica vulgaris, Ca
Persistence of Plant and Animal Life
te we e Changing LETTEN of
ment, Frazer, 517.
Petlescptininn, 482, 483
Petrie, Excavations in the Fayoum, 840.
Petrographical New sier, 170, 860, 668,
772, 850, 1070, i
Phalangium nigrum
Laas aay miey 783.
opilio, 783.
Ph — vulgaris, 475.
Phenacite, 1194.
Phengo sis pimes, 692, 694.
Phoca barbata, 170.
Pho holidophorus nitidus, Egerton, 956.
Phonolite from Brazil, 774.
France
Phos neea —_ in tae 1185.
s, 684.
poe she 692.
Photographs of Dr. Parry, Notice of,
Bessey, 372.
Photurus SINKE. 694.
~ Phragmites s, 182.
Pia. prao 478.
menkeanus, 477.
“aa sg californica, 685.
Physiology, 92, 193, 379, 648, 1086,
os Hypothesis of Heredity
Variation J. A. Ryder, 85.
Prize ati
aph from Nova Scotia, J. W.
995.
Pittsbu nh Coa 1 Bed, 956.
Maneti « of the Hedge-Hog, 288.
Plane-Trees, ae of, Ward, 797.
Plant Mo rphology, Pax, 1082.
The American Naturalist.
Th. |
(January,
Plants of the Bahamas, 781.
Platanus, 565.
Platanisti dæ 603.
Platanista gangetica, 604.
Platner, Direct Division of the Muscles,
985.
Spermatogenesis in the Hermaphro-
aay Gland of Limaz agrestis, 985.
s, 485.
Swee dr ia 354.
Platyceras equilaterum, 955.
Placentation of the Hedge-Hog and the
Placenta, Ai A Ryder, 376.
Plesiocetus affine, 6 6
brevifrons hag
brialmonti, "612.
Pleonekt e, 78.
Biaise valdensis, 956.
Pressure Twinning in Plane, 175.
=e Inoculations rpk Tuber-
osis, 1225.
Priscodel elphin
grandævus , 604.
Prizes to Biological Students, 112.
Probable hy of Polygamy among
` Birds, S. N. Rhoads, 1024.
Prosiek of Biological Society, of
Bos ashington, 296, 385, 691, 11038,
Pes Society of Natural History,
205, 294, 1220.
Natural aa of
Staten Island, | marps re "691,
1105.
Scientific Societies, 102, 205.
385, 497, 691, 869, '987, o
0.
Production of Ang in the United States,
Newber
Proposed National University at Wash-
orosaurus spenerii, 271.
Pees 530.
Protostega, 530.
_ Protozoa, 357.
rus, 580.
Preiidablennias, 8 85.
rei, 666.
Seapdosetehe 0 4 of Tale, 671.
owrig
Plumbonacrite, 73.
; Podocnemis, 483,
liana, 1 91.
ds of Lathrodectus, 1220,
Polakowsky s Account of Honduras, 270.
Regions
Polished Stone Implements in the Na-
ti
Population of British ‘Guiana, 62.
` Moreeeo, 63.
among
f, S. N. Rhoads, 1024.
Paty patina 278.
Polyzoa, 191.
Fossil, 954.
Porphyritic Crystals from Mull, Eng.,
74.
Porter, E. oud Mode of Discharge in a
S of Pleuspora, 963.
PE Marot War: R. P. Bigelow,
Meias o a, 318.
Post- Tertiary De Dapat on Manito’
ai
the Adjoining Territories at Can-
208.
Potioceratide, 169.
Potsdam Sandstone, 695.
: Poulton on the Colors of Animals, E. D.
Pratticela: axillaris, S10.
salax, 376.
sybilla, 386. :
Preglacial Forest Bed of Norfolk, 170.
Index.
XXV
readin i ——
Preah Expeditio
ite of the “pe ae Embryos,
1
Psychology, 284, 882, 973.
r, 4, 428.
Pterolite, 4.
histrio, 589.
eropod Molluses, 191.
Faiy, 973.
Puccinia
79.
Puffinus poe bi 542, 544.
innumerabilis, 785.
ee ena 733.
Prof., A Singular Earthwork
near Foster's Station, 0., 983.
angulata, 694.
Python cartes,
roninas, £70.
Quarterly Journal of Microscopical
robur, 475.
Quetidite, 1190.
RAiLWway in Siberia, 66.
Rallus aquaticus, 270.
longirostris, 542.
Radiolarians in Cretaceous Strata, 168
Rana frasu 84, 540.
Rankin. Th The Zambesi — 837.
Ranunculus acris, , 475.
xxvi
t
niger vulgaris, 324.
sativus, 3
Aen madagascariensis, 1082.
he Collection of =
logical pai in Philadel
phia,
Books and Pamphlets, 54, 162,
a Ba 614, 748, 833, 922,
178.
Find A ET Joseph Moore,
terature, 52, ner
evig 924, 1053, 1
Record of Am 3 S
Kingsley, "351, ioe “Bay, 1037,
256, 554, 613,
he
Rectal ana in Coleoptera, Fernald,
Report of Prof. Putnam, 589.
Se Beene 362.
Red-Eyed Vireo, 745.
penn s urp 77, 182.
Regaleci
Relation oi Fin to Each Other, 407.
cies the ‘Mineral an
and the Geological Occurrence
of the Igneous Rocks in Yellow-
stone Pa
of Nerve-Fibres and Ganglion Cells,
Remarks o on me pen of the Seals,
Spitzka, 1
on the a an Geology of Alaska,
of Mesozoic Insects, 770.
the Charges Against
ae cal Department of the U. S.
Survey, and of the
Prof. 0. ©
The American Naturalist.
(January,
oe lofotensis, 185.
Rhizodus anceps, 167.
Besa" 167.
Rh po N, Probable See i one
my Among Birds,
Rhodo lite 775.
u eterea 182.
182.
Rhynchonella acutiloba, 666.
Rhytinide, 698.
Ribes urah. 7
floridum, T7
otundifolium, TT
— fluitans, 78. s
, W. N., Review of Dana’s Coral
and Cor al Isla nds,
Riley, Fosu Entom mology, 868.
Rocks from the Alps,
prasy Valley, 7 769.
from reas 72.
Roebuck, 193
Fecestelia, 177.
Rosaceæ, 278.
Rosa arkansana, T
80.
Rose, Ai N., Notes upon Plants Collected
t La Paz 2.
Hoari. Plutonic and EffusiveRocks,
Rosenbuschite, 864.
T-
Rules Concerning Zoological Nomencla-
pli oie ee by the Paris Con-
s of Zoologists in 1889, 551.
Russell, a n ‘Alaskan NE
Ruta graveolens, 631.
| Rutile rom the Urals, 178.
ty A A Physiological Hypothesis of
Here on, 85.
een he of oc ie Tode Hor and
the Phylogeny of the Placenta,
376.
The sreg on A of the Primary
Mat e Scales and the
ee tn Digg of Teleosts, 489.
1891.] Index. xxvii
SSABAL c oa ala 564. Seeley’ . grak hes on the Organiza-
Saccania criana, 183. n, Structure, and Classification
Saccharex, 370. of the Fossil Reptilia, E. D. Cope,
Sach’s History of paa: Note on, by 27
Segmentation of the Vertebrate Brain,
Sagartia aA ola, 184.
a i ee Ais from Indiana, Self-Regulation of rs pet apr toads
But Selous’ Map Mashona-Land, 889
647.
Salenia pone 666. Pae ie A chaser
. Salix fragilis, 695. terre. 647.
Salmo mykiss macdonaldi, 589. Eee ‘Crystals, 175.
Salvia officinalis, 634. Sensitiveness of Joints, 1086.
o 669 Sequoia langsdorfii, 564
Satureja, 686. Sericite gneiss, 172.
Satureja capitata, 638. paed _ uca, 182.
ensis, TH
juliana, 638. Berna and Earle’s Economic Fungi,
ontana, 638 | e on, Bessey,
viminea, 638. Shell- in Asia, 286
Sandstone Dykes, 7 Shepherdia argentea, 188.
Sandstone Dykes in e A ail. Shipl we ib acher of Comparative Anat-
Saurians Lea ta of New Zealand, .
Shufeldt, R. W. , Anatomy of Heloderma,
Saxifraga enanthe, 270.
Scaptella Te 582. ekpa The pte = Cotton, 1080.
Sepan chus platyrhynchus, 875, 588. | Siberian Rive ers, pee 275.
Seapolite, 69. Sigmodon hispidus ar a6
Scientific Expedition, 786. Significance of feito 575.
News, 111, 304, 338, hig 598, 786, a ari 1189.
875, 993, 110 Sillery, 9 n
Sciurus hudsonius, pelts Sillimanite
Sciurus hudsonius mogollonensis, 586. Silphi wm perfoliatum 1215.
garter W., 1108. Silarian Fe = es from Ireland, 361.
£ chedonnardus texanus, 181. Siphonopho
Schi Siphon pmoptora eee 783.
Schliemann’ 8 Tion, 1093. Sium m; 719.
Schloteimia an a, 559. Sogran's s Ne w Mineral, 365.
ee 339. Smith, J. B., Fertilizers as Insecticides,
catenata, 559. f
charmassei, 559. The us Agrotis, 1090.
Schmid, E- W., Explorations in the Grasses ‘of Box “Bad and Chey-
omoro Islands, 840. e Counties. Neb., 181.
Sclerurus albogularis, 546. T., , Variability of Disease Germs,
canigularis, 546 |
guate P? 546 . Wa rrington, 1108.
mexicanus, 546. E in Banana Bunches, Cope, 782,
Scolymus keiid, 642, 643.
Scoriaceous Basalts in Teneriffe, 361.
Scottish ee Ay Board, 82.
Seott and Osborn on the Fauna of the
Brown’ 70.
|
|
| in High Places, Aldrich, 781.
| g= Uredospores es of Gymnospor-
|
angium A 369.
| Society Prom, Agri., Officers, 1890, 974.
| Soda orthoclase, 574
! : :
Scrophularia aquatica, 4 |
è Seyllium canicula, 411.
Sea-Urchin Excavations at Guaymas,
apas Few wkes, 478. | tuberosum, 315.
Solaster earlii, 185.
Soleniscus littonanus
Se wa
Secretion of Salts i in Saliva, 94.
Solger, B., kee Figures, 984.
Sedimentrry Rocks in Wales, 117-
xxviii
Ta a ee Rock Constitu-
175.
Some Elementary Botanies, C. E. Bes-
sey, 678.
Reasons for Hersen Not Wearing
Out, Halsted, 577.
Results of Ekon Studies, 291.
Sorosporium ellsii, 277.
Southern Extension of of the Appomattox
orm
Ah. E. po A New Hollyhock
Disease, rag
Rpelding £, V. M., Development of t
oe of OAAS aiei
Spengo,
r
686.
sle of Wight, 169.
ee longicaudus, 96
g anak Cuneta hypogaea, 545.
Spermato napy esis in the Hermaphrodite
: and of Lines agrestis, Platner,
Spilanthes jos: 42.
olerac
: Spinacea ‘ner 726.
a, 724,
a, 725.
Sger poi 133
Spitzka, aedy on the Brain of the
Seals,
ee, ilerosphores, 1080.
Spharg
Spherulites iu in in Lipari Islands, 1072.
Sphyrapicus ruber, 545.
Paoa. 191, 3 52,
m the Siluro- Cambrian, 954.
air 182.
eleti
Squalodon antverpienesis, 603.
atlanticus, 603.
Messing 603.
2, 603.
Nage 727.
id, An Imm ense, 281.
anley’s Discoveries, 264.
y, Pro theless on the Trans-
E RE oP
Col. Stanton’ s Recent Descent of the
See: River, 463.
s, 188.
Staten pen Fireflies, C. D. Long, 691.
ion of Acquired Epilepsy, |
The American Naturalist.
i
[January, ,
TE Instances of the Effects of Mu-
cal Sounds on Animals, 22, 128,
236
Stejneger, L, bese Bufo lentiginosus wood-
h 1204.
itenodelphis camatioutatu, 604.
, 950.
S|
t r of the Quebec Group, 210.
trelitzia regine,
trength of the Earth’s Crust, Gilbert,
n n Th > TH TH Pr; RK
oe
©
4
ms ae
ic]
Y 5
si ‘B24 = S
© =
S
®
Wa
n
N
Striped Hyæna GGI: fat:
Strong wlocentrotes drobachiensis, ok
urpuratus, 3, 480.
Struggle for Life, ‘466.
Structure and a of Glacial Sand
Plains, 208, 270.
estas. of the Pampe an Deposits, 275.
Structure of the Primitive Streak, 618.
Struvite Crystal s, 1
udies of Pelecypoda, R. T. Jackson,
1132.
Study ok SS from Sierra Nevada, 668.
Sturte L., Curecurbita an Ameri-
yer g 959.
History of Tarn Vegetables, 30,
; 143, 313, 719.
Subdivision of the Upper Cretaceous,
a dur obrivensis, 956.
Sucr 258.
Sulpher Crystals, 1193
Survey of Cameroons and Gold Coast,
Symphoricarpus occidentalis, 277.
TALC Formula, 1192.
Tachylite, 172.
Tzeniosomi, isl,
Talbot, D. > Library and Scientific
whasa s Hec or, 953.
Tere, — gf cores in ‘the Arid Re-
5.
Taxodium daa 961.
Teeth as Ev idence of Evolution, W.C.
24.
De
Tellina pte, 563
Temperature in Nerves, 1086.
nucleata, 666.
1891.]
nu in Telegraph Re 1201.
Terminal “ogra in Ontario, 209.
Tertiar a Coina of "Alabama,
Deposits o of East Massachusetts, 210.
580.
Testudina
Testudo aos 484
gre
ext- Book’ of Animal Physiology, 256.
86.
helys, 4
"halassochelys caretta, 486.
‘he Annals of Botany, aya
Arts of Modern
bi bats kd feed bal b
So
arking Sands of the Hawaiian
Islands,
Thecophosa,
The Evolution of Mind, E. D. Cope, 899,
1000.
Harvest Spiders of North America,
C. M. Weed, 914.
sg eg of “the Fungi of the
_— ted States, Farlow and Sey-
1196
Mesoderm a kd g soa of Ver-
Ti.
8,
Theory of iia 174.
273
Thermophila $
The Society of Physics and Nat. Hist. of
Geneva, 11 i
est American Oaks, A. Kellogg,
056.
Thomas’s Ohio Mounds, 555.
Thorogummite, 72.
Three Lion ORE” on Botanical Ter-
vrg Macmillan, 866..
ase Pad adias, 1016.
he. este kaldik i, 957.
— 9.
E eurei vespertina, 82.
Tilia europæa, 475.
Tin raag in Malaca, 841.
Tinoce
Titan olivine e, 107. 5.
Topaz Group of Minerals, 776.
Topaz
Tolypella, 476.
Tolypelopsis, 476.
Tor Ads toises Sold in the vse of Phila-
dhia, E. D. Cope, 374.
pereas HR
odora ferruginea, 185.
t
Index.
ens, 261.
Ulianin, N acon of 1 Death, 114.
Ullucus , 35.
Xxix
Tracing Nerve-Fibresin the Brain, 1218.
Trachypteridx, 482.
Tragopogon pasioari 635.
en microphylla, 564.
Tre n Limestone, 774.
Tridyrite, 672
Trigl
Tri e, 364
iplopus cubitalis, 471
o idens, 471.
Tritonite, 574.
bviridis, 646.
?
Trocheta subviridis, 64
Troglodytes ædon, 542.
Trochlearis aig = deep 189.
Tropocolum
minus, 30.
tuberosus, 81.
Trypeta pomonella, 1089.
Tuberculina persicina, 15.
Tunicata, 537.
omeya a fluvi iatilis, T81.
pi, gat Coloring, 1075.
us, 270.
ed Eart thworm, Marsh, 373.
lei Ae arenarius, 1091.
Tyloderma foveolatum, aR 1092.
Tylostoma angolense, TT, 7
Tyrolite, 1191.
Jarred and ayarda ie
Ulrich, Ba O. Fossil Polyzoa and Ostra-
‘coda, 954.
Underwood, L. M., A Bison a Syracuse,
United States Fish hcp Antho-
od a of
zoa an hinoderma the
Gulf Stream Slope a he New
England Coast, 183.
Trancecopis scaber, 375.
Uredin eros eat Webber, 75,
Vibinus Gro a.
Upsitonphorus, Teia 375, 538.
5, 588.
375,
Uromyces t troli; 780, 959.
Uropoda krameri, 84, 584.
pie
vegetans
eg i9
Uropyxis, 179.
Uropyzxis N 180.
Ursidæ, 119.
Urca nallose, 183.
consors, ;
longicornis, 183.
perdix, 183.
XXX
Use of the Sobel ig mg the erat of
the anpe Ft Am
In ae a ewks aa
Us: National Academy. a Sciences,
460, 497,
— barbata, iso.
U: g’s New Mineral, 365.
seadane: andropognis, OTT.
100.
hyphod
Utricularia cies 78.
AIZEY, Notice of Death, 114.
Valu to pr erm ‘“ Hudson River
n Geological Nomencla-
tur B10.
Vanessa ce Fei 981.
Van Hise, Crystal Alline Schists, 1070.
Variolite, 1188.
Veins of Diabase with Tachylite, 669.
Veins in the Gorge, 46
Venukoff. M., English at Schahidulla,
841.
Venus mercenaria, 563.
Vertebrata, 537, 969.
Ve rtebrate Fossils in English Chalk,
Vertebrates, Origin of, Wm. Patten,
Vertebr rate Primitive Streak, 618.
Viola cana e, 179
hate a 378.
Viverridæ, 1
Vi skit Pseudomo orphs, 119
Voice of Hyla andersonii. Anbo, 189.
oyage on the Lomame,
` Vulpes vulgaris, 547.
A AGEN, W., Dr., 1108.
Wadai and Darfur, 57.
- Ward, ie ini pie f the Plane-Trees, 797.
ers a Flora, 11038.
Uredinex, 17
gic pert Cell - Characters in
l
FTF.
Uredinial Parasites, 75.
L., The Transitional Drift
the
tion of the Uredinez,
acaulis Nutt.
An Outlet for Memoirs, etc., ` 1088.
, 188.
The American
rican |
Naturalist.
[January,
Black Harvest Spider, 683.
PEE of the Clover-Stem
arèn
of Buffalo Tree-H Hopper,785.
Lie History of the Evening Prim-
e Curculio 972.
Milky e ee of Plants a —
gainst Stem
Grtnoaitive of Desks a spinosus, 971.
EAE arera of the Sagittaria Curcu-
971.
Scab ‘of Wheat-Hea ds, 958.
The Long-legged Harvest Spider,
Weed, H. E., pe
Weibyeite, 575
Weinse heniek. Mineral Syntheses, 1076.
— aye Dr., 1107.
oc. Nat. Meeting, 1890, 994.
Wilder r, B. G., The Brains
Ara ee kaote aD
TS e a a l ents of c rystal-
lography, "1058.
Williams, T. A., oe of the Guinea
Islands
gre” ae the Canyon Flora of North
n Nebras
Williston, gat on aie Pelvis of Camp-
osaurus, 472.
Wiluite, 74.
Wilson, T., British Museum, 199.
ngresses, National and Interna-
tional, held at Paris g Er-'`
Jhio, 1206.
me Death, 114.
Woodsia pies Vk
Woodward, Smith, On Ceelorhynchus
165.
Agassiz,
Wortman, Human and Animal Remains,
592.
Wright, A. A., Amphioxus in Tampa
J, 4 ,
Writing Test, Joseph Jastrow, 978.
Wulff's Method of TE Plane
1195
ng
Wurtzilite, 365.
8 alid strumarium, 1216.
hus decheni, 408.
Rpieoipes FPR 546.
Tiia i 1205. :
Xenotime, 572.
1891.]
Vue Water ond al Bessey, 475.
Soto —
i US gillespie, 116
ee brachyspondylus, 602.
Dis. anang 1084.
Zonotrichia querula, 545. 4
ADDITIONS
Abbott, = C., Frogs Eating Snakes, 188.
Voi Hyla andersonii, 189.
Abdominal ame. of Lepismida,
3 pat rem | 2.
Anécighaal Stone Implements of the Po-
tomac Valley, W. H. Holmes, 979.
i, 184.
Account of the Defile of aa ben:
Acipenser beoir ma; MG.
medirostris, 538.
sturio, 375, 588.
ansmontanus,
oe 578, 1073.
oplat
orpusculus, 253.
ngage ar dary 167.
fae 167.
PR cee eichhornii, S. Calvin, 964.
3 :
Index, XXxi
Zoology, 79, 183, 279, 372, 476, 678,
781, 964, 1083, 1200.
Zoological ‘News, 83, 191, 279, 473, 488,
9.
Garden and Park at Washington,
Position of Palawan , 79.
Reconn e in Grand Manan,
Fewkes,
Zygophyta, 675.
TO INDEX.
euphorbix, 178.
hemisphericum, 179.
olii-repentis . 959.
pein, 573. 1073.
itis meloda
543.
vocifera, 543.
Ælurodon compressus, n. 8., 1067.
>, 1067.
sævus Leidy, 1067.
Agalite, 1075.
Agassiceras lævigatum, 561.
striaries, 561.
Age of the Gay Head Bluffs at Martha’s
Vine 562. ‘
of the e, 564.
Aeren paee, 181.
Alaskan Saponi, EG Russell,
xxxii
.
Geological Society, 109, 205, 289.
— Railway Guide, Macfar-
lane, 952.
Ornithologists Union,Seventh Con-
s,1
Society aty for Psychical Research, 284.
Te rrestial Leech, Forbes, 646.
Tapir
eee planorbe, 557.
557,
Amphibinn Basins, 539.
Pe eg EE Rah hoa
. Am
Spray
mac m
Amygðaloidai Trap from Thunder Bay,
nada,
deine communis, 781.
258.
=
logy Affected by
One-Sided Derabations, J. Mul-
` ler, 981.
Anchovies at Torquay, 282.
— e, 69.
Andrews, Autotomy in the Crab, 138.
Andropogon holt, 182, 183, 278.
s, 182.
peace ek ig 277.
scoparius, 181,
The American Naturalist.
[January, 1891.]
Anemone bap ica, 387.
A New F or | Dog from the ‘pte Fork
e, E. D. Cope, 106
An Extensive De; posit of Phosphorite
a Fone 1185.
Anglesite TAGI, 1194.
Anguis fragilis, 1210.
Animal T fe asic cree Conditions
vironment, 517.
PEST Quartzites, 955
Slat
Anisolaoxyphenetol, 1194.
Aul ay rentinus, 571
Anold 51.
An nel ‘Descent: The Origin of Meta-
erism and t igre
e
of the Mesoderm, E. Mey
1
Annelids , 854.
Annual Report of Biological Laboratory,
859.
Anodonta cygnea, 582.
An Old Bete sinat Letter, 1196.
fyn ESY A 698.
ocroite, 74
a, 280.
aie in of the A. A. A. 8:; at
Indianapolis, 975
and Prehistoric Archeology, 975.
‘Antiophias grandiflorum, 184,
Anthus aquaticus, 270. >
Apetale, 278.
THE
AMERICAN NATURALIST
VoL. XXIV. JANUARY, 1890. 277.
ON EXCAVATIONS MADE IN ROCKS BY
SEA-URCHINS.
BY J. WALTER FEWKES.
HE cavities made by sea-urchins in solid rocks were first
described at length by Mr. E. T. Bennett’ many years
ago (1825), and since their discovery the phenomenon has been
repeatedly mentioned and discussed. The habit is not confined
to any single genus, and it seems capable of proof that the same
species does not resort to this practice in all localities in which
the animal occurs.
The history of the different opinions in regard to the character
of the excavations and the means and object of the boring have
been considered by others. It is my purpose to barely refer to
the historical part of the subject, or simply mention it without
further comment. The question has both a geological and zoo-
logical, and likewise a botanical side, as the aid of certain low
genera of alge has been thought necessary to account for the
phenomenon.
Leske and Linnzus described a species of Cidaris, C. saxatilis,
but it does not appear that either of them was familiar with the
boring habit of sea-urchins. Rumphius mentions the fact that
some sea-urchins are found in holes. Lamarck first gave a
1 Notice of a Peculiar Property of a Species of Echinus. Trans. Linn. Soc., Vol. XV.
P- 74, 7, 1826.
e The American Naturalist. [January,
description of Æ. lividus? from a specimen taken by Lalande in
the neighborhood of Marseilles, and although he does not men-
tion the excavations made by this species, according to Dr. P.
Fisher he had in his possession in 1811 a rock excavated by
them.
Dr. Fisher ê in 1864 published an historical account of the ob-
servations made by others on this subject up to that year. The
additions to our knowledge since that time to the present year
have been historically considered in a paper by George John.*
From these two contributions, as well as from the writings on the
subject by Bennett,’ Cailliaud® Trevelyn,’ Robert,’ Lory,’
Deshayes” and Hesse" a very good idea of what is known on
this subject may be obtained.
The boring habit has been observed in the following rock forma-
tions: Chalk, coral limestone, limestone, sandstone, gneiss,
granite and lavas. It has also been observed in many other
rocks, some of which have not been identified.” Excavating sea-
urchins have been reported from Ireland, England, the Coasts of
France ” on the English Channel, Bay of Biscay, and Mediterra-
nean, Algiers, Azores, Florida, West Indies, Coast of California,
2An attempt by Valenciennes (Comp. Rend., Vol. XLI., p. — to pina the boring
sea-urchin allied to Æ. Zividus from the type described from the Mediterranean, under
name Æ. fenebrans, has not been generally followed. The S Bator alia Hcg which
makes the excavations atGrand Manan, differs in no way, except possibly that some of
the spines are more stumpy, from ordinary specimens which do not bore in ro
3N I del’ Echinus lividus Lamk. Ann. d. Sci. Nat., V.Ser., Vol. I.
p- pr
4 Ueber bohrende Seeigel. Arch. f. Naturg., 55 Jahr, I. Band, 3 Heft.
5 Notice of a Peculiar Property of a Species of Echinus. Trans. Linn. Soc., 217, 1826.
6 Observations et nouv. faits sur les Mollusques RS en general. Comp. Rend. t.
39, pp. 43-45. Observations sur les oursins perf. de Bretagne, Revue et Maz. Zool., Vol.
VII, os ae
at ‘a f the Echinus lividus. Edinb. Philos. Journ., 46, pp. 386-87.
ee perf te d'une espece d’Echi Comp. Rend., t. 39, P. 639.
t le granite sur les côtes de la Bretagne. Bull.
Soc. Geol., p. ct 1856.
10 id. Y Ann. d. Sci. Nat.,t. VIIL., p. 251.
12 John gives a tabular view of the kinds of stone, locality, panying organi d
observer, made up from his study of the literature
13 Fisher has saa Oy a table stating 1e E on coasts of France where
chinus lividus
TUTA HS
1890.] Excavations by Sea-Urchins. 3
Panama, Australia, Mauritiusand Reunion. Not a single instance
is recorded from North of Florida on the Atlantic seaboard of
North America, with the exception of those from Grand Manan
reported in the present paper.
Although it is well known that the sea-urchins of several species
are able to excavate holes in solid rock, that habit has not
been see well noted in our common sea-urchin S. drobach-
zensis.* It is indirectly referred to in our text-books on Zodlogy,
but I have not yet seen a definite statement of a locality on our
coast where the excavations can be seen and the boring habit
studied. During the past summer (1889) an interesting speci-
men of rock excavation was observed by the author on the Island
of Grand Manan, New Brunswick. A mention of it may not be
without value to those interested in this subject or who have in
mind a study of the phenomenon. The Black Ledges, which lie
near the island of Nantucket, Grand Manan, are rocky reefs bare
at low tide and wholly covered at high water. These ledges are
made up of a hard mica schist, through which run veins of
harder quartzite." These ledges have their surface covered for
the most part with “sea weeds” belonging to different kinds of
Fuci and Laminariz, and although not exposed to the full force
of the sea from the Bay of Fundy, are still at times beaten by a
heavy surf. The sides of the Black Ledges are thus broken or
eroded here and there, so that many pools and deep clefts or
recesses are forced in them. These recesses are in no way char-
acteristic, but take the form of simple niches in the rock, wholly
or partially walled in by the bowlders which lie strewn about,
and are often simply natural depressions or basins in the rock.
They are generally small, and often have overhanging walls. One
of these depressions, which can be visited at low tide only, shows
the work of the sea-urchin in rock excavations in the clearest
manner. The rock on the sides of which the depressions are
MAA = of the Echini, p. 706) that Strongylocentrotus purpuri
ratus
has this “habit on coast of “ California.” The kind of rock on which the excavation
takes place and the name of the observer not given.
15 This quartzite is found in several places on Grand Manan in such quantities as to im-
part a white color to the cliffs, and to it may possibly be traced local names, as White
Head, given to'a well known island lying off the coast
4 The American Naturalist. [January,
formed is inclined at a small angle to a perpendicular, and is
almost bare of algz, so that the boring can be seen without
difficulty. The basins ordinarily have water in them at low tide.
There is no coralline on the floor of the cavity.
The number" of sea-urchins at Grand Manan is very great, as
was long ago noted by Dr. William Stimpson. In many places it
is impossible to see the bottom of the bay, so densely populated
is it with these animals. In the rock recess above referred to, the
surface of the shelf before the animals were disturbed was
paved with sea-urchins, and the number of examples of excava-
tions which they had formed were therefore very numerous. The
cavities made by the sea-urchins impart to the rock an appearance
not unlike the upper surface of honeycomb, with this difference,
that the bounding rim of each excavation is always ring-shaped
and entire.
The separate excavations which are shown in the figure, some-
times with the Strongylocentrotus in situ, sometimes with the same
removed, are never very deep, but are undoubtedly made by the
echinoderm. Their surfaces are concave, corresponding with the
convexity of the sea-urchin’s body, and very smooth, as if freshly
cut or worn. They are often larger than the sea-urchin inhabit-
ing them, and roomy enough to admit a free motion of the
contained animal. In no instance is the depth of the depression
greater than the smaller diameter of the animal. The edge ot
16 The wealth of asteroid and ophiuroid life at Grand Manan is also marvelous to one
who has confined his attentio a to collectin ecting in Menachusettė aK ae bona of the
The
dredge near High Duck Island was gorged with specimens of Ophiopholis PET
with here and there specimens of Ophiacant Soe and ppap ipes ES squamata,
although common, is not found in such multitudes. to believe from its
extreme rarity that the Comatula recorded b Stimpson paw Gast) d Manan is astraggler.
Certainly the genus is very rare in these waters. Leptasterias, Solaster, Crossaster, and
7 7 ster also oc is
Manan genus of starfishes, and a colony | of its young, fifty or more in number, were
found by M. J. S. Owens on the under side of the rock at low tide near Nantucket.
This n in he colonial en pE the young of this genus is an interesting
ted with i ier stages. Ctenodisci
ehispaias wie tok t seen by us at Grand Manan, although others have found it there. It
was, however, taken at Eastport in tdredging. On the geen the dredging at
Grand M i ich fi i ya f starfish =e ophion life as ' The
z =
1890.] Excavations by Sea-Urchins. 5
the rim which forms a dividing edge between two contiguous ex-
cavations is often covered by an incrustation of genera of
calcareous alge.
Prof. W. G. Farlow, of Harvard University, has kindly identified
some of the corallines from specimens of the rock submitted to
him. He finds upon them, Lithothamnion polymorphum (L.)
Aresch., and Melobesia lenormandi Aresch. A third kind with
papilla, which he interprets as the beginning of branches, he is
inclined to regard a young stage of Lzthothamnion fasciculatum.
He writes me that “the corallines of Northern Europe have
been more studied since date of his Marine Alge of New
England, and there may be a question whether the nomenclature
of our Eastport species should not be modified to adapt itself to
recent work in Artic corallines.” The most abundant coralline
in the neighborhood of the excavation is the first mentioned.
From the sections which I have made of alga, and rock, and a
minute examination of the line of contact, I cannot see that the
_ former has in anyway modified the surface of the latter, a result
practically the same as that arrived at by John in his studies.
While it is possible that this deposit may in some instances
augment the depth of the depression, the amount of such increase
is not large, for the alga is generally limited to the top of the
bounding rim of the depression, and the walls of its
deepest part are filed perfectly smooth, while the sides of the
depression and more especially the bounding rim are sometimes
covered with and augmented by this encrusting coralline. The
surface of the hole as above remarked had no coralline, and gen-
erally the rock appeared to be freshly cut.
Hesse records an observation of a sea-urchin boring in oyster
shells, and regards this habit as a means of getting food. While
it is not impossible that a modicum of nourishment may be
obtained in this case by the sea-urchin, it seems to the author im-
probable that the amount thus obtained can be any considerable
quantity. I have learned from good authority (Mr. Cheney) that
the spiles of weirs at Grand Manan are sometimes excavated by
sea-urchins so that the bark of the birch posts is worn through
and even depressions made in the wood tissue. In this instance
6 The American Naturalist. [January,
it may be that the object was food. New observations on this
point are necessary, not only as far as the question of excavation
in woody fibre is concerned, but also as to the contents of the
stomach of those urchins which are found performin g this function.
It does not seem to me that the coralline plays any considera-
ble part in the excavation of the rock directly or indirectly, and
the sections published by John appear to demonstrate that there
is no chemical or other action due to the coralline upon the rock
formation upon which it lies. While we would naturally suspect
that the geodes” once tenanted by urchins might be covered with
coralline when deserted by them, in a majority of cases the cavi-
ties which are`still tenanted have no algous deposit. In those
cases where the sea-urchin and the coralline still exist together
and in which the surface of the latter is worn by the animal, we
may suppose that in the interval during which the sea-urchin had
vacated the geode the coralline had taken possession of the cavi-
ty, and in due time another sea-urchin had returned to the
recess and begun work again upon the layer of calcareous algous
formation covering the stone.
My attention was first called to the excavations of Strongylocen-
trotus by Mr. Webster Cheney, of Nantucket Island, who had
discovered them while gunning. Mr. Cheney was not aware, at
the time of his discovery, that the fact was known that sea-urchins
have their habit of boring in the rocks. I visited the place with
a fellow student, Mr. Owens, of Bridgeton, New Jersey.
The following observation was made on the. migration of the
animal from its excavation, which seems to look as if more than
one sea-urchin is concerned in the excavation of a single hole, or
that some of the sea-urchins are nestlers as well as borers. It
was found, after the sea-urchins had been removed from the ex-
cavations which they had made, that in the course of time the
holes were repeopled and inhabited by different individuals from
those first found there.’* New individuals thus find the old exca-
™ The term geode, meaning a cavity, has been used for these ations, It seems ap-
plicable, although used in a somewhat diff se by geologists.
18I have, however, no observations to prove that the sea-urchins ever voluntarily
leave their cavities for food and after such an i again to them.
1890.] Excavations by Sea-Urchins. 7
vations suited to their purposes, and it is just to conclude that
they continue the work of excavation which their predecessors
began. They seem to take advantage of the depression already
made for their protection.
It may likewise be supposed that in the case of. death, natural
or violent, an occupation of the former excavation by a new indi-
vidual may take place. This is possibly true also in the case of
boring sea-urchins from the Azores or the coast of France, where
very much deeper recesses are sometimes hollowed in the rock.
The fact that the sea-urchin is much larger than the entrance by
which it entered the cavity, would thus seem to mean, not that
the same individual had hollowed out the entire chamber, but that
the sea-urchin which now occupies the cavity had grown larger
since it passed through the hole excavated by its predecessor.
An interesting question often asked, and as yet unanswered in
a satisfactory manner, is, “ How do the sea-urchins make these
excavations in the solid rock?” This question is a very difficult
one to answer, and several attempts have been made to do so
satisfactorily. It is not necessary to mention all the theories sug-
gested, but one or two of the more reasonable may be considered.
Robert supposed that the constant motion of the sea-urchin by
which the spines act as files after long attrition has worn out
these excavations.
It has been suggested by Cailliaud, and this it must be con-
fessed seems a more reasonable explanation, that the cavities are
gnawed or chiselled out by the action of the teeth. Both of these
explanations seem possible ; but the latter is more probable than
the former, as several observations seem to point to this conclu-
sion. Among the facts which support Cailliaud’s hypothesis are
the following: the teeth are very hard, they have means of repair
when their tips are worn, and their surface and cutting points are
bare, and well adapted for cutting. It may also be added that
the muscles which move the jaws are strong. It would seem, so
for as their relative hardness goes, that these organs rather than
the spines are the tools which have worn out these holes.
The author believes, however, that Robert was partly right for
ascribing to the spines a portion of the work done in excavating
8 The American Naturalist. [January,
the cavities. In sea-urchins taken from rock cavities the spines
immediately about the mouth and those on the circumference are
somewhat worn in specimens from Grand Manan. Moreover,
the surface of the depression is perfectly smoothed in such a sym-
metrical manner that it seems necessary to suppose a rotary’?
motion of the sea-urchin to effect it. This smoothness, already
pointed out in sea-urchin excavations by Trevelyan, could not,
I think, have resulted from the teeth alone.
The major part of the work in the excavation of rock by sea-
urchins must, however, fall upon the teeth and the dental appa-
ratus. Upon this point the writings of Cailliaud are conclusive.
These teeth are probable chisels, which pry into the rock or
gouge out fragments, and in that way eventually remove con-
siderable quantities of rock from its bed. A. Agassiz adopts the
theory that sea-urchin excavations are chiseled out by the teeth,
but offers no evidence bearing on Cailliaud’s theory.
John has, it seems to me, furnished important data, indicating
that the teeth play a part in the wearing out of the rock cavities
in which the urchins live, for he was able to find in the aliment-
ary canal of the sea-urchin fragments of stone similar to that in
which the borings were made. The simple fact, however, that
grains of rock similar to those of the locality of the sea-urchin
are found, is not in itself an evidence that they were chiseled out of
the rock by the teeth. We know that toothless Echinoidea, as for
instance genera of Spatangoids, often have their alimentary canal
full of sand, which has apparently been swallowed by the animal.
There seems no reason to refuse to believe that any of the so-
called round sea-urchins are not able to swallow small pebbles in
the same way, but while it is true that the one (spatangoid) gener-
ally lives on the sand, and the other (echinoid) on rocky bottom,
one can readily see how small fragments might be picked up by
the latter and swallowed.”
19 This rotary motion is yet to be observed, but it may be said that if it exists it must
be very slow, as the animals never move rapidly.
20 Sea-urchins are at times scavengers, or at all events a carcass of a seal sunk in the
water will be found to be covered with these animals. Possibly they feed on the sea
fleas and other animals which do the work of scavengers,
1890.] Excavations by Sea-Urchins. 9
We have members of almost all the lower groups of animals,
as sponges, annelids and other worms, mollusks and crustaceans,
all of which are endowed with boring habits. The excavating
habit possessed by the sea-urchin may belong to the same cate-
gory as that of these animals, and it may be a voluntary act for
self protection or other purposes. There is, however, this very
interesting fact pointed out by others in relation to the boring
sea-urchin, in which it seems to differ from those already men-
tioned. The habit of excavating seems to be one which is
limited to individual sea-urchins which live in certain exposed
positions, where the tides are very high. Thousands of speci-
mens of sea-urchins on rocks where there was not a visible sign
of excavating can be found, and those echinoderms which are
below the wash of the tide, as well as some in its force, exhibit no
manifestation of this power. These facts lead me to ask if it is
not possible that there are influences in environment or in phy-
sical forces acting upon them which make certain individuals an
involuntary agent in boring. Or is it not probable that we
may find the excavating power due in part to the action of the
sea itself. It is in other words possible that the force which ex-
cavates these geodes is somewhat similar to that exerted in the
case of the formation of the geologic phenomenon known as
“pot-holes.” The living body of the sea-urchin might occupy
the same relation to the cavity in which it lies that the inert stone
does to the pot-hole in which it is often found, and which it
played an essential part in creating. The fact that beautiful
examples of pot-holes can be seen worn out of the solid rock on
the adjoining island of Grand Manan, not far from the sea-urchin
excavations, has suggested this explanation, which certainly has
much to recommend it. We may, if we adopt this theory as a
part of the explanation, regard the echinoid body clothed with its
spines as an involuntary agent moved about by the waves,
slightly perhaps, yet moved enough to wear out by its attrition
in course of time the solid substance of the rock. The spines,
teeth, and possibly the body itself may thus exert a wearing
action capable in time of making an excavation into the solid
rock. This explanation would furnish good reason for the very
10 The American Naturalist. [January,
smooth character of the floor of many of the sea-urchin hollows.
One can readily imagine how in the beginning of the growth
of the cavity, in order to cling more tenaciously to the rock, the
sea-urchin seeks out a small natural depression in which it
anchors itself by its suckers for protection from the surf. Con-
stant movement of its body, due to the waves, and consequent
attrition of the spines and teeth, caused by the movement of the
water, deepens this slight depression until it reaches a consider-
able size, which is enlarged by every motion of the animal. To
this increase in size voluntary movements of teeth and spines
also contribute.”
The accompanying figure taken from a photograph by Mr.
Northrop, of the School of Mines, New York, represents a
number of these sea-urchins as they naturally lie in their ex-
cavations, and also several cavities, formerly occupied, from
which the inhabitants have been removed. Although these
holes are not so deep and therefore not so conspicuous as can be
seen in rocks from some other coasts which might be introduced
in illustration, they are the only ones which I have ever seen
from our vicinity which exhibit this phenomenon”
I am tempted to return to an aspect of the subject to which I
have already alluded. Notwithstanding the large numbers of
sea-urchins found at Grand Manan, the places where the excava-
ting habit can be studied are very few in number and very local.
I know indeed of no other locality except on the Black Ledges
where there are excavations of this kind, and yet there are many
places where the conditions are identical, and where the animals
are equally abundant. It may be concluded from these facts that
there must be certain peculiarities of environment especially
adapted to these animals to present favorable conditions in indi-
viduals for this habit. It would seem that a mechanical explan-
ation that the depressions were in a way due to forces analogous
to the action of those at work in the excavation of “ pot-holes ”
*1 James Salter. On the Structure and Growth of the Teeth of Echinus. Quart.
Journ, . Sc., 1861, p. 216.
2 The fact that specimens illustrating the excavating power of the sea-urchins can
. oast is an interesting one as affording an opportunity to study the
method by which the sea-urchins accomplish their work.
PLATE: F
`
Wy
NX
SQ
“on AS Aes
Sge é
ES
NÜ \ 2
IAT
BURROWING ECHINI.
The above figure was taken from a AAEE of a part of the side of the grotto in
which the sea-urchins are found. pho cir i was kindly taken for me by Professor
Northop of the School of Mines, ins York City, to whom I am indebted for this and
other kindnesses,—(See page zo.)
IO The American Naturalist. [January,
smooth character of the floor of many of the sea-urchin hollows.
One can readily imagine how in the beginning of the growth
of the cavity, in order to cling more tenaciously to the rock, the
sea-urchin seeks out a small natural depression in which it
anchors itself by its suckers for protection from the surf. Con-
stant movement of its body, due to the waves, and consequent
attrition of the spines and teeth, caused by the movement of the
water, deepens this slight depression until it reaches a consider-
able size, which is enlarged by every motion of the animal. To
this increase in size voluntary movements of teeth and spines
also contribute.”
The accompanying figure taken from a photograph by Mr.
Northrop, of the School of Mines, New York, represents a
number of these sea-urchins as they naturally lie in their ex-
cavations, and also several cavities, formerly occupied, from
which the inhabitants have been removed. Although these
holes are not so deep and therefore not so conspicuous as can be
seen in rocks from some other coasts which might be introduced
in illustration, they are the only ones which I have ever seen
from our vicinity which exhibit this phenomenon”
I am tempted to return to an aspect of the subject to which I
have already alluded. Notwithstanding the large numbers of
sea-urchins found at Grand Manan, the places where the excava-
ting habit can be studied are very few in number and very local.
I know indeed of no other locality except on the Black Ledges
where there are excavations of this kind, and yet there are many
places where the conditions are identical, and where the animals
are equally abundant. It may be concluded from these facts that
there must be certain peculiarities of environment especially
adapted to these animals to present favorable conditions in indi-
viduals for this habit. It would seem that a mechanical explan-
ation that the depressions were in a way due to forces analogous
to the action of those at work in the excavation of “ pot-holes ”
*1 James Salter. On the Structure and Growth of the Teeth of Echinus. Quart.
Journ, Micr. Sc., 1861, p. 216.
2 The fact that specimens illustrating the excavating power of the sea-urchins can
be seen on our coast is an interesting one as affording an opportunity to study the
method by which the sea-urchins accomplish their work
PLATE I
Nt Ap
`
NS A AN A
Wn S. WSS
SYS.
BURROWING ECHINI.
photograph of a part of the side of the grotto in
he photograph was kindly taken for me by Professor
Northop of the School of Mines, New York City, to whom I am indebted for this and
other kindnesses.—(See page zo.)
1890. ] Excavations by Sea-Urchins. II
affords in a way a harmonious explanation of the extreme rarity
of these excavations on the coast of an island densely populated
by sea-urchins. There seems no satisfactory reason why, if the
process of excavating is simply a habit, we should find it so rarely
exhibited. It is true that some species of mollusks sometimes
excavate and sometimes do not, but while it is not improbable
that there are many localities on our coast where specimens to
illustrate this process may be found, they are certainly not as
numerous as we might justly suspect they might be if the power
of excavating was a voluntary one alone, and not in some way
connected with forces acting about them. It likewise seems as
if, knowing as we do that the habit of boring in rocks is found
in those animals where the process is wholly voluntary, we might
ascribe the habit in sea-urchins to the animal itself. We are at a
loss to explain why sea-urchins make excavations only when
they are in certain places and under certain conditions.
This peculiarity has already been noted by Deshayes in regard
to Echinus (Strongylocentrotus) lividus on the two shores of
France, and needs a further study.”
Dr. George Dimmock informs me that he has seen these ex-
cavations at Banyuls-sur-Mer. As these excavations exist
on the shore of the Mediterranean, the suggestion that the
excavations are limited to rocks beaten by a heavy surf or where
there is a large tide would seem to be unsupported. Still, in a
general way, the excavations made by sea-urchins are greater
and more numerous on coasts beaten by a strong sea, and where
there is a considerable tidal variation.
A theory that the work of excavation is in part assisted by
acid secretions from organs of the body, feet, or mouth, does
not seem plausible, or at all events requires more decisive ob-
sérvations than have yet been brought to its aid. The excava-
tions are in all kinds of rock, and it seems improbable that a
secretion could be made by them which would act on lava, lime-
stone, slate and granite. The same may be said also of the
23 "piss to ne erates PE them near Marseilles, while Arthur Eloffe,
Marce rved or recorded sea-urchins in holes near the
lighthouse of Planier, pres on the Mediterranean.
Ro The American Naturalist. [January,
supposed power of the suckers of the ambulacral feet or the
other soft structures of the body. Until more facts are advanced
in support of these theories we can hardly accept them as well
founded.
Either the calcareous spines, the wall of the test, or, most
important of all, the teeth are singly or together the agents
which have produced these excavations. It seems to the
author plausible that mechanical movements of the sea-urchin
by the waves, in combination with voluntary action, has played
some part in the formation of these cavities. It might facilitate
our framing a satisfactory answer to the question if we knew
whether or not the matter worn off from the surface of the sea-
urchin excavations was always passed into the alimentary canal.
An examination of the stomachs of sea-urchins which inhabit
these excavations might by following John’s method throw light
on this question. Unfortunately I have nothing to add to what
is already known bearing on this subject.
An interesting example of erosion and the excavating habit of
the sea-urchins has been called to my attention by Prof. Jules
Marcou, of Cambridge. At my request Professor Marcou has
kindly written out his notes, which have never been published,
and are consequently quoted entire in the following pages :
“PERFORATIONS DU CALCAIRE SABLEUX NUMMULITIQUE INFERIEUR
PAR L’ Echinus lividus DANS LES ROCHES DE HALDE A BIARRITZ.
“ Entre le vieux Port de Biarritz et la côte des Basques, s’ ad-
vance la Pointe des Roches de Halde, toujours trés fortement
battue par les vagues ; a basse marée I’ extrémité de la Pointe se
découvre sur une longeur moyenne de 75 pieds anglais (25
metres); et au milieu d’algues diverses on trouve tout une pop-
ulation littorale (Moules, Patelles, Littorines, Actinies et surtout
des Oursins). L’oursin est I’espéce commune tout le long de la
cote de l'Atlantique, Echinus lividus Lam.; non seulement cet
oursin se creuse une niche dans laquelle il vie mais bien plus il
agit en corps pour se créer une habitation collective.
PLATE. H
DIAGRAMS OF SEA-URCHIN EXCAVATIONS AT BIARRITZ,
(JULES MARCOU, DEL.)
A few words in explanation of the diagram may lead to a better comprehension of
ig. 1 represents a pot-hole partially filled with water, on the walls of which sea-
in a ring. e
m appear the small stones, (c), which are supposed to form the annular depression
h
about the style (s) ; B of Fig. 4 represents the ring of sea-urchins on the surface of the
rock, seen from above.—(See page £3.
1890.] Excavations by Sea-Urchins. 13
“On voit dans le calcaire sableux des espéces de marmite ou
de mortier, tous habités par cet oursin, et dont voici les divers
états, lorsque je les ai observé, a la marée basse le 8 mai, 1876.
“Tout a fait a l’extrémité des Roches de Halde, la où l'eau
reste dans les anfractuosités, les depressions et les marmites, au
milieu d’algues très épaisses; on rencontre:
“1,” Des trous ayant de un pied, à deux pieds de profondeur
au maximum, et de un pied a un pied et demi de diametre, en
forme de marmite; au fond on voit des cailloux trés arondis et
usés, qui a chaque marée sont fortement agités par les mouve-
ment violent de l’eau, qui déferle toujours avec une grande force
sur toute la Pointe de Halde et recoivent ainsi un mouvement
circulaire, qui les fait creuser de plus en plus la marmite où ils
se trouvent. Chacune de ces marmites est occupée par plusieurs
rangs d’oursins, étagés les uns au dessous des autres, sur trois,
quatre, ou cing ligues; et chaque oursin occupe une niche de
deux a quatre centimetres de profondeur, qu’il a creusé lui-même
avec ses piquants dont il se sert comme d’ une lime.
“2. La marmite ou mortier a quelquefois au milieu une colonne
solide de calcaire.
“3. La colonne du milieu fini par être usée à son pied par le
mouvement continuel de rotation des cailloux accumulés au fond
de la marmite et j’en ai vu un example avec la colonne detacheé
et gisant comme un pilon au fond d’un mortier, comme la figure
ci-joint. Les echinus sur la colonne isolée et qui agissait alors
en tournant comme les autres cailloux roulés, étaient vivants et
ne paraissaient pas être incommodés par le mouvement de rota-
tion auquel ils étaient soumis, deux fois par 24 heures.
“4. Enfin jai vu un commencement de marmite. Des oursins
s'étaient placés sur un espèce de cercle et y avaient creusés leurs
niches; quelque petits cailloux detachés commençaient leur
office de “creusement du calcaire pour arriver à créer une
station-marmite pour les échinides.
25 eran ee the above-mentioned oS ae is illustrated by a diagram the
These
bearing
copied from drawings which Prof. Marcou has
Kindly , iade id sent to me, and sisiy very well the peculiarity of these remarkable
excavations.
14 The American Naturalist. [January,
“Comme aspect chacune de ces marmites avec sa population de
40 a 60 Echinus, et peut-étre plus, resemble a une façade de
maison avec un habitant a chaque fenétre ouverte et qui seraient
occupés a regarder ce qui se passe. Tous les échinides étaient
bien portants, et je n’en ai pas vu de mort.
“JuLEs Marcov.”
According to Fisher, Cailliaud says that excavations by sea-
urchins were observed at Biarritz by MM. Szmann and Cazena-
vette. This was probably the first observation of this habit in
this locality, but I am unable to discover from Cailliaud’s account
that the peculiar relation to pot-holes was noticed by them, or
by any author quoted by him in the preparation of his paper.
It is remarkable that such an interesting case of erosion should
have escaped their observation, a fact which may be ascribed pos-
sibly to the inaccessible position in which these rock erosions
were to be found. Marcou was engaged in collecting fossils
when the pot-holes were discovered, which led him to portions of
the coast not easily visited.”
Fisher also observed that the common sea-urchin at Biarritz
has the habit of excavating, although the relation of these ur-
chins to pot-holes in that locality seems to have escaped his
notice. He writes: “A marée basse une grande partie des
rochers du Port-Vieux sont émergés et rejoinnent quelques blocs
plus élevés, placés au large, qu'il serait facile de relier par une jetée.
La mer bat vigoureusement contre des roches plus résistantes
que les falaises de la côte des Basques; le sol du port est un
sable trés-fin. . . . Quand on examine les rochers 4 marée
basse, on trouve au-dessous de la ligne d’émergence des excava-
tion sprofondes, de grandeur variable, depassant quelquefois un
mètre carré en superficie. Jamais ces excavations ne manquent
d'eau, lors même que leur contour émerge a l’epoque des grandes
marées; leur profondeur permet á la mer d’y laisser au moins un
% At the time of his visit Prof. Marcou was not specially engaged in a study of the
work of these animals, but the examples of rock erosion were so striking that his atten-
ion was attracted to them, and he retains to-day thirteen years after his visit, a vivid
memory of them. On his return to America he called the attention of several persons to
his observation, but nothing was published, and apparently no great interest was excited
them.
$
in
1890.] Excavations by Sea-Urchins. 15
décimetre d’eau. C’est dans ces sortes de cuvettes que vivent les
oursins (Echinus lividus, Lamk.) parqués par groupes de vingt-cinq
a cent disposés dans un ordre admirable, possédant moins un
trou; leurs excavations sont tellement rapprochées, qu’il est
impossible a d’autres oursins de conquérir une place dans la
colonne.
“La position des oursins est invariable ; la bouche reste appli-
quée en bas, au centre du trou; lanus est par conséquent en
haut. A l’époque de mes observations (août, 1863), les oursins
gardaient une immobilité compléte,les radioles étant redressées ;
ils s’engageaient si bien dans les excavations, que souvent leur
extraction m’en a paru impossible.
“Je nai pas aperçu d’oursins sur des roches émergées et
privées d’eau ; et partout où j'en ai trouvé, ils étaient logés dans
des trous particuliers.”
From the above quotation, which is but a part of the descrip-
tion which Dr. Fisher gives of the work of sea-urchins at Biar-
ritz, it is evident that he carefully studied these excavations at
this point, but neither from this description nor from the remain-
der of his account am I able to find that the peculiar relation ob-
served by Marcou between sea-urchins and pot-holes was seen.
He makes a minute comparison with the perforations found at
Biarritz of a number of specimens, which at the time of his writ-
ing existed in the Museum d’histoire Naturelle at Paris.
It may not be out of place to call attention to certain pecu-
liarities in sea-urchin excavations suggested by Prof. Marcou’s
notes. From the observations it seems that veritable “ pot-
holes ” were found at Biarritz in which there is a central column
of rock, which is unlike in its relationship to the pot-hole to the
columella to the cup of certain corals. This central axis or style
he supposes to be formed by the wearing away of the rock about
it, by which it is left standing as a pinnacle.”
Prof. Marcou believes that the first stage of development of
the ring-shaped "seis sehen is due to the sea-urchins exca-
27 It is of know whether thi f th }
which bounds the 2% pot-holes;” p not a concretionary structure. Prof. Marcou pon
furnished the d information, for he says that the style is of the same kind of rock as
that in which the pot-hole is worn.
16 The American Naturalist. [January,
vating in a ring-shaped depression (Fig. 4, A. and B.) enclosing
the central area. The animals are assisted in their work by the
presence of small stones (c), which have been washed in by the
waves. An interesting observation in relation to the sea-urchins
is that on the inner surface of the pot-hole there are many small
excavations worn by the sea-urchins (e). Each sea-urchin is
lodged in a cavity which it has worn out. Moreover, there are
also similar holes (Fig. 2) excavated by the sea-urchins with the
animals still in them on the central style. The Echinoids occu-
pied their supplementary excavations when they were seen by
Prof. Marcou, and the cavities are so shallow that a small
part of the body of the sea-urchin projects beyond the level of
the rim of the hole. The position is certainly exceptional, but
not less remarkable than the fact that we have a pot-hole with a
central columella.” Prof. Marcou also observed “ pot-holes,” and
the surfaces of the enclosed stone (s) were tenanted with sea-
urchins which were found in slight depressions. The size of the
enclosed stones would seem to imply that they are due toa
breaking away at the base of the central style of the first kind,
and not that they were the active agents in wearing down the in-
ner surface of the pot-hole.
The first type (Fig. 1) of pot-holes with sea-urchins, which
were observed by Prof. Marcou, may be nothing more or less than
ordinary “ pot-holes ” in which the wearing stone is found at the
bottom. They are interesting as possessing supplementary
cavities worn in the sides by the sea-urchins. This type may
have been either derived from the third (Fig. 3), that with a
larger enclosed stone, which itself came from the stylated (Fig.
2), or it may have been developed, as in the case of ordinary pot-
holes which do not have the stylated axis, by simple grinding
resulting from the movement of the stone. It can readily be
seen that the third instance (Fig. 3) mentioned by him is derived
from the second (Fig. 2), and that the second may have been de-
rived from the fourth. The first, however, may have been formed
as all simple pot-holes, by the rocks or pebbles within it, as ordi-
28 It certainly cannot EC i a ca gen of this
kind are formed in the same way as ordinary kin
1890.] Excavations by Sea-Urchins. 17
narily explained by geologists. It may, of course, have been
formed from the third by repeated grinding of the rock without
the sea-urchin contributing any help.
The statement that the sea-urchins are arranged in stories is
an interesting one. I am unaware that a similar arrangement has
ever before been observed, and I have never seen similar examples
of the arrangement of sea-urchins in a ring, as observed by Prof.
Marcou, and described by him in the fourth instance (B, Fig. 4).
The wearing away of the zone of rock, leaving the central
axis (s) standing, is certainly a remarkable case of erosion, un-
like any which has been recorded.
The explanation advanced to explain the central style is cer-
tainly an ingenious one, and should be investigated by those
naturalists who visit Biarritz. The hypothesis that the sea-urchins
bore in the solid rock a ring of excavations, the walls of which
were broken down by the small “ cailloux ” (c), seems plausible,
but why the sea-urchins should arrange themselves in a ring (B,
Fig. 4) is not wholly clear to me. Itis a well known fact that
sea-urchins have a habit of getting together bits of sticks, algze
shell, etc., by which they cover themselves. Those that live on
sandy sea bottom, as our common clypeastroid Echinarachnius,
crawl under the sand in order to hide themselves. ™ The boring
sea-urchin possibly collects the stones for this purpose, which,
observed on the Florida Reef an interesting case of the inclusion of an
Bchinoderm by the growth of coral about it. This phenomenon is not a rare one as far
as other animals of various groups are ppeaspa; pa there is reason to believe that the
inclusion of an Echinoderm by growin At all events I am not
familiar with a printed record of this fact. oo inclusion takes: place by a ac growth
of the ccenosarc around the urchin, leaving the animal in a cyst, which is in free commu-
salist, only |so far as to seek the protection of the hole from the surf. Mr. Maynard
likewise finds a small fish inhabits these sea-urchin excavations, and he tells me that
when alarmed the fish hides among the spines or under the body of the sea-urchin. This
is a phenomenon somewhat like the habit of hiding under stones which has long been
known in Lepadogaster and the “ butterfish,"” and other fishes, and can hardly be
i as an instance of commensalism.
Am. Nat.— J.
:
18. The American Naturalist. [January,
dropping off, fall down between the sea-urchins, and by their
grinding action serve to enlarge the depression. The stones,
however, are too large to be placed there by the sea-urchins, and
it is probable that they were simply caught in the depression
after having been thrown there by the waves.
Prof. Marcou has furnished the following directions for those
who would examine the interesting pot-holes which he has dis-
covered at Biarritz :
South of “le port Vieux” there push out to the west into the
sea at least three peninsulas, separated by parallel bays. The
road to the Côte de Basques runs at the base of these peninsulas,
on the eastern edge. The pot-holes were observed at the western
end of the most western of these peninsulas. The locality is
rich in fossil echinoidea, serpulz, and other animals.
The question of why and how the sea-urchins bore in the rock
seem to have been answered in as many ways as the number of
observers. The sea-urchin excavations at Grand Manan have cer-
tain resemblances to and differ somewhat from those recorded by
others. My interpretation of their cause, as derived from their
study at this locality, also differs somewhat from those of other
observers. As to the question why the sea-urchins make these
hollows there seems at least two answers. Their main object is
probably for protection from the waves, as has already been
shown by several naturalists. At the same time that the depres-
sions serve for protection, they would form receptacles for water,
which would be of great use to the animal between tides.
2 Ordinarily not much water would be retained in that way, but
in the case of the pot-holes at Biarritz it would be considerable
in amount, and natural aquaria with a continual supply of pure
water would be at hand. Prof. Marcou has aptly compared the
situation of these colonies of sea-urchins on the walls of a pot-hole
to a hotel with guests. The simile, though fanciful, may not be
far from the truth. It is a significant fact that sea-urchin excava-
tions where the tides are small, as in the Mediterranean, are also
not very large.
30 Marcel de Serres (Sur l'action perforante de l’Echinus lividus. Comp. Rend., Vol.
XVIII., pp. 405, 406) tries to explain the rarity of sea-urchins’ excavations on the coast
i r by the absence of the ebb and flow of the tide.
1890.] Excavations by Sea-Urehins. 19
The almost universal presence of a calcareous alga on the rim
of the sea-urchin boring might seem to indicate that there is a
symbiosis between the alga and the animal. It would seem as if
the rim was built up, in part at least, by the alga, as a protection
for the Sea-urchin, and that in return the alga received certain
advantages. In the case of very deep sea-urchin excavations
this would not hold, as there. can be no doubt that the cavity
is made by the urchin boring in the rock.
Among other statements which might well be quoted, Caillaud
reaches the following conclusion, which is very significant
Speaking of rock excavations, and of the buccal armature, he
asks, “ S'il n’était pas dans la nature de ces êtres de creuser des
roches, pourquoi seraient-ils ainsi pourvus et outillés de poingons
en émail dont les sommités s’usent, puis se renouvellent, se cra-
courcissent dès lors et doivent, de toute nécessité, recevoir le pro-
longement nécessaire pour conserver leur longueur voulue tant que
Voursin travaille? Si cet appareil,” he continues, “si bien com-
biné pour agir sur la pierre n’avait pas ce but, il deviendrait inutile
a cette tribu de veritables Echinus que en sont pourvus ; ils auraient
reçu des simples dents fixes et ordinaires, comme tant d’autres
dans cette immense famille, comptant, comme nous l'avons dit, en
vivants et fossiles, seize cents espéces. Comme example, nous
citerons particulièrement le genre Clypéaster, à qui tous les
moyens de perforer les roches sont interdits.”
It is interesting, taken in connection with the above quotation,
to speculate as to the character and use of the “Aristotle’s Lan-
tern” in the Clypeastroids, and its absence in the Spatangoids.
The lantern of the genus Echinarachnius is so small and incon-
spicuous that it is difficult to believe that its function is the same
as in the round sea-urchins, or echinoids. Moreover the manner
of life of this genus is such that we can sil suppose that there
31 Deshayes i pt the view th tth the rock. He regards
them imply ki g out lready existing. He finds first t that it is without
Isewhere in the an rid that th ies on one coast bores holes,
and on another does not. Sesame: the habit once acquired would be universal for in-
dividuals of the same species. Thirdly, th ve no organ for boring, and,
lastly, the holes are cov with calcareous views have been discussed by
others. a think, = answer to më nig and second sae sia we may say = tose wave
i p bore, and in another do n
D
20 The American Naturalist. _ [January,
is any need of a complicated buccal apparatus such as is found in
Strongylocentrotus. One is even tempted to regard the lantern
in Echinarachnius as a rudimentary organ which has lost its
functional importance.”
While it is next to impossible to say how much or how little
of the excavation is due to any one of the three means of wear-
ing away of the rock, the teeth, spines, and wave „action, we can
safely conclude that the most important factor in this work is the
dental apparatus. Next in importance are possibly the spines,
while last of all comes that work done by the rolling about of
the sea-urchin due tothe motion of the water. To the general
proposition advanced by John, we might also add that there is
evidence that the time which has elapsed between the inception
of the sea-urchin’s work in excavation and the present condition
of the cavities is probably much larger than the life of the indi-
vidual which now occupies it. In an interval between two occu-
pants the interregnum may have been filled out by effective
grinding out of the cavity by the motions of the test of the former
occupant, or by fragments of the spine, the teeth, or other hard
parts of the dead animal which has left this heritage as a means
when moved by the water to grind out the excavation for its
successor.
After a somewhat extended discussion of the views of others,
John gives as his conclusions in regard to sea-urchin excavations
the following summary:
“ Die in den Gesteinen gefundenen und von Seeigeln bewohn-
ten Höhlen rühren von diesen selbst her. Der Echinus erzeugt
seine Wohnstatten mittelst seines Kauapparates und sekundär mit
Hilfe der Stacheln durch rotierende Bewegung. Er bohrt sich
solche Hohlungen, um einen Schutz gegen das brandende Meer
zu haben.
“ Die Kalkalgen, welche die von Seeigeln bewohnten Gesteine
bedecken, lagern sich mechanisch auf das Gestein und haben
32 It seems to the writer capable of proof that the fiat sca-urchms are structurally lower
mara their internal = goni oa aa rat called “ round S Still that
‘dale o and this does not seem the plaze to present arguments in its support, or to combat
which might readily be made to
1890.] Excavations by Sea-Urchins. 21
keinen Einfluss auf die chemische Beschaffenheit der Oberflache
desselben, kOGmmen daher auch nicht mit dem Entstehen der
Echinushohlen in Zusammenhang gebracht werden.”
The above conclusions are substantially those to which the
author has been led by a study of the sea-urchin excavations at
Grand Manan, except that he would also adduce the motion of
the sea as an additional factor in the excavation of these cavities.
By this wave action the sea-urchin covered with spines is moved
about, rubbing against the wall of the cavity in which it rests, A
continued action of the spines and other hard parts of the animal
on the rock thus deepens the depression at the same time that it
files the surface smooth.
SUMMARY.
The results of the preceding pages may be briefly stated as
follows :
1. Strongylocentrotus drobachiensis on the coast of Grand Manan
sometimes makes excavations in solid rock.
2. The excavations are made by the sea-urchin by means of
- its teeth, spines, combined with motions of the animal produced
by waves and tide. The object is primarily for protection, but
secondarily a sufficient amount of water is in that way retained
by the animal during half tide, or when otherwise uncovered.
3. The coralline accompanying the sea-urchin, generally found
at the rim’of the excavation, takes no part in the formation of
the recess, although its presence may be necessary to the animal
for some unknown reason. |
3. Sea-urchins are found at Biarritz, France, which live in
stories on the walls of peculiar pot-holes, some of which have a
central style also tenanted by the same animals in small depres-
sions.
5. The sea-urchins play some part in the formation of stylated
pot-holes, although they are assisted by the movements of stones,
produced by the action of tides and waves.
Boston, January rst, 1890.
22 The American Naturalist. [January
INSTANCES OF THE EFFECTS OF MUSICAL SOUNDS
ON ANIMALS.
BY ROBERT E. C. STEARNS.
no years ago I observed in a casual way the effect of musi-
cal sounds upon certain animals, and was inclined to pursue
the inquiry and endeavor to learn by careful experiment through
the medium of music how far or in what degree there might exist
between man and certain animals that fellow-feeling which makes
the whole world kin.
The fraternal relation between dog and man, whether the latter
be civilized or savage, is too well known to require remark. So,
too, with other animals which man has domesticated, notably the
horse and cat.
Some four or five years ago, at a meeting of the Biological
Section of the British Association, Sir John Lubbock read some
interesting notes on the intelligence of the dog. The man and
the dog he said, have lived together in more or less intimate as-
sociation for many thousands of years, and yet it must be con-
fessed that they know comparatively little of one another. That
the dog is a loyal, true, and affectionate friend must be gratefully
admitted, but when we come to consider the psychical nature of.
the animal, the limits of our knowledge are almost immediately
reached. I have elsewhere suggested that this arises very much
from the fact that hitherto we have tried to teach animals rather
than to learn from them—to convey our ideas to them rather
than to devise any language or code of signals by which they
might communicate theirs to us.
So it occurred to me that we might learn something of the
animals around and about us,—add somewhat to the stock of
knowledge, and get many interesting hints, some useful and some
curious, as to their inner nature,—by the aid of music or musical
sounds, by observing the effect of such sounds upon them.
1890.] Effects of Musical Sounds on Animals. 23
In pursuing an investigation of this kind, we would naturally
experiment with the domesticated animals first, and of such
animals those with which we are the most intimate. Thus the
dog and cat are household pets; in many cases housemates from
birth to death. Generations of these animals are born within the
social atmosphere of the same human family, and quite likely de-
rive or receive through heredity, as well as by individual contact
or experience, a feeling or sense s security, protection and
fraternity.
While such animals may be regarded perhaps as becoming,
though such contact, somewhat humanized, and therefore less
adapted or satisfactory for the purposes of such experiments, on
the other hand their familiarity with a great number of sounds
which their untrained brethren know nothing of would seem to
be fully an off-set, and again their familiarity with man would
operate adversely to a feeling of fear when experimental sounds
were being made.
We do not know that any influence analagous to music in-
spires the military ants in their great marches, or that the monee-
cious snails have any occasion for love songs. But these are not
next of kin in the scale of Nature, and we have poor relations
nearer home who seem to be moved by the same or similar im-
pulses with ourselves.
By voice or sounds fully as much as by facial expression or
gesture—movement of body or limb—the emotions are expressed
by the human animal, and this is in great measure the case
among the animals which follow along after or below man. The
moods and tenses of feeling, pleasure and pain, joys and sorrows,
are made apparent by the intonation of the voice, by the sounds
which such conditions induce, provoke or compel.
We speak of the sense of hearing. An inquiry of the kind
herein suggested, relates to the sense of sounds.
The sense of sounds among the higher animals we may assume
to be nearly universal, and among dogs and some other animals,
combined with memory, tends to the development of the intel-
lectual quality, as the sense of hearing in a certain aspect is an
intellectual rather than a physical sense.
24 The American Naturalist. - [January,
To what degree this sense of sounds is developed or exists,
can be learned only by experiment, and requires on the part of
the experimenter what I unfortunately do not possess,—a knowl-
edge of music, and the ability to play upon one or more instru-
ments.
The sense of sounds, we may assume, varies in animals below
man as it does in man, or as the color sense varies ; often
limited, or nearly or quite wanting ; hence the term color-blind-
ness, and we may use the term sound-deafness in an analagous
way.
The experiments of Lubbock referred to show a great differ-
ence in the perceptions and receptivity of dogs, as between his
black poodle “ Van ” and Mrs. Lubbock’s collie “ Patience.” In
speaking of it Sir John says, “I was rather disappointed at this,
as if it had succeeded the plan would have opened out many in-
teresting lines of inquiry. Still, in such a case one ought not
to wish for one result more than another, as of course the object
of all such experiments is merely to elicit the truth, and our re-
sult in the present case, though negative, is very interesting.”
To the terms music and musical sounds, in this connection,
an exceedingly liberal definition must be conceded,—liberal in a
simple and non-technical sense, so as to include: |
1. Sounds not even musical, but occurring in simple rhythmic
order or succession, like the common marching drum-taps, when
the full military band is resting.
2. Melodious sounds, or sounds in themselves musical, occur-
ring in harmonious sequence.
3- The same in various strains or keys, more or less complex,
but combined and arranged in accordance with harmony.
Of these definitions the first will oftenest serve the purpose.
It would seem that in the selection of tunes or sounds for ex-
perimental use, a hint may be had from the animals by observ-
ing the special sounds uttered by them in their various
moods
With the birds, for instance, a tune or sounds which include
the notes uttered in their amorous moods at or about mating-
time.
1890.] Effects of Musical Sounds on Animals. 25
Many of the sounds which by man -are regarded as musical
and agreeable may not produce an agreeable impression upon
animals, but may have an annoying effect upon them, as the mo-
notonous, attenuated and irritating hum of the mosquito, the fil-
ing of a saw, or the riveting of a steam boiler, with its rasping
and tumultuous clangor, have upon us.
I spoke of sounds that are regarded as musical by man, but
here comes to mind a wide chasm in the way of difference
between the musical sense or taste of the European or Caucasian,
and the Chinese or Mongolian, idea of music and musical sounds,
whether vocal or instrumental.
Some time ago there appeared in a New York paper an
account of an interview with an Englishman residing in that city,
who, it was stated, had a mania for collecting and taming various
small animals, lizards, snakes, spiders, etc.
The question was asked, “How do you manage the taming
process?” Answer.—“ It was simple enough. First of all I
tried kindness. By kindness I mean warmth and music, and as
much food as the animals could possibly eat, so as to get them
in to a state of torpor. If they were not well advanced in amia-
bility in a week the music was stopped altogether, and I gave
but little food. This made them savage. They then had music
occasionally, the doses increasing in proportion to the improve-
ment in their temper.”
Question.—“ What kind of music did you.give them ?”
Answer.—“ It varied a great deal. Some of them liked a
piano best. Some liked a violin, and others a flute, and one was
never so happy as when listening to an Æolian harp I had erected
on the window of the room I keptthem in. They all liked a
musical box. You might not believe it, but there was nota
single one of my snakes or lizards that could not distinguish in-
struments and tunes. They had very good taste and ear, and
would keep time to slow measured music by wagging their heads,
and if I ever created discord when playing they would get quite
in a rage. I remember a thunderstorm angered them once, and
I could hardly keep them from attacking one another, and in-
dulging ina free fight. Luckily an itinerant German band was
26 The American Naturalist. [January,
within hail, and I prevailed upon its members by financial argu-
ments to play to those beasts for an hour. They were pacified,
but the neighbors for two hundred yards around were
not.”
While conceding a liberal margin for the embellishment of the
interviewer and the enthusiasm of the interviewed, there is no
doubt that the leaven of the fact prevails in the foregoing. The
statement as to the wagging of heads, however, may safely be
disregarded.
Without further preamble or speculation, in proceeding with
the data which are here brought together, we will begin with the
domestic animals, and first with the dogs,—“ dogs of high and
low degree.”
DOGS AND MUSIC.
Goodrich relates many interesting anecdotes on the apparent
effect of music on various animals, among which I find this :
“A dog in Paris, at the commencement of the Revolution,
was know to musicians by the name of ‘ Parade,’ because he
regularly attended the military at the Tuilleries, stood by and
marched with the band. At night he went to the Opera, and
dined with any musician who intimated, by word or gesture, that
his company was asked, yet always withdrew from any attempt
to make him the property of any individual.”
Mr. W. S. Jones states that he has “a Skye terrier about four
months old who, when the piano is played, seems to be curiously
fascinated by the sound, and comes toward it, but then howls in `
a most plaintive way with his nose in the air, as if protesting
against the sound.”
C. J. W. says, “a black-and-tan terrier that we kept for some
time was particularly sensitive to music. Although scales played
on the piano made her yell piteously, it was by the concertina’s
sweet influences that she was most affected, flying before it, and,
if unable to leave the room, whining until the tune was stopped.
A Spitzbergen dog-friend of ours is much excited by music, but
when one tune is played its excitement is more marked ;—the
1890.] Effects of Musical Sounds on Animals. 27
tune is, ‘ Bonny Dundee.’ Dogs are not peculiar in their feel-
ing for music: witness the fact that retired cavalry horses obey
the call of the bugle when accidentally heard.”
To the Rev. Mr. James of Tuscarora, Nevada, I am indebted
for the following and other pertinent instances :
“In Eureka, Nevada, I visited in a family who were the proud
possessors of a dog named ‘ Ben.’ Ben was one of those smart
dogs who knew everything. He was passionately fond of piano
music; it silenced the wagging of his tail, and the studious look of
the eyes, as you sat at the instrument, denoted pleasure; but no
sooner would the harmonica (mouth organ) be played than he
would howl and give short yelps in a ferocious style. The music
of the ordinary organ affected him in the same way.”
An old friend, Prof. George Davidson, of California, has kindly
furnished me with many interesting items, among which the fol-
lowing relate to dogs:
“ A small black-and-tan named ‘ Bessie, belonging to Mr. A.
B. Corson, of North Fifth Street, Philadelphia, will, on hearing
‘Shall we meet beyond the River?’ sung, throw her head back
and set up a most dismal howl, while the tears will run down her
cheeks. If the tune is played solemnly on an organ and no word
spoken, the same thing will occur; but if any of the words are
spoken, with not the slightest musical intonation, she will run
to the speaker, and beg and plead in her own way, and do every-
thing but speak, to have it stopped.”
“« Toodles, a Spitz, belonging to the same person, will howl
when a discord occurs, or when an accordeon is played, but is
not otherwise affected; while ‘ Rose,’ another Spitz, will lie at the
foot of the organ, apparently pleased with the music, but making
no demonstration of either pleasure or annoyance.”
“ A black-and-tan, rather larger, named ‘ Duke,’ belonging to
Mr. Loney, of North Sixth Street, Philadelphia, will, on hearing
‘Hold the Fort’ sung, start in with the rest, and will actually
sing in dog fashion as long as the singing goes on, and appears
to be delighted with the music.” f
“ A Spitz which belonged to Mr. Charles Wetherald (formerly
of North Sixth Street, but now of Bryn Mawr), named ‘ Blanco,’
28 The American Naturalist. [January,
was so affected by the music of a violin that he would howl, and
if the music was persisted in would fly at the musician, and one
or the other would have to leave.”
DOGS AND CHURCH-BELLS.
“ Living next door to us in our English home was the sexton
of a church, in the belfry of which was a beautiful peal of eight
bells. Each Sunday morning and evening before service the’
sexton, as leader of the bell ringers, would go to the belfry (the
church stood exactly opposite his house) to perform his duties.
He had a large Newfoundland dog, which—no sooner did he
perceive the sexton going out—would take his stand just outside
the door of his master’s house, and immediately the bells began
to ring would raise his head and howl in the most melancholy
and profound manner. No speaking to him would change his
position; he would go on until the ringing ceased.”
A Salem, Illinois, dog has.been reported as similarly affected
by the sound of church bells, and, it would seem, by Presbyterian
in particular :
“ Conrad Bollinger for some years past was the owner of two
dogs which were much attached to each other. Several months
since one of them died, and the effect thereby produced on the
one living was very marked. It for days acted strange, as if
lost; and when the bell of the Cumberland Presbyterian Church
rang it set up a doleful noise. This it does at each ringing of
the bell, during which time it will gaze intently up at the belfry.
If the ringing is not protracted it keeps up the whining, howling
noise, and when done it returns to the house, which is near to
the church. None of the other bells seem to affect this dog.”
HOUNDS AND THE BUGLE.
In Mrs. Custer’s entertaining volume, “ Boots and Saddles,”
she mentions the effect of the Cavalry Bugle-call as follows:
“ The pack of hounds were an endless source of delight to the
general. We had about forty; the staghounds, that run by sight,
1890.] Effects of Musical Sounds on Animals. 29
and are, on the whole, the fleetest and most enduring dogs in the
world, and the fox-hounds, that follow the trail with their noses
close to the ground. The first rarely bark, but the latter are very
noisy. The general and I used to listen with amusement to their
attempts to strike the key note of the bugler when he sounded
the calls summoning the men to guard, mount, stables, or retreat.
It rather destroyed the military effect to see beside his soldierly
figure a hound sitting down absorbed in imitation. With lifted
head and rolling eyes there issued from the broad mouth notes
so doleful they would have answered for a misericordia.
During a period of ill health I boarded for several months at
a hotel in Auburn, California, and a part of nearly every day was
passed in the shade of a vine-clad summer house, on the neigh-
boring grounds of an acquaintance, Dr. Todd. A friend of mine,
a young man in poor health, boarded with the Doctor, and we
were together every day.
Doctor Todd had an old collie that served the purpose of a
watch-dog. Our relations with the animal were such that it
knew us to be friendly; during the day the dog was always with
us. Without the slightest look, word, or sign of command, re-
_ buke or menace by either of us, the moment I commenced to
imitate a French horn he would immediately leave and skulk
away to his kennel, evidently very much annoyed, and that too
without regard to the tune. Whena veritable horn was played
upon by my companion the poor dog trembled in every limb,
went to his kennel, and remained there in a state of nervous agi-
tation, made neither a bark, howl or moan, but wore a deplorably
pitiable expression, as if his nerves were absolutely unstrung. No
doubt the sounds affected him as the filing of a saw or Chinese
instrumental music affect me.
(To be continued.)
30 The American Naturalist. [January,
THE HISTORY OF GARDEN VEGETABLES.
BY E. L. STURTEVANT.
(Continued from p. 677, Vol. XXIII., 1889.)
NASTURTIUM. TZropeolum sp.
H is rather as ornamental flower-garden plants that the nastur-
tiums are now so universally grown. Yet they are also classed
among kitchen-garden esculents, the flower-buds and the seeds
serving, when pickled, as a caper substitute, and the flowers used
for garnishing. In 1683 Worlidge,' in England, says, “from a
Flower are now become an acceptable Sallad, as well as the
blossom.” In 1690 Quintyne? grew them in the royal kitchen-
gardens of France. Both species were received in Europe in the
16th century, as will be seen from the appended synonymies.
Both are found wild in Peru.
Tropeolum minus L.
This species seems to have been first known in Europe about
1574, described by Monardes ;* it is figured by Lobel * in 1576,
and is generally spoken of about this period as a new and rare
plant. It was in the vegetable-garden in England, in 1726,
probably before, and is mentioned in American gardens in 1806.°
The synonymy appears as below:
Nasturtu Indici genuina effigies. Lob. Obs., 1576, 338, cum ic.
Nasturtium peregrinum, myconii. Lugd., 1587, 656, cum ic.
Flos sanguineus. Lugd., 1587, 1918.
Nasturtium Indicum. Lob. ic, 1591, 616; Dod., 1616, 397,
cum ic.
Mastuorzo. Cast. Dur., 1617, 277, cum ic.
Pelon mexixquiletl, seu nasturtio Peruino. Hern., 1651, 161,
cum ic.
Cardamindum minus et vulgare. Feuille, Peru, 1725, IIL, t. 8.
1Syst. Hort. By J. W. Gent., 1683, 216. ‘Lobel. Obs., 1576, 338.
2 Quintyne. Comp. Gard., 1693, 189. 5 Townsend. Seedsman, 1726, 40.
3 Hort. Eyst., 1713, ord. 13, fol. 1. 6 McMahon. Am, Gard, Cal., 1806.
1890.] History of Garden Vegetables. 31
Tropeolum majus L.
“The seeds of this rare and faire plant came first from the
Indies into Spaine and those hot regions, and from thence into
France and Flanders, from whence I have received seeds that
hath borne with me both flowers and seede,” says Gerarde in
1597.7 We cannot agree with those authors who consider this
the dwarf form, as the figure given comes nearer to the Tall, as it
was figured by J. Bauhin, in his works printed in 1651, with the
name scandens, thirty-three years before its asserted introduction
by Linnæus. Ray,’ in 1686, speaks of its use as a vegetable,
and this use is also spoken of by Townsend® in 1726. In
American gardens it was noticed by McMahon ° in 1806, and by
all the early garden writers, as being the predominant kind in
culture.
The synonymy I offer is shorter than the preceding :
Nasturtium Indicum. Cam. ic., 1588, t. 31.
Nasturtium Indicum. Indian cresses. Ger., 1597, 196.
Nasturtium indicum folio peltato scandens. J. Bauh., 1651, Il.,
75-
Cardamindum ampliore folio and majore flore. Feuille, Peru,
L724 iL; t3.
The sacle or Indian cress, or capucin capers, with the
epithet Tall or Dwarf, is called in France, capucine, cresson du
Mexique, fleur de sang, fleur sanguine, cresson de Peru, cresson
d'Inde; in Germany, sapuciner kresse, Indianische kresse; in
Flanders and Holland, capucine kers ; in Italy, nasturzio, astuzzia ;
in Spain, capuchina; in Portugal, chagas; ®© in Norway, blom-
karse ; ™ in Arabic, tortour el-bachah.”
Tropaeolum tuberosus R. et P.
In Bolivia this plant i extensively cultivated in the high
mountain districts, for its tubers, which are considered a delicacy,
and are highly esteemed. It does not seem to have entered
European or American culture, although it is retained by Vil-
7Gerarde. Herb., 1597, ra iin 25r. 10 Vilmorin. Les Pi. Pot,
8 J. Bauhin. Hist., 1651, I H Schubeler. Cult. Pf. de Norw., 118,
Ray. Hist., 1686, 487. 12 Delile. FI.
32 The American Naturalist. [January,
morin among garden esculents."" It was described in 1794, and
was carried to France in 1836," but its tubers were not found
palatable to European taste.™* The tubers are of good size, and
are marked with purple upon a yellowish ground.
The tuberous-rooted nasturtium is called in France capucine
tubereuse ; in Germany, Peruanische knollenkresse ; in Flanders,
knoll-kapucten; in Spain, capuchina tuberculosa;” in Peru,
mayna,” massua; in Bolivia, zsano," ysano ;° in Mexico, ysano,
or taiacha,”*
NEW ZEALAND SPINAGE. Tetragonia expansa, Ait.
This plant was first found by Sir Joseph Banks, in 1770, at
Queen Charlotte’s Sound, New Zealand, and its merits discovered
to the sailors of Captain Cook’s expedition round the world. It
reached Kew gardensin 1772." It also occurs in Australia, both
on the coast and in the desert interior, in New Caledonia, China,
Japan, and Chili... Don” says three varieties are found in Chili,
one with smooth leaves, one with leaves hoary beneath, and a
third small and glabrous. It was cultivated as a spinage plant in
England in 1821 or earlier.” It was in use in France in 1824 or
earlier? In the United States its seed was distributed among
members of the New York Horticultural Society in 1827, and in
1828 it appeared in our seed catalogues.” St.@Hilaire” records
its use as a spinage in South Brazil, and Bojer” in the
Mauritius.
The New Zealand spinage is called in France tetragone, cornue,
tetragone etalee, epinard de la nouvelle-zelande; in Germany,
neuseelandischer spinat; in Flanders, vierhouk, vierkant-vrugt ; in
Denmark, myseelandsk spinat; in Italy, tetragona ;* inthe Maur-
itius, tetragone ;” in Japan, tsuri na, i.e., creeping cabbage.”
13 Heuze. Les Pl. Alim., II., 546. 19 Pirolle. L'Hort. Fran., 1824-5, 256.
14 Bon Jard., 1882, 435. 20 Thorburn’s Cat., 1828, 88.
Kunth. Syn., II., 256. 71 St. Hilaire. FI. Br. Merid., 1824.
16 Jour. Hort. Soc., IX., 59. 22 Bojer. Hort. Maur., 1837, 155.
59
1' Don. Gard. and Bot. Dict., ILI., 152. %% Vilmorin. Les Pl. Pot., 1883, 552.
18 Mueller. Sel. Pl., 1876, 237. 4 Thunberg. Japan, 1784, 208
1890.] History of Garden Vegetables. 33
NIGHTSHADE. Solanum nigrum L.
This plant, says Vilmorin, is not as yet used in France as a
vegetable, but in warm countries the leaves are sometimes eaten
as spinage.” It is mentioned by Galen” among aliments in the
second century, but was not cultivated in Germany in Fuchsius,”
time, 1542, although it retained its name, Solanum hortense, per-
haps from its former cultivation. It is a plant of a wide distribu-
tion, occurring in the northern hemisphere from Sweden, and the
north-east of America from Hudson Bay, even to the equatorial
regions, as for example at Timor, the Galapagos, the Antilles,
Abyssinia, the Mascarene Isles, Mauritius, Van Diemen’s Land,
Chili, etc. It is found as a pot herb in the markets of Mauri-
tus,” and is used as a spinage in Central Africa.” In China the
young shoots are eaten, as also its black berries,” and in the Mis-
sissippi Valley the little black berries are made into pies and
other pastry.”
The Nightshade or black nightshade is called in France, morelle
noire, M. de Vile de France, M. commune, brede, creve-chien, herbe
aux magiciens, morette, raisin de loup; in Germany, verbesseter
nachschatten spinat; in Italy, erba mora; in Spain, yerba
mora” :
OKRA. Hibiscus esculentus L.
The Spanish Moors appear to have been well acquainted with
this plant, which was known to them by the name of damiyah.
Abul-Abbas el-Nebati, a native of Seville, learned in plants, who
visited Egypt A. D. 1216, describes in unmistakable terms the
form of the plant, its seeds and fruit, which last, he remarks, is
eaten when young and tender with meal by the Egyptians. ” The
references to this plant in the earlier botanies are not numerous,
ahd the synonymies offered are often incorrect. I think the fol-
lowing, however, are justified :
25 Vilmorin. The Veg. aR 355- 30 Grant. Speke’s Nile, 576.
26 Galen. De Alim., Lib.2, Bruns. edition, 1547. 153. %1 Smith. Mat. Med. of Gh., 201.
21 Fuchsius. De Stirp., 1542, 69. 82 Bessey. Bot., 502.
28 Decandolle. Geog. Bot., 573- 33 Vilmorin. Les Pl. Pot., 354.
29 Seemann. Gard. Chron., 1861, 622. 3 Pharmacographia, 1879, 94-
Am. Nat.—January.—3
34 The American Naturalist. [January,
Trionum theophrasti. Rauwolf, in Ap. to Lugd., 1587, 31,
cum ic.
Alcea egyptia. Clusius, Hist., 1601, 2, 27, cum ic.
Honorius bellus. In Clus., l.c., 2, 311.
Bamia alessandrina. Cast. Dur., 1617, Ap., cum ic.
Quingombo. Marcg. Bras., 1648, 31, cum ic.; Piso., Bras.,
1658, 211, cum ic.
Malva rosea sive hortensis. J. Bauhin, 1651, IL, 951.
Ketmia americana annua flore albo, fructu non sulcato longisst-
mo. Comelyn, Hort. Med., Amstelod, 1701, 150, cum ic.
Of these the last only, that of Comelyn, represents the type of
pod of the varieties usually to be found in our gardens, but
plants are occasionally to be found bearing pods which resemble
those figured in the above list. I find little recorded, however,
concerning variety, as in the regions where its culture is particu-
larly affected there is a paucity of writers. Miller’s Dictionary,
1807, mentions that there are different forms of pods in different
varieties ; in some not thicker than a man’s finger, and five or six
inches long; in others very thick, and not more than two or
three inches long; in some erect; in others rather inclined.
Lunan,® in Jamaica, in 1814, speaks of the pods being of different
size and form in the varieties. In 1831 Don” describes a species,
the H. bammia, Link., with very long pods. In 1863 Burr”
describes four varieties in American gardens, two dwarfs, one
pendant-podded, and one tall and white-podded. In 1885, at the
New York Agricultural Experiment Station, varieties were grown
under eleven different names, and from these we were able to
satisfy ourselves of three distinct sorts only. Vilmorin” in 1885
names but two sorts, the long-fruited and the round-fruited.
Its culture is now recorded in nearly all the tropical countries,
and it reached Brazil before 1648, as recorded by Marcgravius.
It is recorded in gardens about Philadelphia in 1748,” in Virginia
in 1781,” and in general garden culture in 1806."
35 Lunan. Jam., 1814, II., 12. 3 Kalm. Trav., I., 74-
36 Don. Gard. and Bot. Dict., I., 480. 40 Jefferson’s Notes.
37 Burr. Field and Gard. Veg., 614. 41 McMahon. Am, Gard. Cal., 1806.
88 Vilmorin. The Veg. Gard., 1885, 356.
1890.] History of Garden Vegetables. 35
Okra, ocra, or gombo, in India ochro and gobbo” is called in
France gombo, gombaud, ketmie comestible, calalon, quiabo, guin-
gombo, okra; in Italy, ibisco; in Spain, gombo;* in Greece,
vamies;* in Brazil, guingombo, quiabo; in the Mauritius,
lalo ;® in Curaçoa, gigambo.™ `
In Arabic, damyeh toneyly, ie., bamia with long fruit,” bamia,
bamia schami, bamia stambouli, rumi ;® in Angola, guillobo ;®
in Bengali, ramturay, dhenroos ;® in Burma, yung-ma-dae ;“ in
Central Africa, dameea ;"™ in Congo, guingombo or quigombo ,;®
in Egypt, damia,“ chama ;” in Hindustani, ram-turai, bhinde ;»
in India, dhenroos, ramturee, bhindee ;* in Malabar, vendah ;™
in Nubia, djyoundou ;* in Persia, damiyah;* in Tamil, venda,
venday ; in Telegu, benda.”
OLLUCO. Ullucus tuberosus Lozano.
Although Vilmorin says the culture of this plant has not given
good results in France, yet he includes itin his book on vege-
tables. It was brought into French culture in 1848 by the Min-
ister of Agriculture.“ It is cultivated in the Andes of Peru,
Bolivia and New Granada, Chili and Mexico.” The tubers are
yellow, very smooth, starchy, and are developed on runners pro-
ceeding from the base of the stem. Lieut. Herndon,” who ate
them in Peru, pronounced them more glutinous than the oca and
not so pleasant to the taste.
The olluco is called at Quito ulluco or melloco;® in Peru,
ulluca ;* in the Andes of Peru and Bolivia, oca quina ;* in Chili,
melloes and ulloco ; in Mexico, papa lissa.
Acosta,” in speaking of the food plants of Colao, Peru, where
the climate is cold and dry, says, “The Indians use an other
£ Firminger. Gard. in Ind., 141. 52 Gard. Chron., 1882, Oct. 7, 458.
43 Vilmorin. Les Pl. Pot., 242. 58 Speede. Ind. Handb. of Gard., 1842, 180.
44 Pickering. Ch. Hist., 274. 54 Decaisne & Naudin. Man., IV., 106.
45 St. Hilaire. Fl. Bras. Merid. 55 Heuze. Les Pl. Alim., II., 545.
4 Bojer. Hort. Maurit., 30. 56 Herndon. Amazon, 52.
41 Delile. Fl. Æg. Il. - 51 Gard. Chron., 1848, 828, 862.
48 Forskal. Fl. Æg. Arab., c. XVII., 125. 58 Don. Gard. and Bot. Dict.
4# Piso. De Ind., 1658, 211; Marcg. Bras., ig 31: Treas of
50 Drury. lic. of Ind., r. Acosta. Hist. of the Ind., 1604, 259-
51 Pharmacographia,
36 The American Naturalist. [January,
kinde of roote, which they call Papas ; these rootes are like to
grownd nuttes, they are small rootes, which cast out many
leaves. They gather this Papas, and dry it well in the Sunne,
then beating it they make that which they call Chuno, which
keepes many daies, and serves for bread. In this realme there is
great trafficke of Chuno, the which they carry to the mines of
Potozi; they likewise eat of these Papas boyled or roasted.
There is one sweete of these kindes, which grows in hot places,
whereof they do make certaine sawces and minced meats, which
they call Locro.”
As the olluco is said by Heuze to be only eaten raw, outside
of Mexico, we may believe that Acosta refers in this extract to
this plant, the potato and the sweet potato.
ONION. Allium cepa L.
The culture of the onion was known at a remote period, and
in the ancient Egyptian paintings a priest is frequently seen holding
them in his hand, or covering an altar with a bundle of thin leaves
and roots. Hippocrates? mentions that they are commonly
eaten 430 B.C. Theophrastus, 322 B.C., names a number of
varieties, the Sardian, the Cnidian, Thamocracian, and the Setani-
con, all named from the places of growth. Those of Issus and
Sardis are white. Dioscorides,“ 60 A.D., speaks of the onion as
long or round; yellow or white. Columella,” 42 A.D., speaks of
the Marsicam, which the country people call unionem, and this
word seems to be the origin of our word onion, the French ognon.
Pliny, A.D. 79, devotes considerable space to the cepa, and says
the round onion is the best, and that the red are more highly
flavored than the white. Palladius,” 210 A.D., gives minute
directions for culture. Apicius, A.D. 230, gives a number of
recipes for the use of the onion in cookery, but its uses by this
epicurean writer are rather as a seasoner than as an edible. In
61 Wilkinson. Ancient pe dotrmamt 1.,168. % Columella. Lib. XII., ¢. 10.
"a pe asta = Opera, Camerarius ed., Pliny. Lib. XIX., c. >
Paris, 1646, KiS 8 Palladius. Lib. IIL., c. 24.
63 Theophrastus. Bodseus ed. mp PE 785. 6 Apicius. De Opsoniis, etc. Amster-
#4 Dioscorides. Ruel ed., 1529, I dam, 1709.
1890.] History of Garden Vegetables. 37
the thirteenth century Albertus Magnus™ describes the onion, but
does not include it in his list of garden plants where he speaks of
the leek and garlic, by which we would infer, what indeed seems
to have been the case with the ancients, that it was in less
esteem than these now minor vegetables. In the sixteenth cen-
tury Amatus Lusitanus” says the onion is one of the commonest
of vegetables, and occurs in red and white varieties, and of vari-
ous qualities, some sweet, others strong, and yet others interme-
diate in savor. In 1570, Matthiolus” refers to varieties as large
and small, long, round and flat, red, bluish, green and white.
Laurembergius,” in 1632, says onions differ in form, some being
round, others oblong; in color, some white, others dark red; in
size, some being large, others small; from their origin, as Ger-
man, Danish, Spanish, etc. He says the Roman colonies during
the reign of Agrippa grew in the gardens of the monasteries a
Russian sort, which attained sometimes the weight of eight
pounds. He calls the Spanish onion oblong, white and large,
excelling all other sorts in sweetness and size, and grown in large
abundance in Holland. At Rome the sort which brings the
highest price in the markets is the Cazefa ; at Amsterdam the Sz.
- Omer.
At the present time Vilmorin describes sixty varieties, and
there are a number of varieties grown which are not noted by
him in France. In form these may be described as flat, flattened,
disc-form, spherical, spherical-flattened, pear-shaped, long. This
last form seems to attain an exaggerated length in Japan, where
I have been told that they often equal a foot in length. In 1886,
Kizo Tamari,“ a Japanese commissioner to this country, says,
“Our onions have not large globular bulbs. They are grown
just like celery in this country, and have long, white, slender
stalks.” In addition to the forms mentioned above we rank the
top onion and the potato onion among our varieties. The onion
is described in many colors, such as white, dull white, silvery
white, pearly white, yellowish green, coppery yellow, salmon yel-
69 Albertus Magnus. De Veg., Jessen ed., 7? Laurembergius. Apparat. Plant., 1632,
1867, 487. 27.
7 Amatus Lusitanus. In Diosc., 1554,273- 7 Vilmorin. Les PL. Pot., nage
71 Matthiolus. Com., 1570, 389. 7™ Am. Hort., Sept., 1886.
38 The American Naturalist. [January,
low, greenish yellow, bright yellow, pale salmon, salmon pink,
coppery pink, chamois, red, bright red, blood red, dark red,
purplish.
But few of our modern forms are noticed in the early botanies.
The following synonymy includes all I have noted, but in
establishing it it must be noted that many of the figures upon
which it is founded are quite indistinct.
I. Bulb flat at bottom; tapering towards stem.
Cepa. Fuchsius, 1542, 430.
_Cepa rotunda. Bodæus, 1644, 787.
Cape sive Cepa rubra et alba. J. Bauhin, 1651, II., 549.
Geant de Rocca. Vilm., 1883, 387.
Mammoth Pompei. American Seedsmen.
Golden Queen. American Seedsmen.
Paris Silverskin. American Seedsmen.
Silver White Etna. American Seedsmen.
The difference at first sight between the crude figure of Fuch-
sius and the modern varieties is great, but ordinary experience
indicates that the changes are no greater than can be observed
under selection.
II. Bulb round at bottom; tapering towards stem.
Zwiblen. Roszlin, 1550, 121.
Cepa. Tragus, 1552, 737.
Capa. Cam. Epit., 1586, 324.
Blanc hatif de Valence. Vil., 1883, 378.
Neapolitan Marzajola. American Seedsmen.
Round White Silverskin. American Seedsmen.
White Portugal. American Seedsmen.
III. Bulb roundish, flattened above and below.
Cepa. Matth., 1558, 276; Pin., 1561, 215.
Capa capitata. Matth., 1570, 388.
Cepe. Lob. Obs., 1576, 73; ic., 1591, 1, 150.
Cepa rubra. Ger., 1597, 134.
Cepa rotunda. Dod., 1616, 687.
Rouge gros-plat d Italie. Vilm., 1883, 387.
1890.] History of Garden Vegetables. 39
Bermuda. American Seedsmen.
Large Flat Madeira. American Seedsmen.
Wethersfield Large Red. American Seedsmen.
IV. Bulb rounded below, flattened above.
De cepis. Pictorius, 1581, 82.
Philadelphia Yellow Dutch or Strasburg. American Seedsmen.
V. Bulb spherical, or nearly so.
Cepa.: Tragus, 1552, 737. Lauremb., 1632, 26.
Cepe. Lob. Obs., 1576, 73; ic. 1591, L., 150.
Cepe alba. Ger., 1597, 134.
Cepa capitata. Matth., 1598, 419.
Jaune de Danvers. Vilm., 1883, 380.
Danvers. American Seedsmen.
VI. Bulb dishing on the bottom.
Cepa rotunda, Bodzus, 1644, 786.
Extra Early Red. American Seedsmen.
VII. Bulb oblong.
Cepa. Cam. Epit., 1586, 324.
Cepea Hispanica oblonga. Lob. ic., 1591, I., 150.
Cepa oblonga. Dod., 1616, 687 ; Bodzus, 1644, 787.
Piriform. Nilm., 1883, 388.
VIII. The top onion.
In 1557 Dalechamp™ records with great surprise an onion
plant which bore in the place of seed, small bulbs.
The onion was named by Chaucer,” in England, about 1340.
In Mexico onyons are mentioned by Peter Martyr” before 1557,
in Peru before 1604,” in New England about 1629,” in Virginia
in 1648,” and were among the Indian foods destroyed by General
Sullivan ® in western New York in 1779. In 1806 McMahon®
records eight varieties in American gardens.
Rasa 1587, 5 1 Wood. New Eng. Prosp., Ist ed., II.
peng 636. 80 A Perf. Desc. of Va., 1649, 4.
aan Hist. of Trav. I SL ver. Early Hist. of Geneva, 47.
7 Acosta. Hist. of the Ind., 1604, 261. 82 McMahon. Am. Gard. Cal., 1806,
40 The American Naturalist. [January,
‘The onion is called in France, ognon, oignon ; in Germany,
Zwibel; in Flanders, ajuin; in Holland, wien; in Denmark,
rodlog ; in Italy, cipolla ; in Spain, cebolla ; in Portugal, cedola ;*
in the Mauritius, oiguon;** in Norway, rodlog;% in Greek,
krommuon ; in Latin, cepa.
In Arabic, dussul,® basal ;* in Bengali, pulantoo, peeaj ;* in
Ceylon, Zono ; % in China, tsum xi; in Cochin China, cay hanh ; 4
in Hindustani, pee-a7 ; © in India, peeaj ;® in Japan, soo, fitmosi ;™
in Java, brangbang;* in Malay, dawangmera;™ in Persia,
peeaj;® in Sanscrit, palandu, latarka? sukandaka;* in Tamil,
venggayum ; in Telegu, wolliguidda.™
oRACH. Atriplex hortensis L.
This spinach plant is grown as a vegetable, and also to use as a
salad, mixed with sorrel in order to correct the acidity. It was
known to the ancient Greeks and Romans, and it seems to have
been used more in the early times before the introduction of the
spinach than now. Two varieties are known; the red and the
green, each with a sub-variety of a paler color. It was known
to Turner” in England in 1538, who calls it areche, or red oreche.
In 1686 Ray® mentions the white and the red, even as mentioned
by Gerarde“ in 1597. In 1623 Bauhin® mentions the red, the
white, and the dark green. In 1806, three kinds are named by
McMahon™ as in American gardens.
Orach, orache, French spinach, or Mountain spinach is called in
France, arroche, armol, arrode, arrouse, belle dame, bonne dame,
eripe, erode, follette, tribe, irible, prudefemme ; in Germany, gar-
tenmelde; in Flanders and Holland, melde, hofmelde ; in Italy,
atreplice ; in Spain, armuelle; in Portugal, armolas ;" in Nor-
8 Vilmorin. Les Pl. Pot., 374. 91 Keempfer. Amoen, 830; Thunb. Jap., 132.
% Bojer. Hort. Maur., 1837, 347. % Turner. Libellus, 1538.
% Schubeler. Cul ž, 5% % Ray. Hist., 1686, 191
æ Ainslie. Mat. Med., I., 269. 9% Gerarde. Herb., 1597, 256
81 Delile. Fl. Ægypt, Ill. % Bauhin. Pinax, 1623, 119.
88 Birdwood. Veg. Prod. of Bomb., 186. ® McMahon. American Gar. Cal., 1806.
3 Loureiro. Fl. Cochin Ch., 201. 97 Vilmorin. Les Pl. Pot., 13.
% Speede. Ind. Handb. of Gard., 156.
1890.] History of Garden Vegetables. 41
wegian, havemelde ;* in Greece, vlita, spanakia ;* in Greek,
atraphaxis; in Latin, atriplex; in Egyptian, ohet ;” in India,
buthooa.™
OXALIS. O-alis sp.
There are two species which have been introduced into Euro-
pean gardens, but as an aliment they are there of little impor-
tance; they are yet included by Vilmorin™ among kitchen escu-
lents. The roots are the parts principally used, yet the acid
leaves find use as a salad.
Oxalis crenata Jacq.
This species is cultivated in Peru in gardens about Lima,” and
quite extensively in the mountains,'® from Chili even to Mexico.™
It was introduced into England in 1829, and was for a time cul-
tivated as a culinary plant.’ It seems now to have fallen into
disuse. Burr’ included it among American garden esculents in
1863. A red and a yellow variety are mentioned.”
The oxalis is called in France, oxalis crenelee, oxalide, surelle
tubereuse ; in Flanders, everklaver ;™ in Peru, oca.
Oxalis deppei Lodd.
This species is said to be a native of Brazil, whence it was in-
troduced into the kitchen-gardens of Europe," reaching England
in 1827. In 1860 Loudon™ says about 1850 it began to replace
in esteem the O. crenata. The young leaves are served like sor-
rel, put into soup, or used as greens ; the flowers are excellent in
salad, alone or mixed with corn salad; the roots are served
boiled” It was likewise recorded by Burr for American gardens
in 1863.
98 Schubeler. Culturpfianz, 80. 105 Bon Jard., 1882, 513.
9 Pickering. Ch. Hist., 248. 106 Gard. Chron., Dec. 8, 1883, 726; Lou-
10 Speede. Ind. Handb. of Gard., 154. don, Hort., ‘ee.
101 Vilmorin. Les Pl. Pot., 1883, 395. 1" Burr. Field and Gard. Veg. of Am., 1863, 41.
1 Don. Gard.and Bot. Dict., 1831, I.,756. 18 Decaisne and Naudain. Man., IV., to2.
103 Gibbon. Amazon, 153. 109 Gard. Chron., 1841, 68.
10 Heuze. Les Pl. Alim., II., 542. 110 Loudon. Hort., 1860
42 The American Naturalist. [January,
PARA CRESS. Spilanthes sp.
Under the name of Para cress several species of Spilanthes are
occasionally cultivated, the piquant leaves being mixed with
other salads, and having the property of stimulating the salivary |
glands; they should hence be classed with medical salads.
Spilanthes oleracea L.
Recorded as cultivated in France™ in 1860 and in 1824, and in
the Mauritius™ in 1837, and is used also as a salad in the Mas-
carenhas, the East Indies and South America”?
It is calted in France cresson de Para, spilanthe, spilanthe des
potageres,™4 abecedaire;™5in Germany, hussarenknopf; in Flanders,
ABC kruid ;™ in Japan, koko so.u6
Spilanthes fusca H. P.
This species also cultivated,” and seems to be the cresson du
Bresil of Vilmorin.™
PARSLEY, Apium petroselinum L.
This biennial is found wild in southern Europe, from Spain to
Macedonia, also in Algiers and in the Lebanon."8 It seems to be
the apium of the ancient Romans, the selinon of Theophrastus,
who, 322 B. C., describes two varieties, one with crowded, dense
leaves, the other with more open and broader leafage. Columella”
A. D. 42, speaks of the broad-leaved and curled sorts, and gives
directions for the culture of each, and, A. D. 79, Pliny”! mentions
the cultivated form as having varieties with a thick leaf,a crisp
leaf, etc., evidently copying from Theophrastus. He adds, how-
ever, from apparently his own observation, that the apium is in
general esteem, for the sprays find use in large quantities in broths,
11 Noisette. Man., 1860, II., 367; L'Hort. "ê Black. Treas. of Bot.
ran., 1824. 117 Bon Jard., 1882, 567.
u2 Bojer. Hort. Maurit., 1837, 184. 118 Decandolle. Orig. Des. Pl. Cult., 72.
ns Unger. Pat. Off. - 1859, 356. 119 Theophrastus. Lib. VII., c. 4.
u Vilmorin. Les Pl. Pot., 198. 120 Columella, Lib. XI., c. 3.
115 Noisette, 1. c., 367- I Pliny. Lib, XIX., c. 37, ¢. 46. Lib. XX., c. 44-
1890. | History of Garden Vegetables. 43
and give a peculiar palatability to condimental foods. In Achza
it is used, so he says, for the victors crown in the Nemean
games,
A little later Galen,’ A.D. 164, praises the parsley as among
the commonest of foods, sweet and grateful to the stomach, and
that some eat it and Smyrnium mixed with the leaves of lettuce.
Palladius,” about 210 A. D., mentions the method of procuring
the curled form from the common, and says that old seed germi-
nate more freely than do fresh seed (a peculiarity of parsley seed
at present, and which is directly the opposite to that of celery
seed). Apicius,** A. D. 230, a writer on cookery, makes use of
the apium viride, and of the seed. In the 13th century Albertus
Magnus™ speaks of apium and petroselinum as being kitchen-
garden plants; he speaks of each as being an herb the first year,
a vegetable the second year of growth; he says the apium has
broader and larger leaves than the fetrose/inum, the petroselinum
has leaves like the cicuta; that the petroselinum is more of a
medicine than a food.
At the present time we have for forms the common or plain-
leaved, the celery-leaved or Neapolitan, the curled, the fern-
leaved, and the Hamburg or turnip-rooted.
I. The plain-leaved form is not now much grown, having
become superseded by the more ornamental curled forms. In
1552, Tragus” says there is no kitchen-garden in Germany with-
out it, and it is used by the rich as well as the poor, and Matthio-
lus, in 1558 and 1570, says it is one of the most common plants
of the garden. In 1778 Mawe™ says it is the sort most commonly
grown in English gardens, but many prefer the curled kinds, and
in 1834 Don™ says it is seldom cultivated. It was in American
gardens in 1806.
Petroselinum. Trag., 1552, 459.
12 Galen. De Alim., Lib. II., Gregorius 1% Tragus. De Stirp., 1552, 459.
ed., 1547, 154. 127 Matthiolus. Comm., 1558, 362; 1570,
512.
14 a De pirid etc., Amster- 128 Mawe. Gard., 1778.
dam, 1 129 Don. Gard. and Bot. Dict., III., 279.
18 Albesius Ma Magnus. De Veg., Jessen ed., 10 McMahon. Am. Gard. Cal., 1806.
1867, passim.
44 The American Naturalist. [January,
Apium hortense. Matth., 1558, 362; 1570, 512; 1598, 562;
Pia, 1561, 333; Lugd., 1537, 700; Lob. ic. 1591, 706; Ger;
1597, 861 ; Dod., 1616, 694.
Garden parsley. Lyte’s Dod., 1586, 696.
Common parsley. Ray, 1686, 448; McMahon, 1806, 127.
Plane parsley. Mawe, 1778.
Common plain leaved. Don, 1834, III., 279.
Plain parsley. Burr, 1863, 433.
Persil commun. Vilm., 1883, 403.
II. The celery-leaved or Neapolitan is scarcely known outside
of Naples. It differs from the common parsley in the large size
of its leaves and leaf stalks, and it may be blanched as a celery.”
It was introduced into France by Vilmorin in 1823. Pliny
mentions parsleys with thick stalks, and says the stalks of some
are white. It may be the Apium hortense maximum of Bauhin™
in 1596, as the description applies well. He says it is now
grown in gardens, and was first called English Apium. He does
‘not mention it in his Pinax, 1623, under the same name, but
under that of /atifolium. Linnzus™ considers this to be the
Ligusticum austriacum Jacq.
It is figured by Bauhin in his Prodromus." I have never seen it.
Persil celeri ou de Naples. L'Hort. Fran., 1824.
Naples or Celery-leaved. Burr, 1863, 434.
Persil grand de Naples. Vilm., 1883, 404.
III. The curled parsleys. Of these we have many varieties,
differing but in degree, such as the curled, extra curled, moss
curled, and triple curled. Pena & Lobel, in 1570, mention this
form, and say it is very elegant and rare, brought from the
mountains the past year and grown in gardens, the leaves curled
on the borders, very graceful and tremulous, with minute incis-
ions. In the synonymy many of the figures do not exhibit the
curled aspect which the name and description indicates; we hence
make two divisions, the curled and the very curled. The curled
was in American gardens preceding 1806.
131 Vilmorin. The Veg. Gard., 1885, 380. 4 Linnzus. Sp., 2d ed
1680.
132 L'Hort. Fran., 1824; Bon. ae 1824-5,254. 13 Bauhin. Piodseteen; 1671, 80.
133 Bauhin. Phytopin., 1596, 268 136 Pena & Lobel. Adv., 1570, 315-
1890.] History of Garden Vegetables. 45
(a.) The curled.
Apium crispum sive multifidum. Ger., 1597, 861, cum ic.
Apium crispum. Matth. Op., 1598, 562, cum ic.
(6.) Very curled.
Apium crispatum. Adv., 1570, 315: Lugd., 1587, 700.
Apium. Cam. Epit., 1586, 526.
Petroselinum vulgo, crispum. J. Bauh., 1651, II., Pt. 2, 97.
Curled. Townsend, 1726, 33; Mawe, 1778; McMahon, 1806,
27; Thorb. Kal., 1821.
Apium crispum. Mill. Dict., 1731, ex Mill. Dict., 1807.
Apium petroselinum. Bryant, 1783, 24.
Curled or Double. Fessenden, 1828, 222; Bridgeman, 1832.
Persil frise. L'Hort. Fran., 1824; Vilm., 1883, 404.
Dwarf curled. Fessenden, 1828, 222; Burr, 1863, 432.
Curled leaved. Don, 1834, III., 279.
IV. The fern-leaved has leaves which are not curled, but are
divided into a very great number of small thread-like segments,
and is of a very dark green. I first note it in American seed
catalogues of 1878. It seems, however, to be described by
Bauhin in his edition of Matthiolus, 1598, as a kind with leaves
of the coriander, but very many extending from one branch,
laciniate, and the stem leaves unlike the coriander because long
and narrow.
V. The Hamburg parsley is grown for its roots, which are
used as parsnips are. It seems to have been used in Germany in
15421 or earlier, but its use was indicated as of Holland origin
even then in the name used, Dutch parsley. It did not reach
England until long after. In 1726 Townsend,' a seedsman, had
heard that “the people in Holland boil the roots of it, and eat it
as a good dish,” and Miller™ is said to have introduced it in 1727,
- and to have grown it himself for some years before it became
appreciated. In 1778™ it is said to be called Hamburg parsley,
and to be in esteem. In 1783 Bryant mentions its frequent oc-
currence in the London markets. It was in American gardens in
1806.
137 Fuchsius. De Stirp., 1542, 573- 189 Miller's Dict., 1807.
138 Townsend, Seedsman, 1726, 33. 140 Mawe. Gard., 1778.
46 The American Naturalist. [January,
Oreoselinum. Germanis Deutsch petersilg. Fuch. 1542, 573.
Petroselinum. Tragus, 1552, 459.
Apium. Cam. Epit., 1586, 526.
Apium hortense Fuchsi. J. Bauhin, 1651, III., Pt. 2, 97.
Apium latifolium. Mill. Dict., 1737.
Dutch parsley. Gard. Kal., 1765, 127.
Hamburg parsley. Mawe, 1778.
Broad-leaved. Mawe, 1778.
Hamburg or large rooted. McMahon, 1806; Burr, 1863, 433.
Large rooted. Thorb. Kal., 1821.
Persil tubereux. Hort. Fran., 1824.
Persil a grosse racine. Vilm., 1883, 405.
VI. A Persil panache is mentioned by Pirolle, in L’Hort.
Frangais, 1824, but I find no further account.
The Parsley is called in France persil; in Germany petersilie ;
in Flanders and Holland jpeterselie; in Holland preterselie; in
Denmark petersilje; in Italy prezzemolo, petroncino, erbetta; in
Spain perejl; in Portugal selsa;™ in Norway persille; in
Russia petruschka
In Arab Le
Z 7
s,“ kussah ;* in China, ku-sut;
in Egypt, bagdunis ;" in t India; jiad vjooaen khorasanee ; in
Japan, žin, seri; in Persia, karefo.
PARSNIP. Pastinaca sativa L.
It has been supposed that the pastinaca of the Romans included
the carrot and the parsnip, and that the e/aphoboscon of Pliny’
was the parsnip. Pliny describes the medicinal virtues of the
elaphoboscon, and says it is much esteemed as a food. The refer-
ences however do not prove this plant to be cultivated, nor do the
references to the fastinaca satisfactorily indicate the parsnip. I
am unwilling to accept such evidence as we find that the cultiva-
ted parsnip was known to the ancient Greeks and Romans.
141'Vilmorin. Les Pl. Pot., = 146 Bretschneider. On the Study, etc., 15.
142 Schubeler. Culturpflanz, 147Speede. Ind. Handb. of Gard., r81.
143 McIntosh. Book = the Gut. II., 232. 18 Kaempfer. Amoen., 825; Thunberg,
M Delile. Fl. Æg. Il Jap., 120.
45 Birdwood. Veg. = of Bomb., 163. ™ Pliny, Lib. XXII., c. 37.
1890.] History of Garden Vegetables. 47
Among the early botanists there exists quite a confusion in names
between the carrot and the parsnip. The root must, however,
have come into general use long before these records, and perhaps
its culture started in Germany, as it seems to have been unknown
to Ruellius™ in 1536, but is recorded by Fuchsius™ in Germany
in 1542, who gives a figure but calls it gross zam mosen. It is fig-
ured by Roszlin™” in 1550 under the name festnachen, and in
1552 is recorded by Tragus™ as having a sweet root, used espec-
ially by the poor, and better known in the kitchens than fat.
The following is a synonymy founded on pictures and descrip-
tions combined, all representing our long parsnip form of root,
but some indicating the hollow crown, upon which some of the
modern varieties are founded, especially Camerarius in 1586.
Sisarum sativum magnum. Fuchs., 1542, 751.
Pestnachen. Roszlin, 1550, 106.
Pastinaca. Trag., 1552, 440.
Pastinaca sativa. Matth., 1558, 353; 1570, 500; 1598, 548;
Pin., 1561, 318.
Pastinaca domestica vulgt. Lob. Obs., 1576, 407; ic. 1591, I, 709.
De Pastinaca. Pastenay, gerlin oder moren. Pictorius, 1581, 94.
Pastinaca domestica, Cam. Epit.,15 36,507; Cast. Dur., 1617, 837.
Pastinaca sativa vulgi, Matthioh. Lugd., 1587, 719.
Pastinaca latifolia sativa. Ger., 1597, 870; Dod., 1616, 680.
Pastinaca sativa latifolia, Germanica, luteo flore. J. Bauh.,
t1661, U, PEC 27450455.
Long parsnip of the moderns.
In 1683 the long parsnips are figured in England as in great
use for a delicate sweet food," are spoken of by Ray” in 1686,
Townsend’* 1726, Mawe,” 1778, and Miller” 1807, etc.
The round parsnip, or Panais rond of the French, is called
Siam by Don™™ in 1834. Its roots are funnel-shaped, tapering
very abruptly, often curving inwards, I find little of its early his-
150 Ruellius. De Nat. Stirp., 1536. 155 Ray. Hist., 1686, 410.
151Fuchsius. De Stirp., 1542. 156 Townsend. Seedsman, 1726, 22.
152 . Krauterb., — 106, 157 Mawe. Gard., r
153 Tragus. De Stirp., 158 Miller's Dict., 1807.
1552,
154 Worlidge. Syst. Hort., by sa w. Gent., 159Don. Gard, and Bot. Dict., 1834,
1683, 175. IIL., 339.
46 The American Naturalist. [January,
Oreoselinum. Germanis Deutsch petersilg. Fuch. 1542, 573.
Petroselinum. Tragus, 1552, 459.
Apium. Cam. Epit., 1586, 526.
Apium hortense Fuchs. J. Bauhin, 1651, IIL, Pt. 2, 97.
Apium latifolium. Mill. Dict., 1737.
Dutch parsley. Gard. Kal., 1765, 127.
Hamburg parsley. Mawe, 1778.
Broad-leaved. Mawe, 1778.
Hamburg or large rooted. McMahon, 1806; Burr, 1863, 433.
Large rooted. Thorb. Kal., 1821.
Persil tubereux. L'Hort. Fran., 1824.
Persil a grosse racine. Vilm., 1883, 405.
VI. A Persil panache is mentioned by Pirolle, in L’Hort.
Frangais, 1824, but I find no further account.
The Parsley is called in France persil; in Germany petersilze ;
in Flanders and Holland petersefie; in Holland preterselie; in
Denmark getersilje; in Italy prezzemolo, petroncino, erbetta; in
Spain perejil; in Portugal selsa;“' in Norway persille; in
Russia priruschka’?
hagedounis,“ kussah ;™* in China, hu-sut;
in Egypt, iunhois: ith i ladin ninian vjooaen khorasanee ;" in
Japan, 42m, seri; in Persia, £arefo.
PARSNIP. Pastinaca sativa L.
It has been supposed that the pastinaca of the Romans, included
the carrot and the parsnip, and that the elaphoboscon of Pliny™®
was the parsnip. Pliny describes the medicinal virtues of the
elaphoboscon, and says it is much esteemed as a food. The refer-
ences however do not prove this plant to be cultivated, nor do the
references to the fastinaca satisfactorily indicate the parsnip. I
am unwilling to accept such evidence as we find that the cultiva-
ted parsnip was known to the ancient Greeks and Romans.
1 Vilmorin. Les Pl. Pot., 403, M6 Bretschneider, On the Study, rei 15.
142 Schubeler. Culturpflanz, 94. 147 Speede. Ind. Handb. of Gard.,
14 McIntosh. Book — Gard., II., 232. "8 Kaempfer. Amoen., 825; cect
W Delile. Fil. Æg. Il Jap., 120.
145 Birdwood. Veg. ma of Bomb., 163. 1% Pliny, Lib. XXII., c. 37.
1890.] History of Garden Vegetables. 47
Among the early botanists there exists quite a confusion in names
between the carrot and the parsnip. The root must, however,
have come into general use long before these records, and perhaps
its culture started in Germany, as it seems to have been unknown
to Ruellius™ in 1536, but is recorded by Fuchsius™ in Germany
in 1542, who gives a figure but calls it gross zam mosen. It is fig-
ured by Roszlin™ in 1550 under the name /estnachen, and in
1552 is recorded by Tragus™ as having a sweet root, used espec-
ially by the poor, and better known in the kitchens than fat.
The following is a synonymy founded on pictures and descrip-
tions combined, all representing our long parsnip form of root,
but some indicating the hollow crown, upon which some of the
modern varieties are founded, especially Camerarius in 1586.
Sisarum sativum magnum. Fuchs., 1542, 751.
Pestnachen. Roszlin, 1550, 106.
Pastinaca. Trag., 1552, 440.
Pastinaca sativa. Matth., 1558, 353; 1570, 500; 1598, 548;
Pin., 1561, 318.
Pastinaca domestica vulgi. Lob. Obs., 1576, 407; ic. 1591, I, 709.
De Pastinaca. Pastenay, gerlin oder moren. Pictorius, 1581, 94.
Pastinaca domestica, Cam. Epit.,15 36, 507; Cast. Dur., 1617, 837.
Pastinaca sativa vulgi, Matthioh. Lugd., 1587, 719.
Pastinaca latifolia sativa. Ger., 1597, 870; Dod., 1616, 680.
Pastinaca sativa latifolia, Germanica, luteo flore. J. Bauh.,
1651, IL, PE 2 150, 151.
Long parsnip of the moderns.
In 1683 the long parsnips are figured in England as in great
use for a delicate sweet food, are spoken of by Ray™ in 1686,
Townsend'* 1726, Mawe,” 1778, and Miller™® 1807, etc.
The round parsnip, or Panais rond of the French, is called
Siam by Don™ in 1834. Its roots are funnel-shaped, tapering
very abruptly, often curving inwards. I find little of its early his-
150 Ryellius. De Nat. Stirp., 1536. 155 Ray. Hist., 1686, 410.
151 Fuchsius. De Stirp., 1542. 156 Townsend. Seedsman, 1726, 22.
aie, 3553 106, 157 Mawe. Gard., 1778.
153 Tragus. De Stirp. 158 Miller's Dict., 1807.
tirp., 1552 i è
154 Worlidge. Syst. Hort., wT. w. Gent., Don. Gard. and Bot. Dict., 1834,
1683, 175. IIL., 339. à
48 The American Naturalist. [January,
tory. It was noted in the Bon Jardinier for 1824, as also by
Pirolle in Le Hort. Français, by McIntosh, Burr, and other more
recent writers.
The introduction of the Parsnip to Rites was probably by
the earliest colonists. It is mentioned at Margarita Island by
Hawkins™ in 1564; in Peru by Acosta! in 1604, as cultivated
in Virginia in 1609! and 1648,! in Massachusetts in 1629, and
as common in 1630,’ and were among the Indian foods destroyed
by Gen. Sullivan’ in Western New York in 1779.
The parsnip is called in France panais, grand chervia cultive,
pastenade blanche, patenais, racine blanche ; in Germany, pastinake;
in Flanders and Holland, pastenaak ; in Holland, pinkster nakel ;
in Denmark, pastinak; in Italy, pastinaca ; in Spain, chirivia; in
Portugal, pastinaga ; in Norway, pastinak. 18
(To be continued.)
a papal Voy. Hak. Soc. ed., 27. 165 New England’s Annoyances. 1630. Anon,
History of the Ind., 1604, 261. The first recorded poem in America,
as True Decl. of Va., 1610, 113. w6 Conover’s Early Hist. of Geneva, 47.
163 A Perf. Des, of Va., 1640, 4. 167 Vilmorin. Les Pl. Pot., 398.
164 Higginson. Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., 1st 183 Schubeler. Culturpfi., 95.
ser., i, 118.
1890.] Editorial. 49
EDITORIAL.
EDITORS, E. D. COPE AND J.S. KINGSLEY.
OME interesting expressions of opinion as to the essential na-
ture of organic evolution have been recently published in
England. We refer to the addresses before the physiological and
biological sections of the British Association for the Advance-
ment of Sciences, by Dr. Burdon Sanderson and Sir William
Turner; to the book “Darwinism,” by Alfred Russel Wallace ;
and to the review of the latter by Prof. E. Ray Lankester, which
has just, appeared in ature.
Dr. Burdon Sanderson distinguishes the functions of living
beings into two divisions, growth and metabolism, which are the
subject matter of two sciences, morphology and physiology.
Evolution results from modification of growth, and as growth is
really metabolism under some directive influence, it is interesting
to note the aspect the subject presents to this able physiologist as
expressed in the closing remarks of his address: “ The word life
is used in physiology in what, if you like, may be called a techni-
cal sense, and denotes only that state of change with permanence
which I have endeavored to set forth to you. In this restricted
sense of the word, therefore, the question, What is life? is one to
which the answer is approachable, but I need not say that in a
higher sense—higher because it appeals to higher faculties in our
nature—the word suggests something outside of mechanism, .
which may perchance be its cause rather than its effect.”
Sir William Turner says: “To reject the influence which use
and disuse of parts may exercise both on the individual and on his
offspring, is like looking at an object with only a single eye. All
biologists will, I suppose, accept the proposition that the individual
soma is influenced or modified by its environment. Now, if on
the basis of this proposition the theory be grafted that modifica-
tions or variations thus produced are capable of so affecting the
germplasm of the individual in whom the variation arises as to
be transmitted to its offspring—and I have already given cases in
point—then such variations might be perpetuated. If the modi-
Am. Nat.—January.—4.
50 The American Naturalist. [January,
fication is of service, then presumably it will add to the viability
of the individual, and through the interaction of the soma and
the germplasm, in connection with their respective nutritive
changes, will so affect the latter as to lead to its being transmitted
to the offspring. From this point of view the environment would,
as it were, determine and regulate the nature of those variations
which are to become hereditary, and the possibility of variations
arising which are likely to prove useful becomes greater than on
the theory that the soma exercises no influence on the germplasm.
Hence I am unable to accept the proposition that somatogenic
characters are not transmitted, and I cannot but think that they
form an important factor in the production of hereditary
characters.” |
These are the views of two of England’s most distinguished
biologists, and we find them to be in strong contrast to those ex-
pressed by Dr. Wallace and Prof. Lankester, no less able men in
their respective fields. Dr. Wallace does not yet see beyond
natural selection, and well illustrates the peculiar blindness to the
nature of the origin of variations which is prevalent in quarters
which hold to what they consider to be pure Darwinism, but
which has been better termed “ post-Darwinism.” But as an il-
lustration of how difficult it is to keep one’s eyes from twisting
to the right, Dr. Wallace does actually endeavor to explain the
origin of the rotated eye of the flat-fish by appealing to the inheri-
tance of an acquired character, which is ever increased by the
transmission of additional acquisition. This is, as wittily remarked
by Lankester, “ flat Lamarckism.” And Lankester has slipped
into rationality in the same way, in attributing the asymmetry of
the Gastropod Mollusca “to the cumulative effect of a mechanical
cause.” Both these gentlemen thus inadvertently abandon the
major premise of the post-Darwinians—that acquired characters
cannot be inherited. Prof. Weismann and others endeavor to sus-
tain this position by experimenting on the inheritance of mutila-
tion, as though it were not already sufficiently well known that
broken heads and legs are not inherited! The evidence of
palzontology ought to be of some value as to what is and what is
not inherited, but this has not yet come fairly into the hands of
1890.] Editorial. 51
either Dr. Wallace or Dr. Lankester. “The American evolution-
ists ” will soon furnish them with some additional information on
this topic, all quite as much within the “scientific method” as are
the speculations of Weismann, though Dr. Wallace and Prof.
Lankester think that they have not done so in the past. Accord-
ing to the latter, the opponents of post-Darwinism are not “ labo-
ratory men,” which explains their shortcomings. But there are
laboratories and laboratories! The laboratories where section cut-
ting and staining form the methods of studying nature are of high
importance, but they do not cover the whole ground. Indeed,
the adepts at this work are sometimes grossly ignorant of gross
anatomy. In the: estimation of some of these gentlemen the
value of a scientific pursuit is inversely as the size of the objects
studied. What the value of cetology can be in such eyes we do
not know, unless it be something to be promptly sat upon.
—TheE recent establishment of four geological surveys in as
many States of the South, is a matter of congratulation. The first
to lead the way was Arkansas, whose survey is in active prose-
cution by Prof. Branner. The Texas Legislature next inaugurated
the work, and appointed Prof. Dumbel to superintend it. Prof.
Dumbel has displayed much energy in getting his organization
to work, and much is to be expected from his corps of able assis-
tants. In the present number of the NATURALIST we announce
the opening of the surveys of Missouri by Prof. Winslow, and of
Georgia under Prof. J. W. Spencer. The people of the South
were never more alive to the importance of developing the re-
sources of their States, and of contributing their share to the
stock of our knowledge of creation in all its aspects.
52 The American Naturalist. [January,
RECENT LITERATURE.
DeToni’s Sylloge Algarum.'—This large volume of nearly
fifteen hundred pages is devoted to the Chlorophycee, and bears
he sub-title “ Sylloge Chlorophycearum.’’ In general appearance it
is like the well-known Sylloge Fungorum of Saccardo, even to pecu-
liarities of type and printing.
After a brief prefatory chapter, one hundred and thirty-nine pages
are given to a most useful Bibliotheca Phycologica, in which about
thirty-five hundred titles of papers and books on algæ are given, and
also thirty-six titles of exsiccate. This portion of the work is particu-
larly valuable to the student, as it enables him readily to find the ex-
tent of the literature in a particular department of the subject.
The eli Hemant according to DeToni, constitute a class includ-
ing four orders, viz.: Confervoidez, Siphoneæ, Protococcoidez, and
Conjugate, and these again are subdivided into families, apparently
co-ordinate with the ‘‘orders’’ Phanerogams. The system is as fol-
lows :
CHLOROPHYCE/@ (Kuetz. ex parte) Wittr.
Ord. I.—Confervoidez (Ag.) Falk.
A. OOGAMÆ.
Fam. 1. Coleochetacee (Naeg.) Prings.
“ 2, Mycoideaceæ (Van Tiegh.) Hausg.
“ 3, @dogoniacee (De Bary) Wittr.
“ 4. Cylindrocapsacee Wille.
“ 5. Spheropleacee (Kuetz.) Cohn.
B. IsoGaMé.
Fam. 6. Ulvacee (Lamour.) Rabeuh.
“<4. Ulotrichiacee (Kuetz.) Borzi.
“ 8. Chorolepidacee “are ) Borzi.
“ 9. Hausgirgiacee DeTon
“ to. Cladophoracee (Hassall) Witt. char. emend.
“ ir. Pithophoracee Wittr.
“ 12, Gomontiaceæ, Born & Flah.
Ord. II.—Siphoneæ, Grev. em.
A. OOGAMÆ.
Fam. 13. Vaucheriacee (Gray, Dumort.
1 Sylloge Algarum omniam hucusque cognitarum, yen Doct. J. Ba
Instituti Botanici Patavini Adjutor, etc., etc. Vol. Patavii XXV., Julii, EL MDCCC-
LXXXIX. Sumptibus Auctoris, Typis Seminarii, pp. fa bornxnch51s 8vo.
1890.] Recent Literature. 53
B. ISOGAMÆ.
Fam. 14. Dasycladiacee (Endl.) Cramer.
“ i5, Derbestacee Thur.
“ 16. Bryopsidacee (Bory.) Thur.
“ 17. Caulerpacee Reicheub.
“ 18. Spongodiacee Lamour.
‘* 19. Udoteacee (Endl.) J. Ag.
Hydrogastraceea (Endl.) Rabeuh.
1. Phyllosiphonacee Frank.
Ord. I1I.—Protococcoidez, (Menegh.) Kirch.
Fam. 22. Volvecacee (Cohn) Kirch.
“ 23. Palmellacee (Decaine) Neg. em.
Ord. IV.—Conjugatz (Link.) DeBary.
Fam. 24. Zygnemacee (Menegh.) Rabeuh.
“ 25. Desmidiacee (Kuetz.) DeBary.
These families include two hundred and twenty-nine genera, and
twenty-nine hundred and ninety-two (2992) species. Very many of
the genera contain but a single species, there being no less than eighty-
nine such, with many containing but two species. On the other hand,
there are several large genera, e.g., CEdogonium, with 189 species ;
Cladophora, with 229; Spirogyra, 84; Closterium, 103; Cosmarium,
307; Euastrum, 99; Staurastrum, 250.—CHaRLEs E, BESSEY.
Gremli’s Flora of Switzerland.?—This little volume is a genu-
ine pocket manual,—a trifle large, perhaps, but still small enough to
be readily slipped into the traveler’s coat pocket. It measures 434 by 7
inches, and is less than an inch in thickness. The contrast between
these measurements and those of our ordinary manuals is striking, e.g.,
Gray’s, 814 by 534 by 1% inches; Coulter’s, about the same; Chap-
man’s, 834 by 534 by 114; Wood’s Classbook, 8% by 6% by 134 ;
Wood’s Botanist and Florist, 8 by 51% by 1%. This contrast is still
greater when we note the fact that this book contains descriptions of
fully 2500 species, while Gray’s has but 2348, and Coulter’s 1881.
The descriptions are brief, but apparently quite satisfactory, and
much space is saved by the liberal use of abbreviations. Keys are
abundantly provided, so that there need be no difficulty in determining
the name and classification of any plant.
In print, binding, and general appearance (including color), this
2 The Flora of Switzerland, for the use of Tourists and Field-botanists, by A. Gremli.
Translated from the fifth edition by Leonard W. Paitson, London. David Nutt, 270
Strand, 1889. Printed at Zurich. 12mo, pp. xxiv., 454.
N N
o
54 The American Naturalist. [January,
little book resembles the well-known Baedeker’s Handbooks.—CHARLES
E. BESSEY.
Lubbock’s Senses of Animals.*—One of the recent additions
to the International Science Series is by the genial English naturalist,
Sir J. Lubbock, and contains the results of his observations on the
senses and intelligence of animals, especially of insects. Having
found it necessary to consult many memoirs in various languages, in
order to well understand the mechanism of the senses, and the organs
by which sensations are transmitted, the author has in this work
brought together the notes thus made, and given a list of the prin-
cipal memoirs consulted. (Commencing with man, Sir J. Lubbock
works his way downward through the lower animals, dwelling chiefly
upon the class which has especially engaged his attention. Chapter I.
deals with touch; taste and smell have each a chapter devoted to
them; hearing occupies two chapters, and sight takes up the chapters
VI. and VII. The eighth chapter is on problematical sense-organs,
such as the muciferous canal of fishes, light organs, etc. The range
of vision and hearing, and the existence of unknown senses, are also
here discussed. It is known that among ants, bees, and wasps, some
at least hear sounds which we cannot, and that they can perceive the
ultra-violet rays to us invisible. Chapter’ IX. refers to bees and colors,
treating of the author’s experiments, and answering Dr. Miiller’s ob-
jections. The limits of vision in animals form the subject of the
tenth chapter, while the eleventh treats of recognition among ants,
and the twelfth of the habits of solitary wasps and bees. Chapter
XIII. deals with the supposed sense of direction, the possession of
which he is inclined to deny to bees. In his chapter upon the sense
of hearing, he does not argue that the vertebrate semicircular canals
are the seat of such asense. The last chapter details, among other
things, the author’s celebrated experiments with word-cards upon his
dog Van.
RECENT BOOKS AND PAMPHLETS.
Archivos do Museo —— do Rio de Janeiro, Vol. VII. From the Museum,
BARROIS, CHARLES.—Faune du Calcaire D'Erbray. Extrait des Mémoires de la,
Société Géologique du Nord, tone III., Avril, 1889. From a ces
Baur, G.—Osteologische Notizen iiber Reptilien. Separatabdruck aus dem Zo-
ehipischon Anzeiger, 1888, From the author.
3 On the Senses, Instincts, and Intelligence of Animals, by Sir J. Lubbock, M.P’
F.R.S., etc. International Scientific Series LXV. Kegan Paul, Trench & Co., London»
1888
1890.] Recent Books and Pamphlets. 55
BAUR, 2 gps Systematic rere Meiolania Owen. Extract from the Annals
and Mag. Nat. Hist., Jan., 1889. From the author.
a j apep GRAHAM. ieri aa Opinions relating to the Deaf. From the
author.
nist NFORD, W. T.—Address delivered at the Anniversary Meeting of the London
Geological and Feb. 15, 1889. From the author
assem de la Academia piesi de Ciencias en Cordoba (Republica Argentina), 1887,
oX. From Eduardo Holmber
_ eg cn G. A.—On Some Reptiles and Batrachians we Iguarasse, Pernambuco,
Description of two new Snakes from Hong Kong and note on the dentition of Hydro-
phis viperina. Extract from Annals and Magazine of Natural History for July, 1888.
From the author.
BRONGNIART, CHARLES molo
gique de Comentry. neli z Bull. de la Société de l Industris Minérale. Tome II.,
1888. From the authors
mor ei CiM. ai sur cane ae Poissons des Lignites de Ménat. ae
sur une note de M. Mcxime Corun, présentée à l’Académie des Sciences la 18 Septem
1882, relative vt l'action des huiles da de goudron sur les vignes. Extrait du in m
des Annales. Les Entomophthorées et leur application àla destruction des insects
nuisibles. From the author.
BRONGNIART, CHARLES.—On Pleuracanthus. Extract from Geol. Mag., Dec. III.,
nd
State Laboratory ‘Nat. Hist., an Fido the author.
OWN-GOODE, G. and Associates.—The Fishery Industries of the United States.
CALDERON, ‘S-“Apercu général du relief et régions géologiques de l'Espagne. Ex-
t de l'Annuaire Géologique Universal. Tome II.—Resumé de quelques Etudes de
Orogéni Sal
su Papel en el Organismo del Globo. Anal. de la Soc. Esp. de Hist. Nat., Tomo
XVII., 1888. From the author.
CHAPMAN, F. M.—Pielimitiary Description of two apparently new Species of the
Genus Hesperotays from Florida. Description of a new Sub-species of the Sig-
modon from Florida.—On the Habits = brad Round-tailed Muskrat (Neofiber alleni
True). Extract from sae Am. Mus. Ni ., Vol. II. No. 3. From the author.
CrosBy, W. O.—Geology of the oe et of Dakota. il the Proceedings
the Boston Soc. Nat. Hist., Vol. XXII. From the author.
DANA, JAMES D.—On Volcanoes and Volcanic Phenomena of the Hawaiian Islands.
Extract from the Am. Journal Science. Vol. XXXIII XXXVIL, 1887-89. From the
author.
‘Dotto, Louis.—On the ae of Euclastes. Extract from the Geological Maga-
sine, June, 1888. From the
EVERMAN, B. W.—Birds pr f Carrol County, Indiana. Extract from The Auk, Oct.,
1888 and Jan., 1889. From the a
ForBEs, S. A.—On the Food ead of Fresh-Water Fishes. Bull. Iii. State Lab-
of Nat. Hist., Vol. Il.
GALLOWAY, B. T.—Report of the Section of Vegetable Pathology, 1888. From the
t of Agriculture.
Geological Survey of New Jersey, Vol. I. Topography, Magnetism, Climate.
56 , Tis Amitan Nahina janti
GULICK, J. T.—Divergent Evolution through Cumulati gation. Extract from
the Linnæan Society's Journal of Zoology, Vol. XX. From the auth or.
HECTOR, JAMES.—Twentieth Annual Report on the Colonial Museum and Labora-
INGERSOLL, ERNEST.—Our Country Cousins, From the suthoe
KEYEs, C. R.—On some Fossils from the Lower Coal Measures PA Des Moines, lowa.
- Reprint from the American Geol., July, 1888. From the author.
IAN, M. W.—Systéme Crétacé. Extrait de l'Annuaire Géologique Universal.
ze
(e
(a << Discription: ofa Problematic Organism from the Devonian at the
Falls of Ohio. Extract from the Am. Jour. of Science, Vol. XXXVII., March, 1889.
From the author.
LAMPERT, Kurt .—Fortschritt in der Meereskunde. Separatabdruck aus der Natur,
1889, No. 22.—Zoologie, Separatabdruck aus Huméoldt, Band VIII., Heft 5. From
the wha:
LÜTKEN, CHR. FR.—Tillseg til Bidrag til Kimdskab om Arterne ap Slaegten Cyamus
Satr. eller Hvallusene. From the author.
LYDEKKER, R.—Notes on the Sauropterygia of the Oxford and Kimeridge ae
Note on the Ichthyopterygia. Extracts from zi Geol. Mag., 1888. From the auth
LYDEKKER, R.—Nototherium and Zygomaturus. Extract from the Annais ld
Mag. Nat. Hist., Feb., 1889.—On the aai sik Affinities of five Genera of Mesozoic /
Reptiles. Extract from Quarterly Journ. Geol. Soc., Feb., 1889. From the author.
MAJOR, FORSYTH. —Sur un eee d’ age PE fossiles dans l'île de Samos,
the
MALLERY, G.—Philosophy iad aero grec Philosophical Soc. of Washington,
Vol. XI. From the author.
MCGEE, W. J. = Paleolithic Manin America. Reprint from Popular Science Monthly.
From the author.
Mineral Resources of the United m From the U. S. Geol. Survey.
POHLMAN, JULIUs.—Cement Rock and Gypsum Deposits in Buffalo.—The Life-His-
tory of Niagara. Reprint from Trans. Am. Inst. of Mining Engineers, Oct., 1888.
Report of the Commissioners of Education, 1886-'87. From the Bureau of Education.
Reports of the Director of the Mint for 1887 and 1888. From James P. Kimball.
Report of Trustees of Peal Peabody Museum of Am. Archæology and Ethnology, Vol. IV.,
No. 2. From the Muse
Report of Trustees of New York State Museum of Nat. Hist., 1887. From the Mu-
seum,
RILEy, s V.—The Song Notes of the Periodical ndn. Extract from the proceed-
Adv. Science, Vol. XXXIV. From the auth
:
niang DON MATIAS.—Speech on the 6gth Moira of the birth of General U.
S.
Grant. From ~ ee
SHUFELDT, R. W.—Examples of Fractures and their Union in the Bones of Birds.
In the Mew York Me poe Journ. From the author.
The Western Society for Psychical Research. List of Members. From J. E. Wood-
WiLLARD, DEFORREST. —Osteotomy for Anterior Curves of the Leg. Reprint from
the Medical and Surgical Reporter, Jan. 19. 1889. From the author.
Wo seamless W. voN—Triton palmatus am Harz. Separatabdruck aus dem
Zoologischen Anzeiger, No. 253, 1887. From the author
1890.] Geography and Travel. 57
General Notes.
GEOGRAPHY AND TRAVEL.
Africa.—Notes Concerning Stanley.—A letter from H. M.
Stanley, narrating the difficulties encountered by him in the ascent of
the Aruwimi or Huri, and accompanied by a sketch map, appears in
the May issue of the Proc. Roy. Geog. Soc. As the contents of this
letter, the sufferings from hunger, insects, poisoned arrows and horrors
of every kind, and the final triumph, are now well known, they will
not here be recounted. Hejambi Rapids (about 27° 10’ E.) marks a
division between two kinds of architecture and language. Below,
the houses are conical ; above, the villages are long and straight, and
the huts square and surrounded by tall logs which form separate courts.
Huri is the most widely known native name for the Aruwimi. The
Albert Nyanza seems to be growing smaller. Emin Pasha states that
during “his acquaintance with it islands have become headlands.
Near the south end the steamer has to anchor about five miles from
shore. Thetribes of the forest and valley of the Huri are cannibals.
Dwarf people, here called Wambutti, are numerous between the
Hepoko and the grass-land, and are expert with their arrows.
Dr. R. W. Felkin has examined some of the arrows with which the
Tikki-Tikki attacked Stanley and his party, and finds that the latter’s
idea that the poison is derived from ants is erroneous. The poison
will kill in twenty minntes unless the antidote be used, and thus the
deaths of Mr. Stanley’s men were due to tetanus, which in tropical
. climates is often fatal to wounded men. The formic acid of ants,
though an external irritant, is not a deadly poison. The poison used
by the Tikki-Tikki is obtained from a tree which occurs both in Cen-
tral Africa and on the east coast north of Mombasa. It is allied to the
Strophanthus, but is more active and deadly.
Wadai and Darfur.—The third part of Dr. Nachtigal’s work
upon the Sahara and Sudan, dictated by the deceased traveler to a
shorthand writer, has now been published by Mrs. Groddeck, to whom
Dr. Nachtigal had confided its completion. One of the reasons which
prevented Dr. Nachtigal from previously publishing it was his uncer-
tainty regarding the Futa river, which he believed to be a continuation
of the Welle, but purposed to settle the question in another expedition.
»
58 The American Naturalist. [January,
The map with this volume comprises the region between Lake Fibri
and Khartoum. The territory of Wadai proper covers 64,000 square
miles, but the authority of its ruler extends over several desert tribes,
making a total area of 100,000 square miles, and a population of some
two and a half millions. The northern part is hilly; the central well
_ watered, with a light sandy soil; the southern covered with a rich
clay. The Baltha and Butéha are dry during most of the year, though
water can be found by digging, but in the rains they are mighty
streams. Runga and Dar Kuti, subject to Wadai, are pagan ; the first
has fifteen, the second fourteen villages. Wadai is, on the whole, less
fertile than Darfur, and still less so than Barum, but it is rich in
ostriches in the north, and in elephants in the south. The population
is mixed negro and Arab.
Darfur or Dar-Fér is about the size of Prussia, and has a population
of more than 3,000,000 settled inhabitants, and half a million of
nomads. The people are Arab and negro, more or less mingled. The
Forawa form the bulk of the population, and are dark-coloréd and
middle-sized, those in the remote parts still pagans.
The Ubangi and Ngala.—A map in the June issue of the Proc.
Roy. Geog. Soc. renders clear the accompanying papers’ of Captain
Vangele, who has solved the question of the identity of the Welle
and the Mobangi or Ubangi, and of Mr. J. R. Werner, who writes of
the tributaries Ngala and Aruwimi, and of the back channel Ngiri,
which connects the lower part of the Ubangi’s course with the main
Congo, there nearly parallel to it. In one place the two rivers ap-
proach very close, but north of 1° 30’ N. they diverge, the Congo’s
course lying nearly east and west, while the Mobangi continues west
of north till it reaches 4° 30’ N., when the course bends eastward, its
upper waters being the Welle and other streams of the Bandjia country.
The Ngala or Mangalla has no connection with the Ubangi, but its
upper course also trends eastward.
Madagascar.—L. H. Ransome describes and gives a map of the
course of the river Antanambalana (Madagascar) in the May number
of the Royal Geographical Society’s Proceedings. This stream is in
the northeast of the island, in the territory of the Betsimisaraka.
The Antanambalana has no important tributaries, so far as surveyed,
save the Vohimar, which enters it twenty miles from the mouth. The
region is one of mountains covered with virgin forest. Among the
timber are rosewood, ebony, and many hard woods as yet unknown to
commerce. Mr. Ransome tells of a wild man, five feet nine inches
”
i
1890.] Geography and Travel. 59
high, covered with thick black hair, who was caught by some Malagasy
while asleep on a branch of a tree, and who died five months after his
capture. He learned a few words, and conveyed the intelligence that
he had a father and two brothers in the forest. The Betsimisaraka are
darker than the ruling Hovas, and also hardier. The women are rela-
tively tall, the men averaging five feet five inches. The dress of the
men is a grass mat and piece of cloth round the loins, but some of the
richer wear a white or bright tinted cotton garment called a lamba.
The women wear a lamba, draped more closely, and fastened by a
girdle. Both sexes carry charms round the neck, and every native has
a snuff-box of bamboo or horn. The only weapon is a spear, with a
flat tail-piece for digging up roots. The houses are built on poles, the
floor four to eight feet from the ground. There is usually but one
room ; the ascent is by a notched inclined pole, and there are no win-
dows or chimneys.
German East Africa.—According to Dr. K. W. Schmitt (Peter-
mann’ s Mitteilungen, May, 1889), the greater portion of German East
Africa is not capable of remunerative cultivation, though there are highly
fertile tracts, among them the wooded and mountainous region of
Usambara and the western part of Bordie, and much of the country
around Kilimanjaro. The country of the Nguru resembles Usambara
in its geological formation, forests, and numerous small rivers. Use-
guha and other districts near form a vast waterless steppe, and vast
steppes with oases of mountains stretch west of Usambara. Western
Ukami is fertile, but beyond it extends the desolate Mkata steppe.
Mr. Arnot and Garenganze.—On January 7th of this year, Mr.
F. S. Arnot read before the Royal Geographical Society an account of
his wanderings in Africa, from 1881 to that date. With a very slender
outfit, and without offensive arms, save for hunting, he first crossed
Africa from Plutal to Bihé and Benguela, reversing Serpa Pinto’s jour-
ney, and then traveled aross the Central Plateau of the continent to
the sources of the Congo and Zambezi, discovering a mountainous and
healthful country. The overflow of the Chobe river during the dry
season is by Mr. Arnot explained by the nature of the soil around the
northern feeders of this river. The porous ground absorbs the early
rains, and the hills yield up their store towards the end of the latter
rains. The Ovimbundu, an enterprising people living between Ben-
guela and Bihé, told our traveller of a country called Garenganze,
lying north of the Barotse region. This Mr. Arnot resolved to reach.
The Ovimbundu bring to the Portuguese markets large quantities of
60 The American Naturalist. [January,
rubber from a root abounding in the plains east of the Kwanza and
ukema rivers. Between Bihé and Bailundu, (about 16° E.) springs
of the Okovango, which flows to Lake Ngami are met with close to
those of feeders of the Kwanza, which flows northwards. Westward
of this the territory of the Vachibokwe was entered, and the sources
of the Kutia, a tributary of the Kwanza, were passed. Soon afterwards
the head of the Monyango, the southern-most feeder of the Kasai, was
met with; and a little further on were the springs of the Elume, which
runs into the Zambezi. ` The Vachibokwe are active and industrious,
and were the first to discover a method of extracting rubber from the
“‘Talamba’’ root. Eastward of these are the Luvale or Va-luena. -
Kangombe, a Va-luena chief, is a great slave hunter, and the terror of i
the Lunda or Muata-yamoo. Beyond the Lumese and Luena tribu-
taries of the Zambezi is the great Kifumadji flat, which in the rainy
season is flooded to a depth of two or three feet. The Lunda country
was then crossed in sight of the Zambesi, here flowing westward.
Kaomba Mountain or Border Craig, as Mr. Arnot styles it, marks the
watershed between Zambesi and Congo. The country became moun- i
tainous about 25° E., and the Lokoleshe, Lufupa, Luburi, and Lulua 4
were large streams crossed before the Lualaba was reached—all flowing 7
northwards. The Sambau mountains, inhabited by a portion of the :
Samba tribe, who dwell in caves, were left to the left hand, and then,
after passing the Lukurawe, a rugged mountainous land was entered.
Leave of Msidi, the potentate of Garengafze, had to be asked before
entering the capital. Auguries were consulted before admitting the visitor,
and fortunately these proved auspicious. Garenganze is a name made
by Msidi for the kingdom he has created. The Arabs knows it aS —
Katanga. The capital ison an immense plain called Mukurra, with n
_ high mountains on two of its sides. Msidi’s town consists of a number
of villages around a double-topped hill in the south of the plain. me
Msidi’s kingdom extends from the Lualaba to the Luapula, and from a
the Luba country on the north to the mountains dividing the Congo a
and Zambezi water-systems. Mr. Arnot stayed at Msidi’s capital for ee
more than two years.
The Leeba of Livingstone is really the Zambezi.
The great Lombwe caves are very remarkable and extensive, and
are inhabited by a considerable number of natives. One cave, the
~ Kotasa, has two mouths, the distance between them being five
miles.
Fen Stree ere ee Se yas et =
1890.] Geography and Travel. 61
Asia—Ascents in the Caucasus.—Koshtantan, 17,091 feet high,
in the main Caucasus, has been ascended by A. F. Mummery, after the
failure of a first attempt. Mr. H. W. Holder has ascended some of the
peaks around the Bezingi Glacier, including Salananchera (about 15,500
feet), Koshtantan, and Kartantan, or the Saddle Peak (about 16,500
feet); and Mr. Cockin, who accompanied Mr. Holder and stayed
behind, afterwards ascended Shkara (17,200-17,300 feet), and the
second peak of Djanga (16,700-16,800 feet), and then, crossing to the
south side of the chain, ascended the northern peak of Ushba. Kosh-
tantan is somewhat higher than Dychtan, thus proving the correctness
of the measurements of the Russian survey. In an attempted ascent
of the Mishirgi Tan, Mr. Holder and his companions were brought to
a stand at 13,000 feet. They estimate the height of that peak at a
- little more than 16,000 feet, and it lies but slightly southeast of Kosh-
tantan. The main glacier streams of the Caucasus, the Bezingi,
Mishiri, and Dych Su, have but slight fall, but the smaller upper streams
which form them are cascades of ice.
Notes from Prjevalsky’s Last Journey.—In his fourth
voyage, Gen. Prjevalski explored a portion of the Keren-Lim that had
not been previously visited, forming an arc of a circle with the con-
vexity to the north. Towards the east, by the chain of Marco Polo,
the already known portion of the range is reached. This convex range
consists of several parallel chains, named Columbus, Moscow, Russia,
Prjevalski, separated from each other by wild valleys with a poor flora
and fauna, but rich in gold. One of these valleys, 210 kilometres
long, with a width varying from 21 to 42 kilometres, was named by the
traveller the ‘‘ Valley of the Winds,’ on account of its formidable
tempests. Gen. Prjevalski believes that this valley affords the best
means of communication between China and East Turkestan, also the
shortest (1,700 kilometres).— Revue de Geographie.
Bokhara.—According to Dr. Heyfelder (Petermann s Mitteilungen,
Vol. VII, 1889), Bokhara has an area of 275,000 square kilometres.
The Tadjiks, the primitive Iranian race, though a tall fine people, have
been conquered by the more war-like and energetic Turanian Auzbecks,
The Tadjiks are agriculturalists, gardeners, artisans, merchants; the
Ausbecks by preference functionaries or soldiers. Arabs are numerous,
also Persians, and the language of the latter is that of the court and of
good society. The Jews are attired somewhat like those of Poland,
and their commercial relations extend to Russia, France, Austria, and
England. The Hindus are small and feeble; they are small tradesmen,
62 The American Naturalist. [January,
and given to usury; if they become rich, they recross the frontier.
Afghans attend the markets from time to time, and some settle and
purchase lands. ‘There are 2,000 Europeans in the Khanate, counting
the Russian garrisons of Chardjui and Korki.
America.—Dr. Nansen’s Journey across Greenland.—Dr.
F. Nansen read an account of his memorable journey across the inland
ice of Greenland, before the Royal Geographical Society, on June 24,
1889. The result of the expedition was to prove that Greenland, at
the point crossed (61°-64° N. lat.) is covered with a shield-shaped-
stratum of ice, of such thickness that it fills up all irregularities in the
surface, rising rapidly but regularly from the east coast to a height of
9,000 to 10,000 feet, almost flat in the middle, and falling again regu-
larly toward the west coast. Some geologists argue from this that the
interior is a vast tableland, but Dr. Nansen believes that it is not, but
that Nordenskjold was right in believing the internal configuration of the
mountains comparable to that of Scandinavia. If there are deep fjords
and lofty mountains on the coast, he argues that the ice has also exca-
vated deep valleys in the interior. The surface of the snow-field con-
sists of soft, loose and dry snow, readily moved by the wind, and is
even and polished like a lake in still weather. Thin ice-crusts, the
product of summer meltings, occur at intervals, but hard ice or snow
cannot be found with the six-foot sticks used in s&/ or snow-shoe run-
ning. The party had a snowfall almost every day, and as there is no
real snow-melting in the interior, the melting of the day freezing again
at night, it would seem that the quantity of snow is still increasing.
Yet the flowing of the ice to the shores keeps it down, the surplus
coming to the coast as water as well as ice.
Geographical News.—America.—The population of British
Guiana at the end of 1887 was 277,038, of whom 102,746 were East
Indians.
It is probably not generally known that the Santa Cruz Indians
about fifty years ago drove out the Mexicans from southwest Yucatan,
and have since retained possession. Mr. W. Miller crossed this terri-
tory last year from Bacalar to Santa Cruz. The Indians pretend to
be Christians, remember a few prayers, and have rude churches, but
no priests. Near Tutum is an oracular cross, and the belief is firm
that the voice which issues from it is that of God. In one village are
several whites, descendants of Spaniards, but in dress, manners and
ideas reduced to the Indian level.
1890.] Geography and Travel. 63
J. Bellamy (Proc. Roy. Geog. Soc., Sept., 1889) describes an ex-
pedition to the Cockscomb Mountains of British Honduras. The
highest peak, Victoria, is a little below 4,000 feet. The interior of
this country is less known than Central Africa.
In 1857 only 4,951 immigrants reached the Argentine Republic ; in
1888 the number was 155,632. At the present rate of increase, the
population by the end of the century will be 7,000,000. Sixty-five
per cent, of the immigrants are Italians, fifteen per cent. Spaniards,
and ten per cent, French.
Europe.—lIn the immense empire of Russia, with a population of
108,787,235 in 1885, there were at that date, according to Dr. Géhlert
(Ausland, 1888), only 36 towns with more than 50,000 inhabitants,
and only 13 with more than 100,000. The latter are: St. Peters-
burg (861,303), Moscow (753,469), Warsaw (454,298), Odessa (240,-
ooo), Riga (176,332), Kharkhov (171,426), Kiev (165,561), Kazan
(139,015), Saratov (122,829), Tashkend eae Kicheney (120,-
074), Lodz (113,413), and Vilna (102,845).
According to the preliminary results of the census of Switzerland,
taken Dec. 1st, 1888, the total population at that date was 2,934,055,
as compared with 2,846,102 in 1880, The slightness of the increase
is accounted for by the excessive emigration. During the eight years
above, 160,000 Swiss left the country.
Geographical News.—Africa.—The Germans have been active
in the survey of the Cameroons and Gold Coast. Kund and Tappen-
beck, with 240 men, started last year on a second expedition to the
upper courses of the Sannaga and Njong. It was found that the lower
course of the latter river lies seven minutes west of its position on exist-
ing maps. Dr. L. Wolf has passed through the hitherto unknown Udjuti
country.
The most recent estimate of the population of Morocco places it at
9,400,000, viz., 3,200,000 in Fez, 3,900,000 in Morocco proper, iy
ooo in Tafia, and 1,450,000 in Sus, Adrar, and the northern Draa
This estimate exceeds all previous ones.
Dr. Colin has prepared a map of the district of Bambuk (Senegam-
bia), and his survey has definitely fixed the topography of the country
and proved errors in former maps. Thus the river Faleme, instead of
running straight to Labe in Futa-Djallon, bifurcates into two streams
of almost equal importance.
64 The American Naturalist. [January,
From a note in the September issue of the Proc. Roy. Geog. Soc.
it appears that the Lake Basso-narok is identical with Lake Samburu,
and that the river Omo of Borelli discharges into it. MM. Teleki
and Hoenel declare that it has no outlet. As the Samburu is 1,970
feet above the sea, while the Victoria Nyanza is 3,800, this lake must
form a distinct basin.
An article upon nilometers in the Proc. Roy. Geog. Soc. for Jan-
uary, by Col. Ardagh, contains many interesting facts respecting those
methods of measuring the rise of the Nile. It seems that the esti-
mates now given by the Sheikh in charge are utterly unreliable.
MM. Delcommune and Haneuse have performed a voyage of 503
miles on the Lomanie, and have arrived within three days’ march of
Nyangwe. They have proved that this stream is the one traversed by
Wissmann and Pogge after leaving Nyangwe. The river is 250 metres
wide, and 12 to 18 deep, and affords the most direct route from
Stanley Falls to Lake Tanganyika.
According to Prof. Virchow, positive data have been obtained to
prove the existence of an Egyptian stone age; but there is a yawning
gap between this evidence and the time of Menes. Skulls of the
older dynasties agree with statues of the temple-building kings to prove
that in cld times the type of the Egyptian skull was brachycephalic.
But the modern fellaheen are long-headed. Prof. Virchow believes in
the distinctness of both Egyptians and Nubians from the negro. The
latter never changes color, while in the former color deepens by ex-
posure to sun, and vice versa. This is why the Egyptians painted the
men red, and the women light yellow.
Baron v. Steinacker does not give a very roseate picture of the
German Protectorate in Southwest Africa in his recent article in the
Mitteilungen. There seems to be no available harbor along the coast save
Walfish Bay, which is English ; the coast is without water, the middle dis-
tricts have few spots favorable for agriculture, and it is only in the north
and northeast that the agriculturist can have scope. The southern parts
of the Kubango and Chobe districts are impassable swamps in the rainy
season. The Hereros and the Hottentots are at constant strife. The
report is accompanied by a map, embodying the Baron’s surveys, as
well as previous ones.
M. Camille Douls has been assassinated by his guides, between the |
Oases of Alouef and Akabli, 900 kilometres south of Oran; but
whether from fanaticism or cupidity is not known. As on his previous
journey, he was in the disguise of a Mussulman.
1890.] Geography and Travel. 65
M. Foa and two other Frenchmen have ascended the Whene, or
Ouené, which forms the boundary between Dahomey and Porto Novo.
M. Crampel made in 1888 an important journey of discovery into
the country northwest of the Ogowé, reaching the Upper Ivindo, its
largest tributary, and penetrating to the boundary between the French
and the German possessions. The natives of this part are known as
the Pahuins. A stream called N’Tem, flowing westward, was discov-
ered, and M. Crampel believes it identical with the upper course of
the Campo.
Asia and Oceanica.—Sir Wm. Macgregor, Administrator of
British New Guinea, has returned to Port Moresby, after the ascent of a
crest of the Owen Stanley range named Mt. Victoria, 13,121 feet above
sea-level. A newly discovered mountain north of this range he has
named the Albert Edward, and estimates its highest peak at 12,500 ft.
The country along the range of mountains ending in East Cape is fully
inhabited, and full of cocoa-nut trees. The island of Tubutubu, in
the Engineer group, is very populous, and the people are great traders.
Between Milne Bay and Mullen’s Harbor, on the main land, there is a
range of hills some 800 feet high, basalt on the Milne Bay side, coral
limestone on the other face. From Mullen’s Harbor a canoe trip was
undertaken for the purpose of visiting the fiérce and hostile Werewere,
and impressing on them the policy of keeping on good terms with the
Government.
Dr. H. Zéller, accompanied by three officers, has ascended the
Finisterra range in New Guinea to a height of 9,000 feet, and reports
that Mount Gladstone still rose rooo feet higher. A new range between
the Finisterre and the Bismarck ranges was found, and named the
Kratke. Its apparent height was 10,000 feet. About 140 miles of
country were surveyed.
The conclusion of Dr. A. Meyer, that no water-way exists between
Macluer Inlet and Galvink Bay (New Guinea), has received confirma-
tion from Dutch officials who have investigated the matter, and from
Lieut. Ellis, who explored the coast from May to November, 1887.
M. Eugene Markow, M. Popoff and seven others have recently as-
cended Mount Ararat. The limit of eternal sun was crossed at 13,500
feet, but at 14,000 a lady-bug was found, and some flowers were gathered
at15,500. The travelers erected a cairn at the summit, which will be
visible at the base, and may thus serve to dissipate the superstition of
the natives, who will not believe that any one has ascended the holy
mountain.
Am. Nat.—January.—5.
66 The American Naturalist. [January,
Mr. S. E. Peal (Proc. Roy. Geog. Soc. Feb. ’89.) has an interesting
article upon the origin and orthography of river names in Indo
China. It seems that the great eastern tributary of the Upper Irawadi
is spelled in no less than thirteen different ways, and that the Salwin
has thirteen other designations beside that here given.
M. Alexandron has determined the height of the Khan Tengri, in
the Thian Shan, at 23,950 feet.
= Baron Sternberg and a party recently attempted the ascent of El-
bruz, but only succeeded in reaching the saddle or depression between
the two main peaks. Though they spent sixteen hours at a height of
17,840 feet, they felt no symptoms of mountain sickness.
The well-known Prof. Schweinfurth was, from Nov. 1838 to March
1889, in Arabia Felix, with the object of making botanico-geographical
studies. Travel is safe in Yomen, and the natives are courteous to-
wards Europeans. The designations ‘‘stair-mountain’’ and “‘step-
mountain,” both found in old hieroglyphics, refer especially to the
cultivated terraced slopes of South Arabia, and possess no meaning if
applied to the Somali country. The ancient Egyptians dedicated
certain trees to particular deities. Thus the sycamore was sacred to
Athor, and the fruit of the persea (Mimusops schunperi ), was a gift to
the gods and to the departed. The persea has for several centuries
disappeared from Egypt, but the’sycamore still exists there. The persea .
grows wild in Nomen. :
M. E. Favec contributes to the August issue of the Proc. Roy. Zool.
Soc. an account of his explorations on the Upper Gascoyne and Ash-
burton rivers, in West Australia, The result of the trip was the dis-
covery of several large tributary rivers running into the Ashburton,
and on the Gascoyne there are indications of the existence of gold
reefs, :
Siberia has a railway from Samara to Oufa, opening up the riches of
the Ural.
The three first sheets of the map of Central Asia, published by the
Russian Government, and containing Lake Baikal, the basin of the
Amur, and the coast of the Japan sea, have appeared. When com-
plete this map will have thirty-two sheets, and will represent the entire
country between the Caspian and the east coast of Asia, on a scale of
I~1,630,000,
1890.] Geology and Palæontology. 67
GEOLOGY AND PALÆONTOLOGY.
Archean Characters of the Rocks of the Nucleal Ranges
of the Antilles.!—During a visit this year to the southeastern
part of the island of Cuba, the speaker had made some exam-
inations of the rocks which form the nucleus of the spurs of
the Sierra Maestra, and there is strong reason to believe of the
axial range of the entire island and of Jamaica, Santo Domingo,
Puerto Rico, and the Windward Islands as well. From the field
observations there made, and an examination of the specimens under
the microscope, it seems highly probable that these rocks, instead of
being igneous extrusions of the Tertiary period and later, are in reality
of much earlier date, and may not be entirely volcanic.
The considerations which support this view are—
1. Microscopic analysis shows immense alteration to have taken
place, and consequently a very long period to have elapsed.
2. The complexity of the congeries of rocks forbids the hypothesis
of their having been derived from one mass. Where this congeries,
therefore, is unconformably adjacent to the Tertiary, there can be no
reasonable doubt that the crystalline rocks are the elder. This point
of view was suggested by Mr. Teall, who would consider the argument
valid also for the contact with the Cretaceous, and perhaps older series.
It is difficult to see why it should not hold equally good for the contact
between these crystalline and the Paleozoic rocks as made out by De
Castro near Cienfuegos, etc.
3- The characters of the several associated rocks are those which
one finds united in very many Archean regions throughout the world.
4. The products of alteration of these rocks are similar to those
which one finds in the districts just alluded to.
5. The chemical peculiarities of the iron ores found in contact with
these rocks are similar to those which one finds in the ores of the
Archean regions, both in the low percentage of phosphorous and in
the pyrite and (more sparingly) chalco-pyrite disseminated through
the ore, and in other respects.
6. If this nucleal mass had been forced up from the earth’s interior
in a state of igneous fusion there would not be now (as there are)
abundant traces of stratification and structure, implying an original
sedimentation.
1 Read by Dr. Persifor Frazer at the Bath Meeting of the British Association, 1888.
68 The American Naturalist. [January,
. If this mass had resulted from volcanic outflow there must have
been contact phenomena, and changes induced on the surfaces of the
rocks with which it was brought in contact. No such contact alter-
ation has been observed between these rocks and those of either the
Paleozoic, Mesozoic, or Czenozoic groups which in different localities
meet them.
8. The direction of the range, considered as a whole, lends support
to the hypothesis that it is a fork of the Andes which, diverging from
the main axis in Guatemala, traverses the peninsula of Yucatan, and A
in a symmetrical curve sweeps through the highlands of Cuba and
Jamaica, Hayti, Puerto Rico, the Windward Islands and the northeast
coast of Venezuela. This rim of high land once enclosed the Carib-
bean as another Mediterranean Sea,
g. The shapes of the hills of this range, produced by weathering,
are not those usually visible in regions of volcanic, but rather of meta-
morphic rocks.
The rocks which furnished the basis for the above conclusions are
all, or nearly all, alteration products. In some cases they appeared
to be the results of a series of metamorphoses, some of their constit-
uents seeming to pass through cycles of change, ending in the :
mineral with which the alteration began after a number of intermediate
stages. The rocks are diabases or diorites, with epidote, porphy-
ritic dolerites, which resemble and have been taken for syenites;
garnet rock; actinolite ; felsite and orthofelsite porphyry, like that 4
of the South Mountain of southeastern Pennsylvania, of St. Davids |
Head in Wales, and elsewhere. To these are added pyrite, and iron — x
ores and crystalline limestone. Copper and manganese ores are not
rare, but their relations to the rocks under consideration have not been
made out.
Note.—A number of the first petrologists of Europe who have ex-
amined the slides are disposed to consider the specimens of not —
later than Paleozoic age, while none are willing to deny that they
may be earlier.
1890.] Mineralogy and Petrography. 69
MINERALOGY AND PETROGRAPHY.'
Petrographical News.—A most interesting rock is described by
Osann? as forming the body of the hill known as Hoyazo, in the
Spanish Province Almeria. The rock is an andesite consisting of a
ground-mass of colorless glass containing small crystals of cordierite,
flakes of biotite, lath-shaped microlites of plagioclase, and of an
orthorhombic pyroxene, in which are porphyritic crystals of labradorite,
a large quantity of biotite, columnar crystals of bronzite, hornblende,
augite, and cordierite. The last-named mineral occurs in the form of
irregular grains associated with quartz, and also in well-developed
crystals, with a pleochroism: 4 = yellowish-white ; B= dark violet ;
C= light violet. In therock are inclusions of quartz, of aggregates
of quartz and cordierite, and of a biotite gneiss rich in cordierite and
garnet. A portion of the cordierite, separated from the rock, was
analyzed with this result :
SiO. ALO,- F60; FeO o MnO -M Sp. Gr,
48.58 32.44 af 037 tr 6.03 2.625—2.628
The mineral is usually fresh, but contains numerous inclusions of silli-
manite, whose composition is: AlO, = 63.52 %, SiO, = 35-43 f-
The granular cordierite is supposed to represent the remains of foreign
inclusions in which the mineral was an original constituent. crys-
tallized variety is thought to have arisen from the solution of a portion
of the inclusions and a subsequent re-separation of cordierite, as well-
developed crystals. The author regards the same explanation as ap-
plicable to all the cases in which cordierite has been found in volcanic
rocks, 7.¢., it is a secondary mineral produced by the solution of for-
eign inclusions in the magma of the eruptive. Lacroix ê intends to
make a complete study of pyroxene gneiss, and of rocks containing
scapolite. He has published the first results of his work in a very
excellent paper which is occupied with descriptions of the rocks of
these two classes, together with the rocks associated with them as they
are found in Brittany and in other parts of France, in Saxony, Austria,
Spain, Algeria, Norway, Sweden, New York, Canada, Ceylon, per
and a few other places. As is to besexpected, Lacroix finds m
interesting facts connected with the structure, composition and peed
1 Edited by Dr. W. s. Bayley, Colby University, Waterville, Me.
2 Zeits. d. deutsch. geol. Gesells., XL., 1888, p. 694.
3 Bull. Soc. Franc. d. Min., XILI., 1889. 0. 83.
70 The American Naturalist. [January,
of these two little-known rock groups. He has discovered that the
scapolite rocks are sometimes the result of contact phenomena in
marbles. Sometimes they are the result of the alteration of gabbros,
and sometimes they are original. In every case it is found that there `
is a tendency of the rock to possess as constituents one or more rare
rock-forming minerals. As the writer has examined all these very
carefully, his paper is a mine of wealth to the petrographer who has
to deal with rare minerals. Among the most interesting observations
described may be mentioned the existence of dumortierite and cordier-
ite in a gneiss from Bamle, Norway; fuchsite in a mica-schist from
Salem, India; and the new mineral fouquéite in a gneiss from the
same vicinity. Original epidote and parallel growths of this mineral
with allanite in a pyroxene gneiss from Morbihan, France, and in a
scapolite gneiss from Odegarden, Norway, are described, as are also the
regular arrangement of rutile needles in phlogopite and garnet and
micropegmatitic intergrowths of pyroxene and quartz (page 297),PyTOX-
ene and oligoclase (pp. 316-318), garnet and quartz (p. 317); and
amphibole and oligoclase (p. 319). The varieties of feldspar known
as sun-stone and esmarkite are referred to, the properties of the min-
erals of the scapolite group are discussed, and the occurrence of
secondary and original wollastonite and wernerite is mentioned.
Contact rims consisting of hypersthene and amphibole, and tremo-
lite and amphibole, are pictured around olivine in olivine-gabbros,
and a rim consisting of biotite and amphibole is figured as seen aroun
ilmenite. In addition to the observations made by Lacroix, there are
incorporated in the paper descriptions of the facts discovered by earlier
workers in the domain of these rocks. It therefore becomes a valuable
compendium of our knowledge of scapolite rocks, so far as known.
In connection with his description of the New York rock, Lacroix
gives an interesting account of the properties of the minerals found in
the neighborhood of Pierrepont.——Mr. J. P. Iddings 4 has just pub-
lished one of the most interesting papers that has yet appeared on the
subject of lithophyse. The article opens with a description of the
macroscopic structure of the great mass of obsidian known as Obsidian
Cliff, in the ¥ellowstone National Park. The most striking feature of
the southern portion of the mass is its perfect columnar structure, wi
the columns all perpendiculag to the surface over which the rock
flowed. A petrographical description of the rock follows, and it 15
in this portion of his paper that the author shows well his ability to
treat a complicated subject. Spherulites and lithophyse are minutely
* Seventh Ann. Rep. Direct: U. S. Geol. Survey, p, 255
ee
4 Tee Ses RL SES ok OY pe ae ns eee
1890.] Mineralogy and Petrography. 71
described, and very fine pictures of the structures are given. Without
being able to enter into a full discussion of the points so clearly
brought out by Mr. Iddings, it is interesting to note that he regards
the lithophysz as having been produced, after the partial solidification
of the rock in which they occur, by the expansion of the vapors im-
prisoned within the rock-mass before its eruption. The formation of
the minerals coating the walls of the cavities was caused by the action
of this water upon the materials of the rock. The expansion of the
vapors was due to the diminution of the pressure under which they
were confined in consequence of the upward bending of the rock
layers above the places now occupied by the lithophyse. These con-
clusions are in direct opposition to those of Szabo, Roth, Zirkel, and
Cole,5 who regard lithophyse as resulting from the alteration of
spherulites. A nephelinite composed of a granular aggregate of
nepheline cementing porphyritic crystals of olivine, shreds of biotite,
microlites of augite and magnetite, is announced by Levy and Callot *
as existing in a boss near Rougiers in Var, France.
New Minerals.— 7¢phrowillemite.-—Dr. Koenig’? communicates
the discovery of a brownish-gray, resinous, infusible substance at the
Trotter Mine, Franklin, N. J. Only a portion of a single mineral
was obtained, which yielded on analysis :
SiO, = 27.75, ZnO = 60.61, MnO = 10.04, Fe,O, = 1.80, CaO = tr.
It is a manganese willemite with the formula (ZnMnFe), SiO,. De-
Saulesite.—Associated with the above-described mineral, and also with
sphalerite, chloanthite, fluorite, apatite and nicolite, beneath a Stratum of
yellow garnet, at a depth of 340 feet from the surface, is a greenish
substance encrusting fluorite and filling cavities in it. In the closed
tube it yields water and turns brown. It is infusible before the blow-
pipe, but at this high temperature it regains its original color. Its
composition is:
SiO, NiO ZnO FeO CaO TE os H,O at 100° H,O at 600°
3ï. 62 38.22 4.00 2.03 .70 9-44 7.14
corresponding to NiZnFe (siO,) if = ie It is therefore a nickel-
iferous garnierite, Yitrialite—From the gadolinite locality in Llano
County, Texas, five miles south of Bluffton, Messrs. Hidden and
Mackintosh ê have discovered a very large number of new and fare
5 AMER. NATURALIST, Jan., 1887, p- 70.
6 Comptes Rendus, 1889, p. 1124.
1 Proc. Acad. Nat. Sciences, Phila., Pt. II, 1889, p. 184.
8 Amer. Jour. Sci., Dec. 1889, p. 474.
72 The American Naturatst. [January,
yttria and thoria minerals associated with less rare compounds in the
quartz veins cutting granite. Among the bodies new to mineral-
ogy was found a yellowish substance in large masses with an olive-
green color on a fresh fracture. Its specific gravity is 4.575, and its
hardness 5-5.5. It is soluble in hydrochloric acid, decrepitates when
heated, and breaks into an infusible and insoluble powder. Its com-
position is:
SiO, PbO ThO, MnO FeO CaO ALO, Ce,O, Y,O, (LaDi),O,
$0.47 564 1200 77 290 00 $5 1.50 o 2.94
UO, Ign.
:83. -79-
—— Thorogummite usually occurs in small pieces intimately associated
with fergusonite and cyrtolite. It has a dull yellowish-brown color, a
hardness of 4~4.5, and Sp. Gr. of 4.485. Occasionally groups of
crystals with a ziron-like habit have been found. The mineral be-
comes of a dull greenish hue after ignition, and is soluble in nitric
acid. Composition:
310, UO; TDO ALO, a (Ce¥),0, PbO CaO H,O P,O, Ign
13: 085 22.43 41.44 965 Og: SEW gry. 88 1. 19 1723
corresponding to UO, ns (OH),,, or gummite in which the water
has been replaced by thorite. Metagadolinite is a grayish brown amor-
phus alteration product of gadolinite from the above mentioned
locality. It has a red streak, a hardness of 3, and a specific weight
of 3.494. Mr. Goldsmith?’ has made an SORS analysis of it,
` and regards it as a new mineral.” His result is
S10, Yai?) 40.2) Fe,0, CaO MgO BHO
18.145 21.854 0,062 26.0260 3.642 2:14 Q. 761
—— Daviesite.—Associated with other decomposition products of lead
ores at Minas Beatriz, Sierra Gordo, Chili, Mr. Fletcher ™ discovered
tiny, colorless, prismatic crystals of an orthorhombic mineral, with an
axial ratio 1.2594: 1 : .6018, and the plane of its optical axes parallel
to 2» Peo. From the few chemical tests made upon the small amount
of material at his command, Fletcher supposes the mineral to be an
oxychloride of lead.——Dudgeonite * was found at the Pibble Mine,
near Creetown, Scotland, in little cavities occurring in mickeline. It is
a grayish-white earthy substance, with a slightly resinous lustre. Its
9 Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci, Phila, Pt. IL., 1889, p. 164.
Cf F. A. Genth. Amer. Jour. Sci., Sept. 1889., pp. 198-200.
U Miner. Mag., VIII., May, 1889, p. 171.
13 Heddle: Miner. Mag., May, 1889, p. 200.
1890.] Mineralogy and Petrography. 73
hardness is 3-3.5. In composition it corresponds to annadergite, with
one-third of the nickel replaced by calcium (24NiO, % CaO), As,O,+
8H,O. [NiO=25.01, CoO=.76, CaO=p9. 32, As,O.—=39.33, H,O—
25.01 |.—Hydroplumbite and Plumbonacrite.—The former mineral is in
very small scaly crystals, with a pearly lustre, forming thin flakes of a pure
white color, covering all the lead minerals of aspecimen of associated
lead ores, that probably came from Leadhills, Scotland. The amount of
the new mineral obtained was too small for analysis; but from the
synthesis of a similar substance, Heddle ™ infers that its composition is
3PbOH,O. The second mineral (from Wanlockhead) resembles
hydroplumbite in appearance, but yields upon analysis a result corres-
ponding to the formula PbCO,+ 3 PbO H,O [PbO=92.85, CO,==4.76,
H,O=2.01, residue=. 78]. Fiinkite is described by Hamberg"™ from
Piba, Sweden. It occurs in greenish-brown tabular orthorhombic
crystals, with a hardness of 4.5, and Sp. Gr =3.87. Its composition
is:
As,O, ShO, mods Fe,O, geo’ CaO MgO H,O
29.1 2-5 LS 35-38 +4 1.7 9-9
——Fouguéite—In his excellent paper on scapolite rocks, Lacroix ®
describes a dimorphous form of zoisite occurring as a constituent in
an anorthite gneiss from the District of Salem, Madras, India. The
new mineral is found in corroded and rounded monoclinic crystals,
elongated in the direction of their ¢ axes, and polysynthetically
twined with the orthopinacoid as the composition face of the various
lamellez. They possess a well-marked cleavage parallel to the face as-
sumed as the basal plane, which makes an angle of 108° with « Pæ.
The plane of their optical axes is oP, and the optical angle 2\/ is
about 90°, with å as the positive acute bisectrix. The pleochroism is
weak in yellow tints. The mineral is infusible before the blowpipe,
and has a specific gravity of 3.24-3.31. It occurs in two varieties,
the compositions of which are as follows :
SiO, Al,O, FeO CaO: Eos.
Colorless: 36.6 32:5 Io >. 3490 2.7
Yellow: ee 31-9 4.4 23.5 2.7
Pleonektite occurs pleite in the gangue of the manganese
mine, Sjégrufvan, OM ee Parish, Örebro, Sweden. It is a light
gray mineral,'® with a hardness of 4, and a metallic fatty lustre. It is
13 Ib., p. 201
14 Geol. För. Förh., XI., 1889, p. 212.
15 Bull. Soc. Franç de Min., 1889, p. 327.
16 Ingelström : Neues Jahrb. f. Min., etc., 1889, IL., p. 40.
74 The American Naturalist. [January,
transparent in thin splinters. Before the blowpipe it decrepitates, but
does not fuse. On charcoal it gives the reactions for lead, antimony,
arsenic, traces of manganese and water. It is probably a lead
antimony arseniate resembling hedyphane. Anthocroite.—When the
ore from the Jakobsberg braunite mine is treated with hydrochloric
acid, there is left as a residue a violet’ sand composed of little grains of
a mineral that occurs scattered throughout the ore as well as through-
out all the minerals associated with the ore, and in veins cutting the
surrounding limestone. The largest masses of the mineral are in a
Magnese vesuvianite, and from this it can be obtained in a pure form.
Lumps of the new mineral” consist of small transparent grains of a
light amethyst color, and a hardness of 5-6. It is biaxial, with an
optical angle (in air) of about 100°. Its analysis shows it to be a bi-
silicate with the composition :
SiO, MnO CaO MgO Al 10, Fe,0, K,O.Na,O
51.6 3-4 23.3 13:5 6.8
Michel-lévyite is the monoclinic form of one sulphate, of which
barite is the orthorhombic form. It was discovered by Lacroix ® in
the crystallized limestone of Templeton, Canada. It is a flaky, white
substance, with three cleavages. These are assumed as the three pina-
coids, giving 77°~78° as the value of 2. The plane of the optical
axes is perpendicular to œ Pæ, and the value of the optical angle is
nearly 90° The principal bisectrix probably coincides with the axis
6. Specific gravity—=4. 39. Messelite is found in aggregates of
colorless or brown tabular crystals in a clay slate at Messel, a station
on the railroad between Darmstadt and Aschaffenberg, Hessen. The
crystals ® are monoclinic, with an extinction of 20° on the clinopina-
coid. Their average percentage composition corresponds to the
formula (Ca Fe Mg), (PO,),+214H,O. Wiluite is the name given by
Prendel™ to a variety of vesuvianite from Wilui, Russia. Its com-
position is:
SiO, TiO, ALO, CaO MgO Fe Q .FeQ MnO oo Loss
38.39 1.09 13.07 35.92 5.83 4.25 we 37 -90
Crystals cut parallel to a prismatic face show the ey structure
in which the two constituent substances have different refractive in-
dices. In sections parallel to the base the inner substances show a bi- `
n Tb., p. 36.
18 Comptes Rendus, CVIII., 1889, p. 1126.
19 Muthman: Zeits. f. Kryst., XVIL., 1889, p. 93.
20 Ib., p. 94.
1890.] Mineralogy and Petrography. 75
axial interference figure with an optical angle of 3°—4°, while in the
exterior zone the axial angle is 30°-35°. In both substances the axial
figure is decreased by heating. Their hardness is above .7, and their
specific gravity, 3.331. Their conductivity for heat is greatest in the
direction of the ¢ axis.—— Three new cufro-descloizites are described
and analyzed by Hillebrand.*! The first occurs massive in the May-
flower Mine, Beaverhead county, Montana, in lumps of a dull yellow to
pale orange color. The second is found as thick botryoidal incrusta-
tions in quartz, with a dull green color on the surface, and a brown
color on a fresh fracture. It is found at the Lucky Cuss Mine, Tomb-
stone, Arizona. The third came from the Commercial Mine, George-
town, New Mexico, where it also is found as an incrustation on guar#s,
It varies in color from yellow through all shades of orange red to
` deep reddish-brown. The incrustations are distinctly crystalline, be-
ing made up of globular masses composed of little flat crystals
crowded close together. At other times the incrustation is acicular in
shape, when it appears to have formed on bunches of radiating
mite needles. The composition of this variety is:
PbO CuO FeO ZnO V,O, As,O, EO, H,O Cl SiO, CaO sA
§6.0% 1.05 .07 17.73 20.44 .94 +26 2.45 -04:1.0r .04
BOTANY.
Uredinial Parasites.—From a practical standpoint as well as
from a biological, uredinial parasites are exceedingly interesting. A
specimen, or specimens rather, found in Dawes County, Nebraska, this
summer (July 20), deserve, I think, special mention. An A®cidium
on Lygodesmia juncea Don. (Æcidium compositarum Mart. var. lygo-
desmize Webber), was found very commonly. It was very destructive,
frequently distorting whole plants, and, by partially stopping the
growth above, giving them a somewhat depressed much branched ap-
pearance.
The avenger, however, was close at hand, entirely too close for the
good of the 4icidium. Not in the form of man, with his multifarious
external poison applications, but simply another little parasite on this
parasite, wreaking vengence. It was the little Zudserculina persicina
(Ditm.) Sacc., a plant closely allied to the smuts, found very rarely in
21 Amer. Jour. Sci., June, 1889, p. 434.
76 The American Naturalist. [January,.
America. It was very destructive to the Æcidium, its smooth violet-
colored spores completely filling up fully half the pseudoperidia and
injuring many more, destroying and taking the place of the zecidios-
pores. It has been reported before from but one place in America, so
far as I can learn,—from Oregon,—unless we consider, as Farlow has
hinted (Botanical Gazette, 1885, page 245), that Synchytrium jonesii
Pk. (Tuberculina jonesii Pk. Sacc.) is identical with it.
On the same specimens of Æcidium, another but more common
parasite was also found,—Darluca filum (Biv.) Cast. This is not
usually very destructive. Cases are found, however, in which it is.
To Uromyces junci (Desm.) Tul. it is frequently very injurious.
Specimens of the uredo of Puccinia rubigo-vera on wheat collected at
Crete, Nebraska, in July, 1886, are much injured by it. Perhaps it is
a much more injurious species than we are wont to suppose. We have
nothing to fear from it, however, as we have from some of its hosts.
If it is a common wheat-rust parasite, we on the contrary can heartily
say, would that it were more common.—HERBERT F WEBBER, Zin-
coin, Nebraska.
The Lichens of the Guinea Islands.—The lichens of the three
islands of St. Thomas, Prince, arid Capra, lying in the Gulf of Guinea,
off the west coast of tropical Africa, have recently been treated by
Nylander, in a little work of 54 pages (Lichenes Insularum Guineen-
sium). A noticeable feature of the lichen flora of these islands is that
while on St. Thomas Island the Corticole predominate, on Prince the
Saxicole are much more common ; also quite a number Fo/iicole are
found on the former. This will give an idea of the nature of the land
in the islands. Another feature important to American lichenologists,
is that of the 129 species enumerated, about 40 are found in our own
country, or about one-third of the species are common to both places.
In this pamphlet Dr. Nylander seems to lay considerable stress On
chemical reactions, especially that of sodium on the ‘‘gelatinous hy-
menium,”’ as a means of determining species. The ‘‘ observations È
in the back part of the book contain considerable information regard-
ing new species from various localities, that of most interest to US
being observation six, containing descriptions of new species collected
by Dr. Eckfeldt and W. W. Calkins, etc., principally in Florida.—
Tuos. A. Witiiams, Lincoln, Nebraska.
The Flora of Central Nebraska (Continued).—In climbing
the bluffs we gathered specimens of Fragaria vesca L., and succeeded
in disposing of quite a number of its elongated conical berries. On
1890.] Botany. 77
climb up we ate berries also of Rudus strigosus Michx., Ribes aureum
Pursh., R. foridum L., and R. rotundifolium Michx. At the base of
the bluff the common Cystopteris fragilis Bernh., grew. Near the top,
in more open places, we discovered the western fern Woodsia oregana
Eaton. At the top and also over the sand hills in numerous places
the dwarf sand cherry Prunus pumila L. occurs very plentifully.
Along the bank of the river, just above the water’s edge, we found
rank growths of Asplenium filix-femina Bernh., and Aspidium
thelypteris (L.) Swartz. Nowhere else in Nebraska have I seen such
a luxuriant growth of ferns. I collected fronds of each fully two and
a half feet high. This is the only place the former species is known
to occur in Nebraska. About a mile further up the stream a low wet
patch of ground of about two acres in extent is a perfect mat of ferns
Onoclea sensibilis L., and Aspidium thelypteris (L.) Swartz.
The next morning we took a walk along the edge of the bluffs on
the south side to investigate the flora and the fauna of the ‘‘ blow-
outs.’’! Here we made some excellent finds. Right in the ‘‘ blow-
outs,” where almost nothing else grew, we found quite commonly
bunches of Redfieldia flexuosa Vasey (Torr. Bull., July, 1887). Such
a find pleased me, but think of finding also in the same place bunches
of Eragrostis tenuis (Ell.) Gray. The former has heretofore been re-
ported from Colorado and Canadian R., the latter from Texas
and Arizona. Both were also found in Nebraska this summer near
Valentine. Branches of Muhlenbergia pungens Thurb. were also com-
mon, and are found usually just at the edge of the ‘‘ blow-outs,”’ hang-
ing over. Astragalus pictus Gray, var. filifolius Gray (bird-egg, I call
it, from its beautifully mottled red or purple and white pods), also
frequents the ‘‘ blow-outs.’’ These with Lathyrus polymorphus Nutt.,
Psoralea lanceolata Pursh., Pentstemon ceruleus Nutt., and sparingly
Munroa squarrosa Porr., form at this place the principal and remark-
able flora of the Dismal River ‘‘ blow-outs.”’
On the hillsides, etc., patches of buffalo grass (Buchloé dactyloides
Engelm.) frequently occur, and in one place a few stems of Paspalum
setaceum Michx. were found. Yucca angustifolia Pursh. is scattered
here and there all through this region, and almost every plant has its
leaves more or less affected by Kel/ermannia yuccigena E. and E.
In the grass on a sandy hill another find of the trip was made,
Tylostoma angolense Welw. and Curr. This until last year was known
1 A “blow-out ” is a crater-like cavity in the side of a sand hill. Within it is a mass
of loose sand, bordered by grasses and other plants which grow upon its margin. It is
supposed to be formed by the action of the wind.
78 The American Naturalist. [January,
to occur only in one place, so far as I can learn in Angolia, Africa. In
the summer of 1887 Mr. Marsland, a student of the University of
Nebraska, collected three specimens in Manitou, Colorado, and
handed them to me for identification. Failing to determine the spec-
ies satisfactorily, the specimens weré referred to Mr. A. P. Morgan,
who pronounced them 7Zy/ostoma angolense. Besides this stalked puff-
l specimens of Bovista circumscissa Berk. and Curt., Secotium
warnet Peck, and Lycoperdon fragile Vitt., were found in the grass,
Descending into the valley on the road back I gathered specimens
of Clematis ligusticifolia-climbing over the underbrush. The leaves of
this also were contorted and frequently almost destroyed by 4cidium
clematidis D. C. In a pond two species of Chara were collected,
Chara coronata A, Br. and Chara—(undetermined).
Circea /utitiana, a common plant in eastern States, but not yet dis-
covered in Eastern Nebraska, and not given by Coulter in his Rocky
Mountain Botany, was noticed in a shaded nook. It has also been
collected during the summer near Valentine. Specimens were also
collected of Euphorbia petaloidea Engelm., Monarda citriodora Cerv.;
Froelichia ploridana Moquin., Lpomea leptophylla Torr., and Asclepias
verticillata L., var pumilla Gray.
On the Middle Loup River, in the same county, and representing
the same flora, we found in stagnant pools, Ricia fluitans L., Utricul-
aria minor L., Pediastrum angulatum (Ehrb.) Menegh. and Merismo-
pedia violacea (Breb.) Ktz., a little violet-colored plant that has not
n known before to occur in America. It is distinguished from
known American species by its smaller size and violet color. Speci-
mens of Triglochin maritimum L., and Commelyna virginica L., were
found in low places, but they are ni rare—H, J. WEBBER, Botani-
cal Laboratory, University of Nebraska.
Bailey’s Studies of Carex.—The initial number of the Memoirs
of the Torrey Botanical Club is devoted to an article by Professor L.
H. Bailey, entitled, “ Studies of the Types of Various Species of the
Genus Carex.’ The purpose of the paper is well stated in the open-
ing paragraph, which may well be reproduced here:
“ An attempt has been made during the past year to see all the ex-
isting types of North American species of Carex. These types are
widely scattered, largely in the Old World, and the whereabouts of
many of them have been entirely unknown. Many of them had
never been seen by a student of the genus since their publication, and
there was reason to believe that some species which had been seen by
1890.] Botany. 79
our earlier botanists have not been properly comprehended in the
light of our fuller knowledge. The examination has proved that many
of our catalogued species are fictitious, and that considerable changes
in nomenclature must be made. However such radical changes are
to be regretted, they are nevertheless unavoidable if priority of publi-
cation is to be considered ; and there is the surety that in the future
the changes must be very few. The very oldest types have been seen
so far as they are known to exist, and almost every name which has
been applied to North American species is accounted for and under-
stood. It is, therefore, evident that any further changes in the names
of our species must be almost entirely such as rest upon judgments of
the systematic merits of accepted species and varieties.’’
Professor Bailey visited or had access to twenty-six important col-
lections of carexes, twenty-one of which are in European herbaria. In
his paper he upholds the use of the oldest published name or combi-
nation in every instance. He has given varietal names ‘‘ only to those
forms which assume a considerable degree of permanence under various
conditions, and the combining of which would lead to confusion in
the knowledge of the species.” He has no sympathy ‘“ with that
ultra refinement of classification which gives names to specimens rather
than to species and their larger variations. Such refinements serve no
useful purpose, and do not merit the name of science.
Eighty-four species are critically noticed in the paper, and the
synonymy carefully determined. The notes under each species are of
the greatest value to the student of this difficult genus, and will have
to be carefully studied by every one who wishes to know what are the
latest views as to the relationship of the many puzzling species.—
CHARLES E. BESSEY.
ZOOLOGY.
The Zoological Position of Palawan.—Mr. A. H. Everett,
in a paper before the Zodlogical Society of London, contends that
Palawan and the other islands intervening between Borneo and Min-
doro form an integral part of the Bornean group, and do not belong to
the Philippine group with which they are usually associated. His
grounds are that they are connected with Borneo by a shallow sub-
merged bank, and are separated from the Philippines by water over
500 feet in depth; the fauna also shows a marked preponderance of
80 The American Naturalist. [January,
Bornean over Philippine forms, and farther, that those which must be
regarded as belonging to the latter group are more extensively modi-
fied than are those from Bornean sources.
Bahaman Sea Anemones.—lIn a beautifully illustrated paper
(Jour. Morphol. U1.), Dr. J. P. McMurrich describes the sea anemones
of the Bahamas, using as a basis material which he collected while a
student at the Johns Hopkins summer laboratory. Fourteen species
in all were found, of which Bunodes teniatus and Auloctinia stelloides
are regarded as new. The descriptions of the species contain many
comments upon the synonymy and numerous details of structure im-
possible to present in abstract. Dr. McMurrich, from a study of these
forms, concludes that the Bahaman Actinarian fauna is much more
closely allied to that of the Indo-Pacific than it is to that of the rest of
the Atlantic, the similarity of many species to those of the Red Sea
being remarkable. The occurrence of Ledrunnea neglecta in shallow
water in the Bahamas is interesting, since the other members of the
sub-tribe to which it belongs occur in the deep seas off the coast of
Chili. Dr. McMurrich explains this by supposing (with Semper) that
uniformity of temperature is of more importance than the absolute
degree of heat and col
The Siphonophores.—Prof. Ernest Haeckel finds (Jena. Zettsch.
1888, and Vol. XXVIII. of the Zodlogy of the Challenger Expedition)
that the Siphonophores embrace two very distinct groups, which agree
only in being hydroid colonies, the individuals of which must be re-
garded as Craspedote medusze modified for special functious. These
two groups are called Siphonanthe and Disconanthe. In the first are
included the great majority of the species, the Disconanthe including
only Porpita telella, etc. In the Siphonanthe the colony is to be re-
garded as a Craspedote medusa, from the proboscis of which have
budded numerous other medusz which have become specialised for
their different functions. In the Disconanthe we have a Craspedote
medusa, with its central proboscis and its marginal tentacles. Instead,
however, of secondary individuals budding from the proboscis, these
arise from secondary probosces which bud later from the under side of ©
the disc. This view, it will be seen, is intermediate between the two
theories of the morphology of the Siphonophores. According to the
first, each Siphonophore is to be regarded as a single medusa, the
various organs—swimming bells, gonads, tentacles, etc.—being dislo-
cated parts of this medusa duplicated by budding. The other view
is that the Siphonophore is a medusoid colony, each of the appendages
to be regarded as an (often modified) hydroid or medusa.
1890.] Zoblogy. 81
The Mesenteries in the Antipatharia.—At a recent meeting
of the Royal Society of Edinburgh, Mr. George Brook described the
structure of the radial septa or mesenteries in the Antipatheria. The
usual directive pair of septa were found, but besides these traces of
bilaterality were not seen, and their positions were not explicable on
the usually received explanations, but on applying the law developed
by Lacaze-Duthiers for the Hexactiniz to the septa of the antipatha-
rian polyps, and regarding the order of the formation in the one as
comparable to their length in the other, order was at once introduced.
The Eyes of Limulus.—Mr. S. Watase has made a careful study
of the structure and development of the lateral and central eyes of
Limulus, a preliminary account of which appears in the Johns Hopkins
Circulars, No. 70. The compound lateral eyes have a faceted cornea,
each facet corresponding to a conical lens projecting from the inner
surface. Surrounding each lens is an ommatidial pit consisting of a
single layer of ectodermal cells. In the centre is an axial process of
a gigantic ganglion cell, while around it are arranged the pigmented
ommatidial cells, each of which secretes on its inner (central) surface
a finely striated ‘‘ rod.’ Each of these retinular cells is in connection
with nerve fibres, while around it are elongate pigment cells developed
from the ectoderm. Mr. Watase does not find the intrusive mesodermal
pigment described by Messrs. Lancaster and Bowne. In connection
with the development of the eyes there is a formation of a V-shaped
groove, which later flattens out, forming a partial optic invagination.
The optic nerves arise as fibres from the ectoderm cells of the outer
wall of the groove. The median eyes are also described, but without
diagrams it is not easy to follow the account either of structure or
development. Apparently the dorsal ectoderm gives rise to the
“ vitreous body ’’ or corneal hypodermis, while the retina is produced
by an invagination of ectoderm from the central surface, which grows
forward and upward to connect with the other elements. Mr. Watase
does not attempt to account for this strange condition.
Note on the Feeding Habits ot Cermatia forceps Raf.—
From an observant public school teacher, Miss Kate Rondeau, of Gol-
conda, Illinois, I have received an item of information concerning the
feeding habits of Cermata forceps, new to me and to the literature of
the species, so far as I am acquainted with it.
This myriapod was quite abundant during one summer in Miss
ndeau’s residence (upon one of the islands of the Ohio River),
nat eg in the pitchen and dining room. It seemed to be strictly
a ee :
82 The American Naturalist. [January,
nocturnal in its habits, coming out, however, freely by night in the
lighted rooms. ‘‘I have seen a dozen or more,” she says, ‘‘ at one
time, remaining motionless for perhaps half an hour, when suddenly
one, with a quick movement of one of its many legs, would catch an
unwary house-fly that approached too near. Sometimes this would be
eaten immediately, but sometimes held in the foot until two or three
more flies were caught. I have seen the Cermatia thus eating one fly
while holding two or three others.
“ Only the soft part of the body of the fly is eaten, the legs, wings,
and head dropping to the floor. In the morning the table and floor
were always specked with these remains, showing that the Cermatia
was a very successful fly-catcher.”’
I identified the form to which these remarks apply, by her minute
description and by her subsequent recognition of a figure.—S.
ForBEs,
The Scottish Fishing Board.—Among the various papers in
the report of this board, which in its functions corresponds with our
Commission of Fish and Fisheries, we notice that it is advised, in order
to restore the lobster fishery to its former condition, that the limit of
size of lobsters permitted to be sold be raised from 8 to g inches in
length, and it is also proposed to attempt artificial hatching of lobsters.
The paper is by Prof. Ewart and Mr. T. W. Fulton. Mr. Thomas Scott
catalogues 230 species of Crustacea as occurring in the Firth of Forth.
Red codfish has been causing trouble in Scotland. Here it was be-
lieved by Dr. Farlow to be caused by Clathrocystis rosea-persina, but,
Dr. Edington, of the Scottish Board, ascribes it to Bacillus rubescens,
also introduced with the salt.
Coluber obsoletus Say.—A fine specimen of Coluber obsoletus
Say was obtained on Snake Hill, near Newburgh, Orange county, New
York, during the summer of 1888.—Joun I. NORTHROP.
Hesperiphona vespertuca.—About noon, December 12, 1889,
I procured a specimen of this rare bird. It was feeding on the seeds
of a maple in front of the University buildings. The specimen is a
male, and in fine plumage. It was apparently alone, as no others have
been seen as yet. The only authority I find for its identification in
Ohio is Ohio Geological Report, Vol. IV., by J. M. Wheaton, p. 314
where he reports it was identified by Dr. Kirkland, March 24, 1860-
The bird differs in a few details from most of the descriptions. A
complete description will be given in next issue of Bulletin of Scien-
1890.] Zoblogy. 83
tific Laboratories. Dr. Wheaton states that the song of the evening
grosbeak is a miserable failure. In Vol. I. of the Bulletin will be
found a note on the song, and the complete osteology of the species,
by Prof. C. L. Herrick, with plates.—W. G. Ticut, Denison Univer-
sity, Granville, O.
Note on the Seventh Cervical Vertebra of the Cat.—
While preparing a skeleton of a young cat, I was interested to note
that the diapophyses of the seventh cervical vertebra were perforated
for the passage of the vertebral artery and vein. Flower (Osteology
of the Mammalia, p. 38) states that ‘‘the transverse process’’ (of the
Carnivora) ‘‘ has no inferior lamella, and its base is imperforate.’’
Wilder, however (Anatomical Technology, p. 172), says that in the
cat the last cervical vertebra is rarely perforated.—Joun I. NORTHROP.
Zoological News.—Protozoa.—J. Künstler (Comptes Renders,
1888) has found a protozoan parasite resembling Lophomonas blattarum
in the posterior part of the intestine of Limulus. In the same place
he describes other entozoic protozoa from various hexapods
Dr. Plate’s observations on the luminosity of Noctiluca (Ann. and
Mag. Nat. Hist., 1889) are interesting. When specimens were placed
on moist blotting-paper, and examined under a high power, he found
that the character of the light varied. At times it consisted of sharp
flashes followed by total darkness, or by a faint light for a minute or
two. Again, the surface might be faintly luminous while at the same
time small points sparkled brightly, or, lastly, the whole surface was
luminous on account of such sparkling points. The light is produced
by the outer layer of plasma, and is stimulated by irritation. Pure
oxygen passed over the specimens produced a dull light visible for sev-
eral minutes. In nitrogen no light is produced.
The most noticeable of Gruber’s new species of Protozoa (Bericht
Naturfor. Gesellschaft Freiburg, 1888) is a new Protomyxa, which
differs from Haeckel’s oft-quoted species, P. aurantiaca, in being
colorless. Staining with picrocarmine brought out the fact that nuclear
substance (chromatin) was actually preSent as small granules scattered
through the protoplasm. The bearings of this upon the validity of the
Monera is at once evident.
Crustacea.—Rev. A. M. Norman presents some notes on British
Amphipods in the Annals and Magazine of Natural History for June.
A new genus, Megaluropus, is described, and the synonymy of several
species of Gdiceride is straightened out. In August he continues
84 The American Natnralist (January,
with notes on Leucothoide, Pardaliscide, and Gammaride. The
American Gammarus ornatus is shown to be the same as G. locusta,
while there are notes on three other species which range to American
seas.
Arthropoda.—Mr. Arthur Dendy reports (Wature, Feb. 14, 1889)
the discovery of a new species of Peripatus in Victoria, Australia.
Albert D. Michael describes (Jour. Roy. Micros. Soc., Feb., 1889)
the anatomy of the mite Uropoda krameri. The paper is not one ad-
mitting of abstract. The general features of the species are Gamasid,
but as in its shape it approaches the Bropodide, so it does in its
structure.
Hexapoda.—According to the Jour. Roy. Micros. Soc. for Decem-
ber, Dr. D. Casagrande claims that in the silk-worm (in which he
traced the metamorphosis of the alimentary canal from the larval to the
adult stage) ‘‘ the epithelium of the cesophagus and of the hind gut
of the perfect insect is derived from the mid gut; in such a case the
cesophageal and hind gut epithelium in the adult insect cannot be re-
garded as ectodermic in origin, as they are in the larva, but must be
entodermic, arising as they do from the mid gut.” The writer has re-
cently shown (A. Nat., XXII., p. 471, 1888, and more fully in a paper
soon to be issued) that in Crangon the alimentary tract proper is
wholly of ectodermal origin. Now no one has yet published any com-
plete account of the development of the digestive tract in the Hexa-
pods, but there is much reason for suspecting that in this group a
similar condition of affairs exists. The observations of Dr. Casagrande
are strongly confirmatory of this view, which,if it be true, relieves us
from the necessity of replacing organs derived from one germ layer by
cells derived from another.—J. S. KINGSLEY.
Vertebrata.—T. H. Morgan concludes (J. H. U. Circ., No. 70)
that in Amblystoma punctatum part of the blastopore is converted into
the neurentric canal, and part persists as the anus, while in Rana hale-
cina the blastopore completely closes.
The South American bat (Noctilio leporinus) is stated to eat fish.
Specimens have recently been studied in which fish-scales were found
in the stomach.
Mr. P. L. Sclater sends to Mature, No. 1012, the substance of a
suggestion made by Mr. W. Rodier, of New South Wales, for the ex-
termination of rabbits, which has at least the elements of plausibility.
It is to catch as many of the rabbits as possible by means of traps,
1890.] Zoology. 85
ferrets, etc., and to destroy only the does taken, setting the males free.
‘¢ The results of this mode of operation are that the male rabbits, as
soon as they begin to predominate in numbers, persecute the females
with their attentions, and prevent them from breeding. They also kill
the young rabbits that happen to be born, and where they largely pre-
dominate in numbers, worry the remaining does to death.’’ Mr.
Rodier states that on his station an eight months’ trial has resulted in
clearing the country of the pests.
Fishes.—Jenkins and Evermann describe (Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus.,
1888) eighteen new species of fishes from Guaymas, on the Gulf of
California. Hermosilla is a new genus of the family Sparide, and
Pseuddoblennius of the family Blenniidz. Clevelandia is reduced to
synonymy as was done some time ago in this Journal.
Dr. R. W. Shufeldt (Jour. Morphology, II., pt. 2) has given some
details of the osteology of an unique specimen of the fish Grammico-
lepis brachiusculus Poey. ‘The account is too detailed for abstract, but
with Professor Poey, Dr. Shufeldt thinks the relationships of the Gram-
molepidz tend mostly in the direction of the Casangide.
Birds.—Mr. F. E. Beddard concludes (Proc. Zoél. Soc., London),
from a study of the muscular system of Polyboroidei, that this genus
is not even an aberrant type of Falconidz, and does not deserve even
sub-family r.
EMBRYOLOGY.
A Physiological Hypothesis of Heredity and Variation.
—The extravagant claims made by Prof. Weismann, the author of the
doctrine of the isolation of the germ-plasma, and of the doctrine of
heredity based upon it, as well as the strenuousness with which it is
insisted that there is no other way in which the facts of inheritance
may be codrdinated, requires that a re-examination be made of the
grounds upon which those claims are supposed to rest. This is all the
more necessary, in that this author and his followers repudiate the evi-
dence upon which the claim is made that acquired characters, taken
in the widest Lamarckian sense, can be transmitted. During a period
extending over fifteen years the present writer has devoted himself to
a study of the genesis of adaptations, and with the lapse of time the
conviction has grown only the clearer that these authors are laboring
86 The American Naturalist. [January.
under a delusion. The way in which they have placed themselves
upon record shows that they have not reckoned with the consequences
of their reckless speculations.
In the first place, the supposition of a germ-plasma distinct from
the plasma of the parent-body is a needless interjection into the
machinery of hypothesis of biological evolution. It does not make
the matter one whit clearer to suppose that the germ-plasma is neces-
sary, than to suppose that aX of the living plasma of any and every dis-
tinct species ts an idioplasm, or ts specific in so far as that species is con-
cerned. If we now suppose, as a consequence of the action of the
principle of physiological division of labor, first propounded by H.
Milne-Edwards, that aX the plasma, or the whole of the specific proto-
plasm or idioplasm of the organism, becomes physiologically differentiated
and incapable of undergoing embryonic development, except that of the
germ-cells or germinal plasma, as long ago urged by Professor Huxley,
we get the same result as that reached by Weismann without involving
ourselves in the consequences which beset his hypothesis, Zhis germ-
inal matter is the only functionless and idle plasma in the parent body,
capable of growing and consequently of multiplying its cellular units —
within the parental organism at the expense of the surplus metabolism
of the latter as a whole. Moreover, the germinal cells are alone
capable of detaching themselves, or being detached, from the parental
organism as products of over-nutrition, which have become useless to
the life of the parent, as assumed in my preliminary paper ‘‘On the
origin and meaning of sex.” This recognizes the apparent fact of
the sétting aside or isolation of the germ-plasma, but does not make
that fact the cause of the stability of species through the continuity of
processes of growth, and the assumed but not empirically demonstrated
isolation of such germ-plasma. My interpretation is in absolute
accord with the requirements of the principles of modern physiology. ,
while the hypothesis of Weismann and his followers is in conflict with —
those principles, and ultimately, as a necessary consequence, with the —
still more comprehensive principle of the conservation of energy-
Modern physiology, as well as the doctrine of the conservation of
energy, positively forbids us to interpose any barrier between the
plasma of the parent-body and that of the germ-cells, as is done by
the promulgators of the hypothesis of the continuity and isolation of
the germ-plasma. To do so robs us of the possibility of appealing to
the agency of the workings of metabolism as the efficient causes of the
modification of the germinal matter. Since metabolism, and all that
‘it implies, is the only agent to which, according to modern physiology»
*
1890.] Embryology. 87
we can appeal, without interjecting gemmules, plastidules, pangens or
some other accessory and needless agency into living organisms, as the
efficient agents in the transmission of hereditary traits, we are restrict-
ed in our choice to metabolism alone. In this way only is it possible
to get rid of a deus ex machina in the form of an idioplasm in the
sense first implied by Nageli, or of the gemmules of Darwin and
Brooks, the plastidules of Haeckel, the pangens of De Vries, or the
physiological units of H. Spencer.
The preceding paragraph contains, in essence, my own hypothesis
according to which all the facts of hereditary transmission and varia-
tion may be codrdinated without losing or rendering unavailable the
advantages which may be derived from the supposition that acquired
characters may be transmitted.
On my view metabolism itself becomes the means of transmitting
the changes in the adult organism, due to the complex interaction
between it and its surroundings to the idle, functionless and passive
germ-cells, because it is a demonstrable fact that these are the only
cells in a multicellular organism which have no work to perform which
is of direct benefit to the individual life of that organism, unless it
may be to take up the surplus nutriment not used up by the metabol-
ism of the parent-body in the secular exhibition of the sum total of
its physiological energies, in the struggle for existence.
On my view the idioplasmic or specific molecular character of the plasma
of the germ-cells, in common with that of the protoplasm of the whole body
(which latter always tends to repair injuries, or even, in lower forms,
replace lost parts), tends, in virtue of its acquired specific traits, to repeat
the organization of its parent type, in the course of its development, not
because it is something different from the protoplasm of the cells of the
rest of the body, but because it ts wholly unspecialized and without physi-
ological differentiation, as first urged by Prof. Huxley and subsequently
maintained by H. Spencer. Molecular impressions experienced in
the course of variations in the modes of manifestation of or disturb-
ances of the balance of the metabolism of the parent-body are sup-
` posed upon this view to be transmitted as molecular tendencies to the
idle or passive plasma of the germ-cells. Variations in the molecular
constitution and tendencies of the germinal matter are supposed to
thus arise at different times in the same parent, and that, consequently,
successive germs may be thus differently impressed. In this way also
the molecular tendencies of the plasma of the germ-cells of different
individuals may be also modified simultaneously or successively
through the effect of enforced changes in the metabolism of multitudes
88 The American Naturalist. [January,
of contemporaneons adult individuals of the same species, thus lead-
ing to a tendency toward concurrent or simultaneous variation of
offspring in the same or a similar direction.
It will be seen that this is the only hypothesis which renders the
possibility of concurrent or simultaneous variation within the limits of
a species either conceivable or intelligible. It also lends itself to an
intelligible comprehension of the phenomena of the correlation of the
growth of parts, and it is also the only view which holds out any
promise of coérdination with the highly ingenious and suggestive
hypotheses of Prof. Wilhelm Roux.!
It will be at once perceived that my hypothesis of the acquisition
of variations and their transmission is the simplest that has yet been
offered. It interjects nothing hypothetical into our conception of the
physical substratum of living organisms, except the necessarily un-
known and unknowable constitution of the molecular factors of meta-
bolism, already assumed by all scientific physiologists, all of whose
conceptions of living processes are based upon the theory of meta-
bolism, and thus brought into harmony with the all-inclusive doctrine
of the conservation of energy. Growth and development without
accompanying metabolism is simply unthinkable. All of the tend-
encies, capabilities and manifestations of growth in all living organ-
isms are coéxtensive with and the concomitants of metabolism. From
this conclusion there is no possible means of escape. To imagine the
existence in living bodies of a hypothetical entity for the sole and
express purpose of superintending and ordering the sequence and
modes of action of the processes of development is, to the mind of one
who is imbued with the true scientific spirit, no better than an appeal
to ‘‘vitality’’ to explain the sequence and nature of the phenomena
of life. Such methods in biological science ought to have received
their quietus from Huxley’s suggestive and witty comparison of the
attested by the notorious transmissibility of the tendency to obesity in
the human race, since illustrations will immediately occur to almost
every one of families in which the tendency is known to be hereditary.
Similarlv there is scarcely a possibility of doubt that the greatly in-
creased fertility of domesticated races of animals and plants is almost
exclusively due to a gradually increased power of appropriating nutri-
ment due to a change in the molecular habit or mode of metabolism
of the plasma of the body under better conditions of nourishment
* Der Kampf der Theile im Organismus. 8vo., pp. VII., 244, Leipzig, 1881.
1890.] Embryology. 89
which has been slowly augmented and fixed by inheritance.2? Even
certain species of fishes, when well fed and kept in confinement, not
only spawn several times during a season, instead of only once, as I
am informed by Dr. W. H. Wahl, but also when kept from hibernat-
ing, as he suggests, tend to vary in the most astounding manner. The
wonderful results of Dr. Wahl, attained in the comparatively short
period of six years, show what may be done in intensifying the mon-
strous variations of Japanese gold-fishes, through selection, confine-
ment in tanks and aquaria, with comparatively limited room tor
swimming, plenty of food, etc., all of which conditions tend to favor
growth and metabolism, and the expenditure of energy under such
wholly new and restricted conditions as to render it almost certain, as
he thinks, that these factors have something to do with the develop-
ment of the enormous and abnormally lengthened pectoral, ventral,
dorsal, double anal and caudal fins of his stock. Some of the races of
these fishes have obviously been affected in appearance by abundant
feeding, as is attested by their short, almost globular bodies, protuber-
ant abdomens, and greedy habits, as I have observed in watching
examples of this short-bodied race living in Dr. Wahl’s aquaria. In
these last instances we are brought face to face with modifications
occurring in fishes under domestication which are infinitely in excess,
morphologically speaking, of anything known amongst any other
domesticated animals. That the abundant feeding and exposure to a
uniform temperature during the whole year, and confinement in com-
paratively restricted quarters, has had something to do with the genesis
of these variations, through an influence thus extended upon the meta-
bolism affecting the growth of certain parts of the body, which have
tended to become hereditary, there can scarcely be any doubt.’
That such changed conditions would also favor variability to a high
degree we cannot doubt. That, moreover, the passive or idle plasma
3 The only possible explanation of the phenomenon of the after-effect of the first
the viviparo upon al] subsequen
turbance of the metabolic habit of the maternal organism by that offspring during the
3 Since the foregoing was written, I have been able, through the ee e
my friends, Mr. W. P. Seal and Dr. Wahl, who have supplied me with fresh material, to
very my mepecion —— ee of the highly modified races of Japanese
ll di P usual and unmodified type
found in in open rivers. From careful dissecti
a aaen has pgmn asked degeneration adenine
go The American Naturalist. [January,
of the germ-cells would be thus impressed by changes in the manner
of exhibition of the metabolism of the bodies of the parent fishes
there can scarcely be any question.
In fact, if it is borne in mind that the extremely unspecialized and
functionless condition of the germinal plasma is in itself favorable to
variation through its impressibility by imperceptible changes in external
conditions, we should almost cease to wonder at the variability of
multicellular animals, which, as is well known, is always intensified
under the influence of domestication.
It may not be generally known that abundant food and inappreciable
variations of the conditions of life exert a most astonishing influence
upon the size, form, rate of multiplication, and tendency toward con-
jugation in ciliated infusoria, The individuals differ in size by many
times the bulk of the smallest condition of the same species, and there
are equally great and unaccountable differences in form arising from
unknown causes, as I learn by keeping the same colonies under pro-
longed observation, and no less than two very distinct and highly
characteristic modes of fission may occur in the same species, whether
free or attached in habit. So great are these differences that I am
convinced that individuals of one and the same species have been
regarded in some instances as distinct species by different observers
who have not observed the same form under a great variety of con-
ditions. .
In an earlier essay,‘ giving synoptically the results of an extended
study of the subject of sex, I assumed that the egg, or odsperm, was in-
herently more capable of variation in its early stages of development
than during the later larval or adolescent period. This is what should
have been expected if my hypothesis of the nature of heredity and
the causes of variation is true, no less than upon the ground of the
known want of morphological specialization characterizing all the
germs of multicellular organisms. If we seek for facts in support of
this view, we have them in abundance in the extreme sensitiveness of
the ova of many metazoa to outward influences of the most trivial
character. I may cite in illustration the well-known experiments of l
Weber in producing monstrosities from the recently fertilized eggs of
the soc by simply shaking them somewhat roughly. To the same
t speaks the fact, well-known to fish-culturists, that the eggs of
Salmonidæ immediately after fertilization must be handled with ex-
treme care, some experienced persons declaring that it is even dan-
gerous to disturb them in any way for the first few days, lest the
* Origin and Meaning of Sex. AMER. NATURALIST, pp. 501-508, Vol. XXIII., 1889
1890.] Embryology. QI
greater part develop as double and variously deformed monsters.
Such monstrous and worthless broods of larval salmon, which were
doubtless the result of careless or ignorant treatment of the ova, I have
myself seen. The same or similar facts are known to intelligent
breeders of domesticated birds and fowls. And to this evidence it
may be added that such monstrosities occur during development
amongst invertebrates in a state of nature, as I have repeatedly ob-
served in the case of the American lobster. The liability to deformities
so produced is also known to diminish as development advances, thus
firmly establishing, on the basis of fact, the view for which I contend.
This also supports my conclusion, previously noted elsewhere, that the
divergence of species must be studied from the stand-point that the
tendency toward variation and divergence is most pronounced in the
egg, and not in the adult, and in response to adaptive requirements to
which the adult organism cannot so directly respond. This view
further involves the conclusion that widely distinct forms, perhaps
even phyla, have been directly evolved from the morula and planula
stages as consequences of the greater capacity for direct adaptation
by germs in these stages, and that the earlier phases of seg-
mentation are consequently far more significant than the later and
more highly modified larval stages, all of which must be regarded as
more or less directly adaptive, as a study of their structures and meta-
morphoses in relation to their surroundings renders self-evident, since
many of them possess features which cannot be shown to have ever
been of the least use to any conceivable ancestral form of the adult,
as, for example, the placenta, amnion, and allantois, which are striking
illustrations of this truth.
The father of modern transformism, Lamarck, was also one of the first
to appreciate the significance of that foundation principle of modern
physiology, which was named metabolism by Theodore Schwann.
The further consequences of the differentiation of metabolic processes,
pari passu with hological differentiation were traced and elaborated
as we have already seen by two great masters in biology, namely H.
Milne-Edwards and Huxley, and it has b ught to sh her
consideration of the capabilities of metabolism indicates that it may
become the foundation of an intelligible hypothesis of heredity,
which takes as its logically necessary basis the assumption that there is
no scientific warrant for the belief in the isolation of the germinal
matter of living bodies in such wise that it is out of the range of the
influence of the effects of the physiological activity of the whole
parent organism. This must be so on the ground of the universality
92 The American Naturalist. [January.
of the occurrence of metabolism, even during the maturation or
or growth of germs in the parent body, the contrary opinion being in
conflict with fact.
The Lamarckian philosophy of transformism therefore offers the
foregoing hypothesis of heredity as a substitute for the preposterous
one of the isolation of germ-plasma, which, as here shown, is in the
most obvious conflict with the principle of the conservation of energy.
An isolated germ-plasma is as undemonstrable as the presence of bow-
legged goblins in the moon. The primary postulate of that hypothesis
is suicidal. There is no middle course to be taken. Biologists who
commit themselves to an acceptance of the biological vagaries of
Weismann array themselves against the modern rigorously scientific
tendency to examine the problems of biology from the standpoint of
the physicist.
In that the doctrine of the isolation of the germ-plasma is in
irreconcilable conflict with the great cardinal principle upon which
the whole fabric of modern physiological science rears its stately
proportions, namely, with the general theory of metabolism, and,
consequently, with the still more imposing and universal principle
of the conservation of energy, we therefore realize what a colossal
fabric of speculative rubbish must be consigned to the limbo of un-
tenable and forgotten hypotheses in what is represented by the mis-
guided labors af the advocates of the existence of an unalterable
germ-plasma.—Joun A. RYDER.
PHYSIOLOGY.
An Experimental Investigation of Strychnine Poisoning.
—It is a known fact that certain organs extract certain substances from
the blood. The kidney, for instance, takes up urea; the motor nerves
shave an elective affinity for curare, the nervous system for lead, etc-
As regards any drug which particularly affects any organ, the question
may arise whether the organ is affected because of a special attraction
for the drug or because of a special susceptibility to its action. For
example, does strychnine affect the spinal cord because the latter stores
up a relatively larger quantity of it than other organs, or is the spinal
cord more susceptible to its influence than is muscle, or liver, for in-
stance? In order to throw light upon this subject, Dr. Lovett? has —
1 Journal of Physiology, Vol. IX., P- 99.
1890. ] Physiology. 93
studied experimentally in the Harvard Physiological Laboratory the
action of strychnine upon frogs.
A quantitative table was first constructed showing the time that var-
ious amounts of strychnine require to produce convulsions in frogs of
known weight. A certain amount of a solution of strychnine sulphate
was then injected into a frog, and after a stated time various organs,
spinal cord, muscle, liver, brain, blood, etc., were removed and rubbed
up with water to a fluid consistency. Given quantities of each of these
were then injected into separate frogs, and from the time of the appear-
ance of the convulsions, by comparison with the quantitative table, the
relative amounts of the drug absorbed by the various organs of the first
frog were calculated. The results go to show that the spinal cord takes
up relatively more strychnine than any other organ. In the case of
one frog—a typical one—the relative amounts of the drug in one gram
of several organs were as follows: spinal cord, 1.52 mgr.; liver, .325
mgr. ; muscle, .377 mgr. On comparing the relative amounts in the
blood and cord it was found that after small doses the cord contained
more than the blood, while the reverse obtained with large doses.
This relation seems to be constant. From these experiments the ques-
tion of the affinity of the spinal cord for strychnine seems to be an-
‘swered most clearly. The susceptibility of its protoplasm to the drug
is left undecided.—L. GorF.
The Muscle Current.—Dr. R. Nicolaides, of the University of
Athens, gives! the results of some observations with the capillary
electrometer to determine the duration and law of disappearance of
the muscle current. He finds that in the excised gracilis or sartorius
of the frog the current falls away at first quickly, then more slowly,
and very gradually disappears. The whole duration naturally varies,
but is considerable, ¢.g., 380 minutes (gracilis). The longitudinal
section currents are very weak, and of shorter duration than those
between longitudinal and transverse sections. His results show that
the muscle current runs a course parallel to that of the muscle irrita-
bility, lasting as long as it lasts, and disappearing according to the
same law as it disappears.—L. GOFF.
_ Effect of Atropin on the Chorda Tympani.—The two kinds
of secretory fibres distinguished by Heidenhain in gland nerves have
for some time enjoyed an undisputed right to existence. It has been
recognized that there are “ secretory ” fibres, controlling the secretion
of water and salts, and “‘ trophic ” fibres, controlling the elaboration
1 Du Bois Reymond’s Archiv., 1889, P. 73-
94 The American Naturalist. [January,
of organic matter. It has, moreover, been suggested by Langley!
that we must assume a third kind of fibre, which he calls ‘‘ anabolic,”
to account for the formation of fresh substance in the gland cells.
More recently, however, Langley? has studied the effect of atropin on
the chorda tympani, and has obtained results which throw doubt on his
own and Heidenhain’s views. These results he sums up as follows :—
‘ The various changes caused in the gland cells by nerve stimulation
are all affected by atropin, and to approximately equal extents.
paralysis of the chorda occurs, it is a paralysis of the whole of its
function with regard to the gland cells. In other words the
phenomena of atropin poisoning give us indication of the existence
of more than one kind of secretory nerve fibre in the chorda
tympani.” It should be observed that this last sentence puts the
case too strongly. Langley’s experiments indicate that the trophic
and anabolic fibres may in some cases be paralyzed more completely
than the secretory, though the degree of difference is slight ; and the
existence of the three kinds of fibres cannot yet be regarded as abso-
lutely disproved.
Bayliss and Bradford,’ who have worked on the electrical phenomena
of the submaxillary gland, assert that stimulation of thesecretory fibres
causes the hilus of the gland to become positive to the outer surface,
and stimulation of the trophic fibres makes the outer surface positive to
tne hilus. Since the first current is abolished by atropin sooner than
the second, the presumption is that the secretory fibres are paralyzed
sooner than the trophic. Langley, however, thinks that the two cur-
rents are due to the preponderance of, first, physical, and second,
chemical changes in the gland cells, and that therefore the electrical
phenomena are not incompatible with his results—Mary A. JoHN-
SON.
Secretion of Salts in Saliva.—The power of choice exercised
by a gland in the selection of substances offered it by the blood is lit-
tle understood. Novi‘ brings forward facts that bear in a general way
upon this point in studying the chlorine (7.¢., NaCI) contents of the
submaxillary saliva of the dog. He finds this to vary with two fac-
tors, viz.: the rate of secretion, and the amount of, NaCl present in —
the blood. If the latter remain the same, increasing the rate of secre-
1 Journal of Physiology, Vol. V1. p. 88.
2? Journal of Physiology, Vol. IX., p. 55.
3 Proc. Roy. Soc., Vol. XL., p. 203, 1886.
* Du Bois Reymond’s Archiv., 1888, p. 403.
1890.] : Physiology. oð
tion increases the percentage of Cl in the saliva, which confirms the
results of Heidenhain and of Werther. Again, if the rate of secretion
remain unchanged, increasing the quantity of NaCl in the blood, as
by injection of a ten per cent. NaCl solution into the jugular vein,
increases the Cl contents of the saliva. The Cl increase in the saliva
is here more rapid than that of the blood. If both factors vary
simultaneously, the results vary; but it seems that a moderate change
in the NaCl contents of the blood can overcome a considerable
change in the rate of secretion. The percentage of NaCl in the
saliva reached as high as .627, but never equaled that of the blood.
Langley and Fletcher in a paper presented to the Royal Society, and
not yet printed,! while in general confirming the results of Novi, make
a study of numerous other influences affecting the secretion of salts,
such as dyspnoea, clamping the carotid, bleeding, pilocarpine, atropin,
lithium citrate, potassium iodide and potassium ferrocyanide. ‘‘ The
general result of these experiments is to show that the secretion of
water, of salts, and of organic substances are differently affected by
different conditions, and that the percentage composition of saliva is
determined by the strength of the stimulus, by the character of the
blood, and by the amount of blood supplied to the gland. All, or
nearly all, the arguments which have been adduced to prove that the
secretion of organic substance is governed by special nerve-fibres, have
their counterparts with regard to the secretion of salts, so that we
might imagine at least three kinds of secretory fibres to be present.
The experiments, on the whole, indicate that this complicated arrange-
ment does not exist, but that the stimulation of a single kind of nerve-
fibre produces varying effects according to the varying conditions of
the gland cells.”
1 See abstract in Proceedings of Royal Society, Vol. XLV., No. 273, p. 16.
96 The American Naturalist. (January,
ANTHROPOLOGY AND ETHNOLOGY.
The Discovery of the Pool of Bethesda, Jerusalem.—Until
. a comparatively recent date the large reservoir known as Birket Israel,
immediately beneath the north wall of the Temple Enclosure (Mosque
of Omar), and a few paces inside of St. Stephen’s Gate, has been ac-
cepted generally as the Pool of Bethesda. This, for a long period, has
not been supplied with water, unless during the ‘‘ rainy season,” when
a small pool may occasionally collect at the bottom. Also, it is fast
being filled with rubbish by the Turkish authorities, and will soon dis-
appear from sight. There were many discrepancies connected with
the place, however, which forbade the more critical from being satis-
fied that it was the correct site.
Meanwhile, the discoveries in the ruins adjoining and northwest of
the old Crusader Church of St. Ann, which stands a short distance to
the northward of the Birket Israel, have gradually established the fact
that the true site of the Bethesda is not the Birket Israel, but is beneath
the ruins which, for centuries buried in rubbish, are still partly built
over by the comparatively modern houses of the Moslems; for this is
in the Mohammedan quarter of Jerusalem. Some few years ago, €X-
cavations brought to light a crypt beneath the remains of an old church
or chapel constituting a principal part of the ruins ; and beneath this,
again, a large cistern-like chamber cut in the rock and decked over
with solid masonry. In this reservoir water collected during the peri-
odical rains, and many considered the evidence already sufficient to
prove it the Bethesda.
Subsequent explorations have revealed the remains of two tiers of
five-arched porches, the upper tier in the crypt, the lower in the pool.
And the intelligent labors of the Algerine Monks, who are in charge
of the property, have been further rewarded recently by the recovery
of another pool, to the westward of that first discovered, containing 4
good supply of water; the entire agreeing with the descriptions of the
Bethesda as given by the Fathers of the Church and Christian pilgrims
and writers as early as the fourth century.
The correspondence of the five-arched porches to those mentioned
in the gospel of St. John (v., 2.) will not escape notice. The remains
of the upper porches extend above the pool at right angles from the
_ north wall of the crypt beneath the church, in which the apse, at the
east end, though dilapidated, is still distinctly defined.
rubbish which has been removed contained a number of inter-
esting antiquities, including Jewish and Roman coins, and fragments
a
ar x
a
4
Y
1890.] Archeology and Ethnology. 97
of carved marble; while lower down were found pieces of ancient
pottery and glass, the latter partly decayed and iridescent, together
with broken icons, images or idols, in zerra cotta, one being the upper
portion (from the head to the waist) of a figure of Ashtaroth, the god-
dess of that serene people, the Zidonians. ‘This was in the red burnt
clay similar to that of the Moabite idols.
The work of excavating being continued, on clearing away the
débris that choked the fifth arch or porch westward of the apse, in
the crypt beneath the church already mentioned, the remains of a
painting or fresco were revealed upon the plaster of the wall in the
rear. This discovery was made just before Easter, or about April 18,
1889. The fresco represents an angel, as if descending into and
troubling the water, which latter is depicted by conventional, zigzag,
and wavy lines of an olive-green shaded with black, more suggestive
of Egyptian hieroglyphics than of modern art, and surrounding the
figure on every side, The right hand of the angel was shown as up-
lifted ; but this has been carefully destroyed, probably by the Mos-
lems (after their manner) in the early days of their power. So also
the face of the angel, which has been battered so as to be completely
obliterated. The glory or nimbus above the head, painted an orange-
yellow, still remains, but little injured. The edge of the pool appears
to be indicated by a broad red line enclosing the painting, and having
an occasional rectangular projection into the water, perhaps represent-
ing steps, or the piers for the porches. On the east side of this fifth
barreled arch (the wall extending at right angles) are the remains of
another figure, also in fresco, much defaced, and supposed to represent
the Saviour. Above the head, evidently intentionally mutilated, is a
portion of the nimbus, and, in the lower outer corner of the painting,
part of a blue robe.
It is to be regretted that these frescoes, the colors of which were
quite bright when first uncovered, have since greatly faded, so that
the blue is now a dull ashy gray. The reds and yellows, though
_ lowered in tone, preserve their hues somewhat better, however.
To recapitulate: It will be perceived from my brief account that
the remains described consist of four tiers of structure. First, the
Turkish houses built upon the rubbish covering the ruins ; next, the
small church with apse; beneath this, the crypt with five porches,
containing the frescoes; and fourth and last, underneath all, the pool
itself, cut in the solid rock, and with five arches of well-preserved
masonry. This last, from the historical and other evidence, I have
not the slightest doubt is the Piscina Probatica—the veritable Pool of
Bethesda. Henry GILLMAN, Jerusalem, Palestine, April 24, "89.
Am. Nat,— January—7.
98 The American Naturalist. [January,
MICROSCOPY."
Certain Improvements in Born’s Method of Reconstruct-
ing Objects from Serial Sections.—The original method of Dr.
Born was treated with considerable detail in Vol. XVIII., 1884, of the
NATURALIST; since which time several improvements have been
effected, descriptions of which have appeared from time to time. We
take the following from a recent number of the Zeztsch. für Wiss. Mikr.,
VoL V i
The block of paraffine holding the carefully imbedded object should
be cut into as perfect a prison as possible, the use of special instruments
for this process being recommended. It is further advised that one of
the faces at right angles to the plane of the knife should be marked in
such a way as to leave no question as to its identity when the sections
are cut. This marking may be brought about by the use of scoring,
the lines being filled with coloring matter, and then covered in the
ordinary way by dipping in warm paraffine.
The sections should have a thickness of about 1-50 mm., and the
paraffine should be so prepared that it will not crush or crack before
the edge of the knife. ”
The finally mounted sections are placed under the microscope, and
by means of a camera the outlines are drawn to scale on separate
pieces of paper. The thickness of each section and the amount of
increase in size of the camera drawing over the original being known,
it is a simple matter to determine the desired relative thickness of the
wax that is to be applied to the paper bearing the drawing.
_ The improved method of applying the wax is as follows :
A lithographer’s stone having been brushed over with turpentine,
the paper is evenly spread upon it, and a strip of metal of the desired
thickness is placed along each side. Wax is now poured over the
paper, and, by means of an iron roller, is pressed into a layer of equal
thickness with parallel strips of metal, which at the same time support —
the roller and limit the spread of the wax. The thicknesses recom-
mended for the plates are 0.4, 0.6, 0.8, 0.9, 1, 1-12, 1-5, 1.8 and 2. a
mm. Combinations of these will give a sufficient range of thicknesses
to correspond with all ordinary sections,
After the plates have all been made the careful work of removing the
surplus wax should be undertaken, the drawing on the attached paper
directing the work. Finally the enlarged sections are stuck together
in their proper order, the model resulting.
1 Edited by C. O. Whitman, Clark University, Worcester, Mass.
1890.] Microscopy. 99
Kastschenko’s Apparatus.'—Apparatuses planned to assist in
processes of plastic reconstruction have been devised by Dr. N
Kastschenko, which may be profitably used in preparing the paraffine
block for ordinary ribbon cutting.
The original apparatus had for its object to pare down the sides of a
paraffine block in such a way that some geometrical pattern might sur-
round the object. This pattern or ‘‘ definition line’’ was intended to
facilitate the reproduction of the object in a magnified model from
sections made.
From the author’s point of view, of course it is important that the
definition or boundary surfaces (which in a section of the object are seen
as definition or boundary lines) should be perfectly parallel, or at any
rate have a fixed and determined position. The apparatus which he
advocates is intended to effect this. The two models were constructed
for the Thomas-Jung and for the Spengel-Becker microtomes. They
are shown in Figs. 1 and 2, their natural size. (Plate III.
In Fig. 1 is shown the cutter or parer as constructed for the Thomas-
Jung object-holder. It may, however, be fitted to any microtome with
a cylindrical object-holder. Its construction is extremely simple. It
consists of a stout ring 4, the internal diameter of which is exactly
equal to that of the object-holder. The ring is immovably united to
the piece æ, which in its turn is exactly like the paraffine cylinder
which fits into the object-holder. In the ring is seen the binding screw
¢. The paraffine-holder d, which fits inside the ring, may be either
solid or hollow.
The holes in d and a are for the purpose of turning round the appa-
ratus. While the object is being pared down the part æ is fixed firmly
in the object-holder, and when the block has had its definition-surfaces
thus prepared, it is removed from the cutter and fixed on the object-
holder in such a way that it is cut in a direction perpendicular to the
surfaces.
The second model (Fig. 2), represents an apparatus intended to be
used in any ordinary object-holder, and is of such dimensions that
movement in any direction when it is fixed in the clamp is possible.
This ‘‘ parer ” fits into the apparatus ¢, which consists of two blocks of
wood loosely united by short metal wires. The wooden holder of
course fits into the clamp while the block is being shaved down.
When the boundary surfaces have been satisfactorily adjusted to the
block, the latter is removed from the ‘‘ cutter” or parer, and
inserted into the wooden holder wherein it is sectioned.
1 From an abstract in the Journal of the Royal Mic. Society, February, 1889.
100 The American Naturalist. (January,
ENTOMOLOGY .!
Rectal Glands in Coleoptera.—While studying the histology of
Passalus coenutus Fab., recently, I found in the alimentary canal, be-
tween the colon and rectum, a structure which I consider homologous
with the similarly located rectal glands of other groups of insects.
The colon has six longitudinal rows of diverticula, each diverticu-
lum being in depth about one-third of the diameter of the colon. It
consists of a somewhat spiny chitinous layer. Next is the lumen, ex-
ternal to which is a layer of cubical epithelial cells. Next is a layer
of circular muscle fibus, and, alternating with the six rows of diver-
ticula, six bands of longitudinal muscle fibres.
The rectum has a lining of smooth chitin resting on an epithetial
layer, the cells of which are slightly more calumnar than those of the
colon or of the intervening structure. Then come scattered circular
muscles and six bundles of longitudinal fibres.
The anterior end of the structure uniting the colon and rectum forms
the posterior wall of the last diverticulum of each row. Rising towatds
the lumen proper, from the bottom of this diverticulum, the wall soon
bends posteriorly, forming a sort of side pocket, then returns and
completes the posterior side of the diverticulum. The wall now passes
backward for a distance about equal to that of three diverticula, then
turns outward and slightly forward forming a small groove around the
tube. It then bends back, narrowing the diameter of the lumen and
making this rather conical, then gradually widens and becomes modi-
fied to form the rectum.
The anterior of these two parts of the structure I shall term the
cushion, and the posterior portion, the cone. In cross-section the
cushion is seen to consist of six longitudinal ridges, each ridge con-
tinuing the line of a row of the diverticula of the colon. The chitin
in the last of these is smooth, but when it bends and forms the inner
face of the cushion it becomes thickly set with short blunt spines,
which point backwards. There are no spines in the groove between
the cushion and the cone, but they begin at the posterior edge of the
groove, and continue from this point to the rectum.
In both cushion and cone the underlying epithelium is cubical and
contains prominent nuclei. It shows no traces of a glandular func-
tion.
The muscles are greatly developed. At the anterior end of the
cushion they pass from one side of a ridge to the other, and between
1 This department is edited by Prof, J. H. Comstock, Cornell University, Ithaca, N.
Y., to whom communications, for notice, etc., should be sent.
1890.] Entomology. IOI
the ridges the six longitudinal bands are continued from the colon.
Passing back the muscles become oblique, and external to the groove
they are entirely longitudinal. In the cone they are oblique, then cir-
cular, and near the rectum a few oblique ones again appear. External
to the muscles is scattered connective tissue. Tracheas and nerve
fibres enter and ramify in the structure.
The ridges which compose the cushion are quite marked an teriorly
and have a central median groove. Posteriorly the ridges are less
marked, the median grooves becoming as deep as those separating the
ridges.
Both from its histology and its position I regard this structure as a
true rectal gland. Its function, however, I believe to be that of a
valve. Minot (Histology of the Locust) says that Chun’s decision as
to their function is only ‘‘a speculative opinion.’ In favor of their
being valves we find the following facts :
1. They are the best developed, and the most alike in insects which
feed on solid and quite innutritious food. In those forms with more
concentrated or liquid food they vary greatly and may even be want-
ing.
2. Their structure is to be best explained by the assumption of a
valvalar function. This explains the thick spiny chitinous lining and
the remarkable development of the muscles.
3. Their location is explained by this assumption, for a valve at this
point would serve to retain the food in the absorptive portions of the
digestive track till all nutriment was extracted ; then the combined
action of the spines and of peristaltis of the muscles would pass the
remainder on.
The rectal glands therefore would retain their primitive valvular
function in those insects which have retained their primitive food
habits. In the more highly differentiated forms, with concentrated
food they become modified, serving other purposes or are rudimen-
tary —H, T. FERNALD.
EXPLANATION OF FIGURES, PLATES IV. AND V.
Fic. 1. Longitudinal section of the rectal gland of Passalus, x 50
(about). C. colon, œ. rectum, ch. chitin layer, cir. m. circular mus-
cle fibres, cone cone, ¢. £. connective tissue, cush. cushion, ¢. epithe-
lium, Z m. longitudinal muscle fibres, 2. trachea.
Fic. 2. Cross section along line A B of Fig. 1 x 90.
Fic. 3. Cross section along line C D of Fig. 1 x go.
Fic. 4. Cross section along line Æ F of Fig. 1 x go.
t
102 The American Naturalist. [January,
PROCEEDINGS OF SCIENTIFIC SOCIETIES.
Meeting of Station Botanists.—The Association of American
Agricultural Colleges and Experiment Stations held its last annual meet-
ing on November 12-16, at Washington, D.C. Several of the botan-
ists connected with the experiment stations were present and held
separate meetings. During the convention some advantageous changes
were made, one of which was the division of the Association into at
least five committees as follows: Agriculture, Botany, Chemistry, En-
tomology, and Horticulture. The college presidents and station
directors will probably also form its committees as they may see fit.
The chemists have held separate meetings for years under the title
of Official Chemists ; the entomologists organized last summer at the
Toronto meeting of the A. A. A. S., and the station horticulturists
held a convention at Columbus last summer. Before the Washington
meeting the botanists were not fully organized, but were prepared to
pass upon a constitution, when the division of the Association into
sections was made, thus providing for the special meetings so much
desired by the station workers, but up to this time unrecognized by the
controlling spirits of the Association. :
of the station botanists while at the Toronto meeting of the
A. A. A. S. found time to get together and talk over matters that most
concerned them in their work. Dr. Beal was made chairman, and
among other things the Washington meeting was planned for. The Sec-
retary communicated with a large number of economic botanists, and
had the time been more favorable there would have been a large
attendance. Some of the wheel horses were much missed upon this
account. However, as it was, some good meetings were held, but the
best of all, the botanists are now organized, committees have been
appointed, and it remains very largely with the workers themselves
whether the succeeding meetings are successful.
Dr. Geo. Vasey, chairman for the first two sessions, presented a
valuable report of the growth of Botanical Division of the Department
of Agriculture. This branch of the public service has accumulated a
vast amoynt of material that now offers unequaled facilities for the
best kind of botanical work. Dr. Vasey expressed the hope that sta-
tion botanists would ayail themselves of the assistance the Botanical
Division can render them. At the same time the several botanists can
reciprocate in some measure by contributing collections and facts of
1890.] Proceedings of Scientific Societies. 103
observation not otherwise in easy reach of the division. At the close
of a lengthy and interesting discussion of this paper a committee was
formed, which drafted the following resolution: The Station Botanists
desire to express their hearty appreciation of the generous support af-
forded the Botanical Division of the Department of Agriculture, as is
evidenced by the printing of the various bulletins of the Division, and
the public ation of a Journal devoted to the special interests of Botanists,
and in view of the unequaled facilities afforded by the large amount of
botanical material accumulated in the Division available for the pre-
paration of much needed monographs on important or difficult groups
of plants, wish to urge upon the attention of the Secretary the desira-
bility of prosecuting this special work, and its early publication, both
in the interest of botanical science and for the direct assistance of
station botanists.
A paper from Dr. W. J. Beal upon ‘‘ The Province of the Botanist
in the Experiment Station,’’ was read by the Secretary. It was shown
that many subjects fall quite naturally to two or more of a station
staff. Forexample, cross-fertilization may be done by the horticutural
agriculturist or botanist, but a knowledge of botany is needed in any
case. Grass experiments are in one sense agricultural, but a botanist
is needed to determine the species. It is without doubt the work of
the botanist to both determine the nature of a fungus disease and ex-
periment with remedies.
During a discussion upon the amount of teaching to be done by the
station botanist, a paper by Dr. C. E. Bessey was read, showing that
it was important for the station and college to hold close to each other.
The advantages were mutual, for advanced students could at the same
time do experimental work and learn how to conduct investigations.
It was the prevailing sense of the meeting that only a few advanced
students should be taught by the station botanist, and all large classes
instructed by a college professor.
A paper was presented by Professor McCarthy upon Seed-testing, in
which it was advocated that some uniform method should be adopted.
To this end a committee was appointed to report at the next annual
meeting of the Association. The last evening of the Convention,
after organizing as a committee or section under the new order of
things with Prof. S. M. Tracy as Chairman, was spent in individual
reports of work done. Among others, Professors Galloway, Chester,
Saunders, Thaxter, and Arthur thus reported. It is proposed to obtain
similar information from all the station botanists in the country, and
embody itin a bulletin for assistance in coéperative work, and a com-
104 The American Naturalist. [January,
mittee was appointed to prepare such a pamphlet, which it is hoped to
issue through the office of experiment stations.—Byron D. HALSTED,
Secretary.
The Seventh Congress of the American Ornithologists’
Union.—tThe seventh annual Congress of the American Ornithologists.
Union convened at the American Museum of Natural History, on
November 12th, and for;thé first time in the Union’s history it was found
necessary to extend the usual three-days session to four days, the Con-
gress adjourning November 15th, to meet in Washington on the third
Tuesday of November, 1890.
Each succeeding meeting of the Union has shown increased attend-
ance, and the present was no exception, twenty active and thirty-two
associate members being present. The active members who attended
are as follows :
Dr. J. A. Allen, of the American Museum of Natural History ;
Charles F. Batchelder, of Cambridge, Mass. ; William Brewster, of
the Museum of Comparative Zodlogy ; Frank M. Chapman, of the
American Museum of Natural History ; Charles B. Cary, of the Boston
Society of Natural History ; Dr. Elliot Coues, of Washington, D. C. ;
William Dutcher, Jonathan Dwight, Jr., L. S. Foster, all of New York
City; Col. N. S. Goss, of Topeka, Kans. ; Dr. George Bird Grinnell,
George N. Lawrence, both of New York City ; Dr. Edgar C. Mearns,
U. S. A., of Fort Snelling, Minn. ; Dr. C. Hart Merriam, of the De-
partment of Agriculture; Dr. Jass C. Merrill, U. S. A.; Robert
Ridgway, of the Smithsonian Institution ; John H. Sage, of Portland,
Conn. ; George B. Sennett, of New York City; Dr. R. W. Shufeldt,
U. S. A., Washington, D. C.; Gordon Trumbull, of Hartford, Conn.
Among the attending associate members were : Egbert Bogg, of Utica,
N. Y.; Dr. Louis B. Bishop, of New Haven, Conn. ; W. A. Conklin,
of the Central Park Menagerie, New York City; P. L. Jany, of the
Smithsonian Institution; Robert B. Lawrence, of New York City ;
Leverett M. Loomis, of Chester, S. C. ; Mrs. Olive Thorne Miller,
of Brooklyn; T. S. Palmer, of Berkeley, Cal. ; C. B. Riker, of South
Orange, N. J. ; Dr. W. C. Rives, of Newport, R. I. ; Wendell Prime,
of New York City; Witmer E. Stone, of Philadelphia; Dr. Spencer
Trotter, of Swarthmore, Pa. ; Ernest E. Thompson, of Toronto, Can.,
and Dr. Louis A. Zerega, of New York City,
The first day’s session was devoted intirely to the transaction of
business, including election of officers and members. Several amend-
ments to the constitution were presented to be considered at the next
1890.] Proceedings of Scientific Socteties. 105
annual meeting ; the most important relates to increasing the active
membership. The present constitution admits only fifty members to
this class, but since the formation of the union the study of ornitho-
logy has received such an impetus, and so many new and worthy candi-
dates for honors have appeared on the field, that the originally restricted
number of fifty necessarily excludes many earnest workers who are
deserving of higher recognition than admission to associate member-
ship implies.
The officers of the preceding year were re-elected, but Dr. Merriam,
much to the regret of the Union, firmly declined his re-election as
Secretary, a post he has filled since the organization of the Union,
and Mr. J. H. Sage was unanimously elected to this office. There
were eight applicants for the single vacancy in the active member list ;
the fortunate candidate being Dr. Arthur P. Chadbourne, of Cam-
bridge, Mass.
Four Corresponding and eighty Associate members were added to
the roll of the Union, which contains now nearly five hundred names.
The remaining three days of the session were almost entirely devoted
to a consideration of the large number of papers presented to the
Union, the titles of which are appended. Many of these papers will
appear in the official organ of the Union, The Zink, and it is not
necessary to further allude to them here. Special attention, however,
is directed to Dr. Allen’s timely paper on the “‘ Extent to which it is
Profitable to recognize Geographical Variation among North American
Bird,” wherein the writer makes some most pregnant remarks on the
present tendency of ornithologists to describe insufficiently differ-
entiated forms; and to Dr. Merriam’s remarks on the ‘San Fran-
cisco Mountain and Vicinity (Arizona) from the Faunal Standpoint.”’
This paper, based on Dr. Merriam’s field work during the past season,
marks an epoch in the study of faunal areas, and the methods of
observation and tabulation employed present vast opportunities for
further work by all intelligent field naturalists.
During the session the visiting members were daily entertained at
‘lunch by the Linnean Society of New York City, and this pleasant
social feature was by no means the least enjoyable of what proved to
be the most successful congress of the Union.
The following papers were read :
1. Observations on the Avifauna of
Winter Distribution of the Bobolink (Dolichonyx oryzworus), with Remarks on its
Routes of Migration, by Frank N. Chapman. 3. On the Changes of Plumage in the
ink, by Frank M. Chapman. 4. To what extent is it profitable to recognize Geo-
graphical Variation among North American Birds? by J. A. Allen. 5. Birds that have
106 The American Naturalist. [January,
k the Bartholdi uh of Liberty, Bedloe’s Island, New York Harbor ;—A History,
me shares a oe Jr. 6. On the Forms of the Thryothorus ludovicianus group of
Wrens, ey Allen.” 7. os the Eastern Forms of Geothlypis trichas, by Frank M:
Chapman. 8. Cheecsations on some of the Summer Birds of the Alpine Portions of
Pickens Sia South Carolina, Mg Leverett M. Loomis. 9. Notes upon Coccothraustes
d % n Waterh
. On the
Habits of some Orange County, Florida, Birds, by B. Mortimer. 23. On the Mottled
Duck in Kansas, by N. S. Goss. 24. Phalenoptilus nuttalli nitidus, is it a valid Race?
by N. S. Goss
Indiana Academy of Science.—The Fifth Annual Meeting of
the Indiana Academy of Science was called to order Monday morn-
ing, December 30, 1889, at ro o’clock, in the rooms of the State
Board of Agriculture, at Indianapolis, by President John C. Brauner.
After the appointment of the usual committees, and the transaction of
usiness, the reading of papers was begun. The following papers
were presented :
Description of a new species of Rhinoptera from the Gulf of Cali-
fornia.—By title—B. W. Evermann and O. P. Jenkins.
Fishes in the Yellowstone Park.—David S. Jordan.
Notes upon the Economic Phases of Entomology and Ornithology.—
C. W. Margit: |
Observations on the Destruction of Birds by Storms.—A. W. Butler.
In the afternoon 16 members were elected. The following papers
were then presented :
The Breeding Habits and Larval Stages of Amblystoma microstomum.
—O. P. Hay.
Aquatic Respiration of the Amblystomas.—O. P. Hay.
The Life-History of Chorophilus triseriatus.—O. P. Hay.
On Sulphophenylpropionic Acid.—Chase Palmer.
Soap Analysis.—John F. Schnaible.
The State of the Crater of Kilauea in August, 1889. —O. P. Jenkins.
The Moraines of the Maumee Glacier.—C. R. Dryer.
oa
1890.] Proceedings of Scientific Societies. 107
Probable Future of Petroleum in S. W. Indiana.—C. A. Waldo.
Observations on the Lakes of Indiana.—C. R. Dryer.
Some Unusual Forms of Lime Carbonate Deposition.—U. F. Glick.
The Top of the Matterhorn.—David S. Jordan.
Stone Characters of Nyssa.—John M. Coulter.
«Snake Cactus. ’—John M. Coulter.
The National Herbarium.—John M. Coulter.
Incandescent Gas Lighting.—W. DeM. Hopper.
In the evening President Branner delivered his presidential address
upon the subject, ‘‘ The Education of a Geologist.” Following this
one.
Tuesday morning, Dec. 31, the Academy convened at 9 o’ clock.
The treasurer filed his report, which was approved, after which 7 new
members were elected. The following paper was read in general
session: ‘* The Effects of Trusts,” by Jeremiah W. Jenks. Follow-
ing this it was decided by the Academy, owing to the number of
papers to be presented, to have the sessions in two sections, one de-
voted to Chemistry, Physics, and Mathematics, presided over by Vice-
President Campbell; the other to Botany, Zoology, and Geology,
presided over by Vice-President Hay. The following papers were
presented before the former :
Dangers of the electric circuit.—John L. Campbell.
Apparatus for the determination of power consumption in friction
and the cutting of metals.—Thos. Gray.
Thomson’s portable magnetostatic electrical measuring instruments
of long range.—Thos. Gray.
On the determination of the elasticity constants of materials by the
deflection method.—Thos. Gray.
Preliminary report on the changes in density
—Thos. Gray and C. Leo Mees.
The use of two mirrors for the
pansion in solids.—C. Leo Mees.
Cause of periodicity in thermometers, as discussed by Prof. M. A.
Rogers.—C. Leo Mees.
Vapor densities of the volatiles metallic ‘‘ Halids.’’—P. S. Baker.
of wires on stretching.
determination of co-efficient of ex-
108 The American Naturalist. [January,
The carbohydrates of the sweet potato.—W. E. Stone.
Oxidation by means of the fixed alkaline hydrates.—P. S. Baker.
Action of chloroform on aluminum chloride.—P. S. Baker.
Specific reactions for the penta-glucoses.—W. E. Stone.
The ‘‘ Perkins Synthesis.’’—P. S. Baker.
Atomic weight of oxygen.—W. A. Noyes.
The height of the atmosphere.—W. J. Spillman.
Magnetic permeability of nickel at low temperatures.—A. P. Car-
The uses of infinity and zero in algebra.—Rufus L. Green.
The potable water-supply of the City of New York.—A. E. Phillips.
Before the section over which Vice-President Hay presided the
following papers were presented :
Explorations of the U. S. Fish Commission in Colorado and Utah.
—David S. Jordan.
Explorations of the U. S. Fish Commission Steamer Albatross in
the Pacific Ocean.—Charles H. Gilbert.
Explorations of the U. S. Fish Commission in Missouri.—Frank M.
w and Louis Rettger.
Preliminary notes on the fishes of the Sandwich Islands.—O. P.
Jenkins.
Some notes on Indiana reptiles and batrachians.—A. W. Butler.
Some rare batrachians.—W. S. Blatchley.
Fishes of Putnam county.—O. P. Jenkins.
Some habits of the crayfish.—C. W. Hargitt.
The occurrence of the badger in Indiana.—Amos W. Butler.
Notes on some fishes from the west coast of Africa, collected by
Carl Stecklemann.—O., P. Jenkins.
On certain species of the genus Chorophilus.—O. P. Hay.
Some Indiana mildews.—M. A, Brannon.
Variations in plants from unripe seeds.—J. C. Arthur.
In the afternoon the following papers were read in this section :
The plants of Putnam county.—D. T. McDougal.
The Compositze of Vigo county.—W. S. Blatchley.
© Some structures in Epiphegus.—E. M. Fisher.
Mycorhiza and Epiphegus.—John M. Coulter.
Some remarkable floral variations.—C. W. Hargitt.
Some stem characters in Compositee.—Harry D. Seato
- The Academy then went into general session. The lovis sub-
jects were presented :
Distribution of Cornus.—John M. Coulter.
188y.] Proceedings of Scientific Societies. 109
On some plants new to the State list —W. S. Blatchley.
Method of embedding and staining delicate vegetable tissues.—
Douglas H. Campbell.
Germination of the macrospores of Isoetes.—Douglas H. Campbell.
Determination of lower plant forms.—Stanley Coulter.
Forest trees of Indiana.—Stanley Coulter.
Morphology of Siphonophores.—Louis Rettger.
Notes on Indiana butterflies. —Albert J. Woolman.
Investigations on relation between the intensity of stimulus and re-
action-time.—W. J. Bryan.
The glacial geology of the Irondequoit region.—C, R. Duyer.
Remarks on the remains of a giant beaver found near Winchester,
Indiana.—Joseph Moore,
Cremation.—Wm. B. Clarke. ý
Most of the papers were read in full, but few by abstract or title,
and the discussions were good.
The total number of papers presented was 73.
The following officers were elected for the ensuing year.
President—T. C. Mendenhall.
Vice-Presidents—O. P. Hay, J. L. Campbell, J. C. Arthur.
Treasurer—O, P. Jenkins.
The next meeting of the Academy will be held at Greencastle, Ind.,
at some time in the spring to be dètermined by the Executive Board.
American Geological Society.— The following papers were
read at the Toronto Meeting of the American Geological Society, on
Thursday, August 29th, 1889 :
- D. Dana.—Areas of Continental Progress in North America,
and the Influence of those Areas on the Work Carried on in Them.
« Progress’? is the progress in rock-making; the ‘‘Areas’’ are
those into which the continent is naturally divided as regards geolog-
ical progress ; and the ‘‘ Work ” is that of all the dynamical agencies
concerned in the making of the beds in the rock series, including the
biological agencies.—30 min.
G. K. Gilbert—The Strength of the Earth’s Crust.
It is believed by many students of dynamic geology that a district
gradually loaded by sediment subsides, and that a district unloaded by
degradation undergoes elevation, the process being quasi-hydrostatic.
Certain observations in the basin of Great Salt Lake indicate that
such results do not follow loading and unloading when the quantities
involved are less than a certain amount.—3o min.
IIO : The American Naturalist. [January,
D. Honeyman.—Glacial Geology of Cape Breton.—zo min.
E. O. Hovey.—Observations on some of the Trap Ridges of the
East Haven Region, Conn.
After a general description of the local geology, the author discusses
the contact phenomena between the trap and the sandstone ; the
theories as to the age of the dikes; concludes that several of the ridges
- are intrusions, not extrusions. —3o0 min.
J. F. Kemp.—Trap Dikes near Kennebunkport, Me.
In this paper the local geology is described, the relations between
the dikes and adjacent rocks are given, and the author discusses the
microscopic structure and chemical composition of the rocks.—zo min.
Neff.—The Sylvania Sand in Cuyahoga Co., Ohio.
The writer discusses the value of this sandstone as a producer of oil
and gas; from its distribution, and that of the Borea Grit, he con-
cludes that an anticlinal reaching above water-line existed in Cuyahoga
County prior to the Lower Carboniferous.—11 min.
. W. Spencer.—\. Characteristics of Ancient Shores in the Region
of the Great Lakes. —33 min
II. High Continental Elevation Preceding the Pleistocene Period.
III. Origin of Boulder Pavements and Fringes.—12 min.
C. D. Walcott,—Study of a Line of Displacement in the Grand
Canon of the Colorado, Arizona.
- A description is given and attention called to a conclusion resultant
upon the study of a line of displacement, in which the throw of a
fault of pre-Cambrian age was partially reversed by a movement in
the later Paleozoic, and again in the same line during Tertiary time.
- S. Williams.—‘‘ The Cuboidos Fauna” and the Principles of
Determining Equivalency in Separate Regions of the Globe.—20 min.
A. Winchell.—Pre-Silurian Rocks in North America.
This memoir will probably be postponed until the December meet-
ing.
I. LeConte.—On the Origin of Normal Faults and of the Structure
of the Basin Region.
f
890°] Scientific News. ffi
SCIENTIFIC NEWS.
The Natural History Museum, Florence.—Florence, mag-
nificently rich in works of art, is by no means poor in scientific col-
lections, since among its public museums are included not only a
splendid archæological one in the Via Colorura, well provided with
Egyptian curiosities, and containing what is probably the most com-
plete collection of Etruscan remains to be found in Italy or in the
world, but also a Musia di Storia Naturale, attached to a school
founded by Victor Emmanuele for instruction in the Natural Sciences.
The last-named museum is strongest in a point which is one of the
weakest in all our American museums—in anatomical preparations in
wax, representing the leading features in animal structure from the
infusoria to man. In other respects this museum, though well arranged
and tolerably complete, has no very salient features. The articulates
have several small rooms, none too well lighted ; the stuffed mammals
are not very prominent ; birds and their nests fill a large, well-lighted
hall; fishes and reptiles occupy two halls and a gallery ; but the
interest for one accustomed to such collections commences with the
osteological specimens, and culminates with the extensive series of
preparations exhibiting the soft parts.
After leaving the purely osteological section, the visitor reaches that
devoted to the lower animals—if it is now allowable for any man to
declare that the human species, with all its long history of culture and
inheritance of intelligence, is superior to creatures the highest of which
resemble him in bone and muscle. Prominent among the animal
preparations are exceedingly large scale models of the radule of
various gastropods, models of Lumbricus, Hirudo, and other worms,
showing the internal structure ; magnified infusoria, with sections of
the same; a very complete set of the anatomy of the torpedo, espe-
cially of the electric organs ; sectional models of sharks and bony
fishes ; a set showing the anatomy of the common fowl, male and
female, the growth of the egg in the ovary and uterus, and its devel-
opment into a chick ; the anatomy of the cat, male and female ; and
that of the sheep.
The most complete portion of the collection of models is, however,
that relating to human anatomy. The osteology, the splanchology,
the digestive, circulatory, respiratory, lymphatic and generative
systems are here exhibited in the fullest manner possible without actual
dissection ; and every organ connected with each of these systems is
treated to several models, representing 1t in various positions or in
112 The American Naturalist. [January,
various states. The nervous system is, if possible, exemplified even
more fully than the others. In each room complete figures, some
erect, others recumbent, show the general appearance of the system of
organs to which the room is devoted ; while all around, in table cases,
are placed a double series of models of the separate organs or parts.
Thus around the hall devoted to the ligaments of the bones are grouped
sections of the various articulations, while in the centre reposes a
human figure with all articulations complete. Sections of the head
at various levels, with vertical and partial sections, combined with
others exposing portions of the face and neck, show the chief points
of brain-structure, and the courses of the cranial nerves, including the
various branches of the fifth, and Willis’ accessory. Models of the
arms, legs, back, pelvis, etc., show the limb and body muscles down
to those of the various digits, the levator, ani, cremaster, etc. The
muscles of jaws and face are shown in an extensive series of models.
The general lymphatic system is exhibited by recumbent figures; the
positions of the various viscera by several entire figures of both sexes,
and many partial sections. The several senses are very thoroughly
exemplified, as are many points of histological structure.
The entire museum, except one small private cabinet, is open free
to both sexes and all ages every Tuesday, Thursday and Saturday, the
authorities wisely judging that some knowledge of human structure is
a proper and essential portion of the education of all young people.
It is noticeable that young people, varying from mere children to
twenty or twenty-five years of age, form the: greater part of the
visitors. —W. N. L
Prizes to Biological Students.—From a desire to verify his
own researches as to the causes of failing nutrition in aging organisms,
the undersigned hereby offers three cash prizes of $175, $125 and $100
for the best three comparative demonstrations, by means of micro-
scopical slides, of the blood capillaries in young and in aged tissues,
canine or human.
By young tissues (canine) are meant tissues from animals between
the ages of one and two years.
By aged tissues (canine) are meant tissues from animals not less than
twelve years of age.
By young tissues (human) are meant tissues from subjects between
the ages of ten and twenty years.
By aged tissues (human) are meant tissues from subjects not less than
sixty-five years of age.
1890.] Scientific News. 113
While a preference will be given to demonstrations from human
tissues, it will be possible for work in canine tissues to take the first
and, indeed, all of the prizes. But of two slides equally well done in
all respects, one canine the other human, the latter will be given the
preference. Canine tissues should be from large animals.
Twelve slides from young and twelve from aged tissues must be sub-
mitted by each competitor, together with a full description of the sub-
jects, methods pursued, and every detail and circumstance which is
likely to throw light upon, or account for any peculiarity. The slides
are for comparison as to the condition of capillary circulation, the
young with the old, and should be in numbered pairs, or groups from
the same kind of tissuc. The term tissue is used in a general sense,
e. g., pulmonary tissue, hepatic tissue, renal tissue, osseous tissue,
muscular tissue, nerve tissue, alimentary tissue, etc
No particular schedule of methods for injection, or staining, will
be insisted upon, and no more definite directions or explanations will
be given.
The slides, carefully packed and boxed, together with descriptive
manuscript, can be sent by mail.
It is stipulated that the demonstrations which receive the prizes,
shall become the property of the subscriber, for publication. All
others will be returned, if desired.
No pseudonyms required. Accompany slides, in every case, with
(real) name and address. Unless of known reputation as a biologist,
a reference is respectfully solicited.
Reservation : no reward will be made unless work of at least ordi-
nary merit is submitted.
This offer is made on the first day of January, 1890, and will remain
open until the twentieth day of August, 1890.
Slides and manuscript will be examined and receipted for as soon
as received.
The prizes will be adjudged on the first day of October, 1890.
These nominal prizes are offered less in expectation of results from
the money as an agent, than in the hope that the offer may furnish a
point d'appui for really needed work. Besides professional observers
_ playing with microscopes, as with toys, merely to see curious or pretty
things. The time has come to concentrate observation upon the one
proper object of biology, viz-, the renovation and prolongation ot
- human life. Address C. A. STEPHENS’ LABORATORY,
Am, Nat.—January.—8 Norway Lake, Maine.
114 The American Naturalist. - [January,
The British Association for the Advancement of Science will meet
at Newcastle-on-Tyne, September 11-19, 1889. Prof. Flower is the
general president, and the sections will have the following chairmen :
Geology, Prof. James Geikie; biology, Prof. J. S. Burdon-Sanderson ;
geography, Colonel de Winton ; anthropology, Sir W. Turner.
It is proposed to hold a Botanical Congress in Paris in the second
half of August. The secretary of the committee of organization is
M. P. Maury, 84 Rue de Grenelle, Paris. Among the subjects to be
made prominent in the Congress is the Geographical Distribution of
Plants.
Prof. Kinkenberg, of Jena, died in March. He was well-known for
his researches on the physiology of the invertebrata.
Dr. James Beard, who has paid special attention to the development
of the fish-like vertebrates, is to be associated with the Scottish Fishing
Board.
Mr. J. Reynolds Vaizey, a young English botanist, whose publica-
tions have been in the line of the morphology of mosses, died recently
at Cambridge, England, from injuries received from falling into a fire
while in an epileptic fit.
Flora, the well-known German botanical journal, will hereafter be
published at Marburg, under the editorship of Prof. Karl Goebel.
Mr. Arthur E. Shipley has been appointed teacher of comparative
anatomy for medical purposes in the University of Cambridge.
Dr. Heinrich Ernst Karl von Dechen, the well-known geologist,
died at Borm, Germany, February 15th, 1889, aged 89 years.
- The Rev. John G. Wood, the popular English author on natural
history, died at Coventry, England, March 3d, 1889, in his sixty-second
year.
The address of B. F. Lowne, as president of the Queckett Micro-
scopical Club, is given in the Journal of the Club for April. It deals
with the history of the morphology of insects.
Wassili Mkolaewitsch Ulianin, the well-known embryologist and
professor of comparative anatomy and embryology in Warsaw, died
February 5th, 1889, in his forty-ninth year.
The Legislature of Georgia has recently re-established the Geologi-
cal Survey of the State. Prof. J. W. Spencer, of the State University,
has been duly appointed to take charge of the work. Two assistants
are authorized, besides the chemist and other specialists. Georgia has
not been as derelict in its survey as appears, for in the forties a survey
was organized. Again from 1876 to 1879, the survey was in progress,
but the results have never been published. So this is the third survey-
THE
AMERICAN NATURALIST
VoL. XXIV. FEBRUARY, 1890. 278.
REMARKS ON THE BRAIN OF THE SEALS.
BY E, C. SPITZKA.
FE NGAGED for many years in collecting material for a mono-
graph on the “ Marine Mammalia,” whose publication has
been delayed by the obtaining of new specimens from unexpected
sources, and partly by the desire to publish only well-matured
and verified observations, I find myself compelled to anticipate
my projected paper, in order to correct the manifest errors of the
latest publications on this subject.
Dr. Fritz Theodor! makes the startling discovery that in the
Phoca (Calocephalus) vitulina there is between the two cerebral
hemispheres, dorsad of and separated by a gyral interval from the
callosum, a second commissure, extending cephalo-caudad nearly
as much as that great fiber-bridge. Such an observation would
revolutionize all ideas hitherto accepted as to the signification and
relations of the callosum, not to mention the peculiar position
which such a profound deviation from the mammalian cerebral
type would lead morphologists to assign the Phocide.
On examing Theodor’s plate (x., Fig. 4) I find that his so-called
“ commissura suprema” is the saddest kind of a delusion. In
making a medi-section of his seal’s brain he sliced off a mesal
gyrus, and, deceived by the cut surface, hastily assumed it to be
a commissure. How carelessly this was done becomes evident
1 Das Gehirn des Seehundes (Phoca vitulina: Dr. Fritz Theodor, Freiburg i. B., 1887.
(The Brain of the Common Seal, by Dr. Frederick Theodor.)
116 The American Naturalist. [February,
on regarding his Figure 5 (Plate vii.), where the cortical and
gyral structure of the so-called commissure are apparent. Now,
lest it might be assumed that he had a monstrosity * to deal with
in a single specimen, we find that he had two, a younger and an
older seal; and furthermore, his artist (Plate 1x., Fig. 6) omits
the so-called new commissure, furnishing a rather correct repre-
sentation as I have found it in three brains of the same species.
From a thorough examination of the brains of two sea-lions
(Zalophus Gillespiewt) and three seals? (Phoca vitulina), I may
state the following: The number and complexity of the gyri on
the mesal face of the seal’s and sea-lion’s brain isas great as in
the anthropoid brain, and in the frontal region rather more so.
Where the falx does not intervene, the gyri are bound firmly
together by the leptomeninges. Like all complexly convoluted
brains, that of the seal shows considerable asymmetry. In trans-
section it can be readily seen, even in the sea-lion’s brain, that
the apices of the gyri of one side interdigitate with the gyri of
the other, so that a strictly median section might shave off the
former. If we add to this the presumable* distortion to which
such a complex brain is necessarily exposed during its removal,
the likelihood of such an occurrence becomes greatly increased.
If the intrinsic evidence of Theodor’s paper, which is really
self-condemnatory, did not suffice to show the fallacy of his claims
of a commissura suprema, I would add the following :
1. In six phocidz I have exposed the callosum from the mesal
fissures, found it contrasting in its brilliant white with the deep
gray, or rosy gray (according to age and species) of the cortical
surface, as markedly as in man or the anthropoid apes.
2. I have found no other commissure dorsad of it, nor any
2 M fi ion of the g . : 4 sas CA SEIE Re re 11 A ahcent falx
3 A fourth seal was less EREDA studied, owing to the decomposition of part of the
brain, although it evy a the gross points herein detailed. With the exception
of that specimen, which I owed to the N. Y. Aquarium, and one purchased at a fish-
mongers, all were eke through the kindness of Dr. Conklin, Superintendent of the
Park Menagerie, in a perfectly fresh condition, being removed from the animals
within a few hours after their decease,
t We should hesitate to assume this if the very figures of Theodor did not positively
E:
1890.] Remarks on the Brain of the Seals. 117
fusion of the mesal gyri, nor anything that could remotely sug-
gest even a spurious commissure of the cerebrum.
3. I have made trans-sections of the seal’s and sea-lion’s brain
(the latter being preserved and accessible), and found one, and
but one, great’ transverse commissure uniting the interior white
substance of the two cerebral hemispheres of the phocidz.
If his announcement, on so defective a basis, contradicted by
the author's own artist, and positively controverted by careful
observation, did not suffice to expose the fallacy of his revolu-
tionizing® discovery, the collateral evidence involved in the
exposure of the following errors would inculcate the need of
caution in accepting the radical propositions with which his paper
closes.
He states that the seal has no olives in the sense of the human
olive. The seal is, however, noteworthy for the large size of the
olivary protuberances. Theodor, in his wretched figure (Plate
vii., Fig. 2), represents the pyramidal columns of the oblongata
as showing a roundish swelling laterad. It is to-day generally
known to neuro-morphologists that the true pyramids are fascicu-
lar, that they can therefore exhibit no enlargement, followed by
attenuation, except it be due to a spreading of the fibres, or the
inclusion of some other body, such as a ganglion or a commis-
sure. In the sea-lion the same enlargement is distinctly de-
markated from the pyramid tract, although not much larger than
in the bear. In the sea-lion, as in the bear and other land-
carnivora, the hypoglossal nerve roots emerge laterad of the
olivary eminence. In man and true apes they emerge mesad of
the olive in the groove between the latter and pyramid.’ In the
true seals (Phoca vitulina) they emerge partly in the latter sit-
uation, and partly from the olivary eminence itself, thus show-
5 I need not add that I found the pre-commissure developed, and though small, dis-
proportionately to the atrophic olfactory lobes.
6 It is but doing age to the author to state that he seems to have been entirely
J
7 Trans-sections of the oblonga Pon a tendency of the hypoglossal nerve roots in
man t ut on the ectal face they are collected in a com
118 The American Naturalist. (February,
ing a sort of transitional state. Tiedemann, sixty-eight years
ago, in a plate which for accuracy puts those of Theodor to the
blush, represents the hypoglossal nerve taking the origin I have
ascribed to it, omitting, however, the most cephalic rootlets,
which are indeed very frail. Since Theodor cites Tiedemann, it
is remarkable that he could have borne the latter’s excellent
plates in mind, and in conflict with the real facts designated the
first cervical as the hypoglossal pair (Plate vin., Fig. 2).° In
removing the membrane it is very difficult to avoid tearing off
the hypoglossal nerve roots, and it is doubtless due to this fact,
and his erroneous naming of the first spinal as the last cranial
nerve, that Theodor’s non-recognition of the olive is due.
Although the older writers, particularly Tiedemann, have care-
fully delineated and described lobules of the cerebellum, and
especially its vermiform lobe, Theodor in one sentence states
that the seal has no vermis cerebelli in the sense in which a vermis
is spoken of in the human cerebellum, and in another proceeds
to describe it to be an exceedingly complicated body. Much
dependence cannot be placed on his dissections and figures. I
have never been able to remove a phocidan cerebellum intact
without sacrificing the skull; for the lobulus appendicularis, meas-
uring fully half an inch cephalo-caudal, as much transversely,
and one-quarter of an inch dorso-ventral, is almost entirely em-
bedded in bone, and connected with the main cerebellum
through a small foramen by a pedicle not exceeding a line in
diameter. Theodor has failed to preserve this morphologically
important structure, and even to discover his failure to do so,
although the most superficial acquaintance with the dog’s or cat’s
brain should have directed his attention to it, particularly in view
of his sweeping conclusions as to the phylogeny of the marine
8 Icones cerebri simiarum et quorundum mammalium rariorum, Heidelbergia,
MDCCCXXI,, Plate 11., Figs. 7 and 8. It is to be remarked that ‘Tiedemann attributes
olives (o/ive vix conspicuas) to the seal, but locates the figure reference laterad of these
bodies. The trapeziums he correctly recognizes.
9 While Tiedemann accurately exhibits the decided caudal direction of the cervical
nerves from their origin, which is in remarkable contrast with that of the transversely
running hypoglossal, Theodor tilts = nerve roots in the opposite í airon non. In every
respect his figures are far behind T to accuracy
1890.] Remarks on the Brain of the Seals. 119
and terrestrial carnivora.” These are expressed as follows:
“ The seals and (ordinary) carnivora are in their cerebral organ-
ization to-day widely separated, and their common origin must
be sought in a remote geological period.” [Pp. 90-91.]
Now the fact is that an examination of a series of brains be-
ginning with the mink, the fresh-water and salt-water otter, and
passing through the eared to the earless seals, would show about
as beautiful a transition as a morphologist could well desire. It
is misleading to establish a type in a specialized form. The
Canidz and Felidz are as specialized in this way as the Phocide ;
the Viverride, particularly the Urside are more typical car-
nivores. And on examining a bear’s brain, Theodor would have
found the same peculiarity of the Island of Reil he found in the
seal, excepting the feature due to the peculiar vertical course of
the Sylvian fissure in the latter.
Anticipating the more complete monographic publication now
in preparation, and which it is intended to illustrate by photo-
graphs and other reproductions of both external and internal
details, I would summarize the characteristic features of the seal’s
brain as follows: (1) It is a typical carnivore brain in every
essential feature. Morphologically it does not present a single
deviation from the type. All differences are due to the relative
preponderance of some and relative atrophy" of other parts.
Thus the olfactory lobe is reduced to such an extent that in some
individual common seals the tract is deeply imbedded in the
10 It seems almost comical that this author, convicted of gross inaccuracies both in his
ethods, should venture upon one criticism of the far
re accurate and venerable Tiedemann, in which the former is precisely wrong. He
states that the diameter of the Trigemius nerve Age ae by him as well as by
Gratiolet. It so happens that my measurements in three individuals equal those of the
latter, and slightl ceed dak ok tea laine A
un Ta brain morphology one must distinguish between physiological peculiarities and
i ¢ zoological features. Thus the atrophy in some and absence in other cetaceans
of the olfactory bulb is a physiologizel atrophy; whereas the absence of the epiphysis
cerebri would be a peat zoological anneenly: The greater or lesser size of the pyra-
mid tract is in with the voluntary innervation of extrem-
ities endowed with pi hensil ; nt and their absence, presence or development has
not such h l ¢y~e of the hemispheres, the cerebell
and the olives. e aa ey PAUE, “therefore, S on of the higher
TO as em a — E coruscations; whereas the degree
of HA inii fet
rs = =
120 The American Naturalist, [February,
sulcus, and even invisible in a part of its course, unless the sulcus
be opened. In harmony with this the hippocampal lobule is
relatively reduced, and remarkably flat. The auditory nerve is
enormous, and with this the therewith connected trapezium,
lemmiscus lateralis, posterior pair of the corpora quadrigemina
and internal geniculate bodies are overgrown. There is a micro-
scopically visible fluted tract on the caudal aspect of the thala-
mus running ectad from the latter bodies to the auditory cortical
field of the hemisphere. It is the enormous hypertrophy of this
field which crowds the Sylvian into its unusual vertical, nay,
actually anticlinal, position.”
One of the most interesting proofs of the value of neuro-mor-
phology in classification is offered by a comparison of the brains
and spinal cords of the Cetacea,”? Sirenia,“ and Phocide. The
phocidan brain is, as above stated, a physiologically aberrant,
but morphologically genuine carnivore brain. The manatee has
the brain of a hippopotamus. The Cetacea, in accordance with
their to-day isolated position, have the most aberrant central
nervous system of all, but to no other brain do they approach so
nearly as to that of the Proboscidia, a group which, with the
possible inclusion of other extinct and recent related forms, ap-
proaches more nearly the common ancestral trunk from which so
widely divergent branches have sprung.” Zoological characters
12 In reality the position of this fissure is dependent on two factors: the lower, corre-
sponding to the cephalic part of the human, has sunk ventr Aypa through the retro-
gression of the sphenoidal lobe, and the upper (posterior part of the human) has been
driven dorso-cephalal by the c ov iat ek auditory Sarion pne "The ERE pae sel
g
brain into a foreshortened skull model. ‘Thus the frontal lobe will sais to resemble the
square and compact contour of the seal’s brain. That such a mechanical process
been undergone by the latter is demonstrated by the evident violence to ree the
olfactory tracts and lobes have been subjected. In no other carnivores are the bulbs so
far cephalad and the tracts bodily driven into the cota of the sulcus rectus.
13 A decayed Beluga’s brain, and a Phoczena Y. Aquarium, two beautifuy
ones of Tursiops tursio and one of Delphinus eee as Mr. Eugene Blackford,
of this city. To Professor Wm. F. True, of the Smithsonian, I am indebted for aid in
determining the species.
14 The brain axis and cord of Professor Wilder's specimen, loaned by him.
15 In stating this I am not misled by the superficial characters, such as the richness in
gyri, or in fact any quantitative features. I am determined by the ¢yfe of gyral develop-
ment, the type of cerebellar foliation, and the character of the olive, which is of the
1890.] Remarks on the Brain of the Seals. 121
are more numerous, constant, and of classifying value in a com-
plex organ such as the brain than in the spinal cord. Yet even
in this comparatively simple organ specific differences of struct-
ure are found, and accordingly the most atypical form is repre-
sented in the Cetacea. The ventral horn of gray matter is im-
mensely overgrown, and the dorsal correspondingly atrophic ;
there is an enormous lateral horn present. On first sight this
would appear to be an entirely novel structure, peculiar to the
Cetacea; further examination shows that it is homologous with,
though an overgrown representative of, a cell-group present in
other mammals, which owes its prominence and peculiar position
to the following factors: (1) The shrinkage of the neck of the
dorsal cornu acts on the extreme ventral and lateral parts of the
ventral horn as would the passing of an elastic band around a
group of matches, spreading their ends apart; (2) the absence
of the pyramid tract in the dorsal part of the lateral column
causes an encroachment of the ventral part of the lateral column ;
(3) the dorsal (posterior) white columns are relatively reduced.
To convert a human cord into a porpoise’s there must be imag- '
ined a shrinkage of the posterior or dorsal white and gray
matter, as well as the posterior or dorsal part of the lateral
column, in other words, of the entire part of the cord which
would lie behind a transverse line which in man leaves nearly as
much in front (ventrad of) the central canal as behind (dorsad of ) it.
This line in the Cetacea would be a curve, and in accordance
therewith the outline of the cord in the latter is not nearly cir-
cular or a rounded quadrangle as in man, but heart-shaped, the apex
being represented by the shrunken posterior or dorsal segment,
the bifurcate base by the overgrown halves of the ventral or
anterior segment.” Although this remarkable deviation is in
compact, massive kind, in distinction to the slender lamina type characteristic of
in bulk without crenulation; yet the latter presents true Ungulate features.
16 The spinal cord of the gorilla in the dorsal region (Waldeyer) shows characters not
found in the human cord, a fact long known to me, though not published, from the case
of the chimpanzee.
17 Guldberg has partly observed this, but many years subsequently to my published
observations, with which h to have been unacquainted.
122 The American Naturalist. [February.
part due to physiological reasons, yet it is in so far a zoological
one as the whole “ physiognomy ” of the dorsal segment of the
cord in the Cetacea is more like that of the Ungulata than the
Carnivora. A section of the spinal cord at the level of the
foramen magnum has, in every genus, something distinctive, in
every family something quantitatively different from other fam-
ilies, in every order something qualitatively and radically distin-
guishing it from nearly related orders. While, as already stated,
such differences have not the profound morphological meaning
which certain cerebral features possess, yet it is not from attach-
ing any over-importance to the field to which I have devoted
most of my dilettante studies that I venture to prophesy that
when the minute and coarse anatomy of the nerve axis be once
thoroughly known for each species it will be possible to offer a
more correct classification of the Mammalia than any now ex-
tant, or any other based on a single criterion. It would not be
difficult to enunciate many valuable data for classification furnished
by a study of the nerve centres in Sauropsida and Ichthyopsida.
Many peculiarities of the appendages of the brain among the
former, such as the cartilaginous epencephalic hood of the
Chelydra, and the cartilaginous rod attaching the oblongata to the
basi-occipital bone in Thalassochelys, require and will repay
further study. It is in view of the importance of registering
only correct observations that I offer this provisional correction
of such revolutionary pseudo-discoveries as those above criticised.
PLA LE IH
PLATE IV:
PLALE Y,
2
Qn, Q
ON
ONEA
OAN
IO
LAON
Qj;
bee s SS
NaN
PRP
>
cain S
K ETRA
Qs Qs PQ r) ERTL
OD Ls LID 4 =e yy A ma a
D LIAL? = Sis
op, BH Soon
Qy ieee F RRI
WH : ut A
Q Q p g A:
ROS an? S
i QQ amen prne RS
' ag Sen}
+t a -
r.m.
PEt,
UE 52>
ey ERLIE SIN
LETRO RUE? S
ese nN os ror <
DB r
CTL TIT) Ty)
LTrim Š ort SPU ag
R
T] ii Mivlsaeuwes
Tatars. UNES pss t
AT Sa
o>
9)
en
1890] Effects of Musical Sounds on Animals. 123
INSTANCES OF THE EFFECTS OF MUSICAL SOUNDS
ON ANIMALS.
BY ROBERT E. C. STEARNS.
(Continued from p. 29, Vol. XXIV., 1890.)
CATS AND MUSIC.
M® GEORGE GUION, of Ventnor, Isle of Wight, referring
to a cat owned by his friend, a Capt. Noble, says:
“If any one in her presence commences whistling a plaintive
air Brownie will presently go to him, climb into his lap, and
raising herself on her hinder legs will put her mouth close to
that of the whistler. Captain Noble’s view of the motive is,
that the cat imagines the performer to be in pain, and thus
endeavors to express her sympathy. One day when sitting round
the table after dinner, we each for experiment attracted the
animal in turn, who on the above supposition must have thought
we were suffering from an epidemic, as each of us in succession
exhibited the same symptoms. It is necessary that the air
whistled should be of a plaintive character, as I found by com-
mencing a lively measure, which I had to change. In my boy-
hood we had a cat which had a habit very similar. If I laid
myself down on the sofa, and made a moaning sound, the cat
would jump up and hover about me, as if anxious to find out
what was the matter.”
Another party writes: “Sometime since I had an ordinary
tortoise-shell cat, which had a peculiar fondness for the tune
known as “ Rode’s Air.” One day I chanced to whistle it, when,
without any previous training, she jumped on my shoulder, and
showed unmistakable signs of pleasure by rubbing her head
against mine, and trying to get as near my mouth as possible.
I have tried many other tunes, but with no avail.”
Captain Noble, of Forest Lodge, Maresfield, England, whose
cat “ Brownie” is referred to by Mr. Guion, in response to the
124 . The American Naturalist. [February,.
incident above given says: “ By-the-by, I don’t know whether
‘Rode’s Air’ is a lively or plaintive tune, but only one of the
latter kind affected my poor old ‘ Brownie.’ I used as a rule to
whistle the ‘Last Rose of Summer,’ when I wished her to per-
form. I never could satisfy myself as to her motive in putting
her mouth to mine. The most feasible conjecture that I was.
able to make seemed to be that she imagined me to be in pain,
and in some way tried either to soothe me, or to stop my
whistling.”
F.C. R., of Gwasted, in commenting on one of the instances
above related say: “We too have a cat which is very sensible of
the whistling of tunes, and which will, even when with her young
kittens, show great uneasiness immediately after the whistling
commences, and rise and leave them to follow the person about,
ending by trying to seek for the unaccountable sounds in the very
mouth of the performer. Still, unlike the cat of ‘ Musicus,’ she
seems to experience more uneasiness than pleasure.”
Then follows E. J. T., who says: I can give another instance
from personal knowledge. A few years ago my brother had a
favorite cat, which, when he whistled a tune, would follow him
round the room, and climbing up on him would touch his mouth
with her paw, and rub her head against his face, all the time pur-
ring with pleasure. I may add that this musical taste is uot he-
reditary, for a grandchild of this cat, now in our possession,
shows the greatest antipathy to music; a few notes on the piano
or concertina are enough to rouse her from her slumbers on the
hearth-rug, and drive her to the door, mewing loudly to be
let out.”
Another illustration is furnished by Mr. Oborn, relating to
the power of music on English cats. He writes:
“I have a cat that has apparently great fondness for music.
Whenever any of the family or a stranger commences playing on
the piano, and if the tune is at all lively, she fondles and purrs
and evinces the greatest pleasure imaginable, and sometimes be-
comes so excited that she will jump on to the keys and rub her-
self against the hands of the person playing.”
1890.] Effects of Musical Sounds on Animals. 125
A lady friend of mine residing in ‘California has observed
similar actions on the part of a cat, when the piano is playing in
its presence. Whether a Thomas or Tabby cat I did not ask.
Another friend, a lady residing in Washington, D. C., at one
time owned a cat that acted in a very peculiar manner upon hear-
ing the music of a piano. When the strain was rather soft and
low, the cat appeared to be pleased with it, would climb up into
the lady’s lap, reach up her head and rub it against the lady’s
shoulder or chin, but when in the course of the time a passage
was reached that was in a high key, with considerable emphasis,
pussy became intensely excited, and would put her head against
the lady’s cheek with a good deal of force, or jump down and run
to the piano, and climb up on the person playing, and get up on
the instrument in such a fiercely aggressive way that the per-
former, through fear of being scratched or bitten, would stop
playing.
Referring to the effect of whistling upon a cat, as observed by
E. J. T., Mr. George O. Howell says, “ A relative of mine has a
cat, a noble animal, rejoicing under the refined name of Thomas.
This creature dislikes to hear any one whistle. But one morn-
ing, when he was fast asleep, I whistled loudly. It acted like
magic. Thomas started up in an instant, looked very bewildered,
and decamped from the room at full speed.”
From dogs and cats, the canine and feline, let us turn to the
porcine.
PIGS AND MUSIC,
“In old churches and cathedrals we sometimes find a carving
on the miserere of a pig playing upon a bagpipe and the little pigs
dancing around. This seems to indicate a popular notion (at
least in times gone by) that pigs have no ear or taste for music ;
such a notion, however, seems to be not quite correct, for I once
saw four or five great bony pigs standing at a garden gate, listening
with the most evident pleasure to the sweet sounds of a wander-
ing Germari band. They stood in a row, in perfect stillness, with
heads bent a little on one side to catch the melody; and from
time to time gave utterance to their delight in a gentle grunt of
126 The American Naturalist. [February,
satisfaction. The melody that charmed their breasts was one
which rose and fell in gentle and continual waves of sound; not
very attractive perhaps to educated ears, but certainly riveting
the attention of these untaught creatures, whose desires are com-
monly supposed to be confined to the quantity and quality of
their food, rather than to the enjoyment of the purer delights of
sweet sounds.”
In proceeding with the domestic animals it will be seen that
the bovine group are entitled to a share of attention.
MUSICAL COWS.
“That pigs are not the only animals who take a delight in
musical sounds, may be proved by the following incident of
which I was a witness on more than one occasion. Opposite to
our house was a large field in which some twelve or thirteen cows
were put during the summer months. One day a German band
commenced to play on the road which divided the house from
the field. The cows were quietly grazing at the other end of the
field, but no sooner did they hear the music, than they at once
advanced towards it, and stood with their heads over the wall
attentively listening. This might have passed unnoticed ; but
upon the musicians going away, the animals followed them as
well as they could on the other side of the wall, and when they
could get no further stood lowing piteously, etc. * * * * So
excited did the cows become, that some of them ran round and
round the field to try and get out, but finding no outlet returned
to the same corner where they had lost sight of the band, and it
was some time before they seemed satisfied that the sweet sounds
were reallygone. It seems a strange coincidence that both the pigs
and cows were charmed by music produced by a German band.”
OXEN AND MUSIC.
“I have often noticed the power music has over ‘oxen. The
other day we had a brass band playing in our garden. In a field
adjoining were four Scotch oxen; when the band struck up,
1890.] Effects of Musical Sounds on Animals. 127
they were at the far end of this, a nine-acre field, quite out of
sight, the field being very uneven. They set off full trot to the
garden wall, put their necks over, and remained so till the tune
was finished, when they went back to graze; but as soon as it
struck up again, they put their heads over again. This went on
till the band left, after which they ate little all day, and were con-
tinually lowing.” 5
Before leaving the bovines, it may be worth noticing that the
most definite statement, the most direct and practical testimony
we have as to the effect of music upon members of this group
may be found in that famous book known as “ Mother Goose’s
Melodies.” Therein it is stated :
“ There was a piper had a cow
And had no hay to give her;
He took a pipe and played a tune,
‘Consider, Cow! Consider!’
“The cow considered very well,
` And gave the piper a penny,
And bade him play that other tune,
‘ Corn-ricks are bonny !'” —
It will be observed that she was a hard money cow, while the
piper offered only notes!
“There are many anecdotes which show that the ox, or cow,
has a musical ear. The carts in Corunna, in Spain, make so loud
and disagreeable a creaking sound with their wheels, for the want
of oil, that the governor once issued an order to have them
greased; but the carters petitioned that this might not be done,
as the oxen liked the sound, and would not draw so well without
their accustomed music.”
“ Prof. Bell assures us that he has often, when a boy, tried the
effect of the flute on cows, and has always observed that it pro-
duced great apparent enjoyment. Instances have been known of
the fiercest bulls being calmed into gentleness by music.”
It will be seen that a very liberal definition must be conceded
to the terms music and musical sounds, when the creaking of a
128 The American Naturalist. [February,
cart wheel is referred to as “accustomed music.”' The instance
here quoted may be more properly regarded as illustrating the
relation of certain sounds to the ordinary routine, and said sounds
having been continued for a long time, until they became a per-
manent factor in the experience of these animals, the discontinu-
ance caused, perhaps, a feeling of strangeness and discontent.
SHEEP AND MUSIC.
The following pleasing anecdote of the power of music is given
by the celebrated Haydn. “In my early youth,” says he, “I
went with some other young people equally devoid of care, one
morning during the extreme heat of summer, to seek for cool-
ness and fresh air on one of the lofty mountains which surround
the Lago Maggiore, in Lombardy. Having reached the middle of
the ascent by daybreak, we stopped to contemplate the Barro-
mean Isles, which were displayed under our feet, in the middle of
the lake, when we were surrounded by a large flock of sheep
which were leaving their fold to go to the pasture.
“One of our party, who was no bad performer on the flute,
and who always carried the instrument with him, took it out of
his pocket. ‘I am going,’ said he, ‘to turn Corydon; let us see
whether Virgil’s sheep will recognize their pastor.’ He began to
play. The sheep and goats, which were following one another
towards the mountain, with their heads hanging down, raised
them at the first sound of the flute, and all with a general and
hasty movement turned to the side from+whence the agreeable
noise proceeded. They gradually flocked round the musician,
and listened with motionless attention. He ceased playing, and
the sheep did not stir.
“The shepherd with his staff now obliged them to move on;
but no sooner did the fluter begin again to play than his inno-
cent auditors again returned to him. The shepherd, out of pa-
tence, pelted them with clods of earth, but not one of them
would move. The fluter played with additional skill ; the shep-
herd fell into a passion, whistled, scolded, and pelted the poor
P Tarin a a
1 But then Wiil Carl ti lled poetry.
1890.] Effects of Musical Sounds on Animals. 129
creatures with stones. Such as were hit by them began to
march, but the others refused to stir. At last the shepherd was
forced to entreat our Orpheus to stop his magic sounds; the
sheep then moved off, but continued to stop at a distance as often
as our friend resumed the agreeable instrument.
“ The tune he played was nothing more than a favorite air, at
the time performing at the opera in Milan. As music was our
continual employment, we were delighted with our adventure ;
we reasoned upon it the whole day, and concluded that physical
pleasure is the basis of all interest in Music.”
Having given much time to the domesticated quadrupeds, the
domesticated bipeds, our friends who wear feathers, must be per-
mitted to give their testimony.
Iam again indebted to Prof. Davidson for many interesting
anecdotes, all the more so as the instances recited have the au-
thority of his personal knowledge, or that of others known to
him as truthful and intelligent.
BIRDS AND MUSIC.
First relating to pigeons. “It must have been about 1841
when I had gotten rid of about fifteen pairs of pigeons of different
varieties; but I retained a fine white ‘hen pigeon’ because we all
felt a kind of attachment towards her,—the younger brothers and
sisters and my mother. I was going through the task of learn-
ing the flute from my father’s teaching ; I had only a one-keyed
flute, but of very sweet tone. One white pigeon had always
made herself at home about the back part of the house, frequently
leaving the large pigeon house and coming into the kitchen ; but
after the sale of all the other pigeons she was continually amongst
our feet, and making close friends with one and all. In the
course of my fluting we noticed that this white pigeon became
very much excited over one particular tune, but as to others she
seemed wholly unconcerned. So, to please the younger portion
of the family, as well as my mother, I frequently cleared a
space for the pigeon to perform in and commenced to play. She
would begin to circle round and round in the most excited man-
130 The American Naturalist. (February,
ner, in a space say six feet or more in diameter, crouching low,
spreading out her wings, and cooing in the most intense tones.
It was very interesting to us all, and the louder I played the
more excited became the bird. She never exhibited any feeling
for any other tune. Very frequently my mother would ask a
neighbor or two in to see the performance, and to still further
test the pigeon’s idiosyncrasy, I would begin to play while she
was outside, when she would instantly leave her corn and come
in for the music. Two of my sisters write me that the tune was
‘Rule Britannia, and that the pigeon was then ten years old.
Subsequently I purchased other pigeons and mated her, after
which she evidently considered music too frivolous for such aged
maternity.”
(Zo be continued.)
1890.] American Invertebrate Paleontology. 131
REVIEW OF THE PROGRESS OF AMERICAN INVER-
TEBRATE PALEONTOLOGY FOR THE YEAR 1880.
BY CHARLES R. KEYES.
si INOUGH the number of titles is somewhat in advance,
the results of studies in American invertebrate paleontology
issued during the past twelve months do not compare as favor-
ably as might be expected with those of previous years. Works
of a monographical character have been numerically very lim-
ited; but a goodly proportion of the briefer papers foreshadow
important publications now in a more or less advanced stage of
preparation.
A very considerable number of reprints continue to appear
entirely repaged. It is to be hoped that where this is found
desirable the original pagination will also be allowed to remain
for convenience in reference. The time and patience consumed —
in looking up the correct citations of repaged authors’ editions
detracts greatly from the value of these excerpts by thwarting the
very purpose which they were designed to serve.
The small number of species described during the past year is:
rather surprising, but it clearly indicates that the species from
the most accessible localities have been already described. It
is with considerable satisfaction that the present trend of thought,
as disclosed in the papers of the year, is noted; and that paleon-
tologists have begun to appreciate more fully the direct bearing
and close relations of the science to those branches dealing with
the structure of animals and their distribution in time and space.
The few morphological facts already brought out by the investi-
` gation of fossil forms is only suggestive of the vast and fertile
field open to the student who directs his energies along these
lines. Thus intimately connected with biology, the results of the
study of the material already accumulated cannot but give most
valuable aid in making out the phylogenetic history of the living
zoological groups. And, indeed, the importance of this consid-
Am, Nat.—February.—2.
132 The American Naturalist. [February,
eration cannot be overestimated in the attempt toward a complete
phylogeny of organic beings. Viewed from an anatomical and
embryological standpoint, the dead become rejuvenated; the
“curious stones” live; the rocks disclose the great plan of life.
More lasting, more useful, more worthy of contemplation are
paleontological labors directed thus rather than to the indiscrimi-
nate multiplication of species, to the mere description of curiosities.
Not less important is the recognition of the mutual depend-
ence of paleontology and stratigraphy for the attainment of the
highest and most accurate results in generalizations. Heretofore
these fields have been far too widely separated; and the work of
one has been carried on practically independently of the other,
with often very erroneous conclusions. But the present record
shows that, in one instance at least, an intimate knowledge of both
has been happily combined in the production of a very high grade
of work.
In the Canadian Record of Science for July Henry M. Ami has
a papet On a Species of Goniograptus from the Levis Forma-
tion, Levis, Quebec; and in the October number of the same
journal, Additional Notes on Goniograptus thureauni McCoy, from
the Levis Formation of Canada.
Charles Barrois, in the Faune de Calcaire d’Erbray (Mém. de
‘la Soc. Geol. du Nord, tome III., April, 1889), discusses the rela-
tions of the American and European Devonian faunas; that of
the region in question bearing a great resemblance to the North
American Oriskany and Upper Helderberg.
Charles E. Beecher, in the Memoirs of Peabody Museum,
Yale University, Vol. II., Part 1, has an important contribution
to the knowledge of that rare group of silurian sponges, the
Brachiospongidz ; and, in the September number of the American
Journal of Science, a Note on the Spider Arthrolycosa antiqua
Harger.
In the number for February 4, 1889, Vol. CVIIL, ofthe Comptes
Rendus, is a note on Les Blattes de l'epoque houillére, by Charles
Brongniart.
Samuel Calvin describes a new species of Spirifera from the
Hamilton Group near Iowa City; and Synonymy, Characters and
1890.] American Invertebrate Paleontology. 133
Distribution of Spirifera parryana Hall. Both in the Bulletin of
the Laboratories of Natural History of the State University of Iowa.
H. J. Carter sketches the History of known Fossil Sponges in
Relation to those of the Present, in which some general consid-
erations respecting classification are brought out. Also, Further
Observations on the Foraminiferal Genus Orbitoides of d'Orbigny.
The first is in the October, and the second in the March, number
of the Annals and Magazine of Natural History.
A valuable morphological memoir on the Development of some
Silurian Brachiopoda, by J. M. Clarke and Charles E. Beecher,
forms Part 1., Vol. I., of the Memoirs of the New York State Mu-
seum. Inthe Forty-second Annual Report N. Y. State Museum
the first author has: The Genus Bronteus in the Chemung Rocks
of N. Y.; The Hercynian Question ; and a List of Species con-
stituting the known Fauna and Flora of the Marcellus Epoch in
the State of New York.
William F. Cooper gives a Tabulated List of Fossils known to
occur in the Waverly of Ohio. Bulletin Denison University,
Vol. IV. pp. 123-130.
William H. Dall,in a paper on the Hinge of Pelecypods and
its Development, with an Attempt toward a better Subdivision of
the Group, seeks more immutable criteria than generally adopted,
for the systematic arrangement of the class. American Journal of
Science for December.
William Dawson has a Note on Saccamia eriana in the Ameri-
can Journal of Science for April; and on Fossil Sponges from
the Beds of the Quebec Group of Sir William Logan, in the
Canadian Record of Science for July.
In the Annals and Magazine of Natural History for March, P.
Martin Duncan considers some Points in the Anatomy of the
Species of Palæechinus; and a proposed classification. The
genus is limited, and two North American forms referred to the
group as now restricted.
A. F. Foerste notes some Cambrian Fossils from the Limestone
of Nahant, Mass. Proc. Boston Soc. Nat. Hist., p. 291.
The Geological Department of the British Museum publishes
Part 1. of an exhaustive Catalogue of the Fossil Cephalopods, by
134 The American Naturalist. [February,
Arthur Foord. The portion issued embraces seven families, of
= which are carefully drawn up the characters of each genus.
James Hall discusses some Crustacean Tracks from the Potsdam
Sandstone of Port Henry, N. Y., in the Annual Report of the
New York State Museum. The State Geologist’s Report was
also issued separately in an edition of eight hundred copies.
C. L. Herrick describes about forty new species, and considers
others, in Lists of Waverly Fossils. Bulletin Denison Univer-
sity, Vol. IV., pp. 11-60, and continued on pp. 97—123. In the
American Geologist for February the same writer has Notes on
the Waverly Group of Ohio.
Robert T. Hill publishes a chapter on the Palzontology of the
Trinity Division in the Neozoic Geology of Southwestern Ar-
kansas (Vol. II., Ann. Rept. Ark. Geol. Sur); Paleontology of
the Cretaceous Formations of Texas, Part 1.; and a Check List
of the Invertebrate Fossils from the Cretaceous Formations of
Texas.
In the Canadian Record of Science for April, G. J. Hinde writes
on Archeocyathus Billings, and other Genera allied thereto or
Associated therewith from the Cambrian Strata of North America,
Spain, Sardinia, and Scotland; and in the July number of the
same journal, on a New Genus of Siliceous Sponges from the
Trenton Formation at Ottawa.
Alpheus Hyatt ably discusses the Genesis of the Arietida in —
the Smithsonian Contributions to Knowledge, No. 673.
T. R. Jones has some Notes on Paleozoic Bivalve Entomos-
traca: North American Species. (Can. Annals and Mag. Nat.
Hist., 6th Series, Vol. III.)
T. Rupert Jones and J. W. Kirkby publish a paper on Some
Ostracoda from the Mabou Coal-field of Nova Scotia, in the Geo-
logical Magazine for June. The first author also describes some
species of Palzozoic Ostracoda from Pennsylvania, U. S., in the
American Geologist for December.
Charles R. Keyes has a list and some notes on the Léss j (Post-
Pliocene) fossils of the State, in an Annotated Catalogue of the
Mollusca of Iowa (Bulletin of Essex Institute, Vol. XX-.);
Soleniscus, its Generic Characters and Relations, in THE AMERI-
aaa
1890.] American Invertebrate Paleontology. 135
CAN NATURALIST, May number; Variations Exhibited by a Car-
bonic Gasteropod, American Geologist for June; Note on the
Distribution of Certain Löss Fossils, American Geologist, August,
1889; Lower Carbonic Gastropoda from Burlington, Iowa,
Proceedings Academy Natural Sciences, Philadelphia, for Sep-
tember 24, 1889; the American Species of Polyphemopsis, ibid. ;
Sphzrodoma; A Genus of Fossil Gastropods, ibid.; The Car-
boniferous Echinodermata of the Mississippi Basin, American Jour-
nal of Science, September number; and The Sub-generic Groups
of Naticopsis, American Geologist for October.
F. H. Knowlton describes a Problematic Organism from the
Devonian at the Falls of the Ohio, in the American Journal of
Science, March number.
Joseph Leidy, in the Ann. Rept. Geol. Sur. Pa., for 1887, has a
Notice of Fossils in Caves and Crevices of the Limestone Rocks
of Pennsylvania ; chiefly vertebrates.
J. P. Lesley publishes as Report (P. 4) of the Second Penn-
sylvania Geological Survey, a Dictionary of the Fossils of Penn-
sylvania and neighboring States.
In the American Geologist for March Jules Marcou describes
the Original Locality of Gryphea pitcheri.
G. F. Mathew has: A Second Note on Stenotheca, in the Geo-
logical Magazine, May number; On the Cambrian Organisms in
Acadia, in the Canadian Record of Science for July; and On
Remarkable Organisms of the Upper Silurian and Devonian of
New Brunswick, in the Transactions of the Royal Society of
Canada, Vol. VI.
S. A. Miller has issued North American Geology and Paleon-
tology, with a catalogue of the species described to date.
Kentucky Fossil Shells from the Silurian and Devonian rocks _
are described by Henry Nettleroth in one of the monographs of
the Ky. Geol. Survey.
H. A. Nicholson discusses the Relations between the Genera
css en Hinde, and Roemeria Ed. & H., and the Genus
Schliiter, in the October number of the Geol. Mag.
A. S Packard briefly notes some Recent Discoveries in the
Carboniferous Flora and Fauna of Rhode Island, American Jour-
136 The American Naturalist. [February,
nal of Science, May; and in the Proceedings of the Boston So-
ciety of Natural History, Vol. XXIV., pp. 209-11, are some
Palzontological Notes.
E. N. S. Ringueberg reviews the Calceocrinide, with Descrip-
tions of New Species, in Annals of N. Y. Acad. Science, Vol. IV.,
1889.
Ferdinand Roemer has a paper, bearing the date 1888, Ueber
eine durch die Haufigkeit Hippuritenartiger Chamiden ausge-
zeichnete Fauna der oberturonen Kreide von Texas.
J. M. Safford and A. W. Vogdes, in the Proceedings Academy
Natural Sciences of Philadelphia, describe New Species of Fossil
Crustacea from the lower Silurian of Tennessee.
Charles Schuchert gives a List of Fossils occurring in the
Oriskany Sandstone of Maryland, New York, and Ontario. An-
nual Report New York State Museum for 1888.
Samuel Scudder has the Oldest Known Insect Larva, Mor-_
molycoides articulatus, from the Connecticut river Rocks. Mem.
Boston Soc. Nat. Hist., Vol. III., No. 13.
N. S. Shaler notes the Occurrence of Fossils of the Cretaceous
Age on the Island of Martha’s Vineyard, in the Bulletin Museum
of Comparative Zodlogy, Vol. XVE Nok.
In the American Geologist for August some New Characters of
Dophyphyllum simcoense Billings are given by Will H. Sherzer.
Charles Wachsmuth and Frank Springer have, in the Proceed-
ings of the Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia, dated
November 27, 1888, two morphological contributions on the
Discovery of the Ventral Structure of Taxocrinus and Haplo-
crinus, and Consequent Modifications in the Classification of the
Crinoidea; and Crotalocrinus: Its Structure and Zoological
Position.
Charles D. Walcott has an important article in the May and
July numbers of the American Journal of Science on the Strati-
graphic Position of the Olenellus Fauna in North America and
Europe. In advance sheets of the Proceedings of the U. S.
National Museum for 1888, the same author describes New
Genera and Species of Fossils from the Middle Cambrian; a
Fossil Lingula Preserving the Cast of the Peduncle; anda New
1890. ] American Invertebrate Paleontology. 137
Genus and Species of Inarticulate Brachiopod from the Trenton
Limestone.
Charles A. White considers the Permian Formation of Texas
in THE AMERICAN NATURALIST for January; and Invertebrate
Fossils from the Pacific Coast in Bulletin 51, U. S. Geological
Survey.
J. F. Whiteaves, in Contributions to Canadian Palzontology,
Vol. I., Part 2, has: On some Fossils from the Hamilton Forma-
tion of Ontario; Fossils of the Triassic Rocks of British Colum-
bia; and on Some Cretaceous Fossils from British Columbia. In
the Transactions Royal Society of Canada, Vol. VIL, Descrip-
tions of Eight New Species of Fossils from the Cambro-Silurian
Rocks of Manitoba.
The Bulletin of the American Museum of Natural History,
Vol. II, No. 2, contains, by R. P. Whitfield, Observations on
some Imperfectly Known Fossils from the Calciferous Sandrock
of Lake Champlain, and Descriptions of several New Forms;
Additional Notes on Asaphus canalis Conrad; Description of a
New Form of Fossil balanoid Cirripede from the Marcellus Shale
of New York; ‘and a Note on the Faunal Resemblance between
the Cretaceous Formation of New Jersey and that of the Gulf States.
H. S. Williams has an abstract in the Proceedings A. A. A. A.
for 1888 on the Use of Fossils in Determining the Age of
Geological Terranes; and in the American Geologist for April, the
Relation of the Devonian Fauna of Iowa.
N. H. Winchell notices the Discovery of Lingula and Para-
doxides in the Red Quartzites of Minnesota, in the Bulletin
Minnesota Academy of Natural Science, Vol. III.
Anthony Woodward, in the Journal of the New York Micro-
-scopical Society, gives a Preliminary List of Foraminifera from
Post-Pliocene Sand at Santa Barbara, California.
Henry Woodward notes the Discovery of Turrilepas in the
Utica Formation of Ottawa, Canada, in the Geo. Mag. for June.
E. O. Ulrich has some Polyzoa and Ostracoda from the Cam-
bro-Silurian Rocks of Manitoba, in Contributions to the Micro-
Palzontology of the Cambro-Silurian Rocks of Canada, Part 3;
on Lingulasma, a new Genus, and Eight New Species of Lingula
138 The American Naturalist. [February,
and Trematis, in Amer. Geol. for June; and in the same journal for
April, Preliminary Description of New Lower Silurian Sponges.
Warren Upham mentions some Marine Shells and Fragments of
Shells in the Till near Boston, in American Journal of Science,
May number.
AUTOTOMY IN THE CRAB.
BY E. A. ANDREWS.
Te crabs when roughly handled may throw off one or
more legs at a point close to the body, is a fact well-known
and often observed. ;
As little bleeding takes place in such cases, and as the crab
may thus escape complete destruction, and is able to grow new
legs, this power of self-amputation is of evident advantage to the
species, and might at first sight be regarded as an intelligent act
consciously performed by the crab under certain circumstances.
The experimental work of Léon Fredericq has, however,
demonstrated that such amputations are merely reflex acts
brought about by special mechanisms, and may be included with
similar phenomena in other animals under the term “ Autotomy.”
From the various publications upon this subject we may ab-
stract the chief facts relating to the crab, as given by the above
author in his Travaux du Laboratoire, I.-II., 1887-8.
He there shows that this rupture of the limbs is not due to
fragility, since the weight necessary to break off a limb is many
times that of the crab’s body, and the rupture thus produced is
an irregular one, taking place generally at some joint of the limb,
and not at the normal “ plane of rupture.”
That, moreover, this autotomy is not a voluntary act was
shown as follows: A crab when fastened by one or more legs
endeavors to escape, but does not hit upon the expedient of
throwing off a fastened leg, though if even a free leg is seriously
injured, the crab then amputates it. When the brain (supra-
1890.] Autotomy in the Crab. 139
cesophageal ganglion) is removed, the self-amputation may still
be brought about: the same result follows when the brain is
thrown out of the experiment by anzsthetizing the animal with
ether or chloroform,
Peripheral stimuli may be applied to the limb in various ways
in order to bring about autotomy; thus crushing or cutting the
segments of the leg (unless it be the terminal ones) is very soon
followed by the falling off of the leg at a definite point near the
body, while alcohol, etc., heat, or electric shocks applied to the
limb produce the same result. In the latter case the time between
the application of the shock and ‘the resulting autotomy was
measured and found to vary much.
The centre for the reflex throwing off of the legs is in the
thoracic ganglion mass, since the removal of this mass destroys
the autotomy, and since in one case electric stimuli applied to this
mass brought about the ordinary autotomy!
Concerning the mechanisms by which the impulse going out
from this centre is able to bring about the remarkable rupture of
the limb at a definite place, the author points out the existence of
a special groove around the limb of the crab, on the second seg-
ment from the body, and that this segment is moved in two di-
rections by two muscles, raised upward by an extensor and
brought downward by a flexor muscle. These two muscles are
attached to the upper and lower borders of the second segment
at the end towards the first, and pass into the first. When auto-
tomy takes place the limb separates by a clear-cut plane passing
across the second segment through the above groove ; the stump
or first segment, with a small ring from the second, is now held
forcibly in an elevated position. Experiment shows that the
flexor may be cut without destroying the power of autotomy,
while when the extensor is cut autotomy does not take place.
The action of the extensor muscle in autotomy, the author ex-
plains as follows, with the use of the diagram reproduced in Fig.
1. The stimulus coming from the leg to the thoracic centre re-
-sults in the sending out of stimuli to the muscles of the leg, the
strong contraction of the extensor (ex) brings the leg forcibly
against the carapace (c) or the fingers of the experimenter, etc.,
140 The American Naturalist. [February
till the reaction produces strain enough to rupture the second
segment (s) at the groove or weakest point (a).
Some observations made upon the region where autotomy
takes place, or plane of rupture as we may call it, seem of inter-
est in supplementing the above account from an anatomical
" point of view. In the crab Libinia the
Æ, Chitinous wall of the limbs is exceeding
(:J# thick and strong, so that to break it at all
=} —and it will not break with a clear-cut
fracture—considerable force is required, so
that it seemed to me quite puzzling that the
crab could throw off its legs with a smooth,
clear-cut fracture, and this by the applica-
tion of some force acting inside a firm
cylinder.
Experiments made were confirmatory of
the facts demonstrated by Léon Fredericq—
that autotomy is a reflex act, and that ap-
parently and probably it is brought about
by muscular contraction forcing the limb
against the thorax.
Examination of the second segment
F; gd shows these two grooves around it (/ and
d, Fig. 2) differing in appearance, but both conspicuous from the
absence of hairs and hair pores in the exoskeleton along these
lines. When autotomy takes place the limb separates along the
proximal line ( ), and the exposed edges of the exoskeleton are
smooth and sharp cut. The ex-
posed surface of the soft central
part of the limb is covered by a
firm membrane except at the
Fu. 2 centre, where there is a rounded
I hole with a little torn tissue and
blood exposed. After a time a chitinous layer appears over the
end of the stump or short ring remaining as representative of the
second segment. Though artificial rupture cannot ordinarily be
brought about at this “plane of rupture,” yet when the limb is
j
$
XD O
ADO
OX) OOO
D OCX D
v OOO O
SN wate S?
S
>
G Or
RK
XY
Sx
+
A
<
‘>
$
xX
ay
+
1890.] Autotomy in the Crab. 141
decalcified in Perenyi’s fluid, it readily separates there just as in
autotomy.
Sections of this region of the second segment show that the
exoskeleton presents a definite plane of discontinuity in the lam-
ellar structure at the proximal groove ( , Fig. 2), this plane being
at right angles to the length of the limb, but bending abruptly
in the outer part of the exoskeleton, so that after autotomy the
exoskeleton of the stump of the limb is somewhat rounded off at
its outer edge (x, Fig. 3.) This plane of discontinuity is quite
different from the pores that penetrate the exoskeleton, and con-
nect with the peculiar scale-like “ hairs” (4, Fig. 3.) Extending
from this exoskeleton part of the “plane of rupture,” there is a
definite structure in the soft part of the limb forming a double
annular curtain ( 2, r, Fig. 4), extending inward from the epidermis
to the central nerve and blood vessels (# and 4), and thus divid-
ing the cavity of the second segment into a proximal and a
distal part,—nearly separated from one another. This curtain is
a membranous structure of which the distal part is more delicate,
the proximal stouter and of a double nature. This proximal
membrane is seen on section to remain upon the stump of the
leg, as the conspicuous membrane mentioned above, after normal
autotomy.
There is thus a definite “ plane of rupture,” or preformed me-
chanism consisting of a modification (7) in the exoskeleton (ex),
and of a membranous ingrowth ({, 7), which together account
for the peculiar surface presented after autotomy takes place.
The explanation of the gradual acquisition by the crabs of this
highly complex and perfected form of autotomy by natural
selection presents difficulties which may, I judge, be lessened if
we can show reasons for supposing that the mechanisms involved
have their homologues in other animals, and have risen to their
perfect expression in the crabs in connection with change of
function.
Leon Fredericq has shown that the chelz are thrown off easily,
by autotomy, in the craw-fish, while the other legs are either
thrown off with difficulty, in the lobster, or not at all, in his ex-
periments on the crayfish. Examinations of these limbs showed
142 The American Naturalist. [February,
that (as easily can be verified) the chele have, as in the crab, a
groove on the second segment, while the other legs present a free
joint at the corresponding point, making thus two segments in
place of one, or seven in all in place of six in the chelz.
Considering the relations of the crab to the Macrurans, there
seems no doubt that the second segment in the leg of the former
represents the fused second and third segments in the latter; the
“plane of rupture” corresponds in ‘position with the free joint
between the second and third segments of the leg in the lobster
or crayfish.
The appearances seen on sectioning this plane, may, I judge,
be explained as a modification of a former free joint; the double
membrane and line of discontinuity of exoskeleton representing
the invagination of body-wall seen at an ordinary movable joint
where tendons for attachment of muscles are formed.
As the lobster appears to have the power, though feebly de-
veloped, of throwing off the legs at the free joint between the
second and third segments, and as this power is better developed
in the chelz, where fusion of the above segments has taken place,
may we not suppose that the more perfect and ready autotomy
in the crab has been gradually derived from the former conditions
as a “ change of functions” took place from a movable joint to a
definite “ plane of rupture” ?
That this “plane of rupture” is found in the Megalops (as I
infer from examinations of alcoholic specimens) does not, I think,
invalidate the above conclusion.
Of the two grooves seen on the second segment of the crab's leg it is the proximal
one that corresponds to the rupture plane of the lobster’s chelze; the distal one being
represented in the lobster by a deep depression, possibly bearing some relation to the
exopodite.
PLATE VI.
P pA}
a ra p Le HY Vf
arobe NS K
LA P L y
x ‘pr
Ny
Fic. 4.
1890.] History of Garden Vegetables. 143
THE HISTORY OF GARDEN VEGETABLES.
BY E. L. STURTEVANT.
(Continued from p. 48. Vol. XXIV., 1890.)
PARSNIP CHERVIL. Cherophyllum bulbosum L.
T roots of this plant, appearing almost like a short carrot,
but generally smaller, are eaten boiled; a sub-variety has
the roots nearly round.’ The wild plant is described by Came-
rarius? in 1588, and by Clusius? in 1601, and is also named by
Bauhin‘ in 1623. Asa cultivated plant it seems to have been
first noted about 1855, when the root is described as seldom so
` large as a hazel nut, while in 1861 it had. attained the size and
shape of the French round carrot.® It appeared in American
seed catalogues in 1884 or earlier, and was described by Burrê
for American gardens in 1863. It was known in England in
1726, but was not under esculent culture.’
The Parsnip chervil’, turnip-rooted chervil or tuberous-rooted
chervil, is called in France, cerfeuil tubereux, cerfeuil bulbeux ; in
Germany, 4orbelrube, kerbelrube ; in Flanders and Holland, noll-
kervel; in Denmark, 4yorvelroe ; in Spain, perifollo bulboso®
PATIENCE DOCK. Rumex patientia L.
This species is less acid than the common sorrel, and is occa-
sionally grown for the same purposes. De Candolle? thinks it
the Rumex sativus of Pliny. The name monk's rhubarb, or rha-
barbarum monachorum of Tragus, 1552, indicates its presence in
1 Bon Jard., 1884, p. 37.
2 Camerarius. Hort., 1588.
? Treas. of Bot., I., 74.
8 Vilmorin. Les Pl. Pot., 1883, 79.
9 Decandoille. Geog. Bot,, II., 847.
144 The American Naturalist. [February,
the gardens of the monasteries, It was called patentia by Park-
inson in 1640, and is noted by Turner” in 1538, as having in
England the common name of Patience. It is noted as cultivated
and its use as a vegetable in nearly all the early botanies, and is
recorded in American gardens in 1806." There are no varieties
described.
Patience Dock or Herb Patience is called in France, osedle
spinard, patience, parelle, epinard immortel, choux de Paris, doche,
dogue ; in Germany, Englischer spinat, winter-spinat ; in Flanders,
blijvende spinazie ; in Denmark, engelsk spinat; in Italy, dapazio,
rombice ; in Spain, romaza, acedera espinaca, espianaca perpetua ;
in Portugal, /abaca ;° in Norway, have-syre; ; in the Mauritius,
patience
PEA. Pisum sativum D.C.
The history of the garden pea is difficult to trace, as its sepa-
ration from the field pea cannot be expected to have been noted
in early and popular reference. The use of the seed as an escu-
lent, however, dates from a very remote antiquity, as pease have
been excavated from the ruins of ancient Troy,” and have been
recovered from tombs at Thebes. Its culture among the
Romans is evident from the mentions by Columella, Pliny and
Palladius.” There is every reason to believe from the paucity of
description that peas were not then in their present esteem as a
vegetable, and were considered inferior.to other plants of the
leguminous order. The first distinct mention of the garden pea
that I find is by Ruellius™ in 1536, who says there are two kinds
of peas, one the field pea and trailing ; the other a climbing pea,
whose fresh pods with their peas were eaten. Green peas, how-
10 Turner. aggro I 538.
11 McMahon. rican Gar. Cal., 1806, 550.
12 Vilmorin. fee “PL. Pot Pot., 395.
18 Schubeler. Culturpflanz, 81.
14 Bojer. Hort. Maur., 1897, 72.
15 Decandolle. Orig. Des. Pl. Cult., 272.; Am. Antiquarian, Oct. 1880, 66.
16 Wilkinson. Ancient Egyptians
17 Srey ? II., c. 10; Lib. XL, c. 1.; Pliny, Lib. XVIII., c. 32; Palladius:
Lib. X.,
18 Ruellius. rd Nat. Stirp., 1536, 439.
1890.] History of Garden Vegetables. 145
ever, were not a common vegetable at the close of the 17th cen-
tury. The author of a life of Colbert, 1695, says: “It is fright-
ful to see persons sensual enough to purchase green peas at the
price of 50 crowns per litron.” This kind of pompous expendi-
ture prevailed much at the French Court, as will be seen by a
letter of Madame de Maintenon, dated May 10, 1696. “ This
subject of peas continues to absorb all others,” says she; “the
anxiety to eat them, the pleasure of having eaten them and the de-
sire to eat them again, are the three great matters which have been
discussed by our princes for four days past. Some ladies, even after
having supped at the Royal table, and well supped too, returning to
their own homes, at the risk of suffering from indigestion, will
again eat peas before going to bed. It is both a fashion and a mad-
ness.”® In England garden peas appear to have been rare in the
early part of Elizabeth’s reign, as Fuller observes they were seldom
seen, except those which were brought from Holland, and “ these,”
says he, “were dainties for ladies, they came so far and cost so
dear.”” These references may, however, refer to peas out of season,
but in 1683, Worlidge” says the meaner sort “ have been long ac-
quainted with our English air and soil, but the sweet and delicate
sorts of them have been introduced into our gardens only in this
latter age.”
I propose, however, to only trace out the antiquity of the var-
ious forms which include varieties, not the history of the species,
nor the varieties themselves. The varieties noted are innumer-
able, and occur with white and green seed, with smooth and with
wrinkled seed, with seed black spotted at the hilum, with large
and small seed; as well as with plants with large and small
aspect; on dwarf, trailing and tall plants, and those with edible
I. WHITE AND GREEN PEAS.
Lyte, in his edition of Dodonzus, 1586, mentions the trail-
ing pea, or what Vilmorin classifies as the half-dwarf, as having
round seed, of color sometimes white, sometimes green.
19 Gard.
Chron., 1843,
20 Glasspoole. Ag. ae b. 1875, 520.
21 Syst. Hort. By J. W. Gent., 1683, 197.
146 The American Naturalist. [February,
II. SMOOTH SEEDED.
Dodonzus, in his Frumentorum, 1566, describes this form
under Pisum minus, a tall pea, called in Germany erweyssen ; in
Brabant, erwiten ; in France, pois ; by the Greeks, ochron ; the
pods containing eight to ten round peas of a yellow color at first,
then green. This pea was called in England, Middle Peason, in
itor
III. WRINKLED SEED.
The first certain mention I find is by Tragus in 1552, under
Phaseolus. These are also recorded in Belgian and German gar-
dens by Dodonzus in his Frumentorum, 1 566, under Pisum
majus, the dry seed angular, uneven, of a white color in some
varieties, of a sordid color in others. He calls them roomsche
erwiten, groote erwiten, stock erwiten, and the plant he says does
not differ from his Pisum minus, and indeed he uses the same
figure for the two. Pena and Lobel in 1570,” describe the same
pea as in Belgian and English gardens, under the name An Pisum
angulosum hortorum quadratum Plinii, but the seed of a ferrugin-
ous and reddish color, and Lobel” in 1591 figures the seed,
using the name Pisum quadratum, and it seems to be the Great
Peason, Garden Peason, or Branch Peason of Lyte in 1586, as
he gives Dodonzus’ common names as synonyms. In 1686,
Ray ™ describes this class under the name of Rouncival, and re-
fers to Gerarde’s picture of Pisum majus, or Rowncivall Pease,
in 1597, as being the same. This word Rouncival, in white and
green varieties, was used by McMahon ” in America in 1806, and
Rouncivals by Gardiner and Hepburn *® in 1818, and Thorburn in
1828. The first good description of the seed is, however, in
1708, when Lisle” calls it honey-comb or pitted. Mr. Knight,
a nurseryman of Bedfordshire, before 1726” did much for the
2 Lobel. Ic., 1591, II., 66 and index.
233 Pena & Lobel. Adv., 1570, 396.
235 McMahon. Am. Gard. Cal., 1806, II.
2 Gardiner & Hepburn. Am. Gard., 1818, 59; Thorburn’s Cat., 1828.
27 Lisle. Husb., 1757, 169.
28 Townsend. Seedsman, 1726, 2.
1890.] History of Garden Vegetables. 147
improvement of the pea, and sent out several wrinkled varieties
Up to this time the wrinkled peas do not seem to have been in
general esteem. The Knight pea, the seed rough, uneven and
shrivelled, the plant tall, was in American gardens in 1821,” and
quite a list of Knight’s peas are under present cultivation.
IV. BLACK-EYED PEAS,
These are mentioned as of an old sort by Townsend ® in 1726,
and are grown now under the name of Black-eyed Marrowfat.
V. DWARF PEAS,
These are mentioned by Tournefort® in 1700, and are referred
by him to 1665. I find no earlier distinct reference.
VI. HALF-DWARFS.
These are the ordinary trailing peas as mentioned by the
earlier botanies, as for instance the Pisum minus of Camerarius,
1586, etc.
VIE. TALL PEAS.
These are the forms described by the early botanies as requir-
ing sticking, as the Pisum majus of Camerarius, 1586 ; the Pisum
of Fuchsius, 1542; Phasiol or faselen of Tragus, 1552, etc.
VIII, EDIBLE-PODDED OR SUGAR PEAS.
The pods and peas of the large climbing pea are recorded as
eaten, as also the green pods of the trailing form, by Ruellius *
in 1536, and this manner of eating 1s recorded by later authors.
We now have two forms, those with straightish and those with
contorted pods. The first of these is figured by Gerarde® in
29 Cobbett. Am. Gard., 1821.
30 Tournefort. Inst., 1719, 394-
31 Ruellius. 1. c., 43
32 Gerarde. Herb., 1597, 1045.
Am. Nat. —February.—3.
148 The American Naturalist. [February,
1597, is described by Ray® in 1686, Tournefort in 1700, etc.
The second form is mentioned by Worlidge* in 1683 as the
Sugar pease with crooked cods, by Ray* as Sickle pease. In
the Jardinier Frangais, 1651, Bonnefonds describes them as the
Dutch pea, and adds that until lately they were very rare, and
Roquefort says they were introduced to France by the French
ambassador in Holland about 1600. In 1806, McMahon in-
cludes three kinds among American esculents.
About 1683, Meager* names nine kinds in English culture ;
in 1765 Stevenson,” thirty-four kinds; in 1783 Bryant * names
fourteen; 1806 McMahon ® has twenty-two varieties; Thor-
burn’s Calendar, 1821, contains eleven sorts, and his seed cata-
logue of 1828 had twenty-four sorts ; in 1883 Vilmorin describes
one hundred and forty-nine; in the report of the New York Ag-
ricultural Experiment Station for 1884, ninety-three varieties are
described in full.
Peas and peason are named in America in 1535, 1540, 1562,
etc., but we cannot be sure from the references whether peas or
beans of the pea-shape were intended. In 1602, however,
peas were sown by Gosnold“ in the Elizabeth Islands off the
coast of Massachusetts, were grown from French seed by the
Indians of the Ottawa river in 1613,“ were grown in excellent
quality by the colonists of Massachusetts in 1629,” and in 1779
were among the Indian foods destroyed by General Sullivan in
western New York.*
The fea is called in France, pois; in Germany, erse; in
Flanders and Holland, erwż; in Denmark, haveoert ; in Italy,
33 Ray. Hist., 1686, 891.
34 Syst. Hort., 1683, 197.
35 Gard. Chron., 1843, 71.
36 Meager, Eng. Gard., 89.
31 Stevenson. Gard. Cal., 1765, go.
38 Bryant. Fl. Dict., 1783, 305.
3 McMahon. Am. Gard. Cal., 1806.
4 Smith’s Virg. Pinkerton Coll, XIII, 20.
“1 Parkman. Pion. of Fr., 352.
#2 Higginson, Mass. Hist. Soc. Col., rst ser., I, 118.
43 Conover. Early Hist. of Geneva, 47.
1890.] History of Garden Vegetables. 149
pisello; in Spain, gutsante ; in Portugal, ervilha ;* in Norway,
ert ;* in Greece, pizelia, aukos ; * in Russia, gorock.”
In Bengali, matar,® burra-mutur ; in Ceylon, rutagoradia ; *
in Cochin China, dau-tlon ;® in Egyptian, desilleh ; in Hindu-
stani, muttir, matar, dana, buttani;® in India, mutur ;™ in
Japan, wan, nora mame ;* in Sanscrit, harenso;* in Tamil,
puttanie ;* in Telinga, goondoo sani gheloo.®
PEANUT. Arachis hypogaea L.
This is rather a plant of field than garden culture, yet it is in-
cluded by Vilmorin among his kitchen garden esculents. It
seems to be of New World origin, as jars filled with the nuts
have been found in the mummy pits of Peru and Pachacamac,”
as I have myself verified at the National Museum, and Bentham®™
inclines to the same belief, as the other known species of the
genus, five in number, are all Brazilian. Garcilasso de la Vega,”
who was a boy at the time of the conquest of Peru, speaks of
this plant under the name of yuchic, called mani by the Span-
iards. The first writer who notes it is Oviedo in his Cronica de
las Indias, who says the Indians cultivate very much the fruit
mani ; a little later Monardes (1569) describes a plant which is
probably this. Before this the French colonists, sent in 1555
to the Brazilian coast, became acquainted with it under the name
of mandobi, which Jean de Lery describes.” It was figured by
Laet in 1625," and by Marcgrav in 1648” as the anchic of
the Peruvians, the mani of the Spaniards.
# Vilmorin. Les Pl. Pot., 423.
Schubeler. Culturpfl., 136. |
Peru,
53 Gray. Bot. U. S. Exp. Ex., 424.
Pai ie Royal Coun., Hak. Soc., Ed. IL., 360.
pear Bens: 2he8, 9.
150 The American Naturalist, (February,
It was included among garden plants by McMahon in 1806,
and Burr in 1863 describes three varieties, but Jefferson speaks
of its culture in Virginia in 1781. Its culture was introduced to
France in 1802,” and it was described among pot-herbs by Noi-
sette” in 1829.
The peanut, earth nut, ground nut, grass nut, pindar, or earth
almond, is called in France arachide, pistache de terre, souterraine,
anchic, arachine, feve de terre, noisette de terre, pistache d Amerique,
pois de terre; in Germany, erdnuss, erdeichel; in Italy, cece di
terra ; in Spain, chufa, cocahueta, alfonsigo ; in Portugal, amen-
duinas® ; in the Mauritius, pistache ®
Birdwood" gives a Sanscrit name doochanaka ; Hindustani,
moongphulli, booe-moong ; Tamil, vayer, nelay-cordalay ; Telinga,
nela senaglu, veru-sanaga; in Sumatra, cachang-goring. In An-
gola, mpinda or ginguba ;™ in Egypt, foul sennar, sennar-bean.®
In Tagalo, mani; in Burma, myae-dat.
PENNYROYAL. Mentha pulegium L,
The leaves of pennyroyal are sometimes used as a condiment.
Mawe,“ in England, in 1778, calls it a fine aromatic, and it was
among American pot-herbs in 1806." It was in high repute
among the ancients, and had numerous virtues ascribed to it by
both Dioscorides and Pliny, and from the frequent reference to it
in Anglo-Saxon and Welsh works on medicine, we may infer that
it was much esteemed in northern Europe. It has now fallen
into disuse.
Pennyroyal, in old herbals puloil royal, a name derived from the
Latin puleium regium, from its supposed efficacy in destroying
57 Bon Jard., 1882, 685.
58 Noisette. Man., 1829, 329.
59 Vilmorin. Les PI. Pot., II.
6 Bojer. Hort. Maurit., 1837, 116.
6l Birdwood. Veg. Prod. of Bomb., 117, 299.
6 Pickering. Ch. Hist., 736.
6t Mawe. Gard., 1778.
& McMahon. Am. Gard. Cal., 1806.
66 Pharmacographia, 1779, 486.
1890. | History of Garden Vegetables. 151
fleas, is called in France menthe pouliot ;* in Germany, polei;
in Holland, foley; in Italy, pulegio; in Greece, gluphone or
vlehont ; by the Turks, filis cun; in Egypt, hobag.®
PEPPERMINT. Mentha piperita L.
Peppermint is grown on a large scale for the sake of the oil
which is obtained by distillation, and which finds large use for
flavoring candies and cordials, but especially in medicine. There
are large centres of its culture in the UnitedjStates, Europe, and
Asia, but we are now concerned with its appearance as a pot-
herb, for which it is grown to a limited extent, the leaves used
for seasoning. It is spoken of as if not a garden plant by Ray,”
in 1724, who describes two varieties, the broad and narrow
leaved. In 1778 it is included by Mawe™ among garden herbs;
in 1806 noticed among American garden plants,” and is now an
escape from cultivation. I find no notice of the peppermint pre-
ceeding 1700, when it is mentioned by Plukenet” and Tourne-
fort,” and is noted as a wild plant only.
Peppermint is called in France menthe poivree; in Germany,
pfeffermunze; in Denmark, pebbermynte;™ in the Mauritius,
pepermenthe ;” in India, beelluta or panee kula;™ in Egypt,
lemmane or nana; in Bengali and Hindustani, pudina, also in
Hindustani, zana ; in Japan, faki."
PEPPERS. Capsicum annuum L.
This plant is of American origin, and is first mentioned by
Peter Martyr in an epistle dated September, 1493, wherein he
says Columbus brought home “ pepper more pungent than that
6! Vilmorin. Les Pl. Pot., 354-
16 Speede. Ind. Handb. of Conk. 183.
T Pickering. Ch. Hist., 671.
152 The American Naturalist. [February,
from Caucasus.’” It is also mentioned as a condiment by
Chanca, physician to the fleet of Columbus in his second voyage
to the West Indies, in a letter written in 1494 to the chapter of
Seville.” It had already existed in tropical and southern Amer-
ica under cultivation in numerous varieties. These have been
described under many specific names by Fingerhuth ® and other
botanists, but those varieties at present under northern cultivation
can all be referred to the annual species, although differing ex-
ceedingly in the form, color, and quality of their fruits. These
varieties furnish a number of groups which are quite distinctly
defined, and which seem in many cases to present specific char-
acters, and these groups or types have existed unchanged now
for several centuries, despite the different conditions to which
they have been exposed.
In the varieties under our present cultivation, the only ones
which I propose to notice, we have distinct characters in the calyx
of several of the groups; and in the fruit being pendulous and
erect, and it is worthy of note that the pendulous varieties have a
pendulous bloom as well as fruit, and the erect varieties have erect
bloom, and some heavy fruitse are erect, while some light fruits
are pendulous; and in the quality of the fruit, as for instance all
the sweet peppers having a like calyx; and in the color of the
fruit. While again there may seem at first to be considerable
variability in the fruits even on the same plant, yet a more care-
ful examination shows that this variability is more apparent than
real, and comes from a suppression or distortion of growth, all
really being of a similar type.
The history of the appearance of each of these groups can
best be seen by the synonymy, which is founded upon figures
given with the descriptions, and which is intended to be con-
servative rather than complete.
I. The calyx embracing the fruit.
(a.) Fruit pendulous.
13 Irving. Columbus, III., 425, I., 238.
5 Fingerhuth. Monog. Gen. Capsici, 1832.
1890] History of Garden Vegetables. 153
This form seems to have been the first introduced, and presents
fruits of extreme pungency, and is undoubtedly that described
as brought to Europe by Columbus.
It presents varieties with straight and recurved fruit; and the
fruit when ripe is often much contorted and wrinkled.
Capsicum longum. D.C. ex., Fing., t., VI.
Siliguastrum tertium.” Langer Indianischer pfeffer. Fuch.,
1542, 733.
Siliquastrum minus. Fuch., |. c., 732.
Indianischer pfeffer. Siliquastrum. Roszlin, 1550, 214.
Indianischer pfeffer. Trag., 1552, 928.
Piper indicum. Cam. epit., 1586, 347.
Capsicum oblongius Dodonei. Lugd., 1587, 632.
Piper indicum minus recurvis siliquis. Hort. Eyst., 1613, 1713.
Piper indicum maximum longum. Hort. Eyst., 1613, 1713.
Capsicum recurvis siliquis. Dod., 1616, 716.
Piper Calecuticum, sive Capsicum oblongius. J. Bauh., 1650,
IL; 943.
Siliquastrum, Ind. pfeffer. Pancov., 1673, n. 296.
Piper Capsicum. Chabr., 1677, 297.
Piment de Cayenne. Vilm., 1885, 151.
Long Red Cayenne. Ferry.
Mexican Indian, four varieties, one the exact variety of Fuch-
sius, 1542.
_ Siliquastrum majus. Fuch., 1542, 732.
Long Yellow Cayenne. Hend.
Capsicum longum luteum. Fing., t. VII.
According to Sloane * the av are additional synonyms
as taken from non-botanical writers.
Poivre indic. cornu. Lery, 205.
Axi longum acre, Martyr. Axi lungo. F. Colon, Vit., 74.
Axi, or West Indian Pepper. Purchas, 1100, 1106
White and red long pepper. Carder, ib., 1190.
Pepper growing on trees in a picked ee running out, Lay-
field, ib., 1173.
Pepper growing in long cods. Smith's Obs., 54-
8l Sloane. Cat., 1696, 39-
154 The American Naturalist. ` [February,
Red pepper like a child’s coral two inches long. Ligon, 79.
Quein-boucoup. Thevet, Cosm., 938.
(4.) Fruits erect.
Capsicum annuum acuminatum. Fing., t. II.
Piper ind. minimum erectum. Hort. Eyst., 1613, 1713.
Piper ind. medium longum erectum. Hort. Eyst., 1613, 1713.
Piper longum minus siliquis recurvis. Jonston, Dendrog., 1662,
G LVI.
Piment du Chili. Vilm., 1883, 410.
Chili pepper. NVilm., 1885, 151.
Red Cluster. Vilm., Alb. de Cl.
Yellow Chili. Hend.
II. Calyx pateriform, not covering the flattened base of the fruit.
(a.) Fruit long, tapering, pendent.
_ Piper indicum sive siliquastrum. Pin., 1561, 12.
Capsicum actuari. Lob. Obs., 1576, 172; ic., 1591, L, 316.-*
Capsicum majus. Lugd., 1587, 632.
Capsicum longioribus siliguis. Ger., 1597, 292.
y Piper indicum. Matth. Op., 1598, 434.
» Capsicum oblongioribus siliquis. Dod., 1616, 716.
Pepe d India. Cast. Dur., 1617, 344.
Figures 13 and 14, counting in order. Piso, de Ind., 1658,
226.
Guinea pepper or garden coral. Pomet, 1748, 125.
_ Piper indicum bicolor. Blackw. Herb., 1754, n. 129, f. II.
Piment rogue long. Vilm., 1883, 409.
Long red capsicum or Guinea. Vilm., 1885, 150.
(6.) Fruit short, rounding, pendent.
Stliquastrum quartum. Fuch., 1542, 734.
Stliquastrum cordatum. Cam. Epit., 1586, 348.
Fig. 2 and 6. Piso, 1658, 225.
Piper cordatum. Jonston, Dend., 1662, t. LVI.
Capsicum cordiforme, Mil. Pae, t IX
Oxheart. Thorb.
New Oxheart. Thorb.
1890.] History of Garden Vegetables. 155
III. Calyx funnel form, not embracing base of fruit.
(a.) Fruit pendent; long.
Piper indicum medium. Hort. Eyst., 1613, 1713.
Piper siliquis flavis. Hort. Eyst., 1613, 1713.
Piper indicum aureum latum. Hort. Eyst., 1613, 1713.
Fig. in Hernandez. Nova Hisp., 1651, 137.
Piper indicum longioribus siliquis rubi. Swert., 1654, t. 35, f. 3.
Piper vulgatissime. Jonston, 1662, t. LVI.
Piper oblongum recurvis siliquis. Jonston, 1662, t. LVI.
Capsicum fructu conico albicante, per maturitakem miniato,
Dill., 1774, t. 60.
Piment Jaune long. Vilm., 1883, 409.
Long Yellow Capsicum. Vilm., 1885, 151.
(6.) Fruit pendent; round.
Siliquastrum rotundum.. Cam. Epit., 1586, 348.
Piper rotundum majus surrectum. Jonston, 1662, t. LVI. (as
figured.)
Figure 5. Piso, 1658, 225.
Cherry Red, of some seedsmen.
(c.) Fruit erect; round.
Piper minimum siliquis rotundis. Hort. Eyst., 1613, 1713.
Capsicum cersasiforme. Fing., t. V.
Piment cerise. Vilm., 1883, 411.
Cherry Pepper. Burr, 1863, 621; Vilm., 1885, 152.
According to Sloane, l.c., this is the ari rotundum of P. Mar-
tyr, the aaz rotondo of F. Colon, the carive sive axi montense of
Laet, the caribe of J. Acosta, etc.
IV. Calyx funnel form, as large as base, but the fruit more or
less irregularly swollen; not pointed; pendent.
Capsicum luteum. Lam. Fing., t. VIII.
Prince of Wales, of some seedsmen (yellow).
(Perhaps) Capsicum latum Dodanei. Lugd., 1587, 632.
Capsicum latis siliquis. Dod., 1616, 717. .
Capsicum siliquis latiore and rotundiore. J. Bauh, 1651, II.,
943.
156 The American Naturalist. [February,
Piper capsicum siligut latiori et rotundiore. Chabr., 1677, 297.
V. Calyx set in concavity of fruit.
This character is perhaps produced only by the swollen condi-
tion of the fruit as produced by selection and culture. As, how-
ever, it appears constant in our seedsmen’s varieties, it may
answer our purpose here. z
(a.) Fruit very much flattened.
Piper indicum rotundum maximum. Hort. Eyst., 1613, 1713.
Solanum mordeus, etc., Bonnet Pepper. Pluk. Phyt., 1691, t.
227, 0 E
Capsicum tetragonum, Fing., t. 10.
Piment tomato. Vilm., 1886, 413.
Red Tomato capsicum or American bonnet. Vilm., 1885, 154.
(ċ.) Fruit, squarish, angular, very much swollen, large.
This class includes the Bell, Sweet Mountain, Monstrous, Span-
ish mammoth, of Vilmorin; the Giant Emperor, Golden Dawn,
etc., of American seedsmen. The varieties of this class seem re-
ferable to Capsicum annuum rugulosum, Fing., C. grossum pomi-
forme, Fing., and C. angulosum, Fing., but I have not as yet suffi-
ciently studied them.
This class V. embraces the sweet peppers, and none other. A
sweet kind is noted by Acosta in 1604, and it is perhaps the rocot
uchu of Peru, as mentioned by Garcilasso de la Vega.* Sweet
peppers are also referred to by Piso™ in 1648.
Occasionally Capsicum baccatum L. is grown, but the species
is too southern for general use in the north. Its synonymy fol-
lows:
Capsicum, Piper indicum brevioribus siliquis. Lob. Obs., 1576,
178, te, TSOI, k; 417.
Capsicum brasilianum. Lugd., 1587, 633; Pancov., 1673, n
297.
Capsicum minimis siliquis. Ger., 1597, 292; Dod., 1616, 717.
Piper siliqua parva brasilianum. J. Bauh., 1651, II., 944.
82 Reosta. Hist.,1
, 266,
8 Vega. Ray, oe ‘Hak. Soc. Ed., II., 365.
% Piso. Bras., , 108.
1890.] History of Garden Vegetables. 157
_ Fig. 8. Piso, de Ind., 1658, 225.
Piperis capsici varietas, siliqua parva, etc. Chabr., 1677, 297.
Capsicum baccatum L. Fing,, t. IV.
Small Red Cayenne. Briggs’ Seed Cat., 1874.
I do not desire it to be understood that the classification used
here is other than for convenience.» It has no claims for scientific
accuracy, as it is only based upon such garden varieties as are
known to me, and not upon a complete study of the species of
this genus. It will however suffice to show that no type of our
modern varieties can be considered of recent origin, but that they
are probably all derivatives from the ancient American culture.
The pepper or capsicum is called in France piment, carive, corail
des jardins, courats, poivre de Calicut, poivre d'Espagne, poivre de
Guinee, poivre de Portugal, poivre d'Inde, poivre du Bresil,
poivron ; in Germany, pfeffer ; in Flanders and Holland, spaansche
peper ; in Italy, peperone ; in Spain, pimiento; in Portugal, pimen-
to, pimentas Ÿ
8% Vilmorin. Les. Pl. Pot., 408,
158 The American Naturalist. [February,
EDITORIAL.
EDITORS, E. D. COPE AND J. S. KINGSLEY.
bia press has taken hold of a question of vital interest to the
science of this country, which too many of the scientific
men themselves have been unwilling to touch. The New York
Herald of Sunday, the 12th Jan., contains an exposition of some
abuses which have been for a long time an open secret among
the geologists and paleontologists of the country. It is unfortu-
nate for the reputation of some of our scientific men that they
have neglected the matter so long that its adjudication has now
passed into the hands of the public. The matter should have
been quietly disposed of among themselves, but it has now gone
before a wider tribunal, in which the susceptibilities of individuals
will be less considered. The question of scientific honesty and
scientific property is at stake, and it is strange that scientific men
everywhere in the country have not perceived that the personal
reputation of every scientific man in the country is involved in
the toleration of a state of affairs such as is described in the above
mentioned interview.
The facts are now well known. A wealthy man who desires
to pursue a scientific career, finding the labor of doing so dis-
tasteful, and the solution of the questions involved inconveniently
difficult, employs a number of “assistants.” It turns out that
these assistants are not only expected to do the mechanical and
clerical work necessary to the pursuit of original research, but
also to perform the research itself, and to commit the results to
paper. The manuscript thus obtained is issued by a reputable
scientific journal, and by the United States Geological Surveys,
as the work of the employer of these assistants, his name ap-
pearing on the title page, and credit for the authorship of the
published contents being assumed by him.
We do not hesitate to say (and in so doing we express the
opinion of a majority of scientific men), that while this mode of
advancing scientific knowledge may be successful, it is disrepu-
table and fraudulent. However, it is probable that there is no
’
1890.] Editorial. 159
written law forbidding it, so that had this institution been content
to remain a private one, it might have pursued its course for many
years. But the reputation obtained in the manner above described,
proved too impressive to be passed without special recognition.
Between ignorance of the facts and pachydermatous consciences,
the proprietor of the establishment which turned out such results
was made president of the United States National Academy of
Sciences. It became evident also that so worthy an adjunct in
the advancement of science should have the recognition and
financial aid of the United States. So the trader in brains be-
came the paleontologist of the United States Geological Survey.
Both of these appointments do no credit to those who effected
them. In the latter case the responsibility rests on a single man,
the director of the Survey. The spectacle thus presented by two
of the three leading scientific organizations of the United States
Government, is one which should make every American blush.
Some work of the same kind as that produced by this establish-
ment had been ordered by a previous congress, and the execution of
it had been placed in the hands of the Geological Survey by the
Secretary of the Interior. For eight years the Director of the
Geological Survey has failed to carry out the orders of the
Secretary, and the concurrent resolutions of Congress. To do
so would be to anticipate some of the work of the new organ-
ization which had been adopted by the Survey. The man who
hired others to do this work could not tolerate another man who
did his own work so “ near the throne.” Besides, he could not do
the work without the specimens used by his predecessor, the other
man, and so he must get possession of them, although they are
the private property of the latter. The materials on which the
work ordered by Congress and the Secretary were to be based
must be presented to the Government, and then the question of
publishing the work would be considered! It is Naboth’s Vine-
yard with two Ahabs. The modern Naboth, however, lived in the
land of newspapers and of public opinion, and these have been
heard from. Ahab has not yet obtained the vineyard.
—TuE numbers of the NATURALIST for 1889 were issued (by
the grace of the Leonard Scott Publication Co.) at the following
160 The American Naturalist. [February,
dates, so far as they have appeared. January, March rst; Feb-
ruary, May 31st; March, June 28th; April, August 15th; May,
September 28th; June, December 1st; July, November 18th;
August, January 5th, 1890; September, February 4th, 1890.
The numbers for the present year, it is anticipated, will be issued
on time.
RECENT LITERATURE.
“ Challenger” Voyage.—W. P. Sladen’s Asteroidea.'—
The thirtieth volume of the Challenger Reports is a double one, con-
sisting of 935 pages of text, and of 118 plates anda map. The re-
port does not confine itself to the star fishes collected by the Challenger,
but includes also those taken by the Lightning, Porcupine, Knight-
Errant, and Triton. In the Challenger collection were 268 species be-
longing to 84 genera, and of these 184 forms are described as new. The
total number of new species described in the work is 196, besides 15
forms that are considered as only varieties. Mr. Sladen reduces
Perrier’s 52 genera to 49, three of the genera proving invalid or syn-
onymous, and the Challenger Expedition furnished examples of 38 of
these previously known genera. So large a number of new genera
have been described that the synoptic list of all known species of recent
Asteroidea, given at the end of the Report, enumerates 137 genera and
810 species.
The long list of of abyssal Asteroids brought to light by the Chal-
lenger and other deep sea expeditions, has opened a new chapter in
the history of the Asteroidea, and Mr. Sladen has attempted a classi-
fication upon a new basis, more in accordance with morphological
characters than preceding ones. The fundamental points of structure
selected by Mr. Sladen are: (1) those which adapt the organism for
the functions of respiration and excretion; (2) the character of the
ambulacral skeleton ; and (3) that of the ambital skeleton.
For the first he chooses the organs called ‘‘ papulz’’ by Stimpson,
transparent membranous czca which penetrate the body wall, and
permit an exchange by osmosis with the free fluid without. These
papulæ may be confined to a limited area on the abactinal surface,
never passing beyond the boundary of the supero-marginal plates (Ste-
1 Voyage of H. M.S, Challenger. Report on the Asteroidea collected during sos
By W. Percy Sladen, F.L.S., F.G.S. Vol. XXX. 1889.
1890.] Recent Literature. 161
nopneusia) ; or they may pass beyond this Loundary, and occur upon
the lateral walls and actinal surface (Adetopneusia). Mr. Sladen re-
gards the former group as the more primitive, and states that the young
of the second group pass through a stage which represents that of the
adults of the first.
The production of the ambulacral element in some star-fishes is
much more rapid than general growth, thus producing a crushing to-
gether of the plates in the direction of the length, in some cases car-
ried to such an extent that the tube-feet in each furrow become quad-
riserial. This last character is not looked upon as of sufficient
importance to define the primary subdivisions of the class. The group
in which this ambulacral crowding occurs is called Leptostroteria,
while the group in which ambulacral development proceeds pari-
passu with that of other parts of the body, is the Eurystroteria, and is
by Mr. Sladen considered the older. Embryology supports this view.
The ambital skeleton, formed of the marginal plates and their sup-
plementaries, is looked upon as one of the most important systems of
plates in determining form and superficial character. Here there are
also two distinct modes of growth, that in which these plates increase
rapidly, and continue to develop throughout the life of the star-fish
(Phanerozonia), and that in which these plates do not increase in size,
but, on the contrary, become relatively smaller as other parts increase
(Cryptozonia). The Phanerozonia are regarded as the more primitive,
especially as the young of a cryptozonate asteroid is phanerozonate.
Two orders of the Euasteroidea are thus formed, the one, Phanero-
zonia, combining also the stenopneusid and eurystroterid characters ;
while the other, Cryptozonia, combines the adetopneusid and lepto-
stroterid characters. In the first order are placed the families Archas-
teridæ, Porcellanasteride, Astropectinide, Pentagonasteride, Anthe-
neidz, Pentacerotide, Gymnasteriidz, and Asterinidz ; while in the
Cryptozonia are those of Linckiidz, Zoroasteridz, Stichasteride, So-
lasteridee, Pterasteride, Echinasteride, Heliasteride, Asteriide, and
Brisingide. The Asterinidz, with their comparatively small marginal
plates, approach the Linckiidz, in which the plates are large for the
group. Mr. Sladen’s Classification is certainly the clearest that has
been as yet formulated, and it is cheering to note that its author views
all classification as nothing more than a working key of our views of
affinity.
Not less than 10g species and varieties were found at depths of from
500 to 2500 fathoms. In most cases the actinal and abactinal
of two to four species are given on one or more plates, and are suc-
ceeded by magnified details of the more important external characters.
162 The American Naturalist. (February,
RECENT BOOKS AND PAMPHLETS.,.
ALLEN, HARRISON.—The Anatomy of the Nasal Chambers. Reprint from the New
York aera poco Feb., 1889. From the author.
AUR, tteria Credner and the Piopi. Extract from the Am.
Aianei ere XXXVII., April, 1889. Fro uthor.
ions of Climate in the Course of Time. —_— from Chris-
YTT, A.—On Varia
tiana Vcd ike atipe Bf 1886, No. 8. From the author,
BOETTGER, O.—Ein neue Pelobates aus Syrien. Separatabdruck aus dem Z99020-
gischen Anzeiger, No. 302, a From the author.
BOULE, MARCELLIN,—Les Prédécesseurs de nos Canidés. From the auth
CLARKE, F. W.—Report of Work Done in the Division of rae ie.
ppr ok a E rrean Survey, No. 42. From Department of the Interi
N, L.— Tas Bathe + von degnas thus. Separata abated aus dem Zoolo-
gischen Anse. No. 301, 1889. From the author
DUMBLE, E. T.—Texas Geological ety Mineralogical Survey, 1888. From W. T.
Cummins.
EccLEs, R. G.—Descent and Disease. Reprint from the Brooklyn Medical Journ.,
Feb., 1889. “Brom the author.
EVERHART, EDGAR.—Infant Food. Read before the Texas State Geol. and Scienti-
fic Ass., May 17, 1887. From the author.
FRENZENY, P.—The Bucking Horse. From the author,
GARMAN, H.—On the Anatomy and Histol of a New Earth Worm (Diplocar-
dia communis). Extract from Bull. Illinois State Laboratory of Nat. Hist., Vol. III.
my +h th.
GEGENBAUR, = aeS die Occipital Region und die ihr Benachbarten Wirbel der
Fische. From the
HAL eppes ~The Development of Language. Reprint from Proceedings of
a aitite. Vol. V From the author.
. HIGLEY, W. K.— ae and PESAN of Wisconsin. Reprint from Vol. VII. of
the Trans. a Wis. Acad. of Sciences, Arts and Letters. From the author.
HOUGH, WALTER.—An Esquimo Strike-a-Light from Cape Bathurst, British Am.
from the Proceedings U. S. National Museum, Vol. XI., 1889. From the author.
Howes, G. B. and A. M. DAvis.—Observations upon the Morphology and Genesis
of Supernumary Phalanges, with especial reference to those of the ah GE Eerie
from the Proceedings of the Zool. Soc. of London, Dec. 4, 1888. From the a
IRELAND, WM.—Eighth Annual Report of the State Mineralogist for the on r end-
thor.
KUNTZ, GEORGE.—On Two New Masses of Meteoric Iron.—Mineralogical Notes.
Abstract
Extracts from Am. Journ, Science, Vol. XXXVI., 1888.—Precious Stones
from Mineral Resources of U.S. Calendar, 1887. ger Iron from Aiki ansas, 1886.
: or.
Band I., Mars., 1889, No.6. From the author
1890.) Recent Books and Pamphlets. 163
LINTNER, J. A.—Cut-worms. Bull. we the New York State Museum of Natural
History, No. 6, D 1888. From the autho:
MANIGAULT, G. E.—On the Probable ana of the Phosphorus in the South Caro-
lina Ph “ct Proceedings of the Elliott Society. From the author
MEYER, OTTO.—List of Scientific Publications (printed as an, From the
author.
MEYER, OTTO, and SAMUEL PENFIELD.—Results Obtained by Etching a ys
and Crystals of Quartz with Hydrofluoric Acid. Report from Trans, Conn. Acad., Vol
VIII., 1889. From the authors
Nason, F. L.—New York ares and their nen Bull. New York State
Museum of Nat. Hist., No. 4, August, 1888. From the aut
NEWTON, E. T.—On the Skull, ‘belies and Auditory pre of a New Species o
Pterosaurian (Se aphognathus bets ot from the Upper Lias, near Whitby, piap w
Extract from Philosophical Trans. . Soc. London, Vol. 179 (1888), B. From th
author
PH HILLIPS, HENRY.—Subject Register and Supplemental Index of “ached Published
d
la ree Belge de Geologie, Tome II., 1888. From the author
RILEY, C. V.—The Hessian Fly an Imported Insect. Extract from the Canadian
Bntomongis, Vol. XX. From the auhor
RILEY, C. V.—Poisonous Insects. Extract from the Reference Handbook of the
Medical penk Vol. V., 1887. From the author.
SEELEY, H, G.—On Pareiasaurus bombidens freasa and the Significance of its
Affinities to Amphibians, Reptiles, and Mammals.—On Parts of the Skeleton of a Mam-
mal from Triassic Rocks of Klipfontein, a South Africa, illustrating the
Reptilian daik i in the Mammalian Hand. xtract from Philosophical Trans. of
the Roy. Soc. of London, Vol. 179 (1888), B. oe the author.
SHUFELDT, R. W.—Comparative Data from 2,000 Indian Crania in the “the U.S,
Army Medical htanbiiii: Reprint from the Jour. of Anat. and Physiology, Vol. XXII.
From the author.
SMITH, E. F.—Peach mg A es Report, Bull. No. 9, Department of
iculture, From J. M
SPENCER, J. 1 Gear Erosion in Norway and High Latitudes. Extract from
Trans. Roy. Soc. Canada, From the author.
TRAQUAIR, R. H.—Notes on Chondrosteus actpenseroides (Agassiz). Extract from
TOPINARD, M. P.—Les Derniéres Etapes de la oo de l'Homme. Extrait
de on Revue d mring du mois de Mai, 1888
ASEY, ALLOWAY.—A ice of send bean, of the Division.
pied No. 8, U. i Department of Agriculture. From Norman Colem
WHITEAVES, J. F.—On Some Cretaceous Fossils from British Caluiabig the E
west sine and Manitoba. Extract from Geol. and Nat. Hist. Survey of Canada.
the au
anii TMAN, = O.—First Annual Report of the Marine Biological Laboratory, 1888,
From the Directo:
eia R.—Zur Urgeschichte des Beckens. Besonderer Abdrucklaus den
zu Freiburg i. B., Band IV., Heft 3.
WILLIS, BAILEY.—Changes in River Courses in hipogea Territory due to Gla-
me the Department of the
ILLIAMS, H. S.—On the Fossil Faunas of the Upper Devonian—The Genesee
ae New York. Bull. of the U.S. Geol. Survey, No. 41. From the Department of
the Interior.
Am, Nat.—February. —4.
164 The American Naturalist. [February,
WINCHELL, ALEX.—Conglomerates Enclosed in Gneissic Terranes. Reprint from
uthor,
The Am. Geol., March ng From the
WOLTERSTO ORFF, W. von—Die Amphibien Westpreusses. Separatabdruck aus
den Schriften der sage Gesellschaft in Dantzig. N. F. VII., Bd. 2, Heft,
WOODWARD, A. S.—A Comparison of the Cretaceous Fish-fauna of Mt. Lebanon
with that of the — Chalks, Extract from the dan. and Mag. of Nat. Hist., Oct.,
1888. From the author.
General Notes.
GEOLOGY AND PALEONTOLOGY.
The Tertiary and Cretaceous of Alabama.'—The long sec-
tions furnished by the rivers of Alabama, have been the principal
sources of our knowledge of the Cenozoic and Mesozoic geology of
that State, and it is to Professor Eugene Smith, of Tuscaloosa, that we
are indebted for the greater part of our recent knowledge of the subject.
He gives the following synopsis of the formations included in the
memoir :
; Coral Limestone Sel E AGN 150
( Upper. { bp | Jackson rg (Oolitoidal), . wt ue pr
: Ciliibóome 6062244 Oe See o e os aS
ary, Middle. | LUT ort st Spa ented tenis > ioe ar eae Wee eae ail aerate: area
Poco { Hatchetigbee, oo ....-..+... 170
WEE SP NS ee ee a a ee 80-85
Belle’s Landing SN Owe Otrel a Seat 140
| Lower. +4 Lignitic. SMART ok a aoe ou iy de 200
: Matthew's a Landings and e ones nea A O
Black Pas SN I00
i eae ae yee EERE EIN AT, 25
POO A T a I E E E EE E E N 250-275
Cretactous: +. kotten Linesone, n ena woe iter chee ee ee 1000
ee eee se eG ge ek a ee ee ae 300
7 tyetaceoun, | TOND a ee ee ee ere ? 1000
424
The Tuscaloosa formation (McGee) is of uncertain age, some reasons
for placing it within the Jurassic system having been adduced. This
is the formation which has described by some of the geologists of the
U. S. Geological Survey under the name of Potomac. Mr. McGee’s
name, having priority by many years, must be adopted.
1 On the Tertiary and Cretaceous Strata of the Tuscaloosa, Tombigbee and Alabama
Rivers; by Eugene A. Smith and Lawrence C. Johnson. Bulletin U. S. Geological
Survey, 1887, No. 43.
1890.] Geology and Paleontology. 165
The report concludes as follows (p. 138): ‘Thus our prelim-
inary observations suggest the movements, and in some cases the
positions, of the Cenozoic and Mesozoic shore-lines, and enable us to
say that the breaks in stratigraphic and paleontologic continuity in
these formations are apparent rather than real, and are due to simple
and readily determinate continental movements. ”?
Professor Smith has for many years studied and reported on the
geology of Alabama, largely at his own expense. He had already
planned and partly finished the explorations recorded in this report,
when the U. S. Geological Survey, in the face of promises made by the
director to the contrary, sent a new and inexperienced man to do the
same work ; a highly improper proceeding, whether viewed from the `
standpoint of justice or of economy. The resilt is the double author-
ship which appears on the title page, although the work was really
done by Smith, Langdon and Aldrich. The only part of the report
in which the views of Professor Smith were not adopted is the colora-
tion of the geological map (p. 134). Here the Mesozoic and Ceno-
zoic beds are colored with tints employed by all other geologists for
certain paleozoic formations, in accordance with the method adopted
by the present U. S. Geological Survey. This system, which reverses
the coloration at present in use by other civilized nations, has no
reason for existence, and has already received the condemnation of all
disinterested critics. Professor Smith will issue a copy of the map
with the conventional colors at some future day.
The memoir is illustrated by a large number of process-cuts of good
quality.
A. Smith Woodward on Cclorhynchus! Agassiz.—Among
the most interesting of undetermined Ichthyodorulites are some
straight, long, slender, round, ribbed spines, met with in the Upper
Cretaceous and Tertiaries, and originally described by Agassiz as the
rostral bones of sword-fishes under the names of Ceelorhyncus. Their
dermal nature was first pointed out by Williamson, who published a
detailed microscopical description; and the fragments of the fossil
have since been recognized from various parts of the world.
It seems evident that Coelorhynchus is the spine of a cartilaginous
fish, that probably occupied a forward position upon the back; and, if
the interpretation of Mr. Willett’s fossil be correct, the genus must
pertain either to the sharks or to the Chimzroids. The microscopical
structure of thee fossil accords with this supposition, although some-
1 Annals and Magazine of Natural History, September, 1888.
166 The American Naturalist. [February
what anomalous, and as the dorsal spines in no true shark are destitute
of a smooth inserted base, Mr. Woodward refers the fish provisionally
to the Chimeroids. The extinct members of the latter order do not
all possess dorsal spines of the normal type observed in the living
Chimera, as shown by Dr. von Zittel’s Chimzeropsis; and the possi-
bility of the problematical spines under discussion pertaining to the
same group is thus rendered more worthy of consideration. In any
case the name Ccelorhynchus is obviously inappropriate, as well re-
marked by Williamson; but it has yet to be determined whether the
dentition of the same fish has not already become known under some
other suitable generic title.
Geological News.—Paleozoic.—R. H. Traquair (Geol. Mag.,
Jan., 1889) compares Homosteus Asmuss, Asterolepis Hugh Miller,
with Coccosteus Agassiz. The dorsal plates of the two genera cor-
respond closely, but no undoubted remains of a ventral carapace of
Homosteus have yet been found.
J. W. Gregory describes in the January number of the Geological
Magazine a new species of Protaster from the Upper Silurian of
Victoria, Australia.
Turrilepas, Woodward, first described from the Wenlock limestone
and shale of Dudley (England), has been found by Mr. Arvi in the
Utica formation of Ottawa, Canada. This cirripede has four rows of
asymmetrical plates, with more than eight plates in a row.
Echinocaris whidbornei and Beyrichia devonica are added to De-
vonian fossils by Prof. T. R. Jones and Dr. H. Woodward. Both are
Entomostraca. (Geol. Mag., Sept., 1889.)
Mr. R. Etheridge has sent forth a catalogue of the fossils of the
British Islands, stratigraphically and zoologically arranged. The first
volume contains the paleozoic forms. In the preface to his catalogue
Mr. Etheridge gives some interesting figures. In 1822, only 752 ex-
tinct species of all classes in the animal and vegetable kingdoms were
own and described. In 1854, 1,280 genera and 4,000 species were
catalogued by Prof. J. Morris ; at the close of 1874, 13,300 forms had
been described, and for the most part figured ; and now the census of
the British Fossil Fauna and Flora comprises 3,750 genera and 18,000
species, all recorded in monographs and serial works. The species
included in this volume, ranging from the Cambrian “to the close of
the Permian, amount to 6,022, and are included in 1,588 genera.
1890.] Geology and Paleontology. 167
Devonian.—In the transactions of the New York Academy of Sci-
ence, Prof. Newberry publishes a brief description of a series of fossil
fish from the lenticular calcareous concretions in the top of the Erie
shale in the Valley of the Cuyahoga, near Cleveland, Ohio.
1. Cladodus n.sp., a shark six feet or more in length, and witha
diameter of body of about eight inches.
2. Actinophorus, nov. gen., a long slender ganoid, and Actnophorus
clarkii, n. sp., a slender fish about two feet in length by two and a half
inches diameter at the pectoral fins.
3- Dinichthys curtus; of medium size.
4. Dinichthys terrelli (?) Newb.
5. Dinichthys tuberculatus, n. sp.
At a meeting of the New York Academy of Sciences, April 16,
1888, Professor Newberry described at length a species of Rhizodus
found in the mountain limestone at Alton, Ill., which evidently repre-
sents a species of Rhizodus much like Æ. Aibdberti Ag., which he
named &. anceps.
Mesozoic.—Mr. R. Lydekker describes and figures in the Sep-
tember issue of the Geological Magazine an imperfect left pectoral .
paddle of /chthyosaurus intermedius showing traces of the integuments.
Such specimens are very rare.
The British Museum has recently acquired a remarkably well-pre-
served female specimen of Rhinobatus bugesiacus, the gigantic ray
from the lithographic shales of Bavaria. It is about five feet long,
and complete in all important respects.— Geol. Mag., Sept., 1889.
M. A. F. Mariori describes De“iostrobus sternbergit, a new genus of
Tertiary Coniferæ.—Ann. Sct. Geologiques, 1889.
Mr. J. Carter, in describing Palega mecoyi (Geol. Mag., May,
1889) states that up to date scarcely thirty fossil species of Isopoda
are known to science. The new species occurs in the Cambridge
upper greensand.
A new form of Pinna, another of Prodromus, and the echinid
Eodiadema granulata, are added to the fossils of the Lias by Mr. E.
Wilson and W. D. Crick.— Geol. Mag., July, 1889.
According to Petermann’s Mitteilungen, Prof. A. Wichmann found
upon the small island of Saniamo, off the coast of Timor, numerous
mud volcanoes; and on that of Rotti, at the southwest end of Timor,
he discovered, in two mud volcanoes, some ammonites and belemnites,
the first Jurassic fossils yet found in the archipelago.
168 The American Naturalist. [February,
Dr. Riist (Paleontographia, 1888,) describes the radiolarians that
have been found in Cretaceous strata. In Germany these organisms
are very abundant in some of the lower beds, though scarce in the
higher. From the Cretaceous and Jurassic of Germany 165 species,
in 74 genera, are now known.
Cretaceous.—Smith A. Woodward has published a Synopsis of
the Vertebrate Fossils of the English Chalk. As a result of observa-
tion and comparison, he gives fifteen species of Reptilia, and eighteen
Pisces. Of the latter, twenty-three belong to the order Selachii, eight
to the Chimeeroidei, twelve to the Ganoidei, thirty-six to the Teleos-
tei, and two doubtful.
M. Paul Levy (Aza. Sci. Geo., 1889) contributes a memoir upon
the phosphates of France and other countries, including an account
of recently discovered beds, and notes upon their uses in agriculture,
and their assimilation by plants. Phosphates occur in the oldest rocks,
in sedimentry strata, and in metamorphic beds. They have been
found in the Archean of Canada, in Estremadura (Spain), in Norway,
-at Caylux, Lot, etc., in France; in all these cases under the form of
apatite. The beds most worked in France are the Lias, lower Cretace-
ous, and upper beds of the Mesozoic era. M. Levy believes that the
infiltrating water which has separated the phosphates from the carbon-
ates is of interior origin, and has worked from below upwards, and in
this belief he differs from many geologists, both French and English.
The excavations made in the chalk by the waters have, in M. Levy’s
opinion, been filled by the descent of superior beds.
M. H. Lasne has contributed to the Annals des Sciences Geologiques
for the current year a description of the geology of the department of
Indre, with a map showing the geological structure. This region,
which furnishes abundant phosphates, is interesting from the number of
stages that can be observed in a limited space. There are ancient and
eruptive crystalline rocks, Triassic and Rhaetic, Sinemurian, and Lias
(rich in vertebrates and molluscs). The phosphates of the Lias of this
department are in reality composed of fluo-phosphate of a composi-
tion identical with that of apatite—CaFl3 (P,, 3CaO). He assumes
that these materials were dissolved in the Liassic sea, and were de-
posited at the same time with the carbonate of lime by the departure
of the carbonic acid. Above the phosphate-bearing Lias lie the Toar-
cian, Bajocian, and Bathonian, and Tertiary strata of Eocene and Mio-
cene date, as well as in some places Pleistocene beds.
1890.] Geology and Paleontology. 169
The first volume of a Catalogue of the Fossil Fishes in the British
Museum, by Mr. A. S. Woodward, has recently been issued. It con-
tains nearly five hundred pages, 17 plates and 15 wood-cuts, and is
really a systematic work upon the extinct Elasmobranch fishes.
These fishes are divided into the two orders Ichthyotomi (Cope) and
Selachii. In the former are included the families Pleuracanthide and
Cladodontide. ‘Thirteen generic names are grouped in the genus
Pleuracanthus. The Spinacide are classed with the Tectospondyli, or
concentric suborder of the Selachii, which has twelve families, while the
Asterospondyli, or radiate suborder, has but six.
The first part of a catalogue of the fossil Cephalopoda of the British
Museum, with 344 pages and fifty-one wood-cuts, is the work of A. H.
Foord, F.G.S. The present volume embraces the seven families
Orthoceratide, Endoceratide, Actinoceratide, Gomphoceratide,
Ascoceratide, Potioceratide, and Cyrtoceratide, which all together
are but a part of the sub-order Nautiloida.
Jurassic.—R. Lydekker (Geological Magazine, Decade III., Vol.
VI., No. 297, p. 119, March, 1889) describes two vertebre from the
Wealden of the Isle of Wight. These specimens clearly indicate a
small Dinosaur allied to the genus Ccelophysis.
Cenozoic.—M. Forsyth Major has sent to the Comptes Rendus
an account of a bed of fossil bones discovered in Samos, and of Lower
Pliocene age. Among the mammals are many specifically identical
with those of Pikermi, in Attica, Baltavar, in Hungary, and Mar-
agha, in Persia ; but there are also some new types, among them an
Orycteropus, the only species yet known outside of the Ethiopian
region ; a large pangolin, estimated to be nearly three times the size
of the West Africa Manis gigantea; and a ruminant referred by the
author to the Giraffide, and stated to connect Helladotherram with
the existing giraffe. There is also a large ostrich.
E. T. Newton describes (Geol. Mag., Jan. 7, 1889) Clupea vectensis
from the Ogliocene strata of the Isle of Wight.
Prof. W. Dames has described in the Proceedings of the Berlin
Society of Natural Sciences a new kind of sawfish from the Eocene of
Birket-et-Qurun, in Egypt. The rostral teeth of this Amdlyprist's
cheops differ from those of the existing Pristis in their shortness and
great relative breadth.
170 The American Naturalist. [February,
The Marquis G. de Saporta (Annales des Sciences Geologiques, 1889,)
contributes an article upon the fossil plants of Aix, in Provence,
studied stratigraphically and paleontologically. The plates illustrat-
ive of the shells of the Aix group accompany the memoir.
Additions to the vertebrate fauna of the Preglacial Forest Bed of
the Norfolk coast increase through the rapid denudation carried on by
the North Sea, and Mr. E. T. Newton has in the April issue of the
Geological Magazine described Cervus rectus n.Sp., and recognised
the presence of Bison bonasus, Phoca barbata, the narwhal, the beluga
and the porpoise.
H. H. Howorth, M. P. (Geol. Mag., July, 1889) states his belief
that in the mammoth age the Arctic Ocean either did not exist, or was
very small, the greater portion of its area being occupied by land upon
which trees would grow. The continents would therefore be united
by land, and an ample bridge provided, This land area would par-
tially account for the warmer climate.
MINERALOGY AND PETROGRAPHY.!
Petrographical News.—In his report on the geology of the
Rainy Lake region, Dr. Lawson? gives .a petrographical description of
the rocks comprising the Laurentian, Coutchiching and Keewatin
groups in the neighborhood of the above-named lake in Canada. The
rocks of the Keewatin series are principally bedded traps and green-
stones, altered from traps by metasomatic and dynamic metamorphism,
and greenstones of clastic origin, hornblende schists and other foliated
rocks. The effect of pressure is shown in the broken condition of
many of the crystals in the rocks; crushed and sundered plagioclase,
apatite, hornblende, leucoxene, tourmaline and quartz are all described
and figured. Between the hornblende schists and the Laurentian
gneisses the author recognizes phenomena which he believes to be due
to contact action. If this supposition is found to be a correct one, the
fact affords a striking confirmation of the view that the gneisses under the
1 Edited by Dr. W. S. Bayley, Colby University, Waterville, Me. +
2 Geol. and Nat. Hist. Surv. of Canada. Annual Report for 1887. Pt. F.
1890.] Mineralogy and Petrogrphy. tyi
Keewatin are of eruptive origin. The Coutchiching series embraces mica-
schists and other lighter colored schistose rocks between the lowest mem-
bers of which and the gneisses are also evidences of contact action.
Among the lighter schists are granulites and sericite-porphyroids. In
the Laurentian a hornblende-syenite gneiss occurs, and in it several
pieces of twinned sphene were observed. The two craters Mte. Cimi-
no and the Lago di Vico in central Italy, though but parts of the same
great volcano, like Mts. Somma and Vesuvius, have during their dif-
ferent periods erupted different kinds of lava. The lavas of Cimino
have an andesitic habit. They are to be classed with the mica and
augite andesites, the latter of which contain porphyritic sanidine
and olivine. The younger crater, Lago di Vico, has poured forth
leucite bearing rocks, of which leucitophyre, leucite-tephrite, leucite-
basanite and phonolites are the prevalent types. A leucite-trachyte,
placed by Rosenbusch among the phonolites, is the latest lava of
the older crater. It is an intermediate type between the predomi-
nant lavas of Cimino and those of the later Lago di Vico. Besides the
lavas, the former crater cast forth sanidnite bombs and calc-silicate
bombs, containing garnets and vesuvianite. In a brochure on the
Obere Weilerthal, E. Cohen ‘ gives an interesting account of the erup-
tive and sedimentary rocks occurring in the Weilerthal south of the
rocks made famous by Rosenbusch under the name Steigerschiefer.
Those described by Cohen are granite, gneiss, quartzite-schists,
phyllites, granite, porphyry, augite porphyry and minettes. t
granite is a brown hornblende in prismatic crystals. Their specific
gravity varies between 3.082 and 3.140, and their composition is as
follows :
SiO, ALO, FeO, FeO CaO MgO Na,O H,O
Darker var. 51.36 4.14 2.17 10.04 II.9I 17-14 1.86 1.38
Lighter var. 51.82 4.17 2.34 9.84 12.18 9.18 2.44 1.93
Many of the other rocks described present interesting features, but
none of great petrographical importance, An examination 5 of the
northern slopes of Cader Idris, Merionethshire, Wales, discloses inter-
bedded slates, tuffs, and massive eruptive rocks of considerable interest.
Among the sedimentary rocks is the well-known pisolitic ironstone, in
which the pisolitic structure is now represented by magnetite crystals
in a cement of green iron silicate. This structure was originally pro-
3 W. Deecke, Neues Jahrb. fir Min., B. B. VI., 1889, p- 205.
4 Abh. zur Geol. Specialk. v. Elsass-Lothringen, B. III., H. III., p. 137-
5 Quar. Journ. Geol. Soc., August, 1889, p. 432.
172 The American Naturalist. [February,
*
duced by the tendency of some carbonate to form concretionary mas-
ses around grains of sand or small shells. The original carbonate has
for the most part disappeared, leaving the magnetite as a pseudo-
morph. Among the eruptives is a rock that the author calls eurite, fol-
lowing d’Aubuisson,® although it would seem that the name quartz-
keratophyre would sufficiently well characterize it. The rock is a
bluish-gray compact substance with a specific gravity of 2.64. It con-
tains quartz and feldspar crystals, wisps of biotite and spherulites of
granophyre, more particularly around the porphyritic crystals, in a
groundmass composed principally of a chloritic substance. Its analy-
sis shows it to contain a soda-rich feldspar :
SiO, ALO, FeO, MnO CaO MgO KO Na,O Loss
TATI 13.70 3.42 tr. 1.94 OF 2.00 “4.93 1.08
——In his description of the section Tanneberg of the geological map
of Saxony, Dalmer? mentions two rocks of some interest. The first is
a sericite-gneiss, composed of quartz, plagioclase and sericite, with a
breccia-like structure produced by pressure. The quartz and plagio-
clase are shattered, and the broken pieces are reunited by a cement of
secondary quartz and sericite. The second is a chlorite-gneiss, con-
sisting of orthoclase, albite, chlorite and quartz. This occurs in
varieties of different degrees of coarseness. As it becomes finer in
grain it loses feldspar, and assumes muscovite, until finally it approaches
in structure and composition the phyllites of the region. Kendall §
gives a list of the basic dykes on the island of Mull that contain the
glassy selvages known as tachylite. It has been observed that the
thickness’ of this glass band is always greatest in that portian of the
dyke in contact with the most compact rock. A new type of tachylite,
called by Groom? carrockite, is associated with gabbro at Carrock
Fell in the Lake District, England. It consists of a green glass en-
closing spherules of quartz, feldspar, and granular aggregates of augite,
and porphyritic crystals of the same minerals.—Prof. Bonney” has ex-
amined certain banded micaceous schists from Morlaix, Brittany, which
he thinks are the result of pressure and contact action. The rocks
were originally stratified sands and muds, that were crumpled and
foliated by pressure, and in which a light and a dark mica, chiastolite
and andalusite were developed. By the subsequent intrusion of gran-
®Traité de Geognosie, 1819, p, Iry.
7 Erl. z. Geol. Specialk. des Königr. Sachsen Blatt, 64.,
3 Geol. Mag., Dec., 1888, P- 555.
® Geol. Mag., Jan., 1889, p. 43-
10 Quart. Jour. Geol. Soc., Feb., 1888, p. 11.
.
1890.] Mineralogy and Petrogrphy. 173
ite all traces of their fragmental origin were obliterated ; the rock be-
came crystalline, and a few additional minerals were produced. The
first occurrence of glaucophane as a consitutent of British rocks is
noted by Blake ™ in an altered diorite from a quarry near the Anglesea
Monument, Anglesea. The rocks consists of chloritized glaucophane,
grains of epidote, a rutile quartz and calcite. The glaucophane is
present in elongated prisms, which form a felt around epidote, and are
included in the quartz.
Mineralogical News.— Morphological and Physical Properties.—
The possibility of the selection of half the planes of the monoclinic
hemi-pyramid in such a way as to fulfill the conditions of hemihedrism
as been shown by Williams.” If two of the planes intersecting in
the plane of symmetry be allowed to develop to the exclusion of the
other two, there results an apparent hemimorphism, which in reality
satisfies all the conditions of hemihedrism. ‘The monoclinic plane of
symmetry remains, so that the character of the hemihedrism is the `
inclined-faced. Planes belonging to this hemihedral form are ex-
hibited in pyroxene from Piedmont, Orange, and St. Lawrence coun-
ties, N. Y., and from Canaan; ome: tex babit i is aia hemimon
Ina
on parting planes in 1 several minerals. He describes rutile from the
Urals in which the usual cleavage parallel to œ Po, is wanting, its
place being taken by a parting parallel to $ Poo, but whether asa
result of twinning or not, Miigge is unable to decide. The author
thinks that this variety of rutile is identical with the mineral from
Polk county, N. C., described by Des Cloizeaux as a dimorphous
form of rutile. A garnet from Arendal, Norway, possesses cleavages
parallel to the dodecahedral face, and contains acicular inclusions of
cyanite with their oo Pæ faces parallel to the o O faces of the garnet,
and their c axes parallel to the edges of these faces. The mineral occurs
in a schistose dioritic rock whose hornblende constituent has a well-
developed parting parallel to Pæ. Parting parallel to an octahedral
face, in many members of the spinel group, is declared to be the
result of polysynthetic twinning. Calcite, with a parting parallel to
co P2, galena with twinning lamellze parallel to 40, and breunerite, with
` —2R 2R as the twinning plane, are also mentioned. Boracite from
11 Geol. Mag., 1888, p. 125.
12 Amer Jour. Sci., Aug. 1889, p. 115. Cf. AMER. NATURALIST, Nov. 1887, p. 1025.
13 Neues Jahrb. f. Min., etc., 1889, I., p. 231.
Bull, Soc. franc., d. Min., IX., 1886, p. 184.
174 The American Naturalist. [February,
Lüneburg, Hanover, contains the new planes œ O$, œ O13, œo OY.
Beginning with the Le Bel and Van t’ Hoff theory with regard to the
connection between the structure of the molecule (z. e., the arrange-
ment of the atoms within the molecule) and the activity of circularly
polarizing substances, and applying the principles of this theory to
the Sohacke-Wulff® theory of crystal structure, Becke® is forced to
conclude that this theory of crystallization is not satisfactory, since it
does not accourit sufficiently well for the close relation that exists
between the crystallization of a body and its chemical nature. Becke
thinks that the symmetry of crystals is intimately dependent upon the
symmetry of arrangement of the atoms within the molecules. If this
be true, all circularly polarizing bodies should possess an unsymmetri-
cal molecule, which should reveal itself through the unsymmetrical
character of its crystallization. Becke publishes a list of all the
circularly polarizing substances known, and discusses in detai
the crystallization of grape sugar, since this has been regarded
as a triclinic substance, without evidence of hemimorphism or
hemihedrism—the only two modes of crystallization that can yield
enantiomorphous, 7. e., unsymmetrical figures. As a result of
measurements of crystals of pure sugar, Becke concludes that it is
monoclinic with @: 6: c=1.735: 1: 1.908. f=97° 59’, and hemi-
morphic in the direction of the ¢ axis (really hemihedral, as indi-
cated by Williams, ref. above). It is therefore enantiomorphous.
The symmetry of its form corresponds with that of other circularly
polarizing bodies, and corresponds also with the unsymmetrical struc-
ture of its chemical molecule, shown by recent synthetical methods.
Two of these unsymmetrical molecules may be so arranged as to yield
a crystal with one plane of symmetry (holohedrally developed mono-
clinic form), and four to produce forms with three planes of symmetry
(orthorhombic forms). The symmetry of crystal forms thus de-
pends primarily upon the distribution of the atoms within the molecule,
Von Goldschmidt,” carrying out this idea more fully, attempts to sim-
plify the discussion of the chemical relations of the silicates by making
certain assumptions with regard to the conditions necessary to the
mixture of molecules in groups of isomorphous silicates. He regards
the particles as the primary constituent of the molecule, just as the
atoms are the constituent parts of the molecule. Chemistry he defines as
relating to molecules and their composing atoms; crystallography as
relating to crystals and their composing particles. Isomorphism is the
15 AMERICAN NATURALIST, 1889, p. 221.
16 Min. u. Petrog. Mitth., 1889, p. 464.
1890.] Mineralogy and Petrography. 175
capacity of analogous particles to form similar crystals. Similar or
analogous particles are those built on the same plan, though different
in composition. Starting with these general ideas the author discusses
the character of the particles forming the silicates, and concludes by
applying his deductions to the explanation of the formulas of the most
important silicates. The examination !8 of senarmontite crystals in
thin sections parallel to the cubic, octahedral and dodecahedral faces,
shows that the apparently simple crystals are combinations of six
orthorhombic crystals, and that the optical anomalies so frequently ob-
served in the mineral are due to this intergrowth, or to twinning.
Unlike the double refraction of some other apparently regular minerals,
the anomalous action of senarmontite is not in the least affected in a
temperature as high as Miigge has reinvestigated the sub-
ject of pressure twinning in sphene, and finds the twinning plane to
be in the zone between oo P and —P (DesCloizeaux’s position), oo
not to coincide exactly with —2P, as determined by Williams.
ascribes the striations frequently observed in the sphene of arise
rocks to pressure, but is not able to produce them by artificial means.
As a result of measurements made in crystals of zinc obtained by
slow distillation of the metal in a vacuum, Williams and Burton*! have
calculated the axial ratio to be a :c¢c= r: 1.3564. The crystals are
hexagonal, with a probable rhombohedral symmetry, and isomorphous
with arsenic, antimony, bismuth, and tellurium. In the pyroxene
from Pinzgauer, Cathrein ™ has discovered the forms Pa, Pz, +P},
all of which are new to the species. In amethyst from the Zillerthal
he has found the new planes
wpn 1; piP, and $P? ]
4 4 4
while the forms most common to the mineral are absent. The new
plane 4P is recorded by Césaro* as occuring on topaz from Sax-
ony.
Miscellaneous.—Retgers ™ has made a careful examination of the
heavy solutions used for separating rock constituents with the endeavor
17 Zeitschrift. fur Min., XVII., p. 25.
18 Prendel, Min. u. Petrog. Mitth. X1., p. 7.
19 Neues Jahrb. f. Min., etc., 1889, II.. p. 89.
21 Amer. Chem. Jour., XI., p. 219.
22 Zeits. f. Kryst., XVII., 1889, p. 19.
23 Bull. Soc. Franc. de Min., XII., p. 419.
24 Neues Jahrb. f. Min., 1889, II., p. 185.
176 The American Naturalist. [Febraury,
to obtain modifications with a specific gravity greater than 3.6. His
investigations result in the discovery that methylene-iodide will dis-
solve iodine and iodoform, and yield a liquid with the density of 3.6.
For separating minerals with a greater density than this, he suggests the
use of fused silver nitrate. At 198°, this salt melts to a colorless
liquid, with the density 4.1. A mixture of the nitrate and iodide of
this metal give a yellow oily liquid at a temperature of 65°—70°,
whose specific gravity (5) is greater than that of any other substance,
that has yet been proposed for the purpose desired. The author de-
clares that these liquids serve as convenient means for separating the
heavier minerals of rocks, and he gives directions for manipulating
them.——The origin of most of the siliceous sinter deposited by the
geysers in the Yellowstone Park is stated by Mr. Weed to be due to
asecretion of silica by algze and mosses. Waters too poor in silica to
form deposits of this substance by cooling or evaporation, are often
dammed back by thick jelly-like accumulations of silica, separated
from the water by plant life, which is quite abundant in some of the
hot springs. The geyserites and similar bodies are produced by evapo-
ration.
% Amer. Jour. Sci., May, 1889, p. 351.
1890.] | Botany. 177
BOTANY.!
Peridial Cell Characters in the Classification of the Ure-
dinez.—In the genus Roestelia peridial cell characters are frequently
given considerable prominence, and surely frequently add to the cer-
tainty of our identification. e question then naturally arises, why
are not such characters valuable in the related genus Æcidium, where if
anywhere in the Uredinee we need all possible characters for certainty
in identification.
The characters most frequently used are position and size of zcidia,
size and outward appearance of spores, and most important of all, on
what host plant. All are very variable, even the latter and most important
one, many rusts sometimes occurring on ~~ pene Rost, and pore tly je
same rust on many hosts. The position
epiphyllous—is Saisie determined, I think, largely by the. hire
of the leaf, as I have shown elsewhere. The size of the æcidia varies
also with a change of host-plant and immediate conditions of moisture
and heat, as do also the æcidiospores.
What are the peridial cells? They are very likely, as usually sup-
posed, slightly modified chains of æcidiospores loosely attached into a
surrounding pseudo tissue layer for protection. This is readily believed
when we observe that the peridial cells usually partake, more or less of
the character of the æcidiospores, in shape, thickness of wall, rough-
ness or smoothness, etc., and from their breaking apart readily into
chains appearing much as the æcidisopores. Believing thus that the
peridial cells are developed from the æcidisopores what would seem
more natural than that we should examine and describe them as we do
the æcidiospores.
In the examination of Uredineæ I have noticed that while the peri-
dial cells are usually very similar in shape and size (yet no more so than
the æcidiospores), they are frequently quite characteristic.
In Æcidium pentstemonis for instance, the peridial cells are angular,
subrotund-elliptical, thick walled, smooth, 19—22 by 22-31 ø., while in
the Æcidium Puccinia tanaceti D.C., on Artemisia cana and A .canadensis
they are subrotund-angular, 15-21 by 19-26 „., being very similar to
the last, but distinguished by size, being in general smaller. In ei-
dium composttarum Mart. var. lygodesmie@ Webber, they are angular-
elliptical and usually strongly tuberculate, distinguished from the pre-
1 Edited by Prof. C. E. Bessey, Lincoln, Neb.
178 _ The American Naturalist. [February,
ceding by shape and character of the surface. In Æcidium euphorbie
Gmel. they are similar to those of the preceding species, but the cells
are shorter (15-20 by 19-25 p.), and not so strongly tuberculate. In
many species characteristic differences may be be found. Why not
describe them ?—HERBERT J. WEBBER, Lincoln, Neb.
Peculiar Uredinez.—An abnormal fruit or seed, as a double
apple or walnut, is always noted with curiosity by the most untrained
observer ; so are also such stable but uncommon developments as the
navel-orange. Among lower plants the microscopic spores frequently
present peculiarities as curious as these, yet although examined usually
by careful observers only, they are cones noted with anything more
than usual interest.
In working over Nebraska Uredinez I have observed a few curious
variations from the usual forms that I think deserve particular mention.
Puccinia flaccida B. & Br. (Pl. VIII., Fig. 1, Teleutospores; Fig. 2,
Uredospores), a very peculiar species, presents the greatest and most
uniform or stable peculiarity from the normal Puccinia, if I may so
express it, of any species that it has been my fortune to examine. My
specimens were collected at Lincoln, Nebraska, Oct. 13, 1889, on
Barnyard-grass (Panicum crus-galli). The sori are amphigenous,
linear-oblong, small and rather inconspicuous. The teleutospores are
frequently one-celled (Fig. 1, g.), and in this case are of nearly the
same size as the two-celled spores. The septi of two celled spores are
in various positions, from almost horizontal to vertical. I have never
found onewith a strictly horizontal septum. They are quite frequently
almost vertical, each cell attached in part to the pedicel (Fig. 1 a. and f).
In this case they appear as double Uromyces spores. In fact the species
seems to me to more resemble a Uromyces than a Puccinia, the one-
celled spores, which are always plentiful, being the normal form, and
the two-celled spores, with the nearly vertical septi, double spores.
About as near an approach to the normal Puccinia as usually occurs is
represented by Fig. 1, d, and even here the partition is quite oblique.
- Burrill, in “ Parasitic Fungi of Illinois, Uredinez,”’ p. 202, says O
this: ‘*A most peculiar species. From two-thirds to three-fourths or
more of all the teleutospores are septate, presenting the most varying
and aberrant forms, So far as we are informed this has not been pre-
viously reported from America, but a comparison with specimens
kindly furnished by Dr. M. C. Cook of Puccinia flaccida B. & Br. from
Ceylon, leaves no doubt of the specific identity. The American speci-
mens only differ in possessing more undivided and, upon an average,
narrower teleutospores, with somewhat thicker pedicels.”
PLATE Vil.
1890,] Botany. 179
The uredospores of this species also illustrate an interesting feature,
sometimes occurring among Uredinex,—the so-called “ germ pores”
(Fig. 2, a), two or more hyaline points in the wall of the spore. The
spore thus greatly resembles a pollen grain, the points being very
likely analogous to the similar thickenings on the pollen grain, furnish-
ing.a spot for the breaking through of the tube in germination.
This peculiar feature is found also in the uredospores of Puccinia
prenanthis (Pers.) Fuckel (Fig. 6, a, from specimens collected at
Anselmo, Nebraska, July 8, ’89). The zcidium of this species is also
peculiar, from its lack of genuine pseudoperidium. In the place of
the usual pseudoperidium a — Aee hyphz mass occurs.
This is probably the Æcidium hemisphericu
In Puccina sporobok Arthur, (Fig. 3) I find one-, two- and three-celled
teleutospores. This species is peculiar in that some of the sori bear
only one celled teleutospores (Fig. 3, c, and @), while others bear
only the normal two-celled teleutospores (Fig. 3., @ and 4), and still
others produce a sometimes almost equal mixture of one- and two-celled
teleutospores, with frequently also three-celled ones (Fig. 3, e represents
a three-celled teleutospore measuring 26.6 by 14.4 #.) This pecu-
liarity of one- and two-ce lled spore-sori I find only on specimens grow-
ing on Sporobolus vagineflorus, collected at Lincoln, Nebraska, Octo-
ber 13, 1889. Other specimens of the same species on Sporobolus
asper and Sporobolus cryptandrus have only the two-celled ee
Dr. Arthur in the original description from specimens on Sporobolus
heterolepis mentions the same peculiarity.
Puccinia tanacett D. C., var. actinelle Webber, on Actinella acaulis
furnishes in the same sorus a remarkable variety of teleutospores, the
contortions being almost as various as those of Puccinia flaccida,
though not so frequent. Fig. 7, an, shows some of the various
orms of the teleutospores ; (a) is a three-celled spore with two apical
apices, the upper cell seems as if grown from the side of the middle
cell; (4) is almost normal, with basal ceil large ; (¢) with large apical
cell; (Z) one-celled ; (e) three-celled, 21 by 50 ».; (f) one-celled,
with side point, 19 by 45 æ.; (g) one-celled, 26 by 28 x. ; (A) three-
celled, 19 by 76 x. ; (#) curved, lower cell abortive; (7) one-celled,
19 by 53 æ. ; (A) large, truncate, with side point, 38 by 45 #.; (Z)
large truncate, 30 by P p.; (m) normal spore, 19 by 70 A ; (#)
normal spore, 22 by 49
The teleutospores of ie genus Uropyxis are exceedingly interesting
and important as being one of the main proofs from spore resemb-
lance that the Uredinez are degraded Ascomycetes, the teleutospore
_ Am, Nat.—February.—5.
180 The American Naturalist. [February,
stage being the homologue of the spore fruit, the teleutospore of the
ascus and the teleutospore cells of the ascospores. The clear outer
pellicle here greatly increases the resemblance to the ascus. A few
weeks ago while examining Uvopyxis petalostemonis (Farl.) D. By., a
three-celled teleutospore was observed (Fig. 8, æ). The resemblance
of the normal form to the ascus is plain, but here it was indeed strik-
ing, the walls of the cells were so plainly distinct from the pellicle and
that of one cell from the other cells. The spores could plainly be seen
to overlap as they lay surrounded by the clear pellicle, the spore sac or
ascus.
In many teleutospores, if not in all, an outer surrounding sac entire-
ly separate from the enclosed spores may be differentiated. It may
readily be seen by heating the spores for a few moments before mount-
ing in nitric acid, In spores thus treated the wall swells out, leaving
the spores within clearly distinct. Brownian movement may frequently
be seen between the separated wall and the spores, indicating that it is
not merely a swelling of the wall, but a separating, the space created
being filled with a fluid. A teleutospore of Puccinia jonesit Pk. treated
in the above manner is represented by Fig. 4, æ. Three of the nor-
mal spores are shown in Fig. 5. Another peculiar feature of this
species is its long and exceedingly fragile pedicels (Fig. 5, 4 and c).
They were described by Peck originally as exceedingly short (Fig. 5,
@), the mistake being caused undoubtedly by their easy deciduous
character. In type specimens, it was only by long soaking and re-
peated attempts that I obtained the pedicels attached (See Ellis, N.
A. F., No. 1448). In Nebraska, specimens on Musenium tenuifolium
while hails, I with but little difficulty, found them attached.
Spores of Puccinia nigrescens Pk., a typical Puccinia, treated in nitric
acid, presented the same peculiar swollen appearance (Fig. 4, 4).
ypical Puccinia spores prepared as above greatly resemble spores
of Uropyxis. Schréeter, in Hedwigia, 1875, p. 65, separated Puccinia
amorphe Curt. from Puccinia, placing it from the distinct outer
hyaline layer of its spores in a new genus, which he called Uropyxis.
To this genus one more species, Uropyxis petalostemonis (Farl.)
Toni. has since been added. Some mycologists think the difference
between the two genera too slight to justify distinction. The differ-
ence at most is but slight, and when we treat Puccinia spores with
nitric acid as above the distinction vanishes entirely. Are we then to
consider Uropyxis as distinct from Puccinia merely because the spore
is surrounded by an outer désfinct layer, while in Puccinia the outer
layer occurs but is indistinct?—Herrsert J. WEBBER, Lincoln, Ned.
1890.] Botany. 181
Grasses of Box Butte and Cheyenne Counties, Nebraska.
—On August 21st, 1889, I started out from Alliance, Neb., on a short
trip of observation to determine particularly the grass flora of southern
Box Butte and northern Cheyenne counties.
Alliance is about four miles east of the 103d meridian west of
Greenwich, directly on the line of the 42d parallel. The town lies
on a broad level plain, which appears to have been at one time the
bed of a lake. Southward and eastward, from eight to ten miles
distant, are the sand hills. To the west is the broad valley of Snake
Creek, a creek which, like nearly all of the streams of this region,
flows from the sand, rushes rapidly forward a few miles, and disappears,
losing itself in the sand. North and northwestward the land rises
toward Pine Ridge. The only apparent outlet of this lake basin is
toward the east, in a pass through the sand hills.
On this level plain, parched and barren under the August sun, the
principal grasses found were Gramma, Bouteloua oligostachya Torr., and
its near relative Bouteloua hirsuta Lag., Buffalo-grass, Buchloé dacty-
oides Engelm., wild wheat grass, Agropyrum glaucum R. & S., and
two others, very common, but of no agricultural value, a Beard-grass
Stipa sp.—near comata Trin., and prairie wire-grass, Sekethi
texanus Steudel. The great bulk of the prairie grass was Gramma, and
I was told that it is she pasture grass of the region.
On the morning of the day named, I went in company with Mr.
Nelson Fletcher, of Alliance, to a natural meadow of about 350 acres,
lying in the Snake Creek valley, just at the foot of the sand-hills south-
east of the town. The ground was wet but not swampy, and the rank
plant growth which covered it formed a pleasing contrast to the swel-
tering sandy slopes around the meadow. ‘The chief grass was Agro-
pyrum glaucum, which differed from the form found around Lincoln in
having longer and less harsh leaves. Mixed with it were Andropogon
scoparius Michx., A. provincialas L., SRNE glomerata Trin.
Elymus canadensis L., and Panicum virgatum L.
With these grasses were tall golden rods, purple blazing stars, and
white-flowered asters, altogether making a brilliant flowery oasis in a
sandy desert. The growth was very even, from 2% to 4 feet high.
Mr. Fletcher said that although no hay is cut on the open prairies
enough is obtained from these natural meadows, and it is hay of very
good quality, so that the average price ranges from two to four dollars
per ton.
About a mile east of this meadow stood what appeared to be a large
field of corn, but on nearer approach it proved to be Reed grass Phrag-
182 The American Naturalist. [February,
mites communis Trin. This grass and cat-tail flags and rushes were
quite common in the swampy meadows and around the numerous small
lakes of the sand-hill region.
Along the valley of Snake Creek I found in addition to those
already mentioned Andropogon nutans L., Oryzopsis cuspidata Beuth.,
Sporobolus airoides Torr., S. vagineflorus Vasey, S. asperifolius N. &
M., S. asper Kth., Panicum capillare L., Setaria glauca Beauv., S.
viridis Beauv., Deyeuxia canadensis Beauv., Distichlis maritima Raf.,
and Spartina cynosuroides Willd.
In the sand-hills around Alliance the principal grasses are Andropogon
hallii Hack., A. provincialis Lam., A. nutans L., A. scoparius Michx.,
Sporobolus asper Kunth, Oryzopsis cuspidata Bedth., Bouteloua oligo-
stachya Torr., Deyeuxia canadensis Beauv., Eragrostis tenuis Gray,
Stipa comata Trin., and on the higher hills, and particularly noticeable
on the edge of the “ blow-outs,” Muhlenbergia pungens Thurb. In
. the clear white sand in the ‘‘blow-outs ” Redfieldia flexuosa Vasey is
found quite abundantly.
The best grazing grasses are Gramma and Buffalo-grass. Wild wheat
grass is good for hay but not for pasture.
I did not find any Sand-burs. They are not needed, for Mammil-
laria and other cacti make life a burden.
From Alliance I went west along Snake Creek valley twelve or fif-
teen miles, then southwest through the extreme western extension of
the sand-hills till I struck the old Black Hills trail at the head of Red
Willow cañon, and thence down the Red Willow southeastward to the
Platte. ‘The only new find was Munroa squarrosa Torr., on the Platte
side of the divide.
From the Camp Clarke, on the Platte, where the old Sidney-Black
Hills trail crosses the river, I went south to Court House Rock and
Pumpkin Creek. The rock is a great mass of light brown argilla-
ceous sandstone, which rises about 300 feet sheer above the valley.
The ridge stretching westward, of which Court House Rock was
once a part, at one time bore a forest of pine and cedar. Now there
are only some stumps and a few scattered trees to show what has been
before. In the cafions at the foot of Court House were Rhus aro-
matica Ait. var. trilobata Gr., and a number of woody shrubs and vines.
On the summit of the rock I found Oryzopsis suspidata Benth.,
Agropyrum glaucum R. & S., Aristida purpurea Nutt., a form with an
erect culm rising from a mat of convolute wiry radical leaves, Boute-
loua racemosa Lag., the first that I had seen, B. oligostachya Torr., and
Muhilenbergia pungens Thurb,
1890.) Zoölogy. 183
By the side of the creek, at the base of the rock, I found Zatomia
obtusata Gray, Elymus canadensis La, Panicum virgatum L., P. crus-galli
G., and P. crus-galli var. hispidum Gr., Aristida purpurea Nutt., Bou-
teloua oligostachya Torr., Munroa squarrosa Torr., Oryzopsis cuspidata
Benth., Sporobolus mans Torr., and Cenchrus arideloides I.
The Sand-burs have probably ‘ii introduced in the Pampkin creek
valley in the wool of sheep which have been herded there.
Nores.—I did not find Munroa north of the Platte river valley.
Andropogon hallii grew on the foot hills between Camp Clarke and the
Court House ridge. These hills are sandy but are not true “sand
hills,” as that name is applied in the West.
Distichlis maritima is the chief pasture grass of the Platte valley in
this vicinity! Other grasses, Buchloé, Bouteloua oligostachya, Spartina
cynosurotdes, Agropyrum glaucum, Hordeum jubatum, Setaria glauca, S.
viridis, Munroa squamosa, and Panicum crus-galli also occur, but by no
means as abundantly as the Distichlis.
I visited from fifteen to twenty of the islands in the river at this
point. I found two grasses other than the common Platte valley
species. They were Giyceria distans Wahl., and Sporobolus depaupe-
ratus Torr. The characteristic plant of these islands is Shepherdia
argentea, a small shrubby tree known as the Buffalo-berry.—Jarep G.
SMITH, Lincoln, Neb.
ZOOLOGY.
The U.S. Fish Commission.—Anthozoa and Echinoderm-
ata of the Gulf Stream Slope of the New England Coast.
—At various times during 1882, Prof. A. E. Verrill has given to the
world notice of the remarkable marine fauna, to a great extent tropical
in character, occupying the outer slope of the continental plateau off
the southern coast of New England. The abundance of animal life
on these banks may be judged from the fact that at a single haul, made
on September 1, 1881, over ten thousand specimens were procured. In
Prof. Verrill’s words ‘‘a large number of species, belonging to various
zoological groups, in this region are found living gregariously, in vast
numbers, at particular spots, while they may not occur at all, or only
sparingly, at other stations in similar depths, and apparently identical
in temperature and character of bottom.”’
Among the discoveries of new and rare species during 1881, are
the following Anthozoa: Urticina longicornis, U. perdix, U. callosa,
184 The A mertan Naturalist. [Potireaty,
U. consors, Actinurus saginatus, Adamsia sociabilis, all new nance $
Pennatula aculea, Dan. and Kov.; P. borealis Sars.; Baltici
jinmarchica, Sars.; Anthroptilum grandiflorum, Verrill ; oyei
symmetrica Moseley ; Sagartia abyssicola Verrill. In all thirty-three
species, including seven Pennatulaceæ. Adamsia sociabilis always starts
life upon a small shell, usually a Cavol/ina, occupied by a hermit-crab
(Hemipagurus socialis, Smith), but eventually secretes a chitinous pel-
licle and absorbs the shell. Fladsellum goodei, a very fragile coral
which is tolerably common, has the power of restoring itself from mere
fragments, and the same has been noted in Parasmilia lymani Pour-
talis. The present year has yielded a remarkable new pennatulid
(Distichoptilum gracile, Verrill), and two Gorgonians ; Acanthogorgia
armata V., dredged at 640 fathoms, and Paramauricea borealis V., from
234 fathoms; the former, when living, was bright orange, the latter
pale salmon.
Pennatula borealis, previously known only from a few Norwegian
specimens, has been taken both by Gloucester fishermen and the U. S.
Fish Commission, at depths varying from 120 to 350 fathoms. The
largest one was 21% inches high nnd 5% broad. Some of the Actin-
ians are very large,—Urticina callosa is four to seven inches high, and
six to ten wide. Occasionally a barrel of large Urticinze or of Bolocera
tuedie Gosse has been brought up at a single haul.
Acanella normanit V., a pretty bush-like gorgonian, was very
abundant at some stations, as were also Pennatula aculeata; Flabellum
goodei, and, in one spot, the usually rare Anthomastus grandiflorus V.
One of the most striking instances of commensalism was that of Æt-
zoanthus paguriphilus V., upon the previously rare hermit-crab Para-
paguras pilosimanus Smith. The polyp forms the habitation of the crab-
out of its own tissues, and neither polyp norcrab have hitherto been found
living separate. Bathyactis symmetrica has a wider bathymetrical and
geographical range than any other known species, as it has been found off
Florida, off the Azores, in the South Atlantic, at depths of from 1900
to 2650 fathoms; in the South Indian Ocean, from 1600 to 1950
fathoms ; in the Malay Archipelago and West Pacific, in from 360 to
2440 fathoms; east of Japan, in 2300 to 2400 fathoms; off Valpa-
«aiso, in 1375 fathoms ; on the New England coast, 225-252 fathoms.
The species of Echinodermata dredged in 1881 were in all forty-
eight, twenty-two of which had not previously been found upon our
coast ; twenty-six may be considered as arctic, twenty-two are Euro-
pean, and fourteen or more have been taken off Florida or in the Gulf
of Mexico.
1890.] Zoölogy. 185
Among these forms were Dorocidaris papillata (this was previously
not supposed to occur north of the Gulf stream, off the coast of Florida);
Schizaster canaliferus L. Ag., somewhat different from the type, prob-
ably a geographical variety, Brissopsis lyrifera Ag. ; Phormosoma
sigsbet A. Ag., Archaster bairdii sp. nov., in general appearance like
A. parelli and A. agasszit; Ophioglypha aurantiaca sp. nov; O. con-
Jragosa Lyman, the type specimens of which were dredged by the Chal-
lenger off the La Plata in 600 fathoms ; Amphiura macilenta sp. nov.,
very abundant off Martha’s Vineyard; Zoxodora ferruginea, a new
genus and species of holothurian ; Asteras briareus sp. nov., Ophiog-
lyphia sarsii Lütken, which occurs in two varieties, one abundant
in shallow water, the other, with less prominent disk-scales, common
in the depths of the Bay of Fundy and off Nova Scotia; O. signata,
sp. nov., not rare in deep water; and Antedon dentatum, first described
by Say from Great Egg Harbor, N. J., as Alectro dentata
At one spot two or three barrels of Ophoglypha sarsii came up at one
haul ; and Archiaster agassizii occurred in great numbers in one spot,
at 337 fathoms.
The work of 1882 has obtained nearly all the species found in 1881,
with the addition of the following: Solaster eariiit, Verrill, a Dia-
dema-like sea-urchin with nine arms, and of a bright scarlet color ;
Lophaster furcifer; Astrogonium granulare, Astrophyton lamarckii,
also bright orange ; Asteronyx loveni M and Tr., found upon a penna-
tulid at 7oo fathoms; a new Ophioscolex, and Rhizocrinus lofotensis.
That the arms of an Ophiuran can be restored after they have been
broken, or entirely lost, is well-known ; but Prof. Verrill has seen cases
in which the entire dorsal disk, with the contained viscera, had been
lost and more or less restored. The species exhibiting this strange
power was Amphiura abdita V., and the specimens were taken among
Zostera at Noank, Conn. The dorsal disk is soft and swollen, and
easily torn away, leaving only the jaws connecting the arms. In some
the new disk, though perfect in form, had not reached more than one-
third or one-half the diameter of the old one. Prof. Verrill thinks it
probable that his 4. macilenta is the true young of this species.
The headquarters of the U. S. Fish Commission, during both 1881
and 1882, were at Wood’s Holl, Mass. During 1882 only five trips
were taken to the Gulf Stream slope, but these were successful ones”
The total number of Invertebrata now on the lists of the fauna of this
belt is about 575, and this neither includes the Foraminifera nor the
Entomostraca, which are numerous, and but few of the sponges. Of
those determined, about 265 are Mollusca, including 14 Cephalopods ;
186 The American Naturalist, (Febeeany,
85 are Crustacea; 60 Echinodermata, and 65 Annelids. About 75
species of fishes have also been found here. Many species, especially
Crustacea, common in the two previous years, were scarce or absent
in 1882. This, as well as the great destruction of the tile-fish
(Lopholatilus) was, in Prof. Verrill’s opinion, probably caused by a
very severe storm that occurred in this region, which “‘ by agitating the
bottom water, forced outward the very cold water that, even in sum-
mer, occupies the great area of shallower sea, in less than 60 fathoms,
along the coast, and thus caused a sudden lowering of the temperature
along this narrow warm zone where the tile-fish and the crustacea re-
ferred to were formerly found.’’—W. N. L.
The Ectoderm of Spongilla.—According to one group of au-
thorities the ectoderm of the larval sponge is transformed directly into
that of the adult, while others claim that during metamorphosis the
ectodermal larva entirely disappears. To ascertain the real facts in the
case, Otto Maas contrived apparatus whereby a single embryo of
spongilla could be kept constantly under observation during all its
stages until sometime after attachment, and he concludes (Zool. Anz.,
No. 316) that the larval ectoderm is transformed directly into that of
the adult. At first the cells are columnar ; after becoming attached the
animals increase rapidly in size, which is accompanied by a flattening
of the ectoderm, which is now cubical and growing flatter and flatter ;
the cell boundaries disappear, but always a sharp focusing will reveal
a double contour. The ectodermal tissue is visible and the layer ap-
as an extremely thin hyaline membrane. Götte’s sections in
which no ectoderm was visible are interpreted as artificial products,
the delicate ectodermal pellicle having been torn away in spots in the
processes of preparation.
Copulatory Marks in Spiders.—There are very few instances
in the animal kingdom of easily recognized marks of copulation,
The cases of spermatophores protruding from the female genitalia, the
male copulatory organs adhering in the female of the honey bee, and
occasional male palpus sticking in the epigyne of spiders, and the
hardened secretion forming a sort of pocket on the abdomens of cer-
‘tain butterflies (Parnassia, etc.), are all noticeable from their pecu-
liarity. Dr. Bertkau finds that in spiders of the genus Argenna a
similar sign occurs. Immediately after copulation the opening to the
spermathecz becomes covered with a little white or slightly rosy lid,
which may be retained for a considerable time, even months. The
1890.] Zoology. 187
origin of the secretion which produces these lids is utterly unknown,
nor is it known whether it is produced by male or female.
New Glands in the Hemipterous Embryo.—lIt is well known
that in the insect embryo traces of rudimentary appendages occur on
the abdominal segments, but the histology goes to show that these
evanescent structures on the first abdominal segment have lost their
ambulatory function and have taken on another. One series of in-
vestigators believe that they are gills, the other as sense organs or
glands. Mr. W. M. Wheeler has studied homologous structures in
Cicada and Nepa, and finds (Zool. Anz., 317) that in these forms there
is no protruding appendage, but in its place a swollen ectodermal
tch composed of greatly elongate epithelial cells, flat on the free
surface and extending itself into the interior of the y: oceed-
ing from these cells was found a secretion which varied in character
(in hardened specimens) in the two forms studied. In Cicada it
formed a vacuolated transparent mass ; in Nepa it formed a brush-like
mass of elongate threads, apparently a thread to each secreting cell.
There was apparently no connection with the nervous system, so that
these organs in the Hemiptera must be regarded as glandular. Con-
cerning the functions of these and other similar glands, it is difficult
to say, but it is possible that they may fall among the category of
silk-glands, and play a part in making these forms nauseous mouth-
fuls for insectivorous animals.
Abdominal Appendages of Lepismida.—Oudeman shows
that there is a regular succession in the appearance of the ventral ab-
dominal appendages in the Thysanurous form, Zhermophila furnorum.
In the smallest forms only the pair belonging to the ninth segment are
present ; increase in size brings the eighth pair, while only the full
grown individuals have appendages on seventh, eighth, and ninth seg-
ments. Oudeman thinks this adverse to the view that these are rudi-
mentary appendages homodynamous with the others.
The Segmentation of the Vertebrate Brain.— Mr. C. F.
W. McClure attacks (Zool. Anz. 314) this oft-studied problem from
another standpoint. He finds, in studying Amblystoma, Anolis, and
the chick, that there is an evident segmentation of the nervous centre,
it being divided, in an early stage, into segments or neuromeres, which
alternate with the mesodermic somites. This segmentation extends
into the cranial region, and embraces the whole of the brain, the fore-
brain consisting of two (possibly a portion of a third), the mid-brain
188 The American Naturalist. [February,
of two or three, and the hind-brain of six or five neuromeres, a total
of ten, which correspond with the line of division between the nine
mesodermal somites recognized bý Van Wijhe in the head.
The Origin of the Pelvis.—Wiedersheim, in a preliminary
account of the origin of the vertebrate pelvis (Bericht d. Naturf. Gesell-
schaft, February, IV., 1889), claims that the key to the first appear-
ance of this structure is to be found in Lepidosiren annectens. Here the
fibrous tissue of two pairs of myotomes in front of the cloaca through
a process of chondrification reach a higher condition of connective
tissue. These cartilaginous zones fuse in the “nea alba abdominis to
form an unpaired plate, thus affording a solid support for the free ex-
tremities. This process, which occurs again ontogenetically in the
lowest urodele Batrachia, finds a parallel in the chondrification of a
number of myotomes in the thoracic region of certain perennibran-
chiate Batrachia, —ż.e., in the rudiments of hyaline cartilage ventral
ribs. The sternum of the Batrachia also falls in the same morpho-
logical category.
The vertebrate pelvis also owes its first appearance to the conversion
into cartilage of a pair of abdominal myotomes—or to use the terms
of human anatomy, of the inscriptiones tendinee of the ventral body
muscles,
The Stapedial Bones.—Dr. C. K. Hoffman claims (Zool. Anz.,
310) that the stapes in the reptiles arises from two sources. The oto-
stapes arises from the outer layer of periotic mesoderm as a strong
lateral process. At about the same time the hyoid arch is prolonged
into a medial projection, the hyostapes, which unites with the otostapes
to form the stapes, while the connection with the hyoid is lost. Hoff-
man thinks that similar relations can be traced in the Mammalia. The
stapes proper is the otostapes, and the os lenticulare is the hyostapes.
The fact that the facial nerve innervates the stapedial muscle on the
lenticular portion lends probability to this view.
Frogs Eating Snakes.—(January Naturauist, p. 74). If Mr.
H. L. Roberts will turn to page 348 of my ‘ Naturalist’s Rambles
About Home,”’ he will find that I have described in full an instance of
a frog (Rana pipiens) swallowing a snake. More recent observations
have convinced me that such an occurrence is not as uncommon as
might be supposed, considering the fear usually exhibited by a frog
when a snake —— ONR C. ABBOTT, Trenton, N. J.
1890. ] Zoology. 189
Voice of Hyla andersonii.—The specimen of this beautiful
batrachian referred to by Dr. Peters in the January Naturauist is still
in excellent health, and occasionally utters its characteristic cry, which
should not be described by the word “ peep,” for this suggests a simi-
larity to the cry of the Pickering’s Hyla, which shrilly ‘‘ peeps.” The
andersonii utters a single note, better described by the syllable ‘‘ keck,’’
which it usually repeats three or four times. It is not a frog-like note
at all, but much resembles the call of the Virginia rail (Rallus virgin-
tanus). If the collector follows up any ‘‘ peeper’’ in the marshes, he
will not discover additional specimens of Myla andersonit.—CHARLES
C. ABBOTT.
The Trochlearis Nerve in Lizards.—Contrary to his earlier
view, Hoffman now finds (Zoö?. Auz., No. 310) that the trochlearis of
the lizard at an early stage possesses a ganglion, and that it in all re-
spects resembles one of the truly segmental nerves. This ganglion
aborts at about the time of the deposition of the retinal pigment. He
asks the question if this is not to be regarded as the first segmental
nerve of the hind brain? In snakes, birds, and teleosts he finds no
anglion at any stage of development. He also suggests that the
present distribution of the trochlearis may be secondary, and that
formerly it was connected possibly with the occluding = of the
parietal eye.
Bats in the Wyandotte Cave, Indiana.—In the summer thou-
sands and tens of thousands of bats assemble in Wyandotte cave, in
Crawford county, and in other caves. A man living near Wyandotte
cave, who had observed them for years, said that frequently in the early
dusk of evening, he had seen a column of these flying animals from
thirty to sixty feet in width and from two to three miles in length move
from the mouth of the cave in a straight line going in a northwesterly
direction. In a short time another column would move toward
another point of the compass, and then perhaps another, each as long
as the first, and, as long as within his observation, without straggling,
and guided as by some reason or instinct that led these small-brained
creatures to a known haunt or point. In the morning they would re-
turn, not in solid column, as they departed, but in large flocks or _
droves, passing into the cave, where they would be seen no more until
the next evening. ‘‘ Faneuil Hall” is a spacious corridor in Wyan-
dotte cave, forty feet wide and eighteen to twenty feet high. Here
daylight ends and darkness begins. Here we see the first of cave life.
Here are clusters of bats which sleep in the daytime, hanging by their
190 The American Naturalist. [February,
hind feet with their heads downward. They hibernate in myriads in
the winter, attached to the sides and roof by their hind feet. The
surface of the stone being porous affords great attachment to their
claws, while the peculiar construction of their feet makes the grasp of
their claws stronger the more and the longer the weight is attached
to them. They collect in clusters, so that they are in contact with
one another, and the animal heat thus retained assists in their com-
fort. The cave temperature ranges from 58° in the fall down to 52°
or 53° in the spring, and the cave ‘breathes ’’ semi-annually at the
autumnal and vernal equinoxes, having a discharge of warm air in the
fall, and an inflow of cool air during the winter. In the cooler
weather the bats are not satisfied with a single layer, but are attached
like swarms of bees, hanging down. The highest temperature in the
highest part of the cave is 66° in the winter. This cave is floored in
two stories. Passing on one goes through numerous halls, corridors,
arches, and domes, which are occupied to a greater or less extent by
these Chiroptera. For reasons known to themselves alone some of
the rooms are favored spots, while others are rarely occupied by them.
The southern route in the cave was discovered in 1850, and was un-
visited up to that time by quadrupeds like raccoons and opossums, be-
cause the opening was too small for them to pass through. The cur-
rent of air passing in was very slight, and the temperature uniform.
This made it a favorite place for these furry flyers. The second hall,
‘í Bats’ Lodge,’ as it is named, is a spacious room in which the bats
delight to assemble for council purposes, it would appear, as well as
sleep. I saw the ceiling largely covered with clusters of them crowded
closely together. Disturbed by our entrance, the room was filled with
their slight, plaintive, whining, whispering voices and the disagreeable
odor of their bodies, My first visit was in the early autumn. The
results noted were taken in December, when the outer world was cold
enough to close the Ohio river with ice, and the thermometer at the
mouth of the cave was from six to twelve degrees below zero. The bats
were evidently hibernating, and, although somewhat torpid, yet, when
disturbed, in falling they dropped a distance of six or eight feet, their
bodies rarely fell to the ground. Recovering the use of their wings,
they would fly back to one of the clusters. There are two kinds of
bats in Indiana—the red bat and the common black bat. The red bat
is the Southern type, and is rare, only occasional specimens having
been taken.—Joun CoLLETT, in Indianapolis Journal.
1890.] ~. Loblogy. IQI
Zoological News.—General.—Volume XXX., part I, of the
Quarterly Journal of Microscopical Science contains an index extend-
ing from 1853 to 1888; an Index to the Transactions of the same
society from 1844 to 1852; and to the Proceedings of the Dublin
Microscopical Society from 1865 to 1880.
Sponges.—Von Lindenfeld thinks that the collared endoderm cells
of the sponges are never free, but are imbedded in a ground substance
from which they are capable of some protrusion. He also thinks that
the ‘‘membrane”’ recently described by Dendy and Sollas in certain
sponges is, in reality, but the free surface of this ground substance.
Worms.— Otoplana intemedia is a new turbellarian described by
Dr. du Plessis as combining many features. It has no eyes, but has an
otocyst in front of the brain, ciliated pits on either side of the otocyst
like those of the nemertines, long, symmetrically placed tactile hairs on
each side of the body ; the surface of the body is covered with sticky
cells (Klebzellen) ; there is a single median posterior sexual opening ;
and the alimentary canal is dendroccelous.
Mollusca.—Pelseneer (Zod/. Anz., 309) denies that the hooks of
the pteropod molluscs have any morphological value, a view at vari-
ance with that expressed by Schalfejeff.
The thirtieth volume of the Challenger series concludes with a sup-
plementary report upon the Polyzoa, and is by Mr. A. W. Waters. It
consists of 41 pages and 3 plates.
Fishes.—Prof. A. C. Haddon writes to ature (Jan. 17, ’89) that
apparently the tail in Periophthalmus is an efficient organ of respira-
tion. He also describes the methods of fishing for turtles with the
suckfish or remora, employed by the natives on the shores of Lowes
The American genus Carpiodes (Catostomidz) has been found in
Australia.
Reptiles.—Dr. G. Baur, in his Osteological Notes on Reptiles
(Zoél. Anz., No. 296), calls attention to the fact that in Podocnemis
dumeriliana the neck vertebrz possess the same saddle-shaped articula-
tion of the centra which hitherto has not been found outside the group
of birds. Baur also characterizes anew from osteological details the
Trionychidz, Sternothzride, Podocnemidz, as well as adding some
notes on other families. He maintains, contrary to Boulenger, the
distinctness of Erymnochelys from Podocnemis.
192 The American Naturalist. [February,
Arthropoda.—Mr. F. A. A. Skuse recently described before the
Linnzan Society of New South Wales a new genus (Batrachomyia) and
two new species of flies closely allied to Oscinis, which are peculiar in
laying their eggs beneath the skin of frogs.
A comparative study of the alimentary canal of the larve and
imagines of the Ephemeride is interesting, since these forms take no
nourishment in the adult condition. Fritze (Bericht Naturf. Gesellsch.
Freiburg, IV.) has made such a study, carefully detailing the histology
of several species in all stages. His results in brief are that at no
time is the alimentary canal rudimentary, but that at the time of
metamorphosis it becomes emptied of food, and is then distended
with water, so that the columnar epithelium of the mesenteron is
stretched into pavement epithelium. Later the water is replaced with
air, which is serviceable in lessening the specific gravity of the perfect
insects.
Birds.—A short note in the March Geologist, by W. K. Parker,
tends to somewhat rehabilitate the old and still popular idea that
Swifts and swallows are related. Though Mr. Parker places the former
among the Picariz, he says that they are on the passerine verge of the
group, and have an zgithognathous palate, 7. e., the vomer is fused
with the floor of the nasal labyrinth. The proportions of the wing in
the group vary greatly, as may be seen from the following measure-
ments of its members in two of the largest Cypselide :
Humerus. Ulna, Manus.
Macropteryx mystacea, 24 mm. 29 mm. 47 mm.
Chetura caudaca, 17 = ig 57 “
Swifts and humming-birds, like passerines, have no second phalanx
on the ‘ pollex,’’ nor a third on the index.
Aphriza virgata affords Dr. Shufeldt material for an essay regarding
the osteology and taxonomy of the snipe, plovers, oyster-catchers, and
surf-birds ( Jour. Morph. II., Part 2). He concludes that the existing
classifications do not properly represent the relations of the Limicoline
birds, and that the Aphriza and Arenaria should each be raised to
family rank.
Mammals.—Mr. Robert Gray (Zodlogist, March) relates the dis-
covery of a herd of narwhals asleep, with the spiracles under water in
many cases ; and states his conviction, which is that of many intelli-
gent whalemen, that the Cetacea habitually sleep under water, and
either wake to breathe, or do so by reflex motions. Whales have been
1890.] Physiology. 193
seen to emerge from under fields of ice without air-holes, and they
disappear from the surface with some regularity, It is only when the
water is smooth that Cetaceans have been found asleep on the surface.
E. Harting (Zodlogist, March, 1889) states that the roebuck is
still found wild in Dorsetshire, and that there are a few near Wigton,
in Cumberland ; otherwise, it is now almost entirely confined to Scot-
land. Even in Dorset its presence is due to a reintroduction. A
curious fact in the life history of the roe is that, though the rutting
season is in August, the ovum lies dormant until December, when it
developes at the normal rate. Occasionally a female roe has horns.
The discovery in the Hebrides of Mus hibernicus, a species which,
like Mus decumanus, has the tail shorter than the head and body, and
the ears relatively small, forms the subject of the first article in the
Zoblogist for June, 1889. It is a smaller and more elegant animal
than M. decumanus, with finer fur, of a dark silvery gray, almost black
tint, upon the back. The far of the sides is paler, and the under
surface is silvery mouse-
In the September issue oat the same periodical Mr. T. Southwell
states his belief that M. Atdernicus is a hybrid.
Alphonse Milne Edwarcs has recently described a peculiar marsupial
from New Guinea, under the name Dactylopsia palpator, remarkable
for the enormous length of the fourth digit of the hand, which
nearly equals the elongate third digit of the Malagassy Aye-Aye.
PHYSIOLOGY.!
Nature of Knee-jerk.—There are two theories of the nature of the
knee-jerk phenomenon : one regards the process as entirely peripheral,
the muscle fibres being directly stimulated to contraction by the twitch
of the tendon ; the other regards the action as reflex. Objections to
both exist; to the peripheral theory, especially the fact that the reflex
arc must be functional; to the reflex theory, the fact that the time
necessary is very short—only about one-fourth that of other reflex
actions. Dr. Lombard, who made an elaborate study of the phe-
nomenon in 1887,? brings forward the results of experiments to prove
the tenability of the reflex theory. These experiments were made on
1 This department is edited by Dr. Frederic S, Lee, Bryn Mawr College, Bryn Mawr,
Penna.
2 See American Journal of Psychology, Vol. I.
3 Journal of Physiology, Vol. X
194 The American Naturalist. [February,
twenty-five students, in whom the knee-jerks resulting from the blows
of a hammer, the force being known and constant, were recorded ona
drum. The peripheral theory assumes that the tension of the muscle
determines its ability to respond to mechanical stimuli, and that this
tension dependi on tonus impulses originating in the spinal cord.
Th without proofs, and the theory is opposed by facts.
“be knee-jerk may be present when muscle tonus appears to be
wanting, and may be absent in the case of men who apparently have a
normal amount of tonus. When the knee-jerk is lacking, it cannot be
restored by any amount of tension which can be artificially supplied to
the muscle. The tonus theory does not explain the difference which
always exists in the size of the successive knee-jerks, for it is found ex-
perimentally that the size of the knee-jerk is not influenced by slight
variations in the tension of the muscle; nor can the changes in the
amount of the knee-jerk be attributed to alterations of the irritability
of the muscle dependent on fine variations in tonus, because experi-
ments show that the irritability of the muscle does not change within
short intervals of time. The peripheral theory does not explain the
reenforcements of the knee-jerk [z.e., the increase of the latter when
it is accompanied by voluntary motion in some part of the body or by
sensations], because reenforcing acts, unless very violent, do not alter
the tension or irritability of the muscles, The discovery of Mitchell and
Lewis, that muscular contraction called out by electrical stimulation
cannot be reenforced, is inexplicable by the peripheral theory, though
readily explained by the reflex theory, Finally, occasionally the flex-
ors, as well as the extensors, of the knee are seen to contract in re-
sponse to the blow on the ligamentum patellae. This contraction of
the flexor muscles is of reflex origin, and there is little reason to doubt
that the extensors are irritated by the same reflex process. The idea
that the flexors are mechanically stimulated by the strain brought on
them by the sudden extension of the knee is untenable, because we
know that muscles are not irritated by slight strains on their tendons,
and the flexors are seen to contract when the knee has extended so
little as to bring almost no strain upon them ; moreover, in spite of the
fact that the muscle irritability does not change within short intervals
of time, small knee-jerks may be seen to be accompanied by marked
contractions of the flexors, “o immediately after, large knee-jerks by
little or no flexor contraction.’
Pick! finds histological evidence in favor of the reflex theory.
i f. Psychiatrie, XX., 3, p. 896; cf. Centralblatt f. Physiologie, 1889, No. 12, p.
1890] * Physiology. 195
In a paralytic the left knee-jerk was wanting, and the right was present
with motor reinforcement only. Post-mortem investigation of the
spinal cord revealed marked degeneration of fibres in’ the region of the
entering posterior roots of the lower dorsal and upper lumbar sections
on the left side, less on the right side; the fibrous portion of Clark’s
columns was more atrophied on the left than the right, also the left
posterior roots in places. This confirms yee Ad localization of the
centre for the knee-jerk.
Heat-centres.—The localization and even the existence of heat-
centres in the human central nervous system is still in dispute. Ac-
cording to Ott,! six such centres, injury to which is followed by in-
crease of temperature, have been localized in the lower animals. These
are the cruciate in the region of the fissure of Rolando, the Sylvian,
at the junction of the supra and post-sylvian fissures, the caudate
nucleus, the region about the corpora striata, a point near the median
line between the corpora striata and the optic thalami, and the an-
terior inner end of the optic thalami. Ott has collected a number of
clinical cases as evidence of similarly located heat centres in man.
The high temperature usually following lesions of the spinal cord, me-
dulla oblongata, or pons varolii, is explained as due to a removal of
the influence of the thermotoxic centres allowing spinal thermogenesis
to become exaggerated.
At a recent meeting of the Neurological Society of London,
when pyrexia was under discussion, Victor Horsly® gave some results
of observations on the differences of temperature of the two sides of
the body as symptomatic of cerebral lesions. He states that in 18
cases lesions of the ‘‘ corpus striatum frontal plane of the hemisphere,’’
which reaches the brain surface in the ascending frontal gyrus, was
followed as a rule by increased rise of temperature in the opposite side
of the body; lesions in other parts of the hemisphere were not so
followed. He deprecated the use of the term ‘‘heat-centres,’’ until
the matter had been more fully investigated by experiment.
At the same meeting Dr. W. Hale White’ gave an account of his
researches on the influence on bodily temperature of lesions of the
corpora striata and optic thalami. Rabbits were used for experiment,
and the lesions were made by trephining the skull and inserting a wire
in such a manner that portions of the central ganglia could be de-
5 Brain, sey XLIV., 1889, p. 433-
ê British Medical Journal, Vol. I. for 1889, p. 1406.
1 British ent Journal, Vol. I. for 1889, p. 1401.
Nat.—February.—6.
196 The American Naturalist. *[February,
stroyed wıthout seriously damaging the upper part of the brain. Neither
etherizatıon nor trephining and pricking the dura mater caused long-
lasting rise of temperature. Lesions of the white matter alone seemed
incompetent to produce a rise of temperature. Twenty-three lesions
of the corpora striata alone were followed in all except two cases by a
rise averaging fifty-eight hours in duration, and equaling from 3° to
5.2° F. Nine lesions of the optic thalami alone caused a rise òf 2°+
to 3°+, and averaging forty-two hours in duration. The nerve fibres
that modify the temperature apparently do not cross in the rabbit, this
animal thus differing from man.
Function of Mammalian Sympathetic Ganglia. — In 1887
Dr. W. Hale White published 8 the results of microscopic examinations
of the superior cervical ganglia of man and numerous lower mammals,
which tended to show that this ganglion gradually degenerates the
higher one goes in the animal scale. e has since made further ob-
servations on this and other sympathetic ganglia? As regards the
superior cervical ganglion, in adult man the nerve cells as a rule were
pigmented, granular, shrunken, non-nucleated, and degenerate in
appearance, the degeneration being greatest in old persons; in chil-
dren and foetuses, the cells were like normal. nerve cells; in twenty-
one species of lower mammals, the cells were also like normal nerve
cells, except in one of the Catarrhine apes, where slight evidences of
egeneration existed. As regards the semilunar ganglia, thirty-three
human specimens, three taken tis children, showed normal nerve
cells, while twenty-four adult ; of eighteen
lower mammals, all possessed cells of the normal type. In human
thoracic ganglia, a few nerve cells possessed slight granularity and
pigmentation, and this was more marked in aged individuals. The
author draws the following conclusions :
“ Firstly : That in lower mammals and young human beings the col-
lateral ganglia (if we may judge from the superior cervical and semi-
lunar) are functionally active, but that in monkeys there are evidences
of the commencing loss of their function, which has completely dis-
appeared in the human adult. Secondly: That in man the function
of the lateral ganglia is maintained well into adult life, and only
begins to disappear in old age.”
8 Journal of Physiology, Vol. VIIL., p. 66.
9 Journal of Physiology, Vol. X., 1889, p. 341
1890] ° Anthropology. 197
ANTHROPOLOGY.
Congresses, National and International, held in Paris
during, and a part of, the French Exposition of 1889.—
There were about 120 such congresses; all such as would otherwise
have been held in France, and many of those which would otherwise
have been held in other countries in Europe, were held in Paris, in 1889.
The Congress of Archælogie and Anthropologie Prehistorique was the
most important from the American standpoint of Archæology. There
were enrolled 420 members. Of the foreigners there were Belgians,
56; English, 32; German, 28 ; Italian, 26; Danes, 13; Austrians, 11;
Hollanders, 7; Portuguese, 13; Swedes, 8; Swiss, 7; Russians, 6;
Finns, 6; Spaniards, 4; Americans, 5 ; though not all were present.
The first three seances of the congress were devoted to the questions
relative to glacial phenomena, the formation of river valleys, and the
classification to be made in prehistoric anthropology and paleontol-
ogy during the quarternary epoch. The ancient theories relating to
these questions, the latter especially, were maintained by Dr. Gosse,
of Geneva, and Mortillet, of Paris. Their opponents were Mr.
Evans, of London, and Monsieur Gosselet, of Lille. Dr. Schliemann
occupied an afternoon in the discussion of his celebrated discoveries
in Asia Minor. Mons. J. de Morgan rendered him much assistance in
demonstrating the antiquity of the men of that epoch and locality by
relating his discoveries in Armenia; a part of which antiquities the
National Museum has just purchased from his brother, H. de Morgan.
Interesting papers and discussion were read and had on the subject of
the age of bronze and stone in Denmark, the antiquities of the Canary
Islands, the Megalithic Monuments of Tunis, the Lacustrian of Rou-
mania, the engraving and sculpture in southern France, particularly at
the cavern of Mas d’Azil. The papers were read respectively by Dr.
Sophus Muller, MM. Derneau, Hamy, Butzurneau, and Judge Piette.
My own papers were those relating’ to the petiods, paleolithic and
neolithic, in America, and that on the subject of the gravels of Tren-
ton in which Dr. Abbott has discovered paleolithic implements. MM.
Fraipont and Lohest gave most interesting descriptions of their cele-
brated discoveries in the Grotto de Spy, Belgium. Dr. Topinard
described his studies in the color of hair and eyes of the people of
rance. There were interesting papers and discussions by the Portu-
guese, Spaniards, Russians, Scandinavians, and Belgians.
198 The American Naturalist. * February,
The French Exposition was immense. It was a great success from
an artistic, educational, financial, and expositional standpoint. It-
could scarcely be otherwise, for the French people and government
were in perfect harmony, and thoroughly interested and determined in
their efforts. They commenced with sufficient appropriations and in
ample time to make it so. The total number of paying entries ex-
ceeded 25,000,000 persons; the average entries upon ordinary days
were from 140- to 160,000, while on /é¢e days, Sundays, extra music,
illumination, fireworks, etc., the attendance ran up without effort to
250,000 and even 350,000.
I took with me 397 objects belonging to prehistoric America. One
hundred and sixty-five were paleolithic implements which I had gath-
ered up in the District of Columbia, a few weeks before sailing, for this
purpose. I did not expect to bring these back, but I intended to use
them for purposes of donation, exchange, etc. One hundred and
eight of them were arrow- and spear-points, having the same destina-
tion. Eleven specimens, and one box containing uncounted and
unnumbered specimens, were chips and flakes from Flint Ridge, and
obsidian from the Pacific Slope, intended as a donation to M. de Mor-
tillet, who is making a collection of this material, and has obsidian
flakes and cores from almost every part of the world. Forty-five were
plaster casts of the peculiarly shaped Indian objects of the United
States, which were denominated by Dr. Rau as ‘‘ Ceremonial.’’ There
were also a series of casts of pipes. Seventy-one were objects from
the collection of Mr. W. K. Moorehead, and represented the cele-
brated discovery made last April in the Porter Mound, Roos County,
Ohio. ‘Twenty-eight were impressions of pottery, showing the deco-
ration. ‘Twenty-nine specimens were hard stone, and were intended,
with the Moorehead collection, to be returned to me at Washington.
The others were intended for gift or exchange. They proved exceed-
ingly interesting to the prehistoric anthropologists who were in attend-
ance upon the various congresses. I first endeavored to make a
display of these objects in the halls used by the congresses, but found
it to be unsuitable, and, by the advice of those who had the greatest
knowledge and interest in the matter, I took them to the exposition,
purchasing two glass-top cases, black in color, and respectable in ap-
pearance, and there displayed the entire collection. This was in ac-
cordance with the recommendation of Dr. Hamy, MM. Cartailhac,
Boban, and others.
I directed that at the close of the exposition the objects remaining
were to be disposed of as follows:
1890.} Anthropology. 199
The principal portion of the paleolithic specimens were to go to the
Musée of St. Germain, though several individual objects were to be
given to MM. de Mortillet, Cartailhac, Capitan, d’Acy, and Boban.
The plaster casts of the ceremonial and other curious objects peculiar
to the United States will go to the Trocadero Museum in charge of
Dr. Hamy.
I do not know whether any of these objects will figure in the cata-
logues of the exposition, but I was assured that all inspection and
visits by the jury for the award of prizes had been made before my
display was set up.— Thomas Wilson.
British Museum.—wWe landed in England on the 4th day of
September, and spent the rest of our time until the 2d of October
there and in Ireland. I visited the British Museum, and had several
conferences with Mr. Franks, who is the Curator of the Department of
Ethnology and Prehistoric Archeology. I had known him before, and
my visit was very satisfactory. His department is being enlarged, and
he will have room for a better and finer display. That portion of his
department relating to prehistoric man has fewer objects than the same
department in the National Museum; but it occupies greater space,
and is consequently displayed to better advantage.
Mr. Franks receives an annual appropriation for the purchase of
specimens for his department of £1,200, equal to $6,000, besides a
fund left by Mr. Christy, of which Mr. John Evans and Mr. Franks
are trustees, the income of which, however, I do not know. ‘The
Christy fund has furnished many of the objects in the Museum. It,
with some aid from the Museum, I believe, has lately purchased the
magnificent collection of Mons. Peccedeau de Lisle, of Toulouse,
France, comprising a full series of the cavern implements and objects
of France, and including his great find at the cavern of Bruniquel,
being the largest part of the known examples of sculptured and en-
graved bone and horn and ivory objects belonging to the paleolithic
period. I did not wish to ask the prices paid for this collection, but
when I examined it at Toulouse the lowest price at which it could have
been purchased was 40,000 francs, equal to $8,000. It is now dis-
played in the paleolithic room at the head of the stairs in the British
Museum. It contains the three well-known and unique sculptures in
the round, of ivory and reindeer horn, two representing a reindeer and
the other a mammoth. There are many other drawings and engrav-
ings etched or engraved upon bone or stone, some of which show
great artistic power. The report of this department in Parliamentary
200 The American Naturalist. [February,
Paper No. 229, 1888, says: ‘‘ This acquisition renders the collection
at the Museum of ancient cave remains the most complete that is
known to archzeologists.”’
I visited the Kensington Museum and the Museum of Natural His-
tory, now presided over by Prof. W. H. Flower. Prof. Flower was
president of the British Association at Newcastle this year, and his
address was devoted to the organization of museums so as to produce
the greatest benefit for students and for the public.—Zhomas Wilson.
ENTOMOLOGY.
The Flour Moth.—A new insect pest has recently made its
appearance on the continent of America. It is known as the flour
moth (Zfhestia kuhniella), and its ravages, as its name indicates, are
seen in the destruction of flour, in which it weaves its webs, and upon
which the caterpillar feeds. As it is very destructive, and increases
with marvelous fecundity, it is of the utmost importance that every
precaution should be taken to prevent its spread.
The flour moth is indigenous to the Mediterranean, and a few years
ago it would have been likely to stay there. But increasing commerce
has its attendant dangers. Experience has shown that as trade in the
milling industry enlarges, weed and insect pests, confined at one time
to a certain locality, have spread to places far distant. The flour
moth has probably come to America with importations of seed wheat,
or in bags in which flour has been exported, and which before their
return may have been stored for a time in some place infested by the
insect.
The color of the fore-wings of this moth may be generally described
as of rather pale gray, with darker transverse markings. The hind
wings are peculiar for their whitish semi-transparency, with a darker
line from the point along a part of the fore edge. The accompaning
illustration will convey a general idea of the appearance of the moth.
An examination of the flour infested by the insect shows a mass
completely spun together with the web. Giving the result of his
_ investigations, an expert tells us he found it so inatted together that,
a fter pulling some lumps of it away, he found that the rest hung down
1890.] Entomology. 201
in rag lumps or clots, so felted together that little flour remained in a
loose state. From a mass of these clots, containing two or three cubic
(a). Moth (imago) magnified. ` Moth (imago) aad magnified ;
(b). Outline, showing natural size. sessile or quiesc
inches, only a teaspoonful of flour could be obtained by repeated
shakings. The mass was filled with live caterpillars, living and dead
chrysalids, and remains of dead moths. Going on to describe the
appearance of these enie he says :
‘ The caterpillars varied in size from two-
ighths up to five-eighths of an inch in
Caterpillar (larva), natural size. peo and correspondingly in color, the
younger ones being of flesh or pale red color, and the largest al-
most white ; the shape cylindrical, somewhat slender, with sixteen
feet,—that is, three pairs of claw-feet, four pairs of sucker feet, and a
very well-developed pair besides beneath the tail, by the help of which,
although the largest of the larva were sluggish, the younger traveled
nimbly, and could move backwards or forwards at pleasure, or were
able to attach themselves at once to a foreign substance, as the finger
or hand. The head yellowish brown, darker in front, and with dark
brown jaws ; a transverse patch on the segment next the head, this
rather pale yellowish brown, with a faint pale central line dividing it
from back to front, and (in the oldest specimen) a small brown spot
on each side of the segment below the patch. Along the ‘back, except-
ing towards the head and tail, were four small dark dots on each
segment above, two on each side the centre. On the segments near
the head the spots were arranged more transversely, and at the tail,
immediately above the sucker-feet, was a brownish, oval or somewhat
triangular patch (the anal plate). On the preceding segment one
transverse row of spots varied somewhat in different specimens ; the
largest was in the middle, with a smaller one on each side, occasion-
ally one below, which would make five altogether ; but sometimes the
lowest pair was absent, sometimes the middle large spot was not
202 The American Naturalist. [February,
entire ; conjecturally the marking differed with the age of the cater-
pillar. On the preceding, that is, the eleventh segment, there were
two clearly defined brownish spots, and along each side of the cater-
pillar was a row of dark dots, one on each segment.
‘¢ The caterpillar was slightly sprinkled with pale hairs or fine bristles,
and had such a capacity for catching and
ees retaining a covering of flour that I was
Cini ices ln size, obliged perpetually to remove it with the
but stripped from the film moistened tip of a finger to obtain a clear
of flour surrounding it. A é
view of the markings. _
“‘The chrysalis, which was lying in a
Cocoon as it appears inmost silken cocoon of spun-up flour, showed the
mE: chief points of the form of the coming insect
plainly—the color bees-wax below, shading to reddish-brown on the
back, and reddish-brown also at the end of the somewhat prolonged,
slightly-curved tail, which ended bluntly or cylindrically ; the eyes of
a darker shade of red. There were remains of dead, partly developed
moths or chrysalids in the box, but I could not make sure whether, as
thought not unlikely by Professor Zeller, these had been destroyed by
their caterpillar brethren—the size and power of their jaws make the
cannibal habit appear very probable. I had not opportunity of ob-
serving how long the chrysalis state lasts before the moth appears from
the chrysalis condition, but this time is given by Professor Zeller as
three weeks.”
From all that can be learned of the habits of this insect it would
appear that it is unceasing in its ravages where the temperature is suit-
able, in fact that it is an all-the-year-round pest. The pupa stage
being short, its multiplication is very rapid. How rapid is shown
by the fact that a large warehouse, 75 feet long, 25 feet wide, and four
Stories high, became literally alive with moths in the short space of
six months, while thousands of cocoons were found adhering to the
- walls, ceilings, and joists, and in every crack, crevice, and ‘nail-
hole, necessitating a thorough cleansing of the entire building and
its contents, the burning of a great deal of the wood-work, and the
disinfecting of the whole place to destroy any germs that might pos-
sibly have escaped.
The first appearance of the flour moth in Canada that I can learn of
was in March, 1889, when it was observed in a mill in Ontario. Little
attention was paid to it, as its dangerous character was not known ;
but by and by the moths began to appear in greater numbers, and soon
small worms were observed in the flour. Alarm began to be felt, and
1890.] Entomology. 203
it was suspected that these worms came from the moths which had been
seen in the mill. In July the bolting cloths, riger and some
other parts of the machinery, were carefully cleaned and washed. In
about four days after starting again, the bolts, ieit, etc., were
found to be in a worse state than ever, full of webs, moths, and worms.
The mill was shut down and a more thorough cleansing set about.
But it was found that every crack and crevice was alive, and as the
character of the moth was entirely new, an application was made to
the Government for assistance. A number of visits were made to the
infected mill by the authorities, and an order in council was passed by
the Government ordering the Provincial Board of Health for Ontario
to suppress the pest. The machinery was taken down and thoroughly
steamed ; the building was swept and subjected to the fumes of burn-
ing sulphur; the loose wooden parts, such as elevator spouts, etc.,
were burned, and paper bags, boxes, and any goods suspected of being
infected, were similarly disposed of. Even the mill-stones and iron
rollers were thoroughly steamed by placing them in a tight box with a
pipe from the boiler. After about two months’ loss of time, and a
large outlay for new machinery, stock, etc., the mill was pronounced
free from infection and ready to go to work again. As may be sup-
posed, its proprietors have taken’such precautions as will prevent the
pest gaining a footing should it again make its appearance. They
have provided a steam stand-pipe, with hose leading to each flat of
the mill, so that live steam can be turned on sufficient to kill anything.
The importance of dealing promptly with the Flour Moth whenever
and wherever it appears, has led the Ontario Government to issue a
bulletin, in which the following precautions are suggested to prevent
its introduction, and means of eradication pointed out should it ap-
pear: (1) no milled goods, such as Italian semolina, Indian cassava,
and Brazilian tapioca, should be allowed to enter the country, espec-
ially from Mediterranean ports, without being quarantined in a warm
place for a number of months, so as to give time for the ova, if
present, to hatch; (2) all s used for transporting flour, meal, or
grain should be prevented from entering the country till they have
been thoroughly boiled or steamed so as to kill any germs; (3) mil-
lers, exporters and importers of flour or grain should familiarize them-
selves with the appearance and habits of the moth at its various stages,
and take measures to destroy individual specimens before they have
time to multiply. Should the pest have made its appearance the fol-
lowing measures are recommended : (1) Destroy the moths by closing
all apertures and burning sulphur night after night in all parts of the
204 The American Naturalist. [February,
building ; (2) search for the larva or caterpillar in all packages of
flour and meal, and if any are found superheat in a dry kiln by spread-
ing it out in a thin layer so the heat can reach all parts; (3) do not
under any circumstances sell infected flour to dealers, but have it
steamed and fed to hogs; (4) where webs are found it may be con-
sidered that the larva has reached the chrysalis stage, and the cocoons,
or little masses of flour glued together, being little rolls about three-
quarters of an inch long, should be gathered up and burned. It
must be remembered, however, that the larva has a habit of retiring
to some crevice where it may be impossible to reach it, in which case
watch should be kept for the moths as they emerge from the chrysalis,
and they should then be killed. In such case sulphur fumes should
be used. When the larve have gained possession of any part of the
machinery, superheated steam must be used.
Where the use of sulphur might be attended with danger, chlorine
fumes may be used with equal benefit. Infested places may also be
sprayed with a solution of corrosive sublimate, consisting of one
drachm to each gallon of water, or with a soap emulsion consisting of
two gallons of kerosene, one of water and half a pound of whale oil
soap. The solution of soap should be heated and addded boiling-hot
to the kerosene, and then thoroughly mixed by means of a force-
pump and spray-nozzle. One part ofthis emulsion should be used
with nine parts of water. Prof. Riley, who gives the above formula,
lays great stress upon having kerosene properly emulsified when used
as an insecticide.
By adopting the above precautions this pest, which if allowed to go
on unchecked soon becomes worse than any of the plagues of Egypt,
may be kept down. The prompt measures already taken have to all
appearance stopped its spread in Canada, but it is liable to appear
again at any time. It has been seen in the United States but does
not appear to have done any mischief. With the intimate trade rela-
tions which exist between the two countries its spread in one would
soon be followed by its appearance in the other. Eternal vigilance is
the price of freedom from its ravages, and attention having been
called to it, millers and others likely to suffer should be on the alert.—
J. J. BELL, Brockville, Canada.
1890.] Proceedings of Scientific Societies. 205
PROCEEDINGS OF SCIENTIFIC SOCIETIES.
Boston Society of Natural History.— Prof. W. Putnam, the
president, announced the death of Leo Lequereaux, of Columbus, O.,
a corresponding member. Dr. Thomas Dwight read a paper on ‘‘ The
Joints and Muscles of Contortionists,’’ illustrated by stereopticon. He
said that {there were contortionists in ancient Egypt, but very poor
ones. Those of Greece and Rome were better, but those of modern
times have still more ability. He showed some pictures of medizeval
and modern contortionists in different positions, and said that for
backward contortion no very great variation from the normal in ana-
tomical structure was required, but there must be a large amount of
gristle in the spinal column, as is the case in all children. In forward
work, however, an abnormal structure is required, as the contortionist
must have the power to partly dislocate his joints in order to get his
limbs into the required positions. The performers of both classes
must be able to relax the antagonistic muscles,—that is, those that pull
in an opposite direction to which it is desired to bend.
Secretary Fewkes then read a communication from Prof. G. Fred-
erick Wright, of Oberlin, in regard to a little carved figure of a man
that was thrown up from a depth of three hundred and twenty feet be-
low the surface of the ground, while boring for an artesian well at
Nampa, I. T. This was accompanied by an opinion from Prof. S. F.
Emmons, that the formation from which the figure came was older than
any other where human implements have previously been found. The
gentlemen who took part in the discussion were Profs. Putnam, H. W.
Haines, Edward S. Morse, S. H. Scudder, and E. D. Cope, and Mr.
Warren Upham. Prof. Cope stated that the formation underlying the
lava bed in that part of Idaho, is the Pliocene lacustrine deposit,
which he had called the Idaho Terrane. The general opinion seemed
to be that the image was authentic, and that it was carved in the late
tertiary period by a member of a race that was far advanced in
development for so remote a period. Mr. Scudder was the only
speaker who dissented from this opinion.
American Geological Society.—The annual meeting was held
December 26-28, 1889, at the American Museum of Natural History,
New York. The following papers were read December 26th : Some Ad-
ditional Evidences Bearing on the Interval between the Leading Glacial
Epochs; T. C. Chamberlain, Madison, Wis. The Tertiaries of Massa-
206 The American Naturalist. [February,
chusetts; N. H. Shaler. The Laramie Group; J. S. Newberry, New
York. On Glacial Phenomena in Canada; Robert Bell, Ottawa,
Canada. Orographic Movements in the Rocky Mountains; S. F.
Emmons, Washington, D. C. Note on the Serpentine of Syracuse ;
Geo. H. Williams, Baltimore, Md. Remarks on the Surface Geology
of Alaska; I. C. Russell, Washington, D. C. Origin of the Rock
Pressure of Natural Gas in the Trenton Limestone of Ohio and
Indiana; Edward Orton, Columbus, Ohio. On the Tertiary Deposits
of the Cape Fear River Region; William B, Clark, Baltimore, Md.
Note on the Pre-Palzozoic Surface of the Archean Terranes of
Canada; Andrew C. Lawson, Ottawa, Canada.
December 27th.—The Structure and Origin of Glacial Sand Plains ;
William M. Davis, Cambridge, Mass. Glacial Features of Parts of the
Yukon and Mackenzie Basins; R. G. McConnell, Ottawa, Canada.
Post-Tertiary Deposits of Manitoba and the Adjoining Territories of
C a; J. B. Tyrrell, Ottawa, Canada. A Moraine of Retrocession
in Ontario; G. Frederick Wright, Oberlin, Ohio. The Southern Ex-
tension of the Appomatox Formation; W. J. McGee, Washington,
D.C. he Value of the Hudson River Group” in Geologic
Nomenclature; Charles D. Walcott, Washington, D. C. The Cal-
ciferous Formation in the Champlain Valley; Ezra Brainerd
and H. M. Seely, Middlebury, Vt. The Fort Cassin Rocks and
their Fauna; R. P. Whitfield, New York. The Stratigraphy of
the Quebec Group; R. W. Ells, Ottawa, Canada. Geological and
Petrographical Observations in Southern and Western Norway ; Geo.
H. Williams, Baltimore, Md. Cretaceous Plants from Martha’s Vine-
yard; C. D. White, Washington, D. C. The Sandstone Dikes of the
Forks of Cottonwood Creek, in Tehama and Shasta Counties, Cali-
fornia ; J. S. Diller, Washmgton, D. C. On the Relation between the
Mineral Composition and the Geological Occurrence of the Igneous
Rocks at Electric Peak and Sepulchre Mt., Yellowstone National Park ;
Jos. P. Iddings, Washington, D.C. On Certain Peculiar Structural
Features in the Foothill Region of the Rocky Mountains near Denver,
Colorado ; Geo, H, Eldridge, Washington, D. C. Illustrations of the
Glaciers in the Selkirk Mts. and Alaska ; A. S. Bickmore, New York.
December 28th.—Some Results of Archean Studies; Alexander
Winchell, Ann Arbor, Mich. Significance of granitoid oval areas in
the Laurentian ; C. H. Hitchcock, Hanover, N. H. Porphyritic
Granite ; B. K. Emerson, Amherst, Mass. The internal relations and
taxonomy of the Archean of Central Canada; Andrew C. Lawson,
1890.] Proceedings of Scientific Societies. 207
Ottawa, Canada. The Crystalline Schists of the Black Hills of .
Dakota; C. R. Van Hise, Madison, Wisconsin. On the intrusive
origin of the Triassic Traps of New Jersey, with special reference to
Watchung Mountains ; Frank L. Nason, New Brunswick, N. J. The
Geology of the Crazy Mountains, Montana; J. E. Wolff, Cambridge,
Mass. The Cuboides Zone and its Fauna, A discussion of methods of
correlation; H. S. Williams, Ithaca, N. Y. On the Pleistocene Flora
of Canada: Abstract; Sir William Dawson and D. P. Penhallow,
Montreal, Canada. The Fiords and Great Lake Basins of North
America considered as evidence of preglacial continental elevation
and of depression during the glacial period ; Warren Upham, Somer-
ville, Mass. On the Genus Spirifera and its inter-relations with the
Genera Spiriferina, Syringothyris, Crytia, and Cryotina: Abstract ;
James Hall, Albany, N. Y. nsome Ancient Shore-lines and their
ee F. J. H. Merrill, New York. Geology of the Boston Basin ;
. O. Crosby. On the Collection and Preservation of Geological
Poi by the American Geological aari and the facilitation
of their exchange among its members; J. F. Kemp, Ithaca, N
On the Metamorphic Rocks of south-eastern New York ; F. J. H. sae:
rill, New York. Experiments with Cave Air for cooling and ventilating
rooms; M. H. Crump. On some Porphyries of the Plain of Mexico,
read by title; Persifor Fraser, Philadelphia, Pa. On the Horned
Dinosauria of the Laramie, read by title; E. D. Cope, Philadelphia,
Pa. On Pot-holes north of Lake Superior unconnected with existing
streams ; Peter McKellar, Fort William, Ontario.
The following is an abstract of some of the more important papers
read at the meeting.
On GLACIAL PHENOMENA IN CANADA. Robert Bell, Ottawa, Canada.—
Advantages offered by the Dominion for the study of these phenomena.
Questions as to interglacial periods. Preglacial or interglacial river
valleys. Boulder Clays ploughed by subsequent glaciers. Almost univer-
sal glaciation east of the Rocky Mountains. Progressive recession north-
ward of the general glacial condition. Surface decay preceding the
glacial period. Directions of striæ and drift transportation. Effects
of regional changes of level in the northern part of the continent.
Different origins of lake basins. Influence of geological conditions
on glacial erosion in the production of geographical features. Did
other forms of ice play any part? Examples peculiar to glacial
action. Various proofs, Groups of general courses of grooves in dif-
ferent directions. Various forms of moraines, belts, trains, heaps,
*
208 The American Naturalist. [February,
beds, and areas of boulders. Erratics remarkable for size, position,
etc. Climate and fauna in post-Pliocene times. The paper was
illustrated by photographs and diagrams.
THE STRUCTURE AND ORIGIN OF GLACIAL SAND PLAINS. William M,
Davis, Cambridge, Mass.—Sand Plains are delta-like deposits of strati-
fied gravel and sand, formed in bodies of standing water at the margin
of the melting ice of the last glacial epoch. Their growth was rapid
compared to the backward melting of the ice-front, and the pits in
their surface mark the location of isolated blocks of ice, which their
sands surrounded,
NOTE ON THE PRE-PALAOZOIC SURFACE OF THE ARCHAAN TERRANES
or CANADA. Andrew C. Lawson, Ottawa, Canada.—Observations
along the northern limit of the Palzozoic show that the surface of the
Archean was, at the time of the deposition of Cambrian or earlier
formations, to a large extent as hummocky and roches moutonnées as it
is to-day. Hence this feature cannot, as it is generally supposed, be
due to conditions of glacial epoch except to a very limited extent.
Slight reduction of the Archzan surface since early Palaeozoic, but
enormous previous denudation. Origin of material of post-Archzan
formation.
GLACIAL FEATURES OF PARTS OF THE YUKON AND MACKENZIE
Basins. R. G. McConnell, Ottawa, Canada.—This paper contains
a brief description of the glacial deposits observed along the Liard
and Mackenzie Rivers, and includes notes on the silting up of a
southern arm of Great Slave Lake, on the height of Erratics along
the eastern flanks of the Rocky Mountains, on the absence of Boulder
Clays from the valleys of the Porcupine and the Yukon, and on the for-
mer existence of a great lake at the confluence of these two streams.
REMARKS ON THE SURFACE GEOLOGY or ALasKa. I. C. Russell,
Washington, D. C.—The writer wishes to call attention to, first, the
formation of the Tundra ; second, to the absence of residual clays and
other evidences of rock decay and the absence of glacial records along
the Yukon and Porcupine Rivers in Alaska.
Post-TERTIARY DEPOSITS ON MANITOBA AND THE ADJOINING TERRI-
TORIES OF CANADA. J. B. Tyrrell, Ottawa, Canada.—The area
stretching from the Archean nucleus in the eastern portion of Mani-
toba, to near the foot of the Rocky Mountains, has, in preglacial
times, had a very irregular surface, which was planed by the passing
of the continental glacier, and the irregularities filled often to great
depth with unstratified till. This till, or ground moraine, forms the
1890.] Proceedings of Scientific Societies. 209
present surface throughout large districts; but it is covered in many
places by stratifieds ands, silts, and gravels deposited in the beds of lar-
ger or smaller fresh-water lakes. The paper describes the character of
the till, the direction in which the glacier forming it has moved from
the Archean nucleus, and some of the ‘moraines, drumlins, kames,
etc., that it has left in its course ; also it states evidences of the recur-
rence of glacial conditions, and the positions of a number of lakes in
which the subsequent deposits were laid down. .
A TERMINAL MORAINE IN ONTARIO. G. Frederick Wright, Oberlin,
Ohio.—In the Report of Progress upon the Geological Survey of
Canada, published in 1863, pp. 908, 909, the Artemisia gravel is de-
scribed as a belt of loose gravel extending from Owen Sound to Brant-
ford, and thence in an easterly and northeasterly direction, passing
about half way between Lake Ontario and Lake Simcoe, following the
highest ground of the peninsula, and being in general about 950 feet
above the sea. Lakes with no visible inlet are described as occurring
near the greatest elevation. The object of the paper is to give the re-
sults of personal investigations during the past summer along this line,
demonstrating its morainic character. Many facts which some have
attributed to a northern depression at the close of the glacial period
receive simple and sufficient explanation from the morainic character
of this deposit.
THE SOUTHERN EXTENSION OF THE APPOMATTOX FORMATION. W.,
J. McGee, Washington, D.C.—The Appomattox formation was applied
in 1888 to a widespread deposit of orange-colored sands and clays,
with occasional intercalations of gravel, developed on and between the
Rappahanock, James, Roanoke, and Appomattox rivers in eastern Vir-
ginia, and widening and thickening southward. Recently the same
formation has been traced through the Carolinas, Georgia, Alabama,
and Mississippi; and has been found to constitute the prevailing sur-
face deposit in these States. It isa marine or brackish water deposit,
yielding no fossils save fragmentary cones and bits of lignite. A con-
siderable part of the Orange Sand of Dr. Hilgard belongs to the for-
mation. It lies unconformably upon the Grand Gulf (Miocene?)
strata of Alabama and Mississippi as upon the fossiliferous Miocene of
eastern Virginia and North Carolina, and it is overlain unconformably
by Plistocene deposits in various localities. Although its age has not
been determined palzontologically, it forms, by means of its vast ex-
tent and uniform character, a great datum formation from which the
stratigraphy of the Coastal plain may be reckoned.
210 The American Naturalist. [February,
Tue TERTIARY DEPOSITS OF EASTERN MASSACHUSETTS. N. S.
Shaler, Cambridge, Mass.—The main points concern the origin and
distribution of these strata. The writer endeavored to show that
there has been in that district, since the Miocene time, a large amount
of true mountain-building action ; and also that a part of the deposits
are of Glacial origin.
THE VALUE OF THE TERM ‘‘ HuDsoN RIVER GROUP” IN GEOLOGIC
NOMENCLATURE. Chas. D, Walcott, Washington, D. C.—This paper
embraces: Description of the rocks referred to the Hudson River group
in the valley of the Hudson ; comparison o: the Hudson River section
with the section in Loraine, Jefferson county, N. Y., and the Cincin-
nati section of soythern Ohio; some observations on the use of the
names ‘‘ Hudson River,” ‘ Lorraine,” and ‘ Cincinnati.”’
THE CALCIFEROUS FORMATION IN THE CHAMPLAIN VALLEY. Ezra
Brainerd and H. M. Seely, Middlebury, Vt.—This paper describes the
series of Champlain Valley rocks, and presents the results of the authors’
study of the Calciferous and its relations to the groups above and below.
The observations have led to important conclusions, involving serious
modifications of the section as generally accepted.
THE STRATIGRAPHY OF THE QueEBEC Group, R. W, Ellis, Ottawa,
Canada.—The author discusses, first, all the structure as found in the
southeastern part of the province adjoining Maine and New Hampshire,
including the crystalline and metamorphic rocks and their associated
formations ; and subsequently the unaltered Quebec group as developed
along the south side of the St. Lawrence. He contrasts the views for-
merly held regarding the stratigraphical position of the several divisions
with those now believed to be the correct interpretation. The new
views of structure of the St. Lawrence area have been largely con-
firmed very recently by the work of Prof. Lapworth and others from
the paleontological standpoint.
GEOLOGICAL AND PETROGRAPHICAL OBSERVATIONS IN SOUTHERN AND
WesTERN Norway. George H. Williams, Baltimore, Md.— The
regions studied in southern Norway are of typical eruptive rocks
breaking through horizontal and unaltered Silurian beds, and therefore
unexcelled as examples of contact metamorphism. The localities
visited in western Norway, on the other hand, are greatly disturbed
and have been subjected to extensive regional metamorphism, In each
case, both eruptive and sedimentary masses have been involved, but
neither have so completely lost their original characters by metamor-
1890.) Proceedings of Scientific Societies. 211
phism as to be incapable of identification. The two main points which
it is desired to illustrate are: I. The similarity of effects produced in
the same original material by the contact action of eruptive rocks and
by orographic disturbance. ; e power of orographic forces
(regional metamorphism) to produce the same product from rocks
originally the most diverse in origin and structure, Illustrated by maps,
diagrams, and specimens, both macroscopic and microscopic.
NOTE ON THE SYRACUSE SERPENTINE. George H. Williams, Balti-
more, Md.—Additional and recently secured evidence of the eruptive
nature of this rock, which is interesting as being the only representa-
tive of its class known in the undisturbed strata of New York.
THE SANDSTONE DIKES OF THE FORKS OF COTTONWOOD CREEK IN
TEHAMA AND SHASTA COUNTIES, CALIFORNIA, J. S. Dilier, Washing-
ton, D. C.—The distribution of the dikes was shown by a map,
their mode of occurrence described and illustrated by lantern slides ;
their mineralogical composition, microscopical structure, and chemical
composition discussed and compared with that of the mesozoic sand-
stones with which they are associated ; and a theory of the origin of
the dikes proposed and discussed
ON THE RELATION BETWEEN THE MINERAL COMPOSITION AND THE
GEOLOGICAL OCCURRENCE OF THE IGNEOUS Rocks aT ELECTRIC PEAK
AND SEPULCHRE MT., YELLOWSTONE NATIONAL Park. Jos. P. Iddings,
Washington, D. C.—An occurrence of intrusive rocks and contempo-
raneous extravasated rocks having similar chemical composition and
different mineral composition and structure.
ON OROGRAPHIC MOVEMENTS IN THE Rocky MouNTAINS REGION.
S. F. Emmons, Washington, D. C.—After giving a brief abstract of
the views which have hitherto been put forward in regard to orographic
movements in the Rocky Mountains region, the writer proceeds to give
his present views, founded on observations made in the field during
the past ten years, which partially modify the views already held, and
add to the list of movements two important and widespread move-
ments, which hitherto have not been generally recognized. These
occurred, the one during the Carboniferous, the other during Jurassic
times. Evidence of the former is found beyond the boundaries of
Colorado in Wyoming at the North and New Mexico on the South.
The latter was even more widely felt and may have affected the greater
part of the continent. Although the data are extremely imperfect, the
writer has thought it advisable to present the facts which he has at his
command, believing that when the attention of geologists is called to
Am. N
212 The American Naturalist. [February,
them, they may be able to detect further evidence, where, without this
suggestion, they might not look for it.
On CERTAIN PECULIAR STRUCTURAL FEATURES IN THE FOOTHILL
REGION OF THE Rocky MOUNTAINS NEAR DENVER, CoLorapDo. Geo.
H. Eldridge, Washington, D. C.—The paper describes a type of geo-
logical structure discovered by the writer, which may prove of common
occurrence along the base of the Rocky Mountains. The type con-
sists in a succession of nonconformities appearing one after another at
various geological horizons, the explanation of which is found in the
forces acting in the general uplift of the Colorado Range, from which
have been developed certain secondary forces, which have, from point
to point,jbrought about the elevations upon which the nonconformities
depend.
ON THE INTRUSIVE. ORIGIN OF THE TRIASSIC TRAPS or NEW JERSEY ;
WITH SPECIAL REFERENCE TO WaTCHUNG Mountains. Frank L. Na-
son, New Brunswick, N. J.—That these traps are intrusive in their
origin is proved: I. By the peculiar monoclinal structure of the sand-
stones, which are produced by longitudinal fractures extending parallel
(a) to the major axis of the trap ridges, and (b) to the major axis of
the Archzean region. II. By the finding of Zstheria ovata in repeated
lines along the Delaware River, and in lines reaching N. E. and S, W.
across the State. III. By the lines of cross-fracture extending N. W.
and S. E. across the formation, which are proved (a) by showing a
repetition of the slates and gray sandstones at Weehawken and Shady
Side ; (b) by showing that the Pequannock River flows in a fault ; (c)
by showing that the streams of the Archæan region flow in faults par-
allel to the “ crescents ”’ of the trap.
Association of American Anatomists.—The second annual
meeting was held at the University of Pennsylvania, Thursday, De-
cember 26, 1889. The following communications were made: Pres-
ident’s Address; by Joseph Leidy, M.D., of Philadelphia, Pa. Ad-
dress of the Chairman of the Executive Committee ; by Harrison
Allen, M.D., of Philadelphia, Pa. Muscular Anomalies of the Infra-
Clavicular Region; by Frank Baker, M.D., of Washington, D. C.
On Plant Anatomy and Physiology ; by W. P. Wilson, M.D., of Phil-
adelphia, Pa. Brief Remarks on the Form and Probable Function of
the Blood Plaque, with slides and photographs; by George T. Kemp,
. Presentation of Histological Specimens ; by George A. Pier-
sol, M.D., Philadelphia, Pg. ‘The Supra-Sternal Rib; by D. S. Lamb,
M.D., of Washington, D. C. A Demonstration ; by Horace Jayne,
1890.] Proceedings of Scientific Societies. 213
M.D., Philadelphia, Pa. A Paper,—title unannounced; by Wm.
Browning, M.D., Brooklyn, N. Y. The Relation of the Thalmus to
the Paroccele (lateral ventricle), especially in the Apes; by Burt G.
Wilder, M.D., Ithaca, N. Y. Nuclear Anatomy of the Cetacean,
Manatee, Phocidæ, and Hippopotamus Cord ; by E. C. Spitzka, New
ork.
Friday, Dec. 27th.—The Spinal Nerves of the Cat (advance com-
munication); by T. B. Stowell, Ph.D., Pottsdam, N. Y. The Transi-
tion from Stratified to Columnar Epithelium; by Simon H. Gage,
Ithaca, N. Y. A Series of Casts of the Duodenum, with remarks ; by
Thomas Dwight, M.D., Boston, Mass. The Preparation and Preser-
vation of Anatomical Specimens for Museums (illustrated with speci-
mens); by J. L- Wortman, M.D., Washington, D. C. Notes on
Dwarfs; by Frank Baker, M.D., Washington, D. C. Olecranon Per-
foration; by D. S: Lamb, M.D., Washington, D: C. The Physical
Theory of the Genesis of the Long Bones and Articulations ; by John
A. Ryder, M.D., Philadelphia, Pa. Individual Skeletal Variations ;
by Frederick A. Lucas, Washington, D. C. Medico-Legal Studies on
the Human Skeleton ; by Thomas Dwight, M.D., Boston, Mass. On
the Value of the Studies of Variation; by Harrison Allen, M.D.,
Philadelphia, Pa. The Heart as a Basis of Intrinsic Toponymy; by
Burt G. Wilder, M.D., Ithaca, N. Y. Presentation of Specimens; by
Geo. McClellan, M.D., Philadelphia, Pa.
Saturday, Dec. 27.—Presentation of Specimens; by S. J. J. Harger
V.M.D., Philadelphia, Pa. Presentation of Specimens; by John B.
Deaver, M.D., Philadelphia, Pa. Presentation of Specimens; by A
H. P. Leuf, M.D, Philadelphia, Pa. Volunteer contributions.
Inspection of Veterinary Department.
the following officers were elected: President, Joseph Leidy,
M.D.; First Vice President, Frank Baker, M.D.; Second Vice Presi-
dent, Fanueill D. Weisse, M.D.; Secretary and Treasurer, A. H. P.
Leuf, M.D.; Executive Committee, Harrison Allen, M.D., Chairman,
Burt G. Wilder, M.D., William Towles, M.D., the President and
Secretary.
ae
sae
+
THE
AMERICAN NATURALIST
VoL. XXIV. MARCH, 1890. 279.
ON CERTAIN PECULIARITIES IN THE FLORA OF
THE SANTA BARBARA ISLANDS.
BY J. WALTER FEWKES.
Foe study of the distribution of terrestrial life on islands has
always been a prolific one in theoretical discussions of the
origin of species. Darwin and Wallace both drew from this
source most interesting conclusions in regard to their theories,
and from it are still derived some of the most suggestive facts
bearing on questions of geographical distribution, migration and
preservation of genera and species.
This is particularly true of oceanic islands separated from con-
tinents by wide expanses of the ocean or of chains of islands
connecting continental land-masses. The peculiar assemblage of
life in Saint Helena, the Galapagos or the Bermudas contribute
most important data to the general discussions of the derivation
and modification of faunas and floras in isolated tracts of land in
the ocean. It thus happens that the study of islands has always
had a profound fascination to the investigator of the variations of
life on the earth’s surface.
As a general thing the terrestrial life of continental islands re-
sembles that of the neighboring land-masses. The very con-
tiguity would seem to imply a colonization of one from the other,
and therefore a resemblance, since the ease with which genera
and species can be transported across intervening water is an all
216 The American Naturalist. [March,
sufficient cause for a similarity. While there is evidence that the
basins of the great oceans have always been approximately the
same as they are at present, the fringes of the continents, or the
: platforms upon which continental islands rest, have, from time to
time, suffered changes of elevation which, in many instances, have
raised the intervening sea bottom above the surface of the water,
and thus have brought about a means of communication for the
life of continents and neighboring islands. In this case it is not
necessary to call in the aid of various means of transportation
across intervening bodies of water, straits and sounds, for the
commingling of the two floras and faunas. Prehistoric -man in
his early migrations, no doubt, was profoundly affected by a law
of distribution similar to that which influenced animals and plants.
Using islands as stepping stones he may thus, before he had the
hardihood to attempt the ocean in navigation, have even passed
from one continent to another at atime when portions of the
shallower ridges of the ocean floor now submerged were elevated
above the sea. In this way, for instance, he may have migrated
on dry land from northern Europe to Greenland and then tothe
North American continent, or, in a similar way, across what is
now Behring Strait and the Aleutian Islands from Asia into
Alaska. The possibilities of inter-communication between lands
not separated by the abysses of the ocean for races of man,
animals and plants are very great, and can only be read in the
light of the great geological changes which have occurred on
the margin of continents.in which elevation and depression have
undoubtedly taken place.
Islands which have become separated from the continents by
submergence of the land, or by erosion and a cutting out of an
intervening channel, preserve, in a measure, the fauna and flora
of the adjacent continents, but they are independently affected in
somewhat different ways by the struggle for existence of their
inhabitants. New conditions may arise or old ones may persist
which may or may not lead to the preservation of organic forms
which have been exterminated on the adjoining continent. Inter-
communication, however, between the two has always had an in-
fluence in neutralizing the changes which might otherwise occur.
1890.] Certain Peculiarities in the Flora. ae
It may, on the other hand, happen, when islands preserve uni-
formly the past conditions of the mainland for a longer time than
the continents, that their fauna and flora resemble an older
assemblage of life of the land of which they are a part, and with
which they were formerly connected.
It is believed that the Santa Barbara islands illustrate this latter
statement. Climatic changes have, it is thought, taken place on
the mainland which have changed the enviroment’ to that extent
that animals and plants once found there have succumbed and
disappeared, while these conditions have remained more constant
on the islands, where, as a consequence, the destruction of certain
organisms has not been so rapid.
It may be borne in mind, however, that the causes which have
led to the restriction of certain plants or animals to circumscribed
localities in other parts of the world are not all understood. This
restriction or local distribution may be due to general or to local
causes, yet the former may at times be called to aid when the
latter are insufficient. In New England, for instance, a local
distribution of certain plants in limited areas often occurs and no
explanation can be discovered for their limitation. It must, there-
fore, be with diffidence that one finding peculiarities in the flora
of certain islands ascribes those characteristics to far-reaching
rather than local influences. Especially must one use caution in
the study of phenomena in which more facts are necessary. The
following paper, however, uses the data given by others, but with
this precaution, knowing that such speculations may be over-
turned by new observations and more extended studies bearing
on the pecularities of the flora of the islands.
Of the later geologic phenomena which have been called in
to account for the present distribution of animals and plants, the
glacial period is one of the most important. Possibly too great
influence has been ascribed to it on account of the nearness of
this period to the present, which it might be expected to most
1 In environment are included organic as well as climatic changes. The o)
vironment makes itself felt in a struggle for existence, which counts for as much as, if not
more climatic chang:
218 The American Naturalist. [March,
profoundly affect. Looking back into the past, it is the first
climatic change which offers great differences of condition from
the present.
One of the consequences of the advance and retreat of the
great ice sheet which once covered the northern latitudes of
North America, is its influence on the distribution of terrestrial
life. It is argued that the advance of this ice sheet must have
forced southward hardy animals and plants which, when brought
into competition with southern species in a struggle for existence,
led, through inheritance, to important modifications in the general
aspect or facies of the fauna or flora of any given region. Ina
somewhat like way a retreat of the ice sheet towards the north
may be supposed to have enlarged the area for life, and to have
drawn with it those organisms which find colder latitudes more
congenial to their lives, and thus opened a way to changes in the
character of the life inhabiting the areas vacated by them. The
survival of Alpine floras and faunas on mountain tops finds a
ready explanation in a distribution brought about primarily by
the latter of these causes, viz.: the retreat of the glacial ice sheet
to the polar regions, and the resemblance of the conditions of
those high altitudes to formerly existing in the valleys.
In a discussion of the causes of the peculiar flora of the Santa
Barbara Islands pointed out by Prof. Greene, Prof. LeConte? has
adduced the aid of the glacial period and ascribed this pecularity
to the survival of an old flora on the islands, while that of the
neighboring continent has been more or less. modified by a strug-
gle with hardy denizens forced into it by glacial conditions. His
reasoning on this point seems to me cogent and conclusive in
general, but not wholly adequate in the special case of the pecu-
liarities of the flora of the Santa Barbara Islands. It is believed
that he is right in the supposition that the present flora of Santa
Cruz more closely resembles that which once existed on the
contiguous coast than it does the present flora of the same locality.
The remoteness of the continental glacier as indicated by its
terminal moraine must have been great from the region under
discussion, and the possibility of its influence on the equilibrium
2 Amer. Journ. Arts and Sciences. Vol. XXXIV.; pp. 457-461.
1890.] Certain Peculiarities in the Flora. 219
of life so far away is small. It may be well to look about in
order to discover, if possible, other causes nearer the locality for
an explanation of this destruction of continental species and the
survival of older characteristic genera on the neighboring islands.
I think there are other and possibly more effective causes which
have had a profound influence in Southern California in this direc-
tion.
When hardy ® species were driven south by glacial cold, they
were certainly more fitted to survive in the cold climate than
the denizens of a warmer climate which they encountered, simply
because the climate was colder. But when the glacial cold was
mitigated the animals and plants of warmer climates were more
fitted to survive, and in a struggle for existence would be stronger
than the “ hardy ” or those fitted for glacial cold or comparatively
low temperatures. Then their influence would be greatest. As
the character of the insular flora was less affected than the main
land by the hardy animals, we may also suppose it to be less
affected than the main land by the return of the warm climate
animals at the restoration of a more genial climate. Conse-
quently, not only glacial cold but subsequent milder temperature
have acted in unequal degrees upon the inhabitants of islands and
main land. If there was a return of conditions of climate similar
to that of the Pliocene, like plants to those of the insular flora
might be expected to reappear. But anew influence has made
inself powerful in modifying environment. The main land has
become more desiccated than it formerly was. From the nature
of their position the islands are not as profoundly affected by this
influence as the continent. Like a huge Briarzeus desiccation has
spread itself over the south-west, so that, while its influence is
exerted on the insular flora, it is not in as marked a manner as
on the main land. So potent is this influence that it cannot be
lost sight of, and is even as important as glacial cold. We must
not forget, also, the profound influence on climate, and, conse-
quently, on the facies of organic life, which the out-pouring of
3 More suited to live under conditions of glacial cold. “ Hardy” genera may, under
condition of heat or dryness, become feeble. The word as here rganisms
which are more fitted to live in cold climates.
220 The American Naturalist. [March,
the great lava beds may have had. As glacial cold had its in-
fluence, the heat resulting from these out-pourings was not with-
out its effect.
The great arid deserts of our south-west, which extend into
California, and make their influence felt even to the coast, have
had a most important influence in the determination of the char-
acter of the fauna and flora of Southern California. This influ-
ence has exerted itself in much the same way as the cold‘ of the
glacial epoch. The drying up of great tracts of land necessarily
led to a crowding of the denizens of the tract thus desiccated
into regions not so greatly affected. The result of an influx of
individuals intensifies there a struggle for existence, and leads to
extermination of less fortunate or weak genera and species. The
regions most distantly removed from the most arid regions would
necessarily be least affected by the increased desiccation, and on
these out-posts of the continents, the islands, where the environ-
ment is least modified by this climatic change, we can look for
the survivors of the old faunas and floras. The results arrived at
by this a priori reasoning are exactly what Mr. Greene finds in
the distribution of the plants on the Santa Barbara Islands. From
his study of the plants of these islands, more especially Santa
Cruz, the following, among other conclusions, are derived:
I. Forty-eight out of two hundred and ninety-six species of
plants collected are peculiar to these islands, and twenty-eight are
peculiar to Santa Cruz.
2. All the species are distinctly Californian and those species
which are now found in small numbers in a straggling condition
on the neighboring mainland are very abundant on the island.
3. The genus Lavatara, of which eighteen species are known
in the Mediterranean region, and one from Australia, is repre-
sented by four species on the island of Santa Cruz. There is not
another known species from the American continent.
There is also a significant fact which is believed to bear on
our discussion, viz.: the distribution of land shells on the islands
and the neighboring mainland, Indefatigable collectors of West
oo the question of whether the glacial period was or was not one of great
cold.
1890.] Certain Peculiaritles in the Flora. 221
Coast shells have not been able to collect land shells near Santa
Barbara, and yet on the neighboring islands many of these mol-
lusks are found, notably, a peculiar species of Helix, which, un-
fortunately, is rapidly being exterminated by the sheep. The
presence of these shells on the island, and their absence on the
mainland, I suspect, point the same way as the peculiar distribu-
tion of the plants, and seem even as significant of the character
of the change in the climatic condition of the environment.
The arguments which have been advanced by others to support
the proposition that our arid deserts were once better watered
than at present, are not necessary to quote here. That these
deserts were not always as dry as at present seems to me proven,
and the zoological facts in the distribution of the island life look
indeed as if such a desiccation has left its mark on the distribu-
tion of genera and species.
In view of the distance of the land of Southern California from
the sources of glacial cold,’ it seems difficult to suppose that the
equilibrium of life in this low latitude was much affected by this
temperature. There are marks of local glaciers on the flanks of
the Santa Inez Mountains, and the observer has not to go far
from Santa Barbara to find what may be regarded as their
moraines, but traces of a continental glacier are believed not to
exist in this low latitude. These local glaciers may have driven
hardy forms into the valleys by their advance, but it is hard to
suppose that to this cause alone a comprehensive change in the
flora or fauna has resulted. Desiccation of the climate, however,
is a phenomenon of wide distribution in the south-west, and its
influence must have been far reaching and great enough to lead
to wide-spread modifications in the facies of faunas and floras.
If we ascribe the preservation of the older or partial Pliocene
flora in the Santa Barbara Islands to their still retaining a moist
climate from the vicinity of the ocean, it may be asked why the
adjoining coast, by its situation, is not also acted upon by the
same influence? Why are not these same plants protected there
as well as on the island, since the vicinity to the ocean may have
E oid t z idl
J
i that the intensity of the so-called glacial cold
was not great.
222 The American Naturalist. [March,
exerted the same influence? To this it can be answered that in
places they are so protected, and Mr. Greene has mentioned in-
stances where these insular forms still exist. These scattered
localities are not regarded as points where the island genera have
migrated to the mainland and there obtained a footing, but as pre-
serving the same congenial influences which have made it possi-
ble for them to survive on the islands. It seems to the author
that the theory that the preservation of these scattered remnants
of the old life is exactly what would result in places on the shore.
They are remnants of a flora once widely distributed throughout
California.
These straggling colonies of characteristic insular flora are
found, according to Mr. Greene, in isolated patches in San Diego
and San Bernardino counties. These are supposed by him to be
incipient colonizations on the mainland from the islands. Prof.
LeConte, on the other hand, regards these patches as survivors
of the Pliocene indigenes which have not followed the fate of
their relatives, and the situation of these patches of older life in
the southern counties, according to the latter, is “just what we
might expect, for the main invasion [of hardy forms resulting from
the influx due to the glacial cold] was from the north.” There
seems no valid objection to considering these survivors as rem-
nants of the flora of a former geologic period sheltered by envir-
onment from destruction, but the causes which have led to the
modification of their associates may not wholly be due to the
influences of the glacial period. The other influence is conti-
nental desiccation.
The islands have, no doubt, been affected by the dessication of
the continent, but not in the same degree as the mainland. Their
fauna has changed, no doubt, since they were connected with the-
mainland and the mammoth was found on both, but not to the
same amount. The sea, with its fogs and local evaporation, has
counteracted, in a measure, the drying up, which has been most
marked at a distance from the sea.
In conclusion, while accepting in the main the theory that
glacial cold has had an influence, I would suggest that the main
cause of the peculiar flora of Santa Cruz Island, observed by Mr.
1890.) Certain Peculiarities in the Flora. 223
Greene, is the change which has come to Southren California by
the desiccation of the land. The islands, less acted upon than
the main, from position and the neighborhood of the ocean, have,
on that account, preserved a flora possibly like the Pliocene once
found on the adjoining continent. As the environment changed
on the main-land many of the genera died out, but they still per-
sist where conditions are less modified because offset by local
causes.
It does not seem necessary to suppose that the islands are
remnants of a new centre of distribution of life, or that it is
wholly explanatory of the pecularity of the flora to ascribe the
extinction of the same plants which now exist on Santa Cruz to
a struggle with hardy varieties forced southward by glacial cold,
The drying up of the climate is a potent factor which had a great
influence and is sufficient, with other causes, to bring about great
changes. As high mountains may be regarded as preserving an
Alpine flora left in a congenial position by the retreating glacier,
so the Santa Barbara Islands may, in a somewhat different way,
present us a life preserved in sheltered points by the drying up of
the neighboring sections of the continent which has less strongly
affected the islands than the main-land.
But neither of these causes alone is adequate to explain the
peculiarities of flora or fauna in any circumscribed locality.
There are many influences at work, and causes even which may
have their origin far away from the regions which they effect.
To analyze this nexus of influences is next to impossible. Ina
broad way we may say that the present facies of the fauna and
flora of any circumscribed locality is primarily the result of en-
vironment, and where environment changes organic forms must
change, while, when it remains constant, less modification is the
result. A marked climatic change such as followed the drying
up of a great area of such extent as has taken place in our south-.
west, leaves its mark on the organisms near and remote from it.
Two questions must be answered positively to make our
reasoning logical. Has a desiccation taken place? and is it as
great on the islands as on the main? Both of these questions
are believed to be capable of definite answers. Desiccation has
224 The American Naturalist. [March,
taken place, and it has not been as great on the islands as on the
adjoining continent. There remains at least one fact to be de-
termined, and for its acceptance additional research is certainly
necessary. The flora of the Santa Barbara Islands is said to
differ essentially from that which at present exists on the neigh-
boring main-land of California. What is the relation of the
present flora of California to that of the Santa Barbara Islands,
and what was the flora of the main-land, especially in the Pliocene
Age? Has there been an intercolonization of islands and conti-
nents since that glacial period? These are questions to be
answered, but the most important one of all is, “ Are any of the
plants of the islands peculiar to them?” The above paper ac-
cepts the observations of others that they are. It seeks to point
out a cause more potent than any yet suggested, to account for
peculiarities of this insular flora if such peculiarities exist.
THE TEETH AS EVIDENCE OF EVOLUTION.
W. C. CAHALL.
a the August number of Lippincott’s Magazine appeared a
paper by W. G. A. Bonwill, entitled “ Why I Deny Evolu-
tion.” The argument is based upon the structure of the teeth
and their relation to the human jaw.
It would be as incomplete to confine your argument in support
of the law of gravitation to a single phenomenon, e. g., shooting
stars, as to rest your plea for evolution upon the human jaw. It
is manifestly unjust to the proper appreciation of a great doctrine
like Evolution to deliberately deny oneself the great wealth of
evidence furnished by Geology, Embryology, Rudimentary Or-
gans, and the Comparative Anatomy of the several organs of the
animal economy ; yet it would be equally unfair to Dr. Bonwill to
meet his argument upon any other ground than that upon which
his argument is based, the human jaw.
A
9
y
;
4
1890.] The Teeth as Evidence of Evolution. 225
At the same time the law of gravity, if a true one, ought to
explain the phenomena of shooting stars, although it might fail
to convey a proper conception of its grandeur and universality ;
so should evolution afford a full explanation of the complexity
and adaptability of the teeth and jaw, and this I firmly believe
can be readily done.
Before we proceed with a presentation of the other side of the
question, it might be well to offer a few good-natured criticisms
of Dr. Bonwill’s definitions and claims.
I take issue with his very first sentence, “ It must be creation
or evolution—creation by some personality placing a perfect
organic being at one master-stroke into life and action; or by
some impersonality, from the lowest point of life, by slow devel-
opment reaching higher and higher in the scale of being until
man has been reached.”
I deny that such a view of evolution is the only one which can
be entertained. That the evolution of life upon this planet was
the outcome of an impersonal nature, acting by forces strictly
physical and without a directing mind, is the belief held by the
materialistic school exclusively. To classify all evolutionists as
materialists would do the greatest injustice to many of the most
eminent scientists in this country and Europe. These men see
nothing inconsistent in the belief in evolution as a method by
which a personal Creator accomplished his ends, and the account
of Moses.
The late Dr. Asa Gray, of Cambridge, accepted as authority
throughout the whole scientific world to a degree perhaps never
attained by any other American, voices this school when he says:
“I am scientifically—and in my own fashion—a Darwinian ;
philosophically, a convinced theist ; and religiously, an acceptor
of the creed ‘commonly called the Nicene, as the exponent of
the Christian faith.”
So when Dr. Bonwill declares : “ It must be creation or evolu-
tion,” he could more correctly have written: “ It must be creation
éy evolution.” This is theistic evolution.
I also take exception to the loose and unscientific manner with
which Dr. Bonwill uses “organs” and “ organisms ” as words of
226 The American Naturalist. [March,
synonymous or identical meaning. Nothing is farther from the
truth. These words have as distinctive and individual a meaning
as any words in scientific usage, conveying totally different ideas.
An organ is a part of a body capable of performing some es-
pecial work, while an organism is the whole body, a unit or
entity, which the various organs in their mutual relationship
compose. That this is not my definition, devised for a purpose,
the nearest scientific dictionary will confirm. Ordinarily the mis-
use of scientific language might result from an oversight and be
of little or no importance, but here it is not so, for Dr. Bonwill’s
leading argument stands or falls with this definition. We will
assume that the question which he quotes from Mr. Darwin to be
correct: “ Demonstrate to me a complex organism that can be
made in any other way than as I say, by slow, slight modifica-
tions, and my argument falls to the ground.” To this query of
Darwin's he replies: “I have duplicated by design and intelli-
gence the most complex organ in the human body, and made it
perform the same function as the natural organ.” The organ he
refers to here is a set of teeth. There is no evidence here but of
entire satisfaction that when he has made a set of teeth, or a
“complex organ ” as he calls it, he has met the demand of Dar-
win for a “complex organism.” If the words “organ” and
“organism” are not identical in meaning to Dr. Bonwill’s mind,
why does he upon the same page as the above use such language
as this: “I claim to have made a demonstration of the con-
struction of a complex organism—the human teeth—according
to these laws; a demonstration which accounts for all the
functions of the natural organism.” “I claim that if I am able to
form such a complex organism by a single act of creation, I must
be greater than nature, or must have anticipated her by millions
of years.” “Iclaim that this organism could not have been
made from that in any other existing type of animal or combina-
tion of animals.” Dr. Bonwill promises to put in book form
these arguments. It will be well, before he fulfils this promise,
that he should learn that a complex organism is something more
than an artificial set of teeth.
1890.] The Teeth as Evidence of Evolution. 227
He claims, and he puts it in italics, “ Z claim to have discovered
that the lower jaw of man is an equilateral triangle, and that all
races have it, and that it has so existed from the advent of the first
man.” Also, “that it belongs exclusively to man.” He claims
that as an equilateral triangle in a hexagon is the equal of a
circle, and as a circle is the embodiment of perfection of form, it
is a natural deduction that the human jaw cannot be evolved
higher or a more perfect form conceived. Such is the discovery
which he has made and which he classes with the law of gravita-
tion, a claim, to say the least, which cannot be characterized as
modest.
I will give his own words: “I claim that as Newton discovered
that geometry and mechanics governed the formation and action
of the astronomical worlds, I have an equal right to the discovery
of the relation of the same laws to the structural organic world.”
If the human jaw be the perfect instrument claimed for it, and
beyond the reach of further evolution, this would not, as he holds,
prevent the contrary hypothesis ; that it is the end towards which
nature has tended by evolution through successive forms of life,
from the simpler to the more complex.
That the human jaw is an equilateral triangle is an interesting
anatomical observation, and Dr. Bonwill, if he is the first to
notice it, should have all credit for discovering the fact; and
_ that the teeth are perfect in position and adaptibility to their
intended purpose, goes without saying. But to stop to even
enumerate all the observations bearing upon the relation of the
various organs to the principles of geometry and mechanics
would tire the reader, and the evolutionist of all people would be
the last to deny the perfect adaptability of the organs to their
destined use, for it is this they bring in evidence as to the truth
of evolution.
The intimate relation of the eye to optics, of the ear to acous-
tics, of the lungs to pneumatics, of the heart to hydraulics, of the
digestive organs to chemistry, and the attachments of muscles to
bones to the physics of levers, are familiar to every student of
anatomy and physiology.
228 The American Naturalist. [March,
To discover that the human jaw and teeth are so perfect an
instrument that human ingenuity cannot conceive of any improve-
ment, but must crudely imitate the pattern nature furnishes when
artificial assistance is needed, is no exception; is it not the same
with the human eye, the ear, the hand, the foot? A manufac-
turer of artificial legs might with equal justice claim that he has
discovered that the line of junction of the human foot to the leg
was a right angle; that all races have it, and that it has so ex-
isted from the advent of the first man; that it belongs exclu-
sively to man; that a right angle is the quarter of a perfect
circle, and the only angle which will equally divide both a circle
and a half circle; that consequently the human foot was a special
creation, and could not have been evolved from something lower,
and could not have been evolved into something higher ; that he
had made an artificial leg, which performed all the functions of
the natural one, even to the complex movements of the ankle-
joint, so perfectly as to deceive all beholders ; that—ad infinitum
et ad
Is it not already evident that such a line of reasoning may lead
one to the most absurd conclusions ?
There is one other question which has no direct bearing upon
the argument from the teeth, but which I notice because Dr.
Bonwill makes so much ofit. He claims that since according to
the first law of motion a body once set in motion will continue
to move in a straight line forever unless deflected by surrounding
bodies, and made to describe an orbit; and as no world ever did
go in a straight line, but began at once to move in a circle or
ellipse, “it is plain that it never began the universe by making
one world at a time and throwing it into space, it being absolutely
necessary that there should be at least three worlds in order to
counterbalance each other, and make the first law of motion a fact.”
There are some arguments which, like a two-edged sword, cut
both ways. If such a condition of things be true, I would like an
explanation of the first chapter of Genesis, which both Dr. Bonwill
and I believe, where we are told that the Lord created the earth,
gave it globular form, made dry land appear, and vegetation grow,
for three days before the sun, moon and stars werecalled forth.
1890.] The Teeth as Evidence of Evolution. 229
He further says, “ I claim that as all organic life has such a
struggle for existence, and as nature has to be always on the
alert to select, that it is as much as an organ or an organism can
do to keep itself up to the standard of healthy action; that
death to the weakest is rather the rule than “survival of the
fittest.”
Has not the Doctor here given away his whole case? What
is the “ survival of the fittest,” if it is not by the death of the weakest.
Evolution as a process of nature is not the hasty generalization
of a single science; rather a greater part of all the sciences have
become but widely different yet converging avenues of approach,
along which the student travels naturally to the central hypothesis,
which has now become the dominant factor in all scientific in-
vestigations. It lies at the foundation of the new astronomy of
the sidereal and solar systems; geological study of the strata
furnishes indubitable evidence of the app upon the earth of
forms of life of the simplest nature, succeeded by forms of con-
stantly-increasing complexity ; comparative anatomy teaches how
from the three elementary layers of the blastodermal cells every
tissue and organ of every animal is developed along identical
lines; comparative botany tells the story; embryology, under
the microscope, is daily showing that every highly-organized
being is passing through that identical evolution of structure
from the simple to the complex which the special creationists
deny to nature at large; rudimentary organs are so many inter-
rogation marks, unanswerable on any other ground than that of
evolution; sociology is carrying the question into the study of
government of the human kind collectively ; and the first chap-
ter of Genesis, when read in the light of the evolution hypothesis,
reveals a sublimity of conception and accuracy of description
never before realized. Testimonies so different, yet confirming
each other, appeal with a force like the result of an algebraic
problem, which, when tested and confirmed by several different
methods, possess an accumulative proof of geometrical rather
than numerical ratio. But in our present view of the question
the accumulative evidence is lost, for we are confined to a single
line of inquiry.
230 The American Naturalist. [March,
The order of the Vertebrates, as classified by zoologists, accord
_ with the order of succession as found by geology, and are divided
into five great sub-divisions, viz: Fishes, Amphibians, Reptiles,
Birds, and Mammals,
Only in the vertebrates do we find calcified teeth. In the
fishes, some of the lower orders have teeth only partially calcified ;
which, in fact, appear simply as horny excrescences upon the
mucous covering of the mouth. Even teeth such as these did
not, like Minerva from the brow of Jove, spring into being, full-
formed. If it were found that the teeth, or any other organ, ap-
peared fully-formed, and suddenly, serious objections might then
be made against evolution. Nature takes no leaps, but every-
where, in everything, takes some tissue, already existing, and by
slight modifications transforms it into some complex organ. So
we find that even the simple teeth of the fishes can be traced
back to simpler structures in the Invertebrates. Upon the
approximating folds of the radiate-shaped mouth of the sea-stars
are hardened papillz and spicules which function as masticating
organs.
Coming higher in the scale we find the mouths of the Crus-
tacea provided with a firm chitinous framework, with ridges, spi-
cules or sete forming tooth-like processes opposite each other
and moved by muscles. These serve as an efficient apparatus
for the comminution of foodand are called the masticatory stomach.
Among the Mollusca, the mouths of several varieties are pro-
vided with jaws, covered with a cuticular membrane, on which
are small teeth or hooks directed backward. When this mem-
brane is protruded these teeth are erected, and when drawn back
they come together like pincers and hold the prey.
The comparative anatomy and gradation of teéth may be seen
by the table on page 232.
Evidence from Paleontology—tThe diversity of size, structure
and specialized function of the teeth of the Mammalian family are
directly traceable to the mode of obtaining food.
The constant use of one variety of food has so developed one.
portion of the teeth, and atrophied, through disuse, the other
portion, that the mouths of the existing families of the Mammalia
1890.] z The Teeth as Evidence of Evolution. 231
present teeth of quite contrasting appearance. Yet the ancestors
of the animals whose teeth now so clearly separate them into the
piscivorous, carnivorous, insectivorous, herbivorous and omniv-
orous families, did not so widely diverge. The early Tertiary
mammals, whether they were herbivorous or carnivorous, pos-
sessed the full number of forty-four teeth, which appears to have
been the typical number. While the present adult cud-chewing
animals no longer possess the incisors and canines in the upper
jaw, those ancient ruminating mammals, the Dicobune, Dichodon,
and Anoplotherium, had incisors and canines in both upper and
lower jaws.
The elephant has the incisors of the lower jaw absent, the premo-
lars absent, the true molars united into compound organs of great
complexity, and the upper incisors developed into tusks, while its
great prototype, the Dinotherium, possessed permanent premolars
in both jaws, the true molars simple, and had the incisors in the
lower jaw. ha F example is found in the bear of the present,
which has the Wird true molar absent, while its ancestor, the
Amphycyon, has the entire set intact.
Evidence from Embryology and Rudimentary Organs—Prof.
Goodsir has discovered that in the embryos of the modern rumi-
nating mammals, calves, for instance, the rudiments of the canines
and of the incisors of the upper jaw appear, but do not pass be-
yond the rudimentary stage after birth.
An organ which is not in use atrophies, and an animal which
has no use for certain teeth loses them. Nature conserves, but
- wastes not.
The organs may be preserved in the embryos, because the
embryo passes through all the stages through which the species
passed in its evolution.
In the whalebone whales there are varieties which have the
full set of teeth germs to form during fetal life, and even to cal-
cify, but become completely absorbed before birth; in others,
where some of the teeth remain in the jaw, they are covered up
by the gum during the entire life of the animal ; in others still,
the teeth of the upper jaw alone are rudimentary and functionless,
being imbedded in the gum.
Am. Nat.— October,—2.
"ITOOATe
ay} ul paxy 472414
-ua oie 4A IL 'E
; ‘souoq Árejxew
0} pouyuod JIE Seu
-ue Jo yP L `Z
‘Sno
-jeo semje yo] `I
‘SIVNWVIA
‘asn
-uou y8noiy} {dus
ou əaey spg yL `Z
‘saulg
‘ooare Oy} Ut
‘guoq Arep xeu
ey} uodn Ájļuo 4993}
ƏALy VITIPOI01D
əy} əya ‘pro3Á1ə}d
pue ounered
ayy ‘eyndoy Suowy g
*snoo1ed
-Jed sesje yoy, `I
‘STTILAJAN
‘suq
əy} 0} (pasop{your)
'prouəydsered 9y}
punoy ose yaa, `z
*snoaied
-Jeo Aqyensn yoy ʻI.
‘SNVISIHA WY
*qQ00} OT}
oyr spafoid əuoq
pue
asepied apone
əy} ut pəxy are paa
ay} saysy əwos uy ‘E
‘SIYE JEI
-uviq pue piodyuo
pue ‘prousydsered
scythe Auioy 39919
woy Suipess yee], “I
‘SAHSIJ
'SALVAJALYTA
“‘paarasoid ore
7 əsəy} JO yyoq * ` p i Dui suc
:Jayj0 Ə uodn əuo sepou Ə} jo uoyow
Suipls ‘Te193e] e pədojəaəp savy ‘Sutmoyyeas
-13A 32313 sı a199 mq ‘mys əy} 0} Apap
saepe sjewweu pe jo mef JOMOT IJL
*wəy} pəyıpow sey ur
-p394 40 qey s eure oy) se Sunvurmopaid
ƏSƏJYJ JO J9Y}0 ƏY} 10 QUO ‘sIejow pue JUULI
‘SIOSIOUI ƏY} OJUL payeNussayIp ore ‘suondəəxə
Ma} YIM ‘y3 AL *S
‘yas JUJUL
-13d oy) pue ypu
Əy} ‘Y793} Jo sjas OM}
mq savy sewwep ‘t
ay) Ájuo smope yorqym pue pooy jo Surmoyo
Əy} səpnpəd yoy mq ‘ford əy} Sur
'eewwew sy} Buowe uoUTUIOD
uonesyisseo əy} yovoidde sny} pue pae
-HUMƏHIP Jie 4799} ƏY) oJoym ‘Ájruez prezry
Əy} ur uoydəəxə əuo st əy, 'piemyorq
jusq pue [eoIUOd əsməyı ore enndəy pue
erqydwy jo 199} 3q} uOsvar sures ay} Joy 'S
'səysy Əy} Ul surezqo YOIYA 7U3x9 IY}
0} Jou ynon} ‘y)99) oY) Jo TeMauaI [eStpoad
€ st 3Y} eyndoy pue viqrydury oy) uy ‘t
‘uonour UMOp
pue dn uv Áļuo smog
-e yoya uouresiy
snouiejnieo əsooj
e Aq nys əy} 0} pa
-Yeye puvoselnies
Jo st mef 1mo] OY “9
‘pIem
-yoeq pəumpur pue
-əq 10 Juoy ut snf
Jaya MoI puoə2əs
e Aq pooejdas ‘eme
ulomM 10 uayoiq
usyMm ‘43993 Jo
MoJ € uəəs 9q AUT
234 The American Naturalist. [March,
In the embryos of some birds the rudiments of teeth are dis-
tinctly traceable@yet in no class of birds extant do the teeth pass
beyond this rudimentary stage. How can these rudimentary
organs be explained by believers in special creations? Surely
not, as is usually explained, “in order to complete the scheme of
nature” or “for the sake of symmetry,” for if these be the rea-
sons, why do not the rudimentary teeth appear in the embryos of
all birds, of turtles, and of some ant-eaters, where they are not
present at any age? On the other hand, how clear the question
becomes in the light of evolution by natural selection! As Dar-
win has so aptly put it; “ The unity of type is explained by unity
of descent.”
Nor can rudimentary organs be explained by assuming them of
some use to the animals. On the contrary there are some of
positive harm to the possessor. Confined to the teeth as we are
by the present discussion, we can still find an instance here, and
in no less an animal than man himself. There are in the upper
jaw two small premaxillary bones which in the lower animals
remain distinct and separate throughout life, but in man early be-
come fused with the larger maxillary bones. It is from this pre-
maxillary bone that the upper incisors spring. Now in a certain
proportion of cases these premaxillary bones do not become
et in man, oe remain separated. This is the condition in
tl i tion known as hare-lip, from its resemblance
to the Foondition found normally in the hare family. Now does
it not seem reasonable to suppose that, if man were a special
creation, he would have been created without a premaxillary
bone? In view of this defect, while man does possess a
marvelously complete apparatus, it is thus far not a perfect
mouth.
Dr. Bonwill makes the claim that, since the jaw of man is an
equilateral triangle, it is the most perfect of mouths. The perfec-
tion here must be comparative rather than absolute. It is no
more perfect in its way than the jaw and teeth of the serpent,
the well developed canines of the Carnivora, and the grinding
molars and lateral motion of the jaw of the Herbivora, are in
their way. Each is no more perfect for its use than the others
1890] * The Teeth as Evidence of Evolution, 235
are for theirs. But even within the question of the perfect angle
of the human jaw there is something suggestive®of evolution, for
among the mammals there is every gradation from the long jaw
with its acute anterior angle and narrow base to the ampler
anterior angle and broader base of the human jaw. There is a
constant shortening and recession of the jaw as we approach
man, and even in the races of man himself, we see the same gra-
dation, for in the inferior races, such as the Negro and Australian,
the lower jaw protrudes farther than does that of the superior
races. But even the perfect, equilateral triangular jaw of modern
man is being transformed into something different by civilization.
Darwin in the “ Descent of Man” remarked that “ it appears
as if the posterior molar or wisdom-teeth were raise to become
rudimentary in the more civilized races of man.’ 2
From a careful study of 1,249 skulls, of which 844 were os
the highly civilized modern races, 277 of modern inferior races,
and 128 were of the Romans, Etruscans, Phoenicians, and other
nations of antiquity, Prof. Mantegazza furnishes corroborative
evidence of this tendency, for he finds that the wisdom teeth are
more frequently absent in the superior than in the inferior types,
the percentage of absence being more than twice as great in the
former as in the latter. He concludes that at a period more
or less remote the third molar will disappear from the human jaw.
It has been also observed that the third molar or wisdom
tooth is smaller than the other molars in man, and the same has
been found true of the chimpanzee and orang, the apes which
most closely approximate man.
In the superior races of man the wisdom teeth frequently re-
main imperfectly developed beneath the gum, and when they
emerge early decay, and they have only two separate fangs,
while in some inferior (Melanian) races these teeth are usually
sound, and generally have three fangs, thus more nearly
approaching the typical mammalian third molar.
This loss of size of the wisdom teeth is due, according to
Prof. Schaaffhausen, “to the posterior portion of the jaw being
always shortened in the more civilized because they use soft
cooked food, and use their jaws less.”
236 The American Naturalist. [March,
So the great law of the equilateral triangle, which Dr. Bonwill
has discovered, and ranks beside the immutable law of gravita-
tion, and which he believes impossible save by a special creation,
bids fair to be undone by man himself, and to be superseded
through civilization by a jaw of greater anterior angle and of
broader base.
INSTANCES OF THE EFFECT OF MUSICAL SOUNDS
ON ANIMALS.
BY R. E. C. STEARNS.
(Continued from page 130.)
ANOTHER anecdote relating to
PIGEONS AND MUSIC
is recorded by Goodrich.
“ Bertoni, a famous instructor in music, while residing in
Venice, took a pigeon for his companion, and, being very fond of
birds, made a great pet of it. The pigeon, by being constantly
in its master’s company, obtained so perfect an ear for music that
no one who saw his behavior could doubt for a moment the
pleasure it took in hearing its master play and sing.”
The Rev. Mr. James also furnished us with the following :
“T have a canary of the feminine persuasion who is particu-
larly fond of music. Immediately I begin to play upon the flute
she chirps about as if enjoying the music. If I open the cage- _
door and leave her, she will come as near to me as possible, but
not attempt to fly to the music; but if I put her upon my desk,
and lay the flute down, she will perch upon the end, and allow
me to raise the instrument and play. I often take her into the
church and play there upon the organ, and she will perch upon
my fingers,“notwithstanding the inconvenience of the motion of
the hands, and chirp in evident delight at the sweet sounds.”
1890. | Effects of Musical Sounds on Animals. 237
Following in the train of the domestic animals the hare fur-
nishes an intermediate link between the same and the true fere
nature.
HARES AND MUSIC,
One Sunday evening five choristers were walking on the banks
of the river Mersey,in England. Being somewhat tired, they sat
down and began to sing an anthem. The field where they sat
had a wood at its termination. While they were singing a hare
issued from this wood, came with rapidity toward the place where
they were sitting, and made a dead stand in the open field. She
seemed to enjoy the harmony of the music, and turned her head
frequently, as if listening. When they stopped she turned
slowly toward the wood. When she had nearly reached the end
of the field they again commenced an anthem, at which the hare
turned around and ran swiftly back to within the same distance
as before, where she listened with apparent rapture till they had
finished. She then bent her way toward the forest with a slow
pace, and disappeared.”
SEALS AND MUSIC.
Mr. Laing, in his account of a voyage to Spitzbergen, mentions
that the son of the master of the vessel in which he sailed, who
was fond of playing on the violin, never failed to have a numerous
auditory when in the seas frequented by seals, and they have been
seen to follow a ship for miles when any person was playing on
deck.
HYENAS AND MUSIC.
Sparman furnishes the following story: “ One night at a feast
near the Cape a trumpeter who had got himself well filled with
liquor, was carried out of doors in order to cool and sober him.
The scent of him soon attracted a spotted hyena, which threw
him on his back and carried him away to Sable Mountain, think-
ing him a corpse and consequently a fair prize." In the meantime
our drunken musician awoke, sufficiently sensible to know the
danger of his situation and to sound his alarm with his
238 The American Naturalist. [March,
trumpet, which he carried at his side. The beast, as it may
be imagined, was greatly frightened in its turn, and immediately
ran away.”
THE WOLF AND THE PIPER.
A story is told of a Scotch bagpiper, who was traveling in
Ireland one evening, when he suddenly encountered a wolf that
seemed to be very ravenous. The poor man could think of no
other expedient to save his life than to open his wallet and try the
effect of hospitality. He did so, and the savage beast swallowed
all that was thrown to him with such voracity that it seemed as
if his appetite was not in the least degree satisfied. The whole
stock of provisions was, of course, soon spent, and now the man’s
only resource was in the virtues of his bagpipe. This the mon-
ster no sooner heard then he took to the mountains with the same
precipitation with which he had left them, The poor piper did
not wholly enjoy his deliverance, for, looking ruefully at his empty
wallet, he shook his fist at the departing animal, saying, “ Ay!
are these your tricks? Had I known your humor, you should
have had your music before your supper.”
The flight of the wolf before “the virtues” of a bagpipe
may be interpreted as evidence of highly. esthetic sound sense in
the said animal.
HIPPOPOTAMI AND MUSIC.
The enterprising and lamented Clapperton informs us that,
when he was departing on a warlike expedition from Lake Mug-
gaby, he had convincing proofs that the hippopotami are sensibly
affected by musical sound:
“ As the expedition passed along the banks of the lake at sun-
rise,” says he, “these uncouth and stupendous animals followed
the drums the whole length of the water, sometimes approaching
so close to the shore that the spray they spouted from their
mouths reached the persons who were passing along the banks.
I counted fifteen, at one time, sporting on the surface of the
water.”
1890.] Effects of Musical Sounds on Animals. 239
ALLIGATOR AND MUSIC.
“ When the late Dr. Stimpson and I were in Florida in 186ọ,
some person gave him a young alligator. The specimen was
about two-and-a-half feet from tip of snout to tip of tail. To
secure the beast we made a halter of a piece of bedcord, say
three feet long, tying one end around its neck and the other
to the leg of the table in the room we slept in. While sitting
before a pitch-pine fire in the evening, discussing the events of
the day, by way of variety we serenaded that alligator with vocal
performances of a high order. Our musical efforts produced, so
far as we could perceive, not the slightest effect; the poor brute
knew that he was tied, and that it would be useless to try and
get away”
From the gigantic and uncouth let us return to the more at-
tractive and familiar animals belonging to certain groups of the
Rodentia, some of which are almost domestic through the prox-
imity of their habitat to that of man.
SQUIRRELS AND MUSIC.
In Dr. Merriam’s charming volume, in treating of the gray
squirrels, he says: “They were extremely fond of music (in
the mort comprehensive sense of the term), and it affected them
in a peculiar manner. Some were not only fascinated but actually
spellbound by the music-box or guitar. And one particularly weak-
minded individual was so unrefined in his taste that, if I advanced
slowly, whistling “ Just before the Battle, Mother,” in as pathetic
tones as I could muster for the occasion, he would permit me even
to stroke his back, sometimes expressing his pleasure by making
a low purring sound. This was a gray, and I several times ap-
proached and stroked him as above desceibed. I once succeeded
in getting near enough to a black to touch him, whereupon he in-
stantly came to his senses and fled. When listening to music
they all acted much inthe same way. They always sat bolt up-
right, inclining a little forward (and if eating a nut were sure to
240 The American Naturalist. [March,
drop it), letting the forepaws hang listlessly over the breast, and,
turning the head to one side in a bewildered sort of way, assumed
a most idiotic expression.
MICE AND MUSIC.
In 1804 Dr. Samuel Cramer, of Virginia, communicated to Dr.
Barton the following very curious account of the influence of
music upon the common House Mouse. He said: “One even-
ing in the month of December, as a few officers on a British man-
of-war in the harbor of Portsmouth were seated around the fire,
one of them began to play a plaintive air on the violin. He had
scarcely performed ten minutes when a mouse, apparently frantic,
made its appearance in the centre of the floor, near the large
table which usually stands in the ward-room,—the residence of
the lieutenants in ships of the line. The strange gestures of the
little animal strongly excited the attention of the officers, who,
with one consent, resolved to suffer it to continue its singular
actions unmolested. Its exertions now appeared to be greater
every moment. It shook its head, leaped about the table, and
exhibited signs of the most ecstatic delight.
“ It was observed that in proportion to the gradation of the tones
of the soft point the ecstacy of the animal appeared to be increased,
and vice versa. After performing actions which an animal so di-
minutive would at first sight seem incapable of, the little creature, to
the astonishment of the delighted spectators, suddenly ceased to
move; fell down and expired without evincing any symptoms of
pain.” ?
The anecdotes herein submitted are more entertaining than
important; they contribute but little to our enlightenment on the
main point. As a totality they are sufficient to show that an in-
teresting field of inquiry is offered to us, that experiments are
worth the making, and that only by carefully devised experi-
ments can satisfagtory data be obtained.
2 The Thila. Med. and Phys. Jour., Vol. 1, 1804, as quoted by Dr. Merriam in his
'“ Mammals, ete.
pre Effects of Musical Sounds oh Animals. 241
In reviewing the examples here brought together; thosé whcih
relate to the effect of flute notes on sheep and pigeons are use-
fully suggestive, as furnishing a hint; first, as to an instrument,
and second, indicating a class of sounds worth experimenting with.
The interest exhibited by pigs, oxen, and cows in the more
complex musical sounds, or combinations of sounds, such as
would be classed under the second definition, is shown hy some
of the examples. We have no information as to the character
of the instruments, or the tunes, or sounds. The simple fact is
proven that these animals were attracted by instrumental music,
and the inference is that the sensations produced were pleasurable.
As to how far the behavior of the dogs in some of the cases
given may be attributed to or regarded as the effect of music, or
considered as nothing more than a manifestation of impulse or
spontaneous activity which takes a hand in whatever is going on
at the time; it is evident that this is a question for future deter-
mination.
We have all noticed the pleasure exhibited by these animals
when the master puts on his hat and goes out for a walk, a
drive, or a hunt. We have seen them racing with each other,
with horses in the field, when both horses and dogs seem to
derive pleasure from the performance, and to be acting under the
impulse which finds birth in exuberant vitality, or simple, health-
ful life. It would seem that the example of motion excites
to action, and the sight of a swiftly moving railway train or a
locomotive tempts and stimulates them to trials of speed.
In the Lake Superior region, where I lived thirty years ago,
in the winter season, which meant, at that time, five months’
isolation from the rest of mankind, the mail-bags were carried
once a fortnight by dog-trains in charge of three or four Indians
or half-breeds. There were generally three or four sleds, with as
many dogs to each. The dogs were gaily. decorated with bits of
bright-colored flannel and ribbons, and bells were added for
sound and show. Upon arriving at the summit of a hill about
half a mile from the centre of the camp, they halted for a breath-
ing spell. I shall never forget the lively scenes that always fol-
lowed these brief halts, when men and dogs started down the
242 The American Naturalist. [March,
slope towards my office, at full speed; the Indians whooping at
the top of their voices, and the dogs: adding to the tumult by
their vociferous and joyful barking, and the merry jingle of the
bells.
Here man and beast were moved by a common impulse, which
found relief, expression, and pleasure in intense activity and noise.
They had shared together, as companions and friends, the fatigue
and dangers and monotony of a long journey over dreary reaches
and wastes of snow, and through the gloom of silent forests, and
now had reached the end which gave them rest, food, and
security.
It is hardly worth the time to further consider the illustrations
here brought together, as they are for the greater part not suffi-
‘Ciently circumstantial to furnish a deduction of any real value ;
they are rather like straws in the air which indicate the course of
the wind, or blaze-marks on the trees that indicate a path to be
followed.
REFERENCES :
The paragraphs beginning page 26, wie 16; p. 127, l. 23; p. 128, 1. 8; p. 236, l. 9;
. 237, 1. 4, 19, 26; p. 238, 1. 4, 23; are taken m Goodrich's little book, *“ Anecdotes of
Cc. . . ,4 0
from Prof. Davidson, March 22, 1885. P. 28,1. 18; correspondence of Globe- Democrat.
P. 239, l. 17; from “The Mammals of the Adirondack Region,” by C. Hart Merriam,
M.D., N. Y.: 1884. Published by the Author.
1890.] Genesis of the Actinocrinide. 243
GENESIS OF THE ACTINOCRINID.
BY CHARLES R. KEYES.
rm crinoids belonging to the family Actinocrinide reached
their greatest development and expansion during the lower -
Carboniferous period. In the American rocks the variety and
number of these forms is indeed remarkable, perhaps nowhere
equaled in any other age or region.
As regards the distribution of the group in time and space,
and the phylogenetic history of the camarate forms in general,
many pregnant suggestions have recently been offered by certain
terranes in the Mississippi valley. But until quite lately attention
has been turned in other directions than towards the solving of
these problems; to the purely geologic considerations, and to
the description of species. That such a large number of specific
and higher terms should have been proposed, many of which
are now.regarded as invalid, is not surprising when it is remem-
bered that serial comparisons were made only in exceptional
cases, and that most of the forms show great variation, even now
‘often offering more or less difficulty in definitely limiting the
several sections. More recently efforts have been turned towards
the structural features of the different groups, with most gratify-
ing results towards a better understanding of the class. For a
long time previous the lack of a sufficient variety and quantity
of well-preserved examples of the occurring species had greatly
embarrassed all efforts of this kind; and in many cases had led
to very erroneous conclusions concerning the real structure of |
various parts of the skeletal arrangement. Late finds, however,
have in great measure removed many of the difficulties that
earlier would have very much hindered any attempts towards a
satisfactory solution of the two questions already alluded to,
They have also supplied enough additional data to render profit-
able the consideration anew of the entire stratigraphy of the
Carboniferous rocks of the broad continental interior, with the
24h The American Naturalist. [March,
manifest result of a much better defined subdivision of the series
than that now existing.
Geologic Distribution of the Actinocrinide-—More than three-
fourths of the total number of genera of Actinocrinide are repre-
sented in America, distributed in time as shown in the accom-
panying chart, the relative expansion of each genus being also
indicated. As compared with the ages preceding, the lower
' Carboniferous is here greatly exaggerated in order to show more
clearly the relationship of the several zoological groups, for it
was during this time that the greatest diversity of form, structure
and general ornamentation occurred ; in fact it was the culminat- `
ing period of crinoidal life in America. Continuous lines are
drawn where the record is complete and the transitions fully
shown, while the dotted lines indicate the relation of the different
types according to the evidence at present known, and probably
coincide very closely with the real courses of divergence. The
scheme is, then, to represent in a graphic way the relationship of
the genera as now understood, rather than to construct a genea-
logical tree, with which attempts of this kind are often con-
founded. In the present instance some of the earlier, more
generalized forms have not as yet been made known. ‘There are
also good grounds for believing that some of the generic types
are considerably older than actual observation shows. In other
groups, more particularly, there is abundant evidence pointing to
a much higher antiquity of the leading generic types than is
generally supposed. This is especially true of many widely
distributed living toot whose ancestry has lately proved to
be very ancient.
Elements of Classification—The most generalized type of the
family Actinocrinide has dorsally a single ring of basal plates,
three in number and of equal size, succeeded by a second circle
of subequal pieces, six in number—the five radial and the
primary anal plates. As in all camarate crinoids, the brachials
for a considerable distance are incorporated into the calyx by
means of interradial ossioles, and in the free portion of the rays
they are biserial and closely interlocking. Ventrally five orals
can, with a few exceptions, be made out; they are usually sur-
1890.] ; Genesis of the Actinocrinide. ° ~ 245
rounded by a greater or less number of smaller pieces. The
anal aperture may be a simple opening immediately back of the
orals, or at the end of a long ventral tube.
The fundamental modifications in the arrangement of the
various plates give trustworthy criteria for the basis of genera;
while the ornamentation, relative size and shape of the calyx
ossicles form very satisfactory features for the distinction of
species. The taxonomic values attached by different paleontolo-
gists to the various characters are not the same. This difference
of interpretation, however, appears to arise largely from inatten-
tion to the ontogenetic history of the living forms of the class.
But this diversity of opinion, happily, is rapidly lessening, with
the prospect of a speedy agreement, at least in the main features,
as to the relative worth of the separate structures in classification.
General Morphological Changes.— Before passing, however,
to morphological details, it may be well to call attention to some
widely-spread variations recorded. Briefly summing up, then,
the statements recently’ made in a general consideration of the
most marked anatomical features displayed by the Carboniferous
-crinoids of the Mississippi basin, it may be said that these
organisms, from the beginning of the lower carboniferous to the
close of the Keokuk, showed: (1) a wonderful and extremely
varied development of different structural characters; (2) a con-
stant increase in size and massiveness of test; (3) a peculiar _
change in ornamentation, which, from the delicate style of the
earlier forms, gradually grew more and more bold and rugged ;
and (4) many curious modifications in minor particulars.
These striking and wide-spread phenomena point to very
decided changes in surroundings, such as might have resulted
from a gradual decrease in the depth of the sea, a slight diminu-
tion, in the density of the water and the introduction of fine sedi-
ment in consequence of the nearer proximity to the drainage
courses of the young continent, or marked alterations in the
coastal contour of the neighboring mainland. There probably
were acting also numerous other though less apparent influences.
Indeed, these suggestions find substantiation in the stratigraphy
1 Keyes : Carb. Echin. Mississippi Basin, Am. Jour. Sci., Sept., 1889.
2460 . The American Naturalist. [March,
of the region, which gives every reason to believe that the
changes went on quietly, yet at a rather rapid rate. The great
abundance of individuals at this time may be due, in part at least,
to the withdrawal of their more motile enemies because of the
unsuitable physical impositions already mentioned. The com-
paratively rapid changes of environment thus imposed would
force rapid modifications in the structure of the various individ-
uals in order to secure a more. perfect adaptation to the new
conditions. And when these physical changes went on with
still greater rapidity structural adjustment was unable to keep
pace, and soon ended in the extinction of the group. The un-
favorable conditions at a somewhat later period are further shown
in the neighboring districts where a few types still persisted,
small, depauperate and few in numbers.
Generic Considerations—The Actinocrinoids are first known
in the upper Silurian. They early showed signs of departure
from the primitive form ; and developed chiefly along two diver-
gent lines. The one group continued to the Burlington with but
slight tendencies to modification in general structure ; the other
soon broke up into a number of more or less well-marked sec-
tions, each of which rapidly expanded into new generic types,
until about the close of the Keokuk, where, with a single excep-
tion, they became extinct. The present account will therefore
make mention of the following groups as comprising the Actino-
crinide: Periechocrinus, Megistocrinus, Amphoracrinus, Al-
loprosallocrinus, Agaricocrinus, Dorycrinus, Gennzocrinus, Eret-
mocrinus, Batocrinus, Actinocrinus, Teleiocrinus, Physetocrinus,
Strotocrinus and Steganocrinus.
The general structure of the forms has already been alluded to,
but some minor anatomical points in various genera may require
further consideration. The first of the sections above referred to
includes only two types—Periechocrinus and Megistocrinus.
These genera differ from the other members of the family chiefly
in the relatively large calyx, rather small branching arms, the
large number of interradial plates, and in the structure of. the
ventral surface. In Periechocrinus the plates are smooth and
thin; in Megistocrinus rather thick and more or less highly or-
EE:
1890.] Genesis of the Actinocrinida. 247
-~ amented. The anal interradius has three ossicles in the second
tier, with many smaller pieces in the succeeding rows.
Amphoracrinus, in the general construction of the calyx, closely
approaches some forms of Agaricocrinus, but its arms are very
different, resembling more those of the preceding group. There
are also other important distinctions. The earliest Agaricocrinus
appears in the Kinderhook. At the beginning of the Keokuk a
curious differentiation in some of the forms took place, giving rise
to Alloprosallocrinus, of which but a single species is as yet
known. The genus first mentioned is characterized by the flat-
tened or concave dorsal region of the calyx, the free arms being
given off low down on the margin of the basal plane. The rays
are somewhat separated, especially on the posterior side, where
a vertical row of anal plates is very noticeable. Ventrally, the
calyx is greatly protuberant, and sometimes inflated not unlike
that in Amphoracrinus.
_ Dorycrinus is the direct lineal successor of Gennzocrinus, from
which it should, perhaps, not be separated generically. The anal
structure links it closely with Agaricocrinus. It differs, however,
in having the general arrangement of the calyx more like Bato-
principally in the long, lanceolate arms and inflated ventral parts.
But the gradations are very complete, and it is often difficult to
separate the forms of the two groups. In Batocrinus, the long
anal tube, like that of the typical form of the family, is very
prominent. The arms are short ; the plates in the second tier of
the anal interradius three in number, and the orals large and well
defined. :
Actinocrinus and the genera following have only two pieces in
the second anal tier. In the leading genus two rather well-
defined sections are recognized: one with the arms equi-distant
around the margin of the calyx; the others with the arms in
ot usters, i ing a ly quinquelobate . Te
S oom org, strongly quinq symmetry
248 The American Naturalist. . [Mareh,
small number of brachials below the free arms is also very notice-
able when compared with the four groups yet to be considered.
Teleiocrinus departs from the type just mentioned in having a
greater number of the lower brachials incorporated into the calyx,
and forming a more or less pronounced decagonal rim just above
those of the second order. In this respect it approaches some-
what towards Strotocrinus, but the latter has a very different
ventral structure. Physetocrinus and Strotocrinus both differ
from Actinocrinus in the structure of the ventral side, while the
anal opening is a simple aperture in the test. The first of these
types has the ventral portions of the calyx greatly elevated; the
second nearly flat, while the rim is enormously developed, and
the terminal free arms are not given off until the twelfth to
fifteenth order of brachials. The calyx of Steganocrinus is most
like that of the lobed section of Actinocrinus, but the radial ex-
tensions are most remarkable, and give rise to a very large num-
ber of free arms.
Geologic Development.—Inasmuch as the different phases passed
through during the known existence of several of the genera
mentioned have already been referred to elsewhere,’ it is hardly
necessary to take up here each group sepapately. It will suffice
simply to consider somewhat in detail the geologic history of one
of the leading generic types——Actinocrinus,—which will also
indicate the general course of development pursued by the other
members of the family.
As yet the genus Actinocrinus is not known before the earliest
part of the Lower Carboniferous—the Kinderhook. The forms
from this horizon thus far discovered have all a more or less
globular calyx, with the arms equidistantly distributed. The or-
namentation has already assumed two very distinct phases. In
the one, delicate ridges or small confluent nodes pass from the
central portion of each dorsal plate of the calyx to the center of
adjoining ossicles ; in the other, the ridges are very inconspicuous,
and the plates are strongly convex on the outer surface. These
two styles of sculpturing continue during the existence of the
group; but the first gradually loses its identity, while the second
2 Wachsmuth and Springer, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci., Phila., 1878.
1890.] Genesis of the Actinocrinide. 249
becomes greatly intensified. In the earlier species the free arms
are slender, growing much stouter in the Burlington and Keokuk,
and in the latter often also branching one or more times.. This
development is accompanied by an increasing massiveness of the
calyx plates and a change of the simple convexity of the ossicles
into great, rude nodosities. Another marked feature is the ten-
dency for the rays to separate from one another above the second
brachials, forming prominent radial extensions before giving off
the freearms. At the same time the interradial areas become
somewhat more depressed. The quinquelobate calyx is thus
produced; the form upon which the genus was was founded. In
general it may be said that the earlier forms were of small size,
delicately constructed and ornamented, and that they gradually
became very much larger and more massive, with a rough,
rugged ornamentation.
The more striking points in the development of the anatomical
features in Actinocrinus, as here briefly traced, apply to the
other genera here mentioned, and also to the members of other
related families. Besides, Dorycrinus developed huge vertebral
spines; Batocrinus, an immense disk-shaped calyx ; Eretmocri-
nust broad lanceolate arms; Strotocrinus,a large rim stretching
out laterally from above the tertiary brachials ; and Steganocrinus,
monstrous radial extensions, from which the free arm sprung.
Generic Relationships——As previously stated, Periechocrinus
and Megistocrinus are closely related, but differ considerably
from other members of the family. Their recorded history also
extends over a much longer period than that of the other twelve
genera. Periechocrinus occurs first in the Niagara,—large, thin
plated forms, nearly devoid of ornamentation, and having tall
obconic calyces, with long arms branching one or more times,
The evidence of this type in the American Devonian is as yet
rather meager, though in Europe abundant testimony of its ex-
istence in rocks of similar age is not lacking. The forms found
in the Lower Carboniferous present a somewhat different aspect
from those of the earlier periods, having the calyx very much
shortened and proportionately broadened*at the base of the free
arms, besides differing in several other respects.
250 The American Naturalist. [March,
On the other hand, Megistocrinus, with its thick, heavy plates,
boldly sculptured, and having a very depressed calyx, reached its
greatest development in the middle Devonian. It continued,
though in greatly lessened numbers, to the upper part of the Bur-
lington, where it became extinct. Both genera appear to have a
larger number of dorsal interradials, especially on the anal side,
than any other of the Actinocrinoid genera.
Amphoracrinus approaches Agaricocrinus in the flattened dor-
sal cup, the high, often inflated, ventral portions, and in the shape
and arrangement of the plates of the aboral side. The anal
side and arms connect it with Actinocrinus and Periechocrinus:
with the former by the possession of usually only two ossicles in
the second tier, by the absence of the marked vertical row of anal
plates, and by the presence of a short sub-central anal tube; with
the latter by the peculiar structure of the free arms.
Agaricocrinus is remarkable for the greatly depressed form of
the calyx, the dorsal cup being nearly flat, or, as in some of the
later species, decidedly concave. Its resemblance to Amphora-
-crinus has been referred to above. In anal structure it is identi-
cal with Dorycrinus, having the same arrangement of plates, and
a similar vertical rounded ridge near the top of which is the
simple anal opening. The arms are exceedingly stout, somewhat
like those in certain forms of Actinocrinus from the lower part
of the Burlington limestone, but very much heavier. Agarico-
crinus, Amphoracrinus, and Dorycrinus probably began to
diverge from the more typical members of the family and from
each other about the same time, and this apparently took place
during the middle or lower Devonian. In the upper part of the
Burlington or early Keokuk a small group of forms departed
somewhat from the typical species. These have been placed
under Alloprosallocrinus, though it is doubtful whether the
differences are great enough to render a separate, generic term
useful. The chief point of distinction is the position of the anal
opening, which is placed at the end of a short ventral tube,
instead of being a simple aperture in the test, as in Agaricocrinus.
It seems, however, that much more importance has been hitherto
PLATE VI,
“ AMERICAN ACTINOCRINIDA “
| Coal-
N | Measures.
2
k Kaskaskia.
[al z
L.jotLouis. | E
= Keokuk. È
D $
<c [Burlington
©
Kapderbook.
Z| Upper.
x ‘
Niddle.
S ! AGE
2 Lower. |
a a o |
` er E ERE ve KaR |
-| _. (Upper \
A 2
at a Lowe Y.
i~
= | l
1%
me N
|E
pi> ieee
1890.] Genesis of the Actinocrinide. 251
placed upon this structure in classification than it probably de-
serves, as will be referred to later.
Dorycrinus is directly traceable to a certain group of Devonian
crinoids for which the name Gennzocrinus has been proposed.
The latter genus embraces a few small forms, mostly from the
Hamilton rocks. The species of Gennzocrinus, as for éxample
G. cassedayi Lyon, are connected with Burlington and later
Dorycrinus by such forms as lately have been found in the
- Kinderhook beds of Central Iowa, and which have been described
by Wachsmuth and Springer as D. immaturus and D. parvibasis.
Dorycrinus, in combining the features of both, unites closely the
Batocrinoid and Agaricocrinoid groups. It agrees with the first
in the peculiar construction of the posterior side, in the simple
anal opening, and in the radial grouping of the arms; with the
second in the shape and structure of the calyx, and in the some-
what flattened distal portions of the arms, in this respect approach-
ing certain Eretmocrini. In the earlier, more generalized forms
the close resemblance of Dorycrinus, Agaricocrinus and Eretmo-
crinus or Batocrinus is far more striking than with later varieties
which have become so greatly differentiated. The most prom-
inent features, perhaps, to be noted in this connection are the
monstrous ventral spines, often reaching a length of three to five
inches, as in D. mississippiensis Roemer, and D. roemeri M. an
W.; the immense basal expansion, as shown by D. missvuriensis
(Shumard) and D. cornigerus (Hall); and the stout, heavy stalks
with large, conspicuous nodal joints.
Eretmocrinus differs from its nearest related genus—Batocrinus
—of which it is manifestly an offshoot, chiefly in having long;
flattened, lanceolate arms, a somewhat different ventral structure,
and usually a more or less well defined lateral extension of the
basals. The genus was rather short-lived, appearing in the Bur-
lington and becoming extinct before the close of the Keokuk.
Batocrinus is one of the most characteristic and widely spread
forms of the family occurring in the lower Carboniferous. Its
relations to the other genera have already been considered else-
where and need not be repeated here.
252 eet The American Naturalist. [March,
Actinocrinus is the type of a most remarkable group. The
earlier forms bear a close resemblance to those of Batocrinus, but
the possession of only two plates in the second anal tier serves
readily to distinguish the two genera. As yet it has not been
found to occur below the Carboniferous. It early shows a
marked tendency to differentiation along the radial lines, assum-
ing most wonderful phases, which culminated in Teleiocrinus,
Strotocrinus, and Steganocrinus. The more primitive forms of
Actinocrinus have the free arms, as they leave the calyx, nearly
at equal distances from one another, In certain species, how-
ever, the arms of one ray begin to separate from those of the
adjoining rays. Interradial plates still further increase the dis-
tance between the clustered free arm bases of the several rays,
until finally the calyx has become strongly quinquelobate. The
first section gradually diminished in numbers and disappeared in
the upper part of the Burlington; but the second continually
grows more and more prominent, and ultimately attains huge
dimensions before the extinction of the group.
_ In the upper portion of the Burlington appears a small group
of crinoids—Teleiocrinus—possessing all the characters of Ac-
tinocrinus except that the lower branchials for some distance
have become larger, and appear like calyx plates. These are all
firmly anchylosed, and do not give off the fine biserial arms until
the fifth or sixth order of brachials. The calyx thus possesses a
more or less well-defined lateral extension passing around above
the branchial of the second order. This has led to the union of
this group with Strotocrinus; but the rim, though very striking
and very similar in each, appears to be a separate development in
the two genera, rather than different stages of the same feature.
In the ornamentation, the ventral structure, and the possession of
a very long anal tube the affinities of Teleiocrinus are manifestly
much nearer the typical representative of the family than Stroto-
crinus.
The Physetocrinus type begins to make its appearance in the
Kinderhook as a derivative of Actinocrinus. The earliest known
divergence, perhaps, is shown best in A. ornatissimus W. and
Sp. from the lowest member of the lower Carboniferous. In this
1890.] Genesis of the Actinocrinide. 253
form the radial portions. of the calyx have already commenced to
become somewhat lobate, and the arms to grow longer and more
slender. The plates of the ventral side are all quite small, the
ovals indistinguishable from the surrounding ossicles; while the
_ pieces around the anal tube are still smaller, indicating that this
structure was very short, and in many cases probably did not pro
ject much above the ventral dome. The ornamentation of both
also presents a close similarity. Some forms of A. orpusculus
Hall, from the lower part of the Burlington limestone, also show
the Physetocrinus facus, but in a much less merked degree
Physetocrinus appears to be the line along which Strotocrinus
developed into the unique, short-lived forms which are found only
in the upper part of the Burlington.
With the calyx alone under consideration Steganocrinus
would be immediately referred to Actinocrinus, but the immense,
narrow, radial extensions from which spring the free arms are
certainly distinctive enough for generic separation. Although in
this character the genus, at first sight, departs so far from the
other groups of the family, it will be seen on closer examination
that the departure is only another phase of what is shown in
Strotocrinus, a devergence beginning a little earlier and in a little
different direction.
Summary. Several interesting points are disclosed in the fore-
going sketch of the American Actinocrinide, which have an im-
portant bearing upon the consideration of fossil faunas in general.
The conclusions here arrived at apply, in the main, to other
families of crinoids as well as to the gastropods and other paleo-
zoic forms, though not to so apparent an extent. Considerable
information has already been obtained illustrating these phe-
nomena in the groups last mentioned, and will be the subject of
future reference.
(1.) It is clearly indicated that a large proportion of the genera
date back much further geologically than actual observation
shows.
(2.) At times in the phylogenetic history of a group varia-
tions appear to go on with broad and rapid strides, and the
organisms survive through rapidly changing physical conditions.
254 The American Naturalist. [March,
When the changes of environment became too rapid, the forms
either ceased, to exist or retrograded, became depauperate and
finally extinct. Admirable illustrations are found in Batocrinns,
Dorycrinus, and especially in the Hexacrinoid genus Dichocrinus.
(3.) Variation may go on in one portion of an organism with-
out materially affecting other parts. This is well shown in Ste-
ganocrinus as compared with Actinocrinus, and among the
the Platycrinide in Eucladocrinus and Platycrinus, in the Rho-
docrinidz by Gilbertsocrinus and Rhodocrinus.
(4.) The Actinocrinide show a decided tendency throughout
their existence to increase the distal extent of the rays. In some
forms it was accomplished by the simple branching of the free
arms, as in Megistocrinus, certain Amphoracrini, and a few
Actinocrini; by the lateral expansion of the arms, as in Eretmo-
crinus ; or by radial extension of the calyx branchials, as, notably,
in Teleiocrinus, Strotocrinus and Steganocrinus. The number of
free arms was thus increased from twenty or thirty in the earlier
species of Actinocrinus, to forty to sixty in Teleiocrinus, one hun-
dred to one hundred and twenty-five in Strotocrinus, and from
one hundred and fifty to two hundred in Steganocrinus.
EXPLANATION OF FIGURES.
PLATE VII.—Graphic representation of the generic relations and distri-
bution in time of the American Actinocrinidze
PLATE VIII.—Dorsal surfaces of Asunoctuide. B, basals ; 7, radials ;
b, branchials; 4, free arms; z, interradials; am, primary anal plate; Z,
pinnucles ; a, interaxillaries.
1. Batocrinus pyriformis (Shumard). 2. Actinocrinus proboscidalis,
(Hall.) 3. A. multiradiatus (Shumard.) 4. Teleiocrinus umbrosus (Hall.)
5. Physetocrinus ornatus (Hall.) 7. Strotocrinus regalis (Hall.) 8. Stega-
nocrinus sculptus (Hall.)
PLATE IX.—1. Megistocrinus evansi (O. and Sh.) 2. Agaricocrinus
wortheni (Hall.) 3. Free arm of Eretmocrinus remibrachiatus (Hall.)
PLATE IX,
Si A
A . ’
a \ Se
== Py SIA
=> s PP ` ‘
= Pre Q `
-s A Y AN
N ` ,
Ti
.
AÑ
Z
E
fA ie D 2
A AA X
AOS /
iO
== WAS og |
== EES |
— Q o
mi D oe oo
—— V AY ES-N]
3 Wo J ez
S TEE. S Y S E
f — -Ss Sq H
aeaee EEE S SS ee
ed SS 6
te SS ES
fee Se ==
n C j \
ameme e '
+
co
UUT
LEA
386
AMERICAN ACTINOCRINIDE.
1890.] ` Editorial. 255
° EDITORIAL.
EDITORS, E. D., COPE AND J. S CINGSLEY,
CCORDING to Captain Boutelle, U.S. A., superintendent of
the National Yellowstone Park, that reservation is fulfilling
the purpose of its existence better than ever before. Since the
capture and conviction of depredating hunters has become
assured, this class of persons have concluded to let the Park
one. Men who might have once played the part «^ ~oachers
have now become persuaded that it is to their advantage tu per-
mit the game in the Park to increase, and furnish a supply for
the surrounding region, which will thus continue to be the best
hunting ground in America. Captain Boutelle informs us that
the large game has become exceedingly tame, the black-tailed
deer and wapiti scarcely moving out of the way of the parties
who patrol the Park. Bison and moose are also increasing. The
immunity from hunters has also encouraged the multiplication of
the carnivora. The chief increase is in bears, both black and
silver-tip. The slop-barrels and pig-pens of nearly all the hotels
are nightly visited, says the Captain, by one or two bears, who
divide the supplies with the swine, sometimes eating with them
from the trough. So long as they find the necessary douceur,
the pigs do not suffer; but if the tax is not paid, an execution is
issued and a pig seized to satisfy the debt. Puma and wolverine
are also increasing; so that unless some permission to reduce
the numbers of the carnivora is obtained, the non-carnivorous
game must suffer.
Superintendent of the Fish Commission Col. Macdonald has
also determined to experiment on the adaptability of the Park as
a fish preserve. Professors Jordan and Gilbert have been exam-
ining the distribution of fishes in the Park and the character of
its waters, with a view to the introduction of white-fish and
grayling, as well as some additional ‘species of trout. It will
probably be necessary to introduce also some herbivorous fishes
256 The American Naturalist. [March,
to serve as a food-basis, as some Catostomide, which may be
found at similar altitudes of the adjacent regions. Such species
(Catostomus labiatus e.g.) are found in the Snake River of Idaho,
and could be easily procured.
The wisdom of Dr. Hayden in proposing and of Coige in
directing the reservation of this tract is abundantly vindicated.
It will be well if the Yosemite Park of California can be made
equally useful as a game preserve. The time will come when a
similar preserve for the game of our Eastern Region will become
important. The wild country about the head of some of the
eastern tributaries of the Tennessee River in North Carolina
furnishes good localities for such a reservation.
RECENT LITERATURE.
A New Text-book of Animal Physiology.'—This book, in-
tended ‘ for students of human and comparative (veterinary) medicine
and of general biology,” is unique in several respects. The subject is
treated from the standpoints of general biology and the theory of
evolution, and an attempt is made to introduce the comparative method
into physiology. There is no doubt that this fundamental idea is the
correct one, and that physiological processes, to be fully understood,
must be considered as evolutions. That this aspect of the subject has —
not been greatly accentuated is doubtless due to the fact that physiology
has been so long and so universally recognized mainly as the ha hand-
maid of hygiene and medicine, hence of necessity par excellence
human. A change in this respect is inevitable, and is already begun.
Investigations of the vital processes, of the mechanics, the physics,
the chemistry of the bodies of a few of the higher animals, with espe-
cial reference to the human mechanism, have been pushed far within a
few years. But aslowing—not a stoppage—of such investigations must,
sooner or later, take place ; and investigators will more and more ask
themselves how have these wonderful and complex vital, these mechan-
ical, physical, and chemical processes of the highest animal body come
1A Text-book of Animal Physiology, by Wesley Mills. Pp. 700; New York: D»
Appleton & Co., 1889.
1890.] Recent Literature. 257
to be? Any attempt, like the present, to bring about this change is
to be welcomed and commended.
The book begins with a discussion of questions of general biology,
such as the cell, yeast, protococcus, amceba, fungi, bacteria, vorticella,
hydra, classification of animals, and theory of evolution. Starting then
om the ovum and spermatozoon, reproduction is fully treated; a
short discussion of the prominent theories of heredity completing the
subject. A chapter on the chemical constitution of the animal body,
and one on physiological research and physiological reasoning, are fol-
lowed by a full and orderly treatment of each of the systems of organs
found in the body.”
Facts are intentionally stated with not too great, sometimes with
insufficient, detail, and are discussed impartially, intelligently, and
roadly. Occasional want of clearness and disregard of the rules of
rhetoric may be remedied in a second edition. Caution is constantly
expressed against the acceptance of purely physical, mechanical, and
also simple explanations of vital processes, as witness: ‘‘ The com-
plexity of vital processes is great beyond our comprehension.” “‘
laws of physiology cannot be laid down in the rigid way that has pre-
vailed to so large an extent up to the present time.” ‘And if in
this, the best-studied case [secretion in the salivary glands], mechanical
theories of vital processes utterly fail, why attempt to fasten them upon
other glands, as the kidneys or the lungs, or, indeed, apply such crude
conceptions to the subtle processes of living protoplasm anywhere or
in any form?’’ The author’s doubts are suggestive. One cannot re-
press the thought, however, that much of the discussions is written for
and is more fitting for the professional physiologist than the inexpe-
rienced student. The latter is everywhere made ‘‘ expectant of pro-
gress.” Self-observation, testing of facts wherever possible on one’s
own body, is constantly urged, as well as the comparative study of
animal mechanisms. The illustrations are abundant, generally well-
chosen, and excellently reproduced. The original diagrams are valu-
able. The causation of the heart-beat—a field in which the author
himself has worked—is well summed up. Gaskell’s idea of the car-
diac vagus and sympathetic, as respectively anabolic and katabolic, is
practically accepted ; and the same physiologist’s views as to the na-
ture and relations of the cranial, spinal, and sympathetic nerves are
given and commended. The discussion of the influence of the ner-
vous system on metabolism is original and interesting. Throughout
the book the author has thought his own way. His doubts and his
frequent lack of acceptance of conventional ideas will call forth oppo-
sition, but his work ‘is suggestive and stimulating.
258 The American Naturalist. [March,
ohnson’s ‘“ How Crops Grow.’’*—Twenty-two years ago the
first edition of this book appeared, and immediately took a place among
the necessary things for the student of plants. It gave, in compact
form, an introduction to the chemical composition, structure, and
physiology of the higher plants. It was the only American book
which took note of the later work of the German investigations in
plant anatomy and physiology. It was deservedly popular, and
brought its author great credit.
Now, after these years of trial, it is revised and reprinted, the new
matter rendering necessary an entire resetting of the whole. In some
parts the modernization of. the work has been quite notable, in others
this is not as marked, while some portions have been allowed to remain
as they were left when first written. In the chapter treating of the vola-
tile part of plants, the changes are most marked and interesting.
Here eight classes of ‘ proximate principles’’ are recognized, as follows:
Water, the carbohydrates, the vegetable acids, the fats and oils, the
albuminoid or protein bodies and ferments, the acids, the alkaloids,
and the phosphorized substances. In the treatment of the carbhoy-
drates, three sub-divisions are recognized, viz.:
(a) Zhe Amyloses, having the formula (C,H,,O,)N, and including
cellulose, starch, inulin, glycogen, the dextrine, and the gums (the lat-
ter including the pectin bodies).
(b) Zhe Glucoses, having the formula C,H,,O, and including levu-
lose (fruit sugar), dextrose (grape sugar), galactose, mannose and
arabinose
(c) The Sucroses, having the formula, mostly, C,,H,,O,,>and includ-
ing saccharose (cane sugar), maltose (malt sugar), lactose (milk sugar), ~
and raffinose.
The vegetable acids fall into several groups, viz.: The fatty acids
(acetic, butyric, etc.), and the oxyfatty acids (glycollic, lactic), both of
which are monobasic, and the dibasic acids (oxalic, malic, tartaric,
citric, etc.). The treatment of the protein bodies is likewise practi-
cally new, to which nearly twice as many pages are given in the new >
book as were assigned to it in the old one.
Passing over much that is new in succeeding chapters, we take up the
second part, devoted to the structure and physiology of the plant.
2 How Crops Grow; a Treatise on the Chemical Composition, Structure, and Life of
the Plant, for Students of Oe with numerous illustrations and tables of analyses»
by Samuel W. Johnson, M. A., Professor of Theoretical and Agricultural Chemistry in
the Sheffield Scientific School of A University ; Director of the Connecticut pie OES
Experiment Station ; Member of the National face of Science, New Y : Orange
Judd Company, 751 ee I2mo., pp: VI. an
1890.] Recent Literature. 259
Here the changes are fewer. The antiquated term ‘‘ spongiole’’ is
still preserved (p. 257), though for what purpose is not clear. The
root-cap, immediately following, is not properly described. On page
310 we still find the statement that about 100,000 stomata ,‘‘may be
counted on an average-sized apple leaf,” when, as a matter of fact, it
has been known that there are more than that many on each square
inch. Morren’s figures are 246 per square millimeter (Pringheim’s
Jahrbiichen fiir wissens. Botanik, Vol. IV., p. 190), and these are
equivalent to 158,670 per square inch.
The paragraphs on fertilization and hybridization have been entirely
rewritten, while that on species has undergone a significant change.
Twenty years ago our author wrote the original pamphlet in such away
as to involve “‘ original and permanent differences between different
species.” Then he cautiously admitted a short paragraph about
“ Darwin’s Hypothesis,” which he said ‘‘is now accepted by many
naturalists ;’’ but he says further, in a deprecatory tone, ‘‘ our object
here is not to discuss this intricate question,’’ etc., etc. In comparing
these cautious, not to say timid, references in the first edition to the
modern idea of the evolution of species, with the treatment of the
subject in the new book, one is able to realize the progress we have
made in the last score of years. Now the old doctrine is spoken of in
the past tense / ‘‘ Such supposed original kinds were called species’’
(p, 325). A little further on, in referring to the present view, we find
this: “On this view a plant species comprises a number of indi-
viduals, among which we are unable to distinguish greater differences
than experience shows us we should find among a number of plants
raised from the seed of the same parent.’’ A very good definition of
a species is this. CHARLES E. BEsseEy.
New Hand-Books of Paleontology.*—The rapid development
of the science of Paleontology in recent years, has been naturally
followed by the production of text-books which are designed to bring
the subject within reach of students and readers. The three works
here referred to have the advantage over many similar publications
of being the production of experts in the science, and not of mere
3 Elemente des Paleontologie von Steinmann und Döderlein ; Strassburg, 1890, 8vo,
. 829.
Handbuch des Paleontologie, herausg. von Prof. K. A. von Zittel mit Wirkung
von Dr. A. Schenk. 1. Abth., Paleozodlogie. III. Band; 3 Lief. Reptilen, rst part,
PP. 437-632, 1889.
Manual of Paleontology jer the use of Students ; by R. A. Nicholson and R. Lydek-
ker; 2 vols., 8vo., pp. 1654; William Blackwood & Sons, Edinburgh and London, 1889.
260 The American Naturalist. [March
compilers with no critical knowledge. We have already reviewed the
numbers of Professor von Zittel’s work as they have appeared, and we
now direct attention to the part which includes the first half of the
Reptilia. In the arrangement of the class he adopts the following
ordinal groups and names: Ichthyosauria, Sauropterygia, Testudinata,
Theromora, Rhynchocephalia, Lepidosauria, Crocodilia, Dinosauria,
Pterosauria. On this we observe that the name Sauropterygia is ante-
dated by the Plesiosauria of DeBlainville, and Lepidosauria by both
the Squamata of Merrem and the Streptostylica of Stannius. In the
treatment of the subject Dr. von Zittel has incorporated the latest
information from all sources, and has produced the best summary of it
now extant. The work meets our approval more entirely than the
parts devoted to the fishes and the Batrachia. In the Testudinata we
the results of the recent work done by Dr. Baur, and in the
Theromora much is derived from the writings of Seeley. Lydekker is
extensively quoted for the Plesiosauria, and American authors are used
where necessary. ‘The illustrations are numerous and excellent.
The work of Dr. Déderlein is more compact than that of von Zittel,
the families being represented by a few selected genera, no attempt
being made to enumerate all of those which are known. The result is
a work of less utility to the special student, but of more practical
value to the reader who wishes to know only the capita rerum. Th
system of the fishes is considerably in advance of that of the other
text-books, since the supposed order of ‘‘Ganoidea’’ is not adopted,
and the division Teleostomi is accepted as one of the primary divi-
sions of fishes, a position to which it is undoubtedly entitled. We find
the system of the Reptilia a little less full than that of von Zittel, but
that of the Batrachia is less opem to criticism. The Mammalia are ex-
cellent, and the latest information has been incorporated.
The Manual of Drs. Nicholson and Lydekker is of especial impor-
tance as the only work of the kind in the English language. We had
occasion to review unfavorably the first edition of the work a few years
ago, but we must give a different reception to this new third edition.
The book has been completely rewritten, and greatly improved in
every respect. The department of Vertebrata is, in fact, a new work,
the excellence of which is guaranteed by the authorship of Dr. Richard
Lydekker. The illustrations are numerous and good, and there is
very little in the science which is not in some way referred to in the
text. For any but the use of the book as one of reference, many of
the genera are too briefly mentioned. The work is not without faults.
The systematic, especially that of the fishes, is frequently not quite up
1890.] Recent Books and Pamphlets. | 261
to the requirements of the subject, and the arrangement of the subject-
matter is disorderly. We find also an unexpected number of errors of
statement in points of American paleontology, as in stratigraphical
and geographical position, and in opinions expressed by American
authors. We regret that both Drs. Lydekker and Döderlein have re-
produced figures of the skeleton of “Uintatherium ingens’ Marsh ;
‘since this fossil is said to consist chiefly of a drawing, modeled
after the Loxolophodon mirabilis Marsh. C;
RECENT BOOKS AND PAMPHLETS.
MARK, E. L.—Trichinæ in Swine. Extract Twentieth Report Mass. State Board
of Hedi From the author.
RMAN, H.—Animals of the Waters of the eed Bottoms. From the author.
MERRIAM, C. HART, AND BuRROWS, W. B.—The -e Sparrow in North
America. Dept. of Agriculture Bulletin, No.1. From pe au
RYDER, JOHN A.—The Origin and Meaning of Sex. sg “tks A. N. S., Phila.
From the author.
SMITH, S. I.—Oscar Harger. From the
FEE ae P.—A Pistol: to he e of the Bermudas. Extract
A. N. S., Phila., 1889. From the a
MAURICE, CIALIS —Etude Monographique d'une Espèce d'Ascide Composée
rom the author.
(Fragaroides auriantiacum). Liege, 1888. e aui
, Mason J.—A ogue of the gai te Indian Museum.—Contribu-
tion to our Knowledge of the Embidz ; An Asiatic Species of Corydalus ; Trachea in
yn Zool. Soc., Lo 5 Parathelphusa; New Species of
dæ; Structure of Scolopendrella; New Genus and Species of the Rutelidz ;
Mode in which Young aoe attach pone to the wenn. ; Parantirrhoea Mar-
shalli. Ext. Ann. and Mag. Ne Ongi ts
Stridulating Organs in at ; ‘Note on Mygale si stridulans. Ext. Entom. Socy., Lon-
on.—New Species of Parathelphusa. Ext. Asiatic Socy. of Bengal.—New
Genus and Species of Land Crabs; saani Chain of Bones in Wood Partridges ;
Indian and Malayan Thelphuside; New — of Raninidz. Ext. Jour. Asiatic
. of Bengal. All from the authors.
MINOT, C. O.—Uterus and Embryo. Ext. Jour. Morph. From the author,
KorRSCHELT, E.—Functionen der foer derzellen im Thierischen Körper. Extract
. Wochensc. :
WALCOTT, C. e ‘Position of the Olenellus Fauna. Ext. Am.
Jour. Science and Arts. From the author.
Fewkes, J. W.—On a method of Defence among Cerain Meduse. Ext. Proc.
Bost. Soc. Nat. Hist., 1889. From the author.
262 The American Naturalist. [March,
PHILLIPS, Peo: .—An Attempt towards an International Language, by Dr. Esper-
anto. n tee Holt & Co., 1889. From the author
TH gwen .—The Problems of the Ohio Mounds. Washington, Bureau of^
ARRESE si From the author,
YBOWSKI, B.—Studien iiber Saligethierzahne. Ext. Verh. z. b. Gesellsch., Wien,
1889. From the aut
NORMAN, A. On na Crangon, some Schizopoda and Cumacea new to or rare in
the British Seas. Ext. Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist., 1887. Notes on British Amphipoda,
Pts. 1. and 11. Ext. Saun, 1889. pan nthe author.
EE , W.-M.—Two Cases of Insect Mimicry ; Two New Species of Cecido-
myid Flies Producing Galls on Antennaria inia Ext. Trans. Wisc. Nat. Hist. .
Socy., 1889. om the author.
BEDDARD, T E.—On Certain Points in the Anatomy of the Accipitres ; Not
th rm Cells in the Integument of Æolosoma tenebrarum ; On the Olor
Fauna of pe Zealand; Some Notes on the Anatomy.of the American Tapir.
Proc l. Socy., 1889.—Notes on Certain Species of Æolosoma; On the Possible
Origin of the Malpighian Tubules of the Arthropoda, Ext. Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist.,
1889. spe the Museum
R, L.—Re eport of the PR Ext. Rope. of the Nebraska State Board
of Agriculture, for mi From the aut
, EDWIN.—Notes on rak of srera ean of New England. Ext.
Rept. 0. pi a Canili for 1886. From the
STOWELL, T. B.—The Soft Palate of the Pi hesdise Cat. Ext. Proc. Am. Socy-
reas 1888.—The Glossopharyngeal Accessory and Ld hed ossal Nerves in the Domes-
c Cat. Ext. Proc. Am. Phil. Socy., 1888. From the author
o
1890.] Geography and Travel. 263
General Notes.
GEOGRAPHY AND TRAVEL.
Africa.—Lake Tanganyika.—According to Mr. E. C. Hore,
Lake Tanganyika, although there is one African lake the water of
which stands at a higher level, has the highest watershed in the conti-
nent, and the depression which is enclosed by this watershed, including
the hilly table-land of Unyamwezi, may be regarded as the central
basin of Africa. ‘The crest of this steep watershed hugs the lake on
its western side, but on the eastern is at a considerable distance from
it, surrounding the hilly plateau inhabited by the Wanyanwezi. Until
recently there was no natural outlet to this lake, but of recent years
the waters seem to have risen higher than ever before, until they at
length burst open.an outlet at a low point upon the eastern shore,
where the strata were soft. This gap is the Lukuga River, about which
so much has been written, and through it the surplus waters of tho
lake flow to add their volume to that of the Congo. The barrier once
burst, the lake waters have continued their work of cutting down the
soft clay, and evidently will continue to do so-until the hard rock is
reached. At the time of the visit of Commander Cameron, the lake
seems to have been higher than it had ever been before, for its reces-
sion reveals the stumps of trees that once flourished around the margin.
The water level is now eighteen feet lower than it was in 1878; and
while of the lower ten feet of this space five is occupied by the stumps
of dead trees, the lower five feet is without trees, showing that the
present level is lower than any previous one. The Lukuga is now
flowing more slowly than it has been. Much of the scenery around
the lake is of the grandest description, as might be expected from its
position at the bottom of a long north and south chasm. Severe
storms sometimes arise, which the natives ride out by jumping over-
board and holding on by the boat
Around this lake, besides the apparently more ancient inhabitants,
the Wanyamwezi, who have a horror of water, are grouped representa-
tives of all the African families, the Bantu or Kaffir, the negro, the
Semitico-Africano, the dwarfs, and that unclassified group to which
the Masai belong. Most of these tribes are expert in the management
of their canoes, and thus contrast strongly with the original inhabitants.
N arch.—4,
264 The American Naturalist. [March,
The Bissougas.—E. Stallibras (Proc. Roy. Geog. Soc.) gives an
account of the Islands of Bijouja, or Bissouga, situate upon the West
African coast, in the deltas of the Jeba, Bolola, and Cassini rivers.
The largest of these, Orango, is twenty miles long by ten in width,
and others are Kanabek, Formosa, Corbelha, and Karashe. All these
consist of decomposed volcanic soil, and are thickly covered with
wood. Other islands near the Jeba mouth are Bissao, Bassis, and
Jatt, while near that of the Bololo are Bissagua, Biafares, Bulama, &c.,
many of them at present unexplored.
The Portuguese established a fort on Bissao Siok 1703, but it was
afterwards abandoned. In 1792 the English established a colony at
Point Beaver, but it proved a complete failure. After this they started
a colony upon Bulama, but the islands were by the arbitration of the
United States adjudged to Portugal, and the English leftin 1868. The
present condition of the islands, according to our author, is not flour-
ishing, yet they have a submarine cable.
Stanley’s Discoveries.—The letters of Mr. Stanley, published
in all the papers, have made the principal points of his discoveries
during his last expedition so familiar to every one that it seems super-
fluous to go over the same ground. Yet there is something strangely
fascinating in the encounter, ‘at the head of the Albert Nyanza, and
on the eastern flank of the Semliki, which connects that lake with the
smaller and more southerly one which Stanley would have us call the
Albert Edward, of a snow-capped mountain, believed by its discoverer
to be the same as the almost fabulous Mountains of the Moon. Whether
subsequent researches will confirm or invalidate Stanley’s conclusions
in this matter remains to be proved, but in the meantime we can
certain that another peak of 15,000 feet in height is added to those
which recent years have revealed in the heart of Africa, and also that
another affluent of the great river has been discovered.
The Congo Railway. in a recent issue of
the Proceedings of the Royal Geographical Society, given some inter-
esting particulars regarding the Congo Railway, which is to commence
at Matadi, a point that can be reached by steamers, and will finish at
Ndolo, above the uppermost rapid. The cost of this railroad is said
to have been most liberally estimated, yet will not exceed £ 1,000,000.
The most formidable difficulties are encountered in the first twenty-six
kilometres of the road, the total length of which will be 435 kilometres.
The Italian Protectorate.—In the partition of the coasts of
Africa among the European powers, with undefined claims €x- —
1890.] Geography and Travel. : 265
tending into the interior, Italy has not been forgotten, Her terri-
tory around Massowah has been extended to 18.2 N. Lat., while it
stretches southward to the southern boundary of Baliata, and thus
contains 200,000 inhabitants. he Habab, Beni Amer, and other
tribes are also said to have recently recognized the Italian protectorate.
On the Somali coast her protectorate extends from the Zanzibar
district of Warshekh in 2.30 N. Lat., to Wadi Nogal in 8.3 N. Lat.
It is also said that the Sultan of the Midjertin-Somal, whose territory
reaches from Ras Hafim, has. placed the northern part of his dominions
under the protection of Italy.
Lake Rudolph.—Von Hohnel, arguing from the accounts given
by Sr. Borelli and Count Teleki, considers it provable that the River
Omo of the former falls into Lake Rudolph, discovered by the latter.
Lake Rudolph extends from 2.16 to 4.47 N. Lat., and has an area
of about 3050 square miles. It is surrounded by a flat desert country,
but towards the north the level varies, and at this end enter two per-
ennial streams, the Bass and the Niam-niam. The Niam-niam is
about too yards wide in its lower course, and has a slight current,
while the Bass, the lower course of which is parallel to the former
river, has a width of about a mile and a quarter, but is shallow, and
has no perceptible current. At the southern end of the lake two
streams also enter, but these are dry save in the wet season. Their
names are the Irrquell and Kecio. The lake has no outlet, and it is
the Niam-niam which is believed to be Borelli’s Omo. The descrip-
tion given by Borelli of Lake Shambara, into which he traced the
Omo, does not accord with Lake Rudolph, but Lake Shambara is said
to have an outlet, and Von Hohnen believes that the Omo flows
through it into Lake Rudolph or Basso Narok. A few miles north-
east of Lake Rudolph is a smaller lake, one-eighth the size of the
former, and known as Basso Ebor or Lake Sancepcare This also has
no outlet, and is rapidly drying up.
In the Zeitschrift der Gesellschaft fir Erdkunte (Berlin), Paul
Reichard gives a long account of the Wanyamwezi of the plateau east
of Tanganyika, their physical characters, customs, and modes of life.
The French geographers are greatly elated that at last, after most
of the difficulties of the way have been surmounted by others, a French
traveler, M. Trivier, has crossed the African continent, passing up the
Congo by Stanley Pool and Tippoo-Tib’s quarters, and debouch-
ing at Mozambique. The editor of the Revue Géographique, in re-
counting the details of the trip, has some remarks to make respecting
266° The American Naturalist. [March,
the probable ulterior objects of Stanley’s expedition—remarks that
seem not unlikely to be founded on fact.
Captain V. Nicolasis is contributing *to the Revue Géographique a
series of articles upon West and South Madagascar.
Asia.—The Bahrein Islands.—M. J. Theodore Bent (Proc.
Roy. Geog. Soc.) gives a description of the Bahrein Islands in the
Persian Gulf, upon the Arabian coast. “The pearl fisheries of these
islands have been famous from the days of Nearchus until now, and
who has not heard of the subaqueous springs of fresh water upon their
coast ?
Mr. Bent was, however, impelled to investigate the group from
archeological reasons, his object being to search some of the numerous
mounds which are to be found in them, notably in Bahrein itself. This
island is twenty-seven miles long and ten wide, Moharek is five miles
in length, and has a width of half a mile, while the rest are mere
rocks. Among these are Sayeh, Khasafeh, Manaweh and Arad, the
latter a Phoenician name. Bahrein has a population of about 8,000,
and the group is governed by an hereditary Sheikh, who is now under
the protection of Britain. Bahrein has many subterranean springs,
related in their nature to those which in some places rise under the sur-
face of the gulf. The first European nation to put in an appearance
at this group was the Portuguese, who came under Albuquerque in
1506, and whose power lasted until 1622, when Shah Abbas, assisted
by an English fleet, took Hormuz and Bahrein. ‘The islands fell into
the power of the Arabs in 1711.
The extensive group of mounds, some of which were explored by
Mr. Bent, is situated near the village of Ali, and examples reach a
height of forty feet. After digging through hard earth for fifteen feet,
a layer of loose stones two feet thick was met with, then one of de-
cayed palm branches. Under these a two-story tomb, the lower cham-
ber higher than the upper, was discovered, and its structure was so simi-
lar to that of Phoenician tombs in general as to lend support to the
idea that these islands were either the original home of that people, or
at least one of their earliest settlements. The upper chamber con-
- tained fragments of i ivory, bits of a statue of a bull, circular boxes,
etc., in a word the treasures of. the deceased, whose body was buried
in the lower chamber where traces of bones were found, together with
the decayed remnants of drapery and remains of the wooden pins
used to fasten it to the walls.
1890.] Geography and Travel. 267
The Prejevalsky Expedition.—The Russian exploring expedi-
tion, formerly conducted by the lamented Prejevalsky, is now under
the command of Col. Pievsoff, who is continuing the work energeti-
cally. Letters have been forwarded to the Royal Geographical Society
by Lieut. Roborovsky. The expedition left Prjevalsk May 13th, and
after passing Silvkina ascended the Barskounski Pass, traveled for a
week over an elevated sirt 10,000 to 11,000 feet above the sea, crossed
the Tauskan Daria, and then proceeded towards Yarkand. e Kash-
gar Daria no longer reaches the Yarkand, but is lost in irrigation
canals at Marat-bash. The flat banks of the Yarkand are bordered
with a belt of vegetation fifteen to twenty miles in width on each side,
including two species of poplar and Holostachus. Many ruins of old
gne unknown cities are to be found in these deserts; the thickets
abound in tigers and boars, and wild camels graze on the barkhans
around.
The town of Yarkand consists of an old Mahometan city with thirty
to forty thousand inhabitants, and a new Chinese city. ‘The water is
very bad and there is much goitre. Passing Khoten Col. Pievtsoff has
reached Nia, where he will winter, and then search for a route into
Tibet over the Taguz-Daban range, some of the peaks of which were
estimated by Prejevalsky at 22,000 to 23,000 feet.
A large portion of the November number of the Proceedings of the
Royal Geographical Society is occupied by the diary of the journey-
ings of David Linsday in the interior of Australia, which he crossed
from north to south, keeping within the boundaries of the colony of
South Australia somewhat to the west of Queensland. The account is
accompanied by a map of the route with the survey lines given.
There is also a glossary of native words.
Dr. Hagen traces the Malays to West Sumatra, and believes that the
present natives of the interior of the large islands (the Dyaks of Bor-
neo, etc.) were the first emigrants from the original site, and crushed
out the negritos in the countries occupied by them; This migration
was followed by others, the last emigration of the Malays taking place
about the twelfth to the fifteenth century. The purest Malay type is
to be seen in the Battas and Allas of Sumatra.
A series of articles by A. de Leanarde upon the country of the
Amur and the Ossory is completed in the Revue Geographique, of
January, 1890.
268 The American Naturalist. [March,
A recent issue of the Proceedings of the Royal Geographical So-
ciety, gives the heights of some of the principal summits of New
Guinea. Mount Victoria, ascended by Sir W. Macgregor on the
11th of June, 1889, is 13,121 feet hig; Mt. Albert Edward, 12,500 ;
Mt. Scratchley, 12,000; Mt. Knutsford, 11,157; Mt. Douglas, 11,-
796 ; Mt. Griffiths, 11,000; and Mts. MclIlwraith and Morehead, ten
to eleven thousand feet.
Europe.—Cyprus.—The British governor of Cyprus, Sir R. Bid- a
dulph, gives in the Proceedings of the Royal Geographical Society an ,
interesting account of that recent acquisition of the British Empire.
The peculiar form of the island is due to the existence of two ranges
of mountains ; the one long and narrow, hugging the northern shore a
at a distance of only about two miles, and the other broader and
shorter, placed somewhat to the westward of the former, and consider-
ably to the south. The space between these two ranges is occupied by
a broad fertile plain known as the Mesaorea, The northern range
terminates westward at Cape Kormakiti, and eastward at Cape San
Andrea. One of its highest peaks, Kornos, is 3105 feet, An abun-
dant stream, issuing at a height of 870 feet on the southern side, waters
the thriving village of Kythrea, and another, issuing on the northern
slope, waters the two flourishing villages of Lapithos and Caravas. The
southern range is not only more extensive than the northern, but its
summits are loftier. The eastern point of this range is the Mountain
of the Holy Cross, crowned by the monastery of Santa Croce, and
conspicuous from the harbor of Famagusta. This peak is less than
three thousand feet, but Mt. Machera to the westward is 4674; while
Mt. Adelphe, still further to the west, is 5305 feet, aud the culminating
point, Mt. Troonos, still more to the west, is 6406 feet. This extensive
mountain area, which in some places is more than twenty miles wide,
was once covered with forest, but the greater part of this has been cut
down, to the great detriment of the fertility of the island, so that most
of the woods now remaining are west of the summit of Mt. Troodos, in
the western and widest portion of the range. A few mouffion still exist
in the wildest parts of these mouutains, Most of the rivers flow only
after the rains. The largest are the Pediæus, which rises on the
northern slope of Mt. Machera, and passes by the capital, Nicosia, and
the Idalia, which has its sources on the eastern slopes of the same
mountain, Both of these fall into the sea near the ruins of the ancient
town of Salamis, and not far from Fa ta. Another stream, rising
on the slopes of Mt. Adelphe, enters the sea on the western shore,
near the populous village of Morrphou.
1890.] Geogarphy and Travel. 269
The chief causes of the disappearance of the forests are recent, and
are indiscriminate wood-cutting, and goats. The island has more goats
in proportion to population than any other part of Europe. It is also
cursed with a peculiar small species of locust, which a few years since
devastated the crops most fearfully, but has, during the last three or four
years, been very successfully and energetically fought. The population
of Cyprus under Venetian rule is said to have been two millions,
though one seems more probable. At the present time, though num-
bers have increased under British rule, there are not more than 186,-
ooo, one-fourth of whom are Mahometans. This island has always
been famous for its wines, for the sake of which Sultan Selim sent an
army against it, and after an heroic resistance, ceasing only when the
city of Famagusta had been sacked, and its brave defender Bragadino
flayed alive, succeeded in reducing it under Moslem sway. One mil-
lion six hundred thousand gallons of this wine are still made annually,
but in a most primitive fashion, and four-fifths of this is exported. The
whole of the land is divided into small holdings, of which there are 600,-
ooo in all, so that there are more than three to each individual. The
houses are, as a rule, built of sun-dried bricks. The capital, Nicosia,
has 12,000 inhabitants ; Larnaca, on the eastern coast, has 7,000 ; and
Limassol, the southern port, has 6,o00, The most interesting ruins are
those of three castles of the times of the crusaders, and the oldest com-
plete existing monastery is that of Santa Croce.
The Caucasus.—The Caucasus, with its peaks higher than the
Alps, and a glacier system to which that of the better known moun-
tains offers no comparison, is now the favored climbing-ground of
Alpinists. During 1889, five elevated passes were crossed by Messrs.
David Freshfield and Captain Powell. Among these, that of Saluinan-
Chiran is at an elevation of 13,622 feet; while two others attain
heights of 14,300 and 13,000 feet respectively. Mr. Herman Woolley
ascended Dych-tau (14,923); and the eastern peak of Misahirgi-tau
(16,100) ; while Vittorio and Erminio Sella climbed Elbruz and Mala-
tau (15,351; this was the first ascension) ; also, together with Messrs.
_D. Freshfield and Powell, the peak of Leila (13,300).
Arctic Regions.—According to Dr. W. Kukenthal and A, Watter,
the existing maps are in error regarding the two or three islands which
form King Charles’ Land. The latitude of these islands is 78.30 to
78.57 N., and the longitude 26.20 to 26.30 E. _ The east coast should
thus be set back about 11 minutes.
270 i The American Naturalist. [March
The geology of King Charles’ Land is allied to that of Spitzbergen.
In the land lakes there are many insects and crustacea, but the mam-
mals are only the usual ones of the arctic regions; bear, walrus, and
seal are plentiful. There are a few mosses, which form the only vege-
tation.
The Zoédlogist (Jan.) gives an account of the birds of Jan Mayen,
translated from a paper by Dr. Fischer, of Vienna. This island is
located in latitude 70.49 to 71.8 N., and longitude 7.26 to 8.44 west,
and is 600 miles due north of the Faroe Isles. In color and character
it much resembles Spitzbergen. At one part there are two volcanoes in
close proximity, and at the northern end rises the mountain of Beer-
enberg, 6870 feet in height. Plants are scarce, and though many
migrants visit the island, only sea-birds breed there regularly. Among
the birds are Falco candicans and F. peregrinus, Nyctea nivea, Erithacus
rubecula, Saxifraga ananthe, Turdus pilaris, and T. musicus, Motacilla
alba, Anthus aguaticus, and Linota hornemanni,—the latter a true Arctic
species. Many waders occur, and here is the most northern recorded
habitat of Rallus aquaticus. Many swimmers breed here, but only
Fulmarus glacialis stays here all the year.
Mr. Thoruddsen, who is himself a native of Iceland, has recently
devoted his time to the exploration of this still imperfectly known large
island. In 1889 he explored the region of Fiskivotn, a waste between
Hecla and Vatna Jokul, before for the most part unvisited. East and
north of Hecla he found a new obsidian district. Crossing the
Tunguaa, he visited the true crater lakes of Fiskivotn. In the district
between these lakes and the Vatna Jokul there is no plant life; the
entire area is covered with lava floods, with a large amount of volcanic
sand. Lake Thorisvatn in this region is the second largest lake in the
island. After a day’s journey in an utterly desolate district, M. Thor-
oddsen discovered the sources of the Tunguaa, and south of this, be-
tween three ranges of before unknown hills, he found a long and nar-
row lake. |
.
Miscellaneous.—No. 143 of the hes Gesell. f. Erdkunde
contains Dr. Polakowsky’s account of the Central American State of
Honduras, the first of a promised series upon these republics. This
republic, which has a population of 331,917, is loaded by a large debt
incurred on account of the inter-oceanic railway.
Mexico now has 4700 miles of railway, Brazil 6000, Peru 5000}
Chili 1630, the Argentine Republic 4700, and the smaller republics
-
1890.] Geology and Paleontology. 271
about 1500 miles, making a grand total of about 17,000 miles of rail-
roads in operation in South America.
Sir F. de Winton also states that the railway mileage of Australia
reaches 11,000.
GEOLOGY AND PALEONTOLOGY.
Seeley’s Researches on the Organization, Structure, and
Classification of the Fossil Reptilia. —The Royal Society of
Great Britain granted Prof. H. G. Seeley a sum to be expended in
prosecuting researches among the extinct Reptilia, and the results ob-
tained up to the present time are embodied in the memoirs now be-
fore us.
The first is on that ancient form, ‘both geologically and in the litera-
ture, the Proforosaurus spenert. From the upper Permian of Ger-
many, no form is more worthy of investigation, but the character of
the matrix is such as to render the elucidation of the characters of the
skeleton difficult. Dr. Seeley concludes that the genus Protorosaurus
has no affinity with any form of reptiles known to him. His figures
and descriptions add much to our knowledge of its characters, and, as
a result, its place appears to me to be nearer to other genera of Per-
mian age of Europe and South Africa. Accordingly I have (NATUR-
ALIST, October, 1889) placed it with them in the Theromora, to which
location its characters distinctly point.
The second paper describes that remarkable form Pariasaurus bom-
bidens Owen, from the Karoo Series of South Africa, which is of Per-
mian or Triassic age. The new investigation is based on a nearly
i perfect skeleton in the collection ‘of the British Museum, and the infor-
mation furnished elucidates the systematic position of the genus almost
easily Dr. Seeley ae that it belongs to the Theromora
‘‘Anomodontia ’’), and to a subdivision of that order which he calls
the Pareiasauria. The ies of this suborder are as follows (p.
292, Philos. Trans., 1889, p. 292): ‘‘ Occipital” condyle ‘‘ basioccipi-
tal; no temporal vacuities; no median bar to interclavicle.’’? He
saws that the ribs are single-headed, and attached to the diapophyses
n Protorosaurus speneri Von Meyer (1887). II. On Pariasaurus bombidens
ps (1888). III. On Theriodesmus phylarchus Seeley (1888). IV. On the E
Reptiles and their allies (1889). All from the Philosophical Transactions of the Roy
Society, 1887-9.
h of Diadectes, see Proc. Amer. Philos. Society, 1883, p. 635.
i g
272 The American Naturalist. [March,
only, and that intercentra are present. This reference by Dr. Seeley
is essentially final, the only question being the minor one of the
name of the suborder. In all important respects Pareiasaurus agrees
with the Diadectidae, hitherto known only from the Permian forma- .
tion of North America, and must be placed in the same sub-order. In
the American forms the temporal fossa is overroofed in the same man-
ner, and the ribs are single-headed. The articular face of the diapoph-
ysis is, however, prolonged downwards to the level of the centrum
in the Diadectidz, though it originates entirely from the neural arch.
Both types must be placed together in the suborder Cotylosau-
ria, a name which has priority over Pariasauria. To the same order
must be referred the genus Phanerosaurus Von Meyer, from the Per- °
mian of Saxony. In his studies of the relations of the intercentra to
the vertebree and the occipital condyle, Dr. Seeley has quite over-
looked my own conclusions, with which he agrees, which I published
in 18843 and 18864
The memoir on the Theromorous reptiles (‘“‘ Anomodontia’’) cov- ~
ers a wider range than those above mentioned, and concludes with
some general conclusions as to the systematic arrangement of the
order. Especially important is the description of the scapular arch in
Procolophon, which turns out to have a well-developed coracoid and
separate epicoracoid, which, with the clavicle and interclavicle, give
the most monotrematous shoulder-girdle yet seen in the Theromora.
Other important contributions are the descriptions of limb-bones an
shoulder and pelvic girdles in Dicynodon, Hyorhynchus, Eurycarpus,
etc. There is more information as to the characters of the skeleton of
the South African Theromora to be found here than in any memoir yet , —
published. In the systematic, several new divisions are introduced. *
The first, the Procolophonina, may turn out to be included in Baur’s
Proganosauria ; but it is manifestly as well distinguished from the Pely-
cosauria, Cotylosauria, Anomodontia, and Placodontia as these are from
each other. For the entire order Dr. Seeley uses the name Anomo-
dontia, which we think should be restricted to the group to which Pro-
en originally gave it, viz.: the Dicynodontia of Seeley.
The Gennetotheria (Seeley) do not seem to me to be distinguished
m the Theriodonta of Owen, with which the Pelycosauria is more or
3 AMERICAN NATURALIST, p. 37, On the Batrachia of the Permian period of N. —
America.
* Transac, aga Philosoph. Society, p. 243, On the Intercentrum of the Terres-
trial Vertebra
1890.] Geology and Paleontology. X 273
less coéxtensive, especially after the removal from them of the Coty-
losauria.
The affinity to the Mammalia which Professor Owen saw in the hu-
merus, and which I have pointed out in the skull, shoulder-girdle, fore-
limbs, and hind-limbs and foot, is confirmed by Seeley’s researches.
He finds a fore-limb and foot of what he believes to be a veritable
mammal inthe same beds of the Cape, which is the subject of his
third memoir, and which he refers to a species and genus under the
name of Zheriodesmus phylarchus. The probability of this determina-
tion being correct appears to me to be strong. The humero-cubital
articulation is mammalian, and there is nothing in the pes forbidding
the association. Dr. Bardeleben thinks that it has a prepollex with
metacarpal and phalange. On this interpretation there is one large
os centrale.
We are gratified to learn that Dr. Seeley has accepted the position
of Director of the Geological Survey of the Cape, and we feel sure
that important discoveries await him there in his chosen field.
E: D
Cope.
Devonián.—The Geological Magazine for January has some pretty
full notes by Dr. R. H. Traquair upon some Devonian fishes from
Scaumenac Bay and Campbelltown, now contained in the Edinburgh
Museum. Most of the species have been described by Professor Whit-
eaves, but these notes give much information upon the Ctenodontide,
Cephalaspide, Acanthodide, Holoptychide, Pleurichthiidz, Paleon-
iscidze, etc. '
Mesozoic.—S. Nitchin gives an account of the Jurassic beds of
the Himalayas and Middle Asia. The principal development of the
Jurassic in the Himalayas is on the north-east slopes of the south-
ern crystalline chain near Spiti and Niti, where dark crumbling shales
known as the Spiti shales rest on beds said to be Lias and Rhætic.
Phosphatic concretions are abundant, and ammonites plentiful. Opin-
ions differ about the parallelism of the horizon, but it is generally
thought that these shales are of the age of the Kelloway and Oxford
clays. Nitchen thinks them more recent, and states that their fauna
approaches nearest to that of the Tithon and Kimmeridge. The fauna
of the Russian Jurassic is near that of Cutch.
Professor A. Pavloff believes that the Upper Jurassic of Russia is so
near that of England that a common classification might be adopted.
He describes as new three species of Cleostephanus, viz., C. baki,
swindonensis and stenomphalus.
274 The American Naturalist. [March,
M. G. Cotteau, after having described the Cretaceous echini of
France, has now commenced with those of Spain. In Vol. VII., No.
I., of the Ann. de Sci. Nat., he treats of those collected in Oregon by
M. Maur. Gourdon. ‘The Species are in great part identical with
those previously described from French rocks. A
plete rhe Te ee ee nie Nie eee he TSI: a
Tertiary.—The Revue Géographique for January contains an ac- i
count of the defile of the Danube by Attila de Gerundo. The writer
believes that. parts of this defile, which is 143 kilometres in length,
were ancient valleys, and that a series of dislocations, the localities of :
which are marked by cliffs, at length opened a passage of communica- =
tion between the Hungarian Sea and the Roumanian Bay of that
larger inland sea of which the Black Sea isa remnant. Through this
strait the waters of the sea poured, silting up the Roumanian Bay,
until, when the outer sea retreated, the current swept the strait clear of
sediment, and the Hungarian Sea ceased to exist, being replaced. by
the river network that at present exists,
A new edition of Dr. Burmeister’s work upon the fossil Mammalia |
of the Argentine Republic, with considerable additions, has been a
recently issued. The Equidæ differ from all other Pampean ungulates in a
having the premolars longer than the true molars. Dr. Burmeister places o
the more generalized species of fossil horses in the genus Hippidium,
which is distinguished from the modern Equus by the shorter and more í
curved crowns of the cheek teeth, which are of more simple general
structure. The shape of the narial apertures also differs from that of
the existing horses, the limbs are shorter, and the limb-bones stouter.
In its teeth Hippidium approaches Hipparion, but the anterior pillar
of the cheek teeth is connected with the anterior crescent, which is
not the case with the latter genus. The Pliocene Æguus stenonis of
Europe forms a connecting link between Hippidium and Equus.
Additional remains of Z. curvidens, E. argentinus, and E. andium are
described, also a new Hippidium from Tarija in Bolivia. An entire
skull of Megatherium americanum shows that our previous knowledge
of the osteology of that animal was incomplete. In front of the short
nasals this skull exhibits a large prenasal reaching almost to the pre-
maxillaries, and there is also, projecting from the upper part of the
maxillary, a lateral process coming forward into the nasal aper-
ture. Probably the prenasal became united to the nasal in the —
adult. Another ossification extends upwards and backwards from the
of the premaxillary towards the prenasal. These two ossifications —
are the remains of th plete bony arch exhibited by Mylodon darwini, —
-
Wore
1890.] Geology and Paleontology. 275
which has been on this account generically separated under the name
of Gryptotherium. Dr. Burmeister maintains the distinctness of
Mastodon andium from M. huméboldt, the latter attaining a larger size,
and having more complex teeth; moreover, the dentine in the first
species is always red, while in the second it is white. Remains of
Macrauchenia patachonica and M. paranensis are also described. From
the muscular impressions still remaining on the skull it is inferred that
the nose was produced into a short proboscis, as in the existing tapir.
According to Dr. Roth’s recent description of the structure of the
pampean deposits, they contain in different proportions river, wind,
lagoon, and coast beds. The coast deposits contain sand and marine
shells ; the lagoon beds are darker in color, and are much inferior in
extent and thickness; while the river deposits, which contain large
pebbles near’to the mountains, become gradually finer as they recede
from them. The beds formed by the few streams rising in the
pampas themselves have round, smooth’limestone concretions, as well
as smooth fragments of bone. The zolic layers have vertical root-
like tubes and irregular limestone concretions. The uniform character
of the pampas loess does not, therefore, arise from its uniform origin,
but from its long subjection to identical influences, to its transforma-
tion under the growth and decay of vegetation, and to wind and rain.
Water carrying down and packing loose matter often makes the loess
of the lower parts harder than that of the higher. In Entre Rios Dr.
Roth observed that marine beds, probably of Miocene age, were lying
over the typical Pampean, whence he concludes that the formation of
the pampas loess commenced in Eocene times, grew in intensity in
the diluvial, and is continuing at the present time.
In the Geological Magazine for January Mr. H. H Howorth puts
forward the theory that in the mammoth age the great Siberian rivers
flowed southward into the central lake-sea.
276 The American Naturalist. [March,
BOTANY.
Memoirs of the Torrey Botanical Club.—Nearly a year ago
the first number of the Memoirs appeared containing Professor Bailey’s
Studies of Carex. In August following, the second number was
issued, containing the Marine Algæ of the New Jersey Coast and
adjacent waters of Staten Island, by Isaac C. Martindale. The list is
an annotated one, and is based on notes and collections made by the
author during a period of twenty years. It embraces 91 genera, 183
species, and 41 varieties,
The third number of the Memoirs reached subscribers late in Jan-
uary. It is devoted to an account, by Richard Spruce, of a collection
of the Hepatic, collected by Dr. H. H. Rusby on the Eastern slope
of the Bolivian Andes in 1885~6. The paper bears the title ‘‘ Hepa-
tice Bolivian, in Andibus Bolivie orientalis, Annis 1885-6, a cl.
H. H. Rusby, lectz.’’ Twenty-two genera, and 97 species are noted ;
of the latter no less than twenty-five are here described for the first
time.
The Missouri Botanical Garden.—The first annual report of
the director, Dr. William Trelease, sets forth the objects contemplated
and provided for in the will of Mr, Shaw, the founder of the garden.
They are briefly as follows:
1, To continue the ornamental features of the garden
2. To-add to its botanical usefulness by additions ie the growing
plants.
3. To provide for a system of correct labeling.
4. To provide fire-proof quarters for the Engelmann benat
and also for additions to the general herbarium.
5. To improve and enlarge the botanical library.
6. To secure a botanical museum.
7. To assist in the pi alga of the flora of North America, by
the publication of monograp
8. To ultimately provide Pas research in vegetable histology, physi-
ology and pathology.
g. To make the garden useful for horticultural instruction.
to, To take steps looking to the early appointment of six ‘‘ garden
pupils.”
1890.] Botany. 277
11. Eventually to appoint ‘‘associates’’ to the director, who are
to be specialists in some department of Botany.
From surveys made it appears that in the garden proper there are
9.4 acres; in the Arb-retum, 20.5; in the Fruticetum, 8 ; O egeta-
ble Garden, 3.5 ; Grove, 0.6; Lawn, 2.7; making in All 44.7 acres.
We may hope to see, in time, an American Kew at St. Louis.—
CHARLES E. BESSEY.
Ellis’ ‘“ North American Fungi.’’—About the middle of Feb-
ruary centuries XXIV. and XXV. of this great distribution of the
Fungi of North America were distributed to subscribers. It is needless
to speak of the fine specimens, or of the neatness with which the
mechanical work has been done, for these are already well known to
most readers of the NATURALIST.
Century XXIV. contains a few Basidiomycetes (about twenty pieces),
the remainder being mostly Ascomycetes. Among the latter is an
interesting new species, Plowrightia symphoricarpi, occurring on Sym-
phoricarpus occidentalis in Montana. Botanists will recognize in this
a congener of the familiar Black Knob of the plum.
Century XXV. contains about twenty-five Urdinee and Ustilaginez.
Among the latter are the interesting Ustilago andropogonis of Kellerman
- and Swingle, and the apparently related Sorosporium ellisii of Winter,
both infesting the inflorescence of Andropogon provincialis. A dozen
fine specimens of Slime Moulds (in boxes) closes this vnluable century.
—CHARLEs E. BESSEY.
Seymour and Earle’s Economic Fungi.—During the month
of January, the first foretaste of a new distribution of the fungi made
its appearance. ‘‘The object of this series,’’ the authors say in their
announcements, “‘ is chiefly to supply a set of authentic specimens to
illustrate the diseases of useful and noxious plants, for the use of Agri-
cultural Experiment Stations, and persons interested in the subject from
a practical standpoint.” The specimens before us (Nos. 1 to 50) indi-
cate that the authors have done this work well and wisely. Six
species affecting Vitaceze, and twenty-eight upon Rosacez, are presented.
Of the latter six species affect the Blackberry (Rubus villosus).
No station can afford to do without this set, especially when its
moderate price of $3.00 per fascicle of fifty specimens is considered.
‘We trust that the authors may meet with encouragement to warrant
them in continuing their work.—Cuas. E. BEssEy.
f
( è
278 The American Naturalist. [March, ~
h
The New Gray’s Manual.—It is a significant thing that in
` bringing out a new edition of the familiar Manual of Botany of the
Northern United States, by Asa Gray,. the revisers found it necessary
to extend its geographical limits westward to the rooth meridian, that
is, to the middle of the Great Plains. ‘‘ The rapid increase of popu-
lation west of the Mississippi River and the growing need of a manual
covering the flora of that section, have seemed a sufficient reason for
the extension of the limits of the work westward.” This action will
relieve the teaching of elementary botany, in the west, of many of its
embarrassments. Those who nave not tried it, can have little concep-
tion of the difficulties encountered by college and high-school teachers
in attempting to give to their pupils a knowledge of the local organic
flora in the region lying between the Mississippi River and the Rocky
Mountains.
By a hasty calculation it appears that the region covered by the
Manual has been increased about 70 per cent. The species described ©
have been increased by about 40 per cent.; however this is in part by
the addition of the Hepaticz (141 species), and a number of immi-
grants not included in the earlier addition. Probably the westward
extension of the Manual has given it from 30 to 33 per cent. more
species. The total number now described is 3298, of which 405 are
said to be introduced.
It is interesting to note where this increase takes place. It appears
that the Polypetala have gave gained 46 per cent. (289 species), the
Gamopetalz 36 per cent. (271 species), the Apetalz 64 per cent. (121
species), the Monocotyledons 17 per cent. (11 5 species). In this increase
certain orders stand out prominently ; for example: the Leguminosz
are increased from 98 to 156, the Rosacee from 72 to 95, the Com-
posita from 288 to 407, the Graminex from 168 to 250, The Gym-
nosperms are increased by one only (Pinus ponderosa Douge, var., scopu-
lorum Engelm. in Nebraska), ‘while through rigid revision the Cype-
racez actually number two less than in the old edition.
In glancing through the book one meets many new plants which
will have an unfamiliar look to the eastern local botanist. We found,
for example, Argemone platyceras, Cleome integrifolia, Viola nuttalht*
Prunus demissa, Mentzelia ornata, Cucurbita Jætidissima, Adoxa mos-
chatellina, Grindelia squarrosa, Aplopappus spinulosus, Eustoma russel-
lianum, Solanum rostratum, Pentstemon cobæa, Amarantus blitoides,
Lleagnus argentea, Andropogon hallii, Buchloé dactyloides, Munroa
squarrosa, etc., etc,
1890.] Zoology. 279
There is a marked spirit of conservatism dominating every part of
the work. We look in vain for any recognition of the somewhat radi-
cal notions which have of late arisen in some quarters, The time-
honored arrangement of orders, the time-honored genera, the time-
honored rules as to capitalization, punctuation, and citation of authori-
ties, are strictly adhered to. e Gymnosperms are still wedged in
between monocotyledons and dicotyledons; Carya is Carya still, and
not Hicoria; Nymphea is Nympheea still, and not Castalia; and even
in so plain a matter as the spelling of Pirus, we have Pyrus, as in the
older editions. All this, and much more like it, implies that for many
years still the young botanists of America are to be made familiar with
the older and quite conservative views of classification and arrange-
ment. We had hoped for’something different. Meanwhile we are
glad to get the book, for it was much needed.—CHARLES E. BESSEY.
ZOOLOGY.
Zoological News.—General.—The Verhandlungen der Gesell-
© schaft für Erdkunde (Berlin), contains an account of the biological
results of the Plankton Expedition of the summer of 1889, by Prof. K.
Brandt, and of the voyage itself, by Dr. Krummer. The trip seems to
have been confined to the Atlantic, and returned to Kiel on November
7, after an absence of 115 days, and arun of 15,600 miles. The ex-
perience of the expedition was that the ocean, even in the tropics, was
poorer in life than the North Sea and Baltic.
Protozoa.—The last report in Vol. XXXII. is by Ernst Haeckel,
and concerns the curious group of organisms known as the Physemaria.
- These Haeckel pronounces to be sponges of affinities to the Keratosa,
but modified by symbiosis with a commensal which is in most, if not in
all cases, a hydro-polyp stock. Four families and eleven genera are
described. In the Stannomidz, examples of which were dredged at
depths of from 2,425 to 2,925 fathoms, there is present a fibrillar
Am. Nat.—March.—5. :
na
280 The American Naturalist. [March
spongin skeleton of thin, simple or branched spongin fibrillz, not an-
astomizing nor reticulated, together with the usual symbiotic hydroids.
Prof. Haeckel believes that these fibrils throw light upon the peculiar
filaments of the Hircinide. They are monaxial keratose spicules.
This report occupies ninety-two pages, and is illustrated by eight plates.
Ccelenterata.—The last volume of the Challenger Zodlogical
Reports, Vols. XXXI. and XXXII., have lately been issued. The first
of these contains the important report upon the Alcyonaria, by Messrs.
Wright and Studer, and the comparatively short account of the pelagic
fishes, by Dr. A. Gunther. Of the 189 species of Alcyonarians found
by the expedition, 133 are here described as new. From the chapter
upon geographical distribution, it appears that the West Indian Isles,
the western shores of North America, and the Australian and Japanese
seas, are the headquarters of this group. The report occupies 386-
pages and is illustrated by 49 plates.
The first report in Vol. XXXII. is by G. Brook, and treats of the
little known group of the Antipatharia. As most of the specimens of
Antipathes preserved in museums are in a dry and shriveled condition,
good diagnoses of the species are rare. Fortunately most of the Chal-
lenger examples had the polyps well preserved, and, therefore, a partial
revision of the tribe has been attempted, and the classification put upon
a correct natural basis. Nearly all the species are new, and are mostly
from localities whence no forms were before known. Littoral forms
are remarkably deficient. Besides the species found by the Chal-
lenger, other new forms already in the British Museum are described.
The report contains the first detailed outlines of the structure of the
group yet given. The structure of the genera is described, and the forms
of the zooids, as well as the number and proportion of the mesenteries,
are detailed. Four of the species occurred between 2,000 and 3,000
fathoms. The Antipatharia approach the Cerianthide more than the
Hexactiniz in the arrangement of the mesenteries, and in the relatively
thin mesoglea, devoid of stellate connective tissue cells, the rudimentary
musculature of the mesenteries, etc. This report has 222 pages, an
15 plates,
Echinodermata.—J. Georg (Archiv für Naturgeschichte, Sept.,
1889), gives reasons for the belief that the echini excavate their holes
in the rocks not by any chemical solvent, but by their teeth, As they
enter young, the bottom of the hole is larger than the entrance, and
thus the tenants are prisoners, ‘dependent for food upon such forms of
life as are brought by the currents, such as foraminifera, etc. Though
1890.] Zoology. a 3m
the spines are not the prime agents in the excavating process, they aid
the teeth by their rotary motion. It has been surmised by some that
marine alge, by their chemical action upon limestone, aid the urchins
in the boring of their holes, but it cannot be found that alge exert any
such chemical influence, and urchins bore into sandstones, granite and
lava as well as into limestones, so that there is no relation between
alge and urchin-holes. The principal object of the toothed urchins in
thus excaVating seems to be to find shelter from the violence of the
waves. (See Fewkes, NATURALIST, Jan., 1890).
Mollusca : Annelida.—The Polyzoa collected in Japan by Dr. L.
Döderlein are described in the Archiv fir Naturgeschichte, of Decem”
ber, 1889, by Dr. A. Ortman, and the memoir is illustrated by four
double plates.
Nos. 5 and 6 of the Annals of Natural Sciences (Zoöl., Vol. VII.),
are occupied by M. Louis Roule’s studies upon the development of the
Annelida, and especially of Euchytroedes marioni, a new species of
limicolous oligochoete. His results are somewhat startling, inasmuch as
they induce him to place the mollusks and the annelids in the same
group, called by him Trochozoaires. In both groups the ccelom is not
a true enteroccele, since it is not derived from the archenteric diver-
ticular, but ‘is hollowed out, without direct relation with the archen-
teron, in the mass of cells that are produced by the initial mesoblastic
segmentation. Moreover, both groups, as is sufficiently well-known,
have similar larvae, Trochospheres or Trochozoa. The chief difference
is the polymerism of the one group and the monomerism of the other.
An immense squid, the long arms of which, although shrunk,
measured 30 feet in length, and the body and short arms of which
were 60 feet in circumference, was stranded in November last upon
Achill Island, off the west coast of Mayo, Ireland. Some of the short
arms measured four feet in circumference.
Arthropoda.—lIn the first and second numbers of the Annals and
Magazine of Natural History, for 1889, M. E. L. Bouvier describes the
nervous system of decapodous crustaceans, and the relations of that
system to the circulatory system, giving particular attention to the
Anomoura. The Caridide have an abdominal chain of six pairs of
ganglia. In the Palinuride these pairs are completely fused trans-
versely, but in the Astacide are less so. In the Galatheidz there are.
still the same number of abdominal ganglia, but they are more concen-
trated longitudinally, and less so transversely. In the Paguride the
longitudinal concentration increases, while the transverse union is
282 The American Naturalist. [March,
more remote than in the Galatheide. The Porcellanidz, short
though is their abdomen, have still five pairs of abdominal ganglia,
‘while the Brachyura have the abdominal chain fused.
Dr. Walker and Dr. F. B. Mason enumerate nearly roo species of
insects in Iceland, about thirty of which are Coleoptera.
It is rather curious that not a single species of Lepidoptera has so far
been discovered there. No Lepidoptera have as yet been-seen upon
Pitcairn’s Island. ©
Ernst Lehrman (Archiv für Naturgeschichte, Sept., 1889), gives notes
upon the anatomical structure of the Pentastomide. He treats of the
body-covering, which is usually a chitinous skin, of the connective
tissue, which is extraordinarily developed, of the musculature, of
the nerve and sense organs, and also of those of digestion and sex.
Fishes.—It is not generally known that any of the Balistidæ have
the power of producing sound. Prof. Moebius, however, has noted
this peculiarity in Balistes aculeatus, and has recently described before
the Berlin Physiological Society what he believes to be the apparatus
producing it. During the drumming the skin between the clavicle
and hranchial arch vibrates, and the vibration seems to be caused by
the motions of the post-claviculare, which forms a lever with a long
and a short arm, the former of which is made to move by the action of
the ventral muscles of the trunk. The short arm is thus made to move —
with noise on the rough inner surface of the clavicle. The swim-
bladder, which lies very near, acts as a resonator.
There have lately been frequent reports of the presence of anchovies
at Torquay and other southern coast fishing places, and this has been
capped by the notice that they have also been found in Moray Frith. |
Birds.—Many new species of birds from New Guinea and the
Moluccas have been described by Hunstein Forbes and Woodford,
during the last seven years, and thus the supplement to Salvadori’s
Accipitres, Psittaci, and Picarize of these regions contains twelve new
species of the first group, fourteen of the second, and nine of the
third.
Mr. F. E.Beddard has, in a recent issue of the Proceedings of the
—Zodlogical Society, discoursed upon the structure of the Hornbills,
especially that of the syrinx, and the muscular anatomy.
W. H. Hudson, in his Argentine Ornithology, gives an account of =
the manner in which Polydorus tharus singles out the white egret from
i ae he
$
PEIN
ie ee
Pee
$ y Š z z
E > aey i i Wee a: Pope tee i J
A SERE as Ed R ae ari ayo tee SE i
E EEIE EEE ETEN e eee ee EET E wee War a S E EE a e T r OESE O a a AA ae EE o ne EE ANR E TSI N, Ji
E ee EE ow Sem, ee ee
Oe es eg rca Ee a Sea ae ae er
.
iwá i Zoölogy. 283
among a crowd of other birds, apparently for no other reason than
because of its shining white plumage, and*he asks, how has it been
possible for the twə white species.of South American heron to escape
their enemies and continue to exist ?
Mammals.—Nature (Nov. 7) states that about 1829 some indi-
viduals of the buffalo (Bos bubalus) were landed at Port Essington, and
that at the present time the increase of these specimens has resulted in
the existence of immense herds in certain parts of North Australia.
The columns of JVature have recently contained quite a controversy
upon the discovery of the existence of true teeth in the jaw of the young
Ornithorhynchus.. This discovery is claimed by Mr. Poulton, and the
structure of the teeth has been described by Mr. Oldfield Thomas.
The reference to the teeth of both the young and the adult Duck-bill
in the works of Sir Everard Home is asserted to have been solely to the
horny plates which eventually take the place of the true teeth, and to
the changes that take place in them.
The last volume issued by the venerable cetologist, P. J. Van
Beneden, restricts the number of European Cetacea to twenty-six, of
which seven are whalebone whales, and five ziphioids.
In the Quarterly Journal of the Microscopical Society A. W. Hu-
brecht gives the results of his studies upon the placentation of the
hedgehog. The phenomena of placentation are more complex than in
the ungulates, and lead up directly to those exhibited by the primates `
and man. But as the Insectivora are now pretty generally regarded as.
the most primitive of the monadelphous mammals, this takes away the
importance of the division into Deciduata and Adeciduata. The Un-
gulata are certainly adeciduate, but among the Edentata some genera
are deciduate and others adeciduate: the lemurs are also non-deciduate.
284 The American Naturalist. [March,
PSYCHOLOGY.
The American Society for Psychical Research—Is a thing
of the past. It was disbanded as a separate organization when
its fifth and last annual meeting was held in the lecture room of the
Boston Society of Natural History, and it became a branch of the
English society. Prof. William James presided at the meeting,
which was attended by about 200 members and associate members and
their friends, Secretary Hodgson read the records of the last meeting,
the certificate of the auditors that the financial statement for the year
ending in 1889 was correct, and the report of the treasurer for the year
just closed. By the latter it appeared that the receipts were $3898, the
expenses $3542, and the balance on hand $356. Mr. W. L. Parker
and Dr. Morton Prince were appointed to audit this account.
Dr. E. G. Gardiner was then called upon by the president to give
the views of the council of administration in regard to a proposition
that the American society become a branch of the English organiza-
tion. He said that the council found, some time ago, that the society
was not receiving a sufficient amount of funds to properly carry on its
work of psychical research. The members were asked if they would
submit to an increase in their dues; but few of them agreed to this,
and though a number of donations were received from friends, their
sum was not large enough for the needs of ‘the society, At this
juncture the council communicated with the English society, which
offered to form a branch in this country, of which any member or asso-
ciate member of the American organization might become a member
on the payment of annual dues amounting to $3. The English
members are required to pay $5 per annum, but these in this country
would have all the privileges of those in England, except that of voting,
and would get copies of all the publications of the society, including
the monthly journal and the annual proceedings. It was the desire of
English society to retain the American secretary, and it had guaranteed
his salary for one year, but it would have to receive financial aid from
America to continue employing him after the expiration of that time.
Three American vice-presidents—Prof. S. P. Langley of the Smith-
sonian Institute, Prof. William James of Cambridge, and Prof. H. P.
Bowditch of the Harvard Medical School—have already been elected,
and they would form an advisory board for this country.
Dr. Gardiner said there seemed to be no choice but to disband, for
the society did not have the money to go on. It would cost less to
maintain a branch of the English society than it would to support a
ge a p
Ra A ee raas AA E T a EN
5 i aoai
PO wre a TN
1890.] Psychology. 285
separate organization, The English society thought it could carry on
psychical work in this country, where the American society had failed,
and he moved that the latter be abandoned and be made a branch of
the English organization.
Mr. Samuel H. Scudder spoke in favor of the proposition, seconding
Dr. Gardiner’s motion, as did also Prof. James, who briefly reviewed
the history of the society. He said he had little hope of its success
from the start, for few joined it who had -given special attention to
psychical research, although many of the members occupied prominent
positions in other branches of science. So the work had been done
almost entirely by the secretary. There had been a formal organiza-
tion, with but few workers to back it up, and the organization had
been a hindrance, rather than a help, to investigators, who could
accomplish more if they were responsible directly to the English
society.
The question was then put to vote, and it was carried unanimously.
Only nine votes were cast, however, as that was the number of active
members, who alone are entitled to vote, present at the meeting. The
secretary stated to a Herald man that there are 400 members of the
society, fully three-quarters of whom will become members of the
English society. i
he meeting was continued as a session of the new organization,
+Prof. James remaining in the chair as vice-president of the English
organization. He described his visit to the leaders of the English
society and the psychical congress in Paris last summer. He came
away, he said, with great respect for the work that is being done in
Europe, and he was struck with the respect in which it is held by all
classes of intelligent people there. He spoke of the international cen-
sus of hallucinations now in progress in England, France, Germany,
and America, which is under his charge in this country, and he dwelt,
at length, on some of the wonderful investigations that have been made
by M. Pierre Janet, of France, and others.
On the circulars calling the meeting it had been announced that
Secretary Hodgson would read a paper by Mr. Frank Podmore, of
the English Society for Psychical Research, on ‘* Phantasms of the
Dead,’’ but he stated that Mr. Podmore’s paper had not been received,
and instead, he read statements of some of the recent cases which he
collected. Among them were some truly weird and remarkable narra-
tives of dreams and presentiments, and several cases were given where
people had saved themselves from bodily harm by obeying unaccount-
able impulses.
286 The American Naturalist. [March,
ARCHAOLOGY AND ETHNOLOGY.
Prehistoric Occupation in Cambodia.—Shell-heaps in
Asia.—Polished Stone Implements in the National Museum.
—The principal river of Cambodia is the Me-Kong. Its source is far
up in the mountains of Thibet, where it has the name of Lam-Thsang-
Kiang. It traverses the Chinese province of Yum-Nan, and those ot
Laos and Cambodia, and enters the China Sea in the French province
of the latter name, in latitude 10 degrees north, longitude 106 degrees
and 40 minutes east. Its average width through Cambodia is 3,500 to
4,000 feet. In its lower portion it divides itself many times and forms
a network of navigable waters, and finally discharges itself through
eight mouths.
The present capital of the province is Phnom-Penh, situated on the
Me-Kong, about one hundred and seventy-five miles from its mouth. |
At the city of Phnom-Penh the river Me-Kong forks. It is the
western fork with which this account deals. The eastern branch is the
main river; the western branch is but a blind stream which, after the
fashion of a bayou, is fed from the main river. Its length is one
hundred and seventy-five miles, and it ends in an immense lake eighty
or ninety miles in length called Ton-le-Sap.
Each year the Me-Kong river, by reason of the melting of the snows
in the mountains of the central plateaux of Thibet, overflows and
inundates the lower country which it traverses. The level of the lake
Ton-le-Sap is about thirty-six feet lower than that of the Me-Kong
river at Phnom-Penh where the bayou joins the river. The period of
inundation is the months of July, August and September, and at their
beginning the waters from the river fill the bayou, run northward
through its length, and empty in and fill the lake. During the inun-
dation the water in the lake attains a depth of thirty-five or forty feet,
and, consequently, spreads over a vast extent of the country which
fore was uncovered. -On the termination of the flood and the sub-
sidence of the water in the river, the current in the bayou is reversed ;
it runs south, empties into the river, and so drains the lake. During
the dry period, which lasts six months of the year, Ton-le-Sap, instead
of being a great lake of water, is a plain of soft mud.
The action of the water in this river and lake is similar to that of
the Nile and the lake Moeris in Egypt. It is easy, with the illustration
of the Nile, to understand the operation, and also the quantity of
Eos
ohare
Se eee are ea Hee el Se sa RR ee ee,
1890.] Archeology and Ethnology. 287
alluvial soil which would be deposited each year in the lake Ton-le-Sap,
likewise the numerous changes made in the shores of the lake during
the ages this operation has been going on.
On the retreat of the waters, the shores of the lake and little islands
in it become dry. The people from the neighboring highlands come
down, occupy these spots, and there appear flourishing villages, which
are to last, however, only six months of the year, when they will be
submerged by the next year’s inundation, the inhabitants being driven |
to the highlands for safety.
The geographic and hydrographic details being understood, we may
now explain the prehistoric stations of the neighborhood. Not far
distant from the border of this great lake there have been found
numerous and vast Kjoekenmoeddings, or shell-heaps, many of which
have been excavated by the natives to obtain the material for fabrica-
tion of lime. It was from these shell-heaps that Mr. Jammes obtained
the stone implements which have lately come into the possession of the
National Museum. He discovered eighteen of these shell-heap
stations, and excavated some of them. They are covered by a stratum
of alluvial soil, the deposit of the floods. The depths or thicknesses
of the shell-heaps were from thirteen to twenty-nine feet. They were
composed of three layers quite distinct from each other, and each
bearing evidence of a different civilization and an occupation by a
different set of men. They were as follows, commencing at the top:
The first stratum had the least thickness. In it were instruments of
copper, though possibly some of bronze—hatchets, pins, bracelets, etc.
There were pieces of stone finely worked. The pottery was of the
most perfect form, and some of it was ornamented with the ordinary
designs of the bronze age.
In the second stratum were objects in stone mixed with those of the
bronze or copper, and this is considered to mark an epoch of transition
between the bronze age and the stone age which formed the lower
stratum.
This lower stratum was the deepest of the three, and here were found
the implements and pottery which belonged to the age of polished stone.
These shell-heaps have required a long period of time. Some of
them were distant more than fifty miles from the great lake, and it is
supposed that at their epoch they were on the borders of the lake thus
extended. In the lake of Ton-le-Sap are now found several species of
the same shells and mollusks as those of the prehistoric stations, but
the latter are thicker and heavier. It is certain from this and other
discoveries that the period of the polished stone age is very ancient
288 The American Naturalist. [March,
in Indo-China, possibly of higher antiquity than the same age in
Europe, though there has, as yet, been no synchronism established
between them. It is now more than 2,000 years since the Khmers, of
whom the Cambodians pretend to be the descendants, constructed
temples and palaces which were of sufficient dignity to have belonged
to the antiquity of Egypt. These are all in ruins, yet the voyager can
still see enough to show them in their gigantic and barbaric splendor,
The temple of Ang-Kor-What, of which Mr. Jammes has made an
attempt at restoration, is not less than 3,900 feet in the length of its
principal façade, by one hundred and sixty or one hundred and
seventy feet in height. It was built of cut stone and is ornamented
everywhere with superb sculptures and bas-reliefs. To-day these im-
posing ruins are invaded by a tropical vegetation that has covered and -
suffocated them in its embrace. On the ruined and fallen towers, or
in the earth about them, enormous trees now grow, and sometimes
portions of the wall, windows or doors are sustained and supported by
the roots of the great banian trees.
Anthropology demonstrates that the men of the epoch of polished
stone were the ancestors of’the constructors of the great temples in
the Orient, though they were then in full possession of iron, silver and
gold. ow many centuries of this rude civilization was required to
traverse the space between the polished stone age when these shell-
heaps were made, and in which its objects and implements were lost or
deposited, until the brilliant period of the temple of Ang-Kor-What ?
The anthropological side of this subject has not yet been studied.
We are in ignorance of the facts, and are without sufficient knowledge
to be able to even approximate this great progression. Mr. Jammes
found several skeletons in his excavations of these shell-heaps. He
calls the people the race of Som-rong-sen, after the name of the
principal shell-heap. The people of the race he remarked as being of
large proportion, great height, and vigor. Some of the skeletons
were, as he reports, more than two metres in height. What seemed
to astonish him more than anything else was the thickness of the skull,
which sometimes attained twelve millemetres in the occipital region.
The men of these shell-heaps buried their dead in their habitations.
The care that they took in the position of the skeletons is a slight
evidence of their belief in a future life. Near the ‘bodies were fre- -
quently placed various implements of their industry. Pieces of pottery
were found filled with the débris of food.
This civilization belongs to a prehistoric race, and corresponds with
a mixture of the polished stone and bronze ages in western Europe.
1890.] Proceedings of Scientific Societies. , 2
The objects found were some of them similar; others only analogous.
The polished stone hatchets, and similar implements, were the most
numerous. They were not nearly so well made nor so complete as
those from other countries. The material is usually a fine, hard, com-
pact and siliceous schist, sometimes yellow or gray, other times black,
frequently made of a pebble with remains of its original crust apparent.
Some of them would indicate a new method of handling, for they
have a straight stem or tang, as large square. as the thickness of the
hatchet, and which is cut down at the edges so as to make shoulders.
The tool most plenteous is the adze. Its sharpening is all done from
one side. Gouges are found, though not so common, ‘They are made
in the same way as were the adzes, except that the edge is polished.
Objects of shell are frequent; bracelets, rings, and beads are made of
this material. It also served for scrapers and cutting implements.
Objects of bronze were not found, but those of copper were,
Mr. Jammes is Director of the Royal School of Cambodia at Phnom-
Penh, and he displayed his collection at the International Congress of
Anthropology and Prehistoric Archeology held at Paris last summer.
4
PROCEEDINGS OF SCIENTIFIC SOCIETIES.
The American Geological Society.—At its late meeting in
New York, December 26-28, the following papers were presented
(Continued from the Natura.ist, February, 1890, page 212.):
On THE TERTIARY DEPOSITS OF THE CAPE FEAR RIVER REGION.
William B. Clark, Baltimore, Md.—The Eocene occupies small
detached basins within the Cretaceous, while the Miocene extends
widely over Eocene and Cretaceous alike.
Post-Cretaceous erosion left an irregular surface over which the older
Tertiary deposits were scattered. Post-Eocene erosion approximately
base-leveled this surface, leaving the early Tertiary sediments preserved
in the deeper Post-Cretaceous depressions. Upon this base-leveled
surface the Miocene strata were laid down.
An intermingling of numerous characteristic Cretaceous species
with Eocene forms was observed at several places ; likewise of Zxogyra
costata hiwt Miocene types. :
CRETACEOUS PLANTS FROM Martua’s Vineyarp. C. D. White,
Washington, D. C.—The topics treated in this paper are: Review of
290 The American Naturalist. [March,
4
opinions respecting the age of the Vineyard series; plants found at
various localities in that series; the Gay Head flora cretaceous ; its
distribution and affinities; mode of occurrence ; eastward extension of
the Middle Cretaceous ; origin of amber in the Vineyard. Illustrated.
THE GEOLOGY OF THE Crazy Mountains, Montana. J. E.
Wolff, Cambridge, Mass.—This paper describes the structure of these
mountains, which are composed of Cretaceous strata, horizontal or but
gently inclined, cut by numerous narrow vertical dikes and large
irregular masses, as well as great bulging intrusive sheets of laccolites,
which have been tilted with the strata. Brief descriptions are given of
the eruptive rocks and of the contact metamorphism produced by them.
THE CuBOIDES ZONE AND ITs Fauna. A Discussion oF METHODS
oF CorRELATION. H. S. Williams, Ithaca, N. Y.—In this paper, after
discussion of the principles of correlation, and after comparisons of
fauna of this zone in Europe and Asia, as well as in America, the
author comes to these conclusions :
That the fauna of the Tully limestone of New York is the represen-
tative of the fauna of the Cuboides zone of Europe homotaxially ; that
the relations of the two faunas may be best explained by the hypothesis
that the fauna of the Tully limestone is not a direct sequent of the
underlying Hamilton fauna alone, but in its characteristic species
shows evidence of community with European faunas to be explained
by migration.
A comparison of all the related faunas at present known leads to
the conclusion that the Cuboides and Tully faunas are not only homo-
taxial but relatively contemporaneous, the margin of difference in the
time of the existence of the two faunas probably not greater than the
period of existence of the Cuboides fauna in its typical localities in
Europe
THE INTERNAL RELATIONS AND TAXONOMY OF THE ARCHAAN OF
CENTRAL CANADA. Andrew C. Lawson, Ottawa, Canada.—Archean
comprises two great systems, Lower (Laurentian), composed of plu-
tonic igneous rocks; Upper, of indubitably normal surface rocks,
variously altered. Lower, irruptive through Upper and of younger
age, piercing tie latter, holding: detached fragments from its shattered
margin, and Conception of Archean
suggested by the facts : Its ideal simplicity ; ; complication’ ; combined
effect of plutonic irruptions and crust-crumbling forces. Geognosti-
cal equivalents of Laurentian elsewhere found to be eruptive,
bail
1890.] Proceedings of Scientific Societies. 291
THE CRYSTALLINE SCHISTS OF THE BLack Hilts or Dakota. C.
R. Van Hise, Madison, Wisconsin.—A review of the distribution of
the slates, schists, and granites is given as mapped by Newton. Cross
lamination, and the arrangement of pebbles in the conglomerates, show
that the real thickness of the slates is independent of their apparent
thickness as measured by cleavage. The largest area of crystalline
schist is a belt surrounding the granite mass in the southern part of
the pre-Cambrian area. It always strikes parallel to and dips away
from the granite. The structure is then here laccolitic. The granite,
by its contact and dynamic action, produced these crystalline schists.
The evidences of fragmental origin in clastic rocks is generally re-
tained when subject to pressure only, however great the pressure.
The evidences of fragmental origin in clastic rocks is rapidly obliter-
ated when they have been subject to dynamic action, Tlustrations :
The original detritus of the Black Hills mica-schist was feld sparand
quartz. By a decomposition of the former, producing mica and quartz,
and a breaking down of the larger particles of the latter by dynamic
action, coarse, even granular, completely crystalline mica schists have
been extensively produced. Different degrees of crystalline character
are seen in the field, and various stages of the change are traced out in
thin section, The paper then speaks of the age of the slates, schists,
and granites. r4
Some RESULTS OF ARCHEAN STUDIES. By Alexander Winchell,
Ann Arbor, Mich.—This memoir is a condensed statement of observa-
tions made by the author in northern Minnesota and contiguous
regions. With these are incorporated some records of other observers
in the same field. Being simply a report of facts observed, the memoir
is calculated to stimulate inquiry rather than provoke discussion. The
field is thought to be one of such comparative simplicity of structure
as to promise a much easier solution of the Archean problem than
any of the complicated regions of New England and eastern Canada.
Several systems of rocks are enumerated in succession, distinguished
by structural relations, and lithological and mineralogical contrasts.
These are, in descending order: V. The uncrystalline schists (Anim-
ike): IV. The sub-crystalline schists (Kewatin of Lawson) ; III. The
crystalline schists (Vermilion of N.. H. Winchell); II. The gneissoid
rocks; I. The granitoid rocks (not fundamentally distinct from the
gneissoidy. The oldest four of these systems exhibit an unexpected
-stratigraphical conformity with each other, and a stratigraphical and
mineralogical intergradation, which seems to unite them in closer
.
292 The American Naturalist. [March,
historic continuity than could be admitted on the consideration of
their enormous volumes, their disparity of age, and their widely con-
trasted lithological facies. The fifth system is shown to lie in wide
structural discordance with the older ones, and to be in every respect
impossible of identification with the IVth system, with which Irving
confounded it under the designation ‘‘ Huronian.’’ The four oldest
systems are geographically and structurally distributed over a number
of oval or irregular areas, each revealing granitoid rocks in the centre,
and gneissoid rocks and crystalline schists in successive concentric
bands, with the subcrystalline schists filling the intervals between the
crystalline schists of neighboring areas. The granitoid and gneissoid
centres appear to have been protruded, and crowded mutually upon
each other, until the intervening subcrystalline strata have been thrown
into closely folded synclinal attitudes, These schists, consequently,
are vertical in position, and the crystalline schists and gneisses succeed
them in close parallelism. Toward the centre of each area, the
gneisses, even while maintaining their verticality, sustain anticlinal
relations to each other. But sometimes, in approaching the centre, a
dip towards the periphery supervenes, and this diminishes to horizon-
tality. The centre of the area is not always occupied by granitic
rocks. In some cases, they are strictly gneissoid. The state of the
facts may be easily comprehended by conceiving,all the systems origin-
ally in a horizontal position, and pasate) damm abe in the order
indicated—then an up-swelling in places, which, with shrinkage of the
terrestrial crust, would crowd the higher beds into interareal synclinal
-olds as we find them.
Thus, if we had only the geology of the Northwest to settle, the
Archean question would be simple. Older observations in more diffi-
cult regions have created questions of correlation which the canons of
science require us to answer. But these and other questions of a
speculative character are postponed to future occasions.
ORIGIN OF THE ROCK-PRESSURE OF NATURAL GAS IN THE TRENTON
LIMESTONE OF OHIO AND INDIANA. Edward Orton, Columbus, Ohio.
—In this paper the author defines the term rock-pressure: shows the
decrease in rate westward ; discusses theories of origin already offered :
presents facts supporting the theory of hydrostatic origin: offers con-
clusions respecting duration of gas-supply in Ohio.
On Por-HoLes Nortu or LAKE SUPERIOR UNCONNECTED WITH
Existinc Streams. Peter McKellar, Fort William, Ontario.—This
paper deals with some large and remarkable “ Kettles” or “ pot-holes’’
1890. ] Proceedings of Scientific Societies. 293
some distance back from the Lake, and at a considerable elevation
above the present level. They must have been produced by a very
swift current of large volume, yet there is no existing stream near
them. The direction of the torrent is examined. The well-marked
high terraces of the north shore of Lake Superior are considered in
this connection, also the lines of depression through the low water-
shed between Lake Superior and Hudson’s Bay.
ON THE PLEISTOCENE FLora OF Canapa. Sir William Dawson and
D. P. Penhallow, Montreal, Canada.—The Pleistocene deposits of
Canada were defined as consisting of three principal members.
First.—The Till or Lower Boulder Clay, containing local and trav-
eled stones and boulders, often glaciated and resting on glaciated sur-
faces. In the more maritime regions, e. g., the lower St. Lawrence, it
contains marine shells of arctic species. Further inland, e. g., in
Western Ontario and the plains west of Red River, it is not known to
hold marine remains.
Secondly.—Stratified clays and sandy clays which in the more mari-
time and lower regions are the “ Lower and Upper Leda Clays,’’ hold-
ing many maritime shells and drift plants, etc., indicating neighboring
land. In the interior they hold more abundant vegetable remains and
locally beds of peat, and also fresh-water shells. These beds have
been known as “ Interglaciz.”’ ;
Thirdly.—Sands, clays, and gravels, often stratified, sometimes con-
taining traveled boulders throughout ; in ther cases having boulders
below and above. These beds in the maritime region contain sea-
shells ; further inland they are unfossiliferous. They constitute a second
or newer boulder formation, and their traveled boulders are often of
large size, and found at greater elevations than that of the lower boul-
der clay.
Above these are alluvial deposits, lakes, terraces, gravels, and eskers-
prairie-silt, peat deposits, etc., which may be regarded as modern, or
post-glacial.
The plants referred to are contained principally in the second formal
tion, but when, as sometimes happens, this is absent, drift vegetable
fragments are found in the boulder clay.
The phenomena point to extensive changes of level and climate
going on throughout the pleistocene, in which, while the high lar ds
were occupied with snow and glaciers, and the submerged plains and
valleys were filled with floating ice, there were throughout, and espe-
cially in the central period, oases occupied with vegetation, in the
294 The American Naturalist. [March:
manner so well explained by Fielden as now occurring within the
Arctic circle.
The plants procured had in part been described and figured in papers
published by Sir W. Dawson in the Canadian Vaturaist. They con-
stitute a Cold, temperate, or boreal flora, composed of species still liv-
ing in the region of the Lawrence and its lakes, and northward. Pro-
fessor Penhallow has kindly undertaken to review the material previ-
ously described, and to examine a number of specimens recently ob-
tained, and presents a detailed list and notes of the forms described.
Boston Society of Natural History.—December 4, 1889, Dr.
R. T. Jackson discussed certain points in the development of the Mol-
lusca. Dr. J. Walter Fewkes described a remarkable instance of rock =
excavation by Sea-Urchins, |
_ December 18, Dr. Frederick Tuckerman read a paper on the ‘‘ Gus-
tatory Organs of Mammals.’’ Mr, S. H. Scudder made a few remarks
on fossil plant-lice. eoo
January 1, 1890, there was a discussion of ‘‘ The Climatic Condi- a
tions of the Glacial Period.” Eo
February 5th, Prof. F. W. Putnam spoke on “Early Man in :
America,” and brought forward some new evidence of the contempo-
raneity of man with the mastodon. Mr. S. H. Scudder made a few re-
marks on a small collection of beetles from the inter-glacial clays of
Scarboro’, Ontario. *
February 19th, Mr. Samuel Garman read a paper on “ Some Recent
Discoveries in Caves.” Prof. W. O. Crosby spoke on ‘‘A Large
Granite Bowlder in Madison, New Hampshire,” and on ‘‘ The Occur-
rence of Decomposed Granite in Blandford, Massachusetts. ”’
March sth, Prof. W. O. Crosby called attention to an ‘‘ Interesting
Occurrence of Decomposed Granite in Blandford, Massachusetts.”
Dr, J. Walter Fewkes read a paper on ‘‘ Some Raré Marine Animals :
from California.” —J. WALTER FEWKES, Secretary.
New York Academy of Sciences.—March 10, 1890, the fol-
lowing paper was read: ‘* On Geographical Variations in the Horned
Larks of North America,” by Jonathan Dwight, Jr.—H. CARRINGTON
BOLTON, Secretary.
Chicago Academy of Sciences.—March 11th, Maj. Gen. Geo. —
Crook, U.S. A., held a conversazione, Subject: “The Mode of ©
Warfare, Life, and Character of the American Indians.”"—C. E. WEB-
STER, Recorder. ;
1890.] Proceedings of Scientific Societies. 295
The Chicago Institute for Instruction in Letters, Morals
‘and Religion.—A course of lectures on the testimony of science to
evolution has been held in Rehearsal Hall, in the new Auditorium
Building, as follows :
November 22, Prof. E. W. Claypole, D. Sc., F. G. S., Akron, Ohio,
‘©The Development and Destiny of the Earth.”
December 6, Prof. T. J. Burrill, Ph. ee (University of Illinois),
« Lessons from Leaves, Flowers and Fruits.’
December 20, Pres. David Starr Jordan Mpayersity of Indiana),
“ Evolution and the Distribution of Animals.’
January 3, Prof. Alexander Winchell (University of Michigan),
‘<The Paleontological Evidences of Evolution.’’
January 17, Prof. W. K Brooks (Johns Hopkins University), ‘‘Em-
bryology and Evolution.’
February 7, Prof. Edward S. Morse (Director Peabody Academy ms
Science, Salem), ‘‘ Variation and Inheritance as Factors of Natural
Selection.” |
February 21, Prof. S. A. Forbes Seay of Illinois), ‘“ Ento-
' mological Illustrations of Evolution.’
March 7, Prof. E. D. peste (University of Pinus lvanie), «« Causes
and Agencies of Evolution.’
March 13, Prof. John Fiske (Cambridge, E « The Doctrine of
Evolution ; its scope and influence.’
Proceedings of the Natural Science Association of Staten
- Island.—December 12, 1889. Meeting called to order at 8.20
o’clock. A paper on the Carabide of Staten Island, by Mr. Charles
W. Leng, was read by the corresponding secretary.
The corresponding secretary read by title a paper by Mr. William
T. Davis, upon ‘the homestead graves of the island, which will be is-
sued as a special number of the proceedings.
Mr. Joseph Thompson showed Cecropia cocoons which had been
eaten by field mice.
© Mr. Arthur Hollick showed specimens of wheat in which the grains
had all sprouted while in the ear. The specimens were from stacks in
a field on the Vanderbilt farm at New Dorp. The grain in all the stacks
was in the same condition—due to the phenomenal wet season,
Adjourned at 9.45 0’clock.
February 13, 1890. Amongst the various communications read was
one froma prominent resident of the island, offering to donate half an
acre of land for the building. The secretary was not, however,
at.—March.—6.
296 The American Naturalist. [March,
authorized to make public the donor’s name. Attention was also called
to the ite favorable notices of the enterprise in the local papers and
elsewher
he old milestone, formerly standing at the junction of Signs Road
and Richmond Turnpike, was on exhibition, having been secured by
the association since the last meeting. This was supposed to be the
last one remaining on the old post route between New York and Phila-
delphia, or at least upon that portion of it which crossed Staten Island.
The stone is considerably the worse for wear, the upper part havirg
been chipped off, possibly for momentos, thus destroying part of the
inscription, which now reads:
Miles
to
N. YorkE
The figures denoting the distance were doubtless upon the part which
was chipped away. This old and interesting relic of bygone times has
been secured none too soon, and the association is to be congratulated
upon having secured and placed it where it will be safe from further
danger. In this connection Mr. Arthur Hollick stated that at some
future meeting it was expected that a paper upon the subject would be
presented, and then read the following brief abstract from Clute’s His-
tory of Staten Island :
‘ After Governer Tompkins had laid out and opened the Richmond
Turnpike stages ran regularly over the whole length of the new road,
in connection with steamboats from New York, and constituted part
of the route of travel between New York and Philadelphia. At the
western terminus of the Turnpike stages were carried over the sound
by means of large scows, and this ferry received the name of the
‘ New Blazing Star.’ ’
A mummified rat was shown, presented by Mr. Daniel Campbell.
The animal had contrived to force its way into an angle between a
beam and the cellar wall of a dwelling in New Brighton, and for some
reason had been unable to extricate itself. The remains were thor-
oughly dessicated and excellently preserved.
Mr. E. M. Eadie presented a large piece of drift rock from Old
Place, probably Oriskany sandstone, containing Spirifer arrectus.
Biological Society of Washington.—October 19, 1889, the
following communications were read: Dr. C. Hart Merriam, “ w
scription of a new Spermophile from the Painted Desert, Anes) ”
Mr. . Holm, “The Ancestors of Liriodendron tulipifera ;’’ Mr.
Theo. Gin, ** On the Dactylopteroidea.”’
1890.] Proceedings of Scientific Societies. 297
November 2, 1889, the following communications were read: Prof.
C. V. Riley, ‘‘ The Remarkable Increase of Vedolia cardinalis in Cali-
fornia ; ° Mr. W. H. Dall, ‘‘ Notes on the Genus Gemma Deshayes ; ”’
Dr. George Marx, ‘‘ On a new Spider and its Influence on Classifica-
ion;’’ Dr. C. Hart Merriam, ‘‘ Remarks on me Spotted Skunks
(Genus Spilogale) with Descriptions of New Forms.’
November 30, 1889, the following communications were read: Dr.
Theobald Smith, ‘‘ Preliminary Observations on the Micro-organisms
of Texas Fever;’’ Dr. D. E. Salmon, ‘‘ General Remarks on Texas
Fever, illustrated by Lantern Slides ;’’ Mr. C. D. Walcott, ‘ Descrip-
tion of a New Genus and Species of Inarticulate Brachiopod from the
Trenton Limestone ;’’ Dr, Frank Baker, ‘‘ An Undescribed Muscle
of the Infraclavicular Region in Man.”
December 14, 1889, the following communications were read: Dr.
C. Hart Merriam, ‘‘ Results of a Biological Survey of the San Francisco
Mountain Region in Arizona;’’ Mr. C. D. Walcott, “A New Genus
and Species of Ostracod Crustacean from the Lower Cambrian ;’’ Dr.
A. F. A. King, ‘‘On the Flight of Young Birds.”’
December 28, 1889, the following communications were read: Dr.
A. F. A. King, “ On the Flight of Young Birds;’’ Mr. M. B. Waite,
‘ On the Method by which the Seeds are Projected in Pia pumila ;”’
Dr, C. Hart Merriam, ‘“‘ A New Red-backed Moose (£vofomys) from
Colorado ;’’ Mr. Theodore Holm, ‘‘ Generic Characters of Graminee
and Cyferacee, taken from the Structure of the Leaves.’’
February 8, 1890, the following communications were read: Dr.
Frank Baker, ‘An Undescribed Muscle from the Infraclavicular
Region of Man;”’ Mr. C. D. Walcott, ‘ A New Genus and Species of
Ostracod Crustacean from the Lower Cambrian ;’’ Dr. Cooper Cur-
tice, ‘“ The Moultings of the Cattle Tick;”’ Prof. Lester F. Ward,
‘« The Flowers that Bloom in the Winter Time.”
March 8, 1890, the following communications were read: Mr. B. T.
Galloway, ‘‘ Notes on a Fungous Disease of the Apple: Mr. CG. L.
Hopkins, ‘‘ Animal Life Observed above Snow Line on Mt. a
‘ Notes upon the Timber and Timber Line of Mt. Shasta ;” Mr.
H. Dall, “ On Dynamic Influences in Evolution.’ —FREDERIC A. >
CAS, Secretary.
298 The American Naturalist. [March,
SCIENTIFIC NEWS.
A Review of the Charges Against the Paleontological
Department of the U. S. Geological Survey, and of the
Defence made by Prof. O. C. Marsh.
To the Editor of the Naruratisr:—‘‘I am glad that the —
matter has at last come out. It will clear the atmosphere.
The truth will be sifted out from the falsehood, and great
good will be accomplished.’ ‘This was the answer given by Prof,
H. F. Osborn, of Princeton, to a NY. Herald correspondent, when
asked for his opinion about the Cope-Marsh seabed I fully agree
with Prof. Osborn in these remarks.
I will now give a short review of the charges made against Professor
Marsh, and of his defence, based on an experience of nearly six years,
during which I was an assistant of Prof. Marsh, paid by the U. S.
Geological Survey.
1. In the New York Herald of January 12th, Prof. E. D. Cope, of the
University of Pennsylvania, stated, ‘‘ The collections made by Prof.
Marsh, as the vertebrate palzontologist of the Geological Survey, . - -
are all stored at Yale College, with no assured bis se as to what belongs
to the Government and what to the College.’
To this Professor Marsh replied that ‘‘ every specimen belonging
to the government is kept by itself, and no mixing with the Yale Mu-
seum collections is possible.’’ Prof. H. F. Osborn and Dr. O. Meyer
have sustained this fully, and I am glad to say that great care is taken _
at the Yale Museum in this regard. But this is irrelevant to the ques- _
tion raised by Prof. Cope, for, of course, the labeling is entirely in the
hands of Prof. Marsh, without any control from the Geological Survey.
In this connection there is one thing that I can not quite understand ; —
how it is that the splendid specimens of horned dinosaurs became the
property of Prof. Marsh, and not of the government. Can Prof. —
Marsh pay his collectors this month out of his own pocket, and the i
Tor out of the pocket of the government? 7
. The next statement made in the Ara/d is, that these collections —
_ ‘are locked away from the people, and no one is allowed to see them, ©
not even visiting scientists.” This Prof. Marsh admits is in part true.
He says, that ‘‘visiting scientists of good moral character are always
come,” Now I may mention, that : a scientist of ee 4 ‘good E
1890] Scientific News. 299
39
character,” well known in this country and in Europe, wanted to see
the material of the Dinocerata shortly after the volume on this order
had been published. When he arrived at New Haven he was told by
Prof. Marsh that he was very sorry not to be able to show him the
material, since it had been boxed up lately and was inaccessible. The
fact is, that the whole material was spread on a large table in the room
where the conversation took place. By the order of the professor the
fossils had been covered up with cloth the day before.
3. The next charge of Prof. Cope is, that the greater part of Prof.
Marsh’s published work has been done by his assistants. This is denied
by Prof. Marsh emphatically. As it is a very important question, I
shall try to solve it as far as Iam able to do. I can not speak of the
authorship of the work on the Odontornithes from personal knowledge,
but from all that I have heard at New Haven it is true that this memoir
is mainly the work of the late O. Harger. Mr. G. B. Grinnell, in a
letter written to Prof. Marsh and published in the Herald, stated that
Prof. Marsh dictated to him a part of the description and all the con-
clusions of the work. This is all true, but the question remains, /rom
whom did Prof. Marsh receive that which he dictated to Mr. Grinnell ?
I think it is now the proper place to speak a little more fully as to the
way of using his assistants adopted by Prof. Marsh. The fact is that a
great part of the descriptive and general part of most of Prof. Marsh’s
papers is the work of his assistants. Prof. Marsh asks them questions,
the answers of which he either immediately puts down in black and
white, or he makes out a list of questions to be worked out by his. as-
sistants, for instance: ‘‘ What are the principal characters of the skull
of the Sauropoda ?”’ or, ‘‘ What are the relations between the different
groups of Dinosaurs?’ and so on. ‘The assistant, if not yet fully
familiar with these questions, begins to work ; he goes over the whole
literature, a thing rarely done by the Professor, and studies the speci-
mens in the collection. After this is done, the Professor receives the
notes of the assistant, or he asks questions, writing down the answers
he receives. In this way he accumulates a great quantity of notes,
written in his own handwriting, or in that of the assistant. By com-
paring and using these notes it is easy for him to dictate a paper to
any person who can write. This person, of course, when asked, can
testify that the work was dictated by Prof. Marsh, without telling a
falsehood.
Since I have been named in connection with the work of the
Dinocerata, I may state here fully the nature of the assistance I rendered
in its preparation. On two Sundays I spent a number of hours at
300 The American Naturalist. [March,
Prof. Marsh’s house, to ‘‘go over his conclusions.’’ Questions were
- asked and answered, new points were brought up by me and adopted,
and when it came to the classification of Ungulata, I gave my opinion,
which was mainly based on Prof. Cope’s work, introducing small
changes only. I gave the classification with Prof. Cope’s names, as I
informed him; but these were all changed by Prof. Marsh. ‘There is
no doubt Prof. Marsh had never studied Prof. Cope’s papers on this
subject, since he not only did not know the names of the orders, but
he even asked how to spell them. That the descriptive part of the
Dinocerata was mainly the work of Mr. O. Harger, I know. He made
both descriptions and measurements of the different bones, which were
used by Prof. Marsh when he wrote his text, or dictated it. It may be
here a proper place to mention the language used by Prof. S. E.
Smith, of Yale University, in an obituary of Mr. Harger, his best friend.
“ His best work and highest attainments were in the department of
vertebrate paleontology. Remarkable logical powers, an unbiase
mind, and years of accurate observation, had given him a truly won-
derful knowledge of vertebrata osteology. Under his hand the broken
and disarranged bones of an unknown carpus or tarsus seemed to fall
into their proper places by magic. But his knowledge was not one of
details alone ; he had a truly philosophical grasp of the bearing of facts
on evolution and classification, and only the few who knew his attain-
ments can appreciate how much paleontological science would have been
advanced had he been able to publish his observations and conclusions.”
(Italics are mine.) I may mention here, that the statements of Dr. O.
Meyer in regard to the Batrachia and Mammals from the Jurassic, and
the oldest “ bird’’ Zaopteryx, are true.
Now let us consider some papers of Prof. Marsh which were doubt-
less written by himself. There is one on the Cretaceous Mammals. In
this paper several times over three or four genera are made out of three
or four teeth belonging to animals of one genus. Incisor, molar and
premolar teeth of the upper and lower jaw are considered to belong
to three or four different animals ; each representing a new genus.
The discovery of Cretaceous mammals in great numbers (only one
species was known before, which was found by Dr. J. L. Wortman,
Prof. Cope’s former assistant) of course was a very interesting fact,
and it is certainly this fact which induced Prof. Flower and Prof.
Gaudry to write complimentary letters to Prof. Marsh. But the latter
discovery is due entirely to Mr. J. B. Hatcher and Dr. C. E. Beecher.
The description given by Prof. Marsh of these fragmentary, but highly
interesting, fossils is simply ridiculous, and has been already criticised
ae
1890.] Scientific News. 301
-by Prof. Cope and Mr. Lydekker, of the British Museum. Among
other cases of the kind, I may mention only two, of one of which Dr.
O. Meyer has already written. In 1877 Prof. Marsh described a new
mammal under the name of Apatodon mirus, from the Jurassic of the
Rocky Mountains, with the following words: ‘‘ One of the most
interesting specimens hitherto found in the Rocky Mountain region, is
a portion of a lower jaw with the last molar in place. This fossil is
widely different from anything yet discribed, and its exact affinities
are doubtful. The fragment pertained to an animal about as large as
_a Tapir, and the general appearance of the specimen at once suggests
the mammalian type. The tooth most resembles, in form and superior
surface of crown, that of a typical suilline. The structure of the
tooth, however, is different, and: the fangs are, in part at least, coössi-
fied with the jaw.
‘ This specimen was found near a locality where Dinosaur bones
were abundant, and it is possible it may belong with that gronp. The
jaw, however, is very unlike any corresponding jaw of a Dinosaur, so
far as now known, The geological horizon is Lower Cretaceous or
Jurassic.’’ ‘ ;
This was certainly a most interesting discovery. A mammal as big as
a Tapir, from a Jurassic or Cretaceous formation, from which only very
small Marsupial-like mammals were known, a mammal with teeth like
a typical suilline from such an old formation, a mammal with the
teeth partially coossified with the jaws, is something startling new! I
had the greatest curiosity to see this specimen, and fortunately my cu-
riosity was gratified. The hog-jaw from the Cretaceous or Jurassic
was a weathered piece of a Dinosaurian vertebra, from the neural
spine, somesparts of which looked something like a tooth of a hog.
Prof. Marsh knew of this mistake long ago, but he has not found it
necessary to correct it. Only in his list of genera printed for private
use, this specimen appears as a genus of Dinosaurs.
Another example. In 1884 the palæontological world was aroused
by the highly important discovery by: Prof. Marsh of a Dinosaur
which was said to have the metatarsals united, just as a bird. The-
metatarsus of this reptile, called Ceratosaurus by Prof. Marsh, was
figured side by side with the corresponding bone of a penguin, and at
the end of the paper the following sentence occurs: ‘‘ All known
adult birds, living and extinct, with possibly the single exception of
archeopterx, have the tarsal bones firmly united, while all the Dino-
. sauria, except Ceratosaurus have these bones separable. This excep-
tion in each case brings the two classes near together at this point, and
302 The American Naturalist. [March,
their close affinity has now been clearly demonstrated.” Now a word-
about this great discovery, which has been already reported in text-
books and popular works. The specimen on which the conclusion
was based is pathological: The animal when alive had a fracture of
the lower part of the metatarsus, but it was happy enough to recover
from this accident. The bones codéssified, as it generally happens in
such cases, at the place where they were broken, but not at any other
place. From this pathological specimen Prof. Marsh trumpeted forth to
the world one of his greatest discoveries. Prof. Marsh knows very
well that this specimen is pathological, but he has never taken back
his blunder, notwithstanding that I discussed this matter at different
times with him,
4. Another accusation of Prof. Cope against Prof. Marsh is, that he
has plagiarized the work of ofhers. This is so well known among
scientists that it is hardly necessary to go into this point. But I may
give a few examples. Everybody. knows that Prof. Huxley’s lectures
on the evolution of the horse were written long before Prof. Marsh be-
gan to work on the subject. That Kowalevsky published two exten-
sive memoirs on the genealogy of the horse in the year before Marsh, is
also a fact.
Prof. Marsh states that he never saw Kowalevsky’s work before his
own was completed and partly published. This may be, but it hardly
agrees with the fact that one of Kowalevsky’s papers was published in
the greatest paleontological journal of to-day, in Prof. V. Zittel’s
Paleontographica, and the other one in the Memoirs of the St. Peters-
- burg Academy. Prof. Marsh’s invectives against Kowalevsky, the most
able paleontologist of Europe, a man admired by Darwin and Huxley,
who took his life in an attack of insanity, are outrageous. It shows
that Prof. Marsh is not afraid of any means he can use to defend his
. reputation.
n the same way Prof. Marsh has tried to plagiarize an important
discovery by Dr. T., W. Hulke, of London, a president of the Geological
Society of this city. Dr. Hulke published in 1875, in the Proceedings
of the Geol. Soc. of London, a paper, with figures, in which he ex-
pressed some entirely new ideas on the pelvis of birds and reptiles.
Dr. Hulke sent a copy of this paper to Prof. Marsh, who, besides, re-
ceives regularly the Geological Journal. ‘Three years later Prof. Marsh
publishes exactly the same results as Dr. Hulke, and he is kind enough
to state in a foot note, ‘‘ After these figures were made, showing the
position of the Dinosaurian pubis, which has caused so much discus-
sion since Cuvier, I found that Dr. T. W. Hulke had already suggested
1890.] Scientific News. ` : 303
the true solution of one difficulty ( Journal Geol. Soc. of Lond., Vol.
XXXII., p. 334). The year 1875 is wisely left off, and the statement
that Dr. Hulke suggested the solution is not true, because he really
solved the whole problem in the same manner as Prof. Marsh.
Only a short time ago I had opportunity to observe Prof. Marsh’s
passion to adorn himself with other’s plumes, I have devoted con-
siderable time to the study of the evolution of the skeleton of the
ostrich. Among others, E made a discovery which was of especial im-
portance, as it throws new light on the question of the relation between
birds and Dinosaurs. I told Prof. Marsh about this discovery, and did
not publish it. When Prof. Marsh wrote his paper on Ornithomimus
he simply claimed the discovery as his own, not mentioning me at all.
This I saw when he gave me the proof-sheets of the paper. ° It was
after a discussion of nearly two hours*that Prof. Marsh agreed to give
me credit for it (in a place where it could be easily overlooked) in the
explanation of the figures.
That Prof. Marsh ignores the work of others is a well known fact,
which can be seen by iid ea who takes the trouble to look over
his papers; who will, with ly exceptions,never find any paper
cited. There is, it is true, a, extensive bibliography appearing as an
appendix to the ERP but this bibliography is not used in the
text, and nobody can see from the text what has been done by others
on this order.
5. Dr. O. Meyer has made the statement that specimens are restored
in a very uhscientific way under the direction of Prof. Marsh. This
statement I sustain. -Plaster of Paris has been used in restorations in a
very extensive way, although latterly, I am glad to say, there has been
a reduction of the extent of it. I have seen specimens restored with
colored plaster, so that it was hard to tell where the bone began and
the plaster ended. Such specimens are made nearly useless for exact
study, and it will only be possible after the plaster has been removed,
and this with great difficulty. Colored plaster has been used especially
in restoring bones of Sauropoda, Stegosauridæ, and Dinocerata. The
general effect is that nearly all the specimens of this group look com- `
plete. But this artificial embellishment of the specimens has also been
"transferred to the drawings. Some of the plates of the great volumes
which wait for publication contain drawings of complete bones, but
which, if examined, consist of a considerable part of piaster. That
such plates are unscientific, I do not need to state. I must say, in jus-
tice to Prof. Marsh, that for the last five years this method has been
stopped, and that now, with very few exceptions, the drawings are
304 The American Naturalist. [March,
made from the actual specimens, and that the missing parts are shaded
in. A very great calamity is, that the specimens are often not drawn
as they really appear in nature, but that they are drawn restored,
These restorations are made according to the order of the Professor,
If it now happens that the restoration should prove to be incorrect,
the plate becomes worthless and has no scientific value.
Dr. O. Meyer has stated that Prof. Marsh has antedated his volume
on the Dinocerata intentionally. This is also true; and everything
that has been said by him about this point is correct. The review of
this work was written by Prof. Marsh himself, and he asked the signa-
tures of Mr. Harger and Dr. Williston for it without success, and had
to accept instead the initials of the lady type-writer,
7- There is one insinuation made in the article of Dr. Meyer on
which I have to say a few words® It refers, if I understand rightly, to
the type specimen of Zriglyphus which has disappeared from the Mu-
seum at Stuttgart. Dr. Meyer has asked Prof. Marsh to state how he
came in to possession of a tooth from a “‘ Jurassic ” (Triassic) mammal
from Germany, of which Prof. Marsh told Dr. Meyer. Prof. Marsh
has not answered Dr. Meyer’s article. In justice to Prof. Marsh, I
state that the tooth in the possession of Prof. O. C. Marsh was pur-
chased from a dealer of Stuttgart, in 1865, and that it is not the type of
Trighphus which disappeared from the Stuttgart Museum. All the posi-
tive statements of Dr. Meyer’s article I consider to be true.
8. Prof. Cope thinks ‘‘that an investigation as to who has delivered
Prof. Marsh’s lectures in Yale College during past years will yield some
interesting results.’’ To this I have to say, that such an investigation
is not necessary ; Prof. Marsh does not lecture at Vale at all.
9. Prof. W. B. Scott, of Princeton, has published in the Herald of
January 22d, a letter written by him to Prof. Marsh. What Prof. Scott
has said there I fully sustain. He says: ‘‘I feel constrained to sa
that I disapprove of your work, your methods and your administration
of the office which you hold. This disapproval does not rest on what
I have heard from others, nor upon any personal considerations, but
upon my own experience and my studies in the field to which both you
and I are devoted. If called upon to testify in any investigation, this
is the line to which, however reluctantly, I shall be compelled to
here.” G. Baur, Ph.D.
THE
AMERICAN NATURALIST
VoL. XXIV. APRIL, 1890. 280. .
ON THE BRECCIATED CHARACTER OF THE ST.
LOUIS LIMESTONE.
BY C. H. GORDON.
N the absence of the Chester, the St. Louis beds constitute the
uppermost division of the Subcarboniferous in Iowa. They
consist generally of limestone above, yellowish-gray, more or less
magnesian layers below, with a light gray friable sandstone be-
tween. The character of the limestone constituting the upper-
most division is such as to merit more than a passing notice.
Throughout its area in Iowa, and its northern outcrop in
Illinois, it has a peculiar brecciated or concretionary structure,
not observed elsewhere. It is made up of a mass of angular
limestone fragments, which have become more or less firmly
recemented together. The stratification is very irregular, though
in some places, where the brecciated character is absent, it is
found even enough to furnish very excellent building stone. It
is generally hard, and often cherty, and where it forms the floor to
the coal measures, constitues a very excellent guide to those in
search of this useful deposit. Its cherty character makes it very
difficult to penetrate, and so when once reached it is readily recog-
nized. In its typical locality—at and about St. Louis, where it
was first studied by Dr. Shumard—it is described as a fine-
grained, compact, subcrystalline limestone, often enclosing
numerous cherty concretions, and the layers separated by thin
306 The American Naturalist. [April,
green shale beds. It thus appears that the lithological character
of these beds changes toward the south.
The question as to the cause of the peculiar brecciated char-
acter of the limestone in Iowa and adjacent parts of Illinois
presents a pertinent field of inquiry. Worthen and Hall make |
frequent mention of this feature of the St. Louis limestone,
and White goes so far as to say that “during the time of
the deposition of this limestone there seems to have been
some slight disturbance of the strata, apparently amounting
only to local disarrangements of its own layers. This is prin-
cipally shown in the upper division, and consists of the
slipping, bending or slight distortion of all the strata, also
by the breaking up-of that limestone into angular fragments
which have in many cases become recemented together by similar
limestone material, forming the breccia above referred to. The
most of the disturbance seems to have prevailed during the de-
position of the upper division.” * It would be exceedingly inter-
esting to learn the nature of these local disturbances. Hall
speaks of it as follows: It “ consists generally of a breccia com-
posed of fine, compact, ash-colored limestone in fragments of
various sizes, having the interstices filled with a subcrystalline,
yellowish, granular, calcareous material, which is sometimes quite
pulverulent, and rarely very compact. The rock at Keokuk, and
at points above this on the river, as well as at Mt. Pleasant and
elsewhere, appears like the attenuated margin of a more important
formation, presenting the usual fractures of the thinning out of a
limestone, viz., a brecciated and concretionary structure. This
presumption proves to be true, for as we trace the rock south-
ward beyond the state, it presents other aspects, gradually losing
its concretionary and brecciated character, and becoming a more
important limestone formation.” ?
This explanation can hardly be considered adequate, for it
would necessarily follow that the attenuated margins of all lime-
stones should present the same characteristics; whereas they do
not. That the brecciated character is a marginal attendant in
1 Geological Survey of Iowa 1870, Vol. I., p. 218,
2 Geological Survey Iowa, 1858, Vol. I., Part 1, p. 98.
18g0.] St. Louis Limestone. 307
this case cannot be gainsaid; but that the shore line is always
thus attended cannot be sustained by facts, The stress laid upon
this feature of the St. Louis limestone by Worthen, White, and
even Hall himself, is of itself sufficient to necessitate an addi-
tional explanation of its cause.
Another important feature of this limestone not yet noted, and
one of great significance, is its odlitic character. In the Iowa
Reports this is not mentioned by White, though noted several
times in the detailed observations by Prof. Worthen in Hall’s
Report of 1858, as also in the Illinois Reports.
“ Above it becomes a regularly bedded light gray limestone, in
strata from six to twenty inches in thickness, the upper layers
having an odlitic structure.” * In the vicinity of Keokuk, Iowa,
the semi-odlitic character may also be observed, though not
especially prominent.
In Illinois it was observed by Worthen at several localities :
“Oolitic beds are quite characteristic of this division, and in
Hardin county massive beds of odlitic limestone form the upper
portion of it at several localities. . . - About three
miles above Alton there are some odlitic tad wpa res beds in
the lower part of the division, which are characterized by great
numbers of small shells.” 4
In Indiana the odlitic structure is especially prominent, occur-
ring in massive strata twenty to thirty or more feet in thickness
in the counties of Owen, Menge Lawrence, Washington, Har-
rison, and Crawford.
The quarries in these counties supply a most excellent building
stone, which is becoming quite celebrated for its durability, as
well as the facility with which it may be dressed to any desired
fõrm.
It* has been formed from the crushed remains of marine shells,
corals, etc. These have been pulverized to the condition of fine
sand, their soluble impurities washed away, and their insoluble
residue reunited into solid rock by a deposit of carbonate of lime
as a cementing. material. . . . . Its rich gray color, close
S At Croton, Ia. Hall's Report, 1858, p. I91. ; tess
* Illinois Report, Vol. I., p. 88. : k T ;
308 The American Naturalist. [April,
and uniform texture, and facility of working, both by hand and
machinery, make it extremely valuable for architectural purposes,
and its assured strength and durability make it especially desir-
able for all permanent engineering works.” 3
Another notable feature of this limestone, especially in Iowa,
is its irregularity as to thickness: frequently varying from ten to
fifty feet within very short distances. At Keokuk the thickness
is from ten to twenty feet ; following up the Des Moines river, the
course of which is nearly parallel with its original outcrop, its
thickness increases until we reach Farmington, where it measures
seventy-five feet. Between this place and Bentonsport, thirteen
miles beyond, it decreases to four or six feet. This irregularity:
in thickness is accompanied by trough or basin-like depressions
in the surface of the limestone, in which the coal measures were
afterward deposited. A miniature basin of this kind occurs at
Hillsbérough, while at Farmington the coal occurs in a more ex-
tensive depression. At Hillsborough the basin is “ oval in form,
and does not exceed fifty paces in diameter in either direction.
The coal dips rapidly from the edge to the centre, where it is
about fifteen feet below the surface of the limestone, outcropping
around the rim of the basin.” Fig. 1, Plate X., shows a cross-
section of this basin : |
We have observed the same irregularity in the surface of this
limestone at Keokuk, the thickness at one place being diminished
by half in a distance of one hundred feet. The accompanying
section across Point Keokuk from northeast to southwest (Fig. 2,
Plate X.,) shows the observed position of these beds.
Toward the northeast the junction of the sandstone with the
limestone may be observed, showing very conclusively the uneven
surface of the limestone, and, a few inches above, a black coaly
layer, here amounting to a mere parting, but which rapidly
thickens to a layer ten or twelve inches in thickness, accompanied
by a still greater thickness of slate. This basin is apparently a
very small one. Within the limits of the city these rocks have
been mostly removed by erosion. A similar basin occurs toward
5 Indiana Report, 1881., p. 29, et seq.
6 Hall’s Iowa Report. Vol. I., Part 1., p- 223.
PLATE: A
THE St. Louis LIMESTONE.
1890.] ‘St. Louis Limestone. 309
the south, but we have not observed the underlying sandstone.
Here the coal is found eighteen to twenty inches thick.
The facts above cited would seem to warrant certain conclu-
sions as to the conditions under which the limestone was de-
posited. Its general character would seem to imply the existence
of coral reefs fringing the shore throughout its northern extent.
The accompanying map (Plate XI.) shows approximately the ex-
panse of the Gulf during the St. Louis epoch.
The probable direction of the Gulf Stream is indicated by the
arrows. The proof of the existence of marine currents and
clear waters along the borders in Iowa, Illinois, Indiana, and
southward, lies in the presence at these points of extemsive beds
of limestone. It.would séem improbable that any communica-
tion with the ocean existed to the north and east, for had such
existed the Gulf Stream would, doubtless, have taken that
direction, involving clear waters and limestone deposits ; whereas,
the arenaceous and argillaceous characters of the Lower Carbon-
iferous of Ohio are marked. The northern extension of the Gulf
Stream, bringing with it the warm waters of the Tropics, would
materially affect the climate of this region, and in part explain
the tropical conditions during the following epoch...
The causes operating to exclude corals from tropical coasts, as
shown by Dana,’ are: (1) cold extratropical ocean currents; (2)
muddy, or alluvial shores, or the emptying of large rivers ; (3)
presence of volcanic action; (4) depth of water on precipitous
shores.. The first and third were manifestly absent. That the
shores were not muddy is shown by the presence of the limestone
as noted above. ?
The general dip of the strata here is toward the south and
west. It is very slight, but increases along the Mississippi, after
leaving the lower line ; it changes, however, so as to bring the
Lower Carboniferous again to the surface in the region of
Quincy, Ill.
There is thus afforded just such a shelving shore as would
comport with required conditions. ;
It is therefore not at all improbable that a line of reefs occupied
T Manual, p. 617.
310 The American Naturalist. ; [April,
this northern shore line, just as Florida is now fringed by its
existing representative.
This conclusion is strengthened by the resemblance of the St.
Louis limestone to coral rocks. Dana* describes coral rocks as:
(1) fine-grained, compact, clinking limestone, with or without
fossils ; (2) a compact odlite; (3) a conglomerate, mostly of corals
and shells ; (4) a rock consisting of corals as they grew,—the
interstices filled in with coral sand, shells, and fragments, some-
times very loosely. By the incessant trituration of the waves
the original features of coral rocks are toa great degree lost, and
the odlitic and brecciated characters are the most prominent
remaining features.
From Le Conte? we learn that “in some places . . u
(coral rock) is a coarse conglomerate or dreccia, Bihaca of
fragments of all sizes cemented together; in other places itis
made up entirely of rounded granules of coralline limestone
(coral sand) cemented together, and forming a peculiar oôlitic
rock. But the larger portion of the reef ground is a fine, com-
pact limestone, made up of comminuted coralline matter (coral
mud) cemented together. This fine coral mud is carried by
waves and.tides into the lagoon and serves to raise its bottom ; it
is also carried by currents and distributed widely over the neigh-
boring sea bottoms. . . In some places it (reef rock)
contains imbedded remains sr corals and shells, but in other parts
it is entirely destitute of these remains.”
The corroborative evidences of a like origin for the St. Louis
limestone may be briefly summarized as follows:
. In its brecciated character and uneven stratification it
didy resembles the brecciated portions of coral rock now
forming. In general the fragments are composed of fine-grained
bluish-gray limestone, resembling the clinking limestone of the
coral seas. The only coral generally distributed through it is
the massive Lithostrotion canadense Castelnau, the remains of
which are abundant and conspicuous. The remains of this fossil
occur at numerous localities in Iowa, Missouri, Illinois, Indiana,
8 Manual, p. 620.
? Elements, p. 148.
PLATE XE
Mf tye
Y
MAER
hi
Ar
tM. Ger a on,
THE CARBONIFEROUS OCEAN AND CONTINENT.
1890.] St. Louis Limestone. 311
Kentucky, Tennessee, and Alabama. “This fossil is one of the
most widely distributed corals of the Carboniferous limestones,
and appears to hold the same geological position from Central
Iowa to Alabama, everywhere marking the horizon of the St.
Louis limestone.” © In Iowa both the fossiliferous and unfossil-
iferons kinds of rock may be observed in the regions of the
brecciated limestone. In some cases masses of the coral are
found unbroken, but usually they are in a fragmental condition.
In the vicinity of Keokuk we have observed places at which the
limestone pieces are conspicuously fossiliferous, abounding in
broken fragments of the above coral, as well as other fossils in a
more or less comminuted condition. On the whole, however,
the brecciated portions are comparatively unproductive of fossils.
It is significant that n its extension northeastward into Ohio and
Pennsylvania no remains of ZL. canadense are found, though
Meek has shown this formation to be present in that region.
2. The character of the St. Louis towards the south corre-
sponds with what might be expected in its more seaward portions
It there becomes more evenly stratified and greatly more fossil-
iferous. The brecciated character is nearly lost, appears only at
intervals, beginning and ending abruptly, and the intermediate
portions showing more or less oblique laminations.
4. The uneven surface of the brecciated limestone would be a
Necessary sequence of the development of land seaward along a
reef-bound coast. ' :
On the retreat of the sea the lagoons and intermediate spaces
were filled by shore-wash, accompanied by a luxuriant E
and land progression outward, similar to that of Florida, TO
by Agassiz, in more recent times. Under this hypothesis the
irregular pockets and basins of coal in the Lower es m
are easily accounted for. They result from the accumulation
within the lagoon of vegetation growing upon a _— as
transported from without. That in these cases it did not in
Mame act that the coal rests
cases grow in situ would appear from the fact è i
almost immediately upon the limestone with po intervening T
to form a soil for its growth. In other localities the coal is un
10 Hall, Geology Iowa, Vol. I., Part I1., p. 668.
312 The American Naturalist. [April,
laid by a stratum of soft, coarse sandstone. In this connection it
might be objected that the above explanation would make the de-
posit of sandstone contemporaneous with the growth of some
portions of the coral reef, in which case it should contain some
internal proof of proximal relations. Such proof is not wanting.
On the Iowa side of the Mississippi river, one-half mile above
Keokuk, the brecciated limestone is overlaid by fifteen feet of
this sandstone, which is somewhat harder than usual elsewhere,
forming a projecting ledge. At this locality the writer has ob-
served a mass of Lithostrotion canadense five or six inches in
diameter imbedded in the lower portions of the sandstone, about
two feet above the base.. The presence of the coral here is ac-
counted for on the supposition that at some not distant point a
coral reef was growing at the time this sandstone was deposited.
By the action of the waves this mass was broken from its bed and
driven along the shallow bottom to find at last a resting-place in
the mud and detritus brought in from the neighboring land. That
the distance may not have been great may be inferred from the
known fact that in coral regions the transition from a bottom of
coral detritus to one of mud or earth is often very abrupt.”
From the above we submit the following brief
RECAPITULATION :
1. The Upper Division of the St. Louis Beds is a limestone
‘ which in its northern extension is decidedly brecciated and
irregular in stratification and thickness. In the interior, with a
‘few exceptions apparently due to littoral conditions, the rock is
of a fine-grained, even texture, and regular stratification.
2. No adequate cause for this prominent feature of the lime-
stone has thus far been advanced. While present in the attenu-
ated margins of some limestones, it is not in all, and hence would
imply the existence of other ‘than littoral conditions alone.
3- Another significant feature accompanying the brecciated
structure of this limestone is its odlitic character.
1 Dana, Manual, p. 623. _
r
ig ak Bs
Be
1890.] History of Garden Vegetables. 313
4. In these and other features the limestone shows marked re-
semblances to that observed in coral regions.
5. The conditions for the growth of reef-building corals were
apparently present at the time of the deposition of the St. Louis
Beds. That the Lithostrotion canadense and L. proliferum were
reef-building corals seems quite probable, though scarcely suscep-
tible of proof.
6. The presence of coral reefs along the shore-line during the
St. Louis epoch would seem: to account for the various peculi-
arities of structure and arrangement observed in this limestone.
Keokuk, Ta., March, 1890.
THE HISTORY OF GARDEN VEGETABLES.
BY E. L. STURTEVANT.
(Continued from p. 157, Vol. XXIV., 1890.)
PORTUGAL CABBAGE. Brassica oleracea costata D.C.
75S cabbage is easily recognizable through the great expan-
sion of the midribs and veins of the leaf, in some cases
forming quite half of the leaf, and the midrib losing its identity
in the multitude of radiating branching veins. In some plants
the petioles are winged clear to the base. Nearly all the names
applied to this form indicate its distribution, at least in late years,
from Portugal, from whence it reached English gardens about
1821} and in American gardens, under the name of Portugal
Cabbage, about 1850.” It should be remarked, however, that a
Choux a la grosse cote was in French gardens in 1612, and in
three varieties in 1824.°
1 Hort. Soc. Trans., 1821, 12.
He Buist. Fam. Kitch, Gar., 1851.
3 Le Jard. Solit., 1612, 158.
t L'Hort. Franc., 1824.
314 The American Naturalist. [April,
This cabbage varies in a direction parallel to that of the com-
mon cabbage, or has forms which can be classed with the kales,
and the heading cabbages of at least two types.
The peculiarity of the ribs or veins occasionally appears among
the variables from the seed of the common cabbage, whence
_ atavism as the result of a cross can be reasonably inferred. As
to the origin of this form, our opinion, at the present stage of our
studies, must be largely speculative, but we may reasonably be-
lieve that it originated from a different form or a different set of
hybridizations than did the common cabbage.
_ The names in English are draganza, portugal or sea-kale cab-
bage’ large-ribbed cabbage} large-ribbed borecole, tranxuda,’ couve
tronchuda; in France, choux a grosses cotes, chou tronchuda; in
Spain, col de pezon, col tronchuda; in Portugal, couve tronchuda,
couve mantiega, couve penca?
_ The synonymy appears to be:
Choux a le grosse cote. Le Jard. Solit., 1612.
Chou blond a grosses cotes. Bosc. Dict., 1789, 4, 43-
Brassica oleracea aceppala costata. D.C. Syst., 2, 584.
B. oleracea costata. D.C. Mem., 1821, 12.
Chou a grosse cotes. Vilm., 1883.
POT MARIGOLD. Calendula officinalis L.
The flowers are used in some culinary preparations, and for
this purpose it is yet grown in some gardens. It has not been
used to any great extent in modern times, and even,in 1783
Bryant,’ while noting its common occurrence in gardens, says
that the flowers were formerly in high esteem, being gathered
and dried to use in soups and pottage. It was in American gar-
dens in 1806. The plant was described in nearly all the early
botanies, and is mentioned by Albertus Magnus in the 13th
+ century.
5 Vilmorin. The Veg. Gard., 1885, 128.
ê Booth. Treas. of Bot.
T Burr. Field and Gard. Veg., 1863, 273.
8 Vilmorin. Les Pl. Pot., 1883, 126.
® Bryant. FI. Diet., 1783, 146.
1890.] History of Garden Vegetables. 315
Pot marigold is called, in France, sonci des jardins; in Ger-
many, ringelblume ;® in Holland, goudbloem ; in Italy and Spain,
calendula; in Russia, nogotki;" in Arabia, zobejbe; by the
Greeks at Constantinople, chamobuoreta ; in Hindustani, gul-ti-
mariyam, phirki, genda; in Bengali, genda phul; in Burma,
htat-ta-ya; at Lahore, adsrioon ; in Japan, kin-sen-kwa."
POTATO. Solanum tuberosum L.
The varieties of the potato are now innumerable, and while of
several distinct types of form and color, are all supposed to have
been derived from a common wild progenitor. It is interesting to
observe, therefore, that varieties were under culture in South
America even before the discovery. Ina vocabulary of a now
extinct tribe, the Chibcha, who once occupied the region about
the present Bogota, ten different varieties are identified, one of
which, “black inside,” has not as yet appeared in modern culture."
At the present time Vilmorin’ makes an extremely artificial
classification, as follows: I, the round yellow varieties; 2,
the long yellow varieties; 3, the variegated long yellow
varieties; 4, the round red varieties; 5, the flat pink or red
varieties; 6, the smooth long red varieties; 7, the notched
long red varieties; 8, the violet colored and variegated varieties.
The yellow and red varieties are mentioned by Bauhin * in 1596,
“fusci vel atrorubentis,” or literally, the tawny and the purple.
In 1726 Townsend ” mentions the white and the red in England, as
does Bryant § in 1783. In 1785, Varlo 19 describes nine sorts, the
white round, the red round, the large Irish white smooth, the
10 Vilmorin. Les Pl. Pot., 551.
11 McIntosh. Book of the Gard., II., 240.
12 Forskal. Fl. Æg. Arab., CXX., XXXIII.
13 Pickering. Ch. Hist., 550.
14 Gramatica Vocabulario . . de la Lingua Chibcha, for
in Gard. Chron., Dec. 4, 1886, 720.
15 Vilmorin. The Veg. Gard., 1885, 443-
16 Bauhin. Phytopin., 1596, 30I.
17 Townsend. Seedsman, 1726, 23.
18 Bryant. Fl. Diet., 1783, I5.
19 Varlo. Husbandry, 1785, II., 97-
Don E. Urichoeehea, quoted
*
316 The American Naturalist. [April,
large round red, the culgee, the early-wife, the white kidney, the
bull’s-eye red. In further description he says the Jerusalem is
long and full of eyes, the culgee is red on one side, the early-wife
does‘ not blossom, and are of a light-red, and the toadback is
nearly akin to the large Irish, the skin almost black, and rough
like a russetting; the kidney is oblong, white with a yellowish
cast. In 1806 McMahon™” describes but one kind for American
gardens, but in 1828 Fessenden says there are many varieties,
and in 1832 Bridgeman says the varieties are very numerous. In
1848 nearly one hundred sorts were exhibited at the Massachu-
setts Horticultural Society in Boston. Decaisne and Naudin
give the number of varieties in France in 1815 as sixty; in
1855 as four hundred and ninety-three, in 1862 as five hundred
and twenty-eight.
We have grown a number of wild varieties of the potato at the
New York Agricultural Experiment Station, including the Sol-
anum maglia. One sort, which has not as yet been identified by
us with its specific name, corresponds to the notched class of Vil-
morin. The maglia corresponds to the round and oblong
flattened forms; the /amesi to the round form. The colors of
these wild potatoes are said by some growers to include the
white, the red, and the variegated. In their habits of growth the
maglia forms its tubers deep under the ground, the Jamesii very
much scattered and extending a long distance from the plant.
The. synonymy of our types can include those described by
Vilmorin, as follows, but I have not attempted to make it
complete.
I. Round yellow. Vilm., 1885. >
Round as a ball. Ger., 1597, 781; 1633, 927.
Solanum tuberosum. Blackw. Herb., 1773, pl. 523, b.
White round. Varlo, Husb., 1785, II., 97.
II. Long yellow. Vilm., 1885.
Ovall or egge fashion. Ger., 1597, 781; 1633, 927.
Oblonga. Bauh. Prod., 1671, 90. Matth., 1598, 757, cum ic.
Papas peruanorum. Clus. Rar., 1601, 2,79, cum ic.
2 McMahon. Am. Gard. Cal., 1806.
1890. ] History of Garden Vegetables. 317
Ill. Variegated lng yellow. Vilm., 1885.
IV. Round red. Vilm., 1885. +
Pugni magnitudine. Matth., 1598, 757.
Red round. Varlo, Husb., 1785, II., 97.
V. Flat pink or red. Vilm., 1885.
VI. Smooth long red. Vilm., 1885.
?Solanum tuberosum. Blackw. Herb., 1773, pl. 523, b.
VII. Notched long red. Vilm., 1885.
?Membri virilis forma. Bauh. Prod., 1671, go.
VII. Violet colored and variegated.
?Atrorubens. Bauh. Phytopin., 1596, 301.
Toadbatk. Varlo, Husb., 1785, Il., 97.
Solanum tuberosum tuberibus nigricantibus. Blackw. Herb., t.
586
The figures I have seen, which seem to me to be referrable to
the maglia species, are:
Batata virginiana sive virginianorum pappus. Ger., 1597, 781.
Solanum tuberosum esculentum. Matth., op., 1598, 758; Bauh.
Prod., 1671, 89.
Arachidna theophrasti forte, Papas peruanorum. Clus. Rar,
1601, 2, 79.
Papas americanus. Swertius, Florelig., 1612, t. 28, fig. 4.
The potatoes which are now grown in this country were de-
rived from several sources, from England, and of late years from
Bogota” in 1847, from Chili” in 1850, etc.
Potatoes were grown in Virginia in 1609,” and are also men-
tioned in 1648™ and 1650.” In 1683 Worlidge* says pota-
toes are much used in Ireland and America, but their introduction
into New England is said not to have been until 1719,” at Lon-
21 Farmers’ Library, 1847, 382.
2 Trans, N.Y. Ag. Soc., 1850, 726; 1851, 367.
23 A True Decl. of Va., 1610, 13.
24 A Perf. Desc. of Va., 1649, 4-
% Virginia, by E. W., 1650, 48.
% Syst. Hort. By J. W. Gent., 1683, 187.
27 Hort, Register, III., 214.
318 The American Naturalist. [April,
dondury, N. H., and at Salem, about 1762." In 1779, however,
potatoes were among the Indian foods destroyed by Gen. Sulli-
van” during his invasion into Western New York.
This plant has secured a wide distribution, and has been suc-
cessfully cultivated throughout nearly the whole world. Its
northern limits are in Norway, 71° 7’; in Russia, the Pinega
River, 65°; Turukansk, 65°; Yakutsk, shores of the Okotsk
Sea, Kamchatka, Kadjah Island, Sitka Island; Mackenzie River,
65°; Canada, Labrador, 58° 45’; Greenland.”
The modern names for the potato are: In France, pomme de
terre, parmentiere, tartauffe, tartufie, etc.; in Germany, kartoffe ;
in Flanders and Holland, aard appel ; in Denmark, jordepeeren ;
in Italy, patata ; in Spain and Portugal, patatas ; in es
America, papa ;* in Norway, potet ;” in India, wvlaetee aloo ;*
in Telinga, a/u-guddalu ; in Ceylon, rata-tnnala ;* by the Malays,
ubi bungala;” in Sra at Pekin, skan-yas-tou ; in southern
China, ho-lan-shu.*
PUMPKIN. Cucurbita Sp.
See under squash.
PURSLANE. Portulaca oleracea L.
Common purslane is a weed of the garden, and has spread
over nearly the whole world. Whether originally an American
plant is in doubt, but certain it is that plants called purslane were
seen by the early visitors to the American coast. The cultivated
purslane differs from the wild in being erect, and Hooker found
28 Felt's Annals of Salem, II., 146.
29 Conover’s Early Hist. of Geneva, 1880, 45.
30 Bergman. Nature Aug. 21, 1884, 392.
*t Vilmorin. Les PL Pot, Dr For Germany, see Die Deutschen Volksnamen du
33 Speede. Ind. Handb. of Gard., 136.
% Birdwood. Veg. Prod. of Bomb., 174.
35 Treas. of Bot., 1186,
3 Bretschneider. On the Study, etc., 17.
1890.] History of Garden Vegetables. 319
in northwest India a variety with erect stalks.” The use of the
purslane as a vegetable is noted in the Greek writers under the
name andrachne, and by the Romans under this name and portu-
Jaca. In the 13th century: Albertus Magnus * does not mention
culture in gardens, and apparently refers to the wild form, “ the
stems extending over the soil.” In 1536 Ruellius® describes
the erect, green-leaved, cultivated form, as well as the wild pro-
cumbent form, and in this he is followed by many of the succeeding
botanists. Three varieties are described,—the green, the golden,
and the large-leaved golden. The golden varieties are not men-
tioned by Bauhin in his phytopinax, 1596, nor in his pinax, 1623,
but are mentioned just as if a well-known variety in Le Jardinier
Solitaire, 1612. The green variety is figured by nearly all the
earlier botanists. The golden has the following synonymy :
Pourpier dore. Le Jard. Solit., 1612, 378; Tourn., 1719, 236;
Vilm., 1883, 518.
Red or Golden. Quintyne, 1693, 199.
Portulaca sativa lutea sive aurea. Ray, 1688, 1039.
Golden purslane. Ray, 1688, 1039; Townsend, 1726, 19;
Mawe, 1778; Burr, 1863, 392. )
Purslane was formerly much more grown than at present;
with Quintyne it was a vegetable for forcing. It is seldom seen
in American gardens, but the spinage from the wild plant is oc-
casionally served at table.
Purstane is called in France, pourpier, porcelin, porcellane, por-
chailles ; in Germany, portulak, kreusel; in Flanders and Hol-
land, postelein, postelijn, porcelein; in Denmark, portulak ; in
Italy, porcellana ; in Spain, verdolaga ; in Portugal, deldroega ;*
in Norway, portulak ;* in Russia, schrucha.”
In Arabia, brabra, chamile, doenned el farras, ridjlet el farras ;*
3? Hooker. Fl. Br.-Ind., I., 240, ex. D.C. Orig. Des. Pl. Cult., 70.
38 Albertus Magnus. De Veg., Jessen ed., 1867, 548.
39 Ruellius. De Nat. Stirp., 1536, 482.
4 Vilmorin, Les Pl. Pot., 517.
42 Decandolle. Orig. Des PI. Cult., 70.
8 Forskal. Fl, Æg., Arab., CXII.
320 The American Naturalist. [April,
in Arabic, rigleh ; * in Bengali, moonya, buroloonia ;* in Burma,
myae-byet;* in Ceylon, genda-kola ;* in China, ma chi hien ;
in Cochinchina, rau sam; at Constantinople, g/isrida ;® in
Egypt, daglae, ridjle ; * in India, choolee, mooncha, moonea, khursa,
khurfa;* in Japan, bakin, uma biju, siberi Jyu;* in Nubia,
segetiemum;™ in Persia, turuek, kherefeh ; in Sanscrit, Jonika,
looma; in Tamil, caril-keeray, puropoo-keeray.”
QUINOA. Chenopodium quinoa, Willd.
This plant was grown as a cereal plant in the table-lands of
New Grenada, Peru, and Chili, at the time of the discovery of
America, and De Vega” notes that both the Indians and the
Spaniards use the foliage as a spinach, as well as the grain. In
Chili a variety is named by Molina,” which yields a white grain,
and this is the kind that is used as a vegetable in European gar-
dens. A black-seeded variety, cultivated in gardens, is mentioned
by Feuille” in Peru, preceding 1725. It was introduced in
1785,” but has not received very extended use. In 1853 seeds
from France were distributed from the U. S. Patent Office.
The white quinoa is called in F rance, anserine quinoa blanc,
quinoa blanc ; in Germany, peruanischer rets-spinat, REE be
in Peru, guinua by the Indians, mujo by the Spaniards ; ® in Chili,
the white sort, dakue ; » in Bolivia, guinua.”*
RADISH. Raphanus sativus L.
In European culture the radish is grown for its roots, but in
other countries it is grown as well for its leaves and seed. Thus
“Delile. Fl. Æg. Ill.
4 Birdwood. Veg. Prod. of Bomb., 38, 161.
in
48 Speede. Ind. SUN of Gard., 171.
49 Kaempfer. Amoen., 831.
50 G. de Vega. Royal Com. Hak. Soc., ed. II., 358.
5l Molina. Hist. of Chili, L., 91.
5 Gibbon. Amazon, 139.
5 Feuille. Peru, IH, Ap t6 t
e
1890.] Hitstory of Garden Vegetables. 321
in Sikh, India, Edgeworth * says the radish is cultivatetl both as
a vegetable made of the young buds, and for its oil. In Arabia,
Forskal ” says the foliage and not the root is eaten. The Arabs
are very fond of the tops of radishes, says Bayard Taylor,® and
eat them with as much relish as donkeys. Klunzinger™® de-
scribes the radish of Upper Egypt as of a peculiar kind, of which
as a rule the leaves only, and not the small sharp root, are eaten.
In 1726, in England,” radishes were sown for cutting in the first
leaf for small salads. The oil-bearing radish of China is grown
extensively there for the seeds, from which an edible oil is ex-
pressed, and it has been introduced and successfully cultivated in
Italy, whence it has reached France." This esculent root has
been known from a remote antiquity, and has furnished a number
of forms which have remained distinct from time immemorial. If
the figures given by Woenig™ as of the radish in the XII.
dynasty of Egypt be the radish, we may recognize the turnip-
rooted and the long. A. P. Decandolle™ in 1821 divided the
radishes into two divisions, the one including the common Euro-
pean sorts, the other the large black or white winter sorts. Asa
matter of convenience we will treat the various forms as species,
giving the history of each.
I. Raphanus radicula Pers.
This is the round or turnip radish, the root swollen into a
spherical form, or an oval tube rounding at the extremity to a
filiform radicle. It has several shades of color, from white to red
or purple. Its savor is usually milder than that of the other
56 Edgeworth. Hooker's Jour. of Bot., II., 273.
57 Forskal. Fl. Æg.-Arab., XCIII.
58 Bayard Taylor. Central Africa, 105.
59 Klunzinger. Upper Egypt, 142.
6 Townsend. Seedsman, 1726, 17.
6l Bon Jard., 1882, 699.
® Woenig. Die Pflanzen in Alt Ægypt, 1886, 217.
63 Decandolle. Mem. upon the Brassicæ, 1821.
64 Baillon. Hist. of Plants, IH., 222.
Am, Nat.—April.—2.
322 The American Naturalist. , [April,
sorts. Tt seems to be the Bocotion of Theophrastus,” who
* described this form as the least acid, and of a rotund figure, and-
with small leaves; the Syriacan of Columella ® and of Pliny.”
This sort does not appear to have received extensive distribution
northward during the middle ages, as they find but little mention
in the earlier botanies. In 1586 Lyte® says they are not very
common in Brabant; but they are figured in two varieties by
Gerarde. I am disposed to put here the Raphanus vulgaris of
Tragus, 1552, which he describes as round, small, and common
in Germany. Bontius® in 1658 mentions them in Java, and in
1837 Bojer” describes them as grown at the Mauritius. In
1842 Speede™ gives an India name, gol moolee, for the red and
white kinds.
Raphanus orbiculatus. Round radish. Ger., 1 597, 184.
Scarlet French Turnip. Vilm., 1885, 485.
Small Early White Turnip. Vilm., 1885, 487.
Radicula sativa minor. Small garden radish. Ger., 1597, 183-
White olive-shaped. Vilm., 1885, 490.
Olive-shaped Scarlet. Vilm., 1885, 488.
Raphanus sativus Mill.”
The root of this class is long, nearly cylindrical, diminishing
insensibly to a point at the extremity. It is now the common
garden radish. It has a variety of colors from the white to the
red, and is noteworthy from the transparency of the flesh. It may
well be the radicula of Columella,” and the Algidense of Pliny,”
which he describes as having a long and translucent root. It is
85 Theophrastus, Lib. VII., c. 4.
66 Columella, Lib. X., c. 114; Lib. XI., c. 3.
% Pliny, Lib. XIX., c 26.
68 Lyte. Dodoens, 1586, 687.
69 Bontius. Ind. Orient., 1658, 12.
7 Bojer. Hort. Maur., 1837, 16.
1 Speede. Ind. Handb. of Gard., 1842, r47.
™ Baillon. Hist. of Pl., III., 222.
73 Columella, Lib. IV., c. 8; Lib. XI., c. 2.
T Pliny, Lib. XIX., c. 26.
1890.] History of Garden Vegetables. 323
not described in England by Lyte nor by Gerarde ; it is described
as in the gardens of Aleppo in 157 3-5.> In 1658 Bontius® *
calls them in Java Dutch radish; in 1837 Bojer” names them
in the Mauritius, and in 1842 Speede™ gives an Indian name,
lumbee moolee. i
Raphanus minor purpureus. Lob. Obs., 1576,99; ic., 1591,
L208.
Raphanus longus. Cam. Epit., 1586, 224.
Raphanus purpureus minor. Lobel., Lugd., 1587, 636.
Radicula sativa minor. Dod., 1616, 676.
Raphanus corynthia. Bodaeus, 1644, 769.
Long Scarlet. Vilm., 1885, 490.
Long White Vienna. Vilm., 1885, 492.
Raphanus albus longus.
The long white late and large radishes I do not recognize in
the ancient writings, unless it be the reference by Pliny ™ to the
size; some radishes, he says, are the size of a boy infant, and
Dalechamp” says that such can be seen in his day in Thuringia
and Erfordia. In Japan, so says Kizo Tamari,” a Japanese com-
missioner to the New Orleans Exposition of 1886, the radishes
are mostly cylindrical, fusiform or club-shaped, from one-fourth
of an inch to over a foot in diameter, from six inches to over a
yard in length, and J. Morrow ™ says that at Lew Chew radishes
often grow between two and three feet long, and more than
twelve inches in circumference. In 1604 Acosta” writes that he
had seen in the Indies “ redish rootes as bigge as a man’s arme,
very tender and of good taste.” These radishes are probably men-
tioned by Albertus Magnus” in the 13th century, who says that the
radix are very large roots of a pyramidal figure, with a somewhat
sharp savor, but not that of raphanus; they are planted in
15 Gronovius, Orient., 81.
76 Hist. Gen., Lugd., 1587, 634.
7 Am. Hort., Sept., 1886, 9.
18 Morrow. Perry's Japan, II., 16.
7 Acosta. Hist. of the Ind., 1604, 261.
8 Albertus Magnus. De Veg., Jessen Ed., 1867, 556, 645.
324 The American Naturalist. [April,
gardens. They seem to have been the principal kind in northern
Europe a few centuries later, and are said by Lyte” in 1586 to
be the common radish of England. In 1790 Loureiro™ de-
scribes them as cultivated in China and Cochin China, and they
seem to be the form described by Kaempfer ® in Japan, in 1712.
The radishes figured by the early botanists enable us to connect
very closely with modern varieties.
a.
Raphanus longus. Trag., 1552, 732.
Raphanus. Matth., 1558, 241; 1570, 332.
Raphanus sive radix. Pin., 1561, 14 a
Raphanus magnus. Lob. Obs., 1576, 99; ic., 1591, I., 201.
Raphanus alba. Cam. Epit., 1586, 223.
Raphanus sativus Matthiol. Lugd., 1587, 635.
Raphanus sive radicula sativa. Dod., 1616, 676.
White Strasbourg. Vilm., 1885, 494
(2.
Raphanus If. Matth., 1570, 332; 1598, 349.
Raphanus secundus Matthiol. Lugd., 1587, 635.
Laon long gray Winter. Vilm., 1885, 496.
TA :
Raphanus. Matth., 1558, 241; 1570, 332.
Raphanus sive radix.» Pin., 1561, 145.
Raphanus sativus matthiolus. Lugd., 1587, 635.
Radice. Cast. Dur., 1617, 383.
White Spanish Winter. Vilm., 1885, 497.
Raphanus sativus. Garden Radish. Ger., 1597, 183.
Large White Russian. Vilm., 1885, 497.
Raphanus niger vulgaris A. P. DC.
This radish does not seem to have been mentioned by the
ancients. In 1586 Lyte says, The radish with a black root has
8i Lyte. Dodoens, 1586, 687.
82 Loureiro, Fl, Cochin Ch.; 1790, 396.
8 Kaempfer. Amoen., 1712, 822.
1890.] History of Garden Vegetables. 325
of late years been brought into England, and now beginnith to
be common,
Raphanus nigra. Cam. epit., 1586, 223.
Raphanus sive radicula sativa nigra. Dod., 1616, 676.
Raffano longo. Cast. Dur., 1617, ap.
Long-rooted Black Spanish. Bryant, 1783, 40.
Long Black Spanish Winter. Vilm., 1885, 499.
Raphanus niger rotundus A. P. DC.
This is a turnip-rooted or round form of a black radish,
usually included among winter sorts.
Raphanus pyriformis. Ger., 1597, 184.
Raphanus I. Matth., 1598, 349.
Large Purple Winter. Vilm., 1885, 495.
There is another form of black radish figured in the early
botanies, of quite a distinct appearance. It answers suggestively
to the description by Vilmorin of the Radis de Mahon, a long
red radish, exceedingly distinct, growing in part above ground,
and peculiar to some districts in southern France and to the
Balearic isles. I connect it with diffidence with the following:
Raphanus niger. Lob. ic., 1591, I., 202.
Radice selvatica. Cast. Dur., 1617, 384.
Raphanus niger. Bod., 1644, 770.
Radis de Mahon. Vilm., 1885, 499.
Theophrastus mentions the Corinthian sort as having full foli-
age, and the root, unlike other radishes, growing partly out of the
earth, but the Long Normandy answers to this description as
well as the Mahon.
The radish was known to Turner“ in England in 1536 under
the name of radyce. It was noted in Mexico in the sixteenth
century by Peter Martyr,” by Benzoni% in Hayti in 1565, and
was under cultivation in Massachusetts about 1629.”
s Turner. Libellus, 1537.
% Peter Martyr. Eden’s Hist. of Trav., 1577.
8 Benzoni, Hist. of the New World. Smyth Trans., 1857.
8 Wood. New Eng. Prosp., 1st Ed., II.
87 Vilmorin. Les Pl. Pot., 518.
326 - The American Naturalist. [April,
The radish is called in France, radis, petite rave, rave jni Ger-
many, radies; in Flanders and Holland, rads; in Denmark,
haveroeddike ; in Italy, ravanello, radice ; in Spain, rabanito ; in
Portugal, rabao, rabanite ;" in Norway, reddik ,* in Greece,
rapania.™
In Arabic, figl” fioyl, bokel; in Bengal, moola;™ in Burma,
mung-la ;* in Ceylon, radu ;™ in Egypt, fidjel 9 in Hindustani,
moola, muli ;™ in India, moolee ;” in Japan, daikon ; in Malay;
lobak; in Sanscrit, mooluka; in Tamil, moolinghie ; in Telinga,
mullangi
Raphanus caudatus L.
This radish has pods often a foot or more in length, and these
find use as a vegetable. It became known to Linnæus in 1764;”
it reached England from Java about 1816, and was described
by Burr” as an American kitchen plant in 1863. According to
Firminger % the plant has but lately come into cultivation in
India, and there bears pods often three feet in length. These pods
make excellent pickles.
It was at first called in England tree radish from Java,” in
India, rat-tailed radish,* the name it now holds in the United
States; by Burr,” in 1863, Madras radish.
There are a number of radishes now known whose type re-
quires further study before presentation. Such are the Chinese
winter radishes, whose roots are swollen more at the base than at
the summit, the oil-bearing radish, etc. The first of these is in
general cultivation in Japan.
8 Schubeler. Culturpf., 107.
8 Pickering. Ch, Hist., 473.
Delile. Fl. Æg. IIL
9% Birdwood. Veg. Prod. of Bomb., 138.
% Speede. Ind. Handb. of Gard., 147.
% Miller's Dict., 1807.
% Gard. Chron., 1866, 779.
% Burr. Field and Gard. Veg., 384.
% Firminger. Gard. in Ind., 140.
1890.] History of Garden Vegetables. 327
RAMPION. Campanula en L,
The roots and leaves of Rampion are eaten in sida It is
recorded as in gardens by Pena and Lobel ® in 1570, and is fig-
ured by Tragus” in 1552, Lobel” in 1576, as well as by other
writers of this period as an improved root. In 1726 Townsend ”
says it is but in few gardens in England, and Bryant™ in 1783
says it is much cultivated in France, but in England is now little
regarded. It is recorded in American gardens in 1806, 1819,
1821, etc. As late as 1877 an English writer says rampion is a
desirable addition to winter salads.“
Rampion is called in France, raiponce,tbaton de Jacob, cheveux
d eveque, petite raiponce de careme, pied-de-sauterelle, rampon, rave
sauvage; in Germany, rapunzel; in Flanders and Holland,
rapunsel; in Italy, raperonzolo, by oneal in Span reponche,
raponchigo ; in Portugal, rapunculo.
RED CABBAGE. Brassica oleracea (capitata) rubra L.
The first certain mention I find of this cabbage is in 1570, in
Pena & Lobel’s Adversaria, and figures are given by Gerarde,
1597,” Matthiolus, 1598, 106 /Dodonaeus, 1616,” and J. Bauhin,
1651. These figures are all of the spherical headed type. In
1636, Ray notices the variability in the colors upon which a
number of our seedsmen’s varieties are founded. The oblong or
the pointed headed types which now occur, I cannot trace.
% Tragus. De Stirp., 1552, 725.
% Pena and Lobel. Adv., 1570, 130.
9 Lobel. Obs., 1576, 178.
10 Townsend, 1726, 23.
101 Bryant. FI. Diet, 1783, 27.
102 E, Hobday. Cottage Gard., 1877, 113.
1% Matthiolus. Ed. of 1598, 367.
107 Dodonzeus Pemgt., 1616, p. 621. -
108 J, Bauhin. Hist., 1651, II., 831.
109 Ray. Hist. 1686, 795.
328 The American Naturalist. [April,
The solidity of the head and the perfectness of the form in
this class of cabbage indicate long culture and a remote origin.
In England they have never attained much standing for general
use, and as in this country are principally grown for pickling.
The Red Cabbage is called in France, chou pommerouge ; in
Germany, vote kopfkohl ; in Italy, cavalo rosso ; in Dutch, rood
kool ; in Spain, derza colorado ; ™' in India, lal kobee.'”
The synonymy seems to be as follows :
i
Brassica convoluta and arcte occlusa rubro colore. Adv., 1570,
gl.
B. Lacuturria, Lyte’s Dod., 1586, 637.
B. Capitata rubra. Bauh. Phytopin., 1596, 176; Pin., 1623,
HE; Ger. Herb., 1597, 246; J. Bauh., Hist., 1651, II.,831 ; Ray,
Hist., 1686, 621.
B. rubra capitata. Dod. Pempt., 1616, 621.
Chou pomme rouge. Tourn., Inst., 1719, 2 19.
Red cabbage, spherical headed forms.
II.
Dark red early pointed headed. Vilm., Alb. de Cliches, 1885.
New Garfield Pickeler. Tillinghast Cat., 1884.
RHUBARB. . Rheum sp.
The rhubarb as a vegetable is in more repute in American and
English gardens than in France, and is now widely distributed
and much grown in American gardens. It is, however, of recent
introduction ; the first of its kind being only known about 1608,
and the first reference I find to its growth as a vegetable in Eng-
land being in 1778, although its culture probably dates somewhat
earlier. It appeared in American gardens before 1806, but in
1821 Cobbett says he had never seen it in America. In 1822,
110 J. W. Gent. Syst. Hort., 1683, 203. Townsend. Seedsman, 1726, 27, etc.
1 McIntosh. Book of the Gard., II., 116.
112 Speede. Ind. Handb. of Gard., 114.
1899.] History of Garden Vegetables. 329
J. Lowell, in the Massachusetts Agricultural Repository, says
that thirty years ago we were strangers to the rhubarb, which
has now become an article of extensive culture. R. Manning,
Secretary of the Massachusetts Horticultural Society, says that
in 1844 it was acquiring that popularity which now renders it in-
dispensable. In 1863 Burr describes ten varieties for American
gardens. I am not sufficiently acquainted with this genus to
refer our cultivated sorts to their proper species, but I cannot
agree with Vilmorin in referring them all to one species, Rheum
hybridum. I present the species, in order of introduction, to
which our cultivated rhubarbs have been referred by authors.
Rheum rhaponticum L.
A native of Southern Siberia and the region of the Volga, it
was introduced to Europe about 1608, and cultivated at Padua
by Prosper Alpinus, and seeds from this source were planted by
Parkinson in England about 1640 or before”? There is no
reference, however, to its use as a vegetable by Alpinus’ in
1627, nor by Ray” in 1686, although the latter refers to the
acid stalks being more grateful than that of garden sorrel. In
1778, however, Mawe ™® says its young stalks in spring, being
cut and peeled, are used for tarts. In 1806 M’Mahon'” mentions
it in American gardens, and says the footstalks are very fre-
quently used, and much esteemed for tarts and pies. In 1733
Bryant’ describes the footstalks as two feet long, and thicker
than a man’s finger at the base.
Rheum undulatum L.
To this species have been referred garden varieties with a red
stalk. It is said to be a native of China, and introduced to Eu-
rope in 1734. It is mentioned in American seed catalogues of
113 Pharmacographia, 1879, 500.
ut M'Mahon. Am. Gard. Cal., 1806, 205.
us Bryant. Fl, Diet., 1783, 67.
330 The American Naturalist. [April,
1828. Decaisne and Naudin’” say it is grown in gardens, but
is not as esteemed as is the Victoria rhubarb. In 1840 Buck's
and Elford rhubarb are referred to as originating from this spe-
cies. In 1882, a variety called Zartreum™
as new, and highly praised, is referred here.
announced in France
Rheum palmatum L.
Its habitat ascribed to China neighboring to Tartary, it first
reached Europe in 1763” or 17587” The footstalks are much
smaller than those of other kinds, hence it is not in general cul-
tivation.” It is yet rare in France, although this species is
superior in quality, as it is quite tender.”
Rheum compactum L,
A native of Tartary and China, it became first known in Eu-
rope in 1758. Inthe Bon Jardinier of 1882 it is said to be the
species principally’ grown in France as a vegetable, but Vil-
morin ™ refers his varieties to Rheum hybridum, but these it is to
be remarked are English,
Rheum hybridum L.
This is the species to which our largest and finest varieties are
usually referred. It is of uncertain origin. It is first noticed in
England in 1773 or 1774,” but it did not come into use as a
culinary plant until about 1827. In 1829 a footstalk was noted
as sixteen inches long.” The Victoria rhubarb of our gardens
is referred to this species. In 1877 a stalk was exhibited at’
119 Decaisne & Naudin. Man., IV., 190.
12 Vegetable Substances, 1840, 205:
1% Vilmorin, Les. PL Pot., 1883, 538.
1% Miller's Dict., 1807.
12 Rhind. Veg. King., 1857, 309.
1890.] History of Garden Vegetables. 331
Boston which weighed 2 lbs. 2% ozs., and in 1882, twelve stalks
which weighed forty pounds.'”
Rheum ribes L.
This plant is considered by Linnaeus'® to be the Ribes
arebum of Rauwolf, who traveled in the Orient in 1573-5, and
who found it in the region of the Lebanon,” and its habitat is
also given as Eastern Persia. Decaisne and Naudin™ refer to it
as grown in gardens in France, but not as esteemed as the R.
hybridum, while the Bon Jardinier of 1882 says it is reported
the best as an esculent, and is greatly praised.
Rheum australe, Don.
This species, which is the R. emodi, Wal., is said by
Loudon ™ to have an excellent flavor, somewhat resembling that
of apples, and excellent for a late crop, and the Bon Jardinier of
1882 says the petioles are longer and more esteemed than those
of other species. On the contrary Burr ™ in 1863 says the leaf
stalks, although attaining an immense size, are unfit for use on
account of their purgative properties, but the plant is sometimes
cultivated for its leaves, often a yard in diameter, which are useful
for covering baskets containing vegetables or fruit.
The wild rhubarb about Cabul is blanched for use as a vege-
table, and under the name of rewash is brought to the market.
Gravel is piled about the sprout as it breaks from the earth, and
by continuing the process the plant is forced to grow to the
height of 18 or 20 inches. Another process is to cover the
sprout with an earthen jar, and the sprout then curls itself
spirally within the jar, and becomes quite white, crisp and free
from fibre. Itis eaten in its raw state with either salt or sugar,
and makes a favorite preserve’™.
127 Mass. Hort. Soc. Trans., 1887, III., 1882, 244.
128 Li Sp., 2d ed., 532.
12 Gronovius. Orient., 49-
131 Loudon. Hort., 1860, 688.
182 Burr. Field and Gard. Veg., 1863, 631.
133 Harlan. U.S. Pat. Off. Rept., 1861, 528.
332 The American Naturalist. [April,
Rhubarb is called in France, hubarbe ; in Germany, rhabarber ;
in Flanders and Holland, vabaréer ; in Denmark, rhabarber ; in
Italy, rabarbaro, robarbaro ; in Spain and Portugal, rucbarbo™.
ROCAMBOLE. Allium sorodoprasum L.
The culture of Rocambole is limited in this country, but in
southern Europe the Genoese bring vast quantities to Provence
under the name of ail rouge’. It is not of ancient culture, as it
cannot be recognized in the plants of the ancient Greek and Roman
authors, and finds no mention of garden cultivation by the early
botanists. It is the Scorodoprasum II. of Clusius’’, 1601, the
Allii genus, ophioscorodon dictum quibusdam, of J. Bauhin 7,
1651, but no indications of culture in either case. Ray”, in
1688, does not refer to its cultivation in England. In 1726
Bryant '* classes it with edibles. In France, however, it was
grown by Quintyne™ in 1690. It is enumerated for American
gardens in 1806'*. No varieties are mentioned.
Rocambole is called in France, aí rocambole, ail rouge, ail
d Espane, eschalote d’ Espagne, rocambole ; in Germany, roccambol;
in Denmark rokaméol ; in Italy aglio d’Indi; In Portugal, alho
de Hespana?® It 1698 in England it was called Spanish-Garlick,
and in 1826 rockambole.
1% Vilmorin. Les. Pl. Pot., 538.
185 Bon Jard. 1882, 414.
13 Clusius. Hist., 1601, 190.
ty. Bauhin. 1652, 11., sco.
138 Ray. Hist., 1688, II., 1120.
1389 Townsend. Seedsman, 1726, 25.
42 McMahon. Am. Gard. Cal., 1806, 190.
143 Vilmorin. Les. Pl. Pot., 3.
\
1890.] The Knees of the Taxodium distichum. 333
THE KNEES OF THE ZAXOD/IUM DISTICHUM.
BY ROBERT H. LAMBORN.
N a“ Preliminary Notice of Some of the Results of the United
States Geological Survey Examination of Swamp Land,” by
Prof. N. S. Shaler, of Cambridge, Mass. (Science, March 8, 89),
it is stated as the result of observations begun in 1874, while en-
gaged on the Kentucky State Survey, and continued and recorded
in various publications by the author, official and otherwise, ex-
tending up to date, that the occurrence of knees on the Taxodium
distichum is explained “through a need of an aeration of the sap
which is denied the roots that are under water.” He also ascribed
the enlarged base of the tree to the same need of aeration of the
sap, and discards as disproven the hypothesis that such enlarged
or buttressed base is useful to the tree as securing greater resist-
ance to storms.
In the Memoir (by the same author) of the Museum of Com-
parative Anatomy (Harvard College, 1887), the theory of aeration
is still more distinctly enunciated. “The failure of knees to de-
velop when they grow on high ground; the development of the
knees when the roots are in permanent water; the rise of the
knees above permanent water level, and to a height varying with
that level, and, finally, the destruction of the trees whenever the
level of permanent water rises above the tops of the knees,—these
facts incontestably show that there is some necessary connection
between them and the function of the roots, when the latter are
permanently submerged.” “It seems likely, therefore, that some
process connected with the exposure of the sap to the air takes
place in these protuberances.” Following these official publica-
tions, a communication was presented to the Academy of Natural
Sciences, of Philadelphia (pp. 67 to 69, Proceedings, April, 1889),
by Prof. Wilson, of the University of Penna., in which the result
of certain observations made by him in Florida in 1885-6 are
given. He records a careful series of experiments made by dig-
.
334 The American Naturalist. [April,
ging up young trees, by cultivating the plant from the seed, and
by observing exposed root systems. He finds that “if the tree
_ requires, from inundation or other causes, more aerating surface
than can be readily or rapidly produced by young and growing
roots, then either the whole upper surface of the root in question
may become more active and rapid in its growth, or the places of
growth may be limited to certain definite points’—so knees are
produced. He continues: “I do not propose at this time to dis-
cuss the function of these knees, further than to say that their
location and occurrence indicate beyond a doubt that they are for
purposes of aerating the plant.”
In the monthly publication of the Pennsylvania Forestry As-
sociation (Forest Leaves, December, 1889), in a careful article on.
the Taxodium, Prof. Wilson, referring to Prof. Shaler’s work, again
adverts to the knees, and says: “ From recent experiments made
by the writer at the department of Biology, it has been demon-
strated that the knees are organs produced by the roots for the
purpose of taking in a greater supply of oxygen than could
otherwise be had from the surrounding water.
This theory which finds in the knees and swollen boles of the
cypress the sole function of conveying something advantageous
from the atmosphere to the sap of thetree during periods of sub-
mergence, seems to have been entertained as early as 1847, when
Dr. Dickinson and Andrew Brown read before the Association of
American Geologists, in Boston, a study of “ The Cypress timber of
Mississippi and Louisiana.” In this interesting illustrated article
of eight pages in Sz//iman’s Journal for January, 1848, they say,
“ The cone-shaped, leafless protuberances, sometimes ten feet high,
growing from the interlacing roots in a dense forest, resemble in
all but their color the crowded stalagmites in some enormous cav-
ern. By means of these protuberances the roots, though totally
submerged, have a communication with the atmosphere. We
suggest,” they say, “ that this function is fulfilled by the knees.”
When this communication is cut off by the annual overflow ris-
ing above the tops of the knees, the swollen base carries the simi-
lar structure of the roots up the bole of the tree to an elevation
sufficient to reach the atmospheric air.
1890] The Knees of the Taxodium distichum. 335
Until recently this aerating theory seems to have met with no op-
position, and it bid fair to become the generally accepted explana-
tion for these strange vegetable growths, which travelers in our
Southern states so often observe and mention.
A paper in Garden and Forest, the result of careful studies in
Florida, which we now reproduce, will be found interesting because
it explains the same phenomena upon an entirely different assump-
tion. It is as follows:
From time to time, during and since my first visit to our southern
tier of states in 1876, I have examined, sketched and photographed
the roots of the Deciduous Cypress—the Taxodium distichum of
Richard. I was attracted to the tree because of the singular beauty of
its forms and foliage, and by the unusual boldness with which it raises
its great, gray, smooth column, sometimes over a hundred feet perpen-
dicularly, above and upon what an engineer would pronounce a most
dangerous foundation—loose submerged sand, the saturated morass or
the soft alluvium of low river margins.! But notwithstanding this
seeming insecurity, I have never found a healthy cypress that had fallen
before the fierce hurricanes that sweep through the southern forest-
lands.?
The surprising and characteristic temerity of the tree is accompanied
by another striking peculiarity—it almost invariably, in soft soils,
throws upward from the upper surface of its roots conspicuous protu-
berances that are known as ‘‘ Cypress knees.’’
These seemingly abnormal growths have attracted much attention,
and for more than half a century haye furnished an enigma to the so-
1 It is a pleasure to follow Bartram in his enthusiastic burst of admiration for this tree
as he writes of it in east Florida 116 years ago: ‘‘ This Cypress is in ‘the first order of
North American trees. Its e E is EAE On approaching it we are
struck with a kind of it: abies lifting its cumbrous top
toward the skies and casting a wide shade on the groun a dark intervening cloud,
which from time to time excludes the rays of the sun ey delicacy of its co he
texture of 2 leaves exceed everything in veg Prodigious bui
m the on every side, each of which terminates underground in a very large,
strong, Ain met which strikes ae and branches every way just under the surface
of the earth, and from these roots grow woody cones, called Cypress knees, four, five and
six feet high, and from six to eighteen lares and two feet in diameter at the base
2 Elliot (“ Bot. of S. C. and Ga.,” 1824, p. 643) says: “ This Cypress resists the vio-
` lence of our autumnal gales better than any other of our forest trees.” y friend,
By m
Dr. J. S. Newberry, whose extended geological labors have led him to irait many
widely separated Cypress-bearing regions in the Mississippi Valley and elsewhere, I am
assured that he remembers no instance of the overthrow by the wind of a living T. dis-
336 The American Naturalist. [Apa
lution of which scientific travelers have addressed themselves.
Michaux made a careful study of the Cypresses, and in his ‘‘ Sylva,”
published in 1819, says: ‘‘ The roots are charged with protuberances
eighteen to twenty-four inches high. These protuberances are always
hollow, and smooth on the surface, and are covered with a reddish
bark, like the roots, which they resemble in softness of wood. They
exhibit no sign of vegetation, and I have never succeeded in obtaining
shoots by wounding the surface and covering it with earth. They are
peculiar to the Cypress, and begin to appear when it is twenty to
twenty-five feet high.” Michaux adds, with the frankness natural to a
scientific mind, ‘‘No cause can be assigned for their existence.”
Hoopes says in his ‘‘ Book of Evergreens’’ (1868): ‘‘ No apparent
function for which the knees are adapted has been ascertained.’’ And
Veitch, who seems to have studied the protuberances in England, gives
in his “‘ Manual ” (1881, p. 216) a picture of a tree growing at Iles-
worth, surrounded by scores of .knees, and says: ‘‘ They are peculiar
to this Cypress, and no cause has been assigned for their existence.’
That the question continued in this unilluminated condition until
recently was shown in 1882, when I had the privilege of visiting, in
company with the highest botanical authorities,—Dr. Gray, Thomas
Meehan, John H. Redfield, John Ball, Professor Carruthers and others,
—the classic collection of trees planted by William Bartram on the bor-
ders of the Schuylkill. There we examined a fine Cypress and the
knees it had produced. Dr. Gray then told me that the use to the
tree of the knees was unknown. I remarked that they might be a
means of raising a point on the root above surrounding water to the
end that a leaf-bearing shoot could readily sprout therefrom, To this — 2
hd
suggestion he made the same statement made by Michaux and above
recorded. Unaware that the subject had been so thoroughly investi-
gated, I have since that period examined hundreds of living “‘ knees”?
in southern swamps, and found upon them no trace of bud, leaf or
sprout, except where some seed may have lodged in a decayed or de-
pressed portion of the surface and there taken root.
In 1887 I had the good fortune to find a number of Cypress trees un-
der such unusual conditions that their aforetime subterranean anatomy
could be studied without obstruction, and I reached a conclusion re-
specting the use to the treé of the protuberances which I have retained
in my note-book, awaiting an opportunity to make some further illus-
3I have ridden among them in central Florida, in temporarily dry upland basins, pig
they arose to my breast as I sat upon the saddle, and were not less than seven feet
height above the root. :
cheng EE tes ah Bt
|
PLATE AIL
1890.] The Knees of the Taxodium distichum. 337
trative sketches before placing it before botanists. Some recent publi-
cations on the subject by widely and favorably known authors have,
however, ascribed to the Cypress-knees the sole function of aérating
the sap of the parent tree, and this idea bids fair to become embedded
in botanical literature. Therefore this communication comes to you
earlier than I had purposed sending it.
Stretches of the shore of Lake Monroe, in central Florida, are closely
set with large Cypress-trees. They grow in various kinds of bottom,
—clay, mud and sand. Those of which I shall here speak stood in
sand so loose that when the level of the water was lowered the waves
readily washed it away and carried it into the depths of the lake.
me four vertical feet of the root-system were thus finely exposed.
After several days spent in examining a score or more large trees that
had been thus denuded I became convinced that the most important
function of the Cypress knee is to stiffen and strengthen the root, in
order that a great tree may anchor itself safely in a yielding material.
The word ‘‘ anchor ’’ is indeed an apt one here, for the living root,
curved to its work and firmly grasping the sandy bottom, suggests viv-
idly the best bower-anchor that a man-of-war may throw into similar
oose sands, when threatened by the very atmospheric forces that the
Taxodium has been fitting itself to resist since Tertiary times.4
Truly a most admirable and economical arrangement to stiffen and
strengthen the connection between the shank of the anchor and its
fluke is this knee, and usually in the living anchor the fluke branches
or broadens as it descends, so that its effectiveness is greatly increased,
like the sailor’s anchor of many flukes, or the ‘‘ mushroom anchor ”’
that he may have learned to depend upon where the bottom is softest.
The accompanying picture (see page 20) is from a photograph that
I made in 1887 of the lower portion of a tree that rises some seventy
feet above the shore line of Lake Monroe. The original surface of the
sand was near the level of the higher roots. The picture shows the
manner in which this peculiar species throws out horizontal roots from
its conical (usually hollow) buttressed base. At different distances
from this conical base these horizontal roots project strong branches
more or less perpendicularly into the earth. When such perpendicular
‘* flukes ’’ branch from the main horizontal ‘“ shank,’’ it will be seen,
4 My friend Thomas Meehan informs me [December 17th, 1889] that he has “ observed
a case where the interior hollow makes an annual layer of bark equally with the exter-
ior,” and he is of the a mat a ai is by the decay of me area enya of this inside
course of bark after seve this habit is general
it is an — menne of kebi ae of Po aena a ge smallest cos
e tree, a f the
So
Am. Nat. aApdls.
338 -© The American Naturalist. | [April,
there is formed a large knob, which is the ‘‘ knee’ under discussion.
This knee, when fully developed, is generally hollow, comparatively
soft, gnarled, and very difficult to rupture, so that it has the quality of
a spring that becomes more rigid as it is extended or compressed out of
its normal shape. When in a hurricane the great tree rocks back and
forth on its base, and with its immense leverage pulls upon this odd-
shaped wooden anchor, instead of straightening out in the soft mater- .
jal, as an ordinary root might, thus allowing the tree to lean over and
add its weight to the destructive force of the storm, it grips the sand
as the bower-anchor would do, and resists every motion. The elasticity
at the point of junction allows one after another of the perpendicular
flukes attached to the same shank to come into effective action, so that
sea
A Yep
INN
HYPOTHETICAL!
HS
Bae /
Y Wy y l / j
YY YY)
From ‘‘ Garden and Forest.” Copyright, 1890, by the “ Garden and Forest Pub. Co.”
Ss
before being drawn from the sand or ruptured the combined flukes
present an enormousjresistance.
The above drawing I have made for the purpose of simplifying the
discussion. It shows a hypothetical Cypress with two roots of the same
length and diameter—one with knees, the other without them. The
superior strength of the stiffened root would seem sufficiently evident ;
but, with the view of obtaining the judgment of a mind thoroughly
trained in questions of this nature, I submitted the drawing to my
friend, Charles Macdonald, late Director of the American Society of
Civil Engineers, whose eye has been accustomed to estimating the
value of strains in structures by an active experience of twenty-five
1890.] The Knees of the Taxodium distichum. 339
years, and who has just finished the largest drawbridge in America, at
New London. Mr. Macdonald agreed with me that the root B, which
is trussed with the knees C and C’, would very largely exceed in
capacity for holding the tree firmly in yielding material the root A,
which is similar but destitute of knees. This greatly increased security
against destruction by storms is, I think, a sufficient advantage to ac-
count for the existence and maintenance of an organ that draws so
slightly upon the vitality of the plant.
It is proper to record here another observation that may explain the
existence of the elevated, narrow point which the knee sometimes
develops, and which rises higher than the curved growth that would be
necessary to secure the maximum resistance to compression and exten-
sion. The home of the Cypress is in broad, level rivet-margins subject
to periodic overflow, where hundreds of square miles become covered
with a shallow bed of slowly moving water, or in basin-like depressions,
sometimes of vast extent, where from time to time water rises above
the level of the horizontal roots. Then these stake-like protuberances,
rising into and through the current formed by the drainage or by the
winds, catch and hold around the roots of the parent trees many
thousand pounds of ‘‘ plant food’’ in the form of reeds and grass, or
small twigs among which dead leaves become entangled. The tree
that exclusively possesses this source of nutrition is at an advantage
over all others in the neighborhood, and the higher these attenuated
t drift-catchers ’’ rise in the stream, the more drift will they arrest, for
the highest stratum of water is richest in float. The theory that some
distinguished writers have suggested that the knee is a factor in the
aération of the sap, and that the tree’s death is prevented by such
aération taking place in the upper portion of the knee during periods
of high water, would seem to need careful experimental confirmation.
Where nature forms an organ whose purpose is to preserve the life of
the individual, she takes special care to adapt such organ to the func-
tion it is depended upon to perform. In this case the rough, dry bark
of the knee offers a most imperfect means of access for the oxygen or
other gases of the atmosphere to the interior vessels of the plant, and
instead of presenting broad surfaces of permeable membrane, formed
for transmitting elastic fluids, at its upper extremity the protuberance
becomes more narrow and presents less surface as it rises, so that when
during periods of high water the life of the tree is most jeopardized,
the life-saving organ attains its minimum capacity. In the presence
of this manifest want of adaptation it also seems important for the ac-
ceptance of the aérating theory that some one should experimentally
340 The Amerwan Naturalist. [April,
show that the aérating organ of the Cypress really aérates to an extent
sufficient to make it of material advantage to the plant.
It was long ago observed that no knees are developed when the tree
grows in upland upon a firm bottom, in which ordinary simple roots
can obtain in the ordinary way the hold necessary to resist overturning
forces, and where there is no stratum of water to transport food. So
conservative is nature, that she reverts to an original or adopts a
simpler form of root even in a single generation if the need for the
more complicated arrangement ceases to exist.
Finally, I may perhaps be permitted to add an observation regard-
ing the roots of other trees that trench upon the same soils affected by
the Cypress and often take advantage of the anchors it sets so boldly
in treacherous bottoms. These trees project their cable-like, flexible
‘roots in every direction horizontally, interlacing continually until a
fabric is woven on the surface of the soft earth like the tangled web of
a gigantic basket. Out of this close wicker-work, firmly attached to
it, and dependent for their support upon its integrity, rise the tree
trunks, Thus slowly, and by a community of growth and action, a
structure is formed that supplies for each tree a means of resisting the
storms. Such communities of trees, provided with ordinary roots,
advance against and overcome enemies where singly they would perish
in the conflict. The cyclone, the loose sand, the morass—these are
the enemies they contend with, as it were, in unbroken phalanx, shoul-
der to shoulder, their shields locked, their spears bristling against the }
foe ; but the graceful plumed Cypress, the knight-errant of the sylvan 4
host, bearing with him his trusty anchor—the emblem of Hope—goes |
forth alone and defiant, afar from his fellows, scorning the methods of
his vassals, and planting himself boldly amid a waste of waters, where
no other tree dare venture, stands, age after age, erect, isolated, but
ever ready to do battle with the elements. Twenty centuries of driving
rain and snow and fierce hurricane beat upon his towering form, and a
yet he stands there, the stern, gray and solitary sentinel of the morass,
clinging to the quaking earth with the grasp of Hercules, to whom :
men were ama temples when his wardenship began.
5 The “ Chemical Theory" of the Cypress knee seems to be but a revival of the elabo-
rate hypothesis of Dickinson and Brown, published in ‘cone memoir on 7. distichum in
the American Journa Science and Arts, in January, 1848. cores in dustrious of
servers discard = i i en
> A D e a a N E 23
Pa NAI ene cee eee ira is en
e spongy
and, strangely h, even the eading base o singe phair
with the a Porat 1 that the sree ere and most celebrated | lighthouse i in the world—
: — eg owedly m after
of withstanding the — shocks of the En lish Channel. By means of a curious draw-
ing they sho ollen portions of the base rise " to the top of the highest water
level, which ine in some instanc ces, attain an n elevation of at least gery feet; ”
thus continuing the functions ure of the knees, “up the f the tree
to the atmos: re ag
1890.] From Brute to Man 341
FROM BRUTE TO MAN.
BY CHARLES MORRIS.
puat man as an animal is an offspring of the lower life king-
dom, none who are familiar with the facts of science now
think of denying. Despite the indignant protest against this idea
when promulgated by Darwin less than thirty years ago, it is
now generally accepted by all those who have fully considered
the evidence, and who therefore are alone competent to decide
upon it. But that man as a thinking being has descended from
the lower animals is a very different matter, and is by no means
proved. Regarding the origin of man’s intellect, there is much
difference of opinion, even among scientists, and such a radical
evolutionist as Alfred Russel Wallace finds here a yawning gap
in the line of descent, and believes that the intellect of man is a
direct gift from the realm of spirits. His explanation, it is true,
is more difficult than the difficulty itself. It cannot justly be
called a hypothesis, for a hypothesis should have some facts to
give it warrant, and this has none. That man’s mind cannot be
explained on the principle of natural selection alone we may,
with Wallace, admit. But it certainly would have been better
had he on his part more fully considered the possibilities of use
and effort, and other natural agencies, before dragging in the
angels to bridge the chasm.
That man’s intellect at its lowest level is not different in kind
from the brute intellect at its highest level Romanes has satisfac-
torily shown. His evidence, indeed, is superabundant. Contro-
versy on this subject is too apt to be based on the difference
between the intellect of the brute and that of enlightened man.
Yet the mental gap between the latter and the lowest savage is
quite as great as that between the savage and the brute. From
the intellect of the animal to that of enlightened man the distance
is enormous, yet throughout its whole extent, with a single ex-
ception, can be traced intermediate steps of mental development
342 The American Naturalist. [April,
This exception is the interval between the anthropoid ape and the
primitive savage. This is the only gap that remains open in the
kingdom of the mind,—the one important lost chapter from the
story of mental evolution. It is acknowledged by every well-
informed scientist that man’s body came up from below. Its
links of association with the lower animals are too many and too
significant to admit of any other theory. Supernaturalism, there-
fore, has taken its last stand upon man’s mind, and claims that |
here at least the line of descent is a broken one, and that the gap
could not have been filled without a direct interposition from the
realm of spirit.
This view of the case is not likely to be accepted as final,
Science has bridged with facts so many.chasms in the kingdom
of nature, that it will scarcely be ready to admit, certainly not
till the case has been more thoroughly investigated, that here is
a chasm which cannot be bridged, and must be leaped. And
yet the known facts that bear upon the question are stubborn
things to explain on the evolution theory. If, for instance, we
examine the existing conditions of ape and savage intellect no
evidence of any active evolution can be discovered. However
the anthropoid apes gained their mental acuteness, there is nothing
_ to show that it is increasing. The same may be said of the
lowest savages. They are mentally stagnant. The indications
are that their intellectual progress for thousands of years in the
past has been almost nothing. Yet if man is the descendant of
an anthropoid ape there must have been an extraordinary degree
of mental development between the one state and the other
to produce the great increase in size of brain and activity of intel-
lect. Under the present conditions of imperceptible progress,
the whole tertiary period of geology, and perhaps much of the
secondary period, would be needed to fill the gap. Yet no such
extensive interval can be admitted, and if we seek to deduce
man’s mind from the ape mind we must be able to show that
influences existed calculated to produce a much more rapid men-
tal evolution than now can be perceived in either ape or savage-
Man has changed but little physically since he became man,
and perhaps changed little during the period in which he was
°
1890.] From Brute to Man. 343
becoming man. Could we behold the species of ape which,
in the opinion of evolutionists, was his ancestor, we should
probably be able to discover no important differences in form.
The change has been in the brain, not in the body. The trans-
forming influences acted upon the organ of the mind, not upon
the organs of physical life. The brain has yielded to these forces,
not by varying in form, but by increasing in size, and by a special
expansion of that portion of it devoted to intellectual activity.
This great increase in the size of the brain, with the accompany-
ing remarkable unfoldment of the mental powers, certainly indi-
cated the action of very vigorous and long-continued transforming
- influences; which, if we may judge from the mental stagnation
of the present ape and savage, no longer exist.
It is true that the mental organism may be far more plastic
than the body, and that no time relations between the development
of the intellect and of the physical structure can be drawn.
Transformation, under influences of equal potency, may possibly
be produced more rapidly in the one case than in the other. An
extraordinary development has taken place in the human intellect
within a few thousands or tens of thousands of years, yielding
the difference that now exists between the cultivated European
and the debased savage, and which perhaps equals that between
the latter and the ape. If, therefore, it can be shown that influ-
ences were at work upon original man as powerful as those that
have produced civilization, we shall have done something towards
showing how the ape brain may, in a comparatively Jimited period,
have become the brain of man.
The leading causes of the development of civilized man are
not at all difficult to discover. Undoubtedly the most potent
among them was the influence of warfare, the struggle be-
tween man and man on the one hand, and between man and the
conditions of soil and climate in the colder latitudes on the
other hand. More recently competition in commerce and indus-
try has taken the place of the warlike struggle for existence, and
the contest for wealth and position is continuing the effect which
the contest for life produced. Hostility between man and nature,
and between man and man, has for ages been invigorating the
344 The American Naturalist. [April
human intellect, replacing the dull of brain and slow of thought
by the quick-witted, energetic, and intelligent, and we may safely
look upon this as the most active agent in the unfoldment of civ-
ilization.
Was the development from ape to human intellect due to a
similar conflict? Inthe tropics, the home of the savage, war be-
tween man and nature scarcely exists, and war between man and
man is in its primitive stage. Yet here, as elsewhere, it has much
to do with such mental unfoldment as exists. Mastery in warfare
is due to superior mental resources, which are gradually gained
through the exigencies of conflict, and are shown in greater
shrewdnesss or cunning, superior ability in leadership, and the in-
vention of more destructive weapons. War acts vigorously on
men’s minds, peace acts sluggishly ; and the whole story of man-
kind tells us that intellectual evolution has been due in great part
to the destruction in war of the mentally weaker, the preserva-
tion of the more energetic and able, and the effect of conflict in
producing intellectual activity. But no organized warfare or alert
conflict with nature can be perceived in the lowest existing sav-
ages. This powerful agent of intellectual development is cer-
tainly not at present exerting much influence upon them; they
accept the world as they find it, without question or revolt, and
their thoughts and habits are as unchangeable as the laws of the
Medes and Persians.
But that this stagnancy has always prevailed may well be
doubted. The position of the savage is to-day very different
from what it was ten or twenty thousand years ago. Then he
was dominant upon the earth, the undisputed lord of the king-
dom of life. Now new lords of life have come, who are pressing
in upon him on every side, preventing his expansion, hampering
his activities, and gradually crowding him off the earth. What
powers of development primitive man may have possessed AE
hardly, therefore, be determined from a study of the existing
Savage, and to gain any solution of the problem we must con-
sider the position of primitive man.
As we have said, the lower savages and the anthropoid apes
are at present alike. mentally stagnant, while the mental interval
fae ks yor
ee ee er aie i
1890.] From Brute to Man. 345
between them is very great. But primitive man differed from the
lower animals in one important particular. He was lord and
master of the animal kingdom, the dominant being in the world
of life. He had no rival in this lordship. None of the herbivora,
and none of the carnivora, in any full sense, have ever possessed
a similar mastery. The large carnivora are dominant only over
the weaker herbivora. So far as we know, the only animal which,
except in self-defence, will assail the large carnivora, is the
gorilla. This powerful ape is the only creature, except man,
of which the lion seems afraid. It does not attack it, however,
from any desire for mastery, but simply to drive away a danger-
ous neighbor.
Man stands alone in his relation to the lower animals He is
lord of them all. Savages everywhere are aggressive against,
and are feared and avoided by, the largest and strongest beasts of
their region. This hostility does not come from the wish to
drive away an enemy. It is the desire for food or the instinct of
control that moves the savage hunter. He feels, and prides him-
self on, his lordship. Man does not fight defensively, like the
gorilla, but offensively, and whatever be his position in relation
to his fellow-man, he admits no equal in the world below him.
This lordship was not gained without a struggle, and that a
severe and protracted one. The animal kingdom did not submit
supinely to man’s mastery. The war must have been long and
bitter, however fixed and settled the relations now seem. Rest
has followed victory. The animal world is now submissive to
man, or in dread of his strength and resources, and the strain
upon his mental powers has ceased. But there is certainly reason
to believe that men’s intellectual progress was due to warlike
struggles alike in the primitive and in the historic epoch, the
former being a conflict with animals, the latter with man.
We cannot describe at length this primitive hostility. It will
suffice to say that it must have been attended with a somewhat
rapid mental progress, probably greatly in excess of that which
we now perceive in apes and lower man. For the battle was
fought with the mind, not with the body. That is to say, man
did not depend on hereditary instincts and his natural weapons
346 The American Naturalist. [April,
of claws and teeth for victory, but brought his mental resources
into play. Cunning, caution, boldness where necessary, close
observation, variation in modes of attack and defence to suit
varying circumstances, are hostile methods of purely mental
origin. They are not peculiar to man; many of the lower
animals employ them, though none to such an-extent as man.
But the use of other than the natural weapons is nearly peculiar
to man. Some of the monkeys occasionally and imperfectly
employ missiles, but man alone has become aware of their great
utility, and employs them constantly and skilfully. By the use
of artificial implements of warfare his powers were enormously
increased, and the steps of progress in his subordination of the
lower animals were doubtless marked out by his invention of
more and more efficient weapons.
We take it for granted that the animal world did not submit
without a struggle, and a protracted one. Step by step, through
many centuries of conflict, were the larger animals subdued. It
was man’s mind, not his body, that subdued them. Physically
they were his equals or superiors. His superiority lay in his
mental resources, and his victory was due solely to his mental
superiority. The effect of the conflict, therefore, bore principally
upon his mind, and its organ, the brain, very little upon the
body; and when we consider the extent of the achievement we
cannot be surprised at the result. Such an advantage, if gained
_ by any of the lower animals through variation of physical struc-
ture alone, could not but have produced radical and extraordinary
changes in size, strength, and utility of natural weapons. In man
the influences of variation were exerted upon the brain alone,
and the decided increase in size and activity of this organ does
not seem too great for the magnitude of the result. The conflict
ended, man settled down to quiet consciousness of victory, but
with a much larger brain, and greatly superior mental powers
than at the beginning of the struggle. This brain and the higher
mentality it indicated enabled him to hold the position he had
gained, but there was no special further strain upon his powers,
and he simply held his own until a new era of war, now between
man and man, or between man and cold and stubborn nature,
*
1890. ] From Brute to Man. 347
called again upon the resources of the mind, and a new era of
intellectual evolution began. It is quite possible, as we have
said, that the strain in the former case was equal to that in the
latter.
Not every animal is adapted by nature to such an evolution.
Nearly every animal would be prevented from it by physical
disadvantages. Even the anthropoid apes lack certain essential
conditions of structure and habits, though favored by the forma-
tion of their hands, and their power of grasping and using
weapons. But of all animals, the species from which man
descended seems to have been the best adapted, and far the most
likely, to become the ancestor of a thinking being. For the
mental evolution of man was due not only to his struggle for
mastery, but also to special advantages which he possessed in
the physical structure and the social relations of his ape ances-
tor. Let us consider the former of these. We know that the
ape family are fruit-eaters, and that trees are their natural
habitat. But the larger apes manifest an inclination to descend
to the earth, probably from their weight rendering a continual
life in trees none too agreeable. The largest of them, the
gorilla, dwells almost normally on the ground, and it is quite
probable that this was the case with man’s ancestor. On the
ground apes have to make certain changes in their method of
locomotion. In the trees they move in a quadrupedal or in a
semi-bipedal attitude, by crawling along the limbs, or by walking
along the lower and clasping higher limbs with their hands. On
the ground either a quadrupedal, a bipedal, or an intermediate
motion must be assumed. The baboons, whose fore and hind
limbs are nearly equal in length, have become quadrupeds.. The
three principal species of anthropoid apes, in each of which the
fore limbs are of considerable length, have adopted an intermediate
mode of motion, swinging their bodies between their hands. The
gibbon alone walks in an erect attitude, its very long arms
enabling it to use its hands in walking without bending its body.
All these animals are essentially quadrupeds, inasmuch as they use
all four limbs in locomotion. The gibbon alone is somewhat
inclined to walk as a biped, but not when moving swiftly.
348 The American Naturalist. [April,
Man is structurally different from all these. His arms are
shorter as compared with his legs than in any of the existing
large apes. It would be impossible for him to walk in the
swinging manner of these apes, or by aiding himself with his
hands like the gibbon. Quadrupedal motion on hands and feet
would be almost equally difficult for him. If his ancestor was
like him in this respect, as was undoubtedly the case, then on
descending to the ground it must have been forced to walk on its
feet alone, from the much greater difficulty, if not the impossi-
bility, of the other modes of motion.
man’s ancestor, however, became a biped through this
necessity, it at once assumed a position of remarkable advantage,
becoming the only species among the higher animals that did
not have to use all four of its limbs in locomotion. His arms and
hands were freed for other purposes, and the grasping powers of
the hands added immensely to the advantages which this gave.
In fact, there can be no question that man owes his supremacy in
the animal world to the possession of two limbs which were free
from duty as walking organs and could be used fully for attack
and defence, and to the grasping power of his hands, which
rendered easy and natural the employment of weapons. To this
must be added the mental development which all known anthro-
poid apes possess. These marked advantages at once changed
his relation to the lower world of animals. Flight was no longer
necessary to safety. He was able to meet much larger animals
on equal ground. He was already, like all the apes, mentally
acute, observing, and capable of foreseeing and providing for con-
tingencies. As his power of walking erect became easy and natural,
and the adaptation of his arms and hands to the use of weapons
grew more definite, his standing in the animal kingdom essentially
changed; fear and flight ended, so far as animal foes were con-
cerned, retreat ceased, attack began, his mental acumen was called
into active play, and the great battle for mastery of which we have
spoken came fully into play.
Still another essential element in this development was the
social habit of man’s ancestor. If we may judge from the con-
ditions of existing savages, the man-ape was a more social animal
1890.] From Brute to Man. 349
than any of the existing anthropoids. The orang and the gorilla
are not sociable to any important extent. The chimpanzee is
somewhat more so. The indications are that man’s ancestor was
social in a higher sense than any of these, and employed the
principle of mutual aid in a greater degree. It is scarcely neces-
sary to speak of the advantage this would give in the struggle
with animals. This advantage is patent. But there is one im-
portant result of close social relations of the utmost importance
in this connection,—that of education. All social animals edu-
cate one another, either with or without design. Anything of
importance learned by one member of the group is quickly im-
parted to all members, and the more rapidly the better their
methods of communication and the more complete their system
of mutual aid. The lower monkeys teach their young, and
indicate to one another anything of importance. There is no
doubt that any new and useful weapon or method of assault or
defence devised by any member of such a group would become
quickly and permanently the property of all the members, and
would constitute an important aid in mental development. A
long succession of such ideas or inventions, gained by single
bright members of evolving mankind, and taught to the others,
must have played a highly useful part in the progress from ape-*
hood to manhood.
Socialism has been an important requisite of mental evolution
throughout the animal kingdom. The highly social ants and
bees have raised themselves mentally far beyond all the other
insects. The social beavers show a remarkable mental ability as
compared with the other rodents. It is, indeed, the communal
rather than the simply social animals that have made these great
steps of mental progress, those whose labor is devoted solely to
the good of the community, and who work in concert for the
advantage of each and all. To what extent man was communal
in his developing stage it is impossible to say, but the general
communism of barbarism may well have been an outgrowth of a
primitive condition. There is reason to believe that the individ-
ualism which now prevails is of late origin, and was not a char-
acteristic of original man.
350 The American Naturalist. [April,
One further agency was necessary to man’s development—that
he should become carnivorous. The apes are fruit-eaters, and
lack the native fierceness and the aggressive disposition of the
flesh-eating animals. Doubtless man’s ancestor was a fruit-eater,
but new habits of life probably accustomed him to a mixed fruit
and flesh diet at an early period, and the quest of animals for
` food must have led him to. wider excursions and more active
enterprise than in the case of any of his frugivorous kindred.
Here was an agency calculated to bring him into new scenes and
novel relations to nature, and thus greatly to increase the strain
upon his faculties and the consequent activity of his mind.
If man came from the ape, it seems certainly very probable
that these were the channels of his coming, these the adaptations,
the methods, andthe exigencies through which a frugivorous ape
became an omnivorous man, with a brain like that of the ape in
form but greatly developed in size, and faculties like those of the
ape in quality, but immensely developed in width and height.
From being the equal of the animals he became lord of the
animals, their peer perhaps in body, their monarch in mind."
1 The views veray in this paper are not offered as original, The argument from
the social habits of man has been advanced by myself in a previous paper in the
advancement, it has been dealt with se Prof. E. D. Cope in papers en meric “ The
Method of Creation of Organic Types,” ‘‘ The Hypothesis of Evolution,” “ The Review
of the Modern Doctrine of Evolution,” and others, which may be found in sg gn
entitled “ Origin of the Fittest.” The influence of Use and ra Se agents in Evolution,
over the world of brutes, and the influence of this struggle on the growth of the brain
' and the a of intelligence: This view, so far as the writer knows, has not been.
advanced be
1890.] Record of American Zoology. 351
RECORD OF AMERICAN ZOOLOGY.
BY J. S. KINGSLEY.
T is the intention to catalogue here in systematic order all
papers relating to the Zoology of North America, beginning
with the year 1889. To the title and reference will fe added
such notes upon the contents of the papers as will make the
record more valuable to the student. An asterisk indicates that
the paper has not been seen by the recorder. Authors are re-
quested to send copies of their papers to J. S. Kingsley, Lincoln,
Nebraska.
GENERAL.
Witson, H. V.—On the Breeding Seasons of Marine Animals
in the Bahamas. J. H. U. Circ., VIII., p. 38—Sponges, Gorgo-
nids, Corals, Annelids. Chiton, Aplysia, Anolis, Gonodactylus.
Witson, H. V.—Report as Bruce Fellow of the Johns Hop-
kins University. J. H. U. Circ., VIII., p. 40, 1889.—Account of
work at Bahamas, including notice of sense organs in Hoplophora.
Herrick, F. H—Days and Nights by the Sea. Am. NAT.,
XXIII, p. 406. 1889.
STEARNS, R. E. C.—Instances of the Effects of Musical Sounds”
on Animals. Am. Nat., XXIV., p. 22. 1890.
HEILPRIN, ANGELO —The einai Islands: A Ciigistivation to
the Physical History and Zoology of the Somers Archipelago,
[Etc.] Philadelphia, 1889.—Reprints from the Proceedings of
the Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia.
PackarpD, A. S.—Cave Fauna of North America; with Re-
marks on the anatomy of the brain and origin of the blind
species. Memoirs Nation. Acad. ‘Sci., Vol. IV., p. 1. 1889.—
Vide Infra.
PROTOZOA.
LEIDY, Jos—EpH.—On several Gregarines and a singular mode
of conjugation of one of them. Proc. Phila. Acad., 1889, p. 9.
—Describes Gregarina philica from Nyctobates pennsylvanicus,
G. actinotus from Scolopucryptops sexspinosus, G. megacephela
352 The American Naturalist. [April,
from Cermatia forceps, G. microcephala from Hoplocephla
bicornis. The paper is reproduced in Journal de Micrographit,
Nov., 1889.
frok J. A—The Polar Differentiation of Volvox and the
Specialization of possible Sense Organs. Am. Nart., XXIII., p.
218, 1889. (See Proc. Phila. Acad., 1889, p. 138.)
KeLLiëorr, D. S—Intestirial Ponie Infusoria of Frogs.
Microscope, IX., p. 46, 1889.—Presence of Nyctotherus cordiformis.
, H. M—A Note on Diffugia urceolata. Microscope,
IX., p. 307. 1889.—Difflugia leaving its shell.
LATHAM, V. pA L.—Short Notes in Practical Biology. —Am-
oeba. Am. Mo. Micros. Jour., X., p. 151.—Laboratory work;
nothing new.
Harcırrt, C. W.—Methods of Mounting Infusoria. Am, Mo.
Micros. Jour., X., p. 183. 1889.—Kill by corrosive sublimate or
Lang’s fluid, dehydrate by alcohol, and mount in balsam.
SPONGES.
Leipy, JosEpH—The boring sponge Cliona. Proc. Acad. N.
S. Philadelphia, 1889, p. 70.—Describes supposed new species,
C. phallica, from Florida, and gives resumé of known facts.
CCELENTERATA.
McMurricu, J. PLAYFAIR.—A contribution to the Actinology
of the Bermudas. Proc. Phila. Acad., 1889, p. 102, Pls. v1., VII.
—Anatomical Notes on Aiptasia sp.,Condylactis passiflora,Oulactts
Sasicculata (nov.), Diplactis (nov.) bermudensis (nov.), Zoanthus flos-
maris, Mammillifera tuberculata, Corticifera ocillata, C. glaveola,
and Gemmaria ruset.
McMovrricu, J. PLAYFAIR The Actinaria of the Bahama is
lands, W. I. Jour. Morph., III., p. 1 (see Am. Nar., XXIV. p. 80).
An elaborate paper upon the structure of Azptasia annulata, A.
tagetes, Condylactis passiflora, Bunodes teniatus, Aulactinia stel-
loides (nov.), Lebrunea néglecta, Discosoma anemone, Rhoductis
sancti-thome, Heteranthus floridus, Phymanthus crucifer, Oulactis
flosculifera, Zoanthus sociatus, Gemmaria isolata (nov.), and Corti-
cifera flava.
:
.
1890.] Record of American Zoology. 353
McMovrricu, J. Prayrair.—List of Actinaria found at New
Providence, Bahama Islands. J. H. U. Circ., VIII., p. 30, 1889.
McMorricu, J. PLayrarr—On the occurrence of an Edward-
sia stage in the free-swimming embryo of a Hexactinian. J. H.
U. Circ, VHE, p: 31, 1889.
Witson, H. V.—On the Occasional Presence of a Mouth and
Anus in the Actinozoa. J. H. U. Circ., VIII., p. 37—Closure of
Mouth of Cereactis bahamensis in the middle.
Morean, T. H.—Notice of Dr. H. V. Wilson’s paper on the
Development of Manicina areolata. J. H. U. Circ., VIII, p. 39,
1889.
FEewkeEs, J. W.—On a Few Californian Meduse. Am. NAT.,
XXIII., p. 591, 1889.
Fewkes, J. W.—Physalia in the Bay of Fundy. Am. NAT.,
XXIII., p. 821, 1889.
Fewkes, J. W.—Emission of a Colored Fluid as a Possible
Means of Protection Resorted to by Meduse. Microscope, IX.,
P- 65, 1889. ;
McMurrics, J. P.—Note on the Structure and Systematic
_ Position of Lebrunea neglecta. Zool. Anz., XIL., p. 38, 1889.
VALENTINE, H. E.—An Observation on the Common On
Microscope, IX., p. 374, 1889.
ECHINODERMS.
Ives, J. E—Variations in Ophiura panamensis and Ophiura
teres. Proc. Phila. Acad., 1889, p. 76.
Epwarps, B. L.—Notes on the Embryology of Maulleria
agassizi. J. H. U. Circ., VIIL, p. 37, 1889 (see Am. NaT, XX.,
p. 845).
Honce, C. F—A Study of the Oyster Beds of Long Island
Sound, with Reference to the mo of Starfish. J. H. U. Circ,
VIIL, p. 102, 1889.
Fewkes, J. W.—Excavating habits of our Common Sea-
Urchin. Am. Nart., XXIII., p. 728, 1880.
_ Fewkes, J. W.—On Excavations made by Sea-Urchins. Am.
Nart, XXIV. p. L 1890.
Am. Nat.—April.—4.
354 The American Naturatst. [April,
PLATHELMINTHES.
` PACKARD, A. S.—The Cave Fauna of North America. Mem.
Nat. Acad. Sci, IV., 1889—Describes Vortex (?) cavicolus
and Dendrocelum percecum.
NEMATODA.
Buttock, Epwarp A.—Ova of Trichocephalus dispar in the
liver of Rat. Am. Mo. Micro. Jour., X., p. 193, 1889.
Mark, E. L.—Trichine in Swine. Ann. Rep. Mass. State
Board of Health for 1888, p. 113. 1889—Results of examina-
tions of 4186 hogs.
ANNELIDS.
Wurman, C. O.—Some new factsabout the Hirudini. Jour.
Morph., II., p. 586.—A preliminary paper largely devoted to
sense organs.
Cuaney, L. W.—Histology of the Earth-worm. Microscope,
IX., p. 196. Plate. 1889.—Nothing new.
BepparD, F. E.—Note upon the green cells in the integument
of olosoma tenebrarum. Proc. Zool. Soc., London, 1889, p-
51.—In foot-note gives notes on Cragin’s species of olosoma.
PROSOPYGII.
Strokes, A. C.—The Statoblasts of our Fresh-water Polyzoa.
Microscope, IX., p. 257, 1889.—A popular account with keys to
Statoblasts and to genera of fresh-water Polyzoa.
Anprews, E. A.—Reproductive organ of Phascolosoma gouldi.
Zool. Anzeiger, XII., p. 140, 1889——Reproductive organs fim-
briated bands, running from nerve cord along posterior retractors.
Attempts at artificial impregnation unsuccessful.
MOLLUSCS.
Pirspry, Henry A.—New and little known American Mol-
luscs. Proc. Phila. Acad., 1889, p. 81, 3 Plates——Describes as
new Holospira elizabethe from S. W. Mexico, Pacilozonites rein-
ianus var. goodei from Bermuda, Bithynella e@equicostata from
Florida, Amnicola peracuta from Texas, Spherium (Limsima)
1890. ] Record of American Zoology. 355
singleyi from Texas. Notes were given on synonomy and dis-
tribution of Helix (Microphysa) hypolepta, Zonites dallianus,
Zonites singleyanus, Pecilozonites bermudiensis, and Hydrobia
monroensts.
Peck, J. T—On the Anatomy and Histology of Cyméuliopsis
calceola, J. H. U. Circ., VIIL., p. 32, 1889.—Preliminary account.
WATASE, S.—On a new phenomenon of cleavage in the ovum
of the Cephalopod. J. H. U. Circ., VIII, p. 33.—Preliminary
account of segmentation in Loligo pealei.
Honc, C. F.—A study of the oyster beds of Long Island
Sound with reference to the ravages of starfish. J. H. U. Circ.,
II., p. 102, 1889.
RYDER, Jons A.—The Byssus of the Young of the Common
Clam. Am. Nart., XXIII., P. 65, 1889.
RYDER, Jonn A.—Notes on the Development of Ampullaria
depressa. Am. Nart., XXIII., p. 735, 1889.
Pirssry, H. A.—The radula in Rhipidoglossate Mollusca.
Proc. Phila. Acad., 1889, p. 136.
CRUSTACEA,
LEIDY, JOsSEPH.—A parasitic copepod. Proc. Phila. Acad., `
1889, p. 95.—Describes as new Chalimus tenuis from Leptoceph-
alus.
Brooks, W. K. and Herrick, F. H—A preliminary abstract
of researches on the life history of Stenopus. J. H. U. Circ.,
VIII., p. 29, 1880.
Hay, O. P. and W. P.—A contribution to the knowledge of
the genus Branchipus. Am. Nart., XXIII., P. 91, 1889.
Kines.ey, J. S—The development of Crangon vulgaris. Third
paper. Bull. Essex Inst., XXI., p. 1, 3 plates, 1889. (See Am.
Nat, XXIII, p 737.)
Anprews, E. A——Autotomy in the Crab. Am. Nart., XXIV.,
p. 138, t890.
Herrick, F. H.—The development of the compound eye of
Alpheus. Zool. Anzeiger, XIL, p. 164, 1889.—Eye arises as
thickening of ectoderm, thickened by immigration and delamina-
tion; differentiates into two layers: 1. Outer retinogen. 2.
356 The American Naturalist. [April,
Gangliogen. No invaginations occur. Ommatidum consists of
two corneagen cells, four vitrelle, and seven retinular cells. No
nerve fibres are found in crystallin cones.
Osporn, H. L—Elementary Histological Studies of the Cray-
fish. XII. The Eye, Am. Mo. Micro. Jour., X., p. 25, 1889.
XIII. The Eye, 1. œp. 147, 1889.
Cuaney, L. W.—Some habits of the Crayfish. Am. Mo. Micro.
Jour., X., p. 86, 1889.—Eating, locomotion, oviposition, molting.
PACKARD, A. S—The Cave Fauna of North America, etc.
Mem. Nat. Acad. Science, IV., 1889.—Describes Cauloxenus
stygius, Canthocamptus cavernarum, Cecidotea stygia, C. nicka-
jacensis, Crangonyx vitreus, C. packardi, C. antennatus, C. muco-
natus, C. lucifugus, Cambarus pellucidus, C. hamulatus ; and gives
notes on brain and optic organs of Cæcidotæa and Cambarus.
ARACHNIDA.
Ives, J. E—Linguatula diesingii from the Sooty Mangubey.
Proc. Phila. Acad, 1580, p. 31.
LEIDY, JosepH.—Note on Gonyliptes and Solpuga, l.c., p. 45.
-Gonyleptis curvipes from Chili and Solpuga cube from Florida. —
Marx, GrorcE.—A contribution to the knowledge of the
spider fauna of the Bermuda Islands, 1. c., p. 98, 4 Pl. Cata-
logues twelve species as collected, one of which, Lycosa atlantica,
is new.
PATTEN, Wo.—Segmental sense organs of Arthropoids. Jour.
Morphol., II., p. 600. A preliminary paper giving an account of
eyes and other sense organs of Limulus, spiders and scorpions.
Wartase, S.—Structure and development of the eyes of Limu-
lus. J.H.U.Circ., VIIL, p- 34, 1889. (See Am. Nat, XXIV., p.
81.) Preliminary communication.
Jackson, C. Q.—The Acarus folliculorum in the human skin.
Microscope, IX., p. 97, 1889.—Nothing new.
Emerton, J. H.—Pairing of Xysticus triguttatus. Psyche, V.
p. 169, 1889.
Packarp, A. S.—The Cave Fauna of North America. Mem.
Nat. Acad. Sci., IV., 1889.—Describes Rhyncholophus caverna-
1890.] Record of American Zoology. 357
rumn, Bryiobia? (or Penthaleus?) meyerensis n, Laelaps? (or
Holostaspis ?) wyandottensis n, L. (= Iphis ?) cavernicola n, Gama-
sus (or Hypoaspis) troglodytes n, G. stygius n, Dameus (= Delba)
bulbipedata n, Oribata alata n, Uropoda lucifugus n, Sejus? san-
borni n, Obisium cavicola, Chthonius packardi, C. cecus, Phalango-
des robusta, Ph. flavescens, Ph. armata, Ph. spinifera, Phlegmacera
cavicolens, Nemastoma troglodytes, N. inops, and reprints Emer-
ton’s descriptions of cave Araneina (Am. Nar., IX., p. 278, 1875.)
MYRIAPODA.
Borman, C. H.—Notes on a small collection of Myriapods
from the Bermuda Islands. Proc. Phila. Acad., 1889, p. 127.
Four species catalogued, Spirobolus heilprini as new.
Ronpeau, Kate.—Note on the feeding habits of Cermatia for-
ceps. Am. NAT, XXIV. p. 81, 1890.
= Pacxarp, A. S.—The Cave Fauna of America [etc.] Mem.
Nat. Acad. Sci., IV., 1889.—Describes Lysiopetalum lactarium,
Pseudotremia cavernarum, Scoterpes copei, Zygonopus whitei,
Cumbala annulata, and gives notes on brain and sense organs of
Pseudotremia.
358 The American Naturalist. [April,
EDITORIAL.
EDITORS, E: D. COPE AND J. S. KINGSLEY.
HE increase in the number of original investigators in science
during the last few years in the United States, is a gratify-
ing indication of intellectual progress. Progress in science and
philosophy means increase in positive knowledge. This means
light for the mind, as well as comfort and health for the body,
both now and in time to come To know whence we come and
whither we tend, is to be prepared for the future as well as for
the present. The age demands knowledge, and provision is being
gradually made in this country for the producers of it. The time
is not far distant, we suspect, when the confusion between the pro-
ducers and the distributors of knowledge, which is so prevalent,
will disappear. Millions are expended for the dissemination of
knowledge through the medium of schools and libraries, while
small sums only can be obtained for the production of new truth.
The increase in the number of producers in science is educating
the public mind, and one great need, that of institutions of
original research, will be supplied. Professors in universities and
colleges who are competent in this work can now only pursue it
in leisure moments, and these are often few.
New institutions might be endowed with this object in view,
since few of the old ones supply the organization necessary for
the successful execution of such work. These might be appro-
priately associated with universities in the proper localities for pur-
poses of mutual advantage. The increase in the original investi-
gators holds forth a promise of the organization on a true basis
of academies of science in our States. Those in existence having
commenced by electing as members everybody who can pay the
necessary fees, have mostly lost their scientific character, and
have sunk into inaction. Little can be done with them, since
those into whose hands they have fallen are generally unwilling
to adopt the necessary changes. But the times will soon be aus-
picious for the organization of new bodies, whose membership
will be an order of merit, and a recognition of work done.
1890.] Editorial. 359
—Wirtx this number of the AMERICAN NATURALIST we begin
the publication of a serial catalogue of all current articles relating
to the fauna of North America. Beginning with the year 188ọ,
we intend as far as possible to place in classified order the titles
of all articles which appear in American or European journals
relating to the animals of North America and the West Indies.
This list will be continued in succeeding numbers, taking up the
different groups in ascending order, and then, when the series is
complete, returning to the lowest forms again. For 1889 the
list will be but little more than a bare catalogue, but beginning
with 1890 each title will be followed by such hints at its contents
as will make the bibliography more valuable to students.
—TueE Marine Biological Laboratory has issued its annual
report, in which it makes an exceedingly good showing. The
laboratory was crowded last summer, and doubtless will be in
the coming session. The trustees appeal for $7,000, enumer-
ating as their chief needs an addition to the building, an increase
in the library, and a steam launch. It is to be hoped that the
funds will be forthcoming, but it is hardly fair that Boston should
furnish them all. Last year both Philadelphia and Chicago fur-
nished more students than Boston. Any subscriptions will be
thankfully received by the Secretary, Miss A. D. Philipps, 12
Marlboro street, Boston, Mass.
—Tue House of Representatives has passed the bill appro-*
priating about $200,000 for a zoological garden and park within
the limits of the City of Washington. The location on Rock
Creek is a good one, and under the direction of Mr. W. 2
Hornaday, it should be a success. Zoological gardens mean the
preservation of such animals as will breed in them from extinc-
tion, as well as the instruction of the public. When a good
price can be had for living wild animals, people living where
they abound will have an interest in preserving them in a wild
state. We understand that Professor Frank Baker will be pro-
sector, and will have charge of the department of comparative
anatomy in the United States National Museum.
360 The American Naturalist. [April,
General Notes.
MINERALOGY AND PETROGRAPHY.!
Petrographical News.—The granite bosses of Morbihan, France,
have suffered on their peripheries certain modifications which are
ascribed by Barrois? to the rate of cooling. These modifications are
endomorphous contact effects, but are in no way dependent upon
the nature of the surrounding rocks. ‘Two cases are recognized, ac-
cording as the boundary lines of the bosses correspond with the strike
of the enclosing strata or are perpendicular to it. In the first case, the
granite, which is a muscovite-biotite rock, possesses on its periphery a
zone of granite porphyry, withits phenocrysts arranged in fluidal lines.
In the second case, the exterior modification is a fine-grained panidio-
morphic aplite. Since the aplite and the porphyry both contain their
constituents in idiomorphic grains, the author concludes that the crys-
tallization of the magma yielding these and the granite has gone on
progressively, the porphyritic rocks representing an intermediate stage
in the formation of a granite from a magma. Schistose granites
(gneisses) on the peripheries of these same bosses are aplites and
porphyries that have been crushed by mechanical forces and then re-
cemented by the deposition of secondary quartz. Since the gneisses
are found only on the south sides of the bosses, the pressure to whose
existence they are due is supposed to have come from that direction.
Mr. Iddings* has continued‘ his study of the cause of different
structures in rocks produced from the same magma, and has published
some of the results of his investigations on the igneous rocks of the
Yellowstone Park. This study is concerned principally with the chem-
ical relation of different rocks produced by the cooling of a single
molten magma under different conditions, Electric Peak is a neck of
diorite cut by numerous dykes of porphyrite. Separated from this by
a great fault is Sepulchre Mountain, made up in large part of surface
flows of the magma that was extruded through the orifice at Electric
Peak. This magma under the conditions surrounding flows formed
1 Edited by Dr. W. S. Bayley, Colby University, Waterville, Me.
P $
3 Bull. Philos. Soc. of Wash., XI.,
4 AMERICAN NATURALIST, Dec., P > 1216, and Aug., 1889, p. 718.
1890.] Mineralogy and Petrography. 361
pyroxene and hornblende andesites. The chemical composition of the
group of plutonic rocks (represented at Electric Peak) and of the
effusive group (at Sepulchre Mountain) is shown to be the same. The
structure of their members and their mineral composition, however, are
different, and these are shown by the author to be due to the different
conditions under which the two groups solidified. The different
mineralogical compositions of the various rocks belonging to the same
group are likewise shown to be functions of the slight differences
which occur in their geological environment. This affects the rate
at which the heat escapes from the magma, and also the pressure
which is experienced during its crystallization. These in turn
affect the efficacy of the mineralizing agents held absorbed by the
magma before its solidification. The mineralizing agents in turn show
their effect upon the magma in the nature of the minerals separated
from it. Renard > announces that the Sats of St. Thomas, in the
Antilles, are diorites, containing pl
The former contain oligoclase, and the ‘latter bytodnite or anorthite.
They are both much altered. The feldspar of the diorites has in most
cases changed into epidote and quartz; that of the diabases into epi-
dote, chlorite and calcite. The same author ® describes the rocks of
the island of Teneriffe as scoriaceous basalts, containing olivine and
augite of the first consolidation. The very light color of the latter
mineral and its well-marked polysynthetic twinning lamelle cause it
to resemble plagioclase. The lack of plagioclase places the rock in
the group of the limburgites. The rocks from the crater of the
Cafiadas are also basalts, whose olivines are filled with muscovitic in-
clusions. Large crystals of andesine present in it have an undulous
extinction. Augite andesites and trachytes containing sodalite, augite
and sanidine with an undulous extinction are also described. An
interesting suite of analyses of some lower Silurian felsites from the
southeast of Ireland enables Hatch’ to divide these rocks into potash,
soda, and potash-soda felsites. The first group comprises felsites with
few or no phenocrysts, while the second and third groups contain
many porphyritic crystals of a striated feldspar in a cryptocrystalline
aggregate of orthoclase and quartz. The phenocrysts may be albite or
anorthoclase, while the feldspar of the ground-mass is orthoclase. The
f hornblende, and diabases
5 Proc. Verb. Soc. Belg. d. Geol., II., 1888, p. 212.
6 Bull. Soc. Belg. d. Geol. Memoires, XII., 1888, p. 67.
1 Geol. Magazine, Dec., 1889, p. 545.
362 _ The American Naturalist. [April,
Saati of the three groups may be peeenenics by the following
analyses
SiO, Al,O, FeO; FeQ CaO MgO K,O Na,O Loss Sp. Gr.
te fee e 6 e825 Bek gi 1.6 2.60
(2) 44:2 10.8 Poe 8 Oo aL 69: LS 2608
(7) Oe iki 3 bl 8 a ee a -9 2.645
Wethered 8 has examined the Jurassic pisolite of Cheltenham,
England, and has discovered to his surprise that its structure is not
concretionary, but that it is of organic origin. The spherules showa
nucleus, surrounded by numerous concentric layers of innumerable
minute tubuli, produced by an organism similar to Girvanella.
The Kentish Rag, from near Maidstone, Eng., contains a large pro-
portion of calcium sulphide, as shown by an analysis made by Mr.
Sanford: °
S0, FeO, AlO RO, CaO MgO Alk CO SO, CaS: “Aq
72.051 2.15 S055 22-625 E 392 9-984 647 1.334 -995
——Some of the peculiarities of the numerous dykes cutting the slates
and granite in the neighborhood of Kennebunkport, Maine, are men-
tioned by Mr. Kemp.” The rocks forming the dykes are granites,
diabases, camptonites, and diabase porphyrites.
New Minerals. — Redingtonite, knoxvillite, metastibuite and
nopalite.— At the hundred and fifty foot level of the Redington
Mine, in the Knoxville District, California, is a hydrous chromium
sulphate, supposed to be the result of the action of solfataric gases
of a pale purple color, that becomes colorless in the thin section.
The fibres are doubly refractive, and have an extinction varying
between 13° and 38°. When heated, the mineral turns green without
losing all of its water, and then agrees in most of its properties
with copiapite. The green sulphate consists of rhombic tables with
angles of 78° and 120°. They have good cleavages parallel to the
base, the prismatic faces and the macropinacoid. The absorption is
greatest when the short diagonal of the crystals corresponds with the
principal plane of the nicol. The axes ‘of elasticity lie.in the oP
face—the one parallel to the brachy-axis being the greater. Mr.
Becker" calls the purple mineral redingtonite and the green one
8 Geol. Magazine, May, 1889, p. 197.
9 Ib. Feb., 1889, p.
10 Amer. Sonlanie; Mar. 1890, p
1 G. F. Becker; Geology of the Oua Deposits of the Pacific Slope. Mono-
graphs XIII. Washington, 1888, p. 343.
1890.] Mineralogy and Petrography. 363
knoxvillite. A brick-red sulphide of antimony from the filling
of a vein in a sinter deposit in the Steamboat Springs District,
near the Comstock Lode, Nevada, is named mefastibnite by the
same author. JVapalite™ is a dark reddish-brown substance of the
consistency of shoemaker’s wax occurring at the Phoenix Quicksilver
ine, Pope Valley, California, Its hardness is 2, and specific gravity
1.02. It is brittle. It fuses at 42°— 46°, and boils at 300°. When
first taken from the ground it is green by reflected light, and
garnet by transmitted light. Upon exposure it loses its green fluor-
escence. The composition of the mineral is supposed to be near C,H,.
Nesquehonite is an alteration product of /ansfordite, the new mag-
nesium compound described by Genth™ a few monthsago. The latter
mineral, upon exposure, rapidly changes over into prismatic, ortho-
rhombic crystals, usually arranged in radiating groups. Their axial
ratio is a:5:c=.645:1:.4568. oP is the plane of the optical
axes. The brachy-axis is the acute bisectrix, which is negative. The
optical angle 2Vna==53° 5’. Hardness = 2.5, and Sp. Gr.= 1.83.
The composition of the substance corresponds to MgCO,+3H,0
[CO, = 30.22; MgO = 29.22, H,O = 40.32]. Artificial nesquehon-
ite has been prepared by allowing aqueous solutions of magnesium
carbonate containing carbon dioxide to stand undisturbed for some
time. The crystals thus obtained present the same features as the
natural product. Measurements of the indices of refraction on one of
these crystals gave: a= 1.495, P = 1.501, y = 1.526. Perfect pseudo-
morphs of nesquehonite after lansfordite (incrustations and stalactites)
were fourd at the locality from which the latter mineral has been de-
scribed—Lansford, Schuylkill Co., Pa-——WVatrophilite is anew member
of the triphylite group lately described by Messrs. Brush and Dana *
from Branchville, Connecticut. The mineral is usually found in
masses with a good cleavage, although occasionally grains with an in-
distinct crystal form are detected. It resembles very closely the lithi-
ophilite (LiMnPO,) discovered by the same authors some time ago, in
both its morphological and optical aspects. Its color, however, is a
:deep wine, resembling the tint of Brazilian topaz. Its most character-
istic features are its very brilliant lustre and its easy alteration into a
a pale yellow, silky, fibrous substance that covers all its surfaces and
12 Becker: Ib., p. 372. Š
13 Genth and Penfield: Amer. Jour. Sci., Feb., 1890, p. 121.
14 AMERICAN NATURALIST, April, 1889, p. 261.
15 Amer. Jour. Sci., March, 1890, p. 205.
364 The American Naturalist. April,
penetrates its mass. The composition of natrophilite, as determined
by Mr. H. L. Wells, is:
P.O, MnO FeO Na,O Li,0 MO Loss
atig § 38:19" 3.06 16.79 19 43 81,
essentially NaMnPO,. The new mineral is regarded as but another
one of the very interesting substances produced by the alteration of
spodumene and lithiophilite. The triphylite group as now known con-
sists of triphylite Sextet lithiophilite (LiMmPO,), and natro-
philite (NaMnPO,), sides many intermediate compounds.——
Rosenbuschite, nordenskjoldite, and melanocerite have been described by
Brégger 6 from the syenite dykes in the vicinity of the Langesunds-
fiord, in Southern Norway. The first mineral is found in radial groups
composed of monoclinic fibres with cleavages parallel to oP, œ% Poo
and 2Pæ. The axial,ratio is a: b: c = 1.1687: 1: .9775. f==101°
47’. The acute bisectrix is 4. The obtuse bisectrix is inclined 36° to
c in the acute angle f. Double refraction strong. The mineral is
easily fusible, and is decomposed with strong hydrochloric acid. It
is light orange gray in color, and is weakly pleochroic with C> B>
A. Its specific gravity is 3.31 and hardness 5-6. In morphological
properties and in composition it is apparently a zirconium gectoltte.
siO, ZrO, TiO, Ti,O, Fe,O, La,O,. DIED: MnO CaO Na,O Los
31-53 18.69 6.07 t.31 Se To 2.38 1.85 25.38 10.15 -
Nordenskjoldite is a calcium-tin-borate with the composition se
Sn (BO,),]:
SnO, ZrO, CaO B,O, Loss
53-75 -go 20.45 23.18 Lya
It crystallizes rhombohedrally with a: ¢ = 1 : .8221, and is tabular in
habit. It is sulphur yellow in color, is transparent, optically negative
and strongly doubly refractive. Its hardness is 514-6 and Sp. Gr. 4.2.
Melanocerite is also rhombohedral with a: ¢ = 1: 1.2554. It occurs
in tabular crystals of a deep brown or black color. Their double
refraction is negative, hardness 5-6, and specific gravity 4.129.
Chemically the mineral is a complicated compound of the rare earths
with silica, tantalum, boron, and fluorine.-——Cohenite is described
by Weinschenck ” from the meteoric iron of Magura, Hungary. When
dissolved in hydrochloric acid the meteor leaves a residue in which lit-
tle prismatic tin white crystals are discovered. These turn brown when
16 Geol. För. i. Stockholm Férh., IX., 1887, p. 247. Ref. Neues Jahrb. f. Min., ett.,
1889, II., p. 432.
Ann. K. K. Naturh. Hofmus., Wien., IV., 1889, p. 94.
1890.] Mineralogy and Petrography. 365
exposed to the air. They are highly magnetic, are brittle, have a
hardness of 5.5-6, and a specific gravity of 6.977. When analyzed
they yield Fe = 90.19; Ni = 3.08; Co=.61; C=6.70; P= .08;
and traces of Cuand Sn—a composition corresponding to the carbide of
iron and nickel (55 Fe. 2NiCo),C. In addition to the organic com-
pound napalite, referred to above, two others have lately been
described ; one by Blake ® from the Uintah Mountains in Wahsatch
County, Utah, to which he has given the name wwurfsilife, and the
other by Morrison ! from the old red sandstone at Craig Well, near
Dingwall. The latter is a mineral tar, associated with a/bertite. It is
called e/aterite. Its composition as found by Macadam is C = 81.186;
Heig; Ou, eter, 465 N 4127; Sose 862. . Marinhte
is a firm, black, solid substance serene jet. It is found in large,
pure, amorphous masses a little heavier than water, and elastic in thin
flakes. In thin pieces it is garnet red. Its hardness is 2-3, and specific
gravity 1.03. It does not fuse in boiling water, but melts readily in
the flame of a candle, when it burns with little smoke, It does not
dissolve easily in any of the usual reagents——Two new minerals to
which names have not yet been given by their discoverers have been de-
scribed respectively by Sjögren% and Ussing*, Sjégren’s mineral
occurs in vitreous, transparent, light green tables, associated with
synadelphite, at the mine Ostra, in Nordmark, Sweden. The tables
possess an easy cleavage and a pearly lustre. They are biaxial, with
the plane of their optical axes nearly normal to the cleavage plane.
The axial angle is small, Before the blowpipe the mineral blackens
and fuses with difficulty. In the air it oxidizes and becomes dirty gray
or brown. A qualitative examination shows the presence of As, Mn,
Zn, and Fe. Ussing’s compound is found imbedded in microcline,
and associated with aegerine and lithium mica. It forms, small, thick
rhombohedral crystals, with æ: ¢ = 1: 2.1422. The principal forms
present are oR, 4R, 4R, R, coo R,—2R,—} Rand œ P2. The faces
are sometimes brilliant, and at others dull. The crystals are yellowish-
brown and translucent. They are optically uniaxial and positive.
Their specific gravity is 2.07, and hardness 5. In form, they resemble
eudyalite, Their locality is Kangerdluarsuk, Greenland.
18 Eng. and Min. Jour., December 21, 1889.
19 Min, Mag., March, 1889, p. 133-
20 Ofversigt af Kongl. Wetenskaps-Ak. Forh., Stockholm, 1888, p. 561. Ref. Neues
Jahrb. f. Min., etc., 1890, 1., p. 24-
21 Geol. Féren. Förh., X., p. 190, Stockholm. Ref. Neues. Jahrd. f. Min., etc., 1890, F,
P. 25.
366 The American Naturalist. [April,
Miscellaneous.—Perlitic structure, according to Mr. Chapman,™
may be produced in Canada balsam by heating this substance until it
is thick enough to become brittle when cold, and then pouring it upon
a roughened glass plate and suddenly immersing in cold water.
Harker ascribes the eyes of pyrite in slate to the displacement of the
matrix around pyrite crystals through pressure. Because of its hard-
ness the pyrite resists the pressure. The slate yielding to it breaks
away from the crystal along a plane perpendicular to the line of force,
and leaves little hollows on both sides of it. The hollows are after-
wards filled with quartz. The eyes consist of pyrite, forming a center,
imbedded in a lenticular mass of quartz or some other secretionary
mineral. In a book of about two hundred and seventy pages Mr.
. Merrill* publishes a catalogue of the building stones in the collection
of the National Museum, and gives a very clear and succinct account
-of the methods employed in quarrying and finishing the various rocks
used in construction, A very valuable account of the mineral re-
sources of Michigan is given by Mr. Lawton % in his annual report as
Commissioner of Mineral Statistics of Michigan. Dick * describes
a new form of binocular microscope for use in petrographical investiga-
tions, made according to his own design. The most important new
feature of the instrument is the connection of the two nicols, which
may be made to revolve together or separately, at the will of the man-
ipulator.
BOTANY.
Three Suggestions on Botanical Terminology.—So far as I
can find there are at least two very marked and interesting phenomena
in the physiology of plants which have as yet received no appropriate
names by which they may be always recognized and under which they
may be disc . These are—first, the peculiar irritability of twining
plants, in view of which, together with their negative geotropism and
their asymmetrical nutations, the spiral habit of growth is maintained.
From the most recent researches it appears probable that Von Mohl
was correct in his early conjecture that some such specific irritability
existed in twining plants, and it is proper that this specific irritability
22 Geol. Mag., a 1890, p. 79.
23 Ib., Sep., 1889,
% Rep. ae Taaa tt Pt IL
% Mines and Mineral Statisti Lansing, 1889.
26 Min. Mag., March, 1889, a 160.
1890.] Botany. i 367
should have its name, and that English writers on the subject should be
freed from the necessity of expressing themselves upon it in paraphra-
ses. Unless some better term has been devised or some little-used
term should have priority, it is proposed to term the motion of twining
plants—so far as that motion is the result of the specific irritability—
dromotropism, and we can then speak of such twining shoots as dromo-
tropic.
Again, certain very well-known but as yet very poorly understood
movements take place during fertilization and conjugation, by means
of which antherozoids are directed to the waiting oösphere,—perhaps
passing down the long neck of an archegonium ; by which pollen tubes
reach the oösphere in the embryo-sac of phanerogamous plants, and in
view of which it is possible for the conjugating, motile or resting, .
sexual cells of zygophytic plants to come in contact with each other
through an intervening space of air or water or soil. In the case of
the higher cryptogamous plants, where clear differentiation of male and
female organs and cells exists, the directive impulse seems to originate
in the odsphere itself. Possibly the movement of the antherozoids
towards the odsphere—a movement of such great biological importance
—should be explained by attributing, as has been done, to the
odsphere the power of excreting some chemical compounds which,
while of the nature of waste products or excreta, nevertheless exert a
stimulative and directive effect upon antherozoids in the near vicinity.
So far as I can learn carefu! experiments to indicate just how far the
odsphere can exert this stimulative influence have not yet been made.
It would be of the greatest importance to discover through how many
millimetres of water, for example, a polypodium antherozoid would
find its way to the proper archegonium, but in the present state of the
knowledge upon this topic, we cannot speak very accurately. Should
the conjecture of a chemical stimulus be the correct one, the whole
series of phenomena connected wita conjugation and fertilization, to
which passing allusion has been made, would possibly be most analogous
to the hydrotropic curvatures of roots and shoots in view of which
growth takes place from a region less saturated with moisture to one
more saturated, or vice versa. For evidently if any aromatic excretum
is given off from a sexual cell it would be in greater quantity the nearer
one came to the originating cell.
Movements, then, of antherozoids and pollen-tubes, since they are
clearly irritable movements, might appropriately be termed gonotropic,
and the movements of the water cells themselves towards the female
might be termed gonotropism. If it were deemed necessary to dis-
368 The American Naturalist. [April,
tinguish between the movements of free, locomotive antherozodéids such
as those of Marchautia or Aspidium and the curvature of pollen tubes,
the name gonotropism could be appropriately reserved for the latter
class of movements, while the former might have the name of gonofaxis,
analogous to phobotaxis—seen in swimming green zodspores and in
chlorophyll bodies of unequal axes. The movements of antherozodids
then might be termed gonofactic.
In the case of phanerogams, however, the stimuli which direct the
pollen tube do not seem to originate in the odsphere alone, but are ap-
parently sent forth by the syzergid@ or “ co-workers °’ as well. That
the pollen tube should pass between the synergidz and thus penetrate
to the odsphere lying directly behind them, whatever the position of
the ovule itself, could scarcely take place unless some stimulus should
be sent from the synergide. This peculiar habit of the pollen tube,
most instructively shown in anatropous or campylotropous ovules,
might explained as due to a repellent influence or stimulus sent
from the synergidg, in view of which the pollen tube, growing in the
line of least resistance, necessarily must pass between them,—as, for
example, to use a rather violent simile, the sailors of ancient days
steered between Scylla and Charybdis, avoiding each as far as possible.
This irritability of the pollen tube, in view of which it avoids the
synergidæ, can scarcely be explained by supposing that stimuli originate
in the odsphere alone, for, if this were true, the uniform course of the
pollen tube between the synergidze would not become clear. Neither
can it be explained by supposing the synergidz and odsphere capable
of equal gonotropic stimulation, for then the further growth of the
pollen tube after reaching a point midway between the three cells at
the top of the embryo-sac would become a matter of chance. Ap-
parently then we must consider the synergidz as cells capable of send-
ing stimuli, probably chemical in nature, either similar to the gono-
tropic stimuli of the odsphere, but much feebler, or of a nature pre-
cisely the reverse of the odsphere stimuli. Concerning the point here
suggested there is yet no experimental evidence sufficiently strong to
allow more than conjecture. If, however, the conjecture of a specific
gonotropic irritability, different in different species of pla be
accepted, the possibility of hybridization depends upon two pr ary
coérdinations; first, the tissues of the receiving stigma, s and
ovary must be such that nutrition and growth of the stranger-p@llen is
possible ; second, gonotropic stimulation of the stranger-pollen must’
intervene to direct the course of its growth. This makes no account
of the act of fertilization itself, but refers merely to externals, if one
€
1890.] Botany. : 369
might name them so. Evidently the highly specialized requirements
of pollen-tubes in the matter of nutrition are properly supplemented
by highly specialized specific gonotropic irritabilities. The first is
exactly paralleled by the specific nutrition requirements of the various
parasitic fungi, which select each their own particular host-plant or
animal, but the second is sus generis.
When, however, the cells of zygophytic plants find their way to each
other, as for example, the zodsphores of Pandosina, or the conjugating
cells of Piplocephalus, there is scarcely a localisation of gonotropic
irritability in one cell, and of gonotropie stimulation in the other, In
such plants we are below the stage of specialization, and the whole act
of conjugation is so unlike that of higher plants that a different name
might properly enough be given to the peculiar directive influence
which each conjugating cell has upon the other. They might truly be
considered equally gonotropic and equally capable of stimulation ; but
or the sake of differentiating between the bisexual movements and the
unisexual, it might be well to term the movement shown by either of
two similar conjugating gametes gamotropism. That gonotropic irrita-
bility is a specialized type, an outgrowth from gamotrophic, goes with-
out saying. Both are probably connected with the excretion of certain
as yet unclassified chemical compounds, and the progression of the
higher from the lower, with accompanying specializations, would o
a field of research exceedingly interesting although exceedingly difficult.
Carefully conducted and systematic experiments are needed along
two lines, suggested in this brief note upon so fertile a subject: rst,
Experiments to indicate the distance to which specific gonotropic
stimuli can be propagated through the surrounding medium ; 2d,
periments to show, by cross-pollenations, the relation between gono-
tropic irritability and appropriate nutrition upon the growth and direc-
tion of pollen-tubes.—Conway MacmiLian, Univ. of Minn.
The So-Called Uredospores of Gymnosporangium.—Mr.
H. M. Richards has carefully re-investigated the so-called uredospores
of Gymnosporangium clavarieforme, and finds that Kienitz-Gerloff’s
conclusions are erroneous. In a recent number of the Botanical
Gazette Mr. Richards publishes the results of a series of germinations
of both forms of spores, viz., the fusiform (teleutospores) and the
clavate (the so-called uredospores), and shows that, however much they
may differ in form, they certainly present no constant difference in
their mode of germination. Under favorable conditions both give
rise to the characteristic promycelium bearing sporidia. Under less
Am. Nat.—March.—s.
370 The American Naturalist. [April,
favorable conditions variations may arise, e. g., great elongation of
the promycelium when grown in an excess of water, or its great short-
ening when the moisture was insufficient. In the latter case the short
promycelial cells readily fall apart, and under favorable conditions
grow into hyphe. Spores of the latter kind Kienitz-~Gerloff considered
to be uredospores, but Mr. Richards shows conclusively that their
peculiar germination is due to special conditions, and that they are
therefore to be still regarded as teleutospores.
Hackel’s Revision of the Andropogonez.—The sixth vol-
ume of the ‘‘ Monographie Phanerogamarum’”’ of the De Candolles is
a notable work of over seven hundred pages, entirely devoted to a
monograph of a single tribe of the great order of the Graminez.
When one observes that in this book there are descriptions of 420
species, the vastness of the undertaking of the noted author is made
evident. At the present rate it will require from five to seven thou-
sand pages in all, or from six to eight or nine additional volumes like
the present one.
Hackel divides the tribe Andropogonee into five sub-tribes, to
which he assigns the thirty genera which he recognizes. The scheme
of classification may be made out from the following synopsis :
ANDROPOGONE®. Kth. ampl.
Sub-tribe I. Dimerieze Hack.
Genus 1. Dimeria R. Br. Japan, Malay Archipelago, Austra-
Ha <1 Spi
Sub-tribe II. Saccharez Benth. & Hook.
Genus 2. /mperata Cyril. Tropical and Sub-tropical. 5 sp.
‘¢ 3, Miscanthus Anderss. Asia. 7 sp.
‘¢ 4. Saccharum Linn. Tropical and Sub-tropical. 12 sp.
“© 5. Erianthus Michx. ‘Tropical and Temperate. 18 sp.
‘¢ 6. Pollinta Trin. Tropical Eastern Hemisphere. 29 sp.
‘< 4. Spodiopogon Trin. Eastern Hemisphere. 5 sp.
“oo 3. Polytrias Hack. Java. 1 sp. l
“ 9. Pogonatherum Beauv. Eastern Hemisphere. 2 sp.
Sub-tribe III. Ischæmeæ Hack.
SFO 10. Apluda Linn. Tropical Eastern Hemisphere. 1 sp.
11. Jschæemum Linn. Tropical Eastern Hemisphere. 42 sp.
“ 12. Lophopogon Hack. India and Australia. 2 sp.
‘« 13. Apocopis Nees. Asia. 2sp
‘¢ 14. Eremochioa Büse. Tropical Asia. 8 sp.
“ 15. Thelepogon Roth. India and Africa. 1 sp.
1890.] Botany. 371
Sub-tribe IV. Rottbeelliez Benth.
Genus 16. Vossia Wall. India and Africa,
‘¢ 17. Urelytrum Hack, Africa. 2 sp.
‘¢ 18. Rhytachne Desv. Tropical Africa. 4 sp.
“ 19. Rotthellia Linn fil. Both Hemispheres. 1 sp.
s 20. Manisuris Sw. Both Hemispheres. 1 sp.
‘¢ 21. Opheurus Gertn. Eastern Hemisphere. 4 sp.
‘¢ 22. Ratzeburgia Kunth. Burmah. 1 sp.
Sub-tribe V. Euandropogonez Benth.
Genus 23. Trachypogon Nees. America, Africa, and Madagascar. 1 sp.
‘¢ 24. Elionurus Humb. Tropical and Sub-tropical. 15 sp.
‘¢ 25. Arthraxon Beauv. Eastern Hemisphere. 8 sp.
‘¢ 26. Andropogon Linn. Both Hemispheres. 193 sp.
‘¢ 27. Cletstachne Beuth. ‘Tropical Africa. 1 sp.
‘¢ 28. Themeda Forsk. Eastern Hemisphere. 8 sp.
“« 29. Jseilema Anderss. India and Australia. 5 sp.
«¢ 30. Germainia Bal. & Poit. India and China. 1 sp.
Some of the species are wonderfully complex ; for example, Andro-
fogon sorghum Brot., which contains two sub-species, halepensis and
sativus ; the former with five varieties and seven sub-varieties ; while
the latter has thirty-seven varieties and twelve sub-vdrieties.
CHARLES E. BEssEY.
Sachs’ History of Botany.!—The many readers of the NATUR-
ALIST who are familiar with the German edition of Sachs’ History
of Botany, which appeared in 1875, will be glad to see the work
in an English dress. It will at once become much better known to
botanical students, for with all our German teaching in the colleges, it
is still a fact that books in the English language are read and consulted
much more freely by students than when in German. The translation
has been so well done in this case that American students may safely
take it up in place of the original, expecially as the author has in this
made some minor changes.
The work is divided into three ‘‘ books,” the first of which is de-
voted to the ‘‘ History of Morphology and Classification,” the second
1 History of Botany Sy ite by Julius von Sachs, Professor of Botany in the Uni-
versity of Wiirtzburg. thorized translation by Henry E. F. Garnsey, M.A., Fellow,
of Magdalen College, baeri Revised by Isaac Bayley Balfour, M.A., M.D., F.R.S.,
Botany in the University, and Keeper of the Royal Botanic Garden, Edin-
burg. Oxford : at the Clarendon Press. 1890. Crown 8vo, pp. xvi., 568.
372 The American Naturalist. [April,
to the ‘* History of Vegetable Anatomy,” and the third to the ‘‘ His-
tory of Vegetable Physiology.” In treating these topics, the author
says in his preface to the English edition: ‘‘ I purposed to present to
the reader a picture of the way in which the first beginnings of
scientific study of the vegetable world in the sixteenth century made
their appearance in alliance with the culture prevailing at the time,
and how gradually, by the intellectual efforts of gifted men, who at
first did not even bear the name o tanists, an ever-deepening in-
sight was obtained into the relationship of all plants, one to another,
into their outer form and inner organization, and into the vital phe-
nomena or physiological processes dependent on these conditions.”’
In this preface several sentences attract the attention of the reader.
For example: ‘‘ I would desire that whoever reads what I have written
on Charles Darwin in the present work should consider that it contains
a large infusion of youthful enthusiasm, still remaining from the year
1859, when the ‘ Origin of Species’ delivered us from the unlucky
dogma of constancy. Darwin’s later writings have not inspired me
with like feeling. So has it been with regard to Nageli,’’—Cuar.es E.
BESSEY
Photographs of Dr. Parry.—I feel certain that I am obliging
many botanists by stating that good photographs of the late Dr. C. C.
Parry, the well-known botanist, may be obtained of Jarvis White &
Co., of Davenport, Iowa, for twenty-five cents each. Wishing to
place such a photograph in my gallery of botanists, I made inquiries,
_ with the result given. — CHARLES E. BESSEY.
ZOOLOGY.
A New Actinian.—Dr. H. V. Wilson describes (Studies J. H.
Univ., IV., No. 6) a new Actinian from the Bahamas, under the name
Hoplophoria coralligens, It belongs in the family Antheade, and is
noticeable from the fact that only six pairs of mesenteries reach the
œsophagus, and in the position of four marginal sacs, which are highly
developed stinging organs. In regard to Hertwig’s suggestion that
possibly the Madreporarian corals are a heterogeneous assortment of
hexactinian polyps, which have independently acquired a skeleton.
Dr. Wilson drops the hint that the study of the mesenterial filaments
affords a negative argument. ‘‘ Porous and aporo corals alike have
simple filaments, but actinian have trifid filaments.
1890.] Zoology. 373
Entozoa of Marine Fishes.—Professor Edwin Linton has pub-
lished a first paper on these forms, which, though included in the Fish
Commission Report for 1886, did not appear until 1889. Professor
Linton has spent several summers at Wood’s Holl collecting the inter-
nal parasites of fishes. In the present paper he confines himself to
the Cestods and Acanthocephala. Seventeen species in all are enumer-
ated, of which ten are regarded as new, while three new genera are
made in the paper. The general distribution of these parasites is sum-
marized thus by Mr. Linton: Cestoid entozoa in the adult or strobile
condition were found in great numbers in the alimentary tracts of all
the Selachians examined. Encysted forms of the Cestoidea are for the
most part confined to the Teleostei, and are found in greatest abund-
ance in the sub-mucous coat of the stomach and intestine, although
not infrequently met with in the peritoneum, liver, spleen, ovaries, etc.
A Two-Tailed Earth-Worm.—Some time ago one of my stu-
dents brought in a specimen of a two-tailed earth-worm. While the
literature of the subject is not at present accessible to me, I am under
the impression that no such abnormal form has been reported from the
United States, although several have been found in other parts of the
world. When the animal was alive it seemed really two-tailed, the
parts appearing of equal importance, but in the alcoholic specimen
one division appears like a lateral branch, and is quite markedly con-
stricted where it joins the body of the worm. Branches of the intestine
and ventral nerve cord pass to both divisions, and there are two func-
tional ani. The alcoholic specimen is 34 mm. long, the ‘ tails” being
about 12 mm. long.—C. Dwicut Marsu, Ripon College.
Compound Eyes of Arthropods.—Mr. S. Watase has pre-
sented (Studies, Biol. Lab., Johns Hopkins, IV., No. 6) an extremely
ingenious view of the morphology of the compound arthropod eye.
The compound eye is formed by the vegetative repetition of the visual
unit or ommatidium. In Serolis each ommatidium constists of two
corneagen cells, which secrete on their outer (free) surface the chitinous
cornea. Beneath these come two other cells (vitrelle=retinophore),
which secrete on the surfaces toward the axis of the ommatidium the
chitinous crystalline cone, which, according to Watase, is purely di-
optric, and has no connection with the optic nerve fibres. Beneath the
vitrellæ are the retinule, cells which have their deeper ends in commu-
nication with the optic nerve, while their surfaces toward the axis of
the ommatidium secrete a chitinous rod or rhabdomere. This structure
is therefore to be regarded as a pit of ectoderm the cells of which, like
374 The American Naturalist. - [April,
all ectoderm cells, are capable of secreting chitin, and the pit is filled
by this secretion. To this scheme can all compound eyes of Crustacea
be reduced; with, of course, the addition of pigment cells, etc. In
the compound eye of Limulus we have a very ancestral condition.
The ectodermal pit remains open, and there is no distinction between
cornea and crystalline cone, while the rhabdomeres exist as extremely
delicate chitinous rods. ‘‘According to this view the compound eyes
of Arthropods, either in the sessile or in the stalked forms, are nothing
more than a collection of ectodermic pits, whose outer open ends face
toward the sources of light, and whose inner ends are connected with
the central nervous system by the optic nerve fibres. The cells form-
ing the walls of the pit arrange themselves into three strata, in most
cases accompanied by three regional functional differentiations. Gre-
nacher’s classification of the compound eyes of insects into ‘ acone,’
‘ pseudocone,’ and ‘eucone’ types refers to the condition of the cells
and their products in the middle stratum—the vitrellz. Morpholog-
ically, then, the compound eye of an Arthropod is strictly single-
layered, although, as is evident, the present conception is entirely
different trom the monostichous theory maintained by some recent
writers.” Mr. Watase further describes the development of the com-
pound eye of Limulus, and inserts as an appendix some observations
on the eves of starfishes, which, as he shows, can be reduced to the type
described among the Arthropods—a pit of ectoderm, the cells of which
secrete a cuticle upon their free ee
Tortoises Sold in the Markets of Philadelphia.—The
taste for ‘‘ stewed terrapin’ and ‘‘ snapper soup’ has become so gen-
eral in Philadelphia, that the United States are now ransacked for the
means of supplying it. Within a few years the. species sold were the
‘* terrapin,’’ aeons palustris ; the ‘* red-belly,’”’ a
insculptus ; the ‘*slider,”’ rysemys rugosa; and the ‘‘ snapper,”
Chelydra serpentina. Now large invoices of turtles are sent from
Mobile, New Orleans, and St. Louis, which include the following
species: Chrysemys bellii, C. elegans, C. concinna, and C. troostii;
Malacoclemmys geographica, and M. leseurii; total, exclusive of sea
turtles, ten T All are abundant in the market except the C.
bellii. =E. D. Copr
Zoological News. — Vermes. — Beddard (Proc. Zoél. Socy.,
London, 1889) catalogues the Oligochztes of New Zealand, enumerat-
ing fourteen species. His conclusions of the relationships of the fauna
1890.] Zoology. | 375
to that of Australia are : The Olighcozetous fauna of New Zealand differs
markedly from that of Australia, in which the characteristsc genera,
represented by numerous species, are Megascolides, Pericheta, and
Cryptodrilus. The characteristic New Zealand form is evidently
Acanthodrilus, while Perichzta is represented by but few species.
Arthropods.—Benham thinks that the structures found in a New
Zealand earth-worm (Acanthodrilus multiparous) throw light upon the
possible origin of the Malpighian tubules in the Arthropoda. In this
worm minute czecal diverticula arise from the (? hind) gut, but a little
farther forward similar tubules become continuous with undoubted
nephridia. These are certainly comparable to the anal nephridia of
the Gephyrea, and in order to convert them into Malpighian tubules
is to limit their number and arrange them in regular order, their inner
ends being closed.
» Fishes.—Jordan & Fisher describe as new (Proc. Acad, Nat. Sci.
Philadelphia, 1889) Orthopristis lethopristis from the Galapagos Islands.
Meek and Bollman describe (Z. c.) two specimens of Zlegatis. bipin-
nulatus Bennett, taken off Long Island, N. Y., the first occurrence of
the species in the waters of the United States.
Willard Morrison (Z ¢.) reviews the American species of Priacan-
thide. He regards the family as an offshoot of the Serranide, and
recognizes two genera—Priacanthus with the species catafula, cren-
tatus and bonariensis, and Pseudopriacanthus with a single species,
altus.
Ph. Kirsch and Morton Fordice (J c.) review the American Stur-
geons. The species recognized are Scaphirhynchus platyrhynchus and
Acipenser sturio, medirostris, rubicundus, brevirostrum and tra
anus. :
Ph. Kirsch (Z. c.) recognizes the following species of Uranoscopide
in Europe and America: <athetostoma averruncus, Uranoscopus
scaber, Astroscopus anoplos, Upsilonophorus Y-grecum, U. guttatus.
Birds.—Beddard (dis, Jan., 1890) describes the alimentary canal
of the Martineta Tinamou (Calodromas elegans.) The ceca differ
from those of all other Crypturi, being furnished with numerous small
diverticula, giving the inner surface an appearance not unlike the
ventriculum of a ruminant’s stomach.
376 The American Naturalist. [April,
Witmer Stone shows (Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Philadelphia, ase
that Sharpe has mistaken Verreaux’s Pratincola salax, and t it is
identical with P. sydi//a Linne. P. axillaris Shelly may be a ate
of the same.
Mammals.—Ryder (Proc. Am. Philos. Soc., XXVI., 1889) seeks
the phylogeny of the mammalian sweat gland in the epidermal glands of
the Batrachia, C. Hart Merriam (Worth American Fauna, No. 1; pub-
ished by the U. S. Department of Agriculture) presents a revision of the
North American pocket mice. With abundant material, he has recog-
nized eighteen species, but has united the two genera Perognathus
and Cricetodipus. Many changes in synonymy are noticeable. In a
second paper (l. c., No. 2) the same author describes fourteen new
species of mammals from North America, arranged in the genera
Onychomys, Arctomys, Lagomys, Spermophilus, Tamias, Nyctiono-
mus, and Phenacomys (nov.).
Beddard (Proc. Zodl. Soc., London, 1889) describes the visceral ,
anatomy and brains of the American tapir. He concludes that the
American species is distinguished from the Indian by the absence of
well marked valvulz conniventes, the presence of a moderator band in
the heart, the shape of the glans penis, and a more elongate czcum
sacculated by four bands. The cerebral convolutions are simpler in
Tapirus than in other living Perissodactyles.
Dr. R. W. Shufeldt describes (Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci., Philadelphia,
1889) the skull in an embryonic specimen of the California wood-rat,
Neotoma fuscipes.
Dr. Frank C. Baker describes (l. c.) the habits of the recently dis-
covered round-tailed muskrat, Neofiber aileni True.
EMBRYOLOGY.
The Placentation of the Hedge-hog (Erinaceus europaeus),
and the Phylogeny of the Placenta.!—Prof. A. A. W. Hubrecht
has placed embryological students under great obligations to him for
this admirable work upon the development of the hedge-hog. There
is room, however, for very wide difference of opinion as to the signifi-
cance of the facts recorded. While no one will probably be disposed
1 Quar. Jour. Mic. Sci., XXX., Pt. 3, 1889, pp. 283-404. Plates XV.-XXVII.
1899. ] Embryology. 377
to question the primitive position in many features, especially so far
as adult characters are concerned, of the hedge-hog and its insectiv-
orous allies, the assumption that its placentation is primitive is a very
different matter, While no one can help but admire the wonderful
fidelity and care with which the facts of placental development are
recorded, since the plates for histological details are simply unrivalled,
the conclusion that the placentation of the hedge-hog is primitive is
far from warranted.
So far from Prof. Hubrecht’s assumption as to the primitive nature
of this type’s placenta being borne out by his facts, it is distinctly and
emphatically negatived by them. In the first place, a ‘‘ reflexa’’ such
as is described by him is found in comparatively few forms. More-
over, such a development of the uterine mucosa is distinct evidence
in favor of the conclusion that the placenta in forms having such a
“ reflexa” is specialized. In some rodents, man, possibly Tamandua,
also Erinaceus, Talpide, Rhynchocyon, in all of which it is pretty
certain that the whole complex series of primary differentiations of the
blastocyst or blastodermic vesicle are completed without the accom-
paniment of an excessively rapid growth in its size, such as occurs in
the rabbit and opossum, where also there is either no reflexa formed,
or traces only of such an organ are developed later. In the first-
named forms there has occurred an adaptive abbreviation of the early
processes of development, which have not supervened in the last two,
or in the rabbit and opossum.
The peculiar mode of development of the hypoblast in the hedge-
hog is again specialized and widely different from what it is in most
rodents.
In the same way the site of the placenta and the germinal area are
different from those of other types, and therefore specialized. In the
first place, the embryo itself is formed at a point in the blastodermic
vesicle which is exactly opposite its homologue in the rabbit, mouse,
and rat, and probably even man, Bradypus, and Tamandua, as well as
many carnivora. In these last-named it is formed in a dorsal position
in the uterine lumen or just benéath the insertion of the mesometrium.
In Erinaceus the embryo is formed at a point on the surface of the
blastocyst diametrically opposite to the point of insertion of the meso-
metrium. The embryo in the first-named series therefore has its
dorsal aspect coincident at first with that of the parent ; in the hedge-
hog that aspect coincides with the ventral aspect of the parent. The
site of the attachment of the placenta is similarly reversed. In the
majority of forms the position of the placenta is immediately beneath
378 The American Naturalist. [April,
the insertion of the mesometrium. In Erinaceus the placenta fæœtalis is
affixed to the side of the lumen of the uterus diametrically opposite to
the insertion of the mesometrium. The COnclusion is therefore forced
upon us that there is no exact homology between the maternal portion of
the placenta in the hedge-hog and that of the same part in the large
majority of other mammalian types. The Name “ trophoblast’’ which
Hubrecht proposes for the ‘“ outer layer’’ of the blastocyst is exceed-
ingly apt and convenient, while his elaborate studies as to the role it
plays in the formation of the placenta, as well as its growth and fate,
constitute a most valuable contribution to the embryology of the higher
vertebrates. Nevertheless, one cannot help regretting that the obvious
and clear homology of this layer with the serous envelope, subzonal
membrane,—Deckschicht as this layer has been variously called,—has
not been more strongly emphasized. Of such a homology there cannot
be the sliglitest doubt ; the only difficulty in making it out is due to
the excessive concentration or abbreyiation of the early stages of
development already referred to. The Modification of their early
stages and their abbreviation in mammalia are also clearly adaptive
and directly so under the influence of trophic stimuli, which differ very
widely in character in the different mammalian orders. These differ-
ences are apparently due to the effects of what may, for want of a
better phrase, be called the reciprocal trophic stimuli exerted recipro-
cally upon each other by the blastocyst and uterine walls jn the differ-
ent types during the initial stages of development. The variations in
the differentiation and arrangement of the mucosa and its vessels in
the different forms must have had something to do with the genesis of
such different methods of differentiation of the primary stages of
mammalian development. The expectation of ever unravelling thef
causes of such differences through a study of the early development of
the fœtus alone will be fruitless. The Processes are in the clearest
possible manner directly adaptive in certain yery definite ways, which
purely morphological study is utterly and forever incapable of explain-
ing, and is no less irrational and absurd than to attribute such modifi-
cation to the “action ” of natural selection. Joun A. RYDER. -
SAE ae
2 ee
1890.] Physiology. 379
PHYSIOLOGY.
Electrical Phenomena in Human Skin,—Tarchanoff 1 makes
some interesting discoveries regarding the electrical phenomena in the
human skin, accompanying the stimulation of sense-organs and different
forms of pSychic activity. He connects different parts of the skin
with the galvanometer, e. g., palm and back of hand or of foot, palm
of hand and outer surface of forearm, latter and axilla, etc. Slight
tickling of the body surface produces a considerable movement of the
galvanometer mirror, following a latent period of from one to three
seconds, and continuing sometimes for several minutes after the stimu-
lus has ceased. Other stimuli cause similar electric currents, such as
heat, cold, pain, electric shocks, sounds, such as speaking and hand-
clapping, sniffing of ammonia and acetic acid vapor, sugar and other
sapid substances placed upon the tongue, light thrown into the eyes as
when the eyelids are merely opened to ordinary light. The author
goes further and finds that merely imagining these sensations, without
any stimulus of the sense-organs whatever, is sufficient to produce
analogous galvanic disturbances ; for example, if the individual fancies
himself to be enduring intense heat, a strong cutaneous current ap-
pears. Mental processes, such as the multiplication or division of
numbers, are accompanied by currents varying in intensity according
to the complexity of the process; thus, arithmetical problems, the
answers to which may be taken direct from the multiplication table,
call forth almost no electric change. Expectation of stimuli or of
questions to be answered causes irregular movements of the galva-
nometer mirror. Voluntary movements cause changes of an intensity
proportional to the amount of moyement. Fatigued individuals show
little or no galvanic effects.
In all of these cases the portion of the skin richer in sweat glands
becomes negative to the other portion. The author hence regards
the current as a secretion current. The results go to confirm the idea
that nearly every kind of nerve activity, from the simplest to the most
complex, is accompanied in man by increased activity of the sweat
glands, and to strengthen Hermann’s view that the current exhibited
in the contracted human hand is a secretion current, not a negative
variation of a preexisting muscle current. In explanation of the fact
of increased sweat secretion accompanying nerve activity, the author
casually suggests that, inasmuch as the latter causes an increase of
1 Pfiiger’s Archiv, Vol. XLVI., p. 46.
380 The American Naturalist. [April,
temperature and an accumulation of waste products, the perspiratory
activity is useful as a regulator by cooling the body and eliminating
the wastes.
Electrical Phenomena in Beating Heart.—Dr. Waller has
investigated 2 more fully the electromotive changes in the contracting
mammalian heart. The exposed and spontaneously beating heart of
the cat was studied zm sifu by means of the capillary electronometer.
The electrical variation of the ventricle resulting from a single beat
was found to be diphasic, indicating negativity of apex followed by
negativity of base. This confirms the author’s former discovery by
mechanical methods that the contraction of the apex precedes that of
the base, which is the reverse of what takes place in the frog. Some
preliminary experiments were tried on animals to determine whether
-the electrical variations accompanying the heart beat could be detected
on the surface of the body. These were successful, and led to a study
of the electrical variations of the heart in man.
It was found that leading off from points of the surface of the body
remote from the heart in the intact animal or in man gave the same
diphasic variation accompanying the ventricular contraction, the au-
ricular contraction giving no electrical indication. ‘The most favor-
able positions for the electrodes are on either side of a line running at
right angles to the long axis of the heart. Such a “line of zero
potential’’ in the normal human being, with heart tilted to the left,
extends from the left shoulder to the right side ; in the quadruped, with
heart toward neither side, it is transverse to the body axis. Leading
off from any point anterior to this line is equivalent to leading off
from the base of the ventricles; leading off from a point posterior to
this line is equivalent to leading off from the apex. Thus, in man
electrodes placed on the right hand, and either the right or the left
foot or left hand, gave a good variation; not so the left hand, and
either the right or left foot. Favorable combinations are the mouth
and the left hand, the right foot, or the left foot ; an unfavorable one,
the mouth and the right hand. In the cat a favorable combination is
either anterior extremity with either posterior extremity, but not the
two anterior extremities with each other. The electrical variation
precedes the mechanical movement of the heart, and is always diphasic,
indicating, as in the exposed heart, negativity of apex followed by
negativity of base. It would seem, then, that in the human heart,
and mammalian hearts generally, unlike the amphibian, the contrac-
2 Philosophical Transactions, Vol. 180 (1889), B., p. 169. Cf. also Vol. 178 (1887),
B., p. atk.
1890] Physiology. 381
tion by which the ventricle empties itself begins at the apex and closes
at the base.
Relations of Nerve Fibres and Ganglion Cells.—Langley
and Dickinson have discovered a method that promises to yield
important results in the investigation of this question. In studying
the effect of nicotin on the cervical sympathetic nerve they learned
that after a dose of the drug stimulation of the sympathetic fibres
below the superior cervical ganglion does not produce dilation of the
pupil or constriction of the vessels of the ear, while stimulation
above the ganglion produces both changes as usual. By applying
nicotin to nerve and ganglion at different times they conclude that
the poison paralyzes the ganglion nerve cells. This suggests a method
of isolating the nerve fibres joining the ganglion cells from those
passing through without such junction, Regarding the superior cervi-
cal ganglion, the authors conclude that the dilator fibres for the pupil,
the vaso-constrictor fibres for the ear (probably also for the head gen-
erally), and the secretory fibres for the glands end in the ganglion
cells. Regarding the relations of the vagus and splanchnic nerves to
the ganglia of the solar plexus, it would appear that the stomachic
inhibitory fibres of the splanchnic end in the cells of the cceliac
ganglion, the intestinal inhibitory fibres of the splanchnic in the cells
of the superior mesenteric ganglion, while the motor fibres of the
vagus do not join the cells of the solar plexus ; vaso-constrictor and
vaso-dilator fibres of the splanchnic end in cells of the solar and renal
plexuses. Other peripheral ganglia have been studied with results.
The nicotin appears to affect the nerve fibres very slightly, but this
effect is not to be compared in intensity with that on the nerve cells.
Numerous interesting questions are suggested by the research, viz.,
among others, whether by nicotin centers may be isolated, and tracks
followed in the brain and spinal cord.
Physiological Prize.—A member of the Physiological Society
has offered two hundred and fifty dollars for the best research or
researches bearing on the subject stated below, viz: ‘‘ The regenera-
tion of severed spinal nerves in mammals, including man, with special
reference (1) to the reunion and return of function in such severed
nerves, without degeneration of the distal portion ; (2) to the possi-
bility of union, with return of function, between the central portion of
any one spinal nerve and the distal portion of any other (e. g., the
central portion of the ulnar with the distal portion of the median).”’
3 Proceedings of Royal Society, No. 284, p. 423-
382 The American Naturalist. [April,
Conclusions are to be supported, so far as possible, by histological as
well as physiological evidence. The competition is limited to resi-
dents of North America, and the prize will be awarded for original
work done between January 1, 1890, and October 1, 1891. Commu-
nications concerning the prize should be addressed to Professor H.
Newell Martin, Johns Hopkins University, Baltimore, Md.
PSYCHOLOGY.
The Effect of Whistling on Seals.—While reading of “ In-
stances of the Effects of Musical Sounds on Animals,”’ by Mr. Stearns,
in which I have been much interested, it recalled to my mind appar-
ently similar effects produced upon seals, which I often noticed during
a prolonged stay in Hudson’s Strait. Here the Eskimo might often be
seen lying at full length at the edge of an ice-floe, and, although no
seals could be seen, they persistently whistled in a low note similar to
that often used in calling tame pigeons, or, if words can express my
meaning, like a plaintive phe-ew, few-few, the first note being prolonged
at least three seconds. If there were any seals within hearing distance
they were invariably attracted to the spot, and it was amusing to see
them lifting themselves as high as possible out of the water, and slowly
shaking their heads, as though highly delighted with the music,
Here they would remain for some time, until one perhaps more ven-
turesome than the rest, would come within striking distance of the
Eskimo, who, starting to his feet with gun or harpoon, would often
change the seal’s tune of joy to one of sorrow, the others making off
as fast as possible:
The whistling had to be continuous, and was more effective if per-
formed by another Eskimo a short distance back from the one lying
motionless at the edge af the ice.
I may add that the experiment was often tried by myself with the
same result.—F. F. Payne, Toronto, March 26, 1890.
1890.] Archeology and Ethnology. 383
ARCHEOLOGY AND ETHNOLOGY.
Fort Ancient, Ohio.—(By Warren K. Mooreneap. Cincin-
nati, O., Robert Clarke & Co.)—This volume of Mr. Moorehead’s is a
valuable contribution to antiquarian literature. It is confined to the
description of this fortification alone.
ort Ancient is located in central Warren County, Ohio, some
forty-two miles northeast of Cincinnati, on the P. C. and St. L. R. R.
It lies upon a plateau 269 feet above the Little Miami River, which it
overlooks and which flows at its base. The walls forming the enclosure
follow the brink of deep tavines. The embankments are mostly of
earth, although in places there are great quantities of stone. These”
rocks comprise flat slabs of limestone and some few pieces of sandstone,
A deep ravine, having a slope of thirty-five to thirty-eight degrees.
follows the earthwork for nearly a mile and a half on the western and
southern sides. The embankment is built directly upon the edge of
the ravine, so that the earth used in its construction has rolled down
upon the outside. Thus the earth artificially placed can be distinctly
traced forty feet from the summit of the earthwork. At the same place
the inside measurement of the wall is twelve to fifteen feet.
The accompanying map of the structure will indicate the peculiar
features
In its topographical work, its illustrations, its intelligent description
of the excavations, the volume is deserving of large praise.
Mr. Moorehead, with his party, spent the entire summer of 1889 at
Fort Ancient, preparing material for the book.
y differ from Mr. Moorehead in some of his conclusions, yet
we ies but admire the thoroughness with which the. structure has
been examined, and the completeness of the survey. In this regard it
is worthy the imitation of more pretentious parties.
The work is more laudable because Mr. Moorehead was not assisted
by any institution or person, but bore the expense of the investigations
himself.
The first few chapters of the book deal with the outline of the struc-
ture, measurements, etc. Those following describe the stone graves
and mounds explored, while the remaining chapters give quotations
from some twenty prominent antiquarians upon Fort Ancient, and ex-
press the author’s conclusions.
384 The American Naturalist. [April,
The distances of various points of interest have been ascertained
with care ; the length of the embankments in the Old and New Forts
is 18,712 feet. The length of the crescent in the New Fort is 269
feet ; length of the parallel walls, 2760 feet ; the distance in a straight
line between the extreme part of the New Fort to that of the Old is
4993 feet. The average height of embankment is twelve and one half
feet. In the highest places (where the walls cross the eastern side of
the plateau) it reaches an altitude of twenty-two feet, while in one
locality, where scarcely any protection on account of precipitous
ravines is necessary, it is but three and one-half feet
Two classes of burials were discovered ; the one bent aide in stone
graves, while the other was a simple interment under a small heap of
stones. The former order of burial resembles the stone graves of
Tennessee, A village site and cemetery similar to that of Madison-
ville, Ohio, was revealed by excavations in the valley adjacent to the
Miami River. Out of this valley were taken a quantity of refuse such
as would accumulate from an aboriginal village. The deposits were
found at three levels, the deepest being five feet below the surface.
the pottery of the lower deposit was different from that discovered
above, Mr. Moorehead is of the opinion that various tribes occupied
this region.
The general conclusions drawn are interesting. He is led to con-
clude from his examination of the place that the fortification was
erected by one people as a defence against a hostile tribe or nation.
He thinks that the neighboring Indians living within a radius of one
undred miles were allied and held in common this structure, that a
number were constantly detailed to keep it in repair, and that in case
of an invasion they congregated here for safety.
Mr. Moorehead gives the following definition of Fort Ancient :
“ Fort Ancient isa defensive earthwork, used at times as a refuge by
some large tribe of Indians; and at intervals there was a large village
situated within the walls.’’
In the excavations upwards of two hundred skeletons were exhumed,
an aboriginal stone pavement 130 by 500 feet discovered, etc. Alto-
gether the work is commendable, and we would feel inclined to criti-
cise but slightly. A ground plan of the fort is given, which is repro-
duced in the accompanying Plate XIII.—Tuomas Witson, Smithsonian
Institution.
March 15th, 1890.
~
am
S 7
s TE
jar 2 Í. oo dW,
sgl ey ZY a
HO Ye i
AN egy i
Hy) LOH ARR
WN MAN R R P
o a a
nih ENN Tay Ae
HAN KN jl
AN f,
f
y
ii 7
Wilf Mr
LG MRES a!
< Li
iif
A
j)
it
iy
` pase i
ia
au f if
ip tas
ily Jae
UN Ae
if
vor
PLATE XIll.
LG
4 PAN Wi, 7 K Py
Lhe h;
4 Th
wy
SRA
SS)
“Cth My fl i
N
IErp yeaa N
N ANY
TIANA
y Crescent
f
*
LENGTH. 2760 Be
Paraet Watts.
Pt
a EAS ITE OE sg SACRA SRL 2 5 t
: PaveMeENT. 5
Á a ORA
MELNIE
wat Gh
Cent
\ wit ns v
Wy
ave
A. New Fort.
asee
J
Piare 2.
RAYN C. COWEN.
200Fr
-———__+=** = :
SCALE — CCC oC eo
gp Of forte nT
GERARD FOWKE AND
CLINTON COWEN, SURVEYORS.
1889.
800Fr.
1000 fr
1890.] * Proceedings of Scientific Societies. 385
PROCEEDINGS OF SCIENTIFIC SOCIETIES,
Papers Read Before the Anthropological Society of
Washington During the Year 1889.—‘‘ The Shinto Faith,” by
Mr. Romyn Hitchcock. ‘‘ Anthropology at the Paris Exposition,’’ by
Profs. O. T. Mason and Thomas Wilson. ‘‘Some Omaha Religious
Practices,’’ by Rev. J. Owen Dorsey. ‘* Ancient Chipped-stone Work-
shops on Piney Branch, D. C.” by Mr. W. H. Holmes. ‘‘ The
Cherokee Ball Play,” by Mr. James Mooney. ‘‘ Remarks on Ameri-
can Archeology,’’ by Major J. W. Powell. ‘* Attempts to Promote
Prosperity by Limiting Production,” by Mr. Wm, A. Croffut. <‘ Hu-
man Footprints in Dakota’’ (Illustrated), by Mr. Henry I. Reynolds,
“ Vesper Hours of the Stone Age,’’ by Capt. John G. Bourke, U.S.A.
“The Archeology of North America, by Major J. W. Powell.
‘Ojibwa Ball Play,’ by Dr. W. J. Hoffman. ‘‘ Prometheus (The
Fire-maker), by Mr. Walter Hough. ‘‘Gentes of the Nayar by
Dr. Washington Matthews, U.S.A. ‘Gentes of the Apaches,” by
Capt. John G. Bourke, U.S.A. ‘ Olecranon Foramen,” by Dr, D.
S. Lamb. ‘‘ Tibét,” by Mr. W. W. Rockhill. ‘‘ The Origin of Llao
Nous, a Legend of the Shasta,’’ by Mr. Mark B. Kerr. ‘‘ Christophe
Plantin, the Antwerp Publisher of the XVIth Century,” by Mr. G.
Stetson. ‘‘ The Societe d’Anthropologie of Paris,” by Mr. Thomas
Wilson. ‘‘ The Omahas as Mound Builders,” by Mr. H. I. Reynolds.
Biological Society of Washington.—March 22d.—The fol-
lowing communications were read: ‘‘ Change in the Color of Human
Hair, Change in the Color of Plumage in Birds, and in the Fur of Mam-
mals,” with specimens, by Dr. D. W. Prentiss. ‘‘ The Color of
Fishes,” by Mr. G. Brown Goode. ‘‘The Colors of Insects,” by Prof.
C. V. Riley.—FRepEric A. Lucas, Secretary.
Natural Science Association of Staten Island.—March 13,
1890.—Mr. L. P. Gratacap exhibited specimens of quartz geodes and
limonite concretions from the iron mines near Four Corners, loaned
for the occasion by the superintendent of the mines, Mr. Amos Smith.
Following is an abstract of Mr. Gratacap’s remarks :
The specimens form but a small proportion of those which Mr.
Smith has collected, and although they embrace but two, or at most
three, mineralogical species, they are interesting from their real
beauty, and for the speculations they suggest as to their origin. The
species are quartz, limonite, and Géthite. The latter occurs as a deli-
cate closely appressed velvety surface, bronzed yellow in color, and
Am, Nat.—April.—6.
386 The American Naturalist. s [April,
consisting of a film of minute needles. It may be referred to the
variety of Göthite known as ‘‘sammet blende,” and is strikingly
beautiful when its color and texture appears in a direct light. The
limonite is shown in siliceous concretions, sometimes in concentric
shells, and in other instances enclosing ferruginous pebbles, between
which an infiltrating seam of iron cement has thrown interior parti-
tions. The quartz groups are large and handsome, and occur as
geodes or small rounded mounds of slightly divergent, faintly amethy-
stine crystals. They are characteristically alike in having the individ-
uals composed of groups of interfering pyramids, amidst which the
central crystal, most fully developed, rises, and at a distance seems to
blend the jutting faces of the subordinate rhombohedrons with its own,
and form a single stout termination. This peculiarity gives a slightly
drusy appearance to the entire surface. The elements of as many as
twenty-four pyramids are seen in some of the groups. These quartz
groups have all doubtless formed the central crystallizations of geode-
like siliceous balls or conduits. They have been found by Mr. Smith
at the lower levels of the surface diggings, near the underlying serpen-
tine ledges. The ores in which they occur are highly siliceous limon-
ites, which were deposited, in all probability, by the oxidation of iron
salts carried upward by thermal waters flowing through the crevices of
the serpentine mass, and fed to some extent. by surface waters carrying
dissolved iron oxides, a process made familiar by the papers of Drs.
Hunt and Julien. This view is supported also by Dr. Britton (Geol.
Richmond Co. Ann., N. Y. Acad. Sci., Vol. II., p. 177)
Now the experiments of Schafhautl, Senarmont, and Daubrée, in
making artificial quartz, have shown that gelatinous silica and glassy
silicates are attacked and dissolved by highly heated waters, either
alone or assisted by hydrochloric or carbonic acid, and that such
solutions deposit hexagonal pyramids of quartz. These interesting
quartz groups in the iron beds point conclusively to the exudation,
from the serpentine rocks below, of warm springs, at whose mouths,
upon cooling and removal of pressure, the quartz pyramids have been
formed. Their amethystine hue is attributable to manganese, which is
a prevailing ingredient of the iron ore of this region.
to the source of the silica, it is a possible hypothesis that it has
been supplied in a soluble form from the slow change involved in the
decomposition of hornblende masses, and the formation of serpentine.
In such a change there would certainly be a discharge of silica or sili-
cates, and they would naturally enter into solution in subterranean
1890.] Proceedings of Scientific Societies. 387
waters, which were themselves active agents in bringing about the very
decomposition from which these products result.
inally, the interrupted crystallization, to which we have especially
alluded, suggests that there has been rapid cooling and motion, such as
would occur at the orifice, and along or around the mouths of springs ;
unlike those magnificent results in Arkansas, where brilliant, sharply-
cut, and long crystals, would seem to indicate a slow growth of the
quartz prisms in a dense solution.
Mr. Arthur Hollick showed specimens of Anemone hepatica L., the
common Liverwort, collected in full bloom at Prince’s Bay on Feb-
phenomenally mild winter. Following are the earliest recorded dates
at which this flower was found in blossom in previous years :
Bee Vee March 25th 1880. . . . not recorded
Tote a Se ee Ag 1h see SS eee se April roth
OTS os eee ; April roth “1889... ies a April rst
ioe. Oe Miata ssh March arst 1683. o se April 8th
ESI eas Appr oah 188a e e April 2oth
S66 oe ee ee aa ee pe ae
SOT Ge tee March 24th 1886 5°... ee pril r1th
O76 Se 6 Mirch roh 1889 a ees April 17th
TOG 9 Se eS March toth 1888... . 2°. ss April 15th
i aetna le ee aa April 14th
In nearly every instance the plants were examined carefully about a
week or two previous to the dates above recorded, hence they could
not have been in blossom many days earlier. As the location of
plants makes a great difference in the time of flowering all these ob-
servations were made at the same or similarly situated localities, name-
ly, sheltered banks with a southern exposure, either near the Crystal
Water Co.’s reservoir, the Black Horse Ravine, or the pond near
'Prince’s Bay. The plants in the latter locality are slightly in advance
of the others and a week or more ahead of the average.
The following objects were shown: A cannon ball, presumably a
relic of revolutionary times, presented by Mr. S. N. Havens, who had
dug it up while excavating in the woods not far from the new Smith
Infirmary building. A stone axe and arrow-head, presented by Mr.
M. T. Merrill, which had been dredged from the bottom of the Kills
near Linoleumville. The articles were encrusted with barnacles and
Bryozoöns. .
388 The American Naturalist. [April,
SCIENTIFIC NEWS.
5. Notes on the Paleontological Laboratory of the United
States Geological Survey under Professor Marsh.
If there is any truth left under the sun then judgment must fall
on the scientist who walks the halls of the Yale Museum armed with
a wet sponge. Why a wet sponge? you say. Perhaps it was to
wipe the dust from some noble fossil? Far from it! but rather to
wash the purity of a truth out of the blackness of a falsehood. A
kind of organized touchstone that distinguishes the little gold from
the bulk of dross, which when deftly Swept across the surface of a
restored fossil, discloses the real and the unreal. For plaster of paris
is porous, and absorbs more readily than the denser fossil any
moisture from the sponge. So the blackened sepulchres yield up their
grewsome skeletons. Veritable sepulchres they necessarily seem to
those who have seen these fossils « black-washed ” from centrum
to spine, from shaft to extremities, reducing the whole to a uni-
formity of color that wiped out absolutely every vestige of the truthful
white plaster, leaving mankind in doubt as to what is real, what con-
jectural. This is illegitimate restoration in the eyes of the whole
world, and these old bones, restored to deceive rather than to instruct,
must sooner or later stand as monuments of reproach to the man who
has so far deceived the world and himself that he can only study them
with a wet sponge.
To those scientists in foreign lands, especially Germany, who have
marveled at the exceptional beauty and perfect preservation of Prof.
Marsh’s specimens, let it be said that although you cannot apply the
sponge test to his faultless, fractureless plates, you can to the specimens
from which they were drawn. But to see any man year after year
calling for a wet sponge to assist him in determining whether a suture
or a fracture were real or imitations wrought cunningly in the plaster,
by skilled labor, is to believe him worthy of the unqualified distrust of
science, wherever that word is spoken. One feels this the more keenly
when he knows that all his assistants to a man have repeatedly advised
with him, and cried out against this abuse, warning him of the criti-
cism inevitably resulting from such a stubbornly unscientific and mis-
leading course. His assistants are asked, not how nearly they can
approximate the truth, but instead, ‘‘ How closely can you imitate the
color and texture in that missing part ?’’ which being translated is,
How cunningly can you deceive? « That part looks too smooth; can’t
1890.] Scientific News. 389
you work in a crack or two to give it a natural look?” “‘ Just run a
suture along here, and scrape that process there to make it look like
the roughnesses for cartilaginous or ligamentous attachment.”’
At first the plaster worked badly, for many of the bones were black,
and to get that color in white plaster it was necessary to add such
quantities of lamp-black (with alcohol to make it mix with the water)
that the restored parts were soft and crumbled away. To overcome
this, glue water was added, which gave hardness, but like all glue was
treacherous, drying, cracking, scaling off and pulling away from its
moorings, thus exposing too clearly just where the fossil left off and
the fraud began. It was not until he had learned how to combine
plaster, bone-black, and gum acacia, that a mixture capable of un-
limited possibilities wasadopted. Were it possible, I would say, Verify
these words,—but you can’t. Stand straight before these restored speci-
mens, in the full and truthful light of day, and you can’t distinguish
between the rusty, frost-cracked, weather-beaten, moss and lichen
effects, craftily wrought in the plaster, and the conditions wrought by
time on the specimens themselves. But if critical study can reveal—
without the helpful sponge—the restored parts in some bones, it can’t
in others, some of which were prepared by myself, at his direction,
in my earlier days on the Survey, and are so craftly modeled and
colored that I cannot myself distinguish at arm’s length the real fossil
from the plaster. Of course the deceits and falsities of the specimens
thus tampered with were naturally enough transmitted to the drawings,
and the old deceits and falsehoods were enacted anew—compromising
that pre-eminently reliable Journal. Yes, still a third time, in the
costly plates of the government monographs, thence to be copied and
repeated in other ways, how often who will say ?—for a falsehood is
proliferous and self-propagating. If the deceptions thus practised were
confined to the specimens themselves, and not transmitted to paper
and then distributed throughout the world, it would not seem so serious
an evil. As it is, the Geological Survey must necessarily suffer reproach
either now or in the future.
Geologists abroad who cannot acquaint themselves personally with
the facts, may find in the above an explanation of the striking
absence in Professor Marsh’s plates of those conventional bars, light
shading, and simple outlines which fair-minded scientists universally
use to honestly indicate missing parts. In very marked contrast to
his course is that of foreign geologists, and our own paleontologists.
Their plates show things as they actually are, and are not daubed with
plaster to enlarge, distort, or conceal anything at the caprice of the
390 The American Naturalist. [April,
author. (Figs. 1, 2.) Another phase of this extensive restoration
_business is worthy of notice, and is thoroughly culpable. Professor
“Marsh gave tacit and oft-repeated directions ‘‘ not to da a stroke on a
Government fossil that was not absolutely necessary.” ‘‘I am not
doing missionary work for the Government,” ‘‘ They can do the
fancy work at the National Museum; we will only work them out just
enough to see what they are, and they can do the rest there.’’ But
bear in mind that all this time he was doing home missionary work on
his own private collections, and at Government expense too; restoring,
and embellishing, and mounting them on plaster bases and other sup-
ports ready for exhibition. ‘‘ Life was too short’’ to give a Govern-
ment specimen more than a lick and a promise, but quite long enough
to devote months and years of Government time and money in
beautifying his own private collections, and that too when they had
all been drawn, and lithographed, and all the measurements had been
FIG. 1.—Cervical vertebra of Kraer laticollis as it snpreres when drawn.
Take ooe, it hadn't been cost = when maton was m de.)
1G. same p , scien herana and elsewhere
it wan s doctoral on wre tice "the sibt per ain mia the two- sides, a thing that
heightens the realistic effect of the missing parts.)
taken, and the necessary notes made, so that not a single excuse
remained for squandering the Government appropriation in garnishing
and adorning his own particular specimens for impressive display in
his own particular museum. This abuse of public trust led us to
frequent and spirited disagreements and our relations became exceed-
ingly snuhed; and still more so when I refused to add to the crime of
t time that of deceiving in the restorations.
For he not only wished to have the deceptive plaster used in the
restorations, but insisted on having the bones so modeled as to exactly
correspond with the lithographic plates already drawn, and that too
after being repeatedly informed that to secure this similarity would
necessitate distorting and even breaking the fossils.
Once when I frankly gave him my opinion of this wholesale misuse
of the Government men and money for his own personal benefit, he
1890.] Scientific News. 391
declared that the power vested in him as Paleontologist was such that
it enabled him to apply his appropriation in collecting recent Birds or
Mammals in South America, or in hiring musicians for his entertain-
ment while at work, if need be. On another occasion when I rose in
opposition to this same wrong his reply was so strikingly characteristic
that it seems worth while to reproduce it from my yo book, to whose
unerring memory I entrusted all such matters. * * «Qn one
occasion when I complained to him frankly that it pie wrong to
employ so many of his force on private work, and that too much of
that sort of thing was done by him daily, and cited as one of several
instances the time when so many were engaged for more than a year
in making a restoration in papier-mache of his (so-called) Dinoceras,
he said, ‘‘ Now I simply say this to you, I have a contract direct with
the Government for the restoration of Dinoceras. What do you say
tothat?’’ There was nothing for a gentleman to say to so straight-
forward a statement, but I could scarcely believe my senses a mo-
ment later, when he explained that he had asked me as a favor
to help him out,—that the time required for the ah of
these restorations had been so gravely miscalculated t it had
taken twice as long as they had judged to finish them
was sick and tired of the whole matter. <‘ Besides it "hed cost
tremendously, and, every cent comes out of my own pocket.’ Then I
suggested that heads of departments with ‘‘ contracts direct with the
Government ” didn’t pay for things out of their own pockets. He
declared several times that I didn’t understand. ‘‘ You see it is this
way ; I am going to make the restorations, and the Government assures
me it will pass a bill to pay for them, so you see it is all right.” The
strikingly characteristic part of it is that he really hadn’t a contract
when he said he had. When the investigating committees shall have
inquired into the exact price the Government has paid for one paper
model of Dinoceras (and a frail one at that) some interesting figures
will surely come to light. His zeal to out-rival all others in the
startling size of his fossils has led him to send out casts of heroic
stature, and you natives and foreigners who have the great saurian
femur (‘‘At/antosaurus’’ immanis) “ exceeding eight feet in height,”
may saw off a two-foot back-log from the same, and then it will stand
as high as it does in the Yale Museum to-day. And you authors of
manuals of Geology, written in all sincerity for the honest and reliable
instruction of the youthful mind, may lop off the same amount of
plaster from your clean text, Neither was the huge Saurian one
hundred feet long, nor was its great thigh bone over eight feet in
392 The American Naturalist. [April,
length. It should be further stated for your information that the
author of this greatest of femora allowed this mistake to remain
* uncorrected in the proof-of Dana’s Manual of Geology, which was
submitted to him, after he and all around him could not help knowing
it was false. [Figs. 3, 4.] And you students in universities and
colleges throughout the world may turn to page 433 of Dana’s Manual
of Geology (third edition) or to page 462 of LeConte’s Elements of
Geology, or to page 779 of Geikie’s Elements of Geology (not to
mention other authors, for who can follow a deception through all its
infinite ‘ramifications !) and may draw your merciless pen through
‘‘more than eight feet high’’ and write ‘‘ more than six.’’
$
G. 3.—Femur of “Atlantosaurus” immanis asit stands in the Peabody Museum to-
day cone than six feet high).
shat TO Oeae y pps wai ae immanis (more than eight feet high), sent
In ordinary cases the world would relegate this to the category of
mistakes, but when the fragments refuse absolutely to go together, and
when a skilled foreign modeler tries for days to reconcile fact with
fiction, and tells his employer so, and when he ‘ must match the
pieces” by building them up with modeler’s clay, then it is that the
mistake looks so deliberate that the world withdraws its mantle of
charity.
1890.) Scientific News. 303
Plaster in bulk is cheap we know, but, when misused, will cost aman
his reputation. When Professor Marsh made his notorious “ Bison ” aiti-
cornis blunder,—describing, for a second time at least, a reptile as a
mammal,—the horns as they came in from the collector were not satis-
factory,—from a bison standpoint,—and were straightway broken
apart, straightened up, and given the ‘‘ proper sweep.”’
All the ugly chinks were filled with the ever-ready mixture, and the
helpless old ‘‘Bison’’ alticornis came out of it all witha nobility of front
creditable to the king of bisons himself, but with his personal appear-
ance so touched up withal that he couldn’t tell himself whether he was
a bull bison from the Tertiary, or an outraged reptile from the Meso-
ic. Nor could anyone for that matter. But when future genera-
tions shall have chiseled away the plaster from the cavities, foramina,
and sutures, its real identity may be re-established (Figs. 5 and
G. 5.—The ms of “Bison” alticornis Marsh, as nearly as they appeared w
received as is aele ce in their hoe condition. Colored plaster, once applied jaap a
specimen, cuts off much that is worth knowing. ` TE
FIG. 6.—The same as ar appear in the illustration, with no hint of the colo:
plaster. See American Journal of Science, Vol. XxEIV, October, 1887.)
But in the mean time illustrations of the ‘‘ Bison’’ horns go out to
the world (see American Journal of Science, Vol. XXXIV., October,
1887), but without the slightest intimation of the plaster hiatus there.
Now that it turns out a horned reptile, and not a bison atall, he neither
represents the live animal, nor the specimen as it came from the quarry.
394 The . American Naturalist. [April,
Fortunately, a plaster of Paris deception, once set, is just the hard
and lasting, and perfectly tangible sort of falshood that Science, with-
out reserve lays rough hands on. And the day has at last come, we hope,
when specimens from the plaster of Paris formation will no longer be
accepted by science as fossils, and the ‘‘ Plasterosauri,!’’ and ‘‘ Plastero-
theria’’ will be things of the past.
In his great antedated volume on the Dinocerata, the figures of his
so-called Dinoceras and Tinoceras are plump with plaster. Why, in
these plates of the Dinocerata many of the skulls and bones show not a
trace of their construction! How strongly contrasted with this are
the methods of all other American and foreign geologists, both as
regards the specimens themselves, and the illustrations of them.
These true paleontologists figure what they have, and do not figure
what they have not (Figs. 7 and 8)
7
Fics. 7 and 8.—Skulls of — Dinocerata, introduced to illustrate differences of treat-
ment by different authors. G. 7.—Skull of Loxolophodon ingens Marsh, illustrating
fairly the whole work on the gria ocerata. Itwill be noticed that = figure is free from
ything suggestive of the blemishes covered up with colored
Speaking of Dinoceras and Tinoceras brings to mind that interest-
a time when his review of the ghitrene sie ‘omg ed tee by
lasterosauri not original, A li th t of the
sina by a Yale professor, to whom Professor Wania was rh his various Sauri.
1890.] Scientific News. 395
himself, was signed by the initials of his type writer amanuensis, after
it had been rejected by two of his assistants ; facts that were gener-
ally known and commented on by his assistants at the time. But
where are the bones of Zinoceras? I have not seen them myself, save
a skull, and one or two foot bones, and possibly a pelvis, and assis-
tants best informed on this group declare that but few existed at all
Yet the superb plate shows not a missing bone save a few caudals.
Every vertebra, every rib, all the limb bones to the smallest bones of
the feet, are perfect. Such a complete specimen was never known.
There is a hole in the saucepan somewhere. ‘Then too, it is my dis-
tinct and positive recollection that when preparing the restoration of
were,
ea
`
`
i 8
a a -— A
FIG. 8.—Loxolophodon cornutus Cope, from Cope's plate in the Tertiary Vertebrata.
Tinoceras he gave directions that the drawings of Dinoceras be en-
larged one-fifth, and have a three-quarter view instead of side view, so
that it wouldn’t look too much like Dinoceras. These facts were
rather freely criticised at the time, leading us often to mirthful con-
siderations of the unusual elasticity of conscience which a Government
paleontologist must have to stick the head of one individual on the
396 The American Naturatst. [March,
enlarged carcass of another, and to found thereon a new genus and
species for publication in an official monograph. Out of all this is
evolved a paleontology so untrammeled by scientific conventionalities
that it is free and spotless from those ugly cross-bars, light shading, and
simple outlines indicative of missing parts, and quite as free from
acknowledgment of priority, and recognition of the works and dis-
coveries of others. But high art paleontology, not content with the
omission of tell-tale bars and outlines, goes, with its long acquired
momentum, still farther, and produces plates with such ingenious simi-
larities and differences that the very elect are deceived by the realistic
pionta show i in uhe mising parts. These are flanked with text fraught
d ities that highly-plastered up impressions
are easily vasa z
In substantiation of the frequent charges that Professor Marsh pre-
empts land to shut out other geologists, I am ready to add my weight
of testimony. More than that, he himself tells of putting hindrances
in the way of younger geologists, for when one of his workmen said
one day that ‘‘ Professor Osborn had published a paper with a restora-
tion of Brontotherium,’’ he came to my room greatly agitated, de-
claring that Professor Agassiz had simply played him false, having
promised that Professor Osborn should not see the collections at Harvard
at all, and then he not only let him see them, but also describe them.
When a former assistant secured a desirable position, Professor Marsh
vowed if he had only “known it sooner the man would never have
gotten that place.’’ Not only does he avoid helping his assistants to
better positions in geological fields, but he often hinders them by
trampling on their good names when gone. We assistants watched
the evolution of a falsehood from his lips, from the day when he said,
‘that man has resigned ” to the month when he said, “I had to let
him go ; he was a bad lot,” until still later he ‘‘ dismissed him because
he was unreliable and light-fingered.’’ Thus it happens that some
judicious assistants on resigning have shown commendable forethought
in requiring of him papers, showing that they were not dismissed, as
protections for their character against evil words and insinuations.
y his ever-recurring, never-ending expressions of hatred and
distrust, Professor Marsh methodically tries to fill to saturation the
minds of his young assistants with prejudice against his contemporary
in paleontology (Professor Cope). These are but allusions to his
? When one writes that “ the diplosphene has long been known,” the uninitiated might
eni SEN that the word had been coined for the occasion, to overthrow a name
hyposphene,” proposed by a contemporary for a new osteological point.
1890.] Scientific News. 397
hindrances put in the way of others in his attempts to monopolize
paleontology in the East and West.
an the people see the Government specimens? No, they cannot!
and in all justice to the present management, possibly there is no rea-
son, as he claims, why they should. After Professor Silliman and
Professor Cope ‘‘ went through’’ his collection, as Professor Marsh
charges, we were directed not to admit even Professor Silliman or any
of the Yale faculty, much less a stranger,—a demand so unjust that I
for one refused, once for all, absolutely, to do anything of the sort.
Newspaper men were particularly guarded against, even the editors of
the college papers. Professor Benjamin Silliman was not only a mem-
ber of the Yale Faculty, but was also one of the trustees of the Yale
Museum, and I am one of the ‘‘ two witnesses’? who saw Professor
Cope, at the invitation of Professor Silliman, ‘‘ commit his depreda-
tions ’’ on Professor Marsh’s “ private specimens,” by walking through
his open rooms. Professor Silliman and Professor Cope spent but a
, few minutes in each room. I saw them come and go. Professor Cope
scarcely looked at the specimens, and didn’t touch or uncover one, as
I will testify under oath, Professor Marsh notwithstanding. So the
scandalous half column devoted to the ‘‘ depredations ’’ and ‘‘ out-
rages,’’ and other designedly damaging statements, has only the most
visionary foundation on fact. That his connection with politics should
lead him to stoop from the high plane of a scientist to that of a
scheming demagogue is a disgrace worthy of publicity. It is just such
traits of character as this that have cost him the friendly support of all
his assistants. A certain faithlessness runs through all his doings, so it
is not to be marvelled at that it crops out in cuts and text. One im-
portant assistant, on private pay, not independent at the time (drawing
a small salary, not half his just deserts), was asked as a favor to be
listed on the Government pay-roll, to which he readily agreed as a
matter of accommodation, only to find, the next quarter, that his
salary had been cut down two hundred dollars. These facts, and
many that are necessarily suppressed for the nonce, in consideration of
the present members of his force, coupled with his insincerity in
scientific work, will help to explain why the personnel of his force un-
dergoes such constant and rapid change. High-spirited young men,
college graduates, cannot and will not tolerate such associations and
environments.
In the matter of drawings, Professor Marsh sacrifices veracity and
honor to secure high art in his illustrations, and the Government pays
the bill. Not only does he assiduously avoid combining figures on the
398 The American Naturalist. [April
plates, but he makes all drawings on a large scale, necessitating many
double and quadruple folded plates.
He even goes to an extreme that is simply culpable, and makes
some drawings natural size. To be specific, one such plate, represent-
ing a full-length drawing of an enormous caudal vertebra of ‘‘Bronto-
saurus’’ excelsus, is not far from three feet wide by four feet long,
nearly equaling sixteen plates of ordinary size. Any lithographer can
tell you about what the Government doles out for luxurious display of
this sort. One plate would have given a very liberal space indeed for
the figure of this unimportant caudal, The idea that to be scientific
drawings must be full length! Let us rejoice that Professor Marsh is
not called upon to write up, at the expense of the people, the natural
history of the whale. But the cost of gorgeous plates is a mere
bagatelle to the public treasury compared with the waste resulting
from his natural indolence and mismanagement, Just think of leaving
a large force of men without superintendence; no one to direct or
advise! As a matter of practical business experience such a method
is simply disastrous, and right here we may look for a rational expla-
nation of the fact that Professor Marsh accomplishes but little, although
his force is large and competent. He actually compels the men to
hunt for work, instead of so appointing it as to secure their best efforts,
and in general manages with such culpable deliberation that Govern-
ment contracts for monographs lapse unnecessarily,? and in twenty-
five years two monographs only appear to show for the talent and
appropriations expended! But Ease finding itself outwitted by In-
dustry, ingeniously catches up with all rivals by an antedate,‘ and we
record one more quibble in the growth of a monograph.
On consulting my books I find myself writing indignantly about
this matter as much as four years ago, and mentioning his spending
every moment on trivial details which concerned the workmen only,
instead of inspiring greater effort, or urging on the work as a whole.
Or, as Mr. Harger has often told me, to illustrate Professor Marsh’s
eye for the small things, ‘‘ I have seen him sign his approval to a plate
having the name spelled wrong, and even the bone upside down,
without seeing either mistake, but a comma with a broken tail had
been carefully marked.’’ (The entire edition of two plates was
printed with the bones wrong end up.) Countless petty things
3 As the author remembers it, each = three contracts for monographs have lapsed,
been renewed, and lapsed a second tim
t The reference is, of course, to the Dinocerata, goons lowe T sci
Tertiary Vertebrata, published in ‘aie: but before the Dinocera’
i
‘aa
1890.] Scientific News. 399
detained him from the museum, such as’ buying Jersey cows, orchids,
etc. A calving cow has detained him till dark—that, too, at a time
when he was to leave the next day to be gone a fortnight. With even
moderate industry his Sauropoda contract could not have lapsed, nor
could his Stegosauridz and Brontotheridz contracts have shared a like
fate. In all justice, however, to Professor Marsh, it should be stated
that the best interests of the Survey demand that he should have the
utmost freedom in going, coming, or absenting himself outright from
the laboratory. But this does not excuse him for leaving his force
without some one to systematize, plan, and direct the work effec-
tively. Then his inefficient business methods as regards the salaries of
his assistants lead to endless friction and general dissatisfaction. Not
only does he dole out the pay quarterly,—not monthly, as the Govern-
ment does,—but often, even then, postpones the pay-day from two or
three days to as much as three weeks, and then at the end of this time
makes matters still more annoying by all sorts of petty quibbles, and
what we called ‘‘ Marsh’s tricks.’ On one occasion, during my
_ earlier experiences on the Survey, he handed me the vouchers and a
receipt in full, all of which were duly signed. He in turn signed a
check for payment in part (deducting some fifty dollars), which he
handed over, explaining in all candor that “the balance would be
made good at the end of the year.” ‘‘It’sa way they have on the
Survey.” But as it was a way I didn’t have, and ‘‘ though his word
was as good as his bond,” another check was forthcoming. Forget-
ting this failure, the same untrue and unfair game was tried again later
with like results.
His unpardonable neglect of proper superintendence costs the Gov-
ernment far more than all his sumptuous high art works on paper and
in plaster. The only time when Prof. Marsh does show signs of real
industry is when he rushes precipitately into the description of a
‘“ new genus.” Utterly disregarding the advice of his ablest assistants,
and neglecting those thorough investigations which might check his
growing list of useless generic names, he oat his specimen on the
first impulse, and his list is swelled by one more name. A sacrum
comes in ‘‘ consisting of only three vertebra "” sett other two knocked
off ): he sees in it a “ totally different genus,’’ and though it is contrary
to all probability and to the advice of his assistants, he industriously
founds a new genus and species on it. (See American Journal Science,
Vol. XVII., January, 1879; also text-books of geology.) Should the
Geological Survey by any chance be crippled by the recent overhaul-
ing of Prof. Marsh’s methods, it would be a national loss, but it is
-400 The American Naturatist. [April,
_ certain that the present paleontologist deserves such a reprimand that
he will be forced to adopt methods recognized as legitimate by
scientists. Whether such men as Prof, E. D. Cope, Prof. Persifor
Frazer, Dr. T. Sterry Hunt, Dr. F. M. Endlich, and others, are
moved by envy, malice or hate in agitating this-geological controversy,
matters little—that is precisely the cheap kind of retort the world ex-
pects; yet the fact remains that Prof. Marsh’s assistants and others are
marshalled against him also, No man engaged in scientific pursuits,
however flanked by wealth and influence, can possibly hope for the
support of high-minded, honorable men, if his course is such as to lay
him plainly open to charges of trickery, plagiarism, illegitimate
methods, disregard of the works of others, the rights of priority, and
incompetence in general. Although the present paleontologist may,
by the very weight of his official position and influence, avoid the
scrutiny of an investigating committee, which in common justice he
should not escape, he cannot but be weighed in the balance by scien-
tists and found wanting.—Erwin H. BARBOUR, PH.D.
Lowa College, March 15, 1890.
Die Spinnen Amerikas.—The death of the German araneel-,
ogist, Count Keyserling, made a large breach in the little circle of
working araneologists. It was known that he had left a large amount
of manuscript for the concluding parts of his work, ‘“‘ Die Spinnen
Amerikas,’’ and this, it was feared, would be lost to science. But the
publishers, with praiseworthy enterprise, have resolved to complete
Keyserling’s work as far as possible after the original plan. They
failed, however, to find any one in Europe who would edit the finished
manuscripts and complete the fourth volume, which treats of the
Epeiride. In this emergency they solicited the aid of Dr. George
Marx, of Washington, D. C., who has at last consented to undertake
the task. Being a thorough German scholar and a well-furnished
araneologist, Dr. Marx is admirably equipped for this duty. A large
part of Count Keyserling’s manuscript, which was in a good degree of
forwardness, has already been edited, and will soon be ready to trans-
mit to Germany. Dr. Marx will then edit the notes upon the Orbite-
lariæ, and add descriptions of the species which Keyserling had not
reached at the time of his death. He will thus contribute about one-
third of the matter in what will constitute Volume IV. of ‘ Die
Spinnen Amerikas.’’—Henry C. McCook.
THE
AMERICAN NATURALIST
VoL. XXIV. MAY, 1890. 281.
THE HOMOLOGIES OF THE FINS OF FISHES.
BY E. D. COPE.
I. 'THE RELATION OF FINS TO LEGS.
ae it is well established that the paired fins of fishes
are, as a whole, homologous with the limbs of the higher ver-
tebrates, and although many naturalists have given their views upon
the homologies of the respective parts, the subject is yet involved in
considerable doubt; and, as stated by Prof. Huxley in 1871, the
basal and radial supports of the fins themselves can only be iden-
tified in the most general way with the limb-bones or cartilages
of other vertebrata.
The: doctrine that the vertebrate limbs are modified ribs was
advocated, to a varying extent and with modifications, by Maclise’
(1832) and Oken? (1843); while Owen? (1848) regarded them
as diverging appendages attached to ribs, with a shoulder-girdle
of axial origin. Professor Goodsir * (1857) considered the limbs
as homologous with the epipleural spines of fishes, and external
to the proper visceral wall of the body. Professor Humphrey *
(1871) concluded that the vertical fins were of bifold origin, since
1 Todd's Encyclopædia, Vol. IV., p. 79- Fig. 490.
2 Lehrbuch der Natur-Philosophie, p. 330.
3 Archetype and Homologies of the Vertebrate Skeleton.
4 Edinburgh New Philosophical Journal, Vol. V., 1857, p. 178.
5 Cambridge Journal of Anat. and Physiol., Vol. V. (Second Series, Vol IV.), p. 58,
402 The American Naturalist. [May,
the dorsal and ventral mid-lines of the body are formed by the
junction of the bifold /amine dorsales and ventrales. He con-
sidered that the pectorals and ventrals were certain portions of
the lower azygos fins, prevented from uniting by the interposed
body-cavity. Maclise had previously regarded the distal por-
tions of the limbs as corresponding with the azygos fins. In
An
I —Diagrammatic as cheap ne of primitive gr derivative types of lateral and
median ia 4, primative condition, fins continuous; B, derivative condition, fins dis-
tinctand specialized ; D, dorsa opera Be pectoral ; ch ventral: A F,anal; SF, caudal:
orsal; FF, second dorsal fin; from Wiedershe
1876 Balfour® described the development of the limbs of
Elasmobranchs as “ special developments of a continuous ridge
on each side, precisely like the ridges of epiblast which form the
rudiments of the unpaired fins,” and concludes from this “that
the limbs are remnants of continuous lateral fins.” The primitive
folds persist in the vertical and caudal fins, while the paired fins
represent portions of such folds (Fig. 1).
As regards their intimate structure, those of the Elasmobranchs
and Polypterus occupy in some sort a middle term between those
of the Teleostomata and those of the Dipnoi. In order, there-
fore, to trace out the homologies between the segments -of the
paired fins of the Teleostomata and those of the limbs of the
Reptilia, the parts must be traced in lineal order through the
following classes or sub-classes: Reptilia, Batrachia, Dipnoi,
Elasmobranchii, Teleostomata. (Figs, 2, 3.) Naturalists dis-
* Tbid., Vol. XI, Part I., p. 132.
1890.] The Homologies of the Fins of Fishes. 403
agree in the interpretation of the homologies of these parts,
but if the view enunciated by Balfour of the origin and
development of the paired limbs is the correct one, it is pos-
sible that a homology can be traced
along the downward scale of limb-
development from the Batrachia on
the one hand, and the Teleostomata on
the other, to the ancestral type of the
Ichthyotomi of the Carboniferous, the
oldest limb type known.
Dr. Gill” traces out the relationship
of the members of the shoulder-girdle -
in the Dipnoi with those of the Batra-
chia as follows: The proximal element
of the anterior limb of the Dipnoan is
the homologue of the humerus. In
the Urodela the humerus is articulated
chiefly with the coracoid ;. therefore,
the element of the Dipnoan shoulder-
girdle with which the humerus is
articulated is the coracoid, unless evi-
dence to the contrary can be produced.
The scapula in the Batrachia is entirely foc iat ela auaa Wes D,
or almost excluded from the glenoid axial elements; t, radials; F.S, fin-
foramen, therefore the corresponding ™*? BA VOET
element in the Dipnoi must be the scapula. The element of the
Dipnoan shoulder-girdle continuous downwards from the scapula,
and to which the coracoid is closely applied, is named by Gill the
ectocoracoid. Each half of the shouldergirdle is surmounted by
an element which is named the supraclavicle by Gegenbaur, the
suprascapula by Gunther, the scapula by Owen ; and this is in
turn connected with the skull by another element, the posttem-
poral of Parker and Gill, who justly observe that there is an à
priori improbability against the homology with the scapula of any
part having a ligamentary connection with the humerus-bearing
element.
1 Arrangement of the Families of Fishes, Nov., 1872. Smithsonian Misc. Col., Val. XI.
LY
Mf 4
Ahy f
UE A 3
ONRU
Ss SS
SSS :
SS INR PAOL
SS = ; ASS
G. 2—Neoceratodus forsterii,
404 The American Naturalist. [May,
As far as his argument applies to the Dipnoan pectoral Gill,
may be safely followed, except in his view of the element abutting
upon the occiput, which he regards as having intimate relations
with the skull, and probably originating from it. In tracing
back the homologies of the parts of the Dipnoan to those of the
teleostome shoulder-girdle, Dr. Gill is less cogent, and the nom-
enclature adopted by Gegenbaur ® appears preferable. The latter
author figures the right half of the shoulder-girdle and the thor-
acic fin of a teleostome fish (Gadus). Here there is no humerus
Fic. 3.—Heptanchus griseus, left pectoral fin, pluribasal type. SB, ipit arch;
N L, foramen; Pr, propterygium ; Ms, mesopterygium ; Mt, metapterygium ; a 4, exis of
metapterygium; a, basilars; FS, fin-rays; from Wiedersheim.
recognizable as such, but that the so-called “carpals” or basilars
of the fin are regarded as representing it, is evident from the
fact that the bone to which they are attached is styled the cora-
coid, and that which abuts against it the scapula. The element
corresponding to the “ proscapula” of Gill, and formed, accord-
ing to him, of the united scapula and ectocoracoid, is by Gegen-
baur called the clavicle, which is attached to the supraclavicle
8 Elements of Comparative Anatomy, Second Edition, p. 475, 1877.
1890.] The Homologies of the Fins of Fishes. 405
above. The bone connected with the skull is, as has been said
before, named the posttemporal by Parker. The clavicle of
Gegenbaur is the coracoid of Owen,’ while his scapula is Owen's
ulna, and his coracoid the radius. As Gill remarks, Owen first
sought to determine an ulna and radius, and then identified the
other bones from their relations to it. (Figs. 3 and 4.)
But, even though the terms used by Gegenbaur be adopted as
representing most nearly the correspondences between the parts
of the shoulder-girdle of the Dipnoi and Stapedifera on the one
hand, and those of the Teleostomata, Crossopterygia, Podopterygia,
and Elasmobranchs on the other, an exact homology is not yet
positively assured. Hence Gill ,
has subsequently termed Gegen-
baur’s scapula hypercoracoid, and
his coracoid the hyopocoracoid.
In the ventral fins the process
of concrescence is carried to a
considerable extent in Polypterus
and the Chrondrostei, and farther
still in Amia, Lepidosteus and the
Teleostomata, which agree in the
possession of a single large elon-
gated element proximal to the
basilars in each ventral. To this
base areattached four long basilar
rays in Polypterus, nine in 4c-
cipenser brevirostrum, and three = Fic 4.—Satmo fario, left shoulder-girdle ;
minute ossicles in the Teleosto- se taena De ia t ieg paprik at;
mata. The elongated supporting Co(CI), coracoid; Ra, basilars; Z, scap-
bone is styled by Thacher a “eet: 25. TS mny.
pubis, and Wiedersheim has recently shown that it isa part of `
the pelvis, and, being preacetabular, is the homologue of the pubis.”
The conclusion that can be arrived at from a study of both the
pectoral and ventral fins is that the limbs of all air-breathing
mammals or Stapedifera (possessed of a stapes) form a group
9 Comp. Anat. and Physiol. of Vertebrates, Vol. I., p. 106.
10 Anatomischer Anzeiger, 1889, IV.
406 The American Naturaizst. [May,
more nearly related to each other than any of them are to any
other vertebrate groups; and that the archipterygian form is to
be found in the unibasal pectoral and ventral fins of the Ichthyo-
tomi, the unibasal Crossopterygia, and the Dipnoi. (Plate xiv.)
These are substantially the conclusions arrived at by Mr.
Thacher," who names the group composed of the Dipnoi and
higher vertebrates the Choanata, from their possession of “ choanz,”
or posterior nares opening behind the lips. But the Ichthy-
otomi and the unibasal Crossopterygia were not known to him.
According to Gegenbaur,'’ the archipterygium, or primitive
form of limb from which all the limbs of the Gnathostomes, or
vertebrates with lower jaws, have been developed, is to be found
in its parent form in the limb of Ceratodus, which consists of
an elongated, tapering, many-jointed rod, bearing upon each side
a series of rays. In a previous paper,“ the fin of Protopterus,
bearing on the outer side only a series of rays, had been taken as
the type. In the second edition of his “Grundriss,” Gegenbaur
adheres to the idea enunciated in his later article,“ and identifies
the metapterygium of Acanthias and other Elasmobranchs, plus
one-only out of the many rays, with the main stem of the fin of
Ceratodus ; while the Bea gar 2 oe ae and all the
jase
G. 5.—Archipterygium Æ, and transitional stages to actinopterygium A, according
to Pet at from Wiedersheim,
other rays of the Elasmobranch fin are regarded as developments
from the lateral rays of a Ceratodus-like fin. By a further slip-
ping off of the rays from the main- or stem-row, Gegenbaur de-
rives the many-rayed fins of the Teleostomata from those of the
Elasmobranchii, which he has previously asserted to be derived
11 Ventral Fins of Ganoids. Trans. Conn. Acad. , IV., 1877, p. 242.
13 Anatomy of igre pA p.
14 Jena. Zeitschrift, Bd. VII., Hft. 2, pp. igi- 141.
15 Ibid., Bd. V., Hft
1890.] The Homologies of the Fins of Fishes. 407
from those of the Dipnoi. Huxley,” in 1876, concurred in this
view of the archipterygium, but regarded the main stem as pass-
ing through the fifth finger instead of through the thumb, an ar-
rangement which Gegenbaur has adopted in his second edition.
(Fig. 4.)
As has been shown, the view propounded by Mr. Thacher
in 1877,” and also independently worked out by Prof. Balfour,
namely, that the paired fins of all vertebrates are formed from a con-
tinuous lateral fold, corresponding to the median fold from which
the vertical fins of fishes are derived, is that which is supported
by the greater weight of evidence, and is now most generally
adopted. It is strongly supported by the extinct genus of Ac-
anthodean fishes, Climatius, in which a series of spines extends
on each side of the abdomen from the pectoral to the ventral fins.
And these spines are said to be similar to those which support
the anterior border of these fins. The evidence of paleontology
is, however, equally in favor of the unibasal paired fin (archiptery-
gium) as the ancestral form, as it characterized the oldest Elasmo-
branchii (Ichthyotomi) and Crossopterygia, while the pluribasal
type is of later age in both divisions of fishes. But it may have
been derived from a continuous fin, as suggested by Climatius.
If this view be followed, the Dipnoan paired fins must be re-
garded as a derivative from the paired fins of the Ichthyotomi,
which must still be looked upon as the form from which the
limbs of the Stapedifera or air-breathing vertebrates have been de-
rived. Baur believes that the latter have been constructed from
a simple axis like that of Lepidosiren by a process of budding,
and not by rearrangement of the branches of a fin of the Cerato-
dus type. The Teleostomata, although specialized in many ways,
stand on one side of the upward line that leads to the reptiles,
birds, and mammals, and their paired fins retain much of the
primitive character.
2. THE RELATIONS OF FINS TO EACH OTHER.
The paired limbs of the higher vertebrates appear, at first
sight, exceedingly unlike the fins of fishes, yet it has long been
16 Proc. Zodl. Soc. Lon., 1876, Pt. 1, on Ceratodus forsterii.
1T Proc. Conn. Acad., Vol. II., p. 281.
408 The American Naturalist. [May,
believed by naturalists that the pectoral and ventral fins of the
latter are the homologues respectively of the fore and hind limbs
of the former. But between the paired fins of fishes and the
median or vertical fins there are also resemblances which war-
rant a suspicion of their origin from similar primitive structures,
nsomuch that it is now believed by many that the median fins
are derivatives from a primitive continuous vertical fold, while the
paired fins are the specialized remainders of primitively continu-
ous lateral folds.
Cope, writing in 1870,° remarks upon the analogy that exists,
on the one hand, between the succession in the type of the pec-
toral fin, commencing with the simple axis of the Dipnoi, and
passing to the axis with lateral appendages or radii, seen in
Selache, and, on the other hand, the succession by which the
median fins of Polypterus pass from rays with a jointed, forked
extremity continuous with the base (in the caudal part of the
series) to the structure that obtains in the dorsal pinnules, which
consist of a strong spinous ray from the posterior face of which
a number of soft rays project. He also regarded the segments
which support the dorsal and anal rays in ancient fishes and
Elasmobranchs as homologous with those which support the rays
of the pectoral and ventral fins, and calls them all basilars, and,
in a later essay, ° baseosts. He showed that the baseosts expe-
rience the same reduction with time in all the fins, being obliter-
ated in the dorsal, anal, and ventral fins in nearly all modern
Teleostomata, and being reduced to four or fewer in the pectoral
fin in most of the same.
A most carefully worked out contribution to this portion of
the developmental history of vertebrate appendages is that of J.
K. Thacher,” who converts the analogy noticed by Cope into a
homodynamism, and regards the Dipnoan paired fins, not as
maintained by Gegenbaur,” as the primitive form or archiptery-
18 Contribution to the Ichthyology of the Lesser Antilles, Amer. Philos. Society,
— 446-483, 1870.
19 AMERICAN NATURALIST, ci pP. 1016,
20 Median and Paired dyes rans. Conn. Acad., Vol. III., 1877.
"1 Jena. Zeitschrift, B Cie 4. Gegenbaur Lge den Gliedmaassen der Wirbel-
omy im Allgemeinen rete das Hintergleidmaassen der Selachier in besonders. May,
PLATE XIV,
ANY NOW \\ AY \
RS \ \ \N
WR AA AERA FAA AAAI MAT S ae aay, Ge
yann AWW A SOROS PMY NA NCSA DALIA :
yyy UMG YI Dea Pp yO
XENACANTHUS DECHENI.
1890.] The Homologies of the Fins of Fishes. 409
gium, but as a derivative from the primitive series of parallel
rays of the lateral folds.
- The conclusions of this writer respecting the median fins are
as follows: The primordial median fin-rays are derived from a
series of parallel chondroid rods, which grow up in the median
fold totally independent of the cartilaginous arches above and
= below the notochord. The earliest representatives of these parts,
as the quadrate markings at the base of the median fin in
Branchiostoma, and the fin-rays of Myxine and Petromyzon, are
much more numerous than the vertebre opposite them, There-
fore, neither are median fin-rays derived from neural spines, nor
neural spines from primordial fin-rays, but neural spines are
formed by the dorsad prolongation and union of the neura-
pophyses of the vertebrz.
This statement, which is supported by the structure, not only
of the Bwer fishes mentioned above, but that of the Elasmo-
branchs, which have from 2 to 3.5 fin-rays to one vertebra, and
that of Acipenser, is in opposition to the earlier opinion of Gegen-
baur,” who asserts that the primordial fin-rays, in their simplest
form, are mere prolongations of the neural spines.
The primitive fishes have been shown by Cope to sustain the
view of Gegenbaur. The invariable equality of number between
the vertebre and the actinophores (see section 3, below) in Dipnoi
is supposed by Thacher to be the result of the entire loss of the
primordial median fin-rays, the long and segmented supports of
the median fold in Lepidosiren, Ceratodus, etc., being simply elong-
ated neural spines. This view is not sustained by paleontology.
Carrying his argument onwards to the lateral or paired fins,
Mr. Thacher shows that the ventral and dorsal fins of Mustelus
canis, agree in every respect save the separateness of the basal ele-
ments in the latter, and their coalescence in the former, and argues
that this certain amount of similarity warrants us in inferring
an earlier state when the similarity was greater. The similarity
between the structure of the anal and ventral fins of Acipenser is
evident from an inspection of the figures. The theory put forward
by Thacher, is, therefore, as follows: As the dorsal and anal fins
22 Grundriss der Vergleichenden Anatomie, 1873, P. 488.
s
410 The American Naturalist, [May,
were specializations of the median folds of Branchiostoma, so the
paired fins were specializations of the two lateral folds which
are the homologues of the Wolffian ridges, in embryos of higher
forms. Rods formed in both median and lateral folds. In the
latter, these became at least twice segmented, the orad ones were
prolonged inwards, more or less concresence took place, and the
cartilages spreading, met below in the middle line, and later, ex-
tending dorsad, completed the limb girdle. Gegenbaur, in the
later edition of his “ Grundriss,” has modified his views respecting
the nature of the primordial fin-rays, since he says : ” “ Supporting
organs, formed from the integument, are connected with the parts
thus formed by the vertebral column ( ior and inferior arches),
and they are continued into the caudal fin. In the Selachii the
fin-rays are formed by the so-called horny filaments, and in the
Ganoidei and Teleostei by ossifications.”
The same eminent anatomist, who has aided so greatly in es-
tablishing the relationship between the various parts of the simple
paired fins of the Dipnoi, and those of the air-breathing verte-
brates (Stapedifera, Thacher), refuses to concede the homodyna-
mism of the median and paired fins, but adheres in the later
edition of the “ Grundriss ” to the theory propounded by him in
1872,* namely: their derivation from the branchial arches, by the
articulation of the simple lateral rays set upon those arches to
the central ray, which gradually assumes increased length, and
becomes an axis. In this way a fin like that of Ceratodus might
be produced.
The views of Mr. Thacher are, however, supported by the in-
dependent but later observations of Balfour,* who found that in
the embryo dogfish the lateral fins have precisely the same mode
of origin as the dorsal median fin, arising “as special develop- `
ments of a continuous ridge on each side, precisely like the
ridges of epiblast which form the rudiments of the unpaired
fins.”
23 Elements of oon Anatomy, by Carl Gegenbaur, 1877. (Translated by F.
pey Bell, B.A., 1878), p
2t Untersuchungen zar Vorgleichenden Anat. der Wirb., Hft. III., Kopfskelet der Se-
lachier, p. 181r, Note,
Balfour. biavlicates of Elasmobranch Fishes, 1878.
1890.] The Hemologies of the Fins of Fishes. 411
A later contribution to this branch of the subject is contained
in a paper entitled “ Notes on the Fins of Elasmobranchs, with
considerations on the Nature and Homologues of Vertebrate
Limbs,” by St. George Mivart, published in the Transactions of
the Zoological Society of London, February, 1879. After noting
and discussing the opinions of Oken, Carus, Cuvier, Owen, Geg-
enbaur, Balfour, Parker, and others, upon this and other questions
relating to the history of vertebrate appendages, the author states
his conviction “that the nature of the paired and azygos limbs is
fundamentally the same.” This conviction was formed through
finding various degrees of coalescence between the cartilaginous
rays supporting the dorsal fins, and various degrees of connection
or continuity between such fin-supports and the axial skeleton.
Scylium canicula, Ginglymostoma cirratum, and still more Noti-
danus cinereus, are examples of this. In the latter, the rays are sup-
ported by one continuous basal cartilage. Pristis and Pristio-
phorus show continuity between the dorsal fin-cartilages and the
skeleton, and this may aid in the support of the saw-like rostrum.
In Notidanus, Chiloscyllium, and Raia, there is much resemblance
between the skeleton of the ventral and dorsal, in Notidanus, be-
tween the ventral and anal, while the ventrals of Polyodon are
simple parallel rays like the simplest form of the dorsal skeleton.
If the ventrals are thus admitted to be of the same nature with
the vertical fins, the pectorals must also be of the same nature.
Prof. Mivart endorses the idea of Mr. Thacher with regard to
the origin of the limb-girdles, viz.: that they are lateral ingrowths
from the skeleton of the paired fins. The objection to this con-
clusion that has been drawn from the attachment of the pectorals
by a shoulder-girdle instead of by direct longitudinal adhesion
are met by the considerations that such adhesion would impede
the flexure of the body in swimming, that the pectorals are too
low to abut directly on the vertebral column, and that such con-
nection is prevented by the intermediation of the body-cavity.
The entire theory is thus summarized by Mivart:
1. Two continuous lateral longitudinal folds were developed
similar to a dorsal and a ventral fold.
2. Separate, narrow, solid supports, with their long axes di-
412 The American Naturalist. [May,
rected outwards, were developed to a varying extent along the
lines of these folds.
3. The longitudinal folds were interrupted variously, leaving
two prominences on each of the lateral folds.
4. The anterior prominences (or limbs) increased more than
the posterior.
5. The bases of the cartilaginous supports coalesced according
to the needs of the various isolated parts or fins.
6. Occasionally the dorsal radials coalesced, and sought cen-
tripetal adhesion to the axis.
7. More constantly the hinder laterals coalesced, and finally
prolonged themselves inwards by mesiad growths till such a pelvic
structure as is found in Squatina was developed.
8. The pectoral rays also coalesced proximally, and, in search
of a support, shot dorsad and ventrad to avoid the visceral cavity-
They thus attained the axis above and came together below.
9. The lateral fins, as they were used for support, became
elongated and segmented, till probably the propterygium, but
possibly the mesopterygium, became the axis of the digit-bearing
limb.
10. Pre-existing cartilages were enlarged, or new ones were
developed, at the distal ends of the paired limbs, till the cheirop-
terygium (leg) was developed.
11. The pelvic limb acquired a solid connection with the spine
from the need of a firm support on land.
12. The pelvic limb became elongated.
These changes all came about from external causes acting oP
the plastic animal organism, and the limitation of the paired
limbs to four was determined solely by locomotive convenience.
Prof. Mivart gives Mr. Thacher the credit of the first pro-
mulgation of the ideas he has adopted, but does not follow the
latter in his conclusion that median fin-rays are never derived
from neural spines, nor neural spines frog. fin-rays, as he con-
siders this point to be unsettled, and only capable of proof by
the study of their development.
The discovery of the structure of the pectoral and ventral fins
in the Ichthyotomi by Sauvage and Döderlein, has substantiated
: PLATE XV.
——S
= j EO:
A e a
DEVELOPMENT OF THE CAUDAL FIN.
1890.] The Homologies of the Fins of Fishes. 413
the view of Huxley that the fins of Ceratodus represent the archi-
pterygium or primitive paired fin, as distinguished from a primi-
tive lateral continuous fin, which the theory of Balfour leads us
to anticipate may be yet discovered, and which is partly realized
in the extinct genus Climatius. And whatever homology may be
traced between the paired and median fins, it is evident that the
axis of the former has undergone changes which the latter have
not experienced. This consists in the sliding proximad of some
of the lateral branches of the axis, so that there came to be two,
three, or more axial pieces attached to the point of support or
scapula. The primitive type is termed by Huxley unibasal, and the
later type pluribasal. In the Elasmobranchii the paired fins are
unibasal in the Ichthyotomi, and pluribasal in the Selachii. In
the Holocephali all are pluribasal. In the Dipnoi the known
forms are univasal. In the Crossopterygia the majority are uni-
basal, but the order of Cladistia (Polypteride) are pluribasal,
having two or three (as they are counted) axial bones articulating
with the scapula. In other Teleostomata the paired fins are
pluribasal, and have mostly lost the axial elements, the basilars
only remaining (Fig. 4).
In any case the connection of the paired fins has not been
traced to the vertebral axis, as is the case with the median fins,
the scapular and pelvic arches being their support in the earliest
stages and oldest types known. This has been completely estab-
lished by the recent researches of Wiedersheim,” as far as em-
bryology alone can do it.
As the case at present stands, whatever of proof morphology
or embryology furnishes, is in favor of the similar origin and
homology of the vertical and paired appendages, but that their
relations with the skeletal axis are not identical.
3. ON THE NATURE OF THE SUPPORTS OF THE MEDIAN FINS.
In my memoir on the Fishes of the Lesser Antilles of 1870,”
as already remarked, I have called attention to the systematic
significance of the connection of the fin radii with the vertebral
= BA scr tesa Anzeiger, 1889, No.
Transactions of the American Philosophical Society, p. 450.
414 The American Naturalist. [May,
column through the intermediation of the supporting elements in
certain cases. In a review of Zittel’s Paleontology of Fishes,
published in 1887,” I applied the facts of this part of the struc-
D
Fr
A.
Fic. 6—Diagram the elementary constitution of the fins; D, dorsal fin;
fin ; Pv, pectoral and ventral fins; Sf, neural spine ; Ax, axonost; Ba, baseost ;
Fr, PaE Cv, chevron bone; Sg, shoulder girdle,
ture to the question of taxonomy and phylogeny more fully, es-
tablishing the subclass Rhipidopterygia, and several orders, on the
varying characters of the median fin supports. Some additions
were made to this system in a “Synopsis of the Families of the
Vertebrata,” published in 1890 The basis of this analysis is
the hypothesis above cited, that the fins represent longitudinal
folds of the integument, within which have been developed rods
which form a framework connecting the free edges of the folds
with the vertebral column. These rods may have been primi-
tively undivided neural spines, but in the oldest forms known to
us two segments exist distad to the neural spine. These I have
termed the axial and basal elements, or the axonost and the bas-
eost; the latter supporting the fin-rays when they exist. Fin-
78 AMERICAN NATURALIST, 1887, p.
29 AMERICAN NATURALIST, 1889, Soe published March, 1899.
se The Homologies of the Fins of Fishes. 415
rays, however, have developed as a result of specialization of less
important and more delicate hair-like bodies, described by pre-
vious authors, which traverse the fin from base to border within,
and which Prof. Ryder has called actinotrichia, and which he
says originate in the mesoderm.
I have determined that continuity of neural spine, axonost and
baseost is characteristic of all primitive fishes; while these are
again to be distinguished into types which preserve the primitive
actinotrichia, and those in which fin-rays are developed. In the
latter case the fin-rays are always continuous with the baseosts or
axonosts. (Fig. 7.) It has been long known that in modern
fishes the axonosts have severed their connections with the
neural spines, and do not correspond with them in number or
position. The axonosts are then termed interneural and inter-
hæmal bones. It is also a character of modern fishes (most
Teleostomata) that the basilar bones are rudimental or wanting.
The gradations between the primitive and modern types of fins
represent the evolution of the class of fishes, and I have en-
deavored to express this view in the system which I have pro-
posed, as above cited. (Am. Nart., October, 1889.)
The various stages or types of dorsal and anal fin structure
may be defined as follows; and it seems necessary to give them
names, to avoid the circumlocution requisite to express the
characters in any other way. The diagrams appended explain
the types referred to. They are applicable to the dorsal fin, and,
inverted, to the anal fin. Each separate series in its totality is
called by Ryder the actinophore. Its kinds are the following :
I. Actinotrichia’' present.
Neural spine, axonost and baseost continuous; £xfotetramerous.
II. Fin-rays present.
All the elements present and continuous ; Ectetramerous.
All the elements present, the axonosts not an-
ticulated with the neural spines; Ectrimerous.
Like the last, but the baseosts rudimental or _
wanting ; Ecdimerous.
Axonosts not connected with the neural spines,
reduced to one or two for each fin ; Rhipidopterygian.
416 The American Naturalist. [May,
As I have already pointed out, there are two types of the
Rhipidopterygian fin, the Rhipidistious where baseosts are
present (teste, Traquair), and the Actinistious (Fig. 8) where
they are wanting. These divisions, corresponding to orders, do
not require renaming.
No fishes are known with the actinophore dislocated from the
neural spines, and retaining actinotrichia. Should such be dis-
covered, they will appropriately receive names similar to those
given to the series with fin-rays, with the prefix ento, as ento-
trimerous, entodimerous, etc. For obvious reasons the discovery
of an entotrimerous fish is more probable than that of an ento-
dimerous one. .
Ac | : | Fr
an ae
|
ee ee
oe
Fic. 7—Diagrams of actinophores; A, entotetramerous; B, ectetramerous; C, ec
trimerous; D and Æ, ecdimerous; Ac, actinotrichlia; Fr, fin-rays; Ba, basiost; 4%,
axonost; Zc, intercentrum,
|
fos red
1
As regards the origin of the actinophores, Gegenbaur suggests
that they were derived by segmentation from neural spines, while
Thacher believes that they originated independently of the latter.
Thacher bases his views on the structure found to exist in Selachii,
which he supposes to represent the most primitive condition. The
Selachii must, however, be regarded as, in many respects, degen-
erate, and Xenacanthus is probably more primitive. It is proba- —
PLATE XVI.
Lilly
=o
ar e we
aie
ats
AITA
DIPHYCERCAL AND HETEROCERCAL CAUDAL FINS.
1890.] The Homologies of the Fins of Fishes. 417
ble however that Thacher’s opinion is correct, but not for the rea-
sons which he gives. I have oberved in a memoir On the
Mechanical Origin of the Hind Parts of the Mammalia,” that
“the mechanical cause of the origin of neurals pines may be
traced to the strains upon the vertebral axis caused by a primary
dorsal fold, or fin.” ® On this view the actinophores and the
neural spines were simultaneously developed in lines of strain
which naturally extend to the point of resistance nearest to the
moving fin-fold, viz.: the apex of the neurapophysis. The de-
velopment of the segments neural spine, axonost, and baseost
was then simultaneous, and the one segment was not derived
from the other. Thus the views of both Gegenbaur and Thacher
are partially justified.
Fic. 8.—Undina penicillata, one-third natural size, showing rhipidopterygian and
f Undi tidens ; from Zitte
actinistious types of fins; 7, jugular plates; 4, scales of U i:
The development of the appendicular skeleton is now shown to
have proceeded from without inwards, and thus the homologies of
the parts of the actinophores of all the fins must be interpreted
from the same point of view, z.¢., from without inwards.
30 American Journal of Morphology, 1889, p. 210.
418 The American Naturalist. [May,
FI a een althausii, }. mpe the order Docopteri, an actinoptery-
gian fish fi rom the Trias, with well developed baseosts of the median fins, and axonosts
apparently Sona with the neural spines; from Zittel.
4. ON THE CAUDAL FIN AND ITS SUPPORTS.
Professor Louis Agassiz first called attention to the diversities
in the structures of the caudal fins of fishes, and their relation to
the general history of the class. He showed that the tails of
modern fishes are constructed on two different patterns, which he
called the homocercal and the heterocercal. In the former, the
radial portion of the fin is in two unequal lobes, the superior being”
the more produced distally, and the inferior occupying a position
on its inferior aspect, and having a much less degree of posterior
prolongation. In the latter, the inferior lobe is of equal length
and posterior prolongation with the superior. He showed that
the homocercal type is characteristic of all Paleozoic and most of
the Mesozoic fishes known to him, while the heterocercal type
predominates in the Cenozoic and existing fishes. He also
showed by a study of the embryology of the trout and other
forms, that in their earlier stages the heterocercal fishes are homo-
cercal. These results he regarded as important, and, in fact, they
1890.] The Homologies of the Fins of Fishes. 419
constituted the first intelligent application of the structural char-
acters of fishes’ fins to their systematic arrangement, which was
made.
Subsequently the paleontologist McCoy,’ observed that in
some extinct fishes the vertebral column did not enter the supe-
rior part of the caudal fin, but continued directly to its middle
base, and terminated without modification, the rods supporting
the fin radiating equally and symmetrically above and below to
the extremity. This type of fin he called diphycercal.
Later, Huxley ® studied the development of the caudal fin in
the salmon, and showed that although the caudal fin proper is
heterocercal, some of the terminal vertebrae enter the base of the
superior lobe, thus having a partially heterocercal structure.
Cope, in 1871, reviewed the structure of the caudal fins of
recent and extinct fishes. He stated that the diphycercal type
(which he termed isocercal in ignorance of McCoy’s paper) is the
primitive condition of this region, preceding the homocercal in
embryonic history. He showed that it persists in various modern
fishes, as in the Lepidosiren and Polypterus, and among Telesto-
mata, in the eel-like types, inthe Gymnarchidz, and in the Ana-
canthini, and in the last-named supporting a heterocercal caudal
fin. He also showed that in various living isospondylous fishes
besides the salmon, a partially homocercal condition persists, nota-
bly in the Notopteride.
A valuable contribution to this subject is that of E. T. New-
ton,™ who has worked out some of the developmental stages of
the sprat, and brings together the works of several earlier writers
upon the subject. No notice is taken in this pamphlet of the
writings of Cope, Wilder, and other American naturalists who
have at various times observed or reasoned out the steps by which
the primitive vertical fold becomes a highly differentiated caudal
fin.
31 Annals Magaz. Nat. Hist., 1848, p. 304.
32 Quarterly Journal Microscop. Science, 1859, P. 33-
33 Transactions of the American Philosophical Society, XIV., 1870, pp. 452, 453-
34 On Fishes’ Tails, by E. T. Newton, F.G.S. Ext. from the Journal of the Queckett
Microscopical Club, July, 1882.
420 The American Naturalist. [May,
Ryder has given avery full account of the embryology of
fishes’ fins, which has especial reference to the caudal region.”
He distinguishes six stages in the development of the caudal fin
as follows:
1. Archicercy; no caudal fin-folds. 2. Lophocercy; caudal
fin folds, with or without actinotrichia. 3. Diphycercy; 4, Het-
erocercy ; and 5, Homocercy, as above defined. 6. Gephyro-
cercy, in which the terminal vertebrz are aborted, so that a
hiatus is created between the neural and hzmal elements, or actino-
phores, at the extremity of the axis. This structure occurs in
Echiodon (Pl. xvii., Fig. 3,) Mola, etc. In this case the epaxial ;
and hypaxial tegumentary folds are continuous round the ex-
tremity of the vertebral axis, and develop fin-rays which appear
later than those of the dorsal and anal fins. This is supposed to
be a condition of degeneracy..
The subject is treated histologically and embryologically by
Ryder, who reviews the work of various authors who have viewed
it from the same standpoint, especially Vogt, Kölliker, Dohrn,
and Lotz.
The latest contribution to the subject is one by Baur, who
shows that the rods (axonosts) which connect the rays of the anal
fin with the inferior side of the caudal vertebrz, in Lepidosteus, are
chevron bones. This agrees with the determination by Cope”
that the vertebral bodies of fishes are intercentra, and not centra.
From the researches already cited it is now well understood
that in the caudal fin as in other fins, the primitive actinotrichia
have become specialized into fin-rays, and that these approximate
more nearly to the number of their osseous supports than do the
actinotrichia. They are rarely so reduced in number, however,
as to correspond exactly to the hypural bones.
The actinophores of the caudal fin may or may not have been
primitively divided like those of the other median fins into
35 Annual Report of the U.S. Commissioner of Fishes and Fisheries, 1886, pp. 981-
1086,
_ 86 Amer, Journal of Morphology, 1889, p. 463. Dr. Baur inadvertently calls the axo-
nosts “ actinosts.”’
31 Transac. Amer. Philosoph. Society, 1886, p. 243.
PLATE XVIL
HoMOCERCAL CAUDAL FINS.
1890.] Lhe Homologies of the Fins of Fishes. 421
(chevron) axonost and baseost. Such appears to have been the
case with the Dipnoi, but whether it is strictly the case in the
primitive Xenacanthus remains to be ascertained. The axonost
and baseost are lost from the modern types of diphycercal tails,
as Anguilla (Ryder, Pl. 1v., Fig. 4) and Gadus.
The change from diphycercy to heterocercy is seen in the
upward curvature of the extremity of the vertebral column, and
the development of a portion of the inferior fin (anal) into a
posteriorly projecting angle. This is the state of affairs in the
Elasmobranchii, Chondrostei, and various extinct Teleostomata.
The change from heterocercy to homocercy is seen in the in-
creased recurvature of the column, and the successive abortion
of its extremity. This is accompanied by the increase in antero-
posterior diameter of the hypural bones, especially distally, since
they develop to occupy the space gained by ‘the recurvature.
The neural spines corresponding to them become correspondingly
reduced. Such modified elements have been called (provisionally)
hypural bones.. All stages of development of these bones
may be formed in the Teleostomata. Thus in the lower
forms (most Malacopterygia) they remain distinct from each
other. In many of the Acanthopterygia—e. g., Cottus, (Pl. xviIL.,
Fig. 1,) and Pharyngognathi, they are fused together, forming a
continuous fan-shaped body, which supports the fin-rays directly.
The different types of hypural bones are well illustrated in the
accompanying plates from Ryder.
EXPLANATION OF THE PLATES.
?
For the Plates XV. to XVIII., which are taken from those illustrating Pro-
fessor J. A. Ryder’s memoir on “ The Origin of Heterocercy,” I am indebted
to the Hon. Marshall MacDonald, U. S. Commissioner of Fish and Fisheries.
PLATE XIV.—Restoration of Xenacanthus decheni, an Ichthyotomous
Elasmobranch from the Coal Measures of Alsace, much reduced. From
Brongniart and Sauvage.
PLATE XV.—Fig. 1, Chimera monstrosa L. &. Fig. reduced from
Agassiz’s Poissons Fossiles, showing opisthural filament. Fig. 2, Side view
422 The American Naturalist. [May,
of embryo ray in the lophocercal stage, natural size, from a specimen
taken near Wood's Holl, Mass. Fig. 3, Lophocercal tail of young flounder
6mm. long. Fig. 4, Lophocercal tail of young flounder a little older than
the preceding, beginning to show a slight upbending of the notochord, and
the first trace of the permanent caudal lobe (fc) and opisthural lobe (2%).
Fig. 5, Caudal lobe of a somewhat older flounder, showing indentation and
definition of permanent fin-rays. Fig. 6, Specimen with tip of notochord
still more reflexed than in the preceding; permanent caudal and opisthural
lobes somewhat more distinct. Fig. 7, Permanent (c) and opisthural lobes
(of) now form a sharp angle where they join ; distinction between perma-
nent and embryonic rays well marked. Fig. 8, Permanent caudal as long
as opisthural lobe (of). Fig. 9, Cartilaginous Sippotis of fin-rays are now
strongly developed; the end of the chorda has begun to degenerate and
approximate the position which it will occupy permanently as the urostyle.
Fig. 10, The caudal has become more rounded, the opisthure (2%) is almost
wholly absorbed, and the notochord has suffered atrophy somewhat, and
now presents a still.closer approximation to the form of the urostyle of the
adult. Figs. 3-10 inclusive after A. Agassiz.
PLaTE XVI.—Fig.1, Caudal skeleton of Coccosteus after Pander; z% and
hy, epural and hypural elements, all of which do not bear rays, but as in
Pterichthys, extended out only so far as the scaly covering of the tail; æ,
dorsal ; a, anal fins. Fig. 2, Polypterus bichir, caudal skeleton, from Agassiz’s
Poissons Fossiles, modified from Kölliker; ef, styliform ray-bearing and
nodular non-ray-bearing interspinous epural elements; ¢/, neural spines;
Ay, hypural ray-bearing elements. Fig. 3, Lepidosteus, caudal skeleton
than in the preceding. Fig. 4, Platysomus restored, after Agassiz’s Poissons
Fossiles; ef and Ay epural ind hypural pieces ; x, urochordal end of skele-
tal axis, which was mainly notochordal. Fig. 5. Lepidosteus, tail of young
specimen 11 cm. long, from Balfour and Parker; cd, permanent caudal;
f, eradiate fin fold of opisthure; of, opisthure; my my, its myotomes.
Fig. 6, Lepidosteus, young, 21 mm. long, side view; dissected and magni-
fied so as to show its structure at this stage; ef and Jy, epural and hypural
cartilaginous rudiments of the neural and hæmal arches; ch, chorda; cå, its
opisthural portion, which afterwards becomes partially aborted and in-
cluded in the upper part of the tail ; cd, tip of fold, which becomes the per-
manent caudal; of, opisthural lobe of the larval tail; #7, lophocercal fin-
fold, which contains horn-fibres throughout its extent, 4f. After Balfour
and Parker. Fig. 7, Magnified view of the caudal skeleton of a young
Cyprinodont, Gambusia, 4% of an inch long, and which was removed from
the ovarian follicle in which it developed ; ch, chorda dorsalis; 2% and Åy,
epural and hypural cartilages; ms, medulla spinalis; 777, rays. Fig. 8,
Centrina salviani, caudal skeleton of adult; ef and hy, as before ; va, ver-
: ee AER ube
Beh: Paes oy en ee
i
s
H
a
-PLATE X YUI
HOMOCERCAL AND GEPHYROCERCAL FINs.
r Se ae C
re
890.] A Zoblogical Reconnotssance. 423
tebral axis; (ff, its dorsal and ventral membranous lobes, which include
numerous horny and partly osseous supporting fibres. From Giinther.
ATE XVII.—Fig. 1, Salmo fario, adult, caudal skeleton; 4 and #2,
basilar cartilages; ¢f, epural, and Ay, hypural elements; mm, lateral mem-
rane bone, which has had an epural cartilaginous element as its nucleus;
im, intercalary cartilage; #, urostyle; of, opisthure. After Lotz. Fig 2,
Salmo salar, adult, caudal skeleton; lettering as in Fig. 1. From Lotz
Fig. 3, Barbus fluviatilis, adult, caudal skeleton ; lettering as before. From
Lotz.
PLATE XVIII.—Fig. 1, Cottus gobio, adult, caudal skeleton; lettering as
in Plate xvr. From Lotz. Fig. 2, Perca fluviatilis, adult, caudal skeleton ;
lettering as before. From Lotz. Fig. 3, Echiodon dentatus, adult, gephy-
rocercal caudal extremity; c, centra; ef and Ay, hypural processes; 4,
basilar cartilages: z, interspinous cartilages; %, hiatus between dorsal rays
(rd) and postanal rays (rv); x 17. From Emery. Fig. 4, Fierasfer acus,
gephyrocercal caudal extremity ; ef, epural processes; ¢ cc, centra not in
contact; ch ch ch, membranous or cartilaginous central intervals; uch,
exserted end of chorda, or urochord ; 2, hiatus between last dorsal rays (7d)
and last postanal rays (7v); x 55. From Emery.
A ZOOLOGICAL RECONNOISSANCE IN GRAND
MANAN
BY J. WALTER FEWKES.
3 the side towards Eastport, Grand Manan presents a series
of lofty cliffs rising abruptly out of the sea, so precipitously
that it would be almost impossible to climb from the shore to
their summits. Only in a few places is this rampart broken
through, leaving sheltered coves where boats can find anchorage.
Ordinarily the lofty cliffs rise abruptly from the sea, and the few
stretches of beach crowded in between the foot of the cliff and
the water are exceptional, and limited in extent. Deep into this
lofty buttress of rock there extends at one point on this side of
the island a deep fiord, known as Dark Harbor, so-called because
in former times its heights were covered with sombre trees. The
424 The American Naturalist. [May,
sides of these hills have been denuded by forest fires of their
ancient woody covering. This fiord, however, is a harbor only
in name, and while it may have been formerly a bay, there
now stretches across its entrance a low beach formed of cobble-
stones, effectually shutting out its deeper waters from the sea out-
side. It still has communication with the Bay of Fundy by
means of a small artificial channel through which the waters rise -
and fall twice every day, the still lagoon feeling the influence of
the giant tides, for which this region is remarkable. Around the
base of the lofty cliffs sweep the strong and swift currents which
the great tides create. Sometimes this moving water is irresist-
ible, carrying everything along with it as it sets back and forth
under the brow of the high land which forms the dike or back-
bone of the island.
Under these lofty cliffs the fisherman spreads his net or casts
his lines, and the Passamaquoddy Indian still as of old hunts the
porpoise from his frail canoe, and on the scanty beaches at the base
of the cliffs he tries out the oil. His picturesque but not over-
clean huts, perched on the side hills, and a few houses at Dark
Harbor, are the only habitations of man on this side of the island,
save the isolated light-house and the home of the light-keeper.
But there is another shore of Grand Manan which is very dif-
ferent from that we have mentioned. The coast on this side is
less rugged and more inviting as a landing-place, and on this
shore there are many harbors protected by out-lying islands, in
which fishing craft ride at anchor. Here the land slopes more
gradually to the water's edge, and the coast is indented by fre-
quent bays and coves! Through the channels which separate
the islands from the shore line currents similar to those on the
other side of the island make their way with great power, and the
ebb-tides cause the water to retreat so far that the coves are often
left bare by the retreating water. But here the coast is more
hospitable, and more like the adjacent shores of New England.
1 Among many geological evidences of erosion on this shore, not the least interesting
are the examples of “ pot-holes,” or “giant's kettles,” found between Seal Cove and
the light-h
>
1890. A Zoölogical Reconnoissance. 425
Upon this shore most of the homes of the inhabitants of Grand
Manan are situated, for here are clustered the small villages of
fishermen’s houses, scattered in hamlets here and there at jn-
tervals from one end to the other of the island. Along this
shore wharves are frequent, and several small villages lie nestled
near the water’s edge, on well protected bays.
At a point about midway from one end of the island to
the other there is a group of houses called Woodward’s
Cove. The main road from North Head, where the steamer
lands, to the opposite extremity of the island, skirts the shore,
leaving only the landing places, upon which are situated a few
houses for smoking herring, between it and the water. The
place is a picturesque one, and interesting in many ways, but per-
haps more especially to me, since around it cluster pleasant
recollections of a summer's vacation passed on Grand Manan, in
the study of the rich marine life of the island.
Just opposite Woodward’s Cove lies an island called Nantucket.
Why so named, or whether the story of its southern namesake is
here repeated, I have never been able to discover. It is but one
of the numerous islands which rise here and there from the
shallow platform between the main island and the deep water
of the Bay of Fundy.
My first visit to Nantucket was during a thick fog. Alighting
with baggage from the carriage which carries passengers and
mail from one end of the island to the other, I found myself in
Woodward’s Cove in the midst of a thick fog. So dense was
the fog, in fact, that I was obliged to trust the statement of the
boatman that Nantucket existed at all. No land was visible
as we pushed off from the shore and headed our boat in a
direction in which the island was known to lie, and we had to
trust our boatman, and patiently wait until we reached the other
side of the channel before we were at all sure of its existence.
The certainty with which the fishermen of Grand Manan can
find their way in the thickest fog is marvelous. Thoroughly
trained in navigation in these waters, every incident, every sound,
guides their course when sight fails; the direction of the wind
ka
426 The American Naturalist. [May,
the set of the tide, the ripple of the water on the rocks or beach,
the gun from the distant Gannet Rock, all contribute to a keen
sense of direction by which these men find their way to their
fishing grounds and back in a thick fog, when one not skilled
in this knowledge would lose his way, or, bewildered, would lay
his course to the distant shore of Nova Scotia, or the broad open
entrance to the Bay of Fundy.
Nantucket is known far and wide among naturalists as the
home of Mr. Simeon Cheney. This gentleman was well called by
Professor Baird a “natural naturalist.” Heis an acute observer of
nature, a good collector, a tireless worker, and one whose interest
in natural history age but increases, and whose energy in his old
age many younger naturalists have good cause to remember. It
was my. purpose to spend a few weeks with him on Nantucket
studying the sea animals of this interesting locality.” My visit
was not unrewarded, and I have good reason to congratulate my- .
self that the choice of this island was made. I was accompanied
and aided in my work by an enthusiastic student of natural
history, Mr. J. G. Owens, of Bridgeton, New Jersey.
On coasts where the tides are high, and other conditions favor-
able, the collecting of the marine life which is characteristic of
the shore, is, as a rule, very profitable. Similar conditions to
those which are found at Nantucket exist along the coast of the
English Channel, and in Brittany on the coast of France. The
same tidal characteristics are found about Eastport, and at other
places in Maine. Grand Manan offers many advantages for the
study of marine animals, while the outlying islands, reefs, and
ledges left bare by the retreating tide present unparalleled re-
sources for collecting the varied life of the north-eastern coast.
As time goes by and as naturalists turn their steps more and more
frequently to the shores to investigate the marine life, these
islands will be more and more visited, and it is to be hoped that
they will acquire an ever-increasing reputation for the many ad-
vantages which they possess for the study of these animals in
? I can recommend Nantucket as better than any place on the coast of New England
for “ show collecting
290.] A Zoblogical Reconnoissance. 427
their native haunts.* If it may be permitted me to speak with
enthusiasm I may say that marine zodlogists have hardly begun
to appreciate the wealth of life round about this island, which
lies comparatively speaking at our very doors, and simply awaits
an investigation.
The opportunities for work at Grand Manan with the dip-net
in the study of free-swimming animals are also very great. The
student of these forms of life is particularly recommended to visit
the so-called “ Ripplings” or tide eddies, several miles from the
shore, near the line where the platform of the islands sinks to the
deeper sounding of the Bay of Fundy. These eddies are favorite
feeding places of many marine animals, from the whale to the
minute Medusz and Crustacea, and at a proper. time of the tide
afford most profitable collecting places. The distance from the
shore and the difficulty of access is the only drawback, but if
possible they should be visited by every naturalist who is in-
terested in the study of marine life in its natural habitat. A
world for investigation here awaits the attention of the naturalist.
Of those who have visited Grand Manan, and left valuable
publications adding greatly to our knowledge of the marine life
of the place, prominent among all should be mentioned the
name of Dr, William Stimpson. Many others have worked here,
but as the group of animals which it was my purpose to study
had been more particularly considered by him I mention his name
with especial indebtedness. I went to Grand Manan to study the
lower Invertebrata, and my studies of this group found in this
locality were greatly aided by his previous studies. It does not
detract from my appreciation of the value of the works of others
that I have singled out his work as of greater use to me, and his
paper is recommended as one of many valuable companions for
those who would visit this island for a purpose similar to my own.
My object in spending a vacation on Nantucket was to study
the Coelenterata and Echinodermata, more especially the changes
3 Grand Manan had last summer a tri-weekly communication with Eastport by the
mall steamer Flushing. Eastport can be reached from Boston by the steamers of the
- International Line, also called the St. John’ssteamers. The trip to Eastport by rail from
Boston to Calais, and then by steamer down the St. Croix river, gives the visitor much
scenic beauty.
428 The American Naturalist. [May
in form which certain members of these groups pass through in
their development. There are certainly many remarkable genera
of these animals found nearer home, of the young of which little
is known, but I aspired to trace the changes in the external form
of the body of the young of those of which we know next to
nothing, since many of these animals are more numerous at
Grand Manan than elsewhere on our coast. The study of the
Echinoderms, and the desire to trace the development of certain
genera, are subjects which have interested me for several years,
and these studies can be pursued with great advantage on the
shore of Grand Manan. No locality on the coast is more prolific
in Echinoderm life than this, and here occur animals the problems
connected with which rank among the more interesting of those
presented to the consideration of the morphologist.
Looking, for instance, from the embryological standpoint, we
have of starfish the genus Hippasterias, of the young of which
nothing is known. Pteraster, also found in these waters, carries
its young in pouches on the back or aboral side of the body. It
presents interesting problems of the nature and significance of
direct development. Among these animals, with the exception of
a pair of figures of a single stage of the young, nothing is known
of the embryology of this marvelous genus. Then there is
Ctenodiscus, whose young havea strange projection on the middle
of the dorsal region of the body, reminding one of the stem of a
Crinoid. Of the young of Solaster and Crossaster we know
nothing. Moreover, the affinities of the latter with Brisinga, which
has likenesses itself to the Ophiurans, are such that a study of its
young promises interesting morphological results.
Although many points which I hoped to investigate I was un-
able to make out, my visit was not wholly without valuable
results.
My search for the Comatula described by Stimpson from Grand
Manan was without success. Familiar with the places which
this animal loves on other coasts, I looked in similar localities
along the shore, among the laminarians on the Fucus, every-
where, but always with disappointment. I gave it up at last, and
concluded that the specimen which he found was a straggler from
ae
Ag
ag
«
1890.] A Zobdlogical Reconnoissance. 429
some congenial home. Not that I hoped to discover anything
new in relation to the development of the young of this animal,
for the changes which it passes through are well known, but it
would have been a pleasure to be the second person to detect
here this rare animal, if its home is really in the waters of
Grand Manan. That pleasure would have been enhanced by the
fact that since the time when this little creature was found by
Stimpson in these waters genera and species of this animal have
been described, and it would have been a satisfaction to know
whether or not his specimen belongs to some species twice made
known, for until this animal is once more found and compared
either with types or with descriptions we must remain in doubt
what it is or to what species it is allied.
We also searched in vain for the “ basket-fish,” Gorgonocepha-
lus agassisti. Fresh from dredging excursions in the channel
between Eastport and Campobello, where, as under the brow of the
“ Friar,” many ofthese Echinoderms are brought upin the dredge,
it was a surprise that this interesting creature was not found in
our work. Distant trips to remote dredging grounds failed to
reward us. A trip to the side of.the island under the lofty cliffs
near the Indian encampment, where it is said to exist in numbers,
was without result. But always, like a phantasmagoria, the stories
of the fishermen led us on. There is no doubt that the “ basket-
fish ” is to be found there, but where it occurs we were not fortu-
nate enough to discover. An account of the metamorphosis
which it passes through between the egg and adult would be a
substantial contribution to our knowledge of Echinoderm de-
velopment.
But the rewards which came to us in collecting Ophiurans
more than made up for our want of success in regard to Comatula
and Gorgonocephalus. Nowhere have I seen a richer harvest of
the genera Ophiopholis, Amphiura, Ophioglypha, and Ophiacantha.
A favorite collecting place for the first of these is on the shore op-
posite Mr. Cheney’s house. On the point left bare by the re-
treating tide hardly a single stone could be raised without disturb-
` ing an Ophiuran hidden under its cover. These animals have a
variety of colors, with markings of many patterns, but all belong to
430 The American Naturalist. [May,
the same species, Ophiopholis aculeata. In the channel off the Weirs
between High Duck Island and Nantucket we dredged bushels of
these animals so crowded together that the dredge bay was simply
gorged withthem. A motley crowd they were, too, as we emptied
the dredge in the bottom of the boat. My friend and fellow-
student, to whom this was the first introduction to these animals,
was beside himself with joy, but subsequent repetition of these
hauls renders even the most enthusiastic less anxious to secure
specimens, and we came to wish that something else from the sea
bottom might have a chance.
Amphiura squamata was not found as abundant as O. aculeata.
We picked them up among the small stones, sometimes in the
coralline zone, but never as abundant as the Ophiopholis. The
characteristic Ophiocoma and Ophiacantha were dredged more
sparingly, but they may be said to occur in numbers off High a
Duck Island and Nantucket. We never collected these genera
on the shore between tides in places where Ophiopholis and §
Amphiura love so much to dwell. 4
All of the many genera of starfishes which live in the waters of
Grand Manan were found in our several dredging excursions.
Among the most interesting of the Asteroidea are the beauti-
ful species of Hippasterias, two of which were dredged off Long
Island in comparatively shallow water. Crossaster was taken in
the channel between Long Island and High Duck, while Solaster
was found at various points near low water mark. The latter
was often taken with the boat hook, and in collecting could some-
times be readily seen from the boat when the water was quiet.
Innumerable specimens of three species of Asterias, some of
which are of giant size, occur in the passage ways between the
islands, and were readily found and preserved. * Crebrella, which
is very common at Grand Manan, is found in all conditions of
: t Our method of successful preservation of these Echinoderms was to place them first
in fresh water until the rays tended and the body inflated, then, plunging them into
boiling hot water, they were allowed to remain there for from three tofive minutes. They
1890.] A Zovlogical Reconnoissance. 431
growth. A colony composed of fifty or more, each resembling
a bright red spot on the rock, was taken by my friend Mr. Owens,
The young of Crebrella when the arms begin to push out from a
pentagonal disk do not differ from those of Asterias, but as the
arms develop it was found that there was no prominent row of
dorsals, and that the plates were irregularly scattered over the
back. ;
The number of individuals of the Echinoidea at Grand Manan
is very great, but the variety is small. Echinarachnius and
Strongylocentrotus are the mostcommon. The former were often
found in such abundance as to clog our dredge, and on the points
of land at low tide we gathered many on the shore. White
specimens of Strongylocentrotus were found which resemble in
every respect the green colored. The boring habits of this genera
I have already mentioned in a former number of the NATURALIST.
The gaint among the Holothurians, Pentacta Srondosa, is very
common at Grand Manan, where it is known as the “sea pud-
ding.” Cuvieria is rare, but its bright red body may often be de-
tected as the animal clings by its suckers to the rocks at the line
oflow tide. This Holothurian is sometimes calledthe “sea orange”
or “sea lemon.” The very young Cuvieria were found clinging
to the rocks by two terminal suckers, in which are embedded
scales composed of an open calcareous lattice-work. Scales or
perforated plates are also found in the tentacles, which are but
little branched. - In the younger stages the color of Cuvieria re-
minds one of a young Actinian.
The summer of 1889 at Grand Manan was exceptional in the
variety of animals from southern waters which were collected.
Among these were Physalia arethusa, and the well-known
Anatifer which is often so common in Narragansett Bay. <A
floating half cocoanut, covered with the ordinary “ Goose Barna-
cle,” was picked in the bay near Gannet Rock. The long voyage
which this fragment had taken in the waters of the Gulf Stream
need not surprise one ; but the fact that it was found in the cold
waters of the Bay of Fundy is an unusualone. All the hydroids
mentioned by Stimpson, with the exception of Grammaria, were
collected by us. In place of this problematical genus a beautiful
432 » The American Naturalist. [May,
Antennularia, which closely resembles Grammaria, which has
never been found in the Bay of Fundy, was taken on several
excursions. Halecium, a hydroid not described by Stimpson, but
not unknown from Grand Manan, is one of the most common of
the hydroids observed, while Eudendrium, Tubularia, Corymor-
pha, Clava, Campanularia, and various genera of Plumularidz and
Sertularide are very abundant. There is no subject which would
yield better results in the study of our marine animals than that
of the hydroids of the waters about Grand Manan. Very little
research on these animals from the Bay of Fundy has yet been
carried on.
A genus allied to Myriothela also occurs at Grand Manan. The
genus called Acaulis was discovered at Grand Manan, and de-
scribed by Stimpson, who failed, however, to recognize its affini-
ties with Myriothela. The true relation of the genus Acaulis
has been for many years*® problematical with me, and I have
been led to regard it as the broken head of a
Tubularian, following the opinion of several well-
known naturalists in this identification. A
study of the living specimens of Myriothela, and
an examination of the unpublished figures of the
Eastport representative, made over ten years ago
by Professor Hyatt, and loaned to me for study,
leads me to place Acaulis in the neighborhood
of Myriothela, retaining Stimpson’s name for it
until a new examination can be made to deter-
mine its true systematic position. Stimpson’s
description is quoted below verbatim, in order
that what is at present known of this animal may
preface a few conclusions of my own, drawn from Fic. 2.— !
s è n % (A. Hyatt, del).
an examination of Prof. Hyatt’s drawings. i
Stimpson’s account of Acaulis [“ Invertebrata of Grand Manan ]
is as follows:
5 My examination of ‘specimens of Myriothela found at Roscoff, France, convinced
me that Acaulis is a close ally of this interesting genus. On several visits to
and Grand Manan I have repeatedly looked for both Myriothela and Acaulis, but have
never been able to find either.
1890.] A Zoblogical Reconnoissance. 433
“ ACAULIS, St. n. g,
A. primarius, St. n. s., Fig. 4. The remarkable polyp for which
this name is proposed, which is probably the largest hydroid
known,° was observed at Grand Manan in two successive stages
of development. It was first taken early in August, when it was
of a sub-cylindrical form, tapering suddenly to a point at each
extremity. At the upper extremity was the mouth, very small, a
little below which the tentacula commenced, scattered at first, but
gradually increasing in number, and somewhat in size. These
tentacula were minute, very short, equaling in length about one-
sixth the thickness of the body, with large globular tips. They
occupied about two thirds of the body; on the remainder below,
their places were supplied by the medusa buds, which were
crowded, and much larger than the tentacula although as yet but
little developed. The inferior extremity of the body terminated
in a short, pointed, fleshy spike, free from appendages, from which
exuded a tenacious mucus, by which it adhered to the subaqueous
surfaces to which it might be applied. Around the base of this
spike, and immediately under the buds, were regularly arranged
eight long gracefully-curved cirriform processes, each equaling in
length about half that of the body. These appeared from their
motions to be in this—the first stage of the animal’s existence—
the locomotive organs.
“At a subsequent time I met with several of these animals
which presented a different appearance. The tentacula were
larger, especially in the region of the mouth, at the now blunt
extremity of the body ; and the medusa buds were in an advanced
state of development, soon to become free-swimming individuals.
The inferior appendages had disappeared, and the body was firmly
attached by a broad base, and bore much resemblance to one of
the ordinary Corynidz deprived of its stalk. In strong contrac-
tions it assumed a shape approaching an hour-glass. The length
of the animal in this latter stage was half an inch, the breadth
two-tenths. Inthe earlier stage the dimensions were one-half these.
6 The pini added to the Hydroidea of the deep sea by the explorations of late
when this was written by Stimpson.
ae Nat. Mag —3.
434 The American Naturalist. [May,
“It was dredged in the laminarian, from 5 to 15 feet, attached to
various Rhodosperms, as Ptilota, Chondrus and Rhodymenia. Cir-
cumstances did not permit me to ascertain the medusoid form of
this polyp, although I have my conjecture.”
Prof. Hyatt’s sketches’ represent two
. stages of development in the life history of
this remarkable hydroid. One of these
[ Fig. 3] is evidently of a younger and less
. developed animal, possessing temporary
tentacles which have a likeness to those
figured by Allman in the immature Myrio-
thela. We know from Allman that as the
Myriothela grows older, the tentacles, which
in this genus are known to belong to larval
_ life, disappear, and are lost in the adult.
Picking canis oo kaneis These are represented in our figure [Fig. 3]
end of Acaulis, showing on the axis, about one-third the length of
rmporary tentacles # (A. the young Acaulis, while the remainder of
yatt, del.)
the body bears simply suckers, which cover
the surface of this region of its body. In the second figure [ Figs.
1 and 2], which represents a larger individual, and one which is
therefore probably more mature, two regions can be readily
distinguished in the body, which we may call an anterior and a
posterior body-region. The animal is represented as attached to
a shell by suckers at the anterior end,—the broken parts of these
organs are represented by dotted lines, as these appendages have
been ruptured. In Prof. Hyatt’s notes, brown matter is mentioned
as being found at the place of adhesion of these suckers to the
foreign body. s
For a short portion of the body adjoining the terminal tentacles
its surface is thrown into folds or ridges (f), which are possibly
due to mural contraction. From this region there arise botryoid
bodies, which are supposed to be gonophores (g) or homologous
structures, each of which has, according to the notes, a dark pur-
ple interior and a granular whitish exterior wall. The remainder
7Stimpson’s figures of Acaulis are the only ones yet published of this highly
exceptional hydroid.
1890.] A Zoblogical Reconnotssance. 435
of the body narrows gradually to its so-called posterior end,
throughout which it is covered with closely crowded, wen-like
structures of a light pink color, The interior of this region of
the body is dark purple, and there is, according to the notes, a
terminal orifice (a).
It will be noticed in reviewing Stimpson’s account, and com-
paring his figures with those here published, that he also de-
scribes two successive stages of development which correspond
closely with those which I have figured. The “ tentacula” in
the anterior region of one of those given are larger at the blunt
extremity of the body, while the gonophores are in an advanced
stage of development. In this stage of growth, organs which
are called the “inferior appendages” by Stimpson had disap-
peared. The stage last mentioned is supposed to be the adult,
or at all events to be older than the other form which he figures.
By comparing it with the adult of Myriothela, as figured ved
Hincks and Allman, this conclusion seems to be tenable.
If now we turn to the two similar stages shown in the figures,
which we here have given, it will be found that the older (Fig.
1), differs from the younger in the same way that the “ adult” in
those by Stimpson differs from what he considers the young.
Possibly the most important difference in each case between the
two stages is the loss, in the adult, of the temporary tentacles
found in the young.
There have been several opinions expressed as to the relation-
ships of the Acaulis. It has been called a free-swimming hy-
droid, and associated with the supposed free hydroid of Nemop-
sis, mentioned by McCrady. It has also been likened to a head
of a Tubularian ruptured from a hydroid stem. The true affini-
ties have been conjectured by several naturalists, but so little has
been made known of the anatomy of Acaulis that it has been
difficult to compare it with other hydroids.
Hincks,’ in discussing the relationship of Acaulis and Myrio-
thela, says “ Mr. Alder has suggested the probability of a close
affinity between Myriothela and the Acaulis of Stimpson, and
8 The young of Nemopsis has been shown to have a fixed hydroid.
9A History of British Hydroids, pp. 76, 77
436 The American Naturalist. [May,
would place it in the family ofthe Tubularide. To this view I am
unable to assent, although it has received a certain measure of
support from Prof. Allman. The Acaulis is furnished at first with
a verticil of filiform tentacles near the base of the polypite (though
. Fic. 1.—Adult Acaulis. a, terminal opening of the body—the interior of this body
" dark reddish purple”; 4, central, purple-colored body wall; e, small papillae—these,
as well as the external body wall, are light pink; d, ridges or folds in t ternal walls
exterior, white granular; ¢, permanent tentacles—“ suctorial tentacles”; #¢, t
tentacles,
they are said to disappear subsequently), and between these and
the upper capitate tentacles the reproductive buds are developed
on the body. But Myriothela, so far as we know, is destitute of
basal tentacles at all stages of its existence, and the gonophores,
1890.] A Zoological Reconnoissance. 437
instead of being borne on simple or branched pedicles, as in the
Tubularidz, are produced on distinct coryniform zooids—small,
rudimentary polypites, which are homologous with the so-called
gonoblastidia of Hydractinia or Dicoryne. It is, as I have said
before, a cluster of polypites nearly related to Coryne; but its
marked peculiarities would seem to entitle it to stand as the type
of a special family.”
The author would here offer the following generalization to
which he has been led by the consideration of two facts exhibit-
ed in the characters of the animal above described. First, the
basal cirri of the first stage are homologous to the lower or ex-
terior tentacula of Tubularia. Secondly, these cirri, or tentacula,
are lost ” with the growth of the animal, and do not appear in
the second stage. Hence we should consider the Tubularide,
in which they are persistent, as lower in the scale. It might add
some weight to this conclusion to call attention to the fact that
the meduse of Tubularia assume the form of Actinulz, in which
we have a remote resemblance to the young Acaulis.
It may be deduced, also, from the above account that the
species just described, having basal tentacula, is more embryonic
than Coryne and its allies, in which they never appear, so that
it is correctly classed between that genus and Tubularia ; and if,
as is possible, the single circle of tentacula in the Sertularide is
homologous with the basal tentacula of Acaulis and Tubularia,
it would follow that that family should stand lower in an ascend-
ing scale of classification. The disappearance of the verticil of
filiform tentacles in Acaulis is certainly not an objection to con-
sidering this genus as allied to Myriothela, especially since the
account which Allman gives of the embryology of Myriothela,
published subsequently to Hincks’s “ History of British Hydroids,”
shows that Myriothela has these or similar tentacles."
10 In regard to Hincks’ dissent from Prof. Allman’s opinion in regard to the affinities
of Myriothela, and the grounds of his objection, it is only necessary to refer to Allman’s
a type pr, a special family.”
1 Probably absorbed, not deciduous.
438 The American Naturalist. [May,
It seems possible to take another view of the homology of the
temporary or embryonic tentacles in the former stage of Acaulis
than that suggested above. In the first place, we ufay regard
them as the same as the temporary tentacles of the young Myrio-
thela. They are in point of fact not unlike similar appendages
in Actinula, with which they may be readily homologized. Some-
what similar temporary appendages appear in the young Glos-
socodon on the side of the bell, as have been described by others,
and as I have figured in my paper on the Tortugas Acalephe.
If we regard the Actinula as represented by the young Glos-
socodon it seems possible that the temporary appendages in both
may be homologous. It seems to me probable that there is a
close likeness between the young Myriothela, as represented by
Allman, and an Actinula in the smaller of the two kinds of
specimens which are here figured.
It is on account of the embryonic likeness of Myriothela that
in my plates of the Hydrozoa in the Embryological Monographs
(Memoirs Museum Comp. Zoology, Vol. IX; No. 3.) I placed
Myriothela in close proximity with Hydra among the lowest
forms of these animals. Still, in certain features, Myriothela has
a high organization which is shared also by Acaulis. It would
be interesting and valuable from a morphological standpoint to
know more of the ultimate form of the body and appendages of
Acaulis, and some of the early stages in growth which lie between-
the ovum and the young with temporary tentacles.
1890.] Record of American Zodlogy. 439
RECORD OF AMERICAN ZOOLOGY.
BY J. S. KINGSLEY.
(Continued from Vol. XXIV., p. 357.)
HEXAPODS.
McNIELL, Jeromz—An Insect trap to be used with Electric
Light. Am. Nart., XXIII., p: 268, 18809.
PACKARD, A. S—Notes on the Epipharynx, and the Epiph-
aryngeal organs of taste in Mandibulate Insects. Psyche, Vap
193, 1880.
Weep, C. M.—A season’s work among the enemies of the
horticulturist. Jour. Columbus Hort. Socy. IV., 1889. Eco-
nomic Entomology.
Kent, Gro. H.—Injurious insects in Mississippi for 1888. Jn-
sect Life, 1. p. 216, 1889.
Ritey, C. V.—Insecticide appliances. Insect Life, l, 243,
263.—Nozzles.
Wesster, F. M—Notes on some species of Insects which
affect the upper portion of the stems of grasses. Insect Life, 1.,
373, 1889.—Lepedoptera and Diptera.
TownsEND, TYLER—Some Michigan notes recorded. Jusect
Life, ti p. 42, 1889.—Hymenoptera, Lepidoptera, Diptera,
Coleoptera, Hemiptera, Orthoptera.
FLETCHER, JAS.—Popular and Economical Entomology. Can.
Ent, XXI., p. 15, 1889.—General ; vide infra Lepidoptera.
HAMILTON, Joun.—Corrections and additions to Former
Papers. Can. Ent., XXI., p. 101, 1889.—Coleoptera, Lepidop-
tera, etc.
THYSANURA.
Packarp, A. S.—The cave fauna of North America. Mem.
Nat. Acad. Sci, IV., 1889.—Describes Lipura? lucifugus n,
Tomocerus plumbeus var. pallidus, Lepidocyrtus atropurpureus n,
Degeeria cavernarum n, Smynthurus ferrugineus n, Campodea
cookei.
440 The American Naturalist. [May,
ORTHOPTERA.
` PACKARD, A. S.—The cave fauna of North America [etc.]
Mem. Nat. Acad. Sci., IV., 1889. Describes Hadenæcus subter-
raneus, Ceuthophilus stygius, C. sloanit, C. ensifer.
Davis, Wm. T.—List of Orthoptera found on Staten Island.
Ent. Amer. V., 78, 1889.—Sixty-three species.
McNIELL JERoME.—Notes on Gryllus and Œcanthus. Ent.
Amer, V., 101, 1889.
Haven, A.—Acanthacara similis injuring pineapple in Florida.
Insect Life, I., 217, 1889. :
CoQuILLET, D. W.—Notes on Acrididz in Los Angeles, Cal.
Insect Life, 1., 227, 1889.—Dates of capture.
Marat, C. L—A report on the lesser migratory locust
[Melanoplus atlantis in New England.) Jnsect Life, II., p. 66,
1889.
MurrTFELDT, Mary E.—The carnivorous habits of the Tree
Crickets [Œcanthus.] Jnsect Life, IL., 130, 1889.
WHEELER, Wm. M.—Note on the oviposition and embryonic
development of Xiphidium ensiferum. Insect Lee, W., 222,
1890.—Oviposits on willow galls; development much as in
Æcanthus. :
NEUROPTERA.
PacKARD, A. S.—On the occurrence of organs of taste in the
epipharynx of the Mecaptera. Psyche, V., p. 164.
PSEUDONEUROPTERA.
Hacen, H. A.—Spaltung eines Hiigels um das doppelte Ad-
ernetz zu Zeigen. Zool. Anz., XIL, p. 377, 1889. Splitting of
the ring of Æschna heros by inflating with water.
PackarD, A. S.—Duration of life in an Ephemera. Psyche,
V., p. 168, 1889.
PACKARD, A. S.—Cave Fauna of North America. Mem. Nat.
Acad. Sci., IV., 1889. Describes Dorypteryx pallida, and men-
tions Atropos divinatoria and Flyperetes tessullatus.
1890.] Record of American Zoology. 44I
COLEOPTERA.
Comstock, J. H.—On preventing the ravages of wire worms.
Am. Nart., XXIII., p. 61.
Leno, C. W.—The Buprestidæ of Staten Island. Am. Nar,
XXIII., p. 548, 1889.
FERNALD, H. T.—Rectal glands in Coleoptera (Passalus cornu-
tus). Am. Nat., XXIV: p. 100, 1890.
LECONTE, Jonn L., in PacKaRD, A. S., Cave Fauna of North
America. Mem. Nat. Acad. Sci., IV., 1889.—Cave Coleoptera
. received frem Dr. Paokard, pp. 72, 74.
Horn, G. H.—Reprint of Species of North American Anoph-
thalmus in Packard, A. S., Cave Fauna of North America.
Mem. Nat. Acad. Sci., IV., 1809.
PACKARD, A. S. The Cave Fauna of North America. Mem.
Nat. Acad. Sci., IV., 1889. Describes larve and pupz of Anoph-
thalmus and Adelops, with notes on nervous system.
Conn, H.W. Coleopterous larve and their relations to adults.
Proc. Bost. Socy., XXIV., p. 42, 1889. A study of the morpho-
logical value of larve.
Rivers, J. J. Change of name Entom. Amer. V: p. 6, 1889,
Anoplognatho dunnianus to Aphonides (nov.) dunniana.
WEBSTER F. M.—Some studies of the Development of Lirus
concavus and L. macer. Ent. Amer., V., p. 11. 1889.
Rivers, J. J—Notes on the habits of Pleocoma. Ænt. Amer.,
V., p. 17. 1889.—Not strictly nocturnal.
Rivers, J. J—A new Pleocoma /. c.—P. puncticollis (Calif.)
BLANCHARD, FRED.—A list of the Buprestidae of New Eng-
land. Ent. Amer., V., 29. 1889.—62 species.
Jürecu, WmM.—Two beetles new to the N. A. Fauna. Ent.
Amer., V., 56, 1889.—Strophosomus coryli (N.J.); Ceutorhynchus
cyanipennis (N. Y. and Md.)
ULKE, H.—A new species of Pterostichus. nt. Amer., V., 59,
1889.—P. johnsoni (Oregon).
WicxuaM, F. H.—Collecting notes. Ent. Amer., V., 77, 1889.
—Habits of Coleoptera in Arizona, Texas, California.
Roserts, C. H.—Notes on Water Beetles. Ant. Amer., V., p.
82, 1889.
442 The American Naturalist. [May
Scuwartz, E. A—Some corrections to Henshaw’s list of the
Coleoptera of North America. Ænt. Amer., V., 121, 1889.
Situ, J. B—Life habits of Hispide. Ænt. Amer., Va 122
1880.
Horn, G. H.—A Reclamation. Ent. Amer., V., 122, 1889.—
Regarding literature of Platypsyllus.
LIEBECK, Cu.—Collecting notes. Lut. Amer., V., 161, 1889.
Casey, Tuos. L.—A Preliminary Monograph of the North
American species of Troglophlceus. Ann. N. Y. Acad. Sci., IV.,
322, 1889. 66 species.
HeEnsHaw, SAMUEL.—Second Supplement to the list of Coleop-
tera of America north of Mexico. Ent. Amer., V., 127, 1889.
BLANCHARD, F—Note on Fornax calceatus and F. hornit,
and on Corymbites divaricatus and C. crassus. Ent. Amer., V., 139,
1889.
Horn, Geo. H.—Notes on Heterocerus. Ent. Amer., V., 142
1889.
ANGELL, G. W.J. A curious deformity in Cychrus. Ænt.
Amer., V., 144, 1889.
Casey, T. L—Notes on the Pederini. mnt. Amer., V., 182,
1889.—Note on Homeeotarsus, Megastilicus and Platymedon ;
n. g. M. formicarius (N. J., Mass.) ; P. laticollis, (Nebr.) n. sp.
Weep, C. M.—Experiments with remedies for the striped
cucumber beetle. Ent. Amer., V., 203, 1889.
BRENDEL, E.—Descriptions of new Scydmænidæ and Psela-
phidæ. Ent. Amer., V., 193, 1889.—Brachycepis (n.) fuchsii (Calif),
Scydmenus? minimus (Iowa), Cephennium anophthalmicum (Calif),
Pselaptricus (n.) tuberculipalpus (Calif.), Euplectus plannipennis
(Iowa), Euplectus? :n. sp., Trimium thoracicum (Iowa), Articerus
californicus.
Horn, Geo. H.—Synonymical notes. Ent. Amer., V., 198, 212,
1889.—Based on Germar and Drapiez.
CHITTENDEN, F. H.—Ndotes on the habits of Buprestidæ. vt.
Amer., V., 217, 1880;
Ceppeocenbelint found on Ceanothus americanus (at Ithaca, N.
Y.] Ent. Amer., V., 220, 1889.
1890.] Record of American Zoology. 443
A stridulating carabid, |. c. 220, 1889.—Omophron americanum.
Roserts, C. H.—Collecting Lachnosterna. Ent. Amer., V.
100, 1890.
Situ, J. B—Some new species of Lachnosterna. Ent. Amer.,
V., 93, 1889.—L. insperata (N. J.), Hulkei (S.C., Ga., Fla., Tenn.),
L. quadrata (Fla.), L. nova (N. Y., D. C., N. C.), L. hornii (D. C.,
‘Tenn., Va., O.), Z. biimpressa (Kan.), L. longispina (S. C., Mich.),
L. innominata (Minn.), L. antennata (Texas).
WEED, C. M.—Experiments with remedies for the plum curcu-
lio. mt. Amer., V., 204, 1889.
Hatt, W. B.—Apylesinus trifolii in Ohio. Jnsect Life, 1., 218,
1880.
Rirey, C. V.—Systematic relations of Platypsyllus as deter-
mined by the larva. Jusect Life, 1., 300, 1889.—Regarded as col-
eopterous.
Forses, S. A.—Arsenical poison for the Plum and Peach Cur-
culio. Jnsect Life, IE, p. 3, 1889.
Jones, F. M.—Dermestes vulpinus in goat skins. Znsect Life,
H p. 63, 1889.
CogurtteT, D. W.—The imported Australian Lady-bird.
[ Vedolia cardinalis in California]. Insect Life, Il., p. 70, 1889.
Wesster, F. M—Notes on the breeding and other habits of
some species of Curculionidz, especially of the genus Tyloderma.
Insect Life, I1., 109, 1889.
Riey, C. V.—Some Insect Pests of the household. [Repr. from
Good Housekeeping, Apr. 13, 1889]. Lusect Life, I1., 127, 1889.
—Carpet beetle, Anthrenus scrophularia.
Wesster, F. M.—Life history of one of the corn bill-bugs
(Sphenophorus ochreus). Insect Life, Il., 132, 1889.
BRUNER L.—Cicindela limbata Say. Insect Life, Il., 144, 1889.
—Habits.
Ducks, EucEnE—Description of Leonia rileyi, a new meloid
genus near Hornia. Jnsect Life, 1,211. 1889—From Guana-
juato, Mexico.
Wenster, F. M.—Notes upon the longevity of the early stages.
of Eburia quadrimaculata. Insect Life, 1., 339.—Early stages of
at least 14 years.
444 The American Naturalist. [May,
Ritey, C. V.—Platypsyllus—Egg and ultimate larva. Entom.
Amer., NI, p. 27., 1890. Insect Life, II., 244, 1890.
SmitH, J. B—Sexual Characters of the coleopterous genus
Lachnosterna. Proc. A. A. A. S., XXXVIIL., 285, 1889—Ab-
stract; no details.
CocKERELL, T. D. A.—Some Coleoptera new to Colorado.
Can. Ent., XXI., p. 20, 1889.—Five species.
HAMILTON, Joun.—Notes on Coleoptera—No. 5. Can. Ent.,
XXI., p. 29, 1889.—Cicindela, Carabids, Scarabeids, Longicorus,
and Rhynchophora.
Kırman, Arva H.—Additions to Canadian Coleoptera. Can.
Ent., XXI., p. 108-134, 1889.
CockERELL, T. D. A—A new Myrmophile. Can. Ent., XXI.,
p. 140, 1889.—Cremastochilus knochit.
HYMENOPTERA.
WEED, C. M., and Hart, C. A—Notes on the Parasite of the
Spotted Lady-beetle (Megilla maculata). Psyche, V., p: 188,—
Centistes americana.
WEBSTER, F. N.—Notes on Pteromalus puparum. Insect Life,
L p. 225, 1880.
Howarp, L. O.—A Parasite of the supposed Eggs of the Cot-
ton Stainer. Jusect Life, 1., 241, 1889. (Hadronotus rugosis.)
Howarp, L. O.—Three new Parasites of Icerya. Jusect Life,
I., 268, 1889.—Thoron opacus, Coccophagus californicus, Encyrtus
dubius—All from California.
Riley, C. V—Some Insect Pests of the Household. [Re-
printed from Good Housekeeping, May 25, 1889]. Insect Life,
IL., p. 104, 1889.—Bed-bugs and Red Ants.
Rizey, C. V.—Additional Note on the Megilla Parasite. 7n-
sect Life, I., 338, 1889. Refers Centistes americanus to the genus
Perilitus,
Mattey, F. W.—Another Strawberry Saw-fly (Monostegia
ignota). Insect Life, Il., 1 37, 1889.
Ritey, C. REPO Insect Pests of the Household. /nsect
Life, IL, 213, 1890.—Figures Hyperemus tinee, parasitic on
clothes moth.
1890.] Record of American Zoölogy. 445
Harrincton, W. Hacur.—Harpiphorus maculatus Norton.
Insect Life, II., 227, 1890.—Identity of Harpiphorus and Mon-
ostegia.
WEBSTER, F. M.—Adults of the American Cimbex (C. ameri-
cana) injuring the willow and cottonwood in Nebraska. Znsect
Life, I1., 228, 1890.
Ritey and Howarp.—The Dogwood Sawfly (Harpiphorus
varianus). Insect Life, Il., 239, 1890.
Howarp, L. O.—Some new parasites of the grain plant louse.
Insect Life, II, 246, 1890.—Describes Pachyneuron micans,
Megaspilus niger, Encyrtus websteri.
Howarp, L. O.—One more word about Rileya. Can. Ent.,
XXI., p. 13, 1889.—Polemical.
AsHMEAD, W. H.—A final word about the genus Rileya. Can.
Ent, XXI., p. 37, 1889. Polemical.—Chrysoplatycercus pro-
posed for Rileya of Howard.
Howarp, L. O.—Again Rileya. Can. Ent., XXI., p. 59, 1889.
—Ashmeadia for Rileya.
HarRrıNGTON, H. H.—New species of Tenthredinidæ. Can. Ent.,
XXI., p. 95, 1889.—Nematus ocreatus (Quebec), Harpiphorus
vestitus (Quebec), Phymatocera nigra (Ontario), Macrophya pro-
pinqua, Taxonus rufipes, Tenthredo semicornis (Ottawa), Tenthre-
dopsis evansit (Ontario).
—Ilbalia maculipennis l. c., p. 141, 1889.—
Habits.
FLETCHER, JAMES.—Popular and Economic Entomology. No.
4. Can. Ent, XXI., p. 150, 1889.—Nematus ribesi.
HEMIPTERA.
WHEELER, W. M.—Homologues in Embryo Hemiptera of the
. appendages to the first abdominal segment of the Insect Em-
bryos. Am. Nart., XXIII., p. 644, 1889. (See also Am. NAT.,
XXIV., p. 187, 1890, and No. 4
Hacen, H. A—Lac Insects. Psyche, V., p- 168, 1880.
WHEELER, W. M.—Uber driisen artige Gebilde in ersten
abdominalsegment der Hemipterenembryonen. Zool. Anzeiger,
XIL, p. 317, 1889. Vide supra.
446 The American Naturalist. [May,
AsHMEAD, Wm. H.—A generic synopsis of the Fulgoridz
[Continued.| Entom. Americana, V., p., 1. 21, 1889. American
genera not indicated, no new genera described.
SmitH, J. B— Cicada septendecim in 1889. Ent. Amer., V.,
123, 1889.
ASHMEAD, Wm. H.—A generic synopsis of the Bythoscopide.
Ent. Amer., V., 125, 1889. Polydontoscelis, n. g.
Van Duzeze, E. P.—Review of the North American species of
Pediopsis. vt. Amer., V., 165, 1889. Catalogues two sp. of
Agallia and eight of Pediosis, of which the following are new: P.
basalis (Muskoka Lake), P. ferruginea (Montana), P. insignis (N.
Y., Kan.), P. bifasciata (Muskoka Lake), P. punctifrous (Arizona.)
AsHMEAD, W. H.—A generic synopsis of the Aphidide.
Ent. Amer., V., 186, 1889.
Weep, C. M.—The Strawberry-root Louse (Aphis forbesi, n. s.)
Psyche, Na 273, 1889.
Marcu, JoHN.—Wisconsin letter on Cicada septendecim. Tn-
sect Life, L, 218, 1880.
Forges, S. H.— Relations of wheat culture to the chinch bug.
Abstract. Insect Life 1., 222, 18809.
Geographical range of chinch bug. Jnsect Life, I., 226, 1889.
Extends to Panama.
Anonymous.—The red bug or cotton stainer (Dysdercus sut-
urellus.) Insect Life, I., 234, 1889. Habits and remedies.
Fores, S. H—Early occurrence of the chinch bug in the
Mississippi Valley. Insect Life, 1., 249, 1889.
Wirus, Epwin.—A letter on Jcerya purchasi. Insect Life,
IL, p. 15, 1889
Howarp, L. O.—A newly imported Elm Insect. p Life,
IL., p. 34, 1889. Gossyparia ulmi, in Westchester Co.,
Rırey, C. V.—Some Insect Pests of the OO Insect
Life, IlL., p. 104, 1889. Reprinted from Good Housekeeping, May
25, 1889. Notes on bed bugs and red ants.
Ossorn, H.—Identity of Schizoneura panicola and S. corni.
Insect Life, IL., 108, 1889.
Ossorn, HERBERT.—Metamorphosis in the pleurum of Aleu-
rods. Proc. A. A. A. S, XXXVIIL, p. 289, 1889.
es
G
1890.] Record of American Zodlogy. 447
Van Duzee, E. P—Hemiptera from Muskoka Lake District.
Can. Ent., XXI., p. 1, 1889. 141 species, Thamnotettix eburata
Van Duzer, E. P.—Observations on some northern Derbide.
Can. Ent., XXI., p. 158, 176, 1889. Amalopta(n.g.) <A. uhleri
(nov), Lancaster, N. Y.
LEPIDOPTERA.
BELL, J. J—The flour moth [Ephestia kuhniella]. Am. NAT.,
XXIV., p. 200, 1890.
Dimmock, G.—Effect of consanguinity in the Lepidoptera.
Psyche, V., p. 150.
Dimmock, G.—The Meconium of Butterflies. Psyche, V., p.
170. Its vapor kills caterpillars.
ScuppeErR, S. H.—Cosmopolitan butterflies. Psyche, V., p.190,
1889.
Gopman, F. D. anp Savin, O.—Descriptions of [17] new
species of Rhopalocesa from Mexico and Central America. Ann.
and Mag. Nat. Hist., III., p. 351, 1889.
Mann, B. P.—Migration of Aganisthos acherontia. Psyche,
V., 168.
CockERELL, T. D. A—Alucita hexadactyla in Colorado. Ent.
Mo. Mag., XXV., p. 213, 1889.
CockErELL, T. D. A—On the origin of Anthocharis, Bdr.
(=Euchloe, Hb.) Ent. Amer., V., p. 33, 1889. From Pieris.
ScuppER, S. H.—Some new companions of Pieris napi and P.
oleracea. Psyche, V., p. 166, 1889.
Kirsy, F. W.—Description of a new butterfly from Trinidad.
Entomologist, XXIL., p. 149, 1889. Tithorea flavescens.
Scupper, S. H.—Inaccurate figure of a butterfly’s egg. Psyche,
V., p. 152, 1889.— Vanessa polychtoros.
- Srosson, ANNIE T.—A_ new species of Euphanessa. nt.
Amer., V.,p.7, 1889. E. meridiana, from Florida.
Grote, A. R.—Note on Zeuzera pyrina. Ent. Amer., V., p. 7,
1889.—Accidental in America.
Smiru, J. B—[Cerathosia belongs to Arctiide.] Ent. Amer.,
V., p. 8, 1889.
448 The American Naturalist. [May,
BEUTENMULLER, Wmu.—On North American Tineidze. £7¢.
Amer., V., p. 9, 1889.—New species are Tinea seminolella (Flor-
ida), Acrolophus plumsfrontellus (N.Y .), Psecadia albicostella (Colo-
rado), Pa. walsinghamella (W.Va.), Pa. semilugens var. plumbeella
(Texas), Depressa curvineella (N.Y.), Gracilaria fuscoochrella
(Calif), Cosmopteryx floridanella (Fla.), C. minutella (Fla.)
FERNALD, C. H.—North American Microlepidoptera. Ænt.
Amer., V., p. 18, 1889. Tortrix citrana (Calif.)
ANGELMAN, J. B—Notes on Zeuzera pyrina. Ent. Amer., N.
p. 28, 1889.—Is found frequently around N.Y. See Grote, supra.
Ho ann, W. J— [Owns the collections of W. H. Edwards
and T. L. Mead.|—£ut. Amer., V., p. 35, 1889.
-BEUTENMOULLER. Wm.—Chambers’ corrections to his paper
[Jour Cin. Soc. Nat. Hist., I1.] on the illustrations of the neura-
tion of the wings of American Tineide. Ent. Amer.,V., p. 37, 1889.
BEUTENMULLER, Wm.—Descriptions of some Lepidopterous
Larve. [4 c, p. 38.]—Drepanodes ascuata, Agrotis pitychrous,
Phycis rubrifasciella, Phoxopteris spireae foliana.
SLosson, ANNIE T.—A new Spilosoma. wt. Amer., V., p. 40,
1889.—S. prima from N.H.
Hutst, Gro. D.—The Epipaschiinze of North America. nt.
Amer., V., pp. 41-61, 1889.—Enumerates 11 genera, 19 species,
of which Yuma and Attacapa are new genera. No new sp.
PEARSALL. R. F.—Notes on rearing Lepidoptera. vt. Amer.,
V., p. 53, 1880.
Dyar, H. G.—Preparatory stages of Dasylophia anguina. Ent.
Amer., V., p. 55, 1889.
COcKERELL, T. D. A.—The larva of Gnophela vermiculata,
Ent. Amer., V., p. 57, 1889.
Situ, Jons B.—Contributions toward a monograph of the
Nocteridz of Temperate North America. Ent. Amer., V., pp-
105, 145, 175.—Leg structure in Deltoids, descriptions of Oligia
festivoides, O. chalcidonia, O. versicolor, O. exesa, O. fuscimaculata,
O. grata, O. paginata. Revision of Pseudanarta.
Bruce, Davin.—Nemeophila plantaginis. Ent. Amer., V.,112.
—Description of larva from Colorado,
1890.] Record of American Zoölogy. 449
Raconot, Ep.—Phycitidz and Galleriida of North America.
‘ Some new species and a general catalogue. Ent. Amer.,V., 1 13,
1889.—New species are Myelois subtetricella, M. zonunella (No.
I), Acrobasis minimella (Tex.), Saluria dichroella (Tex.). Cata-
logues 178 species and 5 varieties.
Hutst, Gro. D.—Eggs and larvæ of Cerathosia tricolor. Ent.
Amer., V., 118, 1889.—Larve geometrid. J. B. Smith, / c., p.
110, still maintains Lithosiid character of same genus.
SMITH, J. B.—Note on Spilosoma congrua. Ent. Amer., V.,
119, 1889.—Synonomy.
Sosson, ANNIE T.—The home of Setrarctia echo. Ent. Amer.,
V., 153, 1889.—Florida; description of larva and habits.
Hutst, Geo. D.—Notes on the catalogue of Phycitide and
Galleriidz of North America, by Mr. Ragonot. Ent. Amer., VN.,
155, 1889.—Corrections of localities and synonymy.
SmitTH, J. B—Notes on Cerambycid larve. Ent. Amer., V.,
156. Translation of table from Ganglbaur.
Dyar, H. G— Description of the larva of Sphynx luscitiosa,
Ent. Amer., V., 189, 1889.
Scuauss, JR., WmM.—Description of new species of Mexican
Heterocerca. Ent. Amer., V., 190, 1889.—J/dalus herois, Arachnis
perotensis, A. suffusa, Curales divina, Opharus tristis, Crambo-
morpha tolteca, Leptidule getes, Euphanessa pauper, Ephialtias
coatepeca, Melanchroita monticola, Polypaetes cethegus, Eacles or-
mondet. :
BEUTENMULLER, Wm.—Preparatory stages of Callosamia an-
gulifera. Ent. Amer., V., 200, 1889.
FERNALD.—[ Letter descriptive of Entomological trip to Eu-
rope.] Ent. Amer., V., 209, 1889.—Identification of types.
FERNALD, C. H.—On the date of publication of Walker’s JApr. .
18, 1863], and Zeller’s [Mar. 23, 30, 1863] Crambide. yt.
Amer., NV., 215- -
Aaron, E. M.—A vulnerable “ new species.” Ent. Amer., V.,
221, 1889. Agraulis vasularis Maynard= A. vanillæ.
BEUTENMÜLLER, Wm.—Food-plants of Lepidoptera, No. 12.
Ent. Amer., V., 226, 1889.
Am, Nat.—May.—4.
ea
SA
ae es Hye
Bary a te
450 -The American Naturalist. [May,
Dyar, H. G—Preparatory stages of Janassa lignicolor. Ent.
Amer, V., gt.
Stosson, Annie T.—Phragmatobia assimilans. Ent. Amer.,
Vise, 1889. š
BialspDELL, F. E.—Hints about killing Lepidoptera. W. A-
Scientist, VI., p. 6, 1889.
Ransom, Rost.—Larva of Hyperchiria io on saw palmetto in
Florida. Znsect Life, I., 21 7, 1889.
RILEY AnD Howarv.—Chloridea rhexia injuring tobacco, Jn- i
sect Life, I., 228, 188ọ.
Ketuicort, D. S—Hepialus argenteomaculatus. Insect Life, 1.,
250, 1889.—Life history.
WALSINGHAM.—Steps towards a revision of Chambers’ Index,
with notes and description of new species [of Tineina.] Znsect
Life, 1., 254, 1889.—New species are Depressaria togata (Mon-
tana), D. solidaginis (Mo.), D. Sernaldella, (Me., Wisc.), D. novo-
mundi (Vancouver), D. lythrella (Ill.), D. gracilis (Texas), Plutella
omissa (Oregon). fd. 1. c., p. 287, 1889.—New species are
Cerostoma subsylvella (Vancouver), Trachoma senex (Calif.),
Fterolonche lineata (Ariz.), Cosmopteryx nitens (Texas), C. chaly-
beella (Texas), C. delicatella (N. C.), C. unicolorella (Calif)
kd. lca B23; Si, 77.215 Rebee on Lithocolletis; the
new species are Z. chambersella, L. umbellularie (Cal.), L. gaulth-
terella (Oreg., Cal.), Z. ledella (Cal.), Z. alnicolella (Cal.), Z. in-
canella (Cal.), L. nemoris (Cal .), Z. oregonensis (Or.), Z. insignis (Cal.)
WeEssTER, C. E.—Notes on the cultivation of the Japanese
oak-feeding silkworm (Antherea yama-mai.) Insect Life,1., 273,
89.
18
Swinton, A. H.—Stridulation in Vanessa antiopa. Insect Life.
I., 307, 18809. :
ILEY, C. V.—Notes on Pronuba and Yucca pollination. /n-
sect Life, 1., 367, 1889.
Epwarps, Hy.—Notes on noises made by Lepidoptera. Zn-
sect Life, Il., p. 11, 18809.
Snow, B. W.—Aggregate damage from the cotton worm in
Texas, crop of 1887. Jusect Life, Il., p. 32, 1889.—Loss, 297,-
449 bales—$11,897,960
$
1890.] Record of American Zoölogy. 451
FLETCHER, JAMES.—Preliminary note upon Chionobas (CEneis)
macountt. Insect Life, Il., p. 45, 1889.
WALSINGHAM.—Steps towards a revision of Chambers’ Index
[of Tineina], with notes and descriptions of new species. /nsect
Life, IL., 150, 1889.—Notes on Cryptolechia, Stenotoma, Menesta
and Zde. New species are S. furcata (Ariz.), S. crumbitella (Ariz.),
Ide osseéella (Calif.).
“ Riley AND Howarp.’—The so-called Mediterranean flour
moth (Ephestia kithniella). Insect Life, II., 166, 1889.—Habits,
occurrence in America. Note on Æ. interpunctella.
“ RILEY AND Howarp.”—The imported gypsy moth. (Ocneria
dispar.) Insect Life, Il., 208, 1890. Habits, parasites, etc.
Ritey, C. V.—Some insect pests of the household. [Repr.
from Good Housekeeping, April 27, 1889.] Jusect Life, Il., p.
211, 1890. Clothes moths, three species, and parasite Hypere-
mus tineg.
LUGGER, Otto.—Spilosoma fuliginosa Linn. Insect Life, II.,
236, 1890. Occurs in Minnesota.
Morrat, J. A——Danais archippus. Can. Eni; XXi. p. 19,
1880.
Grote, A. R.—The Lepidopterous fauna of Europe and North
America. Can. Ent, XXI., p. 21, 1889.
Frencu, G. H.—A new species of Neonympha. Can. Ent.,
XXI., p. 25, 1889. N. mitchellii from Michigan.
BEUTENMÜLLER, Wm.—Two new species of Tineidæ from the
Aleutian Islands. Can. Ent, XXI. p. 27, 1889- Cerostoma
aleutianella, C. dubtosella.
CLARKSON, FREDERICK.—Notes on Bombycide. Can. Ent.,
XXL, p. 28. _ Cocoon making.
Dyar, H. G.—Description of the larva of Datana major. Can.
Ent., XXL., p. 34, 1889. Feeds on Andromeda ligustrina.
Frencu, G. H.—Notes on the California moths. Can. Ent.,
XXi p. 35, 1889. New species, Arctia shastænsis.
Grote, A. R.—Mr. Smith on Cerathosia. Can. Ent, XXI.
p. 37, 1889. Polemical.
Ketuicotr, D. S—Arzama obliquata. Can. Ent, XXI. p.
39, 1889. Habits, number of broods.
452 The American Naturalist. [May,
Van Duzer, E. P.—Pieris ilaire. Can. Ent, XXI. p. 30,
1889. Captured at Lancaster, N. Y.
Epwarps, W. H.—Description of the preparatory stages of
Colias mead. Can. Ent., XXI, p. 41, 1889.
McNIELL, J.—Colas cesonia. Can. Ent, XXI., p. 43, 1889.
—Habits.
Scupper, S. H.—Length of life in butterflies. Can. Ent.,
XXI, p. 49, 1889.
GEDDES, GAMBLE.—Notes for collectors visiting the prairies
and Rocky Mountains. Can. Ent., XXI., p. 57, 1889.—Dates of
capture of Rhopalogera.— Colas chione. J. c., p. 59, 1889.—Fe-
male of this rare Arctic species.
Morrat, J. A.—Arctia phyliira [occurs in Canada]. Can. Ent.,
XXL, p. 60, 1889.
Epwarps, W. H.—Description of the’ preparatory stages of
Arge galathea, with notes on certain Satyrine. Can. Ent., XXL.,
pp: 71-81, 1889.—Origin of group.
FLETCHER, JAs——Popular and Economical Entomology, No. `
2. Can. Ent, XXI., pp. 74, 117, 201, 1889.—Ciistocampa
americana ; cut worms, Papilio turnus.
Dyar, H. G.—tThe larva of Limacodes inornata. Can, Ent.,
XAL, p. 77, 1889.
BreHME, H. H.—Arzama obliquata. Can. Ent., XX1., p. 78,
1889.—Habits of larva.
Jounston, JAMES.—Arzama obliquata. Can. Ent., XX1., p. 79,
1889.—Habits of larva.
Morrat, J. A.—Arzama obliquata. Can. Ent, XXI., p. 99;
1889.
DENTON, SHELLEY W.—Catching Butterflies by means of De-
coys. Can. Ent., XXI., p. 111, 18809.
FLETCHER JAMES.—Notes on the preparatory stages of Carter-
ocephalus mandan. Can. Ent., XXI., p. 113, 18809.
Grote, A. R—The Nocteridz of North America and Europe.
Can. Ent., XXI., pp. 121, 154, 188, 226, 1880.
SKINNER, Henry, and Aaron, E. M.—A List of the Butterflies
of Philadelphia, Pa. Can. Ent., p. 127, 145, 1889.—86 recog-
nized.
1890.] Record of American Zoölogy. 453
Dyar, H. G.—Preparatory stages of Euplexia lucipara. Can.
Eni, XAL, p., 137, 1889.
Grote, A. R.—Notes on the genera Gortyna and Ochria. Can.
Ent., XXI., p. 139, 1889.—Lists of species.
Morrat, J. A.—Additions to the Canadian list of Lepidoptera.
Can. Enl, XXI1., p. 153, 1889.
BEUTENMULLER, Wm.—On early stages of some Lepidoptera.
Can. Ent., XXI, p. 160, 1889.—Chionobas macounii, Ancyloxypha
numitor, Arzama obliquata.
Frencu, G. H.—Some Texas, Arizona, and California Moths.
Can. Ent., XX1., p. 161, 1889.——-New species are Ameria texana,
Flusia arizona, Plusia lenzi, Ægeria pinorum.,
DenToN, SHELLEY W.—Early stages of Grapta J-album.
Can. Ent, XXI., p. 144, 1889.
Situ, Jonn B—Preliminary catalogue of the Arctiidæ of
Temperate North America. Can. Ent., XXI., pp. 169, 193, 213,
1889.
Dawson, P. M.—Grapta J-album. Can. Ent, XXI., pp. 179,
1889.—Larva on silver brick.
Grote, A. R.—The Classification of our Butterflies. Caz.
Ent., XXI., p. 205, 1889.
Dyar, A. G—Note on the larva of Thyatira pudens. Can.
Ent., XXI., p. 209, 1889.
Frencu, G. H.—Preparatory stages of Leptarctia california,
with notes on the genus. Can. Ent., XXI., pp. 210-221, 1889.—
Figures several variations.
CockErELL, T. D. A—Gnophela vermiculata. Can. Ent., XXL.
p. 220, 1889.—Food plants.
Lyman, H. H.—The North American Callimorphus. Can. Ent.,
XXI; pD 235; 1889.—Controversial.
Dyar, H. G.—Preparatory stages of Pyrameis carye. Can,
Ent., XXL., p. 237, 1889.
SKINNER, H.—Butterflies at Qu’Appelle, Can. Can. Eni.,
XXL, p. 238, 1889.
Kitrman, A. H.—A rare moth. Can. Em, XXL, p. 240,
1889.—Thysania zenobia at Ridgway, Ont.
454 The American Naturalist. [May,
DIPTERA.
Wizuston, S. W.—A new cattle pest. Am. Nar., XXIII., p.
584, 1889.
PackarD, A. S.—The cave fauna of North America. Mem,
Nat. Acad. Sci., IV., 1889.—Mentions several genera and re-
prints Osten Sacken’s description of Blepharoptera defusca and
Hubbard’s of the larva of Phora.
Wituiston, S. W.—A new species of Hæmotobia. Ent. Amer.,
V., 180, 1889,—H. cornicola. Same, |. C, p. 197, regards it as H.
serrata Desv.
“ RıLey & Howard.” —On the emasculating botfly (Cuterebra
emasculator Fitch). Insect Life, 1., 214, 1889.
Ossory, H.—Another human botfly. Jnsect Life, I., p. 226, 1889.
Wituiston, S. W.—Leucopsis bellula n. sp. Insect Life, 1.,
258, 1889.—Parasitic on cochineal insect.
WItuisTon, S. W.—Note on the genus Lestrophoneus. /nsect
Life, 1., 328, 18809. (=? Cryptochcetum, Rondani).
CoguitLetr, D. W.—The corn or boll worm in California.
Lusect Life, 1., 331, 1889.—Describes Tachina (Masicera) armigera,
parasitic on Heliothis armigera.
Mariatr.—Report of a trip to investigate buffalo gnats. Zn-
sect Life, IlL., p. 7, 1889.
“Ritey anb Howarp.”—The Horn fly (Hematobia serrata).
Insect Life, IL, p. 93, 1889.—Description, habits, life, history.
“ Riev ann Howard.” —The bot-fly of the ox, or ox warble.
Tasen Lye I i 56, 1889.—Damages.—The ox warble, l.c.
H, p. 172, 1889. Describtion, habits, etc.
CURTICE, Cooper.—The larvæ of Hypoderma bovis. Insect
Life, IL p. 207, 1890.
Coguitett, D. W.—The dipterous parasite of Diabrotica
soror. Insect Life, Il., p. 22 3, 1890. Describes Celatoria crawit
n.g. and sp.
Kane, ELIZABETH R.—A grub supposed to have traveled in the
human body. Insect Life, Il., p. 238, 1890.—Larve of Hypoderma.
Fyres, Tnos. W.—Note on the predatory habits of Cha-
topsis enea. Can Ent, XX1. p. 236, 1889.—Larvæ attack larva
of Arzama obliquata.
1890.] Erosive Agents in the Arid Regions. 455
EROSIVE AGENTS IN THE ARID REGIONS.
BY RALPH S. TARR.
A NONG the mountains in the western part of the United
States the agents of erosion are not unlike those of the
moister sections of the east. Rain, snow, ice and frost are the
chief factors in the sculpturing of these mountain masses.
On the plateau the conditions are different. Snow and ice are
rarely seen; frost seldom appears, owing to the extreme dryness
of the atmosphere, and rain falls under peculiar conditions. In
all climates the action of animals and plants, of sun and air, are
important factors in the wearing away of land masses; but in
few places are the effects of these agents so important as in the
western plateau region. Most if not all the agents of erosion
which I shall describe have been noticed and mentioned by the
various writers on the geology of the arid regions ; but their im-
portance seems so great that it may be well to group them and
call especial attention to them.
Of the physical agents, as in all sections of the world, except
the most arid, rain is the chief. For fully nine months in the
year little or no rain falls upon the truly arid belt. When, during
these months, rain falls at all, it comes simply as light showers or
brief drizzling rain, producing almost no geological effect. It is
absorbed by the soil, and is rarely in sufficient quantity to freshen
the parched vegetation.
During the three summer months the region is liable to ex-
cessive local rains, often called “ cloud-bursts.” Several inches
frequently fall in an hour during such a shower. Two-thirds of
the annual precipitátion falls in a few such rains. The geological
effect of so much water suddenly poured .upon the ground is
intense. The whole soil is completely wetted for a depth of
several feet, and even in this dry region torrents flow tumultously
to the streams. The arid plateaux are chiefly regions of young
drainage, on which there are large tracts without drainage arteries.
456 The American Naturatst. [May,
When a cloud-burst falls upon such a place deep ravines or
“arroy s” are suddenly formed by the rush of the waters.
Sometimes an “arroya ” fifteen feet deep is cut out in the soil for
a distance of a mile. The destructive effects of such a cloud-
burst are great, particularly when it breaks upon high ground
and flows upon a plain. In July, 1886, I witnessed the effects of
such a torrent in the Rio Grande Valley, in New Mexico. The
cloud-burst broke upon the low Donna Anna mountains, but no
rain fell outside of their limits. The mountains were capped by
a dark thunder cloud, while in the valley at Donna Anna, about
six miles distant, the sky was cloudless. In a short time a wall
of muddy water a foot high spread over the flood plain of the
Rio Grande near Donna Anna, and this was followed by similar
waves for a half-hour. At Donna Anna, which is situated on a
bluff bounded on the south by an “arroya,” a body of water
completely filling the arroya was seen to pass by for about a
half-hour, then the body of water gradually diminished to a
trickling stream, and in less than an hour no water was flowing.
The depth of water must have been twenty feet at this point.
It cut under the cliff on which Donna Anna is built, and scaled
off a large piece, leaving a house on the edge of a precipitous
wall. The stream. carried vast quantities of bushes, roots and
clay, and, I am told, some animals. On the flood plain several
acres of vineyard were completely covered with silt and gravel,
one or two small orchards were partially buried, and an adobe
house about ten feet high was buried to within two feet’ of thé
top. Several thousand tons of earth must have been removed
during this torrent. Such floods are not uncommon in these
arid regions, and their intense erosive activity may be seen by
this illustration.
Next in importance to rain is the direct effect of the air as an
erosive agent. In many places in the arid territories extensive
sand dunes are proofs of this zolian action; but these are
merely grand illustrations of a common phenomenon. During
all months of the year dust is being blown about either in clouds
or in creeping waves along the surface of the ground. In the
-valley of the lower Rio Grande, in New Mexico, often for several
1890. ] . Erosive Agents in the Arid Regions. 457
days in succession strong winds blow clouds ‘of dust along the
mesa, and these are often so dense that the Oregon Mountains,
ordinarily plainly visible, are completely obscured from view. On
the upper Rio Grande, at Embudo, in March, 1889, clouds of
dust not uncommonly swept up the cañon, obscuring the high
canyon walls from view, although they were only a mile distant.
In February of the same year I encountered a dust storm in the
pass among the White Mountains, near Fort Stanton, New
Mexico, which lasted for several hours, The wind was blowing
at a velocity of sixty miles an hour, and not only sand but small
bits of gravel were blown with such force as to produce a painful
blow onthe face. The road could not be seen for a distance of
twenty feet. Fine particles of dust penetrated to the works of
my watch and caused it to stop.
Another common phenomenon of aerial erosion is the forma-
tion of small whirlwinds, to be seen on all sides on the plateau
during the summer time. These sometimes gather force enough
to carry away small bushes. The creeping action of blowing
sand I have often had forcibly illustrated, when during a windy
night the sand has blown upon my blankets, and formed a thin
coating of sand.
The direct effect of change in temperature must be an import-
ant geological agent. On the plains the temperature of the sand
is often 115° during mid-day, while in the early morning it may
be as low as 60°. During the winter a black bulb thermometer
registered 105° at one o'clock, while the minimum temperature at
night was 27°. Such an excessive thermometric range must aid
gréatly in breaking up the rocks, especially the black basalts so
common in the west.
Organic aids to erosion are also important. Plants serve very
slightly in breaking up the soil. They grow with extreme slow-
ness and great difficulty. They are important more in a con-
servative than a destructive way. The vegetation is thin and
scanty, and hence does not act as a protective covering to the
extent that plants of a moister climate do. The conservative
effect is well shown, however, in the case of the mesquite, which
catches and holds down the blowing sand, and as a result often
458 The American Naturalist. [May,
causes to be built around it a bank of sand many feet high, often
fifteen or twenty feet. The mesquite, and indeed almost all arid
land-plants, have great root extension, by far the greater part of
the plant being beneath ground, and the disintergrating offect of
this peculiarity must be considered.
Among animals there are at least three types which are doing
much work of erosion. Formerly the bison, and now their
successors,—cattle,—have done an appreciable geological work.
In the formation of trails and the general tramping of the
ground they have aided in protecting the soil against the action
of wind and water. Recently in southern New Mexico, on the
Pecos, I have had my attention forcibly called to the importance
of cattle in this'direction. Several small streams had their course
considerably lengthened by the puddling of the stream-bed by
cattle.
Ants are very abundant on the plateau, and they are continually
at work tunnelling the soil and bringing fresh earth to the sur-
face. On the upper Rio Grand, near Embudo, there is a clayey
gravel containing many small garnets. The ant-hills in the
vicinity are composed chiefly of garnets. The clay is apparently
washed out, and the coarser particles have remained. Ant-hills
are frequently washed away during a rain, but they are quickly
rebuilt. A peculiar ant, the “agricultural ant,” so called, is com-
mon in the south-west. These creatures have a clear space
around their homes, thus exposing the bare ground to the action
of the elements.
The work done by prairie dogs, while in individual cases ap-
parently insignificant, must amount to a grand sum total. Over
large tracts their burrows open to the air at intervals averaging
not more than twenty-five feet apart. I have no means of telling
how far they extend into the ground, but from the appearance of
their mounds I should judge it to be only a few feet. This
mound rarely exceeds a height of two feet, and generally less.
Being in the form of a truncated cone, with a very gradual slope ;
they are sometimes three feet in diameter. Their burrow is sel-
dom more than six inches wide, so that its extreme length can-
not be many feet. That the creatures are constantly at work is
1890. ] Erosive Agents in the Arid Regions. 459
proved by the great number of new holes in every “ dog town,”
and also by the number of holes in old roads passing through
sections inhabited by the prairie dog. Deserted burrows can
always be told by the destruction of the mound, and widening of
the hole under the influence of subaerial denudation. The towns
are generally built on gentle sloping hills, where there is some
drainage, consequently the fresh clay and earth brought to the
surface is gradually drifted away. Not only is the work of
erosion aided by the bringing up of material to the surface, but
also by the opening of tunnels, by which water is allowed free
underground passage. With a mound around the hole this in-
flowing of water is reduced to a minimum; but when the hole is
abandoned, and the mound destroyed, water freely enters, and in
such cases I have frequently noticed small runlets leading to the
hole.
Thus it will be seen that the great agent of erosion, water, is
of particular importance in the arid regions on account of its in-
tensified action during brief periods; that the direct effect of
aerial currents is a powerful factor in the erosion of these pla-
teaux; that the sun’s heat must also play an important part; that
plants are only slightly conservative and slightly destructive;
and that animals, by tramping down the soil or by burrowing and
tunneling into the earth, are important aids in the great work of
subaerial denudation by which the plateaux of the west are being
gradually eaten away.
460 The American Naturalist. [May,
EDITORIAL.
EDITORS, E. D. COPE AND J. S. KINGSLEY.
HE U. S. National Academy of Sciences is entertaining a
proposition to divide its membership into classes. These are
ten in number in the plan, as follows: Mathematics, Physics,
Astronomy, Geodesy and Mechanics, Chemistry, Geology, Botany,
Zoology, Anthropology, and Political Economy and Statistics.
A classification of the sciences which shall be consistent with -
their nature and relations is of course difficult, and the above
arrangement may be criticised, especially on the part of biologists.
It is, however, reasonable that physiology, embryology and paleon-
tology should be relegated to botany and zoology respectively.
But psychology cannot be properly so referred, and its omission is
a defect in the plan which it is important to remedy.
We believe that such a division into classes will be useful
in directing attention to possible deficiency or excess in the re-
presentation of the various branches of science. But it must be
borne in mind on the other hand that no equality of representa-
tion will be possible, and the departments, if adopted, will be
filled as nearly as possible in accordance with the number of de-
serving candidates which can be found.
In order to secure a more equal and just representation, another
plan of division was proposed some years ago which was not
adopted. Four classes were recommended, viz.: Psychology,
Physics, Natural History and Applied Science. It was proposed
to give to the first and last-named classes fifteen members each,
and to the second and third, which would correspond with the
old sections A and B of the American Association for the Ad-
vancement of Science, thirty-five members each. This may be a
better scheme’than the one now before the Academy.
The new plan proposes that any of the classes may be called
together and hold meetings to consider questions relating to their
departments. This is a proposition to be considered with care.
Occasions requiring such separate action will be rare, and per-
1890.] Editoriat. 461
haps had better be deferred until meetings of the entire Academy
can be had. It is doubtful whether such a plan would be
productive of advantage to the Academy. We hope also that the
division into classes will not be made a pretext for increasing the
membership to above one hundred persons.
—TueE last meeting of the Committee of Arrangements for the
reception of the International Congress of Geologists was held in
Washington, D. C., April 18th. The American Committee had,
on the occasion of their last Congress (in London), presented the
invitation of a number of Philadelphia organizations and officials
to the Congress to hold its next session in Philadelphia, which
invitation was accepted by the Bureau of Direction on behalf of
the Congress. Some uncertainty remained as to the best time of
holding the Congress, owing to the fact that the Jubilee of the
University of Pennsylvania and the International Exposition at
Chicago had both been postponed from the original dates, and it
was thought to be important that the. Congress should coincide
with one or the other of theseevents. The committee, however,
voted that the meeting of Congress should be held in 1891, thus
allowing but little time for preparations. This premature action
might have been harmless, however, but for the subsequent action
by which it was voted to ask the Bureau to transfer the place of
meeting from Philadelphia to Washington. The time required to
get the consent of the Bureau, whose members live in many
countries and at remote distances, will be so great as to prevent
the proper preparation for the Congress, owing to the lack of time.
This conclusion was reached principally by the votes of active or
past employees of the U. S. Geological Survey on motions made
by the Director of the Survey (Major J. W. Powell), who consti-
tuted a majority of the Committee; one member of the Survey,
Capt. C. E. Dutton, not voting. The adoption of the motions of
Major Powell is equivalent to the destruction of the international
character of the Congress. The object of the Director in bring-
ing about this result may be well imagined. That he should have
the support of the International Congress of Geologists is no
doubt a very desirable consummation for the Director of the
562 The American Naturalist. [May,
Survey, since he has not hitherto experienced any especial
recognition from that body. And that he shall have such
recognition from a body controlled by himself, is a foregone
conclusion. There are, however, many American geologists who
think that this International Congress should not be used to ad-
vance the political aspirations of Major Powell. We are of this
number, and we therefore hope that the Bureau of Europe will
not accede to the request of the majority of the Committee, but
will adhere to their original decision that the Congress be held in
Philadelphia, where it will have a truly international character,
and be free from the domination of any particular body. The
date also should be postponed until 1892, in order to allow the
time requisite for preparation, and to coincide with the approaching
Jubilee of the University of Pennsylvania. The facilities for
holding the Congress in Philadelphia are excellent, and they will
be made fully available by the codperation of the Philadelphia
members of the Committee of Reception.
—THE scientific men of Indiana are preparing to give the Ameri-
can Association for the Advancement of Science a warm welcome
at Indianapolis the coming summer. If their efforts meet with
the relative success that they did at the first meeting of the Asso-
ciation at that city in 1871, the Association will have occasion to
congratulate itself, We hope however that the local committee
will arrange that the excursions be postponed until after the close
of the meetings so that the real business may not be interfered
with too seriously. Indiana includes within its borders more
original investigators in science than any state west of the Alle-
gheny Mountains, and we have no doubt but that the interests of
science will be well cared for at their hands.
1890.] Geography and Travel. 463
eneral Notes.
GEOGRAPHY AND TRAVELS.
Col, Stanton’s Recent Descent of the Colorado River.—
Col. Robert Stanton, commander of the Denver expedition now ex-
ploring the comparatively unknown regions traversed by the Colorado
river, has written to the Denver Republican a graphic account of the
perilous journey down the wild stream from the head of the Granite
gorge of the Grand canyon to the mouth of Diamond creek, to accomp-
lish which required the time from January 24 to March r. The expe-
dition had to battle upon entering the Granite gorge with mighty
cataracts and foaming torrents, sometimes letting their boats down
with ropes, and at times portaging all the contents of the boats around
rapids. Two of the boats were dashed against rocks and wrecked.
Progress was extremely slow. At one point they were delayed five
days while one of the wrecked boats was being reconstructed. Of
that portion of the Granite gorge from its head to Bright Angel creek,
Col. Stanton quotes from his note book, under date of February 7:
‘ The canyon is growing more and more picturesque and beautiful
the further we proceed. The Granite has lost its awful and threaten-
ing look, and slopes back in beautiful hillsides of variegated black,
gray, and green. Above this, next to the river, is a stratum of dark
sandstone cut into sharp horizontal layers, standing in an almost per-
pendicular wall, jutting out in places to the edge of the granite, and
studded all over with points standing out in the air, darker in color
than those behind them, and the top edge cut into smaller points and
crevices through which the light shines, giving a rough, beaded
appearance,
VIEWS IN THE GORGE.
‘* At the side of the canyons, and from the: bends of the river, the
upper portions of the whole gorge are brought into view, showing the
great marble and sandstone cliffs benched back far away from the river,
while small mountains jut in close between the side canyons and wash
nearly a mile and a quarter in height. As we sail along the smooth
stretches between the rapids each turn brings some wonderful picture
more beautiful than the last. As we look down the river or up a low
side canyon, with the placid water between its polished walls of black
464 The American Naturalist. [May,
and gray and green for a foreground, there rises above the dark sand-
stone tier upon tier, bencn upon bench, terrace upon terrace, stepping
back further and further and higher and higher, and in their immen-
sity of height and proportions seeming to tower almost over our heads.
First above the darker sandstone come the flattened slopes of the line,
and mineralized matter in horizontal layers of yellow, brown, white,
red, and green
« Then rise sheer walls of stained marble 1,000 feet or more, the
lower portions yellow, brown, and red, and the coloring of red grow-
ing brighter as it nears the top. Above this, smaller benches of marble,
at the top of each a little mesa covered with green grass and brushes,
and above these a dozen or more terraces of scarlet and flame-colored
sandstone, stained on their outer points with black, and the little
benches between them relieved by the bright green of the grease-wood
and bunch grass, the whole covered with, perhaps, a couple of thous-
and feet of the lighter gray, yellow, and white sandstone ledges, cap-
ped by pinnacles and spires, turrets and domes in every imaginable
shape, size and proportion, with all their slopes covered and their tops
fringed with pine, cedar, and pinion trees, whose bright green stands
out in bold relief against the flaming colors of the sandstone, and the
banks of pure white snow that cover the top and have run down into
the many gulches along the sides.’’
A CHANGE IN THE SCENE.
Further on he writes: “From the southern portion of Powell’s
plateau to the mouth of the Kanab Wash the canyon assumes an en-
tirely new form. The granite, except in a few patches, has sunk under
the river, and the softer strata of sand and limestone which formed the
great slopes above the granite have come down next to the river and
rise from the water’s edge in great talus slopes of from 300 to 600 feet
high at a general angle of 40 degrees from vertical, The high cliffs
of marble and red sandstone bench back from the top of these slopes.
Although these outer peaks and cliffs have drawn in close upon the
river the canyon itself—that is the inner gorge—is much wider than
above, the width being measured between the tops of the great talus
slopes, The river is broader, and it sweeps in gentle curves at the foot
of the talus, which is covered with bushes, bunch grass, and large
mesquite groves. On many of the long stretches where the river can
be seen for several miles the picture is one of grandeur and beauty.
Grand with its walls of bright colors towering 2,500 feet overhead,
beautiful in its long green slopes, with the quiet waters sparkling
1890.] Geography and Travel. 465
in the sun at their foot, for the rapids are much less frequent, and
stretches of still water are growing longer and longer.
rom the mouth of the Kanab Wash for about twenty miles down
is perhaps the narrowest and deepest part of the great inner gorge.
The lovely sandstone and limestone ledges have sunken under the river,
and the marble and upper sandstones come close into the water.. At
the bottom the gorge is from 150 to 200 feet wide, and the river runs
between vertical walls—vertical, however, for only about 80 feet up—
and fills the whole space from wall to wall. The walls of this portion
of the canyon—(and it comes nearer being a true canyon than any
other part of the river)—rise above the water 3,000 feet, and they are
almost vertical ; the benches are narrower, and the vertical cliffs be-
tween the benches higher than in any other section. And yet, strange
to relate, from one end of this section to the other there is a bench
about 50 feet above high water, running almost parallel with the grade
of the river, of solid marble wide enough to build a four-track railroad
upon and not interfere with the perpendicular walls above or the river
low.
IN FLOOD AND RAPID.
*¢ The night before we reached Kanab the river rose four feet ; pit
continued to rise for two days and two nights. How much the rise
was I am not absolutely certain, but believe from good evidence it was
fully ten feet. Just below Kanab Wash there is a rapid one and one-
half miles long. On Tuesday morning we started down this rapid.
We made this mile and a half in just four and one-half minutes. We
then had for some time few rapids, but a rushing, singing current,
forming eddies, whirlpools and back currents fearful to contemplate,
much more to ride upon.
‘About 2:30 p. m. we heard a deep, loud roar and saw the breakers
ahead in white foam. With a great effort we stopped upon a pile of
broken rocks that had rolled into the river. Much to our surprise
when we went to look, the whole terrible rapid that we had expected
to see had disappeared, and only a rushing current in its stead. While
we stood wondering there rose right at our feet those same great waves,
12 to 14 feet in height and roo to 150 feet long across the river, rolling
down stream like great sea waves, and breaking in white foam with a
terrible noise. We watched and wondered and at last concluded this |
was the fore front of a great body of water rolling down this narrow
trough from some great cloudburst above. Believing that discretion
was the better part of valor, we camped right there on that pile of
rocks, fearing that although our boats would ride these waves in safety,
Am Nat.—May.—5.
-
466 The American Naturalist. [May,
we might be caught in one of these rolls just at the head of a rapid,
and, unable to stop, be carried over the rapid with the additional force
of these rushing breakers. ;
‘ The next morning, to our surprise, we found the flood had begun
to recede. After an early breakfast we started on what afterwards
proved to be the wildest, most daring and exciting ride we have had
on the river. The canyon so narrow, the turns quick and sharp, the
current rushing first on one side and then on the other, forming whirl-
pools, eddies and chutes, our boats caught first in one and then in the .
other, now spun around like leaves in the wind, then shot far to the
right or left almost against the wall, now caught by a mighty roll and
first carried to the top of the great waves, and then dropped into the
‘trough of the sea,’ with a force almost sufficient to take away one’s
breath, many times narrowly escaping being carried over the rapids
before we could examine them, making exciting and sudden landings
by pulling close to shore, and with bow up stream rowing hard to par-
tially check our speed, while one man jumps with a line toa little ledge
of rocks and holds on for his life and ours too.
A STRUGGLE FOR LIFE.
“At last the expected combination comes. We round a sharp turn
and see a roaring, foaming rapid below, and as we come in full view of
it we are caught in a mighty roll of flood wave.
‘ We try to pull out to an eddy— it is all in vain; we cannot cross
such a current. We must go down over the rapid. In trying to pull
out we got our boats quartering with the current, over the rollers and
through the breakers up to the head of the rapid. In this position they
travel a course, first in the air and then in the water, only to be com-
pared to the spirals of a corkscrew. When we find we must go over
the rapid, with great effort we straighten them round and enter in good
shape, bow on. It Jasts but a moment, the cross current strikes us and
we are turned, go broadside down over the worst part of the rapid
(which proves clear of rocks), then, turned and twisted about, we go
through the rest of the fall in wild, wizard waltz, to music more weird
than that of the bagpipe. At the end of the fall our sturdy boats float
out into an eddy as quietly and gracefully as swans. Noble little
crafts! May they, the Bonnie Jean and Lillie, live long enough to
float on more peaceful waters than those of the Colorado river, over
whose rushing torrents they have glided now near 500 miles and never
once been upset. And peace be to the ashes (I should say splints) of
the sweet Marie that we left in the dark canyon above.” — The Even-
ing Star, Washington, D. C.
1890.] Geology and Paleontology. 467
GEOLOGY AND PALEONTOLOGY.
The Strength of the Earth’s Crust.—The term crust is
here used to indicate the outside part of the earth, without reference
to the question whether it differs in constitution from the interior.
Conceive a large tank of paraffine with level surface. If a hole be
dug in this and the material be piled in a heap at one side, the perma-
nence of hole or heap will depend on its magnitude. Beyond a cer-
tain limit, further investigation and heaping will be completely com-
pensated by the flow of the material. Substitute for paraffine the
material of the earth’s crust, and the same results will follow, but the
limiting size of the hole or heap will be different, because the strength
of the material is not the same. Assuming the earth to be homoge-
neous, the greatest possible stable prominence or depression is a
measure of the strength of its material.
It is not believed that the earth is homogeneous, and with reference
to the outer portion of the crust it is known that it is not composed of
homogeneous shells. There is observational basis for the theory that
the matter composing and lying beneath ocean beds and continents is
lighter than the matter composing and lying beneath ocean beds, and
many students of terrestrial physics entertain the theory that unit
columns extending from the surface downward have everywhere the
same weight, the height of each column being inversely as its mean
density. In accordance with this theory, prominences and depressions
of the surface exist in virtue of a principle of equilibrium, called
isostatic.1 Under hydrostatic equilibrium the surface of a free liquid
is level ; under isostatic equilibrium the surface of a non-homogeneous
solid capable of viscous flow, is uneven.
There are thus two possible explanations of the inequalities of
terrestrial surface, and these may be characterized severally by the
terms rigidity and isostasy.
In connection with a study of Lake Bonneville, a large body of
water temporarily filling a basin of Utah during Pleistocene time,?
observational data were gathered bearing on the question of rigidity
versus isostasy.
1 For definitions of the new term ‘‘isostasy ” and its adjective " isostatic,” see Dut.
ton in Bull. Phil. Soc., Washington, XI., p. 53, and Woodward in Am. Jour. Sci., 3d
Series, Vol. XX XVIII, 1889, p. 351.
?An account of Lake Bonneville may be found in the Second Annual Report of the
U.S. Geological Survey, 1881, pp. 167-200.
468 The American Naturalist. [May,
1. The Wasatch mountain range is carved from a large block of
crustal material, uplifted along a fault plane at one side. The block
adjoining the fault plane on the opposite side is thrown down. Erosion
s continually transferring material from the uplifted block to the down-
thrown block, and there is direct evidence that the mountain is steadily
rising or the valley sinking, or both. Some advocates of the isostatic
theory would regard this progressive relative displacement as a direct
effect of the continual transfer of load. Under this view the moun-
tain block has less density than the valley block, and the two are in
isostatic equilibrium ; the unloading of the mountain block by erosion
and the loading of the valley block by deposition disturb the equi-
librium, and it is restored by vertical movement on the fault plane.
An arm of Lake Bonneville occupied the valley, filling it to an
average depth of 500 or 600 feet, and this load of water was somewhat
quickly added and afterward somewhat quickly removed. If the valley
block were delicately sensitive to the application of load, it should be
depressed about 200 feet by the access of water, and should rise a
corresponding amount when the water was removed. But this did not
occur. On the contrary, the depression of the valley, as shown by
changes occurring along the fault plane, continued alike during the
presence of the water and after its removal. It is therefore concluded
that the local transfer of load from one orognic block to the other is
not the primary cause of the progressive rise of the mountain and
depression of the valley, and the question arises whether the mountain
range may not be wholly sustained in virtue of rigidity.
2. Considering the main body of Lake Bonneville, it appears from
a study of the shorelines that the removal of the water was accompa-
nied, or accompanied and followed, by the uprising of the central part
of the basin. The coincidence of the phenomena may have been
fortuitous, or the unloading may have been the cause of the uprising.
Postulating the casual relation, and assuming that isostatic equilibrium,
disturbed by the removal of the water, was restored by viscous flow of
crust matter, then it appears (from the observational data?) that the
flow was not quantitatively sufficient to Satisfy the stresses created by
the unloading. A stress residium was left to be taken up by rigidity,
and the measure of this residium is equivalent to the weight of from
400 to 600 cubic miles of rock.
From these phenomena and theoretic considerations arises the
e data ee hota
3 $ £011 g : : i
5 © not y yp : pp on Lake Bonne-
ville now in press, constituting Vol.I. of the Monographs of the U.S. Geological Survey.
1890.] Geology and Paleontology. 469
working hypothesis that the measure of the strength of the crust is a
prominence or a concavity about 600 cubic miles in volume.
If this hypothesis is strictly true, then there should be no single
mountain mass and no single valley, due purely to the local addition
or subtraction of material, having a greater volume than 600 cubic
miles. At least four kinds of mountains and valleys are due simply to
the addition and subtraction of material: (1) mountains of extravasa-
tion (such as volcanic cones), beneath which the pre-existent terranes
lie undisturbed ; (2) mountains of circumdenudation, produced by the
removal of surrounding material ; (3) mountains produced by extrava-
sation avd circumdenudation ; (4) valleys of erosion, unaccompanied
by phenomena of displacement.
A large number of such mountains and valleys exist, and some of the
largest occurring in the United States have been mapped in contours
by the U. S. Geological Survey, so that their volumes can be com-
puted readily.
San Francisco Mt., in Arizona, a result of extravasation, has a
volume of 40 cubic miles
Mt. Shasta, probably due to extravasation only, has a volume of 80
cubic miles.
The Tavaputs Plateau, or Roan Mt., lying on the borders of Utah
and Colorado, and produced by crepdildeniidlation has a volume of
700 cies iles
aylor, and the Taylor Plateau, in New Mexico, resulting from
aaia and circumdenudation, have jointly a volume of 190
cubic miles.
The Henry Mts., resulting from volcanic intrusion and circumdenu-
dation, have a volume of 230 cubic miles.
The Sierra La Sal, a mountain group of the same type, has a vol-
ume of 250 cubic miles.
The deeper portion of the Grand Cafion from the Colorado, from
the mouth of the Little Colorado to the mouth of Kanab Creek, is
due to the removal of 350 cubic miles of rock.
The Tavaputs Plateau slightly exceeds the hypothetic limit; the
other illustrations fall within it,
In view of the phenomena cited, and of the considerations and
comparisons adduced, it is believed that the following theorem or
working hypothesis is worthy of consideration and of comparison with
additional facts: Mountains, mountain ranges, and valleys of magnitude
equivalent to mountains, exist generally in virtue of the rigidity of the
earth s crust; continents, continental plateaus, and oceanic basins exist
470 The American Naturalist. [May,
in virtue of isostatic equilibrium in a crust heterogeneous as to density.—
G. K. GILBERT, in Bulletin. Geol. Soc. America.
Scott and Osborn on the Fauna of the Brown’s Park
Eocene.!—This memoir supplies an important desideratum, since we
obtain through it the first intelligible view of the Mammalian fauna
of the Brown’s Park or Uinta (name preoccupied) horizon of the
Eocene of North America. This formation, as is well known, occupies
the summit of the Eocene series, and therefore intervenes between the
Bridger below and the White-River above. The faunz of the last-
named horizons are tolerably well known, while for the Brown’s Park
series we have had to depend hitherto on the exceedingly unsatisfactory
descriptions published by Marsh many years ago. The formation has,
so far as known, a limited geographical extent, occurring at the south
base of the Uinta Mountains in N. E. Utah only. This location was
explored by the Princeton party under Professor W. B. Scott, whose
observations on the geology constitute the introduction to this memoir.
The paleontological part of the memoir is an excellent model of
what such a work ought to be, and the results are worthy of the care
bestowed on its preparation. The species observed are eleven in number,
which belong to as many genera. These areas follows: Quadrumana,
yopsodus ; Gres, Plesiarctomys ; Creodonta, Mesonyx and Miacis ;
Perissodactyla, Epihippus, Diplacodon, Isectolophus, Amynodon and
Triplopus ; Artiodactyla, Protoreodon and Leptotragulus. Of these
genera, Isectolophus, Protoreodon, and Leptotragulus*were discovered
by the Princeton expedition. Nothing of unusual novelty is stated
with regard to the species and genera of the Quadrumana, Glires, and
Creodonta, but the case is quite different with regard to the Ungulata,
Ancestral forms of later types are here most distinctly indicated, and
the authors must be congratulated on the important contribution they
have thus made to the doctrine of evolution. They show that Epihip-
pus stands in the line of the horses, as asserted by Marsh, but, unlike
that author, they satisfactorily demonstrate that it intervenes between
Pliolophus and Anchitherium. They also show that Diplacodon is
the ancestor of the varied forms of the Menodontidz of the lower
Miocene, and the descendant of Palacosyops of the Bridger Eocene.
Isectolophus is proven to be the parent of the tapirs, connecting that
} The Mammalia of the Uinta Formation.
lations, and Part II., the Creodonta, Rodenti i a s
IL, The Perissodactyla, and Part IV., The Evolution of the Ungulate Foot, by H. F.
Transactions of the American Philosophical Society, Philadelphia, 1889, Vol.
XVI., p. 461; pl. V.; p. 112. aiy
1890.] Geology and Paleontology. 471
type with Systemodon, through some intermediate forms, as suggested
by the present writer.? Amynodon is fully elucidated as far as cranial
structure goes, and its relation to the primitive rhinoceroses pointed
out. A new Triplopus (T. obliquidens S. & O.) is described, which is
of larger size than the 7. cubitalis of the Bridger, and the knowledge
of the character of the genus is increased. Protoreodon S. & O. is of
especial interest. It is essentially an Oreodont with the fifth crescent
(metaconule) of the superior molar present as in the Eocene Artio-
dactyla generally. It is so much like Oreodon in other respects as to
indicate its place as ancestral to that form, and it adds one more piece
of evidence to sustain the view that the tetraselenodont forms are the
descendants of the pentaselenodont Artiodactyla. The Pvrotoreodon
parvus S. &, O. was an animal about the size of a raccoon. Lepto-
' tragulus is an equally interesting form, since it supplies the hitherto
missing ancestor of Poébrotherium. It is tetraselenodont, and differs
chiefly from the latter and later genus in the freedom of the ulna and
radius from each other. Thus the genera of Ungulata of this forma-
tion extend the phylogenetic lines by one period backwards, or they
fill gaps hypothetically awaiting occupation.
The chapter on the evolution of the Ungulate foot, by Prof. Osborn,
handles the subject in a masterly way. The author admits the funda-
mental propriety of the system proposed by Cope, but takes some ex-
ception to an application of it in detail in certain directions. The
exception on which most stress is laid is the fact that in the equine
line, after the development of diplarthry in the posterior foot, a ten-
dency to revert to taxeopody appears. Prof. Osborn states that the
above-mentioned system becomes here ‘‘ not strictly applicable ; ” but
as he has not demonstrated a return to absolute taxeopody, and as he
admits the fundamental conformity of the system to nature, the objec-
tion cannot be said to have much weight. The condition in Equus
shows only the effect of the increased dimensions of the median digit
and the corresponding elements of the second tarsal row, to which the
first tarsal row does not fully correspond.
Prof. Osborn also objects to Cope’s theory of the origin of diplarthry
by torsion, stating with reason that were this the only movement, the
metarso-tarsal articulation cannot be accounted for. In other words,
were the tarsus and carpus to be rotated externally on the metatarsus
and metacarpus," dislocation of their articulation would take place.
Prof. Osborn called my attention verbally to this point, and as I had
not previously considered it, I supplied what I thought to be an ade-
2 Article Perissodactyla, AMER. NATURALIST, 1887, December.
472 The American Naturalist. [May,
quate explanation in my late memoir in Zhe American Journal of
Morphology.8 This was based on the fact already recorded by Allen
in his analysis of the Muybridge photographs, that in recover the
weight is borne on the inner edge of the foot, and therefore on the
external sides of the heads of the metapodials, I did not then state
with sufficient clearness what I now add, that the external torsion of
the lower leg concerned in producing diplarthry is that which occurs, as
I have pointed out, at recover, and it is therefore coincident in time
with the transfer of the weight to the inner side of the foot, so that
both strains occur togéther, and so dislocation cannot occur. In
rapid movement, when the torsion-strain is most energetic, all the
strains will be nearly contemporaneous ; while in slow movements the
torsion on plantation will be distinct, if existing, of which there is |
some doubt. Thus is directed and located the growth-energy, to which
Prof. Osborn appeals as a sufficient explanation of the phenomenon
of diplarthry.
The authors in a few instances, through some oversight, have mis-
stated the opinions of the present reviewer. Thus Prof. Scott cites
him as having regarded the genera Amynodon and Metamynodon as
identical. This he has not done, as can be seen by his systematic de-
scriptions of the two genera in ‘‘ The Perissodactyla,’’ (NATURALIST,
1887, P. 993). Prof. Osborn quotes my earlier Acie of Deis 2
that Triplopus is in the phylum of the rhinoceroses, ts to
mention the modified view expressed in ‘‘ The nis F T.
that it is in the line of Hyracodon, and at one side of the rhinoceroses.
The slender legs of the known species of this genus are, however, not
to be regarded as a generic character, as is done by Osborn, and a
‘stout-legged Triplopus is by no means an impossibility, Finally,
Osborn accuses me of regarding carpal and tarsal displacement as
having preceded in time digital reduction, because I stated that one
consequence of displacement had been the loss of the inner digit. This
accusation is quite inexcusable, as I have never thought it necessary to
express any opinion on the subject. Phenacodus (with which I am
somewhat familiar) shows that reduction preceded displacement, to
say nothing of Hyrax, cited by Osborn. Reduction f:llowed disuse,
and it is only the inner digit that has suffered finally through displace-
ment.—E. D. Cope.
Note on the Pelvis of Cumnoria (Camptosaurus),—In a
recent examination of Mr. Lydekker’s admirable volume on vertebrate
paleontology, I was struck with the conspicuous perpetuation of an
* On the Mechanical Origin of the Hard Parts of the Mammalia, 1889, p. 171.
1890.] Botany. 473
error which should have been corrected before now. On page 1152,
referring to the Ornithopoda he says: ‘‘ The ilium generally has its
preacetabular process much elongated, although this is not the case in
the type of Camptosaurus ;’’ and on page 1158, ‘‘ The posterior por-
tion of the ilium of this species [/gwanodon fittont | is indeed almost
indistinguishable from that of Camptosaurus.” If one will compare
the figure of the pelvis of Camptosaurus dispar on page 1153 with that
of Jguanodon dawsoni on page 1158, he will be struck with the strong
resemblance throughout, except of the anterior portion of the ilium.”
The fact is that the figure of the former is wrong. The anterior por-
tion of the ilium of the type had been broken off and weathered, indi-
cations of which are distinctly seen in the specimen. Prof. Marsh ha
this demonstrated to him more than five years ago, and there are other
ilia in the Yale Museum in which this process is complete. It is to be
hoped that this figure will be banished from text-books in the future,
and that no new genus will be made on the supposition that the process
is wanting.—S. W. WILLISTON.
BOTANY.
The Assimilation of Carbon by Green Plants from Certain
Organic Compounds.—Under this title Mr. E. Hamilton Acton
publishes in the Proceedings of the Royal Society (Vol. XLVII., p.
150) the results of ah interesting series of experiments made by him
to determine whether it can be produced in the assimilating cells of
green plants when supplied with certain organic compounds, in the
absence of carbon dioxide from the air. The following summary will
give the essential parts of the paper.
The apparatus used consisted of a tall bell-jar, perforated at the top,
and accurately ground at the bottom. Into the top an india-rubber
stopper was accurately fitted, and through this were passed two bent
glass tubes, each leading to a U tube filled with soda-lime. Inside of
the bell-jar were placed a glass culture cylinder, a small dish of soda-
lime, a couple of dishes of water, and a test-tube filled with a solution
of caustic potash, The bell-jar was set upon a glass plate, and the
contact was rendered air-tight by the use of a mixture of vaseline,
résin and beeswax.
474 The American Naturalist. [May,
A normal “culture solution’ was prepared with the following
composition :
Potassium nitrate(KNO,).....- - 0.15 grams.
Magnesium chloride (MgCl,). . - . . Gio
Calcium phosphate (Ca,(PO,),). - . .9.05 “
Ferrous sulphate (FeSO,). ....- 0.025 ‘
Calcium sulphate (CaSO,). - ...- - aso o 7
Water (Gites) u o a aoa A 100. n
This was placed in the culture cylinder, and to this were added the
organic compounds experimented with. The plants used were either
cut branches, or plants with roots, and these were supported by a cork
in the mouth of the culture cylinder, in the usual way. Application
of the organic compound were also made directly to the surfaces of
the leaves of plants.
The plants used were first deprived of all their starch, either (a) by
being placed in the dark for a sufficient length of time, or (b) by
being placed under the bell-jar described above, where, having no
access to carbon dioxide, the same result was obtained with greater con-
venience. After such preparation they were placed in the culture solu-
tion, to which an organic compound had been added. On exposure
to light in some cases starch was formed, although all access of carbon
dioxide was cut off,thus proving that the plants formed starch by con-
version of the organic compounds. The results were as follows :
1. Neither acrolein nor acrolein ammonia (C,H,NO) were used by
the plants. No starch whatever was form
2. With allyl alcohol (C,H,O) similar soit were obtained.
3- With glucose (one per cent. solution) starch was produced in
every instance.
4. With aldehyde no starch was formed.
5. With weak solution (0.05 to ro per cent.) of pure glycerine
starch was invariably formed.
6. With levulinic acid no starch was formed.
7. With pure cane sugar starch was invariably formed.
8. With dextrine no starch was formed.
g. With inulin starch was formed.
to. With ‘soluble starch’’! the cut branches formed starch, but
those supplied with roots did not.
11. With glycogen no starch was formed.
1Soluble starch was by rubbing
ee piney pouring it into 0an ee of boi kelisa ube gaa C aa
ing, gh paper, and diluted toa strength of about
1890.] Botany. 475
12. With an extract of natural humus starch was formed in small
quantities, in the case of rooted plants; in other cases no starch was
was formed.
13. With the humus-like product obtained by the action of alka-
lies on cane sugar, no starch was formed.
The plants used were chiefly Acer pseudoplatanus, Phaseolus vulgaris,
Ranunculus acris, Cheiranthus cheiri, Tilia europea, Alisma plantago,
Scrophularia aquatica, Quercus robur, Campanula glomerata, Euphorbia
helioscopia, Lilium candidum.
e author concludes: ‘‘ That green plants cannot normally obtain
carbon for ‘assimilation’ from any substances except carbohydrates,
or bodies closely related to them, not from aldehydes or their deriva-
tives, and not from all carbohydrates even.” ‘‘Thata compound may
be a source of carbon when supplied to the leaves, but not when sup-
plied to the roots, and vice versa.”
The Yellow Water Crowfoot.—This common plant of the eas-
tern half of the continent, known hitherto under the name of Ranuncu-
tus multifidus may have to bear the name of Ranunculus lacustris, given
it by Beck and Tracy in the third edition of Eaton’s Manual (1822).
Professor Greene, in a recent number of Pittonia, points out the fact
that this name appears to have priority. He also calls attention to the
fact ‘‘ that no one has yet stated whether 2. /acustris be annual or per-
ennial,’’ saying farther that “ probably nobody knows.”’
It probably lives for about a year. The seedlings appear late in the
autumn along the banks, and on the bottoms of dried up pools, ready
to make an early growth in the following Spring. I have never found
any evidence of the full grown plants lasting through the winter. Pos-
sibly they may do so, in exceptionally mild winters, as is indeed the
case with many other plants.—Cuar.es E. BESSEY.
Atlas of French Plants.—Some months ago the first number of
an important work by A. Masclef, was brought out by a Paris publish-
ing house (Klincksieck,) under the title “ Atlas des Plantes de France,
utiles, nuisibles et ornamentales.’’ When complete it will include two
hundred colored plates, and about three hundred and fifty pages of
text, at a cost of fifty francs. The pages and plates are of octavo size,
and the latter are very well done. The work will prove a valuable one,
especially to experiment station workers.
The Characez of Germany.—The fifth volume of the new edi-
tion of Rabenhorst’s ‘‘ Kryptogamen-Flora von Deutschland, Oester-
reich und der Schweiz,” is to be devoted to the Characee. The work
476 The American Naturalist. [May,
is in the hands of Dr. W. Migula, of Karlsruhe, and promises to be of
great interest and value. Parts I. and II., which have appeared since
the first of the present year, are largely devoted to a discussion of gen-
eral matters. In part II. we have an outline of Dr. Migula’s system of
classification as applied to the Characeze. He insists npon their isola-
ted position in the vegetable kingdom, and proposes the name Charo-
phyta for the group, which contains about one hundred and fifty species
(and subspecies) in the whole world. These are distributed among six
genera, which in turn fall into two sub-families.
CHAROPHYTA,
Family Characez.—1. Sub-Family Nitellee.—Gen., Nitella and
Tolypella.
2. Sub-Family Chareze.—Gen., TZolypelopsis, Lamprothamnus, Lychno-
thamnus and Chara.
The German species of JVite//a number thirteen, nearly all of which
are described by the end of Part III. lately received. Good illustrations
accompany the full text, and thus give us a most usefu' work.
ZOOLOGY.
Hoplophoria coralligens.—Is a new Actinian from the Bahamas,
described by Dr. H. V. Wilson.1 Only a single specimen was found.
In general structure it was on the ordinary Hexactinian type. The
mesenterial filaments were typical, and there were no acontia. The spe-
cimen was a female, with ovaries developed on but four mesenteries
belonging to the primary cycle. Just beneath the circle of tentacles
are four large organs which are diverticula of the gastrovascular space,
and which are stinging weapons. These structures are not modified
tentacles, but are homologised with the marginal sacs (randasckchen )
which were formerly regarded as eyes in many Actinians. Hoplo-
phoria is regarded as a member of the Antheade, in which, besides the
points enumerated above, only the six primary mesenteries reach the
cesophagus.
1 Studies from the Biol. Lab., Johns Hopkins Univ., IV., p. 379, 1890.
1890.] Zoology. 477
Dinophilus.—S. F. Harmer describes the anatomy of D. teniatus.”
The animal has two circles of preoral cilia, while each of the five body
segments bears two similar circles, interrupted by the uniform ciliation
of the ventral surface. The large brain nearly fills the preoral lobe,
while the cesophageal commissures connect it with the widely separa-
ted ventral cords. These latter lie just outside the basement membrane
of the skin, and are provided with five ganglionic swellings. The
paired eyes are on the top of the brain ; each consists of a pigmented
sac filled with a clear substance. Below them is a pair of small sacs
opening to the mouth, and innervated from the cesophageal cords. The
mouth is ventral; the oblique cesophagus receives the ducts of the sali-
vary glands and terminates in the large stomach, This latter is pro-
long behind into a dorsal caecum, while below it communicates with
the intestine. The anus is just above the tail. The body cavity is
but slightly developed. Five pairs of nephridia are present, the hinder
pair being converted in the male into vesiculz seminales. In the
young the testes consist of a couple of ventral bands, but in the adult
these are enlarged and united both anteriorly and posteriorly. The
ovaries are four-lobed. A penis is present, and Harmer has witnessed
copulation. Harmer agrees with most observers in regarding Dino-
philus as one of the Archianellida. This species is about 2 mm. long,
orange in color, and occurred in tide pools at Plymouth, England.
Specimens were abundant April 18th. None could be found June 26th.
Note on an American Species of Phreoryctus.—The
family Phreoryctide is composed, as heretofore known, of one genus,
containing three species of long and slender oligochzte worms, two of
which have been reported from the continent of Europe? and one
from New Zealand.‘ In Germany, one of the species, P. menkeanus,
_has occurred quite frequently in the water of deep wells. In America
this family seems to have escaped observation, as has been already re-
marked, in fact, by Dr. Minot, in his article on Vermes in the San-
dard Natural History. Recent observations here show, however, that
the species is an inhabitant of the subterranean waters of this
region; and I have been fortunate enough to obtain three examples
from a farm drain, where the tile was stopped by an ingrowth of the
roots of trees.
2 Jour. Marine Biol. Assn., United Kingdom, No. 2., p. 119. 1889.
3 See Vejdovsky, “ System und Morphologie der Oligochaeten,” pp. 48-50.
4“ On the Reproductive Organs of Phreoryctus.” By Frank E. Beddard, M.A., Ann.
Mag. Nat. Hist., Ser. 6, Vol. I., No. 6 (June, 1888), p. 389.
478 The American Naturalist. [May,
This new form is clearly a species undescribed, distinguishable at
once from the others by the lack of dorsal sete on all but the anterior
segments of the body. The ventral setz, on the other hand, are very
large and stout, with strongly hooked tips,—diminishing in size near
the two ends of the body.
The following description will serve to identify the species.
Phreoryctus emissarius, n. s.
A very long and slender worm, six to eight inches, or more, in
length (in alcohol), by .6 to .7 mm. in diameter,—the segmentation
very distinct, the color pale red, the cuticle highly iridescent. The
cephalic lobe is separated from the first segment by a rather deep
lateral constriction. It is broadly rounded in front, and about two-
thirds as wide as long. I do not see the transverse division of this
lobe remarked by Vejdovsky and Beddard in the other species. Seg-
ments nearly quadrate, four hundred or more in number. (An im-
perfect specimen contained three hundred and seventy-five.) Sete
single, acute, the first segment with two very small ventral and no .
orsal ones. Four rows on the following segments to the eightieth or
ninetieth; on the remainder of the body only two rows, the dorsal
setæ disappearing. The last of this series become very minute and
variable, and are frequently wanting on here and there a segment pre-
ceding the last that bears them. The ventral sete are very large and
long, and strongly hooked, but diminish in size at the two ends of the
body. They project into the ccelom, when retracted, a distance equal
to two-thirds the whole diameter of the worm.
Two longitudinal blood vessels, both closely applied to the alimen-
tary canal, one dorsal and one ventral, the dorsal one contractile. A
pair of long contorted vascular arches in each segment, extending
loop-like into the ventral ccelom, below the sub-intestinal vessel.
Nephridia, a pair to each segment, opening upon the surface a short
distance čz front of the ventral setz.
Champaign, IIl., April 14, 1890. S. A. FORBES. ~
Sea-Urchin Excavations at Guaymas, Mexico.—Since the
publication of my paper [NaTurauist, Jan., 1890] on sea-urchin ex-
cavations, I have received a letter from Prof. F. W. Cragin, of Wash-
burn College, Topeka, Kansas, from which I make the following
quotations :
“Du a short stay at Guaymas, Mexico, in the winter of 1882-
8, I collected for Washburn College a considerable number of sea-
urchins of two species, of which you afterwards sent me the names
1890.] Zoölogy. 479
[based on examination of examples of each which I submitted to you]
which are Echinometra vanbrunti A. Ag., and Cidaris thouarsii
Val. These were all collected on the sides of a great open sea-cave in
the face of a beetling cliff in the outer portion of Guaymas Harbor,
„and were taken without exception, so far as I now remember, from
holes in the solid rock. This was my first knowledge of the rock-
boring habit of sea-urchins ; but as I supposed the habit to be general
with these species, and the matters of my observation to be well-known
to all other naturalists, I did not venture to publish it. One fact which
I observed, however, seems to me to be at variance with one of your
conclusions. In collecting the urchins, I soon learned that if I wished
to extract the specimens without injury to themselves, or, in case of the
Echinometra, to avoid total failure, made more pointed by pricking my*
fingers, I must make up my mind in advance just how to seize them to
best advantage and then to withdraw them quickly. If I was awkward
or slow in any case, or hesitated and took a fresh hold from pricking
my fingers, the Echinoderms took occasion to ‘‘set’’ a multitude of
spines against the walls of their ‘‘ geode,” and, thus braced, could
usually defy further efforts to remove them, save by such harsh means
as fractured the bodies of the animals. I am therefore constrained to
believe that on being disturbed by the violence of tide and storm-
waves, to which they are here greatly exposed, they would set the spines,
as they do in a case of human interference, It would certainly then
be a rare thing that the action of the water should move them, though
it is obvious that if it did succeed in moving one or more of its spines
a little, the mutual erosion of spine and rock would be greater than if
the spines were not braced. It seems to me, therefore, that very little
erosion, so far as the action of the spines is concerned, would be caused
by the sea-urchin washing about in the geode, but that the wear pro-
duced by the spines, and on the spines themselves, would be due to
what might be called the walking of the spines; that is, the removing
of aspine here and there from its position to such new positions as
circumstances demanded. That certain of the spines are so used and
become somewhat worn in the case of the two species above men-
tioned, is possibly indicated by the fact that some of them are obliquely
truncated ; yet the truncated end seems to be hardly smooth enough for
a worn surface, and is perhaps asurface of fracture. Many of the spines
have the tip perfect, but it is noticeable that in the Cidaris, whose
spines are usually incrusted with species of Serpula and Spirorbis, the
tip of the spine is bare or nearly so, and in some instances appears to
have been worn bare. The rock in which the excavations were made
480 The American Naturalist. [May,
was very hard, igneous or metamorphic, I think, though I took no note
of its lithologic character.”’
The above quotation is interesting as giving a new location for seai
urchin excavations, although A. Agassiz has already mentioned the
rock excavations made by the same species at Panama.
Sea-urchin excavations near San Diego, California, have also been
called to my attention by Dr. Cleveland and Mrs, R. S. Eigenmann,
and an account of the same from near the Santa Barbara Islands was
given me by a fisherman.
A. Agassiz says: “On the coast of California the common Strongy-
locentrotus purpuratus occurs in the same way [as in the Azores,— in
cavities dug out of the solid rock,]; we find long tracts of the shore,
where this sea-urchin is common, completely honey-combed and pitted
by cavities and depressions, in which they seek shelter against the
powerful surf continually beating against the rocks. The same species
does not excavate in sheltered places, where sea-urchins can find pro-
tection between the interstices of large fragments of rocks, or ledges
more or less sheltered from the direct action of the open sea.” [Re-
vision of the Echini, p. 706.] It would seem that these excavations
are not uncommon to the west coast of North America, although very
few definite localities where they occur have up to the present time
been recorded.
As the author desires to gather information in regard to the distribu-
tion of sea-urchin excavations, and the extension or limitation of the
habit among genera and species of the Echinoidea, he desires to cor-
species of sea-urchins which make the excavation, the kind of rock
excavated, and peculiar circumstance connected with the species,
Boston, Mass., April gth, Z8go. J. WALTER FEwKEs.
centrum in a transverse direction, and are continued by a rodlike bone
Just below this is a second delicate bony thread.
In the caudal region the processes and their continuation dimfnish,
while the ventral thread becomes larger and forms the hzemal arch.
1890.] Zoology. 481
According to some the ventral bones are homologous with the ribs of
other fishes, while the dorsal rods are ‘ flesh bones.” According to
others exactly the reverse is true. As tests, Hatschek calls attention
to the fact that the muscles in the body of a vertebrate are divided
into dorsal (epiaxial) and ventral (hypaxial) portions. In the fishes
the ribs occur between the hypaxial portions and the somatopleur,
while the ribs of Batrachia and Amniotes are new structures lying be-
tween the epi- and hypaxial portions. In the body regions of these
forms the old fish ribs have disappeared, although they occasionally re-
appear in the caudal portion, old and new ribs coexisting together.
Applying this test of position to the structures seen in Polypterus it is
seen that the first view is the correct one, the dorsal half being the new
or Batrachian rib. In Batrachia and Amniotes the rib articulates
with the vertebral centrum by two articular processes which primitively
represent a forked proximal extremity. Gétte found that the rib in
its development consisted of dorsal and ventral portions, which dis-
tally grow together while proximally they remain forked. Wieder-
sheim compared only the lower portion with the ganoid rib, and re-
garded the dorsal portion as a new structure. This seems to be nega-
tived by the conditions found in the Batrachian tail. Hatschek farther
concludes that the vertebrate skeleton should be divided into somatic
and visceral portions, and that the former should be further subdivided
into axial, dermal, and septal portions, the latter embracing the por-
tions arising in the myosepta.
The Families of Ribbon-fishes,—In the American NATURAL-
ist for January, 1887 (Vol. XXI., p. 86), I have given a diagnosis of
the Tzeniosomi. We have now the data for determining the common
and comparative characters of the best known and only certain represen-
tatives of the suborder. For the Regalecidz Prof. Parker’s valuable
Memoir (T. Z. S., Vol. XII., pt. 1), and for the Trachypteride, a
lately published monograph by Alexander Week (Studies Mus. Zool.,
Univ. Dundee, Vol. I., pt. 6), furnish the requisite information.
The differences between the two families are greater than would have
been anticipated, and necessitate a revision of the diagnosis of the
suborder. The characteristics may now be expressed in the following
terms :
TÆNIOSOMI.
Teleocephals with the scapular arch subnormal, posttemporal un-
divided and closely applied to the back of the cranium, bétween the
epiotic and pterotic, or upon the parietal ; hypercoracoid perforate at
Am. Nat.—May—6
| 482 The American Naturalist. [May,
or near the margin ; cranium with the epiotics enlarged, encroaching
backward and juxtaposed behind, intervening between the exocci-
pitals and supraoccipatal; prootic and opisthotic represented chiefly
by the enlarged prootic ; the suborbital chain imperfect ; the copular
bones separated by intervening cartilaginous elements; the hypo-
pharyngeals styliform and parallel with the branchial arches, epi-
_pharyngeals in full number (4 pairs), and mostly compressed ; the
orsal fin composed of inarticulate rays or spines, separable into
lateral halves, and the ventrals (when present) sub-brachial.
myodome may be present or absent, none being developed in the
Regalecidz, but one being distinct and supplemented. by a dichost in
the Trachypteride, The families may be briefly differentiated as
follows :
TRACHYPTERIDA.
Teniosomes with the body moderately elongated and very com-
pressed, the head short, the opercular apparatus abbreviated (the
REGALECIDÆ.
Tæniosomes with the body very elongated and compressed, the head
oblong, the opercular apparatus well developed (the operculum ex-
tended backwards, the suboperculum obliquely behind it, and the
interoperculum extended upwards below the two), the preorbital chain
oblique and widest at the second bones, yentrals represented by single
elongate rays, the cranium with the myodome atrophied, and the
dichost suppressed, the supraoccipital pushed forward by the extensive
development of the epiotics which encroach forwards on the roof as
well as back and sides of the cranium, and with short ribs.—Turo.
N. Git.
The Genera of the Podocnemididz.—Through the kindness
of Prof. R. Hertwig, of Munich, I have received the skull and cerv-
icals of two specimens of the type of Emys tracaxa Spix. for exam-
ination. I am now able to give the characters of the known genera
of the Podocnemididz. Boulenger considers Emys tracaxa Spix.
the type of Peltocephalus Dum. & Bibr., and Dumerilia madagascar-
1890.] : Zoology. 483
iensis Grandid., the type of my Erymnochelys, generically the same
as Podocnemis.
The genus Dumerilia was established by Grandidier, but since
this name had been used different times before, I introduced the name
Erymn ochelys (Zool. Anz., No. 285, 1888.) After this, Boulenger
claimed that Erymnochelys mihi (Dumerilia, Grandid.) was a synonym
of Podocnemis. In No. 296 of the Zool. Anz., 1888, I gave the
generic characters which distinguish Erymnochelys from Podocnemis.
I said in Erymnochelys the jugal is in extensive connection with the
quadrate ; this connection is absent in Podocnemis ; in Erymnochelys
the prefrontals are produced in front and without median groove ; the
cervical vertebrz form single condyles. In Podocnemis saddle-shaped
vertebrz, as in birds, are present.
In the general shape of the skull Peltocephalus resembles Macro-
chelys ; Peltocephalus is in the same relation to Erymnochelys, as
Macrochelys to Chelydra. Morphologically the skulls of Erymnochelys
and Peltocephalus are very much alike; but Peltocephalus has the
saddle-shaped cervicals of Podocnemis,
The atlas of Podocnemis is entirely different from that of Pelto-
cephalus and Erymnochelys. In Podocnemis the first intercentrum is
small and free. In Erymnochelys and Peltocephalus it is large and
internally united with the neuroids and the centrum of the atlas.
I give now a table of the characters of the three genera:
i Podocnemis, Wagler.
Jugal and quadrate bones separated ; articular faces of anterior cer-
vicals saddle-shaped ; first intercentrum small and free. Type:
expansa, Schweigg.
Peltocephalus, Dum. and Bib.
Jugal and quadrate in contact ; articular faces of anterior cervical
saddle-shaped ; first intercentrum large and suturally united with neur-
oids and centrum of atlas. Interparietal shield triangular with base
behind. Type: P. tracaxa, Spix.
Erymnochelys, Baur.
Jugal and quadrate in contact ; articular faces of cervicals not sad-
dle-shaped ; first intercentrum large and suturally united with neuroids
and centrum of atlas. Interparietal shield triangular with base in
front. Tpye: Æ. madagascariensis, Grand
Note.—The condition of the atlas in Peltocephalus and Erymno-
chelys, must be considered as one from which the condition seen in the
484 The American Naturalist. [May,
Pelomedusidz has been derived. In the Sternothzeridz (Pelomedusa,
Sternothzrus) there is no trace of a suture between intercentrum and the
centrum of the atlas. If the sutures of the atlas in Peltocephalus or
Erymnochelys would disappear, we would have the conditions of the
Sternotheride. | Erymnochelys and Peltocephalus agree with all
known Pleurodira in the fact that the centrum of the atlas supports
the neuroids; a condition never seen in the Cryptodira or Chilotz
(Tronychia). (Baur, Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist., July, 1889).—G.
Note on the Genera Hydraspis and Rhinemys.—Boulenger
accepts in his catalogue of Tortoises the genera Hydraspis and
Rhinemys. His genus Hydraspis contains seven species, A. hélarit,
H. tuberosa, H. geoffroyana, H. gibba, H. radiolata, H. rufipes, H.
wagleri.
His genus Rhinemys contains one species, 2A. nasuta.
Rhinemys is characterized: Neural plates present ; parietal bones
not expanded superiorly ; parieto-squamosal arch very slender,
Hydraspis: Neural plates present; parietal bones expanded su-
periorly ; parieto-squamosal arch strong.
The question is; first, can the name Hydraspis be adopted ; aud
second, is Hydraspis generically different from Rhinemys, Boulenger,
non Wagl.
1. Can the name Hydraspis be adopted ?
In 1811 Oppel! separated Æmys longicollis from Emys as a ‘‘ sub-
genus,’’ for which he gave the following diagnosis ; Collo longissimo,
subtestam arcuate reflexo, non fetractili; e.g., Æ /ongicollis, without
creating a new name
In 1828 Fitzinger ? established Chelodina for ‘‘ Emys longicollis und
consorten.” The type of Chelodina is therefore Æmys longicollis
Shaw.
Two years latter Bell? established the genus Hydraspis, with nine
species (p. 512), Testudo longicollis, which I consider the type; 7
galeata of Schoepff, T. planiceps Schoepff, Emys amazonica, E. viridis,
E. depressa, E. macrocephala, E. tracaxa, E. rufipes Spix.
Later on (p. 515) we find Hydraspis : sp. typ. H. galeata (Testudo
galeata Auct.) It is quite evident that Bell's Hydraspis is simply a
synonym of Fitzinger’s Chelodina, and has no right to existence.
1 Oppel, Michael, Die Ordnungen, Familien and Gattungen der Reptilien. Miinchen,
III,
2 Peige, L. J. Neue Klassification der Reptilien, Wien, 1826.
3 Zool. Journ., II., 1828.
1890.] Zoölogy. 485
In 1830 Wagler establishes the genera: Rhinemys, Hydromedusa,
Podocnemis, Platemys, Phrynops, Pelomedusa.
Rhinemys contains the species: Emys rufipes, Spix., Emys nasuta,
Schweigg, Emys radiolata, Spix., Emys, gibba, Schweigg. The type
of Rhinemys is n a de atte Schweigg. Itis now proper to examine
whether Am Spix., is generically different from Emys geoffroyana
Schweigg ; in othe? words, whether Phrynops is different from Rhine-
mys. Through the great kindness of Prof. R. Hertwig, of Munich, I
have received the skull of the type of Amys rufipes Spix. for examina-
tion. The skull is characterized by the very much expanded parietals,
which are twice as broad as the interorbital space.
In Lmys geoffroyana Schweigg, the type of Phrynops, the parietals
are not so much expanded, but in all other respects Phrynops agrees
with Rhinemys, and there can be no doubt that Phrynops is not differ-
ent generically from Rhinemys.
The type of Rhinemys Wagler is behind rufipes Spix; the other
species of Rhinemys are: RA. hilarit, Rh, tuberosa, Rh. geoffrayana,
Rh. gibba, Rh. seater i wagleri. Boulenger’s Hydraspis is there-*
fore synonym of Rhinem
2. Js Boulenger's Hess generically different from his Hydraspis?
In Rhinemys of Boulenger, with the single species RA. nasuta, the
parietals have become very slender; in other words the reduction,
which has already begun in some of the species of Rhinemys mihi
(Hydraspis, Blgr.) has increased. This, and also the slenderness of
the parieto-squamosal arch, is certainly no reason to distinguish this
form as generically different from the others. According to Boulenger
there are only four neural plates in his Rhinemys, six in his Hydraspis,
but the question is, whether the number is constant in Hydraspis ; the
number in Rhinemys rufipes and Rh. wagleri is not yet known. Of
course there is no doubt that if Boulenger’s Rhinemys should even
prove to be different generically from his Hydraspis, the name Rhi-
nemys could not be used, and another name must be given. I think
it best to consider Emys nasuta of Schweigg as a species of the
genus Rhinemys Wagler, as adjusted by me.
I give now the following synomy :
CHELODINA Fitz., 1826—-Hydraspis Bell, 1828.
Type Ch. longicollis Shaw.
Ruinemys Wagler, 1830-—-Phrynops Wagler, 1830-=Hydraspis
(Bigr.)+ Rhinemys (Blgr.), 1889.
Type, RA. rufipes, Spix.
—G. Baur, Ph.D,
=
486 — The American Naturalist. [May,
The Genera of the Cheloniidze.—Boulenger, in his Catalogue
of Tortoises, admits only two genera of Cheloniide—Chelone and
Thalassochelys. His genus Chelone includes Caretta or Eretmochelys,
Euchelys and Onychochelys. His Thalassochelys includes Lepido-
chelys, Colpochelys, Cephalochelys and Eremonia.
I have examined a great number of skulls and skeletons of Chelonii-
dæ in different museums, and have reached the following conclusions,
which partially at least have been published before:
1. Chelonia Brogn., 1799. Jour. des Sciences des Lettres et des A rts,
par A. L: Millin. Vol. V., 6, 1799.
Orbit formed by: Srefrontal, frontal, postfronto-orbital, jugal,
maxillary.
Maxillaries separated by vomer,
Descending processes of prefrontals in connection with palatines.
Number of peripheralia, 11 ; No. ro without connection with rib.
Type: Chelonia mydas L.
2. Caretta Ritgen, 1828. Eretmochelys, Fitz
Orbit formed by: prefrontal, frontal, postfronto-orbital, jugal,
maxillary.
Maxillaries separated by vomer.
gence processes of prefrontals without connection with pala-
cas of peripheralia, Ir; peripherale 9 without connection
with ri
Type: Caretta imbricata L.
3- Thalassochelys, Fitzinger, 1835.
Orbit formed by: prefrontal, oo jugal, maxillary.
Maxillaries in contact, not separated by vomer,
Descending processes of prefrontals in connection with palatines.
- Number of peripheralia, 11; ; peripherale 9 without connection
with rib.
Type: Zh. caretta L.
4. Lepidochelys (Fitzinger) Gray, Colpochelys Garman.
Orbit formed by: prefrontal, postfronto-orbital, jugal, maxillary.
Maxillaries separated by vomer
Descending processes of pieteahitadd without connection with pala-
tines,
Thalassochelys,
Type: Z. olivacea tcaci
Number of peripherlia, 1r or more; connection with ribs as in
y
1890.] Zoblogy. 487
Through the kindness of Dr. O. Boettger I have received a skull of
Lepidochelys olivacea, “from West Africa, for examination. Later I
found in the collection of the Smithsonian Institution a skull of a sea-
tortoise from Ventosa Bay, Mex., collected by Prof. Sumichrast, of the
same genus.
Lepidochelys olivacea Eschsch. is distinguished from Lepidochelys
(Colpochelys) empii Garman, by the very much more expande
pterygoids, and the large ectopterygoid processes. There are no ridges
on the alveolar surfaces of the upper jaw, and there is an indication
of a median keel at the symphysis of the lower jaw.
The specimens on which the genera Euchelys, Girard, and Ony-
chochelys, Gray, have been established I do not know, neither do I
know Gray’s genera, Cephalochelys and Eremonia. Chelonia depressa
Garman, which is considered by Boulenger as a synonym of Chelonia
mydas, Without indication of any reason whatever, a thing very often
repeated by Mr. Boulenger, does not belong to the genus Chelonia at
all. Through the kindness of Mr. Garman, I have examined the
type, which is represented by a stuffed specimen. The lower jaw has
a greatly developed hook very re like Lepidochelys Rempit.Garman,
but there is a median ridge on the symphysis, something like Lefido-
chelys olivacea Eschsch, Until the skull of this species is known, it is
impossible to decide whether it belongs to Thalassochelys, Lepido-
chelys, or, what I think probable, to a new genus.
Chelonia muitiscutata Kuhl is possibly an abnormal specimen of
Lepidochelys olivacea Eschsch. Kuhl described this species after a
specimen in Groningen. According to a letter kindly received from
Prof. Van Anhum (dated Nov. 21, 1887), none of the collections at
Groningen contain the original,
There is a great number of species of Cheloniida, which have been
described by different authors ; future examinations will show whether
these species are in existence or not. There is no doubt whatever
that the Chelonia from the Pacific is a different species from the
Atlantic; the skulls are the same, but there are great differences in
the form of the carapace. I have seen a great number of young
specimens of Chelonia collected by the Albatross on the Galapagos
Islands. These have 1—6 peculiar dermal plates between the margin-
alia and the infra-marginalia. I propose to call these plates sudmar-
ginals. It remains to be decided whether this species is the same as
Chelonia agassizii Boc., or not.—G. Baur, Ph.D
s
488 The American Naturalist. [May,
Zoological News.—Molluscs.—Garstang, in a catalogue of the
Nudibranchs of Plymouth, England,! gives many instances of the pro-
tective coloration of these forms. The author catalogues thirty-six
species, the whole making with the notes an admirable faunal list.
J. I. Peck describes? the anatomy and histology of the Pteropod
Cymbuliopsis calceola. The muscles, digestive organs, nervous system,
reproductive organs, nephridium, and heart were investigated. €
nephridium does not communicate with the pericardium, In the in-
dividual studied no penis was found, although the gonad was in female
cativity, and the receptaculum was full of spermatozoa.
Arthropods.—W. F. R. Wheldon thinks’ that the tendency of
zoee to develop their protective spines in one straight line, parallel
with the long axis of the body, is of no little advantage in aiding the
embryo to swim in astraight line, like men sculling in a narrow racing
boat.
G. C. Browne catalogues 4 sixteen species of Copepoda, collected at
Plymouth in 1888-89. The notes are largely synomymical.
Some interesting notes the on habits of Crustacea’ are worthy of notice.
Shrimps and prawns keep buried by day, and wander about by night ;
even those with the eyes extirpated show the same features. Crustacea
find their food almost exclusively by scent, while it seems probable that
they cannot see much, possibly not even each other. ‘To light and
shade, however, they are very sensitive. Certain crabs are fond of
decorating themselves with seaweed, etc. The crab takes a bit of
weed in its chelz and deliberately tears it across. He then puts one
end into his mouth, and after chewing it up, presumably to soften it,
takes it out in his chelz and rubs it firmly on his head or his legs until
it is caught by the peculiar curved hairs which cover them. If not
caught it is chewed again, and the process repeated. This is done by
night as well as by day, and specimens deprived of sight will clothe
themselves as do the others. It is noticeable that there isa marked
bilaterality in the arrangement of this ornamention. It does not ap-
pear that it is for concealment.
1 Jour. Marine Biol. Assn., No. 2, p. 173, 1889. :
? Studies Biol. Lab., Johns Hopkins Univ., IV., p. 335, 1890.
3 Jour, Marine Biol. Assn., No. 2, p. 169, 1889.
4 Ibid., p. 144, 1889.
5 Ibid., p. arr.
1890.] Embryology. 489
EMBRYOLOGY.
The Continuity of the Primary Matrix of the Scales and
the Actinotrichia of Teleosts.—In Batrachus tau, if transverse
sections are prepared from embryos a few days after hatching, it will
be found that a basement membrane underlies the whole of the epi-
dermis, as an extremely thin layer, This layer of ‘homogeneous matter
covers the entire larval fish, and is interposed between the organs of
mesoblastic origin and epiblast everywhere. In the fin folds there are
linear and parallel thickenings of this thin lamina of basement mem-
brane which eventually become the actinotrichia, as I have named the
primary fibrous rays of all fishes. The mesoblastic cells which aid in
developing the actinotrichia have a Uisposition to lengthen in a direc-
tion parallel to the latter.
The membrane over the rest of the body is continuous in Batrachus,
and doubtless represents the matrix of scales in other forms. Its con-
tinuity shows that the matrix of scales was probably originally contin-
uous in all fishes, and that the lateral bendings of the body in locomo-
tion have been in part the efficient cause of the segmentation of the
continuous layer, into, at first, oblique bands as in Callichthys, and
then into lozenge-shaped tesseræ. These bands doubtless conformed
in direction at first, in some cases, to the underlying muscle plates
Later secondary modifications introduced other complications.
This evidence is at any rate highly interesting as pointing to the
conclusion that the primary basis of the exoskeleton of fishes is con-
clusious, so as to form an unbroken cuticular investment of the entire
mesoblast.
It also affords striking confirmation of my hypothesis! that the
exoskeleton is to be traced phylogenetically to an uninterrupted cutic-
ular or basement membrane occupying the position of the mesogloea
in ccelenterates such as the Medusae and Hydroids.
Aggregations of this cuticular membrane constitute the basis of the
“cementum plates’ of the teeth of fishes, The ganoin and variously
modified enamel of ganoid scales is a derivative of the epidermis proper.
The cementum plates grade very gradually into the various types o
osteodentine, and into that form of dentine with ramifying tubules seen
in some ganoids and known as cosmin. Such aggregations or local
thickenings of the cementum have arisen in the first place as the con
1 A physiological theory of the calcification of the skeleton. Proc. Am. Philos. Soc.,
Vol. XXVI, 1880.
490 The American Naturalist. [May,
sequence of the local aggregation in groups, due to local stimulation,
of the underlying connective tissue cells.
The Teleosts accordingly still bear traces of having a great capacity
for developing the matrix of a protective dermal skeleton ; far greater
than in other types. In birds, mammals, reptiles, and batrachia, of a cor-
responding larval stage of development, the continuous cuticular or
basement membrane beneath the epidermis, is either entirel - wanting,
or is never developed except locally at relatively much later stages.
There is also evidence to show that with the progress of evolution
this primary superficial matrix has tended to be carried inward toward
the cartilage so as to form the membrane bones, particularly on the
head. Yet there are other regions where an engulfing of the superficial
subepidermal calcifications in membrane occurs during the life of the
individual. In the common sturgeon the preanal scales or scutes are
The continuous investment of the mesoblastic tissue of the larve of
recent scaleless Teleosts, such as Batrachus, by a structureless basement
membrane which can be identified with a true scale matrix shows how
persistently the armature of the Devonian types still tends to be inherited,
even by a form not developing true scales, It is probably a good
illustration of what Eimer means by his theory of ‘constitutional
impregnation,” or, as one might say, saturation with inherited tenden-
cies.
With the advent of the body-cavity, gut-pouches, and mesoblast of
triploblastic types, the mesogloea of the diploblastic type would be
divided, that is to say, some of the matrix would be deposited upon
the functionally inactive (in digestion) derivatives of the intestine, such
sion, determined by purely physiological agencies, therefore gives both
the matrix of the endoskeleton and that of the exoskeleton, The
the intestine, that such a deposit can take place,
-
1890.] Embryology. l 491
The actinotrichia are at first joined together by a thin cuticular
membrane; later, they separate more widely, and tne intervening
membrane between the actinotrichial fibres disappears. The latter
also are not round at first, but flattened, or oval in cross-section. Their
greatest diameter also corresponds to the direction of the plane of the
membrane of which they form a part.
To the proximal ends of the two rows of actinotrichia the fin muscles
Chimeroids. This insertion of the fin muscles, their serial action from
before backward, as well as the necessary undulatory motion of the tail
from before backward in the act of locomotion, must throw the fin folds
into a lateral undulatory motion from before backward. This undula-
tory motion would tend to favor the breaking of the cuticular membrane
under the epidermis of both sides of the fin into parallel threads, owing
to the short flexures into which its substance must be thrown, In this
way the genesis of the actinotrichia themselves may be traced to the
direct action of physical causes. The subsequent cross-fracturing of
the rays derived from a further development of the actinotrichia, I have
elsewhere proved to be due to the interaction of the organism and the
resistance offered by the surroundings to the motions of the fins. !
The thickness of the continuous subepidermal basement membrane in
Batrachus, also varies in a singular and suggestive way. It is decidedly
thicker on the dorsal aspect and on the upper portions of the sides of the
body, and thinnest on the ventral aspect whichis most protected in this
form, which, as is well known, lives by preference at the sea-bottom
resting on the mud.
In the earlier forms of fishes, such as Coccosteus, Mycterops, Pteras-
pis, Cephalaspis, etc., there was a tendency to form an unbroken dorsal
cephalic shield. This tendency is still preserved in the evolution of the
cranial plates of the sturgeon on the sides and top of the head,
. and is expressed on the body, in that the dorsal scutes are always the
first to be developed. The development of the cranial exoskeleton in
primitive forms, and in now existing types representing the latter,
therefore coincides with this early appearance of traces of the superficial
skeletal matrix in a subepidermal position on the dorsal aspect of the
head and body in the existing larve of unarmored forms, which
may be supposed to have lost such a defensive exoskeleton. The par-
allelism here pointed out is, at any rate, extremely suggestive, and if
capable of further demonstration will show how persistently an extremely
ancient character tends to be inherited. - Joun A. RYDER.
1 Proofs of the effects of Habitual use in the Modification of Aaaa Organisms. Proc.
Amer. Philos. Soc. Vol., XXVI., 1889.
492 The American Naturalist, [May,
MICROSCOPY.
Professor Butschli’s Experimental Imitation of Proto-
plasmic Movement.'—Professor Biitschli,of Heidelberg, has recently
made some extremely interesting observations upon a substance which
simulates in a remarkable way the appearance and movements of pro-
toplasm of an Amoeba, or of the plasmodium of Mycotozoa. He has
been kind enough to send to me some oil in a suitable condition for
use, with directions as to the exact details of the experiment. In my
laboratory, by following his directions, the movements described by
him have been observed in a satisfactory manner, In order to obtain
the best results some experience and care is requisite, and probably
cannot always be obtained by a single experiment, The subject is so
interesting, and so fitted for further investigation by all who have leis-
ure and taste for the study of the vital phenomena of the Protozoa, and
of living protoplasm in general, that I think it will be of advantage to
the readers of this journal to have Professor Biitschli’s directions, which
he has permitted me to publish, placed in their hands.—E. Ray LAN-
KESTER.
March, 1890.
HEIDELBERG, February 1st, 1890.
You have kindly asked me how I prepared the protoplasma-like drops
which I have described. As you yourself feel greatly interested in this
discovery, and presumably a like interest exists among other English
biologists and microscopists, I hasten to satisfy your desire, and to -
explain somewhat more fully the methods which I have described in a
previous publication.
As you well know already, I use in the preparation of these globules,
—showing protoplasma-like streaming,—ordinary olive oil. My first
experiments were made with a small quantity of olive oil, which had
been standing for a long time in my laboratory in a small bottle.
By some happy chance this oil had just the right properties which are
necessary for the success of the experiment, for not every sort of oil is
suitable. As far as my experience goes it tends to show that the
ordinary oil cannot be directly used, because it is too thin, or is per-
haps deficient in other qualities on which the success of the experiment
depends. In order, therefore, to prepare a suitable oil, I proceed in
the following manner: A medium-sized watch-glass, or flat dish, is
1From the Quarterly Journal of Microscopical Science, Vol. XXXI. April, 1899.
1890.] Microscopy. 493
filled with a thin layer of common olive oil, and is placed on a water-
bath or in a small cupboard, such as are used for imbedding in paraf-
fine, at a temperature of about 50° C. Under the influence of the
higher temperature the oil gradually loses its yellow color and becomes
thicker. The great point now is to select the right moment at which
the oil will have attained the proper degree of thickness and viscosity,
as also the other properties, which at present I am not able to define
more exactly, but on which much of the success seems to depend.
The exact moment can, however, only be found out by systematic
trials. After the oil has been thickening for three or four days, a tria
should be made with a drop of it in the manner described below
Should the drop not become finely vesiculate, and exhibit little or no
streaming, continue the heating process, and experiment again on the
following day. If the oil should become too thick it will form good,
frothy drops, but will scarcely show any streaming. In this case mix
it with a small quantity of ordinary olive oil, and thus render it more
liquid. If it has become much too thick it will form a good froth, but
the latter dissolves very rapidly in glycerine.
You see that the process to obtain the suitable oil is somewhat slow
but I do not at present know of any other method by which the resule
can be reached more quickly and surely.
To prepare the vesiculate drops I proceed in the following way : —
In a small agate mortar I grind a small quantity of pure dry carbonate
of potash (K,CO,) to a fine powder. I then breath on the salt
till it becomes slightly moist, and with a glass rod add to it a drop of
oil, mixing the two constituents to a thickish paste. The success of the
_ experiment depends, however, more upon the nature of the oil than -
upon the proportion of the oil and salt in this mixture. Then, with a
glass rod or a needle, I place a few drops of the paste, about the size of
a pin’s head or smaller, on a cover glass, the corners of which are sup-
ported by small pegs of soft paraffine. I then place on a slide a drop
of water, and put the cover-glass over this in such a manner that the
drops of paste are immersed in the water, but are not much compressed,
to which end the corners of the cover-glass have been supported by the
paraffine. The preparation is then placed in a deep chamber, and
remains there about twenty-four hours. The preparation is then
washed out with water by applying blotting-paper to one edge of the
cover-glass, and supplying water at the other edge from a capillary tube.
If the drops have turned out well, they will begin almost immediately
after this to move about rapidly, and change their shape continuously.
The water ons the cover-glass must now be displaced by glycerine,
494 | The American Naturalist. [May,
diluted with an equal bulk of water, and the drops will then exhibit a
vigorous streaming and forward movement, becoming gradually trans-
parent. The amceboid movements are generally more distinct if the
drops are somewhat compressed. If the drops do not show the stream-
ing movement. you may succeed in producing it by tapping the cover-
glass slightly, by applying gentle pressure, or sometimes by breaking
up the drops. For it seems as if at times incrustations were formed on
the surface of the drops which prevent or impede the streaming move-
ment, and which can, in part at least, be removed by the above-
mentioned manipulations.
It is especially interesting to see how fast and beautifully the drops
creep to and fro in water, or in half-diluted glycerine, even when they
are not compressed. The streaming movement, on the other hand, is
better seen if the drops are compressed, which may be done by insert-
ing under the cover-glass a piece of broken cover-glass of medium
thickness, and then removing the paraffine pegs. Then draw away the
liquid until the necessary pressure is obtained. This streaming move-
ment is better demonstrated twenty-four hours after the addition of the
glycerine, as the drops will then be thoroughly cleared and transparent.
Further, it is interesting to note that a Progression of the drops takes
place in the direction in which the streaming moves.
As this forward movement is rather slow in compressed drops, it is
necessary to use a micrometer ocular to satisfy one’s self of the advance.
Unfortunately the oils which I have prepared since my first experi-
ments do not move and stream so well or so rapidly as those I employed
then. The movement and streamirg show themselves much more
markedly and distinctly if they are examined on a warmed stage at a
temperature of 50° C. If you should be in a position at your demon-
strations to conduct the experiment at this temperature, the phenomena
will certainly be much more evident.
From the preceding description you will see that it will be necessary,
to obtain %ood results, to gradually get hold of the methods, and you
must not doubt the correctness of the. phenomena which I have described
if the first trials do not give the desired results.
At all events, you will have at first to make some experiments so
as to obtain an insight into the conditions and sort of phenomena,
but I do not doubt that you will succeed in observing the appearances
and in demonstrating them to others, though perhaps in not so vigorous
a degree as I might desire,
I have lately made some other trials to render olive oil suitable for
these experiments by heating it more rapidly. Although at present I
1890.] Archeology and Ethnology. 495
have no entirely reliable results, it seems to me that by heating ordinary
olive oil to 80°—go0° C. for twelve or twenty-four hours, a suitable
medium may be obtained.
Finally, I would like to remark that I am the last person to defend
the view that these drops, exhibiting protoplasma-like movements, are
directly comparable to protoplasm. Composed as they are of oil, their
substance is entirely different from protoplasm. They may be, how-
ever, compared with the latter, in my opinion, firstly with regard to
their structure, and secondly with regard to their movements. But as
the latter depend on the former, we may assume that the amceboid
movement of protoplasm itself depends on a corresponding physical
constitution,
These drops, too, resemble organisms inasmuch as they continue
for days to exhibit movements, due to internal causes, which depend
on their chemical and physical structure. I do not believe that up to
this time any substance has been artificially prepared which, in these
two points, viz., structure and movement, has so much resemblance to
the most simple forms of life as have these reticulated drops, I ho
therefore, that my discovery will be a first step towards ippica
the problem of life from the chemico-physical side, and towards passin g
from vague and general hypotheses of molecular constitution to the
surer ground of concrete conceptions of a chemical and physical nature.
It is, however, a special satisfaction to me to hear that in your coun-
try, which has given rise to so many and so celebrated men in biolog-
ical science, my investigations are followed with interest and sympathy.
With friendly greetings, I am yours sincerely,
O. BÜTSCHLI.
ARCHÆOLOGY AND ETHNOLOGY.
The Use of the Phonograph in the Study of the Languages
of the American Indians.—At the meeting of the American Folk-
Lore Society in Boston, on April roth, Dr. J. Walter Fewkes read a
paper on experiments which he had lately made with the phonograph
in recording the songs, legends, and folk-lore of the Passamaquoddy
Indians
The necessity for some means of accurately recording and preserv-
ing the languages of the Indians has lately been met by the invention
of the phonograph. This instrument has now been brought to such a
496 The American Naturalist. [May,
stage of perfection that it can be profitably used for that purpose.
Hitherto a source of error in recording aboriginal folk-tales has been
the liability of the translator to incorporate his own interpretations
with those embodied in the stories as heard by him, and, as a result,
erroneous interpretations have been introduced which it is difficult to
eradicate. In order that folk-lore, as far as applicable to aboriginal
races, may be placed on a scientific basis, an accurate record of the
story as told by the reciter is necessary. This can be accomplished by
the use of the phonograph, and the records thus made can be indefi-
nately preserved.
The essayist visited, for the purposes of study, a remnant of the
Passamaquoddy Indians near Calais, Maine, and obtained from some
of the older men many fragments of legends, stories, ancient songs,
country out rhymes and conversations, He also obtained from the lips
of Noel Josephs, who sang it when the ceremony was last performed,
an old song used in the ‘‘ Snake Dance.’’ The words of this song are
archaic and the music is said to be very ancient. He also took records
of war songs, a curious “‘ trade song,” and the song sung by the chief
on the evening of the first day of the celebration of his election.
These songs have been set to music from the records taken on the wax
cylinders of the phonograph, and the words have been written out by
€ same means. In several of the legends obtained by the use of
the phonograph, songs occur which are said by all the Indians to be
very ancient. Forty cylinders were filled with these records, some of
which are stories yet unpublished.
The results of this experiment have, it is claimed, shown that the
phonograph is an important help to the student of Indian folk-lore, not
only in preserving the tales, but also in an accurate study of the com-
position of the music and the language.
To indicate its value, the spelling of the words, as spoken by the
machine is found, to convey, as nearly as possible by phonetic methods,
the pronunciation of the Indian words. _
‘These studies of the Passamaquoddy language were undertaken as a
preliminary to a visit to the Zuni Indians for the purpose of working
out the archzological and ethnological results of the Hemenway Ex-
pedition. A more extensive account of these phonographic studies of
the Passamaquoddies will be published in the next number of the
Journal of American Lolk-Lore.—J. W. FEWKES.
1890. ] Proceedings of Scientific Societies. 497
PROCEEDINGS OF SCIENTIFIC SOCIETIES.
U. S. National Academy of Sciences.— The following papers
' were read at the meeting commencing April 1 5, 1890.
1. The effects of the inhalation of Nitrogen, Nitrous Oxide, Oxygen,
and Carbonic Acid upon the Circulation : with special reference to
the Nitrous Oxides, Anzesthesia and Asphyxia ; H. C, Wood, presented
by Dr. J. Billings. 2. On the Application of Interference Methods to
Astronomical Measurements, A. A. Michelson. 3- Physiognomy of the
American Tertiary Hemiptera, S. H. Scudder. 4. Totality of the
Eclipse of 1889, December 22, D. P. Todd. Presented by the Home
Secretary. 5. The Budding of Salpa considered in relation to the
Question of the Inheritance of Acquired Characters, W. K. Brooks.
6. Recent Advances Towards a Knowledge of the Fishes of the Great
Oceanic Depths, G. Brown Goode and Tarleton H. Bean. 7- A System
of Classification of Variable Stars, S. C. Chandler. 8. On the Spectrum
of Metals, H. A. Rowland. 9. On the Cheapest Light, S. P. Langley.
to. On the Relation of Secular Disintegration to certain Crystalline and
Transitional Schists, R. Pumpelly. 11. On the Structure of the Green
Mountains, R. Pumpelly. 12. The Interrelationships of the Ichthyop-
sida, Theo. Gill.
The following members were elected: George L. Goodale, Cam-
bridge, Mass. ; Russell H. Chittenden, New Haven, Conn. ; Thos, L.
Casey, Washington, D. C., and Richmond M. Smith, New York.
On the evening of Wednesday, April 16th, the Henry Draper
Medal was presented to Prof. H. A. Rowland, of Baltimore, Md.
Prof. S. P. Langley resigned the office of Vice President, to take
effect April 1, 1891.
Brookville, Indiana, Society of Natural History. —Annual
meeting March 28th, Mr. E. R. Quick in the chair. The following
officers were elected for the ensuing year:
President, C. W. McClure ; Vice-President, E. R. Quick; Secretary,
R. M. King; Corresponding Secretary, H. M. Stoops ; Treasurer, A.
W. Butler; Librarian, Edw. Hughes. Curators: Mammalogy, E. R.
Quick; Botany, O. M. Meyncke; Ornithology, A. W. Butler ; En-
tomology, C. W. McClure ; Geology, C. F. Goodwin ; Mineralogy, .
G. R. King ; Archeology, H. M. Stoops ; Icthyology and Herpetology, |
Joeph Fieber.
. Nat.—May.—7.
498 The American Naturalist. [May,
C. W. McClure presented a paper on “ The Ox Worble,’’ with es-
pecial reference to the damage it does by spoiling the hides of cattle
in this vicinity. E. R. Quick read a paper on ‘‘ Rats.” He gave the
date of the appearance of the common rat, as near as could be ascer-
tained, in this vicinity, noted some of their habits, and gave special at-
tention to the appearance of these animals within the past winter in.
unusual numbers at many points in the Ohio Valley. The following
subjects were also presented by C. W. McClure, ‘* The Early Bloom-
ing of Flowers,’’ and “The Hibernation of Water Snakes (Trop.
sipedon). By Edw. Hughes, “On the Occurrence of Lyla pickeringii
and Chorophilus triseriatus in Franklin County, Indiana.” By E. R.
Quick, *‘ Notes on the Breeding Habits of Hyla versicolor.”
SCIENTIFIC NEWS.
Edmond Hébert.—Died April 4th, 1890, Edmond Hébert, Pro-
fessor of Geology in the Sorbonne, Dean of the Scientific Faculty of
Paris, and member of the Institute of France. Prof. Hébert was three
times President of the Geological Society of France, and was the first
President of the International Congress of Geologists. He was born at
Villefargeau, near Auxerre, and his father was a soldier of the republic
and of the empire. Hébert was the most accomplished stratigraphic
geologist of France, and perhaps of Europe, especially in the Cænozoic
and Mesozoic departments. He was the author of many important
papers and memoirs. He was aman of much energy and also ami-
ability of character, traits which were exhibited in his personal appear-
ance and manners.
Sir Richard Owen was recently attacked by paralysis, a circumstance
which gave rise to premature reports of his death. At last accounts he
was slowly recovering, but at his advanced age his situation is regarded
as serious.
During this the third season the Marine Biological Laboratory will
have the following corps of instructors: Dr. C. O. Whitman, Director,
Howard Ayers, H. C. Bumpus, E. G. Gardiner, J. S. Kingsley, J.
Playfair McMurrich, W. M. Rankin, W. A. Setchell.
The laboratory is located on the coast at Wood’s Holl, near the
laboratories of the United States Fish Commission. It has added to
it this year a library, a lecture-room, and six more private laboratories.
1890.] Scientific News. 499
The building consists of two stories: the lower for students receiving
instruction, the upper exclusively for investigators. The laboratory
as aquaria supplied with running sea water, boats, collecting appar-
atus, and dredges; it will also be supplied with reagents, glassware,
and a limited number of microtomes and microscopes. By the muni-
ficence of friends the library will be provided henceforth not only with
the ordinary text-books and works of reference, but also with the more
important journals of zoology and botany, some of them in complete
series.
The laboratory for investigators will be open from June 2d to August
goth. It will be fully equipped with aquaria, glassware, reagents, etc.,
but microscopes and microtomes will not be provided. There are
fourteen private laboratories supplied with aquaria, running water,
etc., for the exclusive use of investigators who are invited to carry on
their researches here free of charge. Those who are prepared to begin
original work, but require supervision, special suggestions, criticism,
or extended instruction in technique, may occupy tables in the general
laboratory for investigators, paying ‘for the privileges a fee of fifty dol-
ars. The number of such tables is limited to ten. Applicants for
them should state precisely what they have done in preparation for
original work, and whether they can bring a complete outfit, viz. :
microscope, microtome, camera-lucida, etc.
The laboratory for students will be opened on Wednesday, July gth,
for regular courses of seven weeks in Marine Zoology and Botany, an
Microscopical Technique. It is desired that students owning micro-
scopes or microtomes should bring them, and applicants for admission
should state whether this requirement can be complied with. The fee
for workers in this department is twenty-five dollars, payable in ad-
vance. The number of students will be limited to thirty, and prefer-
ence will be given to teachers or others already qualified. By permis-
sion of the Director, students may begin their individual work as early
as June 15th, without extra charge, but the regular courses of instruc-
tion will not begin before July 9th. In addition to the regular courses
of instruction, consisting of lectures and laboratory work under the
direct and constant supervision of the instructors, there will be two or
more courses of lectures on special subjects by members of the staff.
One such courses of six lectures will be given by Dr. McMurrich o on
the Hydrozoa. Similar courses on the Crustacea and Echinoderms wi
be given by Prof. Kingsley and Dr. Rankin. There will also be ten
or more evening lectures on biological subjects of general interest.
The first of these will be given by Dr. Whitman on July oth.
500 The American Naturalist. (May,
apioa for places in either department should be addressed to
illips, Secretary, 23 Marlborough Street, Boston.
aa a A two persons may be obtained near the lab-
oratory, at prices varying from $2.00 to $4.00 a week, and board from
$4.50 to $6.00. By special arrangement, board will be supplied to
members in the laboratory cottage at $5.50 a week. For information
in regard to rooms, inquiries may be addressed, after May 1st, to Mr.
H. C. Bumpus, M.B,L., Wood’s Holl, Mass.
THE
AMERICAN NATURALIST
VoL. XXIV. JUNE, 1890. 282.
THE CONCRESCENCE THEORY OF THE VERTE-
BRATE EMBRYO.
BY CHARLES-SEDGWICK MINOT.
T Reta article, and the one to follow, owe their form to the fact
that they have been written as chapters in my Treatise on
Human Embryology. As this work cannot be published for some
time to come, and as the chapters present certain views which
are fundamentally different from those currently received by em-
bryologists, I publish them separately. I believe that the right
understanding of the early development of vertebrates depends
upon the acceptance of Prof. Wilhelm His’s view of concrescence.
This view has not received the attention it deserves, for it is not
based upon elaborate reasoning, but upon the direct observation
of the process of concrescence in sundry vertebrates.
Incidentally it will appear that in my opinion neither Hert-
wig’s Ccelomtheorie, nor Rabl’s Theorie des Mesoderms, can
be maintained for vertebrates; both of these theories involve the
assumption that the vertebrate mesoderm arises as two lateral
masses. This is true of no vertebrate ; on the contrary there is prob-
ably hardly another fact in embryology so certainly established
by innumerable observations as the fact that the vertebrate meso-
derm arises as a single axial structure. It is only secondarily by
the down-growth of the medullary groove and the up-growth of
the notochord, that the mesoderm is divided by the meeting of
these structures into two lateral masses. As regards Rabl’s
502 The American Naturalist. [June,
theory of the double origin of the vertebrate mesoderm, I think
he would not have advanced that theory, had he not first fallen
into the error of rejecting Prof. His’s concrescence theory.!
That the fundamental difference between the mesothelium and
mesenchym involved in the Ccelomtheorie cannot be maintained
for vertebrates, I have pointed out elsewhere? This impossibility
has also been brought out afresh by the investigations of Bonnet,
Ziegler, Strahl, Rabl, and others.
As briefly indicated in my article on Segmentation of the Ovum
(AMERICAN NATURALIST, 1889, June and September), the vertebrate
diaderm (stage with ectoderm and entoderm only), advances to
the next stage of development by the concrescence of the two
halves of the ectental line to form the structural axis of the future
embryo. The process is somewhat complex, and needs therefore
to be described in detail, the more so as it has still to be traced
in mammals.
Historical Note.—The earliest observations on concrescence to
form the embryonic axis are, so far as known to me, those of
Rathke on leeches? Nine years later, Kowalewski (Mem. Acad.
Sci SE Petersbourg, 7th Ser, XVI. 1871), recorded its occur-
rence among insects. Its recognition as a vertebrate mode of
development we owe to the brilliant investigations of W. His;
in his first paper, 26, he describes very accurately and clearly
the process of concrescence in the salmon; in his second paper,
27, he describes concrescence in the sharks, and in his third
paper, 28, he discusses again the general bearing of his re-
sults. Semper in his great work on the relationship of annelids
and vertebrates, 54, was the first to make a direct comparison
of the processes of concrescence in annelids, insects, and verte-
brates. Unfortunately Balfour entirely failed to grasp the new
conception, and by expressing himself very decidedly against it,
Comp. Embryol. IL., 306-308, led many embryologists to discredit
1 Rabl’s criticisms of His are very much to be regretted. If the former always ob-
nAi with the precision and accuracy of the latter, he will add to his already high repu-
2 Buck's Reference Handbook, Med. Sci., IIL, 176.
3 Rathke and Leuckart,
Beitrage zur Entwickelungsgeschichte der Hirudineen,
Leipzig, 1862.
1890.] Concrescence T heory of the Vertebrate Embryo. 503
the discovery. Whitman, 67, 91-94, has ably defended the
comparison made by Semper, see above. Rauber, 46, Koll-
mann, 33, Ryder and others, 50, 57, have added to our knowl-
edge of the phenomenon. Duval’s researches on the chick,
z8, demonstrate concrescence there also, though the author
appears unacquainted with the results of his predecessors. Minot,
in the article Foetus, in Buck’s Handbook, III., 172, 173, accepts
concrescence as the typical mode of vertebrate development.
Concrescence in Bony Fishes—At the close of segmentation
the germinal disc forms a cap of cells on the yolk. The disc
(primitive blastoderm) spreads over the yolk gradually ; when it
begins to spread its edge is
already thickened; this thickened
edge corresponds to the ectental
line; the thickening is known as
the Randwulst ; it is also called
the blastodermic rim, which term
Ryder and others have used.
When the blastoderm has spread
so as to cover perhaps a sixth
or less of the surface, one point
of the rim ceases to move; con-
sequently as the expansion con-
tinues, the edge of the disc
bends in behind this point on
each side, until two parts of the blastodermic rim meet, as oE
come from opposite sides, and then grow together. This is
illustrated by the accompanying diagram, Fig. 1; Y is the out-
line of the yolk; 4/, the outline of the blastoderm; æ the
fixed point; the expansion of the blastoderm has brought
the parts 1, I, together, and they have united; the parts
2, 2, are about to meet and unite; then 3, 3, will meet; 4, 4,
and so on until the two halves of the ectental line are brought
together along their entire length; their junction marks the axis
of the future embryo, and produces a longitudinal band of thicker
tissue, which has long been known to embryologists under the
name of the primitive streak. The primitive streak in the
504 The American Naturalist. [June,
anaminota is probably not identical with the so-called primitive
streak of the amniota, but rather with the head process as
explained later. The fixed point of the blastodermic rim marks
the head-end of the embryo; the parts of the ectental line,
which grow together next behind the fixed points develop into
the head; those a little further back into the neck, and those
further back into the rump and tail. The parts of the circular
rim most remote from the fixed point, d, of course con-
cresce last. The destiny of each portion of the ectental line is
fixed before concrescence occurs. In fact in certain cases the
differentiation of the tissues advances to a considerable degree in
i å N, me ullary e; ar, pion al
on an S, = ihe bi blastodermic rio emed the Schel in German;
5, primitive seik, bz, bl re; Yk, uncovered yolk. Compare also the text.
the Randwulst before concrescence. This is strikingly the case
in Elacate, in the ova of which the myotomes (or segmental divis-
ions of the mesoderm) appear in the embryonic rim before its
concrescence. (Ryder, 1885, 57; compare also Ryder’s obser-
vations on Belone, 49.)
The accompanying diagram may assist to render clear the
process of concrescence, Fig. 2. It is intended to illustrate the
1890.] Concrescence Theory of the Vertebrate Embryo. 505
spreading of the ectoderm (germinal disc, blastoderm, auct.) over
the yolk, and the simultaneous formation of the primitive streak.
The whole ovum is represented as seen in projection ; the pro-
portions are such as have been suggested by the ova of flounders
and frogs. Three successive stages of the expanding blasto-
derm are represented; the first position of the embryonic rim
(ectental line) corresponds to the dotted line, a” a’’; the concres-
cence reaches only to the point marked 1 ; the lateral margins,
s”, which are to concresce later, still form part of the edge of
the blastoderm. At the next stage the ectoderm has grown very
much, and has moved its edge to a’, a’, while the margins, s, have
coalesced so that the primitive streak extends to 2. The exten-
sion continues, bringing the ectental line to a, a, a, s, and carry-
ing the primitive streak back to 3 ; behind the primitive streak a
small area, Yk, of the Yolk is still uncovered, and corresponds to the
so-called anus of Rusconi in frogs’ ova. The portion of the
ectental line bounding this area differs from that which is imme-
diately concerned in the formation of the primitive streak, s;
although it now lies behind the primitive streak, it was previously
in front of it, when the blastoderm covered only the minor por-
tion of the ovum. (See s”, a” a’’.) Ultimately the yolk is entirely
covered by the blastoderm, thus fixing the length ofthe primitive.
streak. It is essential to notice that the blastodermic rim (ecten-
tal line) divides into two portions, one, s, which forms. the primi-
tive streak, and another, a”, a”, which overgrows the ovum and
at last closes over the yolk behind the completed primitive streak.
That the processes are essentially as described becomes evident
upon examination of the figures given by W. His, 26, Kupffer,
39, Coste, 74, and others.
Underneath the entire length of the band of cells constituting
the primitive streak is formed a cavity, which is transformed ulti-
mately into the cavity of the alimentary canal and its appendages.
It is termed the archenteron or entodermic canal (Urdarm). The
mode of concrescence in elasmobranchs elucidates the formation
of this cavity. In bony fishes the cells which form the walls of
the archenteron lie so close together that the lumen of the canal
506 The American Naturalist. (June,
is obliterated and does not appear until considerably later (cf.
Balfour, Comp. Embryol., IL, 75.) .
Concrescence in Elasmobranchs—Our knowledge rests mainly
on the researches of His., 27, and his follower Kollmann,
33. Fig. 3, A, is a generalized diagram of an elasmobranch
ovum, representing the ectodermal disc, BZ as seen from
above, resting upon the yolk, which i is not represented in the figure.
The first change noticeable
in the disc after the close of
segmentation is a groove
running completely around
its margin, between it and
the yolk; as the disc grows
and expands, the groove is
no longer present along the
front edge, a, a, of the blas-
ye 7 xtoderm, but only on the
: sides and behind. About
the same time there usually
n ae appears a distinct notch,:%,
- which marks the fixed point
of the margin, and the pos-
terior end of the disc. If,
now, a section be made
= across the line, xy, the
giles 3-—Diagram of an clasmo pranch blasto- relations will be found to
orooro.. cence view ; Bt, blastoderm; a, a be essentially as represented
ve; m, marginal Os, line of sections ; in the diagram, Fig. 3, 8;
ee Skee ee, oe are een en She RE
merous nuclei; between the yolk and the ectoderm, Æe, is
the segmentation cavity, s.c.; the groove is bounded above
by a layer of cells, ex, which are larger than those of the
ectoderm, and have been produced by the yolk, Mī; sometimes
there are cells lying in the segmentation cavity at this stage,
the formation of the mesoderm having already begun. The
essential point to note in this stage is, as Kollmann has
1890.] Concrescence Theory of the Vertebrate Embryo. 507
shown, the division of the margin of the ectodermal disc into two
parts, one, a, a, resting directly on the yolk, the other s, directly
continuous with a layer of entodermal cells, B, Zz, forming a lit-
tle groove under the margin of the disc. The two portions of
the ectental margin have entirely distinct functions, as already
stated: the interior, a, a, is destined to grow over and cover the
Fic. 4.—Diagram of a on mag rd blastoderm a bo aer more advanced than Fig. 3.—4,
surface view ; B, section along the line X, Y; te blastoderm ; a, a, a, anterior margin
s.s., posterior margin (Sichel); 4, ya pii paca; 4.f, area ellucida ; n.r., neural
ridges; M, neural or medullary groove; es primitive s 42, blasto greed =
ectoderm; m, ectental margin; Ær., entodermic cells; Vi, wah mes
s.c., segmentation cavity.
yolk by the extra-embryonic portion of the ectoderm: the pos-
terior, S, is destined to form the primitive streak of the embryo.
Fig. 4 is similar to Fig. 3, but represents a more advanced
stage. The ectodermal disk, BZ, is much enlarged, and its anterior
grooveless margin, 4, 4, a, is relatively much more increased than
508 The American Naturalist. i June,
the posterior grooved margin S; the centre of the notch, Fig. 3,
n has remained nearly if not quite stationary, Fig. 4, pr.s., while the
margin, s. s., of either side has been growing toward its fellow in
the manner indicated by the arrows, and as they meet the two side
margins grow together in the median line, making a longitudi-
nal structure. The manner and results of the concrescence of the
_margins from the two sides to form a median longitudinal structure,
become clearer iri section; Fig. 4, B. The margin at the side,
m, still shows the same relations as in Fig. 3, 8 ;. in the median
line, however, the margins have met and intimately united, so that
what were originally two grooves have completely united to form a
single canal, Et, bounded above by entodermal cells, below by the
entodermal yolk, Mz. This canal is the primitive entodermal cavity.
A moment’s consideration renders it evident that the canal must be
open posteriorly; this opening is the blastopore, 6/. There are
some further details to be mentioned ; where the ectental margins
have united in the median line, there appears a lateral outgrowth,
mes, which is the beginning of the mesoderm; in some cases
this mesodermic tissue appears before the margins concresce ;
when viewed from the surface the mesoderm can be seen through
the ectoderm, as was observed long ago; it is this faint appear-
ance which early writers call the primitive streak, it being the
foreshadowing of coming organization. In the middle line
there appears a little furrow known as the primitive groove, per-
haps the homologue of the ciliated ventral furrow of annelids.
The Fig. 4, A, also shows ix front of the primitive streak the
first trace, M., of the central nervous system. The blastoderm is
seen also to be divided already into two parts, the lighter area
pellucida, A. ., and the darker area opaca, A. o.; the latter also
shows the first blood islands,
From their observations, His, Kollmann and others have
inferred that at the anterior ectental margin, a, a, a, there are pro-
duced (from the yolk) cells, which grow in toward the embryo,
and constitute part of the mesoderm, and are especially concerned
in forming the first blood, which is produced always in the extra-
embryonic area. This mesoderm of peripheral origin His has
named parablast, a term which unfortunately has been employed
1890.] Concrescence Theory of the Vertebrate Embryo. 509
differently by some subsequent writers. The ectoderm, entoderm,
and axial mesoderm Prof. His groups under the collective name
of archiblast. This view
of the double origin of
the mesoderm, although
it has been adopted in a re
modified form by the p, fe
brothers Hertwig, I am
unable to accept.
Concrescence în Mar-
stpobranchs, Ganoids and
Amphibians. — As not
only the constitution of
the ovum, but also its
early development, is very
similarinthe three classes Fic. s.—Ovum of axolotl; after Bellonci; lon-
i gitudinal section to show the commencing formation
named, we may consider of the primitive streak; 4/, blastopore ;- BZ, blasto-
them collectively in the derm ; s.c., segmentation cavity. . oe :
present connection. The condition of the ovum at the close of
segmentation I have already described,’ p. 472 and figured, Fig.
4,3. The ectental line is not sharply defined, nor does there
. appear any groove around
Pegs HdsOO AD»
KLAR. the edge of the blastoderm
a we as in meroblastic ova. The
small-celled ectoderm
spreads overthe yolk ; while
it is doing this a small
cavity appears at the hind
AGS
ACEC’ Gt ave s
KA “yn pcg? > >
air te ee,
r. ay “At ol
wah
Jt
G29
DE
2)
So
N
ae
Won
REE
aro 5
; quasine. DS
WK
$ PUT ER
yk - edge of the blastoderm,
eres 12) Y POS p, with a small opening to
Eeeaong. ESS the exterior known as the
Lo eiea blastopore, Fig. 5, d/.; the
Frc. 6—Ovum of Petnmyzon in longitudinal Cavity runs forwards to-
sectipes ater Balio. wards the segmentation
cavity Fig. 5, sc; above and in front of the blastopore the
cells have multiplied and accumulated to form the beginning
3 AMERICAN NATURALIST, 1889.
510 The American Naturalist. [June,
of the primitive streak, Pr. In the lamprey there is at
this stage no such accumulation of cells; according to Shipley
the ectoderm consists of a single layer of cells and the arch-
enteron is bounded on its dorsal side by a single layer of cells
also, between which and the overlying blastoderm there are
no cells; the gathering of cells, corresponding to the primitive
streak, does not arise until later. The cavity becomes that of the
anterior end of the archenteron ; it is sometimes designated as the
blastoporic invagination. The archenteron, in the same measure
as the blastoderm spreads
over the yolk, grows at
its hinder end away from
the segmentation cavity,
Fig 6, just as in elasmo-
branchs. A stage is
soon reached in which
nearly the entire length
of the archenteron is
formed, and nearly the
whole yolk is covered.
Fic. 7.—Longitudinal section of the ovum of a kheng ip stil abi naoRorg
tu n after the formation of the entodermic cavity. which leads into the
Ec, ectoderm; mes, mesoderm; Ent,entoderm; B/ : i
blastopore; 47, diverticulum of the archenteron; Vi, Cavity, and which has
Sp aeeti moved gradually back-
wards from its original position. Behind the blastopore lies
the uncovered yolk, which in the frog’s ovum is very conspic-
uous, because its whitish color contrasts with the dark color
of the heavily pigmented ectoderm around it; this area of ex-
posed yolk is the so-called anus of Rusconi. When the
archenteron has completed its full length, the following dis-
position of the parts is found, Fig. 7. The archenteron is
bounded below by the large mass of yolk cells, vê, and above
by the epithelium, ext, of the entoderm; its posterior end
curves up to open at the blastopore, B/, passing through a
mass of cells, which constitutes the hind end of the primitive
Streak ; this portion of the archenteron is sometimes called the
blastoporic canal. There is further a short prolongation, A/, of
1890.] Concrescence Theory of the Vertebrate Embryo. 511
the cavity below the blastopore. This diverticulum has been ho-
mologized with the allantois. It is also very probably homolo-
gous with the more nearly spherical diverticulum found in a
similar position in teleosts, and now known as Kuppfer’s vesicle,
from having been especially studied by C. Kuppfer, 34, 35,
who has interpreted it as the teleostean allantois. Com-
pare D. Schwarz, 53, 197, Taf. xii: Figs. 35, 37, etc. Around
the blastopore is a mass of cells, continuous on the one side with
the ectoderm, on the other with the epithelial entoderm lining the
archenteron, and thirdly with a sheet of cells, mes, between the
ectoderm, ec, and entoderm, ezt.
The developmental phases just outlined seem to me to afford
sufficient evidence of concrescence. Owing to the gradual tran-
sition between the ectoderm (blastoderm) and the entoderm (yolk
cells), there is no sharp ectental line as in some types. Moreover
there is no differentiation of the tissues at the blastodermic rim,
but only after the cells are united in the axis, hence we cannot
distinguish parts at the periphery of the blastoderm and follow
their union in the primitive streak as we can in certain sharks and
bony fishes. Nevertheless we find all the essential features of
concrescence ; the entodermal canal and the primitive streak be-
gin at the edge of the blastoderm and grow at their posterior end
away from the segmentation cavity and at the same rate the
blastoderm overspreads the yolk.
Concrescence in Sauropsida-—The early development of the
reptilian ovum is imperfectly understood, although several valua-
ble memoirs have been published upon it. The ova present the
peculiarity that the posterior end of the primitive streak is a solid
mass, the blastoporic canal being closed until a:quite advanced
period, when it is temporarily opened. (Compare the section on
the Blastopore.) It seems to me that the archenteron is formed
by concrescence, in spite of the modified history of the blastoporic
canal. Not only does the primitive merei begin its development
at the edge of the primitive ectod d
and grow backwards, but also the ectodermal cavity is formed
underneath it, but there is no open blastopore so far as yet observed.
This growth of the primitive streak and groove are very clearly
or ger minal ] disc
512 The American Naturalist. [June,
demonstrated in C. Kuppfer’s figures, 36, Taf. vur., Figs. 1-3.
Moreover, Kuppfer and Benecke have found, in certain cases, the
so-called “ Sichel,” or transverse thickening at the hind end of the
growing primitive streak ; this thickening is a portion of the blas-
todermic rim, and by the interpretation I adopt until better obser-
vations shall decide, it corresponds to the transverse thickening
in a similar position in sharks.
The process of concrescence in birds was partly indicated
by Koller’s investigations, 30, 3z, and has been carefully
elucidated by Duval, 78, 1. The resemblance to concrescence
as known in elasmobranches is very striking. Around the
edge of the blastoderm appears very early a small groove;
as the blastoderm expands the front portion loses the groove;
one point, the centre of the groove, ceases to move, or
at least moves much more slowly than the remainder of the blas-
todermic rim; as the expansion continues the edges of the two
halves of the groove coalesce gradually behind the fixed point,
thus producing the entodermal canal in the same manner as in
sharks; cells accumulate at the same time and make the so-
called primitive streak; most of these cells enter into the com-
position of the mesoderm. There is an uncertainty in Duval’s
account owing to his failure to distinguish between the segmen-
tation and the entodermal cavities; as I have pointed out,
AMERICAN NATURALIST, 1889, p. 475, Duval’s subgerminal-cavity
at the close of segmentation is the true segmentation cavity (blasto-
coele); his own account of the concrescence shows that the ento-
dermal canal arises separately and behind the blastodermic or
true segmentation cavity ; but unfortunately neither his text nor
his figures give satisfactory information in regard to the separa-
tion of the two cavities; Duval calls the entodermal cavity also
the subgerminal, thus causing confusion, since subgerminal is
properly applied only to the blastoccele.
_ In birds (hen’s ova) there is a further peculiarity, which is, I
think, probably to be found in all amniota, namely:—that por-
tion of the edge of the ectoderm which does not share in con-
crescence, and which corresponds to the edge of the anus of
Rusconi, closes over the yolk behind the primitive streak, so that
1890.] Concrescence Theory of the Vertebrate Embryo. 513
the portion of the yolk which is left uncovered is remote from
the embryonic area (or primitive streak). Asa rare anomaly (see
Whitman, 68), a line is visible running in the ectoderm from the
hind end of the primitive streak to the edge of the uncovered
yolk; this line is to be interpreted as evidence of the growing
together of the ectoderm behind the streak proper. The ecto-
derm, as it spreads over the yolk, receives no accretions from it,
but accomplishes its expansion by proliferation of its own cells.
Thus the uncovered yolk is bounded by the free edge of the
ectoderm; this area, which may be called the yolk blastopore,
is comparable to the anus of Rusconi, from which it differs in
position, being remote from, instead of close (as in the anus of
Rusconi) to the primitive streak,
for it is situated nearly opposite
the embryonic area. In birds,
according to Duval, 79, the
yolk blastopore (Dotternabel) is
never closed by ectoderm, but
remains covered by the auner
membrane only until the meso-
derm spreads over it. The
growing edge of the ectoderm is somewhat thickened; it finally
is reflected around the edge of the yolk blastopore, forming as
it were a funnel, at the bottom of which is the yolk. (See
Duval, $ ¢.)
Concrescence in Mammals.—tThere is, as yet, no direct evidence
of concrescence in mammals, but strong indirect evidence. First,
it is to be remarked that of no mammal do we know the exact
history of the primitive streak, and secondly that what we do
know accords fully with the history in the Sauropsida. There is
a primitive blastoderm on the edge of which the primitive streak
appears, and from its beginning the streak grows backwards as
the germinative area expands. Now the mammals are derived
from the reptiles, and it may be assumed safely that their early
development is essentially the same as that of the reptiles, and
+ what koewi we pe agrees with this inference. Unfortu-
5 Du 3 3, th hilic ombilical
TEN
after Duval.
514 The American Naturalist. [Juue,
nately the few authors who have investigated the primitive streak
in mammals have failed to consider the problem, as the discover-
ies of His and his followers have rendered it necessary to con-
sider it, namely, as the question: How is concrescence modified
in mammals? It is therefore not surprising that we lack the
necessary information. The organization of the mammalian
primitive streak is described below. Provisionally, at least, we
must assume that the streak follows the same developmental
type in the highest as in the lower vertebrates.
Concrescence, Summary.—tThe evidence that concrescence is the
typical means of forming the primitive streak in vertebrates is : (1)
detailed and conclusive observations upon elasmobranchs, teleosts
and birds ; (2) exact and extensive observations on marsipobranchs,
ganoids and amphibians, which concord with the theory of con-
crescence ; (3) a great probability of its occurrence in reptiles,
owing to the similarity of their development with that of birds;
(4) a probability of its occurrence in mammals, because of the
resemblance in the growth and structure of the primitive streak
to that in other vertebrates. It seems to me therefore not pre-
mature to draw the generalization that the vertebrate primitive
streak is formed by the growing together in the axial line of the
future embryo of the two halves of the ectental line.
The development of the primitive streak may be described in
general terms as follows :—-At the close of segmentation the edge
of the primitive blastoderm separates into two parts; one part
(the anterior), as the blastoderm expands, spreads over the yolk,
gradually covering it with ectoderm ; the other part (the posterior)
forms the primitive streak; it has in its centre one fixed point,
consequently when the blastoderm expands the two halves of the
posterior part of the ectental line are brought together, and
gradually unite (concresce) along a line running from the fixed
point radially backwards as regards the blastoderm. Conse-
quently the segmentation cavity which is underneath the primi-
tive blastoderm lies in front of the developing archenteron.
While this goes on, cells grow out from the concrescing part of
the ectental line into the space between the ectoderm and ento-’
derm (or yolk); underneath the line of junction a cavity is
1890.] Concrescence Theory of the Vertebrate Embryo. 515
formed, lined by entoderm, having cells on the dorsal, yolk on
the ventral side; this cavity with its walls is the archenteron;
the archenteron lengthens backwards as concrescence progresses ;
it has, whatever its length, a small entrance (the blastopore) at its
hind end; the blastopore is ultimately obliterated ; it is found to
be temporarily closed in (all?) amniota during the lengthening of
the archenteron (and primitive streak). The cells which grow
out from the ectental line constitute the first anlage of the mid-
dle germinal layer or mesoderm, and shining through the ecto-
derm they produce the appearance of a whitish line, which has
led to the name of primitive streak. The characteristics of the
mesoderm are described in the next section. Along the line of
junction there often appears a slight furrow in the ectoderm,
which is known as the primitive x
groove. j Ay
Significance of Concrescence. It Gn Gs
will at once be evident that if
the process of concrescence went
on without the actual meeting
of the two portions of the
ectental line the result would be
to leave the archenteron open
along its entire length; the bor-
ders of the opening would be the :
ectental line; and this line, as I Cte.
have shown elsewhere(AMERICAN Fic. 9.—Diagram of a vertebrate embryo
NATURALIST, 1889), corr esponds in which the lips of the cent e ape
to the lips of the gastrula mouth; Aem. Yoik 2 joik-entoderm; +-y, gast-ula
consequently we should have a ais.
gastrula with an elongated mouth. This condition is illustrated
by the accompanying diagram. It agreesin all respects with the
gastrula type; its most noteworthy peculiarities are two :—/rsz,
the enormous mass of yolk accumulated in the aboral portion of
the entoderm ; second, the elongation of the gastrula or archen-
teric cavity in a direction at right angles to the gastrula axis, Xy.
If now the lips of the gastrula, Fig. 9, meet, and unite we
should obtain at once the vertebrate type, cf. Fig. 4,B. Accord-
516 The American Naturalist. - [June,
ing to His’s discovery this is precisely what takes place, only the
lips are brought together first at one end, where they at once
unite, while behind they are widely separated; but gradually
they are brought together and unite throughout their entire
length.
Concrescence is, then, a modified method of uniting the lips of
a greatly elongated gastrula mouth. Why this modification is
established we cannot say with certainty, though we may surmise
with confidence that it is consequent upon the great accumulation
of yolk in vertebrate ova.
‘The view here adopted enables us to speak positively as to the
point where we are to look in vertebrates for the homologue of
the invertebrate mouth. In annelids concrescence is very well
marked whenever the ova contain much yolk; now in leeches
and earthworms, the ectental line does not concresce along the
entire axial line but on the contrary, as shown by Kleinenberg
and Whitman, the foremost part of the germ bands’ (gastrula lips)
do not unite but leave a small opening; when the permanent
mouth is formed this opening is carried in and serves as the pas-
sage between the mouth cavity (Vorderdarm, stomodzeum) and
the archenteric cavity. The foremost part of the line of concres-
cence lies according to His’ observations on fishes just where the
optic outgrowths arise; hence we have to search between the
origins of the optic nerves for traces of the invertebrate mouth.
(Zo be continued.)
1890.] The Persistence of Plant and Animal Life. 517
THE PERSISTENCE OF PLANT AND ANIMAL LIFE
UNDER CHANGING CONDITIONS OF
ENVIRONMENT.
BY PERSIFOR FRAZER.
|B pial: in the Introduction to his Manual of Geology (1874),
thus distinguishes between the Plant and Animal Kingdom,
on the one hand, and the Crystal Kingdom on the other hand:
“ The plant or animal, (1) endowed with life, (2) commences
from a germ, (3) grows by means of imbibed nutriment, and (4)
passes through a series of changes and gradual development to
the adult state, when (5) it evolves new seeds or germs, and (6)
afterwards continues on to death and dissolution. It has, hence,
its cycle of growth and reproduction, and cycle follows cycle in
indefinite continuance.
“ The crystal is (1) a lifeless object, and has a simpler history ;
it (2) begins in a nucleal molecule or particle ; (3) it enlarges by
external addition or accretion alone, and (4) there is hence no
proper development, as the crystal is perfect, however minute ; (5)
it ends in simply existing, and not in reproducing ; and (6) being
lifeless, there is no proper death or necessary dissolution.”
In pursuing the subject more in detail this author states of both
plants and animals that they “ have the fundamental element of
their structure, visible cells, containing fluid or plastic material,
instead of invisible molecules.”
As to this it may be said that while there are some reasons for
believing, with our present knowledge of the nature of light, that
the microscope will never reveal to us a single molecule, such a
revelation is not at all impossible when one considers the gigantic
strides which have been made in subduing the phenomena of na-
ture to aid us in penetrating her secrets; but even if it be true
that we shall never see a single molecule, it is not yet proven that
a single molecule forms the unit of mineral building. . There’are
1 An address delivered before the Pennsylvania Horticultural Society, May 20, 1890.
Am, Nat.—June.—2.
518 The American Naturalist. [June,
some reasons opposed to this view mentioned by Dr. Hensoldt in
an interesting article on Crystallogenesis (Am. Geologist, May
and June, 1890). If we could magnify objects 30,000 diameters,
and not thereby reduce the illumination too much, we might see
a single molecule. At present the limits thus far reached are
some 1600 diameters. “ But,” Dr. Hensoldt says, “the particles of
which crystals are composed can be clearly discerned with a 7s inch
objective,—very rarely in the finished crystal, but whenever a sub-
stance is examined under the microscope during the process of
crystallization, and wherever the operation of crystalline forces
can be observed under high powers of magnification. There are
reasons for believing that each of these visible particles is an ag-
gregate of molecules, just as a molecule is an aggregate of atoms,
and that no single molecule is capable of manifesting polar forces
of sufficient energy to enable it to play a part in crystalline econ-
omy.. . ‘The angular hypothesis’ which maintains that the fun-
damental force of a crystal is determined by the shape of its
integral molecules, has very few adherents now. . . On the other
hand, the spheroidal form of the planets, the tendency of fluids to
assume the spherical shape and the mechanical facilities which the
hypothesis of rounded particles offers in the grouping of mole-
cules have induced later inquirers to adopt almost unanimously
the views of Wollaston and Hooke. We are now in position to
show. . . that molecules must be more or less spherical, and in the
case of augmented molecules,. . . or the minutest parts of which
crystals are composed, we have abundant direct proof of this, as
their forms are revealed to us by a magnification of less than 1 500
diameters,”
Dana continues: “(2) The living being enlarges by means of
imbibed nutriment through a process of evolution ; and not by
mere accretion or crystallization.”
is use of “ evolution” is vague, and an enlargement by other
object, and that is by adding matter to it or by stretching further
apart the particles of matter which it already has.
1890.] The Persistence of Plant and Animal Life. 519
This is as true of a plant or animal as it is of a crystal, and
until we learn what is the procedure in the act of growing mani-
fested by plants and animals, we cannot assert that it is different
from that in crystals. The framework of some living organisms
is made up of minute crystals of carbonate of lime. It seems
quite possible that the minutest component parts of either the
cell or the perfectly visible crystal are crystalline, and that the
next larger components, both in crystals and in organisms, are
spheroidal bodies more or less resembling cells. :
Another strong reason for believing that the smallest parts of
organisms are crystalline in character, is the action upon them
of polarized light. ?
Without going more minutely into the explanation of these
curious phenomena, it will be sufficient to say that bodies which
are built up in such a manner as to exhibit greater density in
one direction than another are said to be under the influence of
polar forces of different degrees. Such building up is crystalline,
and is apparent by the effect which the structure exerts on polar-
ized light; and almost if not all organic solids show these effects.
Dana continues: “ (3) It has the faculty of converting the nutri-
ment received into the various chemical compounds essential to
its constitution, and of continuing this process of assimilation as
long as the functions of life continue; and it loses this chemical
power when life ceases,”
The crystal lives on what it can absorb from the liquids or
semi-liquids, and from the gases surrounding it—probably never
from the solids. In this it resembles the living thing.
Moreover, it separates out of a solution containing many things
the materials which it needs to continue the growth of itself, and
rejects the rest, either pushing them aside or enclosing them as
foreign bodies within its own structure.
As to its losing this power when life ceases, the crystal’s life
or growth may be said to last so long as there is a menstruum
in which it can derive material for its further accretions, and to
cease when this menstruum is withdrawn. But it can be resumed
2 As pointed out by the speaker in a,lecture before the International Electrical Exhibi-
tion in 1884.
520 The American Naturahst. [June,
again at any time that it is placed under similar conditions, and
in the meantime it may remain just as it was left when its growth
ceased. This seems to me to offer a better distinction between
the organic and inorganic than most others, viz: that when the
force which produced the first and sustains it by constant replace-
ment of matter ceases, it cannot again be resumed with the same
results in the same being, but in the inorganic world this is pos-
sible.
Dana continues : “ (4) The living being passes through succes-
sive stages in structure and in chemistry, from the simple germ
to a more or less complex adult state, and finally evolves other
germs for the continuance of the species ; instead of being equally
perfect and equally simple in all its stages, and essentially germ-
less.”
It would be expected that the crystal world would be found to
resemble more nearly the less organized end of the organic
world, and we should look for analogies to the simple amcebas.
These are but drops of jelly in their simplest forms, which grow
in size by absorption of what passes through them, and which
break up into fragments, each of which becomes a new nucleus
for a similar organism.
If these be considered germs, then the detached fragments of
a large crystal which form new nuclei of similar crystals in a
solution containing the materials out of which the chemical
substance necessary to their being is obtained, are also germs. It
is well to recall also that, though there may be innumerable other
substances in the same solution than those entering into the for-
mula of the crystallizing mineral, these latter will be excluded,
and those which are necessary will be assimilated as truly as the
stomach of animals or the organs of plants assimilate their
nutriment.
In the more special distinctions which this author makes be-
tween plants and animals, there is nothing to arrest the conclu-
sions which seem forced upon us by a consideration of the above
general characteristics. These distinctions have relation to the
absorption by the plant of carbonic id, and by the animal of
oxygen; of manufacturing organic ir for the animal, by the
1890. ] The Persistence of Plant and Animal Life. 521
plant, from inorganic material; etc, etc., which do not concern
the main question of the essential continuity of inorganic with
organic force, and the separation of the phenomena of the latter
from those of the former by an indefinable line. No hard and
fast line can be drawn to separate animal from plant, and none to
separate plant from crystal. The force which is the cause of
production and of change seems as if it were simply modified to
suit the various structures which it builds. The material in all
three kingdoms of nature is without doubt the same. One force
—one matter—is foreshadowed here.
It will be advisable to look a little more closely at this material.
The most generally accepted hypothesis of the evolution of the
solid earth on which we live begins with La Place’s celebrated
generalization of the condensation of tenuous material,—first to
vapor ; then to liquid ; then to solid, at an intensely high temper-
ature ; and finally by cooling to the globe-that we know.
Dr. T. Sterry Hunt (Chem. and Geol. Essays) has taken up the
history where La Place leaves it, or at the stage where the in
great part molten earth is covered by a thin shell of rock, like
lava or basalt, upon which descend acid rains containing
hydrochloric, sulphuric, and nitric acids, hitherto kept in suspen-
sion by the intensely high temperature. The crust on which
these rains descend would necessarily be made of the lightest
elements combined together ; the heaviest would be found near
the centre of the earth.
These lightest materials, which while in fusion floated on the
rest like an ocean, would consist of silica and the alkalies and
alkaline earths, with some of the rarer elements. On this subject
a recently published memoir of Prof. F. W. Clarke, Chemist of
the U. S. Geological Survey, is extremely interesting. Prof.
Clarke has for the first time systematically investigated the com-
position of the crust of the earth for a depth of ten miles from
the surface, by comparing a great number of analyses of the var-
ious rock strata of different parts of the world with each other.*
3 Relative Abundance of Chemical Elements, by Frank Wigglesworth Clark , Philo
sophical Society of Washington Bulletin, Vol. XI., pp. 131-142.
522 The American Naturalist. [June,
From the mean of 880 analyses he finds that the solid crust
constitutes 93 p.c.; the ocean 7 p. c.; and the air much less
than I p. c. by weight (so that the latter is added as a slight cor-
rection applied to the ocean).
Taking these figures, he has calculated from the above 880
analyses, made in all parts of our own country and Europe and
throughly combined and sifted, the following curious table of the
frequency of the various elements. He adds that the fifty odd
elements not included here can hardly aggregate 1 p. c. alto-
gether.*
PE
Oxygen. : ‘ : ; 49.98
Silicon . : : : ; 28.30
Aluminum . : ; ; 7.26
Iron : : i ; ; oo eae
Calcium sy. i ; : : 3.51
Magnesium. 7 i : r,
Sodium : : : ; ; 2.28
Potassium : : ` : Mine Fe
Hydrogen . : ; ; ; 0.94
Titanium i : : ; 7. 30
Carbon : : ; : $ 0.21
Chlorine and Bromine . : 1 0T
Phosphorus . : ; : : 0.09
Manganese 0.07
Sulphur 0.04
Barium . ; i ; i : 1003
Nitrogen . : : i 0.02
Chromium ; : : 00t
Total . : : ‘ ; 100.00
The effect of acid rains upon this slag-like material can easily
be predicted, and the prediction agrees with the facts as observed.
Thus the deduction from La Place’s hypothesis would lead to a soil
and air composed as we observe them, and the growth of all
* See Chem. and Geol. Essays, pp. 35-47.
1890.] The Persistence of Plant and Animal Life. 523
things would necessarily be by accretion ffom the elements which
predominated in this soil and atmosphere. This is also what we
observe.
Some reasons for believing that life is simply one manifestation
of force acting upon matter has been alluded to, but there are many
other reasons. The demonstration of the correlation and conserva-
tion of force, by Graham, Helmholtz, Meyer, Joule, Tyndall and
others, in the early sixties marks an epoch in the science of
physics. Since the date of this beautiful generalization it has
been the practice to calculate all forms of force in terms of heat or
heat-units ; and many experiments have shown that these heat-
units were expended in carrying on the various life processes,
precisely as they are in raising water into steam, and cooling the
steam again into water by converting part of its heat into the
mechanical motion of the parts of a machine.
Regarding an animal as a machine, and its food as the fuel to
drive this machine, an approximate calculation has been made of
the directions in which the combustion (or assimilation) of the
food is employed during the daily use of their organs by animals,
and the calculation has been found to agree quite closely with
observed facts. It may be safely predicated, therefore, that the
force which builds up the plant or animal is calculable in so many
heat-units expended to so much work of this kind performed ; i. e.,
to build an inch of sugar cane, as much force is required as
would be represented by the burning of a given quantity of coal
or wood, and the conversion of the heat thereby obtained into
mechanical motion, etc. But the production of these heat-units
must depend upon the ease with which certain elements or groups
of elements can be broken up and formed into other groups; for
this change, called chemical change, always results in the develop-
ment of heat or its equivalent work. Keeping this fact in view, it
is not difficult to understand why the bodies of plants and animals,
which require for their very existence that these changes should
be continually going on, shouldbe composed of groups of elements |
easily broken up and re-formed, and of elements, too, which are
known as combustibles, or those which greedily seek out and com-
bine with oxygen.
524 The American Naturalist. [June,
The present state of our planet is this: First, an ocean of
atmosphere resting on the surface of the globe, in which exist
myriads of living things, composed largely of carbon and hydro-
gen,—both elements that combine with oxygen, evolving an
immense number of heat-units These elements, carbon and
hydrogen, while combining together, do so in such a manner that
the combinations are easily broken up in presence of the oxygen,
for which they have a stronger affinity. “Oxygen is absorbed
and carbonic acid evolved in germination, at the birth of the
young plant, and in flowering when it arrives at an adult state.
In both instances starch is oxidized and converted, first into
dextrine, and then into sugar for the nutriment of the young
embryo, stamens, and pistils, and these processes are accompanied
by a development of heat.
“The respiration of the cotyledonary leaves of the embryo,
and of the corrolline envelope of the stamens and pistils, is, in
every respect, a true oxidation or combustion of the store of
saccharine matter, accompanied by the evolution of carbonic acid.
“ Respiration is absolutely essential to the growth of plants, as
well as animals.”° It is true that the leaves of plants under
the influence of sunlight decompose the carbonic acid which
results from the vital processes, and unite with the carbon
in the air; a process not found in the animal economy : but it is
nevertheless true that combustion of carbon to carbonic acid and
hydrogen to water by the union of these two elements with the
oxygen of the air proceeds equally with plant and animal, and is
the source of that heat which constitute their vital force.
Thus far it has been indicated that the plant and animal are
such structures as are adapted to exist on a soil of silica, alumina,
lime, the alkalies, iron, and a few other materials, bathed in an
atmosphere of oxygen (diluted with nitrogen), at temperatures
between — 50° and 120° Fahrenheit, and exposed to the rays of
the sun.
“The protoplasm which is the real body of the plant cell, to
which the most important incidents of its life are attached, is a
sticky, colorless, transparent mass, always containing water, and
ë Harland Coultas: “ ant, an Illustration of the Organic Life of the Animal.”
1890.] The Persistence of Plant and Animal Life. 525
often drops of fat, crystals of carbonate of lime, and grains of
starch. This protoplasm consists of inorganic and of organic
matter, under which lattter term the albuminous materials and
their products of modification or decomposition play an important
part. The air-dried substance of the Plasmodium septicum con-
tains, according to Dr. Rodewald, 29, 25 p. c. of ash, consisting of:
a OF
Lose ‘ : ; ; - 64.34
Magnesia, . : i ‘ ; 0.71
Potash, . . : : EE ET
Soda, *. : ; : : : 0.18
Oxide of iron, i ; À o OTS
Carbonic acid, . i i : 36.02
Phosphoric acid, . : : E E
Sulphuric acid, . ; : : 0.42
Chlorine, : : : : mee
99.93
The ether extract of the protoplasm contains:
p.c
*Paracholesterin, . - ; : 22.00
Fatty acids, . é ; i ae
Leithicin, traces of glycerin, and resins.
Besides there are present hydro-carbons, albuminous matter,
and other nitrogenous bodies, which are more products of decom-
position of albumen.
“There are certainly disastase, fat emulsion-making ferments
contained in it, besides plastin and albumen substance like fibrin,
Myosin, Quenin, Sarkin, Xanthin, Carbonate of Ammonia, Butyric
acid, and Coneisinic acid.’
All these substances are composed of carbon, hydrogen, oxy-
gen and nitrogen, with small quantities of sulphur and phos-
phorus, etc.
6 Paracholesterin is one of the isomeric alcohols of Cholesterin (Liebig’s Annalen,
Vol. 207, P. 229).
7 Husemann, Pflanzenstoffe, 2d Ed., 1884.
526 Ihe American Naturalist. [June,
A mean of two analyses of the albumen or stored food of the
plant seed is :§
Carbon . Be ae oy i i R O:
Hydrogen . ; : : ‘ 7.29
Oxygen ‘ 7 ; : i 222.85
Nitrogen . : s i er 15.78
Sulphur . ; i ‘ eS .40
99-43
The same elements enter into the composition of the protoplasm
of animals, as may be seen from Robin’s analysis of the amniotic
fluid of a fecundated ovum, etc., etc. (Flint’s Text Book of Phy-
siology, p. 903).
In the main these elements of the protoplasm of both plants and
animals may be regarded as hydro-carbons, or hydrogen and car-
bon with occasional nitrogen and oxygen, drawn from the soil and
air into the plant, and from the plant into the animal, and expended
by both as fuel, producing the motor known as vital force. It
has been said that in the main constituent of this material were
_ hydrogen and carbon, but it was not implied that these were the
only constituents of this substance.
What we call “ nature” acts in this as in so many other in-
stances as a prudent speculator who will not entrust all his eggs
to one basket. An analysis, however crudely conducted, will de-
tect in the simplest food-stuff of plants, besides hydrogen and
carbon, sulphur, phosphorus, chlorine, potassium, sodium,and cal-
cium. More careful analysis of larger amounts of material will detect
the presence of many other and rarer substances, iron, copper,
iodine, etc. Still more delicate tests increase th ber of chemical
elements which are present, either as accessories, as “rare” or
“very rare ” concomitants.
It is not an unjustifiable generalization to say that the number
of chemical elements contained in the “albumen” of a seed-sac
or the amniotic fluid of a mammal increases with every increased
8See Dragendorff’s Plant Analysis, p. 288, N. Y., Vail & Co., 1887.
1890.] The Persistence of Plant and Animal Life. 527
effort to detect them, so that it is not at all unreasonable to con-
clude that practically the whole category of elements forming the
superior part of the earth’s crust, or floating as gases in the at-
mosphere, is represented in this material.
Under the conditions of temperature, actinism (or the chemi-
cal effect of the sun’s rays), barometric pressure, and constitution
of the atmosphere and soil, the organic beings of our globe draw
on their protoplasm for certain elements in excess of others, be-
cause under these conditions the decompositions and recomposi-
tions which take place are suited to maintaining life ; but, should
any or all of these conditions change ; should the barometric pres-
sure caused by the attraction of gravitation increase or diminish ;
should the proportion to each other of the constituents of the at-
mosphere suffer any marked variation; in any of these cases the
present equilibrium would be disturbed; the oxidation and de-
oxidation of the materials now employed as the bases of organic
structure would evolve and absorb too many or too few heat-units
for the present system of life, and either this latter would change,
giving rise to new animals and plants, or the materials which
would be selected from the protoplasm for assimilation would be
other than carbon and hydrogen, thus giving rise to different struc-
tures, composed of different materials, and behaving differently to
heat and cold and chemical reagents.
In a paper on Animal Protoplasm, read before the Am. Phil.
Soc., and printed in the AMERICAN NATURALIST in 18709, I con-
sidered the effect of changes of this kind on animals, pointing
out that life being incomprehensible except as we could measure
or weigh the phenomena which accompanied it, and these phe-
nomena being such as would naturally occur among the substances
by which we are surrounded, there was nothing to preclude the
idea of living things colder than frozen mercury or hotter than
molten platinum. This is true of the plant as well. As long as
9 It would be apposite here to refer to Crooke’sb iful 1 hypothesis a the evolasion o of
the elements to show that each so d el
tion of the same matter, made permanent by the peculiar conditions which Wna it |
at its genesis, and that therefore in any
single matter which constitutes all things. But this would lead us astray from he's argu-
ment in
528 The American Naturalist. (June,
force and matter exist, there is no reason to deny that they may
produce the root and stem and leaves of the plant, of materials
which will enter into the cycle of changes now effected at
greatly higher or lower temperatures, thus preserving the rate
and kind of change, while altering the materials which undergo
it. This result would be a metasomatic evolution. On the other
hand, the greater rapidity or slowness of these reactions ‘might
change the character of the organism, while the material remained
unchanged, which would produce a metagenetic evolution. Or
both substance and rate might alter, giving rise to an entirely
different world, with different organisms and different processes,
and as far from our present world as is the spiritual from the
material.
To resume the case: 1. A careful study of the modes of
growth in the three kingdoms of nature—mineral, plant, and ani-
mal—shows that there are strong analogies between them, the
divergence being progressive in the order named, though many
of the strongest characteristics, such as sensation, etc., of the
highest or animal kingdom, are of such a kind that we are pre-
vented from knowing their presence or absence in the other
kingdoms.
2. The characteristics common to all three kingdoms are the
presence of force; its action upon matter; and its renewal by the
change of one form of matter to another, in the course of which
energy is manifested. ;
3. In the crystal kingdom the restrictions on the existence and
growth of the individual being least, and the variations of condi-
tions and environment in which existence is possible, greatest,
the individuals are more numerous and their composition more
diverse, all of the known and unquestionably many as yet unknown
elements uniting to form them.
4. Asto the plant and animal kingdom the cycles of changes
are based for the most part upon the disunion and separate com-
binations of carbon and hydrogen, because, at the existing tem-
perature, pressure oxygen-atmosphere, and sunlight, these changes
can be produced to the greatest advantage of existing kinds of
living things and life forces.
1890}. The Persistence of Plant and Animal Life. 529
5. With a much hotter or colder earth; an earth where the
weights of bodies were much greater or much less they are now;
an earth not surrounded by an ocean of oxygen gas; or an earth
deprived of the chemical force of our sun; some changes would
be made in the modes in which life is perpetuated now, to suit
these changed conditions of the planet, dut it is extremely unlikely
that life would be extinguished by them, unless the conditions
ehanged too suddenly. i
6. The nature of these changes would be either: (a) to keep
foreign matter flowing through the living body at about the rate
it flows now, in which case the hydro-carbons would give place
to some other group or groups of chemical elements to supply
the framework of the plant or animals; or, (b) the rate of change
of these groups of atoms being very much altered, the attributes
of the living things of which they formed a part would be very
much changed; or, (c) if both the elements themselves and the
rapidity with which these resolved themselves into new combina-
tions were changed, the diversity of the living things and of the
world itself would be so different from what they are now that
we have no means of forming the least conception of them.
7. But in no one of these cases is it likely that 4f¢ would be-
come extinct, though the present relations to each other of the -
three kingdoms of nature would cease to be.
530 The American Naturalist. [June,
ON THE CLASSIFICATION OF THE TESTUDINATA.
BY GEORGE BAUR.
BOULENGER, Döderlein, Zittel, and Lydekker have lately
published more or less extensive works on the Testudinata.
All these publications I have to discuss first before I shall under-
take to give my own views on the natural arrangement of the
oup.
I begin with Boulenger. A general classification of the Testu-
dinata was given by him in 1888 in the 23d volume of the gth edi-
tion of the Encyclopædia Britannica, pp. 456-457.
The whole group was, after Dollo, divided into two sub-orders,
I. Athece, II. Testudinata.
The Athecz contained the single family “ Sphargide,” with
the genera Dermochelys, Psephophorus, Protosphargis, Pro-
tostega, Psephoderma?; the Testudinata all the other Tortoises,
which were divided in Cryptodira, Pleurodira, and Trionychoidea.
In the year following this classification was adopted by Boulenger
in his catalogue of Chelonians', but the name of the second sub-
order was changed into Zhecophora. The whole order was called
Chelonia.
A few months later Döderlein? published a classification of
Testudinata. He distinguishes four sub-orders: Atheca, Triony-
choidea, Cryptodira, Pleurodira.
Nearly at the same time the first part of the Reptilia of Prof.
Zittel’s “Handbuch der Palæontologie” * appeared, containing the
Testudinata.
Zittel accepted three sub-orders of the Testudinate ; 7rionychia,
Cryptodira, Pleurodira. The Athecz are not accepted, but con-
sidered a family of the Cryptodira.
1 Boulenger, George Albert. Catalogue of the Chelonians, Rhynchocephalians and
Crocodiles in the British Museum (Natural History), London, 1889, pp. 4-6.
2 Elemente der Palzeontologie, pp. 633-634.
3 Zittel Karl G. Handbuch der Palzontologie. Vol. III., part 3. München und
Leipzig, 1889, pp. 513-547.
1890.] Classification of the Testudinata. 531
Lydekker calles the whole order Chelonia, which he divides
into two sub-orders, Athecata and Testudinata.
The Athecata correspond to the Athece; the Testudinata
contain four sections: 1. Amphichelydia; 2. Pleurodira; 3. Crypto-
dira; 4. Trionychoidea. In the Amphichelydia are placed the
Pleurosternide. “ This section is formed for the reception of cer-
tain extinct Chelonians, mostly of Mesozoic age, which combine in
a remarkable manner the characters of the two following sections
[Cryptodira and Pleurodira], and may probably be regarded as the
survivors of the earlier ancestral types from which those two
sections took origin.”
THE ORDINAL NAME FOR THE TORTOISES.
Boulenger and Lydekker use the name Cheldhia; Zittel and
Doderlein the name Testudinata. The name Chelonia has no
right to stand, and must give place to that of Zestudinata, as will
be seen from the following table:
Boulenger, p. 4.—Order, Chelonia.
Cheloniens, Brongniart, Brit. Soc. Philos., II., 1800.
Testudinata, Oppel, Order Rep., 1811.
Baur.—7estudinata, Klein, 1751. |
1751. Zestudinata, Klein, Jac. Theod., Quadrupedum Dispositio
brevisque Hist. Nat., 1751, p. 96.
1799. Cheloniens, Brongn, Mag. Encycl. ou Journ. des Sci-
ences, des Lettres et des Arts, par A. L. Millin, T. VI., An. VII.,
1799, pp. 184-201.
1802. Testudines, Treviranus, G. R., Biologie, Bd. I., p. 260,
Gottingen, 1802.
1806. Testudines, Shaw, G., General Zool., Vol. IIL, Part 1.,
p- 5., London, 1802.
1806. Chelonii, Dumeril, A. M. C., Zool. Anal., Paris, 1806,
p. 76.
4 Lydekker R., in Henry Alleyne Nicholson and Richard Lydekker. A Manual ot
Paleontology, Vol. II., part IHI. Edinburgh and London, 1889, pp. ro82-1118. And
Lydekker, Richard, Catalogue of the Fossil Reptilia and Amphibiain the British Museum
(Natural History), Part 111., containing the order Chelonia. I.ondon, 1889.
532 The American Naturalist. [June,
1822. Chelonea, Fleming, Philos. of Zool., Vol. If., p. 268,
Edinburgh, 1822.
1825. Fornicata, Haworth, A. Tilloch, Phil. Mag., LXV.,
1825, pp. 372-373. l
1828. Sterrichrotes, Ritzen, F. F. A., Nova Acta Nai. Cur.,
1828, Vol. XIV., Bonn, 1828.
1834. Chelonia, Carus, G., Lehrbuch der Vogl., Zool. Aufl.
L, Theilp. 25, Leipzig, 1834. ‘
The Athece-—I have shown in a paper published some time
ago,” that the group Athece, or Athecata, as spelled by Lydekker,
is an unnatural one, and that its members belong to the Pinnata,
or sea-tortoises. I do not need to discuss this question fully again
on this plate; I shall only give my principal reasons.
Protostega and Protosphargis, which are placed by Boulenger,
Lydekker, Döderlein, among the Athecæ, are near the Chelonii-
dæ. In both true marginal bones (peripheralia) are developed.
The skull of Protostega is like that of the Cheloniidæ ; there is a
free epipterygoid, and the descending processes of the parietals
are present ; also an ossified articular bone. Humerus and cora-
coid are in shape between those elements in Dermochelys and
Cheloniidæ. It seems that Lydekker is inclined lately to accept
my idea of the relationship of the Athecæ, for he says in the in-
troduction to his Catalogue of Fossil Tortoises: “ If the skull re-
ferred by this writer (Baur) to Protostega be rightly assigned,
there will be evidence of a closer connection between the two
groups (Cheloniidæ and Protostegidæ) than has hitherto been
supposed. The skull from which I took these remarks is cer-
tainly rightly assigned,” for it is the type of Protostega, and all
the above points are mentioned by Prof. Cope® in his description,
with figures, of Protostega; even Lydekker, who still sustains
the Athecz, will have to admit now that at least the Protostegidz
5Baur, G. Die systematische Bemerkungen über die systematische Stellung von
ê Cope, E. D., The Vertebrata of the Cretaceous Formations of the West. Rept.
U. S. Survey Territ., Vol. IL., 1875. y
1890. ] Classification of the Testudinata. 533
e
are very near the Cheloniidz, and belong certainly to the Pinnata.
After it shall have been proved that in Protostega and Protosphar-
gis an entoplastron is always absent, they will rank as a distinct
family from the Cheloniidz, to be placed between the latter and the
Dermochelyidz. I have shown now that Protostega and Proto-
sphargis are true Pinnata; we have now to consider the remaining
genera of the group: Dermochelys, Psephophorus, Eosphargis,
and Psephoderma. I do not considergPsephoderma at all in this
connection ; it is, so far, impossible to determine the exact sys-
tematic position of this genus. Such dermal ossification as seen
in Psephoderma may appear in any order of the Reptilia. I have
shown that the absence of the descending processes of the parie-
tals in the remaining three genera is an entirely secondary condi-
tion, that all Testudinata possessed originally an epipterygoid and
the descending processes, and that in the Pinnata the tendency is
present to abort these processes. I have shown that the char-
acter given by Boulenger to Dermochelys, that the lower border
of the postfrontal joins the jugal and the squamosal, and is sep-
arated from the quadratojugal by the two latter bones, does not
hold, for it is also found in specimens of Chelonia. But to con-
vince everybody that Dermochelys and its fossil allies, Psepho
phorus and Eosphargis, cannot be separated from the Pinnata, I
give the characters which are only found in the Pinnata, and
in no other group of the Testudinata. These characters are:
1. The foramen palatinum, between palate and maxillary, is
absent.
2. The articular faces between the sixth and seventh cervicals
are plane.
3. The nuchol has a distinct process on the lower side for the
articulation of the neuroid of the eighth cervical.
4. The small trochanters of the femur are united, and there is
a fossa between these and the large trochanters. (This condition
is also seen in the true land tortoises, Testudinidz).
5. There is only one central line in the carpus; the intermedium
reaches the first carpale, excluding the centrale from the radiale.
The characters, with the exception of No. 4, are typical for the
Pinnata, but they are also typical for Dermochelys. That the Dermo-
Am, Nat.—June.—3.
SSO The American Naturalist. [June,
chelyide represent a specialized branch of the Pinnata there cannot
be any doubt whatever. The mosaik-like carapace and plastron of
these forms is probably a secondary formation, which appeared
after the dermal part of the ribs had disappeared entirely. The
oldest Dermochelyide known are from the ,lower Eocene
(Eosphargis). True Cheloniidz are known already from the Creta-
ceous, and the intermediate Protostegidz are from the same form-
ation ; zs probable that the Protestegide have to be considered as
the ancestor of the Dermochelyide.
After it has been shown that the Athecæ are an unnatural
group, and belong to the Pinnata, we have to consider the other
divisions proposed. Boulenger, Lydekker, Déderlein, Zittel, all
accept the groups Pleurodira, Cryptodira and Trionychia; these
groups are certainly natural, as will be admitted by everybody ; a
new section was introduced by Lydekker under the name of
Amphichelydia (Quart, Jour. Geol. Soc, XLV., p. 518, 1880).
“They are characterized by having a shell constructed on the
plan of that of the Cryptodira and Pleurodira, in which mesoplas-
tral bones and an intergular shield are developed. The pubis
may articulate, without sutural union, with the xiphiplastral.”
The skull and neck are unknown. The coracoid and humerus
(when known) are of a Pleurodiran type (Lydekker, Cat., pp. 204,
205). This group is also natural, and corresponds to a sub-
order to which I have given a different name in MSS., and the
characters of which I can point out in full. The material on
which these characters are based consists of nearly all parts of
the skeleton, including skull and cervicals of Compsemys plicatu-
lus Cope, the oldest American Tortoise, from the Jurassic of the
Rocky Mountains. Most of the material was examined at the
Peabody Museum, New Haven, Conn. Especially I have to
state the interesting fact that Compsemys has a complete mesoplas-
tron, and resembles very much Pleurosternum. This is another
support for the view that the Camarasaurus beds correspond to
the Purbeck and Oolite of England.
_ I give now the characters of the five sub-orders of Testudinata,
which I adopt:
1890.] Classification of the Testudinata. 535
I. Amphichelydia.
Nasals free ; a squamoso-parietal arch; descending processes of
prefrontals joining vomer; stapes in an open groove of the quadrate ;
pterygoids narrow in the middle, without wing-like lateral ex-
pansions, separating quadrate and basisphenoid ; epipterygoid well
developed and free ; dentary bones distinct. Cervical vertebrae with
well-developed transverse processes, more in front of vertebra, with
single articular faces, biconcave; dorsal vertebrz, sacral vertebrz,
with well-developed ribs; ribs of sacral vertebrze connected with
centrum and neuroid. Pelvis not anchylosed to the carapace
and plastron. Epiplastra in contact with hyoplastra, entoplas-
tron oval or rhomboidal; a complete series of peripheralia con-
nected with the ribs.
Il. Pleurodira.
Nasals free, or united with prefrontals; a squamoso-parietal
arch present or absent; descending processes of prefrontals
absent; stapes in a groove of quadrate generally closed on the
outside; pterygoids broad, forming wing-like lateral expansions,
not separating quadrate and basisphenoid; epipterygoid not
free; dentary bones distinct and united. Cervical vertebrz with
well-developed transverse processes generally in middle of ver-
tebra, with single articular faces; sacral ribs rudimentary; sacral
ribs connected with neuroids. Pelvis anchylosed to carapace and
plastron. Epiplastra in contact with hyoplastra, entoplastron
oval or rhomboidal; a complete series of peripheralia connected
with the ribs.
Ill. Cryptodira.
No free nasals; a parieto-squamosa] arch present or absent ;
descending process of prefrontals connected with vomer ; stapes in
an open grove, entirely covered by the quadrate behind;
pterygoid narrow in the middle, without wing-like lateral expan-
sions, separating quadrate and basisphenoid; epipterygoid free,
or not free; dentary bones united. Cervical vertebrz with rudi-
mentary transverse processes in front of vertebra; the posterior
536 The American Naturalist. [June,
cervicals with double articular faces; sacral ribs well developed,
and connected with centrum and neuroids. Pelvis free from
plastron and carapace. Epiplastra in contact with hyoplastra,
entoplastron oval, rhomboidal or T-shaped; a more or less com-
plete series of peripheralia more or less connected with the ribs.
IV. Chilote (Trionychia).
No free nasals; no parieto-squamosal arch; descending processes
of prefrontals connected with vomer or not ; stapes entirely sur-
rounded by quadrate; pterygoids broad, without wing-like lateral
expansions, separating quadrate and basisphenoid ; epipterygoid
free ; dentary bones united. Cervical vertebre with very rudimen-
tary transverse processes in front of vertebra; the posterior cervicals
with double articular faces; sacral ribs well developed, and con-
nected with neuroids only. Pelvis free from plastron and cara-
pace; epiplastra separated from hyoplastra by the v- shaped
entoplastron; marginal bones absent, or forming an incomplete
Series, not connected with the ribs.
1890.] Record of American Zoölogy. 537
RECORD OF AMERICAN ZOOLOGY.
BY J. S. KINGSLEY.
(Continued from Vol. XXIV., page 454.)
T is the intention to catalogue here in systematic order all
papers relating to the Zoology of North America, including the
West Indies, beginning with the year 1889. An asterisk indi-
cates that the paper has not been seen by the recorder. Owing
to the method of preparation it is impossible to collect in one issue
all the papers relating to any group, but it is hoped that succeed-
ing numbers will correct this. Authors are requested to send
copies of their papers to J. S. Kingsley, Lincoln, Nebraska.
VERTEBRATA, GENERAL.
HeItzMANN, C.—The minute structure of the Cornea. I. The
so-called cells of the Cornea. Microscope, IX., p. 354.
CaHALL, W. C.—The teeth as evidence of evolution. Am.
NAT; XXIV. p. 224, 1890.
STEARNS, R. E. C.,—Instances of the effect of musical sounds on
animals. Am. NAT., XXIV. p. 22, 123, 236.
Morris, CHARLES.—From Brute to Man. Am. Nat., XXIV.,
p. 341, 1890.
McC ure, C. F. W.—The primitive Segmentation of the Ver-
tebrate Brain. Zool. Anz., XIL, p. 435, 1889.—See Am. NAT.,
AAIV, p 187.
TUNICATA.
Morcan, T. H.—Origin of the Test Cells of the Ascidians.
J. H. U., Circ., VIII., p. 63, 1889.—Results agree well with those
of Van Beneden and Julin.
Fewkes, J. W.—New Invertebrata from California. Bull. Essex
Inst., XXI., p. 134, 1889 [1890].—Describes as new C/avellinopsts
[n.g.] rubra.
CYCLOSTOMATA.
MEEK, SETH E.—Note on Ammocetes branchialis. Am. NAT.,
XXL, p. 640, 1889.
538 3 The American Naturalist. [June,
TELEOSTS (including GANoIDs).
E1Genmann, C. H.—On the Development of California Food
Fishes. Am. Nat, XXIIT. pP. 107, 1889.
Matuer, Frep.—The Eggs of an Eel. Am. Mo. Micros. Jour.,
X., p. 15, 1889.
PACKARD, A. S.—The cave fauna of North America. Mem.
Nat. Acad., IV., 1889.—Mentions cave teleosts.
Morrison, WILLARD R.—A review of the American species of
Priacanthide. Proc. Phil. Acad., 1889, p. 159.—Species recog-
nized are Priacanthus catafula, P. cruentatus, P. bonariensis (So.
America) and Pseudopriacanthus altus,
Kirscu, Pu. H., AND FORDICE, Morton, W.—A review of the
American species of Sturgeons (Acipenseridz), Proc. Phila.
Acad., 1889, p. 245.—Recognizes Scaphirhynchus platyrhynchus,
Acipenser medirostris, A. sturio, A. rubicundus, A. brevirostrum, A
transmontanus.
HENSHALL, J. A—Some observations on Ohio Fishes. Jour.
Cin. Socy. Nat. Hist., XII., p. 114.—General article.
Kirsu, Px. H.— A review of the European and American
Uranoscopide or Star-Gazers, Proc. Phila. Acad., 1889, p. 258.
——American species Kathetostoma averruncus, Astroscopus anoplos,
Upsilonphorus V-grecum, U. guttatus,
MEEK, S. E. anD BoLLMan, C. H—Note on Elegatis bipinnulatus.
Proc. Phila. Acad., 1889, p. 42.—Description of Long Island
specimen.
Garman, S. W.—A large Carp and its History. Proc. Bost.
Soc, XXIV. p. 167, 1889.— Cyprinus carpio, from Ayer, Mass.,
weighing 16% lbs.
GitBert, C. H— Fourth series of notes on the Fishes of Kan-
sas. Bull. Washburn College, II., p. 38.—Enumeration of species.
BEARD, J—On the early development of Lepidosteus osseus.
Proc. Roy. Soc., XVI, p. 108, 1889.—Segmentation, origin of
germ-layers, nervous system, peripheral sense organs, notochord,
nephridia, giant cells in nervous system.
McCormick, L. M—List of F ishes of Lorain Co., Ohio.
Jour. Cin. Soc, Nat. Hist., XII., p. 127, 1890.—Nominal list of
128 species.
1890.] Record of American Zoölogy. 539
Meek, S. E—The Native Fishes of „Jowa. Bull. Lab. Nat.
Hist. State Univ. Iowa, I., p. 161, 1889.—First part of a descrip-
tive paper, including Catostomidz, and enumerating 28 species.
Jorpan, D. S., AND FESLER, B.—Description of a new species
of Orthopristis from the Galapagos Island. Proc. A. N. S., Phila.,
1880, p. 36.—O. lethopristis.
Ives, J. E—Mimicry of the environment in Pterophryne histrio.
Proc. A. N. S., Phila., 1889, p. 344, 1890.—Comments on resem-
blances to Sargassum.
GILBERT, C. H—Notes on the occurrence of Gillichthys Y-
cauda at San Diego, California. Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., XII., p.
363, 1889 [1890]—G. guaymasia, doubtfully distinct; Gobius
townsendi, young of Gillichthys mirabilis.
Jorpan, D. S., AND EVERMANN, B. W.—Description of the
yellow-finned trout of Twin Lakes, Colorado. Proc. U.S. Nat.
Mus., XH., p. 453, 1889 [1890]—Salmo mykiss macdonaldi,
subsp. nov. :
BATRACHIA.
Morcar, T. H.—Notes on the fate of the Amphibian blasto-
pore. J. H.U. Cire, VIIL, p. 31, 1889.—Preliminary paper, see
infra.
PETERS, J. E—Another specimen of Hyla andersonii. AM.
Nar- XXIII., p. 58, 1889.
Hay, O. P.—Notes on the habits of some Amblystomas. Am.
Nat, XXIIL., p 602, 1889.
Hay, O. P.—Ndotes on the life history of Chorophilus triseriatus.
Am. NAT, XXIIL., p: 770, 1889.
Corr, E. D—The Batrachia of North America. Bulletin U.
S. Nat. Mus., No. 34, 1889. (See Am. NAT., XXIII, p. 793,
1889.)
Ryper, J. A—Karyokinesis in larval Amblystoma. Am. NAT.,
XXIIL, p 827, 1889.
Assort, C. C—Frogs eating Snakes. Am. NAT., XXIV., p.
188, 1890.
Axssott, C. C.—Voice of Hyla andersonii. Am. Nar, XXIV,
p. 189, 1890.
540 The American Naturalist. [June,
Borpen, W. C.—Origin and development of -the fat-cells of the
Frog. Microscope, IX., p. 101, 1889.—Nothing new.
Ryper, J. A—Heterocercy in Batrachia. Proc. Phila. Acad.,
1889, p. 155.—In Amblystoma larva.
Morean, T. H.—On the Amphibian blastopore. Studies Biol.
Lab. J. Hopkins Univ., IV., p. 355, 1890. Forms studied were
Bufo lustiginosus, Rana halecina, Amblystoma punctatum. :
Hay, O. P.—On_ the structure of the skull of the larva of Am-
puuma. Proc AA.A S, XXXVIII., p. 286, 1889.—Abstract.
BouLENGER, G. A.—Description of a new Batrachian of the
Genus Eupemphix from Trinidad. Ann. and Mag. N. H., IIl., p.
307, 1889.—E. trinitatis.
Roperts, H. L—Frogs Eating Snakes. Am. NAT, XXIIL.,
P. 74, 1889.
Townsend, T.—Twelve species of Coleoptera taken from the
stomachs of Toads in Michigan, with remarks on the food habits
of Toads. , Proc. Ent. Soc., Washington, I., p. 167, 18809.
Core, E. D—Report on the Batrachia and Reptiles collected
[by the U. S. Fish Commission steamer Albatross] in 1887-’88,
Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., XII, p. 141, 1889 [1890].—Bufo agua
from St. Lucia, W. I.
REPTILES.
Norturop, J. 1—Coluber obsoletus [near Newburg, N. Y.].
Am. Nat., XXIV. P- 82, 1890.
Baur, G.—Osteologische Notizen über Reptilien. Zool. An-
seiger, XIL., p. 40, 1889.
Baur, G.—Revision meiner Mittheilungen in Zoolsgischen An-
seiger. Zool. Anz., XII. 2 38.—Notes on osteology of various
reptiles.
GARMAN, S. W.—On the evolution of the Rattlesnake. Proc.
Bost. Socy., XXIV., p. 170, 1889.—Moulting of snakes and
rattle-like structures in other snakes.
Baur, G.—Die systematische Stellung von Dermochelys. Biol.
Centralbl., IX., 149, 180, 1889.—Dermochelys [Sphagris] is not a
primitive form, but has descended from the “ Thecaphora ” and
probably from the “ Pinnata.”
1890.] Record of American Zoölogy. 541
.—Nachtragliche Bemerkungen über die systematische
Stellung von Dermochelys, /. c., p. 618, 1889.
Herrick, C. L—Notes on the Brain of the Alligator. Jour.
Cin. Soc. N. H., XII., p. 129, 1890.—Notes on anatomy and
histology ; illustrated by 9 plates.
Core, E. D.—Tortoises sold in the markets of Philadelphia.
Am. Nat., XXIV. p. 374, 1890.
SHUFELDT, R. W.—[No title] Mature, XLI., p. 181, 1889.
—States existence of zygomatic arch in Heloderma.
Brown, A. E.—Description of a new species of Eutaenia. Proc.
A. N. S., Phila., 1889, p. 421, 1890.—E. nigrolateris (Arizona).
STEJNEGER, L.—Descriptions of two new species of snakes from
California. Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., XII., p. 95, 1889 [1890]—
Lichanura orcutti, L. simplex.
Core, E. D.—Report on the Batrachians and Reptiles collected
[by the U. S. Fish Commission steamer Albatross] in 1887-'88,
Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., XII., p. 141, 1889 [1890]—Three species
from St. Lucia, W. I.
BIRDS.
Strope, W. S.—The food of the Owls. Am. Nar., XXIIL, p.
17, 1889.
Ruoapes, S. N—The mimetic origin and development of bird
language. Am. Nart., XXIII., p. 91, 1880.
HarcırtrT, C. W.—Interesting cases of color variations. Am.
Nart., XXIII., p. 449, 1889.
DANENHOUR, F. H.—Birds killed by electric lights at Girard
College, Philadelphia. Am. NaT., XXIII., p. 823, 1889.
SrropE, W. S.—History of the Owi, continued. Am. NAT.,
XXIL, p. 833, 1889.
Ticut, W. I—Hesperiphona vespertina [at Granville, Ohio].
Au. NAT, XXIIL, p. 82, 1889.
Baker, F. C—Notes on the food of Birds. Proc. Phila. Acad.
1889, p. 266.
HENDRICKSON, W. F.—The Chestnut-colored and Lapland
Longspurs on Long Island, N. Y. Auk, VI., 190, 18809.
542 he hecican: Nii [June
Davison, S. L.—Breeding of Habia ludovicianus in Niagara Co.,
NY Aae NI, p- 191, 1880.
Hassrouck, E. M.—Restoration of an Abdubonian form of
Geothlypis trichas to the American avifauna. Auk, VL, p. 167,
1889.
Torrey, B.—Bicknell’s Thrush breeding in Vermont. Auk,
VI., p. 617, 1889.
SENNETT, Geo. B.—Clapper Rails of the United States and
West Indies compared with Rallus longirostris of South America.
Auk, VI., 166, 18809.
Ricumonp, C. W.—Another saw-whet owl in the District of
Columbia. Auk, VI., 189.—Nyctala acadica.
Bonn, F.—Myiadestes townsendi apparently wintering in Wyo-
ming. Auk, VI., 193, 1880.
TreaT, W. E—A fishing screech owl. Auk, VI., 189, 1889.
*FeILDEN, H. W.—On the breeding of Puffinus auduboni in
the island of Barbadoes.—/¢is, p. 60, 1889.
Prince, W. C.—The northern phalarope in the Franconia Mts.,
N H: Auk, Vi, p. 68, 1880,
Exuiotr, H. W.—The cow-bird as a fly-destroyer. Auk, VI.,
D 72, 1889.
Evans, Evan M.—Calamospiza melanocorys on Long Island,
NOY. Auk VI p igoz 1880.
PALMER, Wm.—Occurrence of Traill’s fly-catcher near Wash-
ington. Auk, VI., p. 71, 1889. .
SENNETT, G. B.—First description of the ege of Glaucidium
phalenoides. Auk, VI., p- 70, 1880.
SHUFELDT, R. W.—Notes upon the sudden appearance in
numbers of the Evening Grosbeak at Fort Wingate, New Mexico.
Auk, V1, p. 72, 1889.
STEJNEGER, LEoNHARD.—The proper name for the genus
Melanpitta. Auk, VI., p. 79, 2889.— Melopitta.
SENNETT, G. B—Troglodyies @don, house wren, breeding in a
sandbank. Auk, VI., p. 76, 1889.
Green, M. M—Baird’s sandpiper in Central New York. Auk,
VL, p. 68, 1889.
1890.] Record of American Zoölogy. 543
SHUFELDT, R. W.—Notes on Brewster's and the blue-footed
gannets. Auk, VI., p. 68, 1889.
Check List of North American Birds, according to the Canons
of Nomenclature of the American Ornithologists’ Union.
Abridged edition, revised, pp. 71. Washington, 1889.
Supplement to the Code of Nomenclature and Check List of
North American Birds, adopted by the American Ornithologists’
Union.; pp. 74, New York, 1889.
Faxon, WALTER.—On the summer birds of Berkshire County,
Mass. Auk, VI., p. 39-99, 1880.
Cory, C. B—A list of the Birds collected by Mr. C. J. May-
nard inthe islands of Little Cayman and Cayman Brac. Auk,
VL, p. 30, 1889.
ALLEN, J. A—Note on the first Plumage of Colinus ridgwayi.
Auk, NI- 189, 1889.
Brown, J. C—Unusual nesting site of Dendraca virens. Auk,
VE, 74, 1889.
Early appearance of Empidonax minimus at Portland,
Maine. Auk, VI., p: 71, 1889.
Brown, N. C.—Notes on 4igialitis meloda circumcincta. Auk,
VL, 70, 1889.
Remarkable flight of Killdeer (gialitts vocifera) near
Portland, Maine. Auk, VL, p. 69, 1889.
ALLEN, F. C—Summer birds‘at Bridgewater and Moltonboro,
N. H: Auk, Vi, p. 75, 1889. ;
Downs, ANDREW.—Birds of Nova Scotia. Trans. Nova Sco-
tia Inst, VIL, p. 142; 1889.
Piers, H.—Editor of “Birds of Nova Scotia” by Andrew
Downs. Supra.
Dutcuer, W.—Bird notes from Long Island, N. Y. Auk,
VL. p. 131, 1889.
Dutcuer, B. H.—Bird notes from Little Gull Island, Suffolk
Co, N. Y. Ank; V1. p. 124, 1889.
Evermann, B. W.—Birds of Carroll Co., Indiana. Auk, V1.,
p. 21, 1889 (Cont'd from Auk, V., p. 351, 1888),
The Wood Ibis in Indiana. Auk, VI., p. 186, 18809.
544 The American Naturalist. [June,
LAWRENCE, Geo. N.—Remarks upon abnormal coloring of
plumage observed in several species of birds. Au, VI., p. 46,
1889.
An account of the former abundance of some species of
birds on New York Island at the time of their migration to the
South. Auk, VI., 201, 18809.
A new name for the species of Sporophila from Texas,
generally known as S. moreleti. Auk, VI., P. 53, 1889.—S. m.
Sharpei.
An account of the breeding habits of Puffinus audubonti
in the island of Grenada, West Indies, with a note on Zenaida
rubripes. Auk, VI., p. 19, 1889.
Lucas, F. A—Costal variations in birds, Auk, VI., 195, 1889.
Bisuop, Louis B—Notes on the birds of the Magdalen Is-
lands. Auk, VI., 144, 1889.—66 species.
Helminthophaga pinus, H. chrysoptera, H. leucobronchialis
and H. lawrencei in Connecticut, in the spring of 1888. Auk,
VI., 192, 18809.
BRITTAIN, JoHN and Cox, PHILIP, JR—Notes on the summer
birds of the Restigouche Valley, New Brunswick. Auk, V1, p.
116, 1889.
Goss, N. S—Additions to the catalogue of the Birds of Kan-
sas, with notes in regard to their habits, Auk, VI., p. 122, 1889.
JEFFRIES, W. A. and $ A.—Notes on Western North Carolina
Birds. Auk, VI. P. I19, 1889.
Stone, WitMER.—Graphic representation of Bird migration.
Auk, VI., p. 139, 1889.
Rosinson, Wirt.—Some rare Virginia birds. Auk, VI., p.
194, 1889.
Scott, W.E D—A summary of observations on the birds of
the Gulf Coast of Florida. Auk, VE, pp. 13, 152. (Cont. from
Auk, N p. 379, 1888.)
Records of rare birds at Key West, Florida, and vicin-
ity, with a note on the capture of a dove new to North America.
Auk, VI p. 160.— Geotrygon.
SHUFELDT, R. W.—Contributions to the comparative osteology
of the families of North American Passeres. Jour. Morph., III., p.
1g90.] Record of American Zoology. 545
82, 1889.—Classification upon osteology, results in placing the
raven at the head of the oscine series.
Notes on the anatomy of Speotyto cunicularia hypogea.
l. c. p. 116, 1889.—Visceral and muscular structures.
Contributions to the comparative osteology of Arctic
and sub-Arctic water Birds. Jour. Anat. and Phys., XXIV., pp. 89,
169, 1889—90.—Osteology of puffins, loons, grebes.
Torrey, BRADFoRD.—The booming of the Bittern. Auk, VL,
p. 1, 1889.
Mason, E. C.—The Turkey-Buzzard in Massachusetts. Auk,
VL, p. 70, 1889. :
BENDIRE, Cu. E.—A peculiar nest of Cinclus mexicanus. Auk,
VE; pg
Notes on the habits, nests and eggs of Dendragapus ob-
scurus fuliginosus. Auk, VI., p. 32, 1889.
Sphyrapicus ruber breeding in coniferous trees. l. c—p.
71, 1889.
Lucas, Frep.—The main divisions of the Swifts. Auk. VL.,
p. 8, 1889.
BENpDIRE, Cu. E.—Description of the supposed nest and eggs
of Zonotrichia querula, Harris’s sparrow. Auk, VI., 150, 1889.
Notes on the general habits, nests and eggs of the genus
Passerella. Auk, VL, p. 107, 1889.
Harpy, MANLEY. Additional notes on the Bittern. Auk, VI.,
p. 187, 1889.
BREWSTER, Wm.—Descriptions of supposed new Birds from
western North America and Mexico. Auk, VI., 85.
—Occurrence of the western Sandpiper (Ereunetes occiden-
talis) in numbers on the coast of Massachusetts. Avs, VL., p.
69, 1889.
——Second occurrence of the Prairie horned lark in Eastern
Massachusetts. Auk. VI., p. 71, 1889.
The present status of Forster’s teru as a bird of New En-
gland. Auk, VL., p. 66, 1889.
Peck, J, Abstract of observations on the variation of the
caudal nerves in the Pigeon. J. H. U. Circ., VIII., p. 63, 1889.
—Preliminary account of next.
546 The American Naturalist. [June,
Peck, J. I.—Variation of the spinal nerves in the caudal region
of the domestic Pigeon. Jour. Morphol., III., p. 128, 1889.—
Finds that the nerves vary in correlation with the parts.
Ripeway, R.—A review of the genus Xiphocolaptes of Lesson.
Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus., XII., p. 1, 1889 [1890]—A study of the
collections of Washington, New York, Boston and Cambridge.
The forms within the limits of this record are X. sclateri, nov.
(Mexico), emigrans (Guatemala), costaricensis.
Ripeway, R—A review of the genus Sclerurus of Swain-
son. Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus., XII., p. 21, 1889 [1890]—Forms
within the limit of this record are S. albogularis (Tobago), canigu-
laris (Costa Rica), mexicanus (Mexico, South), guatemalensis
(Guatemala to Panama).
Ripeway, R.—Birds collected [by the U. S. Fish Commission
Steamer Albatross] on the Island of St. Lucia, West Indies [etc. ]
in 1887-’88. Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., XII., p. 129, 1889 [1890].
—Fifteen species enumerated from St. Lucia.
MAMMALS.
Merriam, C. Hart.—A correction : Arvicola (Chilotus) pallidus.
Am. Nart., XXIIL, p 60, 1887.
RYDER, J. A—The quadrate placenta of Sciurus hudsonius.
Am. Nat., XXIIL, p. 291, 1889.
Aurp, R. C.—Some cases of solid-hoofed hogs and two-toed
horses. Am. Nart., XXIII., p. 447, 1880.
Haraittr, C. W.—Interesting cases of color variation. Am.
Nart., XXIII., p. 449:
Davis, Wm. T.—The song of the singing mouse. Am. NAT.,
XXIII., p. 481, 1889.
GREENMAN, M. J.—Placentation of the Cat. Am. TO XXIIL,
p- 645, 1889.
Aurp, R. C—The segregations of polled races [of cattle] in
America. Am. NAT., XXIL) p. 677, 1889.
SpitzKa, E. C—-Remarks on the brain of the seals. Am. NAT.,
XXIV., p. 115, 1890.
CoLLETT, Joun.—Bats in Wyandotte Cave. Am. Nat., XXIV.
p. 189, 1890.
1890.] Record of American Zoology. 547
TUCKERMAN, FrED.—On the gustatory organs of Erethizon
dorsatus. Am. Mo. Micros. Jour., X., p. 181.
Taytor, W. E.—Color variations of Nebraska flying squirrels.
Proc. A. A. A. S., XXXVIIL, p. 237, 1889.
TUCKERMAN, FrREp,—On the gustatory organs of Sciurus
carolinensis. Microscope, IX., p. 193, plate.
Baker, F. C.—Remarks upon the round-tailed muskrat,
Neofiber alleni. True., Proc. Phila. Acad., 1889, p. 271.—Notes
on habits and measurements.
SHUFELDT, R. W.—Observations on the development of the
skull in Neotoma fuscipes. Proc. Phila. Acad., 1889, p. 14, Pls.
I and 2.
TUCKERMAN, FrED.—On the gustatory organs of Arctomys
monax. Anat. Anz., IV., 334, 1889.
*LANGKAVEL, B.—Nordamerikanische Wolfe [ Canis latrans and
C. occidentalis]. Zool. Garten, XXIX., p. 364, 1889.
TuCKERMAN, FrEp.—Gustatory organs of Vulpes vulgaris.
Jour. Anat. and Phystol., XXIIL, p. 201, 1889.
STOWELL, T. B.—The muscles of the soft palate in the domes-
tic cat. Proc. A. A. A.S, XXXVIIL, p. 287, 1889.
Payne, F. F—The effect of whistling on seals. Am. NAT.,
XXIV., p. 382, 1890.
Ducts, A.—La voix des chiens au Mexique. Bull. Soc. Zool.
France, XIV., p. 69.
*ZIPPERLEIN, A.—Ein Lamantin, Manatus americanus. Zool.
Garten, XXX., p. 25.
Corr, E. D—The mechanical origin of the hard parts of the
Mammalia. Am. NAT., XXIII., 71, 1889.
SCLATER, P. L—African monkeys inthe West Indies. Nature,
XLI., p. 368, 1890. Cercopithecus callitrichus in St. Kitts.
Corr, E. D—The mechanical causes of the development of
the hard parts of the Mammalia. Jour. Morphol., III., p. 137,
1889.—Extended-paper with numerous illustrations.
TuckERMAN, F.—Further observations on the development of
the taste organsin man. Jour. Anat. and Physiol, XXIV., p. 130,
1889.—Descriptions in embryos of 1oth and 14th weeks.
Gustatory organs of Procyon lotor, l.c., p. 156, 1 pl., 1890.
548 The American Naturalist. : [June,
Txompson, E. E.—Critical note on Mr. J. B. Tyrrell’s paper, en-
titled “Catalogue of the Mammalia of Canada exclusive of the
Cetacea.” Proc. Canada Inst., VII., p. 178, 1889.—Criticism of
method of construction.
ALLEN, H.—On the taxonomic values of the wing membranes
and of the terminal phalanges of the digits in the Cheiroptera.
Proc. A. N: S., Phila., 1889, P- 313, 18900.—Shows that course of
nerves in wing membrane can be used in classification.
Hornapay, W. T.—The extermination of the American bison.
Rep. U. S. Nat. Mus., 1886-87, p. 369-548, 22 pls., 1889.—An
exhaustive monograph upon the approaching extinction of Bison
americanus.
EDITORIAL.
` EDITORS, E. D. COPE AND J. S. KINGSLEY.
ENATOR EDMUNDS has introduced into the U. S. Senate
a bill appropriating $500,000 for the endowment of a Na-
tional University to be located in the city of Washington. It
was referred to a committee. This is the outcome of a project
which has been long entertained by some of the scientific officials
attached to the departments of the government. A good deal
may be said both for and contra this proposition. There is rea-
son to doubt, in the first place, whether it is consistent with the
character of our government to establish any central institution
of this kind. Popular education has been one of the functions
especially relegated to the state governments, and although the
central government might well retain the power of compelling
the former to attend to this important duty, so as not to imperil
the welfare of the entire country, it can scarcely assume to create
any system or institution of its own. But of course it is compe-
tent to establish and sustain such a university in and for the Dis-
trict of Columbia. :
At one time the plan was to create the various scientific ex-
perts in the employ of the central government professors in the
university. We hope that this feature is not embraced in the
present bill. The gentlemen in question do not hold office at
1890.] Editorial. 549
present during good behavior, but only during the pleasure of the
appointing powers. Changes have been and will be frequently
made, and these are not always improvements when considered
from the standpoint of merit and competency. Then there is that
poison of the official atmosphere of the capital called “ depart-
mental courtesy” or “comity.” According to this unwritten law,
no subordinate of one department, commission or bureau, may
indulge in criticism of the acts of any other similar organization
without risk of losing his head ; and few appointments of persons
known to indulge in such criticism, or to entertain opinions un-
favorable to the abilities or accomplishments of persons in high
positions, are made. This so-called comity is observed between
departments, etc., in no way dependent on each other, and in
quarters where independence should be expected and even en-
couraged. The effect of such a state of affairs on the efficiency
of expert employees can be easily understood. Incompetency,
which should call forth criticism, is shielded, and those who would
protect the country from its consequences are muzzled, so far as
the government employees and their numerous followers are con-
cerned. It is a lamentable fact that good and otherwise indepen-
dent men are affected by this false and injurious sentiment after a
short residence in the official atmosphere of Washington. The
effect on the expert service is necessarily to depreciate it. The
inferior men go free, and, sustained by their colleagues, are thus
enabled to impose themselves on legislators who are not generally
familiar with specialties in science. Thus it has happened that
our government and people have been sometimes made ridiculous
in the eyes of the learned world..
Under such circumstances the employment of Government ser-
vants in responsible positions in a “ National University ” would
prove disastrous. The best men would be sooner or later rotated
out of office and inferior men would take their places. The in-
stitution would become a by-word among the universities of the
country, and nothing would be gained, while much wouid be lost.
On the whole, the proposition embraced in Senator Edmunds’s
bill does not impress us favorably.
—In a late number of Sczence, Professor J. P. Lesley criticises
our editorial of May on the coming meeting of the International
Am. Nat.—June.—4.
550 The American Naturalist. [June,
Congress of Geologists, and makes a number of statements that
require notice. He desires to assume the responsibility of the
proposition to transfer the meeting of the Congress from Phila-
delphia to Washington, stating with truth that it was he who
introduced the proposition. He also states that in his opinion
the meeting would be a failure if held in Philadelphia, and
further that Major Powell, director of the U. S. Geological Sur-
vey, does not desire the Congress to be held in Washington. His
conclusion is that the meeting had better not be held in America
at all, but in Europe.
We did not refer to the fact that Prof. Lesley introduced the
resolution above mentioned, for the reason that we desired to
draw a veil over Prof. Lesley’s connection with this matter, for
obvious reasons. Now, however, that this gentleman has pre-
ceded us in describing his position, we feel no further delicacy in
referring to it. Professor Lesley introduced the resolution to
change the place of meeting in spite of the opposing representa-
tions of the other members of the Philadelphia committee present,
—an opposition which has been since emphasized by the issue of
a circular protest signed by Leidy, Hunt, Frazer, and Cope, to
to which has been added, at his own request, the name of Senor
Villanova, the Spanish member of the Bureau. The fact that
Professor Lesley’s colleagues are opposed to him in his views as
to the holding of the Congress in Philadelphia should effectually
silence his objections; for these are, we violate no confidence in
saying, of a purely personal and most trivial character. That
such motiyes should be permitted to disturb for a moment the
Bureau of the International Congress is not to be thought of,
although Professor Lesley’s disloyalty to Philadelphia and to
America may interfere with his usefulness in connection with the
Congress when it meets there.
‘Professor Lesley states that Major Powell does not desire the
meeting to be held in Washington. We are glad of it. We
hope that it will not be held there, as good reasons for making a
change at this late day are wanting. We will, however, observe
that Professor Lesley’s motion was not carried until one of
Major Powell’s had been adopted, viz.: that the Congress be not
held in Philadelphia. The succeeding motions were mostly made
1890. ] Editorial. 551
by Major Powell, and were adopted by the votes of the members
and beneficiaries of his survey, while opposing resolutions were
voted down by the same persons. It is stated that after the result
was reached Major Powell said that he did not desire the meeting
of the Congress in Washington. This is quite probable. It is an
old political method to profess to desire one thing while in the
act of doing another, and persons who have had relations with the
present head of the Geological Survey know that he is a thorough
master of this kind of diplomacy. Professor Lesley, however,
appears to have been taken in by it. We suspect that the Bureau
of the Congress will not be taken in, and that they will not be
seriously incommoded by these exhibitions which mean nothing
but personal idiosyncrasy.
—TueE Zoological Congress of Paris of 1889 has formulated
a series of rules for the guidance of zoologists in the adoption
and use of correct nomenclature. These reaffirm those proposed
by the British Association for the Advancement of Science of a
half century ago, and those adopted by the American Associa-
tion at two different periods since that date. They insist, among
other things, on the necessity of the presentation of a distinct
diagnosis with a new name, in order to secure it recognition.
This reaffirmation of the principal bulwark of honest nomencla-
ture should serve as a hint to the American Ornithologists’ Union
to revise their somewhat ambiguous utterances on this subject ;
which savor more of the antiquarian than of the scientist.
—TueE Zoological Society of Philadelphia has recently added
some rare animals to its collection. The wolverine has been.
very seldom seen in confinement, and the possession of two
specimens is a piece of good fortune on which the Society and
superintendent are to be congratulated. The greatest novelties
known have been in the department of reptiles, where a number
of rare species from Florida and Arizona have been exhibited
for the firsttime. Two new species have been received, and have
been described by Superintendent Brown. They are the Extenia
nigrilateralis, from Arizona, and a new genus of Calamarian snakes
from Florida. The latter is the most noteworthy addition whici:
has been made to North American herpetology for several years,
552 The American Naturalist. [June,
RECENT BOOKS AND PAMPHLETS.
AYERS, H.—The Morphology of the Carotids. Bull. M. C. Z., XVIL., 1889. From
the author.
BEDDARD, F.—Anatomy of Accipitres——Anatomy of the American Tapir. Te
chætous Paoi of New Zealand. Extracts Proc. Zool. Soc., London, 1889.—Alim
Canal of the Tinamou. Extract /ézs, a Origin of Malpighian cane in
_ Arthropoda. Extract Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist., 1889. All from author.
Boas, J. E. V.—Kleinere carcinologische Mittheilungen. Extract Zool. Jahrbuch,
1889. From the author.
BRUNER, L -—Report of the Entomologist. Extract Nebraska State Board of Agricul-
ture for 1888. From the author
COMSTOCK, J. H.—On a Saw-fly Borer in Wheat. Bulletin Cornell Exp. Station,
1889. From the author
CRAGIN, F. W.—Co atribations to the Palzeontology of the Plains. Extract Bulletin
Hobbes College, 1889. From the author
DYBOWSKI, B.—Studien iiber die Sdugethiersiihine. Extract Verh. k. k. Zool. Bot.
Gesell. Wien, 1889. From the author.
FEWKES, J. W.—On a Method of Defense among Certain Medusze. Extract Proc.
ost. Soc. Nat Hist., 1889. From the author,
BONNIER, J.—Amphipodes du Boulonnais. Extract Budl. Scient. France, 1889. From
the
PRE F. G.—Anatomy of Polyxenus., Extrait QO. J. M. S., 1889. From the
autho:
CREON, Epw.—Notes on Cestoid Entozoa of Marine Fishes Extract dm. Jour.
Sci., 1889.—Entozoa of Marine Fishes. Extract Report U. S. Fish Com. “a 1886. 1889.
From the author
MERRIAM, C. H OR of the North American Pocket Mice.—Description ot
fourt new genus of North American mammals. Extract North
PSA Fa ana. From the author.
RYDER, J. A.—The Po of me —— ‘Glands. —Proofs of the Effects of Hab-
itual Use in the Modification of A Extract Proc. Am. Philos, Socy.,
SCUDDER, S. H a Cinviied list of food plants of American Butterflies.— Work of a
decade upon Fossil Pym Extract Psyche, 1889. From oats pone
STOWELL, S. B.—Soft Palate of the Cat. Extract
From the author.
WATASE, S.—Morphology of the Compound Eye of Arthropod. Studies J. H. Univ.,
1889. From the author.
WHEELER, W. M.—Two New Species of Cecidomyid Flies—Two Cases of Insect
Mimicry. Extract Proc. Wisc. Nat. Hist. Socy., 1889. From the author.
Dept. of Agriculture. Dept. of Chemistry, Bulletins 13, “em 21, 22, oe) Experiment
Station Record, Vol. I., No.1. Exp. Station Bulletin, No. 4. From the Dept.
PO'TEAT, W. L.—A tube-building spider. Extract Jour. ape hh Mitchell Socy., 1889.
From the author.
«FORBES, S. A.—History and Status of Public School Science Work in Illinois.
From the author.
, R. W.—Remarks upon Extinct Mammals of United States. Reprint
American Field, 1889. From the author,
m. Socy. Microscopists.
18y0.] Recent Books and Pamphlets. 553
WILDER, B. G.—Brain-weight, etc. Extract Reference Handbook Med. Science.
From the author.
—Relation of the ioeseni ede to the Paraceele. Extract Journal Nervous
and Mental Diviis, 1889. From the a
CARRIERE, J.—Zur Em nadaa der nenne (Chalicododerma
muraria). Extract Zool, Anz., XIII., 1890. From the aut!
PILLING, J. C.—Bib AB st of the Iroquoian ipiga Washington, 1889.
From the Bureau of Ethnolo;
—Bi case. of the Muskhogean Languages. Washington, 1889.
From ot Barean of Ethnology.
THOMAS, C.—The Problem of the Ohio Mounds. Washington, 1889. From the
Bureau a Ethnology.
—.—The circular, EAEN and octagonal Earthworks of Ohio. Washington,
a nei the Bureau of Ethnology.
RGAN, T. H. shies Note on the Embryology of Pycnogonids. J. H.
VU. rec: T per the a
HoLMESs, W. H. Textile Fabrics of Ancient Peru. Washington, 1889. From the
Bureau of Ethno
GARMAN
; Actuals of the oe of the Mississippi bottoms near Quincy, Ill.
1889. From a State Lab. Nat. H
MORGAN, T. H. On the Amphibian blastopore. Extract J. H. U. Studies Biol.
Lab., IV., 1890. From r autho:
SHUFELDT, R. W. ae in Avian Anatomy. Extract Jour. Comp. Med., 1890.
Contributions to the Com Piet Osteology of Arctic and Sub-Arctic Wane ‘Birds.
ct Jour. Anat, and Phys., XXIV., 1889. From the author.
_ STEDMAN, erso MooRE. Researches on the Anatomy of Aphistomum fabaceum
Diesing. Ext. Proc. Amer. Socy. BAA p 1889
.—On me pig Tos of an appoi new method of reproduction in
Actinosphærium. Extract A aik “VIH. From the author.
WATASE, cymes E and Cleavage of the Ovum. Ext. J. H. U. Circ. IX.,
1890. From the author.
FERNALD, H. T.—Studies on Thysanure Anatomy. J. H. U. Circ., 1890. From
HERRICK, C. L. Notes upon the brain of the Alligator. Extract Jour. Cin. Socy.
Nat. Hist., ihj From the author.
554 The American Naturalist. [June,
RECENT LITERATURE.
Lapparent’s Course in Mineralogy,' second edition, is a
valuable book to any one interested in the more theoretical method of
discussing crystallography and mineralogy. By far the most interesting
portions of the volume are those relating to crystallography and physical
mineralogy. ‘The first part is concerned with a discussion of the gen-
eral principles of symmetry, and the development of the different crys-
tallographic systems. The method of treatment is philosophical and
clear. More emphasis is placed on the general laws governing crys-
tallization than is usually the case in text-books of this class. The
clear explanations of the relations of the different systems to each
other, and of the development of these in accordance with the general
law of symmetry, are, however, rendered somewhat obscure to the
non - French reader by the use throughout the volume of the Lévy
system of crystallographic notation, without the least reference in the
text to the corresponding Naumann or Miller notation, That portion
of the book devoted to the physical properties of minerals treats — 1,
of the general laws governing the propagation of light; 2, those gov-
erning polarization and interference of light; 3, the mechanical,
electric and thermal properties of crystals; 4, the grouping of crystals ;
5, isomorphism and polymorphism; and 6, crystallogenesis. This
second portion of the treatise is no less philosophical than is the first
part. Many of the obscure points in physical mineralogy, merely
touched upon or left unnoticed in most text-books, are treated here
with as much fulness as could reasonably be expected. The importance
attached by the author to the subject of mineralogical physics may be
deduced from the fact that 140 of the 647 pages of the volume are
occupied in its treatment, while 200 contain the morphological dis-
cussion, leaving 260 to include the description of mineral species, etc.
The third portion of the work, that treating of the mineral species, is
by no means as satisfactory as the first two parts. The description of
the species are not sufficiently full, nor are the figures of crystals as
good as they might be. On the other hand, the axial ratio of each
species has been recalculated, and the results of recent measurements
have been incorporated in the text. Quite a good deal of space is
also devoted to the microscopic characters of many of the species, so
1A. de Lapparent; Cours de Mineralogie, 2d ed. 598 ills. x pl. 647 pp. Paris,
890.
1890. ] Recent Literature. 555
that, on the whole, the ‘‘ Cours de Mineralogie’’ is better adapted to
the wants of the well-rounded mineralogist than any other single book
published. A table showing the relations between the crystallographic
symbols of Lévy, Miller, Naumann and Dana, and an index of thirty-
five pages, complete the volume. Before concluding tĦħis notice, it
should be mentioned that the author finds no existing method of min-
eral classification satisfactory to himself. He divides the minerals into
four groups, as follows: 1, the elements of rocks; 2, the elements of
mineral deposits ; 3, metallic minerals, and 4, combustible minerals ;
and uses this classification as the basis of the systemazc portion of his
book.
Lévy’s Structures et Classification des Roches Erup-
tives.—Lévy’s small volume? on the classification and structure of
rocks is so entirely argumentative that no satisfactory analysis of it
can be given in these pages. It is directed against Professor Rosen-
busch’s classification. Many instances are cited to show that the
principles of this latter classification, when pushed to their legitimate
consequences, must lead to the grouping together of rocks that have
little similarity to each other, while, on the other hand, many that are
evidently closely connected genetically must be widely separated in
different groups. Lévy calls for a purely petrogr o classification
of rocks, independent of geological consideratio e author’s
cause would have appeared much stronger had his sate been less
sprinkled with claims to priority over Rosenbusch in the proposal of
terms descriptive of rock structure. The book merits close study as
an appeal to petrographers to cut loose from theoretical considerations,
and to make their classifications, for the present at least, expressions of
observed facts.
Thomas’s Ohio Mounds.’—In these two papers Dr. Thomas
continues to maintain his thesis, already noted in our pages, that
the earthworks of Ohio were built by the ancestors of the Red Indians
of historic time. In the second of the two papers, the Cherokees are
shown to have been mound-builders since the advent of the whites;
and our author tries to trace them northward, connecting them with
the monuments in West Virginia (near Charleston), and also with the
traditional Tallegwi. To this end the Walum olam is invoked to show
2M. Levy; Structures et Classification des Roches Eruptives. 95 pp. Paris, 1889.
3 Thomas, Cyrus: The Circular, Square and Octagonal Earthworks, of Ohio. Pp.
iii. The Problems of the Ohio Mounds. Pp. 33-+ii. Washington Bureau of
Ethnology, 1889-
556 The American Naturalist. [June,
that the Tallegwi formerly occupied Ohio, and were thence driven
south by Huron-Iroquois and Lenapé. (We wish this bark record did
not depend on Rafinesque for its authenticity.) While willing to agree
with Dr. Thomas that the Cherokees have been mound-builders, we
are not ready to admit that he has proved that they were the sole
mound-builders, nor that he has connected them beyond a doubt with
the Tallegwi, although we admit that there is a syllabic, rhythmic and
vocal correspondence between the latter and the name Chellakee. In
the second paper Thomas points out some of the errors of measurement
in regard to the surveys of Squier and Davis’ great work, besides giv-
ing accurate surveys made by the Bureau of Ethnology. ‘* Accurate
surveys,” by the way, are rather amusing concoctions. We have seen
a compilation of ‘accurate surveys” of the great Serpent Mound, the
largest of which was nearly double the smallest, while two made the
same week, varied about two hundred feet.
Pilling’s Bibliographies.'—In these, as in the previously-issued
Eskimo and Siouan lists, the Bureau of Ethnology has made a valuable
contribution, not only for the student of American linguistics, but for
those in other lines of American anthropology. The evident care
bestowed upon them, the references to libraries where copies of the
rarer works may be found, and the abundant bibliographical notes,
make the series indispensable for all who wish to know something of
the American Indian. - To review such works is impossible; to point
out omissions, or typographical errors, is but cheap criticism, but to
call attention of those interested to the existence of such works is to
do them a favor.
1 Pilling, J.C.: Bibliography of the Muskh.
es. Pp. 208.
- Pp.1r4. Bibliography
of the Iroquoian Languag -
n Languages,
Bureau of Ethnology: Washington, 1889.
PLATE Xix.
PHYLOGENY OF ARIETIDAE,
1890.] Geology and Paleontology. 557
General Notes.
GEOLOGY AND PALEONTOLOGY.
The Genesis of the Arietidae,—This important memoir, by Prof.
A. Hyatt, is the result of an effort to find a real demonstration of the the-
ory of evolution. The methods of analysis used show the origin and rise
of the ten series of species from one variety of one species, Pszloceras
planorbe, the Ammonites planorbis Sow., and Ammonites psilonotus of
Quenstedt. There are two varieties of this species, one smooth and one
plicated. The smooth variety is the oldest in point of time of occurrence,
and the development of the plicated variety, as well as its more recent
station in time, show that it is a descendant of the smooth variety.
The smooth variety is the ancestor of a series in which the forms be-
‘come more involute and have more complicated sutures, but are smooth
and have no keels, so that they may be accurately said to belong to the
same genus, Psiloceras, as their smooth ancestor. This is pictured in
Summary Plate XIV. as the central stock. On the right of this six
series or genera are arranged, showing how these sprang, either directly
or indirectly, from the same smooth variety of Psz/. planorbe. On the
left of the central stock or genus Psiloceras, four series are represented
so as to show how these arose from the plicated variety of Psz/. planorbe.
Each series is in each case described as a distinct genus,—in fact the
idea of the genus is founded upon its separability as a series of species
branching off from the main stock or radical form. The last allusion to
a cycle is due to the fact as shown in the Summary Plate XIV. that in
each of the series there is a similar succession of forms. The forms
from which each series arose were discoidal or open shells, with rounded
whorls showing the internal coils plainly. ‘As each series of forms was
evolved from central stock or radical form in diverging lines like
the spokes of a fan, each produced with curious iteration quad-
ragonal whorls with keels and channels, or one or the other of these,
along the periphery, and became covered with ribs on the sides. After
this the successive species in each series became more and more invo-
lute in eight out of the eleven series; they lost their keels and
channels, and their whorls became compressed, the abdomens at the
same time tending to become acute. Thus the series of species, although
558 The American Naturalist. [June,
diverging very much as compared with the smooth discoidal shell of
Psil. planorbe, they were in reality parallel to each other, that is to say
each went through with a similar cycle of changes ; the discoidal smooth
whorl became quadragonal, and acquired keel, channels, and ribs in
the species representing the acme of their progress, while after the
acmatic period of the species there was a tendency to produce shell, hav-
ing more involute compressed and acute whorls. Throughout all of
these, however, in each series a few characteristics were acquired and
transmitted by which each series might be distinguished from its allied
series,
Another result is that the whole of the group of the Arietidae arose
and died out within the limits of the Lower Lias, and that there are
three grand faunas, the earlier, the central, and the latest in time, these
three agreeing in their general characteristics with the development
and decline of the individual and with the cycle shown by each series.
Thus the earliest faunas are everywhere composed in the mass of simple
discoidal forms, the central of still discoidal shells, but these have keels,
channels, and ribs ; the latest faunas are characterized by the prevalence
of involute, compressed, and often smooth shells. The method of
classification was the result of practical work during which the young,
adolescent, adult, and old age stages of many of the species mentioned,
and in most of these species all of their known varieties were studied,
these observations were correlated in all directions with the observed
difference and resemblance of the species. Thus the characteristics _
of the young and adolescent stages were compared with the adult char-
acteristics of the ancestral forms in each series, and the characteristics
of the old age of each form with those of the descendants in the same
series whenever they exhibited any similar degradational characters,
which was the case in nearly all series, After the series had been estab-
lished by this process, succession and relation of the forms was com-
pared with their actual succession in the rocks, and the results showed
agreement in every series, except where a series, as sometimes happened,
occurred altogether on the same level. In order that the evidence
could be judged by the reader, lists of names of species and their level
of occurrence have been given in six different tables from five different
basins in Europe. It was found while following out this last investiga-
tion that in some localities new forms had arisen, and that others had
received their Ammonitic population wholly or in large part by migra-
e former, which were called aldainic basins, are in strong con-
trast with the analdainic or unproductive basins. It was found that
the aldainic basins formed a band running westward, beginning in the
1899.] Geology and Paleontology. 559
region of the Northeastern Alps, and that north and south of this band
the basins were unproductive or. analdainic. Among the aldainic
basins, that of the Northeastern Alps showed by far the most ancient
fauna, and all those in the aldainic zone to the westward exhibited less
of the primitive or radical Psiloceran forms, Thus it is shown that
even taking the minute sub-divisions of the Lower Lias, those hereto-
fore supposed to be of the same age, by studying the life histories
of the species and following out their genesis, it may be shown that
they belong really to a successive series whose relations in time can be
determined by the relations of their faunas.
This memoir is issued in one of the volumes of the Smithsonian
Contributions to Knowledge, and also in the series of the memoirs
of the Museum of Comparative Zoology, Cambridge, Mass. It is illus-
trated by fourceen plates, four of which are arranged phylogenetically.
Plate XIV. is here reproduced as Plate No, XIX.
EXPLANATION OF PLATE No. XIX.
Tue three preceding plates do not illustrate the biological relations of the
Arietidz as a whole with sufficient clearness, and this plate has been added
been placed in what may be deemed its true position, between the plicatus
stock and the levis stock; otherwise, the arrangement is the same. The
resemblances of the morphological equivalents in each series can be readily
seen by following the forms along horizontal lines from left to right. The
independence of the origin of these representative forms can be studied by
following up the series in vertical lines, which represent descent. Toa
large extent, also, the more obvious differential characters which distinguish
each series become appreciable by the same process.
Psil. planorbe, var. leve, Fig. 1; var. plicata, Fig. 2.
Schlot. catenata, Fig. 3, is the radical of this series.
Schlot. angulata, Fig. 4, is evidently a transition to the next species.
Schlot. charmassei, Fig. 5. The whorl is more involute, but the degene-
rate characters of compression in the whorls and shallowing of the abdomi-
nal channel begin to appear.
Schlot. boucaultiana, Fig. 6. The involution has attained its maximum,
and the degeneration of the pila and channel is well marked.
Weh. curviornatum (sp. Wah.), Fig. 7, is undoubtedly distinct from
Schlot. angulata, and is one of the radicals of this series
Wek. haploptychum (sp. Wah.), Fig. 8.
Weh. toxophorum (sp. Wah.), Fig. 9, is a degenerate shell, having com-
pressed whorls, and pilz crossing the abdomen, as in the proximate radical
Weh. curviornatum,. It is, however, more involute.
560 The American Naturalist. [June,
Weh. emmerichi (sp. Wah.), Fig. 10, shows a notably involute shell,
with degenerate pila and compressed whorls. i
al. tortile, Fig. 11, is the radical of this series.
Cal. carusense, Fig. 12, has similar young to that of zortie below.
Cal. nodotianum, Fig. 13, is very similar to carusense, but with more
compressed whorls and better developed pilæ.
Cal. cycloides (sp. Wah.), Fig. 14, shows compressed degenerate whorls.
Cal. castagnolai (sp. Wäh.), Fig. 1 5, is more degenerate than the last, but
slightly more involute.
Cal. abnormilobatum (sp. Wäh.), Fig. 16, is a dwarfish and more degene-
rate form than Castagno/az, but has more involute whorls,
Cal. lagueum, Fig. 17, is an extreme form of this species, which approxi-
mates very closely to a true sfiratissimum. This figure is therefore placed
to the right, and under Verm. Spiratissimum.
Verm. spiratissimum, Fig: 18, shows typical form, with but slight channels.
Verm. conybeari, Fig. 19, shows normal untuberculated variety, with
stout whorls and deep channels.
7 Verm. ophiodes, Fig. 20, exhibits the tuberculated pilæ of this species.
Psil. aphanoptychum (sp. Wah.), Fig. 21, is one of the Plicatus stock of
Psiloceras.
Psil. kammerkarense (sp. Wah.), Fig. 22, shows the more involute and
plicated form of this subseries,
Psil. mesogenous (sp. Wah.), Fig. 23, is an involute shell belonging to the
true Levis stock.1
Arn. semicostatum, Fig. 24. The figure represents the nearly full-grown |
shell ; but if the keel were absent, the smooth whorls of the young would
closely resemble the adult whorls of Psil. planorbe, var. leve.
rn. hartmanni, Fig. 24, exhibits young and adult characters like those
of the preceding.
Arn. tardecrescens, Fig. 26, belongs to another subseries of forms than
that in which it is placed, but it serves to show that quadragonal whorled
shells with channeled abdomens existed in this genus.
Arn. bodleyi, Fig. 27, shows a slightly degenerate com
is the terminal form of the sub
pressed whorl, and
ni.
Arn. kridioides.
series containing Hartman
Fig. 28 gives a view of the transition between Arnio-
ceras and the lowest species of Coroniceras. The smooth young straight
pilæ and divergent side of the adult whorl are clearly shown.
Cor. sauzeanum. Fig. 29 shows the later nealogic and ephebolic stages,
having the peculiar divergent sides, flattened abdomen, and prominent
1 Two subseries ought to have been shown here, but in trying to reduce the size of the
e been placed in the same line. A similar liberty has been taken with
f Caloceras and Arnioceras, but this does not interfere with the truthful
Presentation of the general zoOlogical relations of the forms.
1890.] Geology and Paleontology. | 561
tubercles of a typical coroniceran form. The young, however, still retain
the smooth aspect, indicating derivation from Arnioceras.
Cor. rotiforme. Fig. 30 represents a form similar to Cor. coronaries.
Cor. lyra, Fig. 1. This is as a rule much smaller than rotiforme. The
sides are more convergent, and the whorl more compressed and less
numerous than in that species.
Cor. trigonatum, Fig. 32, exhibits the effects of the premature develop-
ment of old age characters. Fig. 1 on the extreme right shows the dwarfed
form of Psi. planorbe, var. leve, from which both the arnioceran as well as
the agassiceran series may have been derived in Central Euro
Agas. levigatum. Fig. 33 shows the more compressed variety of this
species.
Agas. striaries, Fig. 34. The striations were too fine to be represented.
Ast. obtusum. Fig. 2 shows the stouter variety with well marked channels
with stout gibbous whorls and broad abdomen. This has Rate almost
identical with the adults of the stout varieties of Agas. 4
st. turnert. Fig. 36 shows typical variety, with eke: nee and deep
channels. It is notable more involute than od¢usu
st. brooki. Fig. 37 shows an extreme RIA aiy of this species,
with very convergent sides and narrow abdomen. The channels are almost
obliterated, and the keel very prominent.
st. collenoti. Fig. 38 gives a view of this remarkable dwarfed form, in
which degeneration of the pila and the channels and convergence of the
sides have produced morphological equivalence with Oxyz. oxynotum and
bali. The amount of the involution is greater than in any preceding
species of the same series.
Agas. scipionianum. Fig. 39 shows the stouter, heavily tuberculated
variety, which has young almost identical with the stouter varieties of Agas.
striaries.
Agas scipionis. Fig. 40 shows an aged specimen in the Museum of
Comparative Zoology, with extreme involute whorls, but keel still prominent.
The degeneration of the adult as regards the pile and form can, however,
be inferred from this figure. The old of Scipionianum at the same age is
much less changed, and does not exhibit increased involution of the whorls.
Oxyn. oxynotum, Figs. 41, 42. The first figure shows the young of a
variety in which at an early stage there is close likeness to the young of
Agas. striaries, and the adults of Agas. levigatum
Oxyn. simpsoni. Fig. 43 shows the stouter itn and slightly greater in-
volution of the whorls in this species when compared with oxynotum.
Oxyn lymense. Fig. 44 shows the greater involution of whorls as com-
pared with any preceding form of the same subseries, and the very acute
degenerate whorl.
562 The American Naturalist. [June,
Oxyn. greenoughi. Fig. 45 shows the stout form of the whorls better
defined, and pilz of this subseries as compared with the oxynotum sub-
series.
n. lotharingum. Fig. 46 shows the smaller size of this species, and
the aA of the pile. The involution of the whorls is, however,
greater than in any preceding species.
Oxyn. oppeli. Fig. 47 shows the extremely involute form of the Middle
Lias. The stout whorls indicate that no great amount of degeneration had
taken place. It may have been a direct descendant of greenoughi.
The Age of the Gay Head Bluffs at Martha’s Vineyard.—
At the last annual meeting of the Geological Society of America, Mr.
Lester F. Ward remarked: ‘‘ My principal object in coming to this
meeting was to listen to this paper, as I was associated with Mr. White
in his work and am deeply interested in it.
‘“ I desire merely to emphasize the great importance of the results at
which he has arrived. Not until the past season has anything definite
been known of the fossil flora of Martha’s Vineyard, the few fragments
figured by Hitchcock not having been determined, and having no
geognostic value. As Mr. White has remarked, the ablest geologists
in the country have long been at work upon the question of the age of
the Gay Head beds, and, as shown by the older as well as by recent
papers, especially those of Professor Shaler, great differences of opinion
and doubt as to their age have prevailed.
‘ The discovery by Mr. White of undoubted baoo fossil plants
has settled that question as far as the particular strata from which these
plants were found are concerned. In all his recent papers, including
the one read before the Society on Thursday last (pp. 443-452), Pro-
fessor Shaler has insisted that all except the very base of the Gay Head
section is Tertiary and even Miocene or Pliocene.
“ Ido not pretend that the entire section at Gay Head and Nasha-
auitsa cliff is necessarily Cretaceous. The plants were found in the
Gay Head section near the middle, and it is very possible that,
considering the extent of the beds and the length of the section
the overlaying strata may be Tertiary, even Miocene. But if
if there is a great thickness lying above these beds, so there is a
great thickness lying beneath them, and therefore the section must
settle the age of these beds than all that has been done before.
Pipers extreme old age of this form is marked by decrease in the amount of involution
ew and als
y the loss of the prominent hollow keel.
1890.] Geology and Paleontology. 563
“ I gladly testify to the indefatigable zeal with which Mr White pur-
sued his investigations against the greatest difficulties and discourage-
ments. It required much careful thought and labor to ascertain in
what particular manner the plants were preserved ; but after this had
been fully settled he was very successful in finding then, although they
were not abundant; and he persisted until his collection amounted to
five barrels of very excellent material, which is being elaborated at the
National Museum. ”’
F. J. H. MerRILL said: “It is seldom that an opportunity is
afforded for determining the true stratigraphy of the Gay Head section.
The speaker visited it in 1884, and concluded as a result of his examina-
tion that the beds were extensively repeated by faulting ; but on visit-
ing the locality in 1887, with Professor N. S. Shaler, he found the as-
pect of the section so much altered by landslides that he was
unable to show the evidence upon which he had based his conclusion.
Subsequent exposures have again revealed the truth as reported by
Professor Shaler at this meeting (azze, pp. 443-452). During his first
visit the writer found a number of clay-ironstone nodules enclosing
fragmentary leaf-prints, which were considered by Dr. Newberry to be
of Cretaceous age, but the impressions were poorly preserved and their
nidus in the section was uncertain, so that no decisive value could be
attached to them. Although the Cretaceous leaf-prints reported by
Mr. White were undoubtedly in place, they do not prove the Creta-
ceous age of the whole Gay Head section. They are from the lower
half of the series. The greensand beds, which are in the upper half,
contain Miocene Tertiary fossils, shark teeth of the genera Charcarodon
and Oxyrhina, bivalve casts, probably of Ze/lina biplicata, Say, and
fragments of crustaceans. This greensand deposit is apparently
secondary, having been derived from some pre-existing bed and re-
deposited ‘under conditions of disturbance and violence abnormal to
greensand beds. The crustacean fragments in particular have been
much rolled and wave-worn. On this evidence we may conclude that
the greensand beds were laid down not earlier than the close of the
. Miocene. ;
« The opinion of the writer that the Gay Head strata were post-Plio-
cene was chiefly based on the evidence of a stratum of post-Pliocene
sand, which is the uppermost member throughout the section, being
repeated frequently by faults at one point containing fragments of
Venus mercenaria and other Quaternary shells. As this bed is ap-
parently comformable to those beneath it, the writer concluded that a
considerable portion of the Gay Head series, if not the whole of it,
564 The American Naturalist. [June,
was laid down in post-Pliocene time. It may be, however, that future
investigation will demonstrate the presence of Cretaceous, Tertiary,
and Quaternal strata at Gay Head.” — Bulletin Geol. Society of America,
Vol. T.
The Age of the Laramie.—At the meeting of the Geological
Society of America, held at New York, December, 1889, Mr, Lester
F. Ward remarked: ‘I take it that the discussion here to-day should
avoid, as far as possible, repetition of the statements that have already
been published. Like Dr. Newberry, I have in my hands a large
amount of material, both from the typical Laramie group and from the
Fort Union group, which has not been published. A few years ago,
as you all probably know, I did publish a paper on the Laramie group,
to which I prefixed a prefatory discussion in regard to the probable
age of that group. In that discussion I admitted that there was the
same lack of identity between the Fort Union fossil plants and those
of the lower Laramie which Dr. Newberry has pointed out. In further
investigations of this material (for at that time I had only studied a
small portion of it, except in a very general way) I have not had any
occasion to alter my opinion in that respect, and I am to-day prepared
to say what I said then and what Dr. Newberry has said this morning,
viz., that so far as the floras of the Fort Union group and of that
which was originally called the Laramie beds of Colorado, Wyoming,
and New Mexico are concerned, they are not identical—they are very
different.
t The neri
E
on to the Laramie of Colorado and Wyoming and the Fort Union
group, as shown in the table of distribution given in my Synopsis of the Flora of the
Laramie Group (Sixth Annual Report U. S. Geol, Sarvey, 1885
Sequoia langsdorfii, Sabal campbellii, Quercus olafseni, Juglans rhamnoide.
rugosa, Ficus tiliefolia, Magnolia hilgardiana, Trapa microphylla.
These are exclusive of several species thus far only found in the Laramie of British
Columbia, one of the America areas, as also of a number of more or less doubtful
cases.
1890. ] Geology and Paleontology. 565
in the lower Laramie—the original Laramie formation—there is a large
predominance of such genera as Ficus, and also many palms, which, to
the mind of a paleobotanist naturaily and probably correctly suggest a
warmer climate.
‘t Whatever may be true in regard to the difference of age—and it
seems to me that the two must go together—I am quite satisfied that a
warmer climate prevailed during the period of the deposition of the
Wyoming and Colorado beds than that which prevailed during the
deposition of the Fort Union beds. Among the leading genera of the
upper beds are Populus and Platanus. Some of these forms are, I admit,
very irregularand peculiar, but they are not found in any such abundance
least, grow in the colder climates, and very few species of Ficus, very few
in the lower beds. They are more northern forms—forms which now at
genera of palms, are found, so far as my own collection is concerned,
in the Fort Union beds. Moreover, as Dr. Newberry has stated, there
are forms in the Fort Union which have an exceedingly recent facies,
but I am very loath to argue from this a Tertiary age. For instance,
there are what seem to be the leaves of the identical species of hazel
which grows now in the eastern parts of the United States; yet I
hesitate to argue from this that the formation is necessarily’ very
recent.
“ In fact, the material from the Fort Union formation which is still in
my hands (partly for the reason that I was unable to identify it with
the published flora of the globe, and partly because I was unable to
publish more at that time) inclines me to believe that there would
really be, as I then stated, no inconsistency in assigning to the Fort
Union an age as ancient as the closing period of the Cretaceous
system. Some of the facts I might enumerate here, but this would be
perhaps tedious ; but some of the forms are certainly not to be identified
with any of the genera that have been found in the fossil or the living
state. Such forms cannot be regarded as having geological importance
in fixing age, yet they go a long way in the direction of showing us
that the age may be more ancient than has been supposed. The genus
Trapa has been found in both groups, but I am not thoroughly satisfied
that the species are identical. In my anxiety not to multiply species,
I called it by the name given to the form described by Lesquereux
from the Point of Rocks beds, though it may prove to be a distinct
species; yet we may never know, from the fact that the material
collected by him was inadequate. I have collected from the Fort
Union beds specimens of that plant containing entire rosettes of leaves as
they would lie on the surface of the water, and showing to my mind
Am
566 The American Naturalist. [June,
that it must have belonged to the genus Zyapa or a closely related
form. The Point of Rocks material contained nothing but isolated
leaves—that is to say, there were no rosettes and there were no stems
—simply the form and nervation of the leaves. These point to the
genus Trapa, and the probability is that they belong to that genus.
‘“ The evidence afforded by the beds at Black Butte station, where
the great saurian was discovered by Professor Cope, is perfectly con-
clusive of the identity of the age of the beds from which that fossil
was taken with that from which the leaves of that particular locality
were taken, We haveat the National museum a specimen of the bone
from that creature, adhering to the opposite side of which is one of
the characteristic Laramie leaves. I have been on this spot, and col-
lected other fossil plants from the same immediate locality.
‘Now, with regard to the error, if error there be, in harmonizing
or identifying the Laramie and Fort Union deposits: I suppose the
responsibility for this must largely rest upon Dr. C. A. White, who has
made a very thorough and exhaustive study of the entire region, as he
defines it from the standpoint of its molluscan fauna ; and it seems to
me that his identification of the two groups—and I have conversed
with him very freely and very much upon this subject, and what I say
is from memory of the oral statements made by him—was in the
nature of a broad, geological generalization, He, in his extensive
labors in that field, simply came upon the salient fact, that throughout
the larger part of the region now occupied by the Rocky Mountains
-is abundant evidence that there existed at a remote period, somewhere
near the close of the Cretaceous or beginning of the Tertiary period,
a great land-locked sea, originally somewhat salt, later brackish, and
finally nearly fresh; and that the deposits which were made at the
bottom of the sea are apparently continuous all the way up from the
pure marine deposits of the upper Fox Hills group to the highest of
Fort Union deposits ; and he even ventures to say he has traced it in
some places still higher into strata which are admitted to be Tertiary.
“I have one fact of my own observations which may be worth stat-
ing, and which may not be known to all. About 15 miles above the
town of Glendive, on the right bank of the lower Yellowstone river,
there is a cliff, known as Iron bluff, which is colored very bright red
from having the carbonaceous matter burned out, and which is full of
fossil plants. It is also full of the characteristic Laramie shells, such
as Dr. White has described and has daily met with throughout the
Laramie series. These shells, he informs me, are identical all the way
through the Laramie from bottom to top. There is nothing to indi-
1890.] | Geology and Paleontology. 567
cate that there is any difference in the age, so far as the indication
from the shells is concerned. This bluff is right on the bank of the
Yellowstone river, and the railroad cuts through it, which makes the
cliff there conspicuous. Immediately below there is a short anticline,
apparently a little island about a mile in extent, filled with character-
istic Fox Hills Cretaceous fossils. I have been on the ground and
collected large numbers of them, and everywhere we meet with them ;
the wheels of the wagon as one drives over them crush the shells, so
abundant are they; and there is do doubt that this is a typical Fox
Hills bed, in Dr. White’s understanding of the term ‘ Fox Hills.”
Now, as far as I can tell, and so far as he could tell from a careful
study of the ground, this Iron bluff deposit—this Laramie or Fort
Union leaf-bed—rests directly and immediately upon the Fox Hills
bed. If there is any difference of age there is no indication at that
point that it has been wanting from lack of comformity or from any
other cause; and it is certainly a very natural conclusion that when
one deposit rests comformably upon another at one point, and when
at another point two formations, the lower one being the same as in
the first case, have the same order and arrangement, the age of the
overlying beds in both regions is the same. ‘That seems to be as clear
a case of geological reasoning as we have.
“I observe that our friends across the border, of whom we have re-
presentatives here, are still using the term Laramie for this formation. It
seems to me thatthe bulk of their Laramie is nothing more or less than our
Fort Union, and they seem to be somewhat in doubt (at least so I learn
from reading a paper which reached me only a day or two before L
left Washington, with a Christmas greeting from Sir William Dawson) ;
and I do not know but that we might as well settle the question in the
way he has settled it in that paper asin any other way. He simply
says that the time may yet come when, in fixing our arbitrary position
for the line between the Cretaceous and the Tertiary, we may be
obliged to draw it through that continuous deposit which we call the
Laramie group.
“ Dr, Newberry’s memory is entirely at fault when he says that in
my ‘‘ Synopsis ’’ I called the Laramie and Fort Union group Tertiary.
I have been criticised for arguing that they are Cretaceous, As a mat-
mer of fact, I did not call themthe one or the other, or argue for either
view. I first gave a perfectly unbiased review of opinion, in which the
. advocates of each view were allowed to state their case in their own
words. I then did what had never before been done. I presented the
evidence from the fossil plants upon both sides in tabular form, getting
568 The American Naturalist. [June,
together for the first time a fairly complete list of all the upper Creta-
ceous species the existence of which had generally been ignored in the
discussion of the question. These as well as the Eocene species of all
parts of the world were directly compared with the Laramie species.
The very careful analysis of this table which I made showed that the
Laramie flora occupies an intermediate place between that of the upper
Cretaceous (above the Dakota group and Cenomanian) and that of the
Eocene. The only conclusion I drew, if conclusion it can be called,
was that the whole discussion was a war of words, often unworthy of
the talent that had been expended upon it.” '
__ ProF. J. J. STEVENSON said : “I should like to say a word or two
about the section that Dr. Newberry has put on the board. The
‘statement that the Colorado group cannot be differentiated in Colorado
is not altogether correct. It is true that in a considerable area beyond
the Arkansas range it is a very difficult thing indeed to differentiate
the Colorado group; but along the plain in front of the Rocky
Mountains in Colorado and New Mexico there is not the slightest diffi-
culty in recognizing the Fort Brenton as a mass of black shale; the
Niobrara above that, gray to blue limestones separated by black shale ,
then the Fort Pierre, drab to yellow sandy shales, containing nodules
of limestone and iron ore, while above that and quite easily separable
from it we find in northern and central Colorado the Fox Hills group.
This is the Cretaceous along the waters of the South Platte, where the
Fox Hills group is characterized all the way, from the bottom to the
top, by a nodose fucoid, falymenites major, which was at one time a
very interesting topic of discussion. The Fox Hills group in central
Colorado is upwards of one thousand feet thick, consisting mostly of
sandstones, some of them calcareous and rich in Fox Hills fossils, with
some beds of coal, which have been opened in the neighborhood of
Greely. At Cañon City, Colorado, the Fox Hills group is only about
250 feet thick, that being the vertical extent of the Halymenites. In
that interval are the important coal beds and numerous sandstones or
shales containing plants which doubtless answer to those of the plant
bed which I found on one occasion near Evans, on the South Platte,
but which I could never find again. Further southward, near Trini-
dad, Colorado, the Fox Hills is only 8o feet thick, that being the ver-
tical range of the Halymenites. In that field, however, the Fox Hills
has been included in the Laramie ; but the Laramie group above the
great coal-bearing series is easily separable from the Ha/ymenttes sand-
stone. Southward, in New Mexico, the Halymenites or Fox Hills
sandstone entirely disappears.
1890. ] Geology and Paleontology. 569
“ The point I wish to make is that the upper Missouri section of the
Cretaceous is distinctly recognizable as far south as central Colorado.
Beyond that southward the Fox Hills thins out until it disappears in
New Mexico, but the other members of this section can be recognized
without any difficulty in front of the Rocky Mountains and around
their southern end to the Rio Grande.”’
Pror. E. D. Cope said: ‘‘ It seems to become more complicated the
more we investigate, and a greater number of problems arise to be
solved. What Professor Stevenson has just stated is established. I
can demonstrate from my own observation what Dr. Hayden has stated
—that is, the conformity of the four or five gradations with the Lara-
mie above. ‘There seems to be absolutely no disturbance or want of
conformity in the upper Missouri between those three horizons. I
could get the Pierre fossils in the bottom of the bluff and Fox Hills
in the middle and Laramie at the top. On the question of the Lara-
mie’s position in the Cretaceous or Tertiary series the vertebrate fossils
throw some light. The reptiles and saurians are Cretaceous. I have
discovered in New Mexico the Puerco series just above the Laramie,
and in that I have about a hundred species of the mammalia. I have
also discovered mammalia in the Laramie. Professor Marsh has added
some species to those previously known. ‘These species are of identical
character with the Puerco mammals, although there is no species iden-
tical with any in the Puerco, where there is not a single Cretaceous
reptile. The mammals of the Laramie are, like the saurians, rather
Cretaceous than Tertiary ; but the character is not so ) propcuntsu. ee
Bulletin Geol. Soc. Amer., Vol. T.
Prof. Marsh on Hallopus and other Dinosaurs.—lIn the
May number of the American Journal of Science a paper is published
by Prof. Marsh, entitled, “ Distinctive Characters of the Order Hallo-
poda.” The conclusions which I have reached, after a study of the
.type specimen, do not agree at all with those of the Professor. I
cannot find sufficient evidence for the correctness of the following
statements
$. “There were but four digits in the manus, the first being short
and stout, and the other slender.”’
2. “The fibula was slender and complete, but tapered much from
above downward. Its position was not in front of the tibia below,
as in all known Dinosaurs, but its lower extremity was outside, and
apparently somewhat behind, the tibia.”
$70 The American Naturalist. [June,
3. ‘‘ The calcaneum is compressed transversely, and much produced
backward. It. . . strongly resembles the corresponding bone in
There is no definite proof that the bone called ‘‘ calcaneum ” repre-
sents this element, or that the first digit of the hind-limb was entirely
“wanting.
Hallopus is a true carnivorous Dinosaur, near to Compsognathus,
there can be little doubt. This opinion was expressed already by
Prof. Williston in 1878, in a paper published in a Journal of the
Kansas Academy of Science, the title of which I cannot give at this
moment. :
In the following paper a new order of Dinosaurs, ‘* Ceratopsia,” is
created. Ceratops Marsh, 1889, is the same as Monoclonius Cope,
1876. This I can state with absolute certainty, having examined the
types of Ceratops and Monoclonius. Neither ‘‘ Ceratopside’’ nor
. “í Ceratopsia °’ can be adopted on this reason. The so-called ‘‘ Cera-
topsia’’ are characterized by Professor Marsh in the following way :
“(1), The skull surmounted by massive horn-cores ; (2), a rostral
bone forming a sharp, cutting beak; (3), the teeth with two distinct
roots; (4), The anterior cervical vertebra codssified with each other ;
(5), the pubis projecting in front, and no post-pubis.”’
To this I have to make the following remarks :
1. The skull of Phrynosoma is surmounted by stout horn-cores,
but nobody will place it on that account in a separate order. On the
_ Same reason the horned members of the Cervide could be placed in a `
different order from the hornless forms.
2. Some of the pigs and edentates have a peculiar bone in front of
_ the nose, not present in other mammals, but nobody places these forms
in a separate order on this account.
3- If the teeth would really have two distinct true roots, as Prof.
Marsh states, this perhaps would be of ordinal character, but I do
not believe it. These “two roots’? are probably produced by splitting
of the tooth by the young one following.
4. In Buceros among birds, also in some of the Plesiosauria and
Ichthyosauria, the first two vertebre are firmly codssified ; are they
placed in separate orders therefore ?
5- “The pubis projecting in front, and no post-pubis.’’ Every-
body knows to-day that what is called by Prof. Marsh the pubis is the
pectineal process, and that his post-pubis is the true pubis. The state-
ment that there is no post-pubis 1 do not believe before it has been
demonstrated that the bone called pubis by Prof. Marsh and repre-
wre Geology and Paleontology. 571
sented complete, is really complete. I doubt it, and believe that there
was a ‘‘ post-pubis,”’ which is simply broken away in the specimen.—
GEORGE Baur, Ph.D. New York, May 7th, 78
[NOTE ON THE Asove.—The ‘‘ two-rooted teeth’’ described by
Prof. Marsh, and referred to above by Dr. Baur, are not such in point
of fact. The appearance of two roots is produced by the absorption
of the middle part of a single root by the crown of the successional
young tooth. After the absorption has progressed sufficiently far, the
less direct of the two branches is generally broken off, so that teeth
with both preserved are less abundant than those with a single half-
root. Teeth of this kind were figured by Leidy as belonging to
Trachodon, and were described by me as representing the new genus
Dysganus in the Proceedings of the Philadelphia Academy for 1876.
They are very abundant in the Laramie formation.—E. D. Cop OPE. |
Extinct Quadrumana.—Professor Gaudry has published in the
new Memoirs of the Geological Society of France an interesting paper
on the Dryopithecus fontanit Lartet, of which a new mandible has been
recently discovered in France. This mandible is more perfect than
any hitherto obtained, as it has the symphysis with the incisor teeth,
and all the molars except the last of one side. Prof. Lartet supposed
that the genus Dryopithecus approached nearer to Homo than any of
the existing apes, on account of the probable later appearance of the
mn (wisdom tooth) than in the latter, Prof. Gaudry’s specimen shows
that the symphysis is longer than in any of the existing anthropoids,
and that the anterior premolar is relatively larger. Its relationships
are therefore not towards Homo, but away from him, and towards the
true monkeys. The last inferior molar was evidently erupted at
about the same time as the inferior canine, and not before it, as in
many monkeys; but Gaudry shows that in several monkeys and apes
the period of protrusion of the 7 is the same as that seen in the
Dryopithecus. The latter is nearer to the gorilla in dentition than to
either the orang or chimpanzee. It was smaller than either,
Under the name of Dolichopithecus ruscinensis, M. Charles Deperet
describes in the Comptes Rendus, a species of monkey, of which a skull
was found by Dr. Bonneman near to Perpignan, tégether with numer-
ous other bones. The dentition is in general that of Macacus, but the
limbs have the slender proportions of those of the Semnopithecus.
The genus is then close to the Mesopithecus of Gaudry, from which,
indeed, M. Deperet does not satisfactorily separate it. It differs from
the M. pentelici by its larger size, larger face, and larger heel of the
last inferior molar. The monkey of the Val d’ Arno, Au/axinus floren-
tinus, is still smaller, and has a much shorter muzzle.
572 The American Naturalist. [June,
MINERALOGY AND PETROGRAPHY!
Mineralogical News.—The long expected monograph by Brég-
ger? on the minerals of the syenite-pegmatite veins of the augite syen-
ite and nepheline syenite region of Southern Norway has at last made
its appearance. The special part of the volume, which describes in
great detail seventy mineral species, is prefixed by an introduction of
235 pages, in which the geology of the region is discussed and the
eruptive nature of the pegmatite veins is proved. An abstract of this
portion of the work will be given in another place. Of the seventy
mineral species recognized in the veins five are of sulphides, one isa
sulpho-salt, three are oxides, three are hydroxides, one is a haloid
compound, one a ferrate, two are borates, two phosphates, two are
members of the zircon group, three belong to the epidote group, two
to the group of the datholites, three to the garnets, three to the micas,
two to the nepheline group, two to the leucophanes, seven to the
pyroxenes, four to the hornblendes, four are members of the melanocer-
ite group, three are feldspars, seven are zeolites, and nine others are
various silicates. The only carbonate detected, beside two fluo-car-
bonates, is calcite. It is evidently impossible to mention even all of the
important discoveries made by the author in his studies of the wonder-
ful suite of specimens collected by him. We can only refer briefly to
the most important of them. Measurements of “illingite yielded a: b:
c=6689 : 1: 1.2331. Tabular crystals of hydrargillite gavea: b: c
=1.7089 : 1: 1.9184; A=85° 20’ 10”. These are occasionally un-
twinned, but more frequently twinned forms are found in which the
twinning planes are oP (corresponding to DesCloizeaux twins par.
æ Pcs), co Pcs (occasionally), ts Pz (?), and oP; and a fifth form in
which the twinning plane is perpendicular to oP, Optically, plates of
the mineral act uniaxially. Xenotime, while containing many elements,
yielded upon analysis figures that may be reduced to correspond to
the formula Y, (PO, 2 An examination of thin sections of orthite (allan-
SiO, ALO, FeO, CeO, BO, FeO CaO NaO H,O
31.83 2.72 88 -24 16.51 16.74 29.54 75 -79
‘Edited by Dr. W. S. Bayley, Colby University, Waterville, Me.
* Zeits. f. Krystall., XVI. Specialler Theil, 664 pp., XXVII. Pl,
1890.] Mineralogy and Petrography. 573
Single crystals are described, and twins following four twinning `
laws are well illustrated in the plates. The optical properties of the
mineral are briefly sketched. Several varieties of garnef are mentioned,
two analyses of which are worth recording. The black-green garnet of
Stok6 and the yttrium garnet of the same localiy contain resectively :
SiO, TiO, Al,O, FeO, Mn,O, Y,O, MnO MgO CaO -Na O HO
34.90 8.97 20.43 DAO Ge Ae ae 1.27
34.52 2.98 eOr 26.68. 2.15.35 38 e -79 -43
Nordenskjéldite, with an axial ratio of a: 21, has a com-
position corresponding to Ca (BO), SnQ,, or aia as the result
of new measurements, is concluded to be orthorhombic with a: ġ : c=
1.0098: 1: 4.7556. Its fracture figure (on the perfect cleavage par-
allel to œ% Pos) consists of two lines crossing each other at angles of
about 81° and 98°, the smaller of which is bisected by the vertical axis.
The gliding planes correspond very nearly to those of the dome } P-
The axial plane is the base, with 4 the positive acute bisectrix. Anew
analysis of carefully purified material shows slight differences from the
previously published analyses, and corresponds closely to the formula
R,” RJ Ti (SiO), Zeucophane crystals to the number of twenty gave
good enough reflections to enable Brégger to determine without diffi-
culty their orthorhombic symmetry, @ : 6 : c=.9939 : I : .6722.
The axial plane is the macropinacoid and ¢ is the negative acute bisec-
trix. 2Ena==74° 15’. MMelinophane crystalizes in the tetartohedral
division of the tetragonal system, Optically it is uniaxial. Chemi-
cally it differs from leucophane [Na, (F Be), Ca, (SiO,),] in containing
more beryllium [i. e. it is Na,(FBe), (Ca,O), Be, (SiO,),]. A thor-
ough discussion of the characteristics of acmite and egerine leads to
the view that they are well marked varieties of the same pyroxene,
closely related to diopside. Acmite is nearly always twinned, while
ægerine is usually in simple crystals. Lévenite according to the most
recent measurements has æ : 6: c—=1.0963: 1: .7151 and S=69° 4214’.
Wöhierite usually occurs in twins, whose twinning plane is the ortho-
pinacoid. When placed in the conventional position for pyroxene its
axial ratio becomes æ : } : c==.9966: 1 : .3547 with S==89° 18’ 50.”
Its absorption is C > B=A, and pleochroism varies between yellow
and colorless shades. Lavenite and Wohderite are regarded as zircon-
ium pyroxenes, closely related to the corresponding triclinic pyroxene
hiortdahlite. Polymignite crystals are orthorhombic, as is well known,
with the axial ratio .7121 : 1: .5121. Their hardness is 6-6.5, and
density 4.77-4.85. Chemically and morphologically the mineral is
574 The American Naturalist. [June,
closely related to eschynife, with which it forms a group distinct from
all other natural mineralogical groups. When placed in a position
corresponding to the usual one for zschynite its axial ratio becomes
a : b : c—.4681 : 1: .7192. Measurements of the best ar/vedsonite
erystals gave .5496: 1: .2975 as the axial ratio for this species, with
f=75° 4414’. The analysis of a large crystal ec (after treating
with acid to dissolve magnetite) :
SO ALO PeO, MoO MO MMO KO HO
49.90 2.62 32.99 .05 .57 12.88 .IO 1.07
Pterolite is regarded as an alteration product of barkevikite, con-
sisting of a mixture of lepidomelane and egerine, and anigmatite is
thought to be identical with cossyrite. An optical examination of
hatapleite okay it to be monoclinic with æ : 6 : e—=1.7329: I: 1.3618
and S=89° 4814’, and not hexagonal as formerly ja pposed, although
it assumes the hexagonal symmetry when heated to 140°. Two varie-
ties of the mineral are recognized. The first is a yellow variety to
which the name katapleite is assigned, and the second a blue variety
which is called soda-katapleite. The composition of the varieties is
given as follows :
SIO, 290, ALO, : EO CeO: NaO HO
L : gs6 Ess Lr Bat gy 9.38
II 44.04 30.94 .10 87 14.94 9.24
Tritonite, according to Brégger, does not crystallize in the regular
system, but is probably rhombohedral and hemimorphic. In this case
& :c— 1: 1.114. The analyses that have been published as those of
Erdmannite are thought to be analyses of a mixture of a melanocerite
mineral with a member of the homilite group. Zukotite-Htanite is a
deep brown variety of sphene, with most of the optical and crystallo-
graphic properties of this mineral, but differing from it slightly in
composition, which is as follows:
SiO, ZrO, TiO, CeO, Ce,O, Y,O, CaO FeO MgO Na,O K,O Loss
30.22 .18 34,78 2.57 -59 24.38 3.84 .50 .86 .27 ..31
The soda-orthoclase of Fredriksvarn turns out upon close examina-
tion to be an intergrowth of such fine lamellz of albite and orthoclase,
that upon examination with low powers of the microscope, a section
of this mineral behaves as if monoclinic. Brégger calls it cryptoperthite.
Eudidymite has been carefully examined and its properties well estab-
lished. It is a monoclinic mineral, ae in appearance heulan-
dite. Its axial ratio is @: 4 : c=1.7107 : 1 : 1.1071, and P=86° 14’
.
.
1890.] Mineralogy and Petrography. 575
27”. It occurs in tabular crystals, with a perfect cleavage parallel to
the base ; a hardness of 6 and a specific gravity of 2.553. The extine-
tion in co P% is inclined 581° to c and 27° 45’ to the clearage paral-
lel to oP. 2V, —29° 55’ for sodium light. Very exact measurements
of a large number of natrolite crystals from Little—ar § indicate that
the mineral is monoclinic with æ : 4 - ¢=1.0165 : I : 1.3599, and p=
89° 54’ 52”, and not orthorhombic as is usually assumed. The ortho-
rhombic symmetry, which is ordinarily observed, is due to twinning par-
allel to the orthopinacoid. These monoclinic natrolites differ from
the ordinary orthorhombic form in containing a small quantity of
potassium. ‘The extinction angle increases with the potassium con-
tent. Bergmannite and brevicite are shown by the author to be either
natrolite, or mixtures of this mineral with several other substances,
New Minerals.—Hambergite. A single specimen of this mineral
is of grayish white color, and is orthorhombic with oo P, œ Pa, œ P%
and oP. a: 6: c=.7988 1: .7267, and hardness=7.5. Se. Graz
2.347. Plane of the optical axes is œ P, & and ¢ is the acute
bisectrix. 2Vna— 87°7 (observed) or 87° 40’ (calc.). Analyses
yielded : BeO=53.25% ; H,O=10.03 ; B,O,=36.72 ;==(HO) Be,BO,.
_Johnstrupite was originally confused by Brogger with mosandrite,
which it resembles in many respects. Careful observation shows its
axial ratio to be a: 5: c—=1.6229: 1: 1.3594- 8=86° 5534’, and
the plane of its optical axis the clinopinacoid, with the positive acute
bisectrix inclined 234° to ¢, in which it closely resembles mosandrite.
The latter mineral however is reddish brown when fresh, while john-
strupite is brownish green. That they are two distinct minerals is
shown by their composition, which corresponds respectively with the
formulas (OH),F,H,,R,Na,CayCe,(SiO,)r» for mosandrite, and F,H,R,
Na,Ca,,Ce,MgAl(SiO,),, for johnstrupite. The similarity in composi-
tion and morphological properties between these two minerals and epi-
dote leads the author to regard them as members of same group.
Calciothorite is a deep reddish brown amorphous substance, with a hard-
ness of 4.5 and a sp. gr. of 4.114. Its composition is :
SiO, ThO, C&O, Y,O, AlO, Mn,O, CaO MgO Na,O H,O
Wate cosh. an, see tee ea 698 94, a BSD
corresponding to 5ThSiO, 2[Ca,SiO,]+ca. 10H,O. Hiort-
dahlite is a triclinic pyroxene occurring in small, thin, tabular crys-
tals of a yellowish or yellowish brown color Its crystallographic
constants are a : 4: c—=.9981 : I: -3537 a—89° 30' 57”, B=90° 29’
6, y=90° 6 10”. The crystals are elongated in the direction of the
576 The American Naturalist. [June,
vertical axis, and are flattened in the direction of the macropinacoid.
Like wohlerite, nearly all hiortdahlite crystals are twinned. In
the latter case the twinning plane is at right angles to the vertical axis,
and the combination face is the macropinacoid. ‘The axial angle
is large. The optically positive first bisectrix is EL inclined to
the vertical axes. The extinction on the œ Pæ is 25° and on œ P%
is about 15314°. No well marked cleavages are observed in any sec-
tions. The specific gravity is 3.235—3.267, and the composition :
SiO, TiO, ZrO ZrF,O Fe,O, FeO MnO CaO MgO Na,O H,O
$3.60 3:50 9.65 22,00 34 94 90 32.53 .¥O 6.53. .5§8
Cappelinite, the discovery of which was announced some years ago
by Brogger, occurs in hexagonal prisms with œ% P, 4 P and P. a:c:
==1. : 1.2903. Their double refraction is negative and their composi-
tion is as follows:
SO BLO, Y,O, LaO, CeO, Tho, BaO CaO Na,O K,O Loss
44,660 36:98 52.62'°2:97 -1.20 8 8.29 67 -.53...::22 «Gly
corresponding to the molecular combination of R,I¥Y(SiO,), and
R1!Y(BO,),. The hardness of the mineral is 6, and its specific gravity
is 4.407. It is regarded as a member of the melanocerite group, to
which also the following named mineral is supposed to belong. This
mineral, aryocerite, is likewise hexagonal. Its axial ratio is r :
1.1845, and its specific gravity 4.295. It differs from melanocerite in
containing much more cerium and thorium (CeO, and ThO,). It
occurs in nut-brown tables with a rhombohedral habit. Wetbyeite
occurs in small crystals with a tetragonal habit. In form they
resemble zircon, but are really orthorhombic, as their optical
investigation oe with the vertical axis that of least elasticity. æ-
: ¢=.9999 : 1: .64. It was impossible to separate the mineral from
the pairsite doita with it, but an analysis of the mixture leads to
the view that weibyeite corresponds in composition to the formula
[(Ce,La,Di)F],(CO,),.——Barkevikite, although long known as a
_ variety of hornblende, has received but little attention in recent years.
A new analysis shows it to have the following composition :
TiSiO, Al,O, FeO, FeO MnO CaO MgO NaO K,O
42.46 11.45 6.18 19.93 .75 10.24 1.11 6,08 1.44
Although chemically not very different from arfvedsonite, its physi-
cal properties readily distinguish it from this species. The extinc-
tion is 1234 in the acute £, while in arfvedsonite it is in obtuse £.
£890.] Botany. 577
This latter mineral is pleochroic in blue and green tints, while the
former is pleochroic in brown and brownish red tints. Barkevikite is
an essential constituent of the augite syenite occurring between the
fjords of Christiania and Langesund.——Sfangolite is proposed by
Penfield? as the name for a hydrated sulphate and chloride of copper,
occurring, probably, somewhere in the Globe District, Arizona. The
new mineral incrusts cuprite, and is associated with azurite and ataca-
mite (?). It is rhombohedral, with its crystals bounded by oP and a
series of pyramids of the second order. The cleavage is perfect par-
allel to oP. Etched figures produced on the basal plane by the use
of dilute acids are bounded by oP and scalenohedral faces. The
are all very clear, and all have an undoubted rhombohedral sym-
metry. By reflected light the mineral is dark green, while by trans-
mitted light it is light green. Pleochroism is slight. The double
refraction is strong and negative, with a=1.694, e==1.641. Hardness
on oP is 2, and on the pyramidal faces 3. Specific gravity is 3.141.
The average of four analyses gives:
SO, Gis ALO- Cuo- ILO
roit Afri G60 costr dot
corresponding to Cu,AICISO,+-9H,O.
BOTANY.
Some Reasons for Varieties not soon Wearing Out.—The
direct result of a union of two or more distinct protoplasmic masses, in
plant life, is a condensed, inactive, and transportable condition of the
life of the species, that is, a seed or spore. Among lower plants this
reproductive union usually takes place in the simplest manner, and at
times that are determined by unfavorable circumstances for a further
continuance of the life of the species in its ordinary rapidly-growing
condition. Thus the moulds form their resting spores when the pros-
pects are that resting spores will be most needed to carry the life of
the species over the approaching period of cold, drought, or lack of
food supply. The uniformity of the coming and going of the seasons
has its parallel in the uniformity with which the higher plants produce
their annual crop of seeds, In the great struggle for life that is going
on, it is perhaps true that some species have found it to their advan-
tage to form their seed early, and long before the time when the season
3 Amer. Jour. Science, May, 1890, p. 370.
578 The American Naturalist. [June,,
of approaching winter should suggest it. It may be that such species.
have learned by sad experience that with them it is early seeding or
none at all.
In the lowest forms of life there is not even the union of protoplasm
for the formation of the inactive state. The resting spores of the Bac-
teria are, as far as we know, ordinary cells, the protoplasm of which
is unusually protected by a thick cell wall. As we rise in the scale of
plant life, the points of origin of the two protoplasmic elements become
more widely separated. In the pond scums (Spirogyra) it may be that the
contents of adjoining cells unite to form the zygospore. Among
flowering plants this question brings in review the subject of sexual
separation, as worked out in the various lines of dimorphism, dichog-
amy, etc., until we arrive at the dicecious plants. From the bacterium
resting spores, formed out of the contents of a single cell, the two lines
diverge until we find their opposite extremities separated by dicecism ;
a condition in which for the formation of an offspring, corresponding
functionally with the primordial spore, there must be the union of a
particle of protoplasm of one community of individuals (tree or herb)
with another of a separate and otherwise independent community.
Another parallelism of differentiation may be seen. Among the
lower forms of life there is but little variation among the units; the
one reflects the other, and species are founded upon differences that
are only determined by-using the micrometer. The higher types show
not only a greater variation in the units, but the communities made
up of these have their distinct peculiarities. One white pine or
maple is not like all others of its kind.
It may, perhaps, be stated as a rule that where there is the greatest
separation of the sexes, within the limits of the law, there is the great-
est variation, or the extreme tendency to vary. If the union is between
different species, there are new lines of variability bestowed upon the
offspring. If this hybrid unites with another distinct hybrid, it is easy
to see that the current of tendencies is again made doubly complex,
and if the offspring is able to bear the load that the law of heredity
throws upon it (now a broken law), the result will be a set of plants.
almost as easily turned in their course as autumn leaves floating ona
sluggish stream,
Reproduction by union is a deeply laid plan among the higher
orders of plants. Many plants during one year prepare for its occur-
rence in the next. Pollen to be shed in the spring is pre-
pared the previous autumn, and the female germ cells are also already
made to receive the quickening dust. If we may judge of importance
1890. ] Botany. 579
by complication of structure, the process of bringing distant particles
of protoplasm together seems the leading end of many plants, If seeds
fail the plant has failed. Perennial plants, and those that are easily
propagated non-sexually, are less subject to the law of “union or
death’’ that prevails among annuals and biennials.
Reproduction by union among the lower forms of life is primarily to
place the species out of the jeopardy that otherwise might follow un-
toward circumstances, and also to facilitate its more thorough distribu-
tion. When we arrive as high in the scale as the ferns we find that the
union takes place once for all in the life of the fern plant, and that the
direct and immediate result is not a spore, but a plant upon which the
spores are afterwards borne annually in great numbers without further
fertilization. Each spore in germination produces a small, delicate
e of célls, the prothallus: one protoplasmic mass, the germ-cell of
the archegonium, grows into a fern plant after it has been stimulated
by the commingling with it of the male elements. Cases are on record
where the fern plant has developed from the prothallus without the
intervention of the antherozoids, but they are rare. A few plants may
go on for many years producing crops of spores, but it is the rule that
it. shall not begin this life of spore-bearing until a union has taken
place. In the moss the union precedes the formation of each capsule,
and each capsule bears a multitude of spores. For the same number of
spores it is easy to see that fewer unions are required in the moss than
in the pond scum, and more than in the fern. Although this union
enters into the plan of reproduction, its influence is far-reaching.
Only the mathematician can write the figures representing the number
of spores produced by a tropical tree fern through its long existence.
The moulds and low-water plants may rejuvenate by union upon
seemingly the slightest provocation. In the moss it means much more
than in the lower forms, and in the ferns it means infinitely more. As
we pass beyond the cryptogams, and study the flowering plants, may
` it not be safe to conclude that here, where the structures in the sexual
apparatus are vastly more complicated than upon the prothallus, we
have results that are correspondingly more lasting? It suffices for the
banyan-tree, that covers many acres, and the impulse of fertilization
lasts through the lifetime of the oldest trees, which is estimated to be
not less than four thousand years. Every seed that falls from the giant
red-wood has its spore in the vitality stimulated by the original union.
If.this be not true, then we are forced to believe that the union was
only serviceable, like the starch and oil in the cotyledons, for the initial
growth of the seedling. Whatever view we take, the assumption holds
580 The American Naturalist. [June,
that a union among flowering plants is more significant than with the
ferns and allied cryptogams. If this assumption seems reasonable, it
is not unsafe to conclude that it is not easy to limit the time that the
offspring of any union may exist.
On the same basis it may be asserted that the wider the union the
more vigorous the progeny, and the more certain it will be to succeed.
This statement rests on a broad basis of fact. Darwin’s work on
‘‘ Cross and Self Fertilization in the Vegetable Kingdom ” is a cor-
toboration of the Statement, that ‘‘ Nature abhors continual close
fertilization.” If the rule be reasonable among weed plants, it will
appear even more so among domestic vegetation, in so far as wideness
of fertilization is concerned. Nature has but comparatively few varie-
ties. They may take the initial step, but be crowded out, the struggle
being oftentimes too fierce. Among cultivated plants the conditions
are very different. The plants are removed from the intense action of
the law which determines the ‘survival of the fittest.” The weeds are
the best fitted to survive, but the hoe befriends the weaker and better
(for man) species. Cultivated plants, therefore, lead a life of compar-
ative peace, and their energies are expended along the lines that
the cultivator desires to follow. Variations appear, and are carefully
watched and propagated, and in time a new sort is established. The
conditions are vastly mare variable under which cultivated plants exist
than those of their wild allies. This leads to a wide range of charac-
teristics even in the same variety. Unions? therefore, are here more
powerful, under the rule that wild is more potent than close fertilization.
Each individual is the balance-sheet of a long series of forces, both of
within and without.
The two controlling laws of life, which for brevity’s sake may be
stated as: Like produces like, and, like produces unlike, doubtless
act everywhere. But the first prevails in the lower forms of plants
while the second dominates over the higher. As an extreme instance
note the human race with its millions of individuals, no two of which
are unmistakably alike. Even here the greatest variations are in the
more highly developed classes or nationalities, The type of gentleman
is more variable than the type of the Hottentot. The dominant motive
of the former is not so constant and all-absorbing as in the latter.
The wild plant exerts all its powers to keep even with its rivals. The
cultivated plant has thrown down its arms, and is active in building
| To rear young through
1890,] Zoology. 581
only the refractory and therefore worthless species will not acknowledge
him as master when he treats them like King.
There is therefore a strong argument in favor of the view that culti-
vated varieties should remain intact indefinitely if conditions for growth
remain constantly favorable.—Byron D. HALSTED, Rutgers College.
The Causes of Cypress Knees.—From the teleological stand-
point the the buttress function of the cypress knees was ably advanced
in the last number of the AMERICAN NATURALIST, and while reading the
article it occurred to me that the swaying of the trunk by winds would
unavoidably produce a pulling strain upon roots at any angle with the
tree, with a tendency to the elongation of such roots, particularly the
outermost ones, and with the rebound or push of the tree in the opposite
direction there would occur angularities at the points of greatest stress,
in such outer roots, with sap exudation at such angles, and the piling up
of indurated tissue in such forms as we find in the ‘‘knees.’’ Recollecting
that Herbert Spencer had dealt with plant morphology in a general
way, Ilooked up the reference, and believe that his Chapter II., Part V.,
Vol. II., Principles of Biology, covers the subject admirably, especially
in the words of Sec. 279: ‘* Many commonplace facts indicate that
the mechanical strains to which upright gravity plants are exposed,
themselves cause increase of the dense deposits by which such plants
are enabled to resist such’strains.’’—S, V. CLEVENGER, Chicago.
È
ZOOLOGY.
Phymosoma.—A, E. Shipley has recently published his complete
paper! on the anatomy of the West Indian gephyrean Phymosoma
varians. Above the mouth is the horseshoe-shaped lophophore, ipm
bears a varying number (but always even) of tentacles; below
vascular lower lip. Both lip and lophophore have a skeleton which
gives attachment to the retractor muscles. The nervous system con-
sists of a bilobed brain connected with the ectoderm within the lopho-
phore, This gives rise to three pairs of nerves, one supplying the pig-
mented tissue of the region in front of the mouth, the second sending
branches to the tentacles, while the third, sending a branch on either
side of the cesophagus, unites below in the ventral nerve cord, which
shows no traces of double origin, and which is not ganglionated.
From it arises at intervals a single median nerve, which later divides
1 Quarterly Jour. Micros Sci., XXXI., p. 1, Apr., 1890.
Am. No june 6.
582 The American Naturalist, [June,
and forms a circular nerve around the body. ‘The circulatory system
is closed. It consists of two plexuses, one in the lophophore, and the
other in the lower lip. These are connected with a reservoir or dor-
sal tube lying on the cesophagus, and at the junction of reservoir and
plexuses there is a large blood sinus almost completely surrounding the
brain. The animals are dicecious, the generative organs occurring at
the points of origin of the ventral retractors. Mr. Shipley thinks that
the evidence presented by Phymosoma lends additional weight to the
view that Phoronis should be regarded as related to the Gephyrea
inermia,
Molluscs of the Albatross Explorations.2—The United
States Fish Commission steamer Albatross made collections on her
voyage from the Chesapeake through the Straits of Magellan and
north to California, Mr. Dall has reported upon part of the mol-
luscs. As might have been expected, the cruise resulted in many
novelties and varieties in forms from depths of over one hundred
fathoms. The account opens with an interesting discussion of the
environments of deep sea life, and its effect upon the molluscan fauna.
It is interesting to note that molluscs which belong to phytophagous
groups are, from the absence of plant life in the deep sea, obliged to
put up with a diet of Foraminifera, and as a result the digestive organs
are greatly increased in calibre, the termination of the intestine pro-
longed beyond the body, so that the fæces are deposited away from
the gills. Deep sea mollusc shells are remarkably free from those
countersunk holes produced by the radula of carnivorous gastropods,
a fact which leads the author to conclude that they do not live in per-
petual conflict with each other; that the struggle is against environ-
ment rather than against molluscan enemies. The systematic portion
begins with the brachiopods (why this association of brachiopods and
molluscs?) and then follow acephals and gastropods. In the text are
numerous interesting points, among them the fact that the embryos of
Scaphella magellanica possesses a membranous protoconch, the exist-
ence of which explains the peculiar apex of the shell of the adult.
"2 Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., XII., 1889 [1890].
* Jenaische Zeitschrift, XXIV., p. 227, 1890.
1890.] Zoology. 583
end of the glandular portion of the nephridium, This latter portion
runs backward beneath the pericardium until it reaches the posterior
adductor muscle, It then bends upward and enters a three-chambere
portion lying in the angle between the pericardium and posterior
adductor. From thence the organ runs forward parallel to the glan-
dular portion, until, at about the level of the nephrostome, the ureter
goes downward and outward to the exterior. The histological charac.
ters of the different portions are described. In returning from the
"` different portions of the body the blood mostly enters the sinus venosus,
but some goes directly to the chambered portion of the nephridium.
That which enters the sinus can pass through numerous openings, so
as to bathe the external surface of the nephridial cell-walls. By care-
ful maceration with nitric acid, Dr. Rankin traced the nerve supply of
the organ, and finds that it receives an anterior innervation from the
cerebro-visceral commissures, and a posterior from the visceral gan-
glion. The question of the taking up of water is discussed. Dr.
Rankin describes the valves in the course of the circulatory organs,
and thinks that their position and mode of action is sufficient to
explain all the phenomena of expansion of the foot, etc., without re-
course to the absorption of water.
The Dorsal Papille of Nudibranchs.—Dr. W. A. Herdman
enumerates‘ three types of projections upon the dorsal surface of the
Nudibranch molluscs. These are (1) the dorsal tentacles (Rhino-
phore) ; (2) the true branchiz, and (3) the dorsal papilla (Cerata),
The last—Cerata—are regarded as outgrowths of the epipodial ridge,
and frequently are considered as organs of respiration. They may be
divided into those which contain diverticula of the liver (hepato-
cerata), and those which are mere outgrowths of the body wall (parieto-
cerata). Dr. Herdman thinks that these cerata play at most but a
moderate part in respiration, and thinks this is shown by the fact that
they coëxist in many forms along with the true branchiæ, and that in
all cases they contain no more numerous blood vascular spaces th:
does the adjacent skin. On the other hand, he regards them as pro-
tective either by causing the animal to resemble closely its surround-
ings, or, as in the case of Eolis, by making the animal conspicuous,
and warning all fishes, etc., to let it alone because of the stinging
organs in the cerata. These last are described and figured. The
hepatic cæca extend a considerable distance into the tentacle, and
then are continued directly into a ‘‘ connecting tube,” which in turn
opens into the cnidiphorous sac, which is evidently an invagination of
t Quart. Jour. Micros. Sci., XXXI., p. 41, 1890.
584 The American Naturalist. [June,
the ectoderm, containing numbers of large cells filled with thread cells.
Herdman confirms the view, lately disputed, that the hepatic ceca
are in communication with the exterior v/a the connecting tube and
the external orifice of the cnidiphorous sac.
Zoological News.—General.—C. F. Marshall returns to the
discussion of the histology of the muscle fibre.' After a discussion of
some of the recent literature and a reply to Rollett’s criticisms of the net-
work theory, Marshall reaffirms his belief in the view that in rapidly
contracting muscles (transversely striated) the portions differentiated to
perform the contraction form a regular and highly modified intracel-
lular network the longitudinal fibres of which produce the contractions,
while the transverse meshes give the striated appearance to these muscles.
He farther describes the development of the network in the trout and
rat, and concludes that its transverse portions are directly connected
with the muscle corpuscle, the longitudinal with the nerve end. The
network developes first at the surface, and extends centripetally, and
each muscle fibre appears to be developed from a single cell.
Worms,.—Chetobranchus is a new genus of Oligochztes described ?
by A. G. Bowman from fresh water of Madras. It is remarkable in
having elongate processes (a pair to a segment) on the dorso-lateral
portions of the body. These processes diminish in length from before
backward, until at about the middle of the body they appear as mere
warts upon the surface. As each contains a loop of the lateral blood-
vessel as well as a diverticulum of the ccelom (and some of the dorsal
setze) they are regarded as respiratory in function. Reproduction by
fission was observed, but no budding zone was recognised.
Arthropoda—A. D. Michael has been studying the variations in
the female reproductive organs of Uropoda, 3 a genus of Acarina. In
these forms the ovipositor is replaced by a “‘ vestibule’’ leading from
the vagina to the exterior. This structure is quite complicated, and is
surrounded by complex organs. In U. ovalis these structures are ar-
ranged so that during copulation the spermatozoa pass,into the recep-
taculum seminis, but are prevented from entering the vagina, while later
they may be forced into the latter organ. In U. vegetans the relations
are much the same. In U. krameri the vestibule is adapted for strip-
ping the shell from the egg at the time of laying, so that the larve
emerge from the egg at the time of oviposition.
Quart. Jour. Micros. Sci., XXXI, p. 65, 1890.
2 Quart. Jour. Micros. Sci., XXXI, p. 83, 1890.
3 Jour. Roy. Micros, Socy-, April, 1890.
1890.] Zoology. 585
Mr. Cecil Warburton, in an interesting study * of the spinning habits
of the spider Zperra diademata, comes to some conclusions at variance
with those usually held. By entrapping spiders while spinning, and
then studying the spinnerets with the lens, he finds that the line does
not usually consist of many threads fused together, but ordinarily of two
or four distinct threads. His paper is supplementary to and to a large
part confirmative of a recent one by Apstein. Experimentation of
the same kind is easily conducted, and will lead to interesting results.
Caelom and Nephridia in Palemon.—W. F. R. Weldon
finds? that shortly after injecting a one per cent. solution of indigo
carmine into the tissues of the prawn, it will be found aggregated in
the anterior portion of the thorax. He finds there a cephalothoracic
sac extending from the gonad forward to the anterior end of the body,
giving off at each anterior angle tubes which connect the organ with
the green gland. The structure of this latter differs from Grobbin’s
account. From the above it appears probable that Weldon has here
the long sought Arthropod ccelom, and the conclusive evidence that
the green glands are true nephridia. The close connection of the
gonad with the coelomic sac is also suggestive. This goes far toward
supporting the views of Lankester and Sedgwick that the ccelom and
blood-vascular spaces of the Arthropods are distinct, and that the
general perivisceral space of a crayfish or a grasshopper is not to be
compared with the body cavity of an annelid or vertebrate.
Fishes.—The results of the deep sea dredging by the U. S. Fish
Commission are now being published by the U. S. National Museum.
The first paper is by Messers. Goode and Bean, and includes seventy new
species, A list of all known deep sea fishes accompanies the description
of these. Among the novelties is a new genus of Chimzridz, which
has an extremely elongate muzzle. There are many other interesting
forms. The fishes collected by the steamer Albatross are the subject of
a report by Prof. C. H. Gilbert. Ninety-six species of this list are new.
They are mostly from the Pacific Ocean near the Galapagos Islands.
The expedition to explore the waters of the Valley of the Tennessee,
sent by the U. S. Fish Commission under Prof. Jordan, have published
their report. They found fourteen new species, the genus most largely
represented by novelties being Etheostoma, of which the largest known
species, Æ. rex Jord., was obtained. No exploration of this region has
been made since that by Prof. Cope in 1869.
$ Quart. Jour. Micros. Sci., XXXI, p. 29 1890. i
1 Jour. Marine Biol. Assn., No. II., p. 162, 1869.
586 The American Naturalist. [June,
Reptiles.—Mr. Boulenger figures in the proceedings of the Zoolog-
ical Society of London the Python curtus of Hubrecht, a species long
overlooked, but which is widely distributed in Malaysia, continental
and insular,
M. F. Bocourt describes and figures in the last number of Mision
Scientifique de Mexique the Colubrine snakes of that country, including
Pityophis, Spilotes, Coluber, etc. The plates are admirable.
Prof. E. D. Cope describes, in the late Proceedings of the U.S.
National Museum, the reptil d Batrachia obtained during the voyage
of the U. S. Fish Commission steamer Albatross around S. America to
the west coast of N. America. He rehabilitates the genera Batrachyla
Bell, and Nannophryne Gthr., which were founded upon species from
Patagonia, describes a new Zachznus from that country, and a new
Phyllodactylus and Tropidurus, each from the Galapagos Islands. He
shows that in Tropidurus it is the females that are more brilliantly
colored than the males, contrary to the rule in the allied genera Scel-
oporus and Liocephalus. The colors are red, while in Sceloporus
they are blue.
Mammalia.—In the Bulletin of the American Museum of Natural
History of New York, Dr. E. A. Mearns, U. S. A., describes a number
of new Mammalia from Arizona. They are as follows: „Sciurus hud-
sontus mogallonensis, Fiber zibethicus pallidus, Flesperomys leucopus
arenicolus; Sigmodon hispidus arizone; Lepus allenii; L. melanotis,
podomys merianii; D. chapmanii ; and Cynomys arizonensis.
EMBRYOLOGY.
Prof. Weismann on the Transmission of Acquired Epi-
lepsy.—The chief instance favoring the transmission of acquired char-
acters which Prof. Weismann finds difficulty in explaining is evidently
the series of experiments with reference to artificial epilepsy in guinea-
pigs performed independently by Brown-Sequard and Obersteiner.
I judge that Prof. Weismann himself regards this as the case presenting
the greatest difficulties for his theory, since he has treated it in particu-
lar twice in the Essays upon Heredity, summarily in pages 81-82, and
at length in pages 310-319, written in 1887, and also since he refers to
it as . the only definite instance which has hitherto been brought for-
ward in Support of the transmission of acquired characters.” (P. 319-)
Prof. Weismann acknowledges the results of the experiments to be
18g0.] f Embryology. 587
that various lesions of nervous substance in guinea-pigs are followed
by epilepsy, and the offspring are often affected with nervous disorders,
and sometimes with epilepsy. He defends his theory in two ways,
first, by referring to infection as the true cause, and not heredity (p.
82, pp. 312-315); secondly, by pointing out the difficulty of con-
ceiving the method of transmission upon either a preformation or
epigenetic theory (pp. 315-319). Both these lines of argument are, it .
will be noticed, in the region of hypothesis and supposition,
As to the first point, there is no distinct evidence, as he himself
admits, that epilepsy is caused by bacillus; and, in fact, in some cases
it cannot be (p. 314), and yet he conceives that the transmission is by
a bacillus from an infected part reaching to and attacking germ-plasm.
The question here, as often elsewhere in the Essays, is resolved not so
much into a matter of fact as a matter for conception. But how does
the bacillus hypothesis simplify the problem for the imagination? If
the microbe reaches the germ-cell how can it attack it any more than a
“ molecule of the brain of an epileptic animal ?’’ (p. 310). If it could
attack the germ-plasm, we have still the same fundamental difficulty as
with transmission of acquired character, namely, as to how the bacillus
can excite in the germ, not epilepsy itself, which is impossible, but
such a peculiar disturbance of some peculiar molecular order that
epilepsy will result after the many stages of evolution in a certain part
of acertain tissue in the developed animal. That is, we must bring
against the bacillus theory the same objection which he brings against
the epigenetic when he asks how the germ-plasm can receive, ‘‘ not
indeed the peculiar structure of the stage itself, but such a molecular
constitution as will ensure the ultimate appearance of epilepsy in the
offspring.” (P. 318). Prof. Weismann concludes that there is trans-
mission, but one ‘‘ which cannot depend upon heredity, and is in all
probability due to infection.’’ But if this method of infection is ad-
mitted, do we not have here, in a wide but true sense, heredity, a real
transmission of acquired character, the acquired infectious (?) disease
is transmitted to offspring ; the offspring alike inherit it, whether we
suppose the method of transmission to the sperm or germ-cell be by
transference of bacillus, or of diseased molecules, or of gemmules, or
any other way. By acknowledging that the continuous germ-plasm is
affected, no matter how, but by or through acquired charactcr, so that
the character reappears in offspring, does not Prof. Weismann really
concede the point at issue z
With reference to the second point, the reductio ad absurdum of
other theories, it is quite possible to urge against the continuity theory
588 The American Naturalist. [June,
itself many of the same objections which Prof. Weismann brings against
the gemmule and epigenetic hypotheses. The inconceivability as to
number and complexity of gemmules is quite matched by the incon-
ceivable complexity of a germ-plasm, which in the sixth generation is
composed of 32 ancestral germ-plasms, in the tenth generation of 1024,
etc., even if the reduction by one-half be accomplished for each gen-
eration as explained pp. 357, ff. Moreover, must not each of these
germ-plasms be divided by the vast number of ova or spermatozoa
which appear in any individual’s lifetime, and which are all potential
for a possible conception ? I am not aware that Prof. Weismann treats
this point; but at any rate it is difficult to see how, upon his hypothe-
Sis, we can escape getting down within a few generations to the ulti-
mate unit which ‘cannot be divided without the loss of its essential
nature.” (P. 357.)
The fundamental difficulty, the causing from a remote part of the
organism such a peculiar effect upon the germ that the disease re-
appears in the developed organism, this problem is unsolved by the
bacillus hvpothesis, as also by the gemmule and epigenetic hypotheses.
But do we need these hypotheses? This must be granted, that the
germ-plasm, whether continuous or not, is a living being within the
body and also of it (cf., pp. 103, 170, 267, e¢ passim); that the law of
interdependence of function—disorder in one function exciting sym-
pathetic affections in others—applies to reproduction ; that farther, the
ference of abnormal motion rather than matter? It seems probable
that epilepsy, for example, could cause specific changes in the germ,
but this may not be heredity, which is a specific effect of such a nature
Spermatozoon and ovum, and how this effect is carried through conju-
gation and development.
1890. ] Archeology and Ethnology. 589
It would be rash in our present knowledge to say that all influences
made upon the germ are of the transmitting type; but as to this case
of artificial epilepsy we may affirm that such evidence as we have points
to general and even special heredity of acquired character through
some affection of the germ produced by that character. A nervous
disorder, epilepsy, tends to produce in offspring some nervous disorder.
It is plain that if there is any effect upon the offspring from this dis-
ease, it is upon the nervous tissue rather than upon any other tissue or
function, and this deserves to be called general heredity; and so far
as the special disorder is communicated, this may be called specific
heredity. If a nervous disease tends to produce in offspring nervous
disease of any kind, this is so far heredity,
It seems to me, then, that Prof. Weismann’s theory of non-trans-
missibility of acquired character fails even when tried by his own
presentation of this test case, but it is certainly to be desired, as he
intimates (p. 82) that the series of experiments should be carefully and
thoroughly followed up. We certainly owe much to Prof. Weismann’s
hypothesis, but it is not too much to say that it is still unproved in
point of fact, and unsatisfactory as yet to the scientific imagination, at
least so far as artificial epilepsy is conserved.—HiramM M. STANLEY.
ARCHASOLOGY AND ETHNOLOGY. !
Prof. F. W. Putnam, Curator of the Peabody Museum of American
Archeology and mS in Cambridge, closes his last report in
the following manner
“Thus there are the foll ts to be taken int
in any endeavor to trace the siesta t North American tribes and nations
back to their origin. First, small, oval-headed, paleolithic man. Sec-
ond, the long-headed Eskimo. Third, the long-headed people south
ofthe Eskimo. Fourth, theshort-headed race of the southwest. Fifth,
the Carib element of the southeast. All these elements must be studied
with their differences in physical characteristics, in arts and in languages
From a commingling of all, with greater or less predominance of one
over the other, uniting here and subdividing there, through many
thousand years, there has finally resulted an American people having
many characteristics in common, notwithstanding their great diversity
in physical characteristics, in arts, in customs and in languages. To
1 This department is edited by Thomas Wilson, Esq., Smithsonian Instiution, Wash-
ington, D. C.
>
590 The American Naturalist. [June,
this heterogeneous people the name Indian was given, in misconception,
nearly four hundred years ago, and now stands as a stumbling-block
in the way of anthropological research ; for under the name resem-
blances are looked for and found, while differences of as great import-
ance in the investigation are counted as mere variations from the type.
‘Tt is in such museums as this at Cambridge that the facts are now
being gathered, and we may hope in time to be able to determine
aright the complicated history of the ancient people of America.”’
Without sanctioning the classification of human races in North Amer-
ica, adopted as above by Prof. Putnam, I cite with commendation and
approval the idea expressed in the last paragraph. The average arch-
eologist of the United States has been in times past but little more
than a collector of Indian relics. He sought to gather or obtain rare
or handsome objects, and these qualities measured . their value in his
eyes. Such collections, viewed from the standpoint of the real arch-
æologist, are of but little if any value. ‘Their real service to the
science of archeology begins when they shall be put to the use sug-
gested by Prof. Putnam; when, in either large or small collections,
better in the former, they can be spread out, assorted, classified and
divided, they may assist in determining the races of people, as has been
attempted by Prof. Putnam in the foregoing paragraph.
Classification of Arrows or Spear-heads or Knives in the
National Museum.—Collectors of Indian relics have gathered in
all times past quantities of arrow-heads, called ‘‘flints,’’ but usually
without any attempt at classification or arrangement. The National
Museum has sought to make a classification by which these implements
may be recognized and described. Such an attempt was made some
years ago, but the divisions were so close and the distinctions so finely
drawn that it was scarcely possible to follow them. It made so many
classes that one could not remember them all, nor identify to which one
a given object belonged. In the classification just made the divisions
have sought to be broadened and the lines between them deeply drawn
and easily recognized. It is as follows:
STONE, ARROWS OR SPEAR-HEADS OR KNIVES.
Class—Leaf-shaped—Sub-class A. Thin and finely-chipped imple-
ments of the form of a laurel leaf—elliptical and pointed at both ends.
_ They correspond substantially with the French Solutreen type of the
Paleolithic period of the Stone Age.
Sub-class B. These may be thicker and ruder than Sub-class A.
Some are more oval, and the bases are not pointed, but are either
1890.] Archeology and Ethnology. 591
straight or convex. This class includes the leaf-shaped argillite imple-
ments found by Dr. Abbott in the Delaware river gravels at Trenton,
Sub-class C. Long, thin blades, with nearly straight edges, more
like a dagger or poignard. The base may be either convex, straight
or concave. Many of them show traces of attachment to a handle by
means of bitumen or gum. They are peculiar to the Pacific Slope.
Triangular.—This class includes all forms approaching a triangle,
whether the bases or edges be convex, straight or concave. They are
without stems, and, consequently, without shoulders, but in some speci-
mens the concavity of the base produces barbs.
Stemmed.—This class includes all varieties of stems, whether straight,
pointed or expanding, and all varieties of bases and edges, whether
convex, straight or concave.
Sub-class A. Lozenge-shaped
Sub-class B. Shouldered, but not barbed.
Sub-class C. Shouldered and barbed.
Note. Nearly all of these convex bases are smooth, as though they had been worn.
e purpose or cause of this is unknown.
Peculiar forms.—These have such peculiarities as distinguish them
from all other classes, but by reason of their restricted number or local-
ity can scarcely form a class of themselves.
Sub-class A. -Beveled edges. The bevel is almost always in one
direction.
Sub-class B. Serrated edges.
Sub-class C. Bifurcated stems.
New Archzological Discoveries.—These seem to be made in
every land with about equal frequency. I have wondered if the aver-
age archzologist (I do not expect it of mere collectors) has ever
thought of the evidence afforded by the number of these discoveries as
to the length of time of prehistoric human occupation, or the density
of the prehistoric population. As mere finds of stone hatchets or
arrow-heads, spear-heads or knives, bits of pottery, shell, bone, etc.,
these discoveries are regarded by the finders as of value only to the
amount of money for which the objects can be sold. This value is
practically nothing compared with what it might be to science if the
locality, conditions, association of the objects when found, were accu-
rately noted and truthfully recorded, so as to be used in making up the
history of prehistoric man.
592 The American Naturalist. [June,
Archzologic or Archzological.—Which is correct, or are both
correct? Is there any difference in their meaning, or any distinction
in the phrases or senses in which they can be used? If both words
mean exactly the same thing, why not discard one or the other, and
why use them indifferently ?
Human and Animal Remains.—(Dr. J. L. Wortman).—The
proper collection and preservation of human and animal remains is
important. Not infrequently, material of high scientific value is
allowed to perish through lack of knowledge of effective method of
preservation. Some of the methods are so crude, and the skill of col-
lectors so primitive, that the material when collected is almost worth-
less. Many remains looked upon by the inexperienced as hopelessly
decayed, can, in the hands of the experienced collector, be made of
interest and importance to science.
It is a popular error that the anatomist can restore or reconstruct a
skeleton from a few scattered fragments. Where the structure of the
animal is known this may be done, but with imperfectly known species
the entire skeleton is indispensable to a complete knowledge of its
osteology. This is true of the human species for the determination of
these racial differences or affinities displayed in their skeletons. For
ese purposes not only one, but many skeletons may be required, and
it should be the object of the collector to provide the requisite material,
and in such a condition as to be of the highest possible scientific value.
The best method of procedure is perhaps open to question. It de-
pends upon a variety of conditions, such as character of matrix or soil,
the condition of the skeleton, its state of preservation, mode of burial,
etc. The best method of precedure can only be indicated in a general
way. Suppose a skeleton rather friable, buried in loose, dry earth.
How shall he proceed? Unnecessary and dangerous explorations
with the coarser instruments, such as pick and shovel, must be avoided.
Approaching the skeleton, he should explore it with care, using some
all instrument, say a hand-trowel. He should make due allowance
for the prominences, as the anterior superior curve of the spine, possi-
bly the ribs, as they are frequently found in their natural position ; the
frontal eminence of the skull, etc.
After the superimposed earth has been removed, cut a trench a foot
or so deep on either side of the skeleton, at enough distance to avoid
injury to any of the bones—this for convenience in removing the earth
from around the bones. Begin at either the head or feet, and remove
the dirt bit by bit with the trowel, supplemented by small scrapers of
1890.] Archeology and Ethnology. 593
wire flattened and ground to a chisel edge. These will be useful in
cleaning out the cavities. The earth can be brushed away, and the
specimens kept clean for observation, using softer brushes as required,
so that no injury may be done to the bones. If the specimen crumbles
upon exposure to the air, so as to endanger its safety, expose only a
small surface of the bone at a time, apply the preservative, and let it
dry, after which a little more can be exposed, and so continued until
the skeleton is finished.
If the bones are in a fair state of preservation, an entire skull, or,
for this matter, the whole skeleton, may be exposed, cleaned with the
brush, and the preservative applied. Before applying the preservative
remove the dirt thoroughly from the surface of the bone. If this is
neglected the preservative when applied will cause the dirt or earth
allowed to remain to adhere so firmly that it cannot afterwards be
removed without serious damage to the specimen.
Take a skull, for example, part of a skeleton buried in its natural
position. One would begin, say at the forehead, and remove the dirt,
little by little, until the whole is more or less exposed, using the small
implements according to necessity ; and so continuing, with care that
the bone is not broken, until the whole is neatly and thoroughly
cleaned. It is a good practice to leave the dirt in the deeper parts of
the cavities, such as the nose, the deeper parts of the orbits, etc. Next
use the preservative, giving a thin coat upon the more exposed por-
tions, avoiding for the present the uncleaned cavaties, that no dirt
may be cemented to any portion of the bone. After the preservative
is well dried remove the skull from its bed, taking special pains to
avoid breaking it. Next remove the lower jaw, being watchful that
none of the teeth are lost, clean the cavities and the interior, and
finally paint it thoroughly both inside and outside with the preserva-
tive.
In the vicinity of where the root of the tongue has been will gener-
ally be found the hyoid or tongue bone or bones. In the adult or
aged person they generally consist of one piece, somewhat in the form
of the letter U, but in the young, and sometimes in the old, they con-
sist of separate pieces. They should always be preserved with the
test care, and placed with the skull to which they belong. The
collector should familiarize himself with their appearance, either by
examining a recent skeleton or by consulting some standard work upon
human anatomy. This method can be continued for the rest of the
skeleton, and can be employed for other animal remains.
594 The American Naturalist. [June,
The preservative which has proved best in my hands (and I speak
from a large experience with almost all known material) is the ordinary
shellac dissolved in commercial alcohol. The first coat or two I use
tolerably thin so that the porous bone may take it up. It may be found
necessary to use several coats before the specimen can be handled, and
it is always best to finish off with a thick solution. The judgement and.
experience of the collector must be his guide in this matter, as it is
impossible to lay down any definite rule. .
Notwithstanding many coats of shellac the articular extremities of
the long bones may be still friable, while their shafts are moderately
strong. This I have been able to remedy by plunging them (the
articular ends) into hot wax. The wax should not be too hot nor
should they be left in too long. A minute or two is enough for their
complete saturation. It may also be necessary to give the bodies of
the vertebræ and the weaker parts of the innominate bones to a similar
treatment.
The foregoing description applies to skeletons buried in dry earth.
Where it is damp or wet no attempt should be made at removal until
the earth is dry. All but two or three inches of the super-imposed
earth can be removed, and left for a few days’ sunshine to put it in
proper condition. Loose teeth or fragments of bone should be care-
fully gathered up, wrapped in Separate packages and placed with the
skeleton. Every bone should be preserved and nothing thrown away.
separate box. If the skull is unusually liable to breakage it is a good
plan to provide a separate box for it also, but it should bear the same
number as the skeleton to which it belongs. It will be found that
the best material for packing is either soft paper, chaff, or very soft.
straw or hay, and after each layer sift the interstices fud/ of sawdust
or bran. This, if well done, will prevent all movement or shaking of
the specimens. Breakage of this kind is fatal, and generally results in
permanent injury to the specimen,
What has been said as to the preservation of human remains applies
wit hammer or chisel, requiring the appliances and skill of a well-ap-
pointed laboratory. In all cases of this kind it js best to take the
specimen out in a block of the matrix if possible, and pack as before
directed, and ship it in this condition.—J. L. WORTMAN.
1890. ]} Proceedings of Scientific Societies. 595
PROCEEDINGS OF SCIENTIFIC SOCIETIES.
Boston Society of Natural History.—March 19th.—Dr. H.
V. Wilson read a paper, On the Formation of the Alimentary Canal
and the Lateral Line in Teleosts. Photographs of the spinning work
of spiders were exhibited by Mr. Horace P. Chandler, and remarks on
the same were made by Mr, J. H. Emerton.—J. WALTER FEWKES, Sec.
Biological Society of Washington.—April 19th.—The follow-
ing communications were read: Dr. W. H. Dall—Exhibition of Orig-
inal Drawings of the Fur Seal and Steller’s Sea Cow, executed by a
member of Behring’s Expedition of 1742; Dr. C. Hart Merriam—
Historical Review of the Faunal and Flora Divisions that have been
proposed for North America ; Prof. Jos. F. James—On Variation, with
special reference to certain Paleozoic Genera; Mr. B. T. Galloway—
Observations on the Flora of Missouri; Mr. C. L. Hopkins—Charac-
teristic Vegetation of the Cliff Dwellers Cañon near Flag Staff, Arizona.
May 3d.—The following communications were read: Dr, Robert
Reyburn—The Life History of Micro-organisms, with its Relation to
the Theory of Evolution; Dr. George Vasey—A New Grass Genus;
of. W. H. Seaman—The Place of Biology in Public Schoo] Instruc-
tion ; Mr. F. A, Lucas — The Present Status of the Aurochs.
May 17th.—The following communications were read: Dr. Erwin
F. Smith—A New Species of the Genus Aphis; Mr. T. S. Palmer—
Some Early Views of the Geographical Distribution of Species; Mr.
Frederick W. True. —Exhibition of a Specimen of EEE imhaustt,
a rare and remarkable Rodent from Africa; Prof. W. H. Seaman —
The Place of Biology in Public School wie atolgpret ire A.
Lucas, Secretary.
Archzological Association of the University of EAN
vania.—April z5th—Dr. C. C. Abbott, Curator of the Museum,
read a paper on Implements from the Workshop of a Prehistoric Cop-
persmith.
The Indiana Academy of Science began its spring meeting at
Greencastle, Indiana, Thursday evening, May 8. Prof. C. A. Waldo
presided. Prof. C. Leo Mees delivered an address upon “ Inertia,
with reference to Electricity.’’ Friday was devoted to an excursion
to Fern Cliff, an interesting region some miles from Greencastle. In
the evening a number of short accounts were given of the experiences
of the day, with discussion of the local natural history. Thes ers
were Profs. J. C. Arthur, C. A. Dryer, C. W. Hargitt, Stanley Coulter,
D. H. Campbell, C. A. Waldo, and O. P. Jenkins, Dr. J. P. D. John
596 The American Naturalist. [June,
presided. Saturday the members visited Eel River Falls. The Acad-
emy was hospitably entertained by the citizens of Greencastle.
Chicago Academy of Sciences.—April 8th.—Lieut. F. M. Beall,
Signal Officer U. S. A., presented a paper: ‘‘The Recent Cyclone
and its Attending Tornadoes.’’—C. E. WEBSTER, Recorder.
Proceedings of the Natural Science Association of Staten
Island.—April 10, 1890.—Mr. Ira K. Morris presented a brass spur,
of Spanish fashion, which was lately plowed up on the Poor House
farm, and read the following paper in connection with it:
This spur was found by one of the workmen on the county farm,
while ploughing, in February last. It is composed of solid brass, and
the wheel must have originally been at least one and a-half inches in
_ diameter. Much surprise is expressed by Staten Islanders at the find-
ing of a spur of its pattern in such an out-of-the-way place. Yet, it
seems possible to trace its simple history.
During the Revolution there stood a small Holland cottage, built of
stone, and with long, sloping roof, on or near the spot where the
County Alms House is now located. The story is handed down to us
that it was occupied by a sturdy patriot whose open hatred for royalty
and whose unfriendliness to the British soldiers gave considerable an-
noyance to General Howe, who directed that a guard must be placed
upon the premises until some breach should be committed sufficient to.
cause his arrest.
The mounted patrol of the Island*was under the command of Lieu-
tenant-Colonel Simcoe, of the ‘‘ Queen’s Rangers,” and it is said that
that notorious officer frequently visited the old cottage, not so much
to test the loyalty or watch the movements of its owner, as to enjoy the
companionship of his beautiful daughter.
Colonel Simcoe did not dress strictly in accordance with the British
army regulations, and Ihave seen a portrait of him in which he wore
the Spanish spur, with its large wheel. Appreciating, as he must have,
the superiority of this spur over the small, fine wheel worn by the
Englishmen, it is only reasonable to assume that his men were provided
with it also. During the exciting period following the earnest appeal
of Colonel Aaron Burr to General Washington, to besiege the fortifica-
tions on Staten Island, especially at ‘ Richmond towne,” a detail of
Simcoe’s mounted men was made daily for many months. Skirmishes
frequently occurred near the old cottage, between American troops
from New Jersey and the ‘‘ Rangers ” and their native Tory friends.
It was near the close of the war that the severest, and from what we
now know, the last skirmish occurred in that vicinity. During a
severe storm, and under the cover of intense darkness, a detachment
1890.] Proceedings of Scientific Societies. 597
of Americans crossed the Kills, and losing their way, wandered about
for some time until attracted by a light in the window of the old cot-
tage. Simcoe’s men were lurking about the premises at the time, and
listened to the directions given by its occupant concerning the where-
abouts of the British soldiery.
As soon as the Americans had departed Simcoe’s subordinate en-
tered the cottage and informed the unfortunate man what he had
seen and heard, at the same time stating that he had authority to exe-
cute him without trial or delay. The man appealed for mercy until
he could acquaint General Howe (who was renowned for his leniency
and kindheartedness) of the facts, and the daughter prayed for an
interview with Colonel Simcoe, whom she believed would save her
father’s life. But justice and mercy were unknown among the brutal
“ Queen’s Rangers,’’ from the Lieutenant-Colonel down to the hum-
blest private; yet they well suspected the influence that the pretty
girl might exercise under the existing circumstances. As “murder ”
and ‘‘ plunder ’’ were ever the watchwords of that infamous organiza
tion, there seemed to be no time to lose. The guard drew near, with
the exception of the pickets, and, with the assistance of ever-willing
Tories, all the occupants of the cottage were pinioned to their chairs.
The husband and father was taken out to a tree, a rope quickly placed
around his neck, and in a few seconds he was suspended from a limb,
and his soul was hurled into eternity. The tree on which this execu-
tion took place stood in front of the old ‘‘farmer’s house” on the
county farm, and I once conversed with an an old Staten Islander
who remembered it well. Decayed and worm-eaten, it could no longer
bear its own weight, and it fell to the ground in a terrible wind storm
that swept over the Island about 1827.
The ‘‘ Spanish ”’ spur, as it is called to day, and of which this relic
is a fair specimen, is not an invention of the Spaniards. In a cum-
brous form it bears equal date with the establishment of battle armor,
such as was used by the Egyptians considerably more than ten cen-
turies before the Christian era. During the Crusades—the third, if I
mistake not—the spur was ‘‘ remodeled ’’ by order of Cœur de Lion,
and made in the exact style of the relic here presented. About two
centuries ago the ‘changers of fashion’’ thought it too heavy for
light riding, and the English spur, with its small wheel and thin foot-
piece, was substituted. In Spain and other European countries, as
well as in Mexico and the Western States o seem the
spur is used almost exclusively.
Aue there is a popular belief to the contrary, it is far less
‘c cruel”? than the fine English spur. A horse once well broken to its
Am, Nat.—June.—7-
p?
ge The American Naturalist. [June,
use need only to hear the familiar “clink,” « clink,’’ as his rider
paces beside him, before mounting, to go for half a day at a time with-
out necessitating its use.
It is with pleasure that this relic, mystical though its history may be,
is presented to the Association. While its true story may never be
told, it is nevertheless safe to assume that it played its part in the grand
drama that shook the world in “the days that tried men’s souls.
A specimen of the violet spotted salamander (Amblystoma punc-
tatum) was shown, in which the tail was bifurcated, each branch being
about half an inch in length. It was captured by Mr. John Tynan in
the Snug Harbor woods, and presented to the Association.
SCIENTIFIC NEWS.
The next meeting of the British Association will be held at Leeds,
in week commencing September 3d, under the Presidency of Sir
Frederick Augustus Abel, C.B., D.C.L,, DSc. FERS; V.E-CS.
The general Committee will meet on Wednesday, the 3d of Sep-
tember, at 1 P.M., for the election of sectional officers, and the des-
patch of business usually brought before that body. On this occasion
there will be presented the report of the Council, embodying their
proceedings during the past year. The General Committee will meet
again on Monday, September 8, at 3 P.M., for the purpose of appoint-
officers for 1891, and of deciding on the place of meeting in 1892.
The concluding meeting of this Committee will be held on Wednes-
day, September 1o, at 1 P.M., when the report of the Committee of
Recommendations will be received.
The first general meeting will be held on Wednesday, the 3d of
September, at 8 P.M., when the President will deliver an address; the
concluding meeting on Wednesday, the roth of September, at 2.30
P.M., when the Association will be adjourned to its next place of
meeting.
At two evening meetings, which will take at 8. 30 P.M., discourses on
certain branches of science will be delivered,
There will also be other evening meetings, at which opportunity will
be afforded for general conversation among the members.
SECTIONAL MEETINGS.—The sections are: A, Mathematical and
Physical Science; B, Chemical Science; C, Geology; D, Biology ;
E, Geography; F, Economic Science and Statistics; G, Mechanical
Science ; H, Anthropology.
e
NATURALIST
P A MONTHLY JOURNAL
Be DEVOTED TO THE NATURAL SCIENCES a
E. IN THEIR WIDEST SENSE. K
JANUARY, 1890. No.
CONTENIS.
PAGE
Zoğ My — Position of Palawan—
Ww aber Aen t | Bahaman Sea e Sipäónopkora the
INSTANCES OF THE EFFECTS OF anpa SOUNDS Mesenteries in the Antipatharia—The Eyes of Limu- -
t E. C. Stearns, 22 | lus—Note on the Feeding Habits of Cermatia forceps
THE HISTORY OF > GARDEN vise Raf.—The Scottish Fishing luber o!
E. L. Sturtevant, 30 i
,DITORIAL, . . ene
RECENT LITERATURE.
De Toni's Syllogs. Toe e eae of Vertebrata—F.
Switzerland. Se ge Embryology.—~
RECENT ro AND PAMPHLETS,........- 54 | edity and Variation a
ae PHILADELPHIA: o
RRIS BROS., PUBLISHERS
AN
NATURALIST
A MONTHLY JOURNAL
DEVOTED TO THE NATURAL SCIENCES
IN THEIR WIDEST SENSE.
FEBRUARY, 1890.
CON TENS:
PAGE
REMARKS ON THE BRAIN OF THE SEALS,
. C. Spitska, 115
STANCES O EFFECTS OF MUSICAL SOUNDS
rt
123
nas IN THE CRAB. " [Illustrate
j E. A. Andrews,
History oF GARDEN VEGETAB
E.
AMERICAN
NATURALIS
A MONTHLY JOURNAL
DEVOTED TO THE NATURAL SCIENCES
IN THEIR WIDEST SENSE.
MARCH, 1890.
CONTENTS,
ON CERTAIN PECULIARITIES IN THE FLORA OF tion — Europe: Cyprus; The Caveats
' THE SANTA BARBARA Is Regions— Miscellaneous, . .
By f
ven PO S ae and Paleontology. —Seeley's R R
‘THE TEETH AS EVIDENCE OF EvoLUTIO
|
i
j
i
, aa ‘Cahail, 224 |
_ INSTANCES OF THE EFFECT OF MUSICAL SOUNDS
IM. sr RE. C. STen 236
7 The Babreis falsh ens The Preje
$4.00 per Year. ee, ae
AMERICAN
- NATURALIST
DEVOTED TO THE NATURAL SCIENCES
IN THEIR WIDEST SENSE.
Vol. XXIV. APRIL, 1890.
CONTENTS.
PAGE
ON THE BRECCIATED CHARACTER OF THE ST. Zodlogy.—A Mew Actinian—Entozoa of Marine
Louis LIMESTONE [Illus eae . C. H. Gordon, 305 | Fishes—A Two-Tailed Earth-Worm—Tortoises |
HISTORY OF GARDEN VEGETABLES, in the Markets of Philadelphia—Zodlogical
E. L. Sturtevant, 313 | Vermes—Arthropods—Fishes—Birds—
nae OF THE TAXODIUM DISTICHUM Basay “Pax Paani of the Hedgehog
y lustrated], Robert H. Lamborn, 333 | and the PRATA = the —— Se
OM BRUTE TO MAN dae a: Caaries pres 341 Physiology
RECORD OF AMERICAN ZodLOGy, Bay Se eet PERA 351 Electrical Phenomena i in Beaton H Heart—Relation ion of
__EDITORIAL.—Original Research in the United States— Nerv e
2 The Biological nar Sige of Zo- gee ae eee of Whistling on S
; SoA National Zoölogical Garde oe oe ae E
Mineralgy and | Petregrapho ip rn cg: News TETEA OF Siena 2 ‘
= ne rss Fe ee ae SCIENTIFIC NEWs.—Notes on the ah
eee acai on Botanical Termin- Laboratory of the United States Geolo oe
ology—Hackel's : Revision of the Andropogonea— “ander “Professor OC] ee
Sarhs’ s History of a, eae ae ae of Dr. Parry, 369 ean Spiders, eS
= ae PHILADELPHIA:
FERRIS EROS. PUBLISHERS
SIXTH AND ARCH STREETS
ia Post-Ofice as second-class matter.
$4.00 per Year.
40 cts. per Copy.
| THE
- AMERICAN
NATURALIST
A MONTHLY JOURNAL
DEVOTED TO THE NATURAL SCIENCES
IN THEIR WIDEST SENSE.
Vol. XXIV.
MAY, 1890.
No. 281 _ -
CONTENTS. =
PAGE
Ally HOMOLOGIES OF THE FINS OF FISHES,
E. D. Cope,
A ZOOLOGICAL RECONNOISSANCE IN GRAND MA
: J. Walter prone 423
ean OF AMERICAN ZOOLOGY, . . J. S. Kingsley, 439
EROSIVE AGENTS IN THE ARID REGIONS,
Rath S. Tarr, 455
S
—The rag ts mmg of the American Asso-
-cation for the Sciences a e 2 660
OTES.
and Travels .—Col. Stanton’s Recent
o
p —
S
EE Rincon amigo of paran by Green
ellow
ine
Water p aia of Penk Plants—The Char-
ee ee Se ee ee ae AA d
Podocnemididz—Note on the Genera H is and
Rhinemys—The Genera of the ee i
cal News: ERE. Gra ropods, i
ia 7
Emèry Ce Og Y
eS aA U ea
of the Scales and o Actinotrichia ed Teleosts,
AAs ren ©. Ay
icroscopy. p
tation of Protoplasmic Moveme EE ATE
Archeology and Ethnolo, The Use of the Phono-
graph e Study of of the American
Indians, fa a, . » ge
PROCEEDINGS OF Resins Sccoennes, te
Scien tiric NEWS eee ee ee
PHILADELPHIA:
FERRIS BROS.,
SIXTH AND ARCH STREETS
PUBLISHERS
- $4.00 per Year.
THE
~ AMERICAN
2
A MONTHLY JOURNAL
DEVOTED TO THE NATURAL SCIENCES
IN THEIR WIDEST SENSE.
Vol. XXIV. JUNE, 1890. No. 282
2
4 PAGE
‘Tue CONCRESCENCE THEORY OF THE VERTE-
BRATE EMBRYO nee
arles-Sedgwick Minot,
muk PERSISTENCE OF AND AL LIFE
PLANT ANIM
Soie CHANGING CONDITIONS OF ENVIRON-
Fe
CONTENTS. i
Sor}
rri 37 fel, 3 leira
“Tha
at Martha’ s Vineyard Tae A Age of the tame Prof.
Marsh on lopus and other Dinosaurs—Extinct
Quadru
Mineralogy and Petrography.—Mine ests ogi ical
News—New Minerals,
Ce ok gies Siler Woe eee ec E ae i eS cee T i
Botany.—Some Reasons for Varieties Not Soon
= orge Baur, 530 ma Out—The Causes of Cypress Knees,. . . . 577
ee OF AMERICAN ZOOLOGY, J. s Kingsley, 537 | oology.—Phymo: sais of the Aen
SDITORS’ TABLE | Eea Te 0: of Bojanns in the Unio-
The Proposed Nations! University at Washington— | nidæ— The Dorsal ae: of Nudibranchs—Zoologi-
. Next Meeting of the International Geological | cal News: General—Worms—Arthropoda—Celom
a ae es Concerning Zoological s rapa | and ER in a es—Mam-
i the Paris Congress of Zoologists tree i
sang pees _—— to >r Collection of the ee | P -Prak Wrin Gok te Transmission
logical Society eae ag Ar ee -3 ok sh Epilepsy or ee ae
Boo LETS, nae ee
eae aa zA | Archeology and Ethnology.—Classification of EAR oe
| rows or Spearh r Knives in the National Mu-
pee Cotte i in E Miaa: Lévy's Struct- | s New Archseological o hæolopi a
et Classification des Roches Eruptives; Thomas's kar Archzeological ?— H Animal Remains, . 589
M a: a Bibliographies, s, -554 | ; T
| PROCEEDINGS OF SCIENTIFIC SOCIETIES, . . . > . 595
bse E othe Genesis of the | SCIENTIFIC NEWS... ..- SS ate a - 598
PHILADELPHIA:
jja Post-Office as second-class matter.
“Pernt BROS. PUBLISHERS
SIATH AND ARCH STREETS